Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time to the hour, half hour, using analog and digital clocks. The Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Tell Time helps students for solving assignments and also for preparing for exams. In this chapter each and every question was explained in a simple way by which students can understand easily. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell-Time explains each question in a unique and simple way by that students can easily understand the solution.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Tell Time

This Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Tell Time has solutions that can be understood by anyone. Students, teachers can feel comfortable with this BIM Grade 1 Answer Key Chapter 12 Tell Time as every question was solved in a simple way. By that students will not face any difficulty in understanding the solution. Click the below links and start your preparation. Test yourself by solving the problems given at the end of the chapter.

Lesson: 1 Tell Time to the Hour

Lesson: 2 Tell Time to the Half Hour

Lesson: 3 Tell Time to the Hour and Half Hour

Lesson: 4 Tell Time Using Analog and Digital Clocks

Performance Task

Tell Time Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
above
below
next to

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-Vocabulary

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to identify the word.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 2
Answer:
3 o’ clock
Explanation:
The hour hand, the shorter of the two hands, completes 1 rotation ( 360° )  in 12 hours in a normal 12-hour analogue. The minute hand, the longer hand, completes 1 rotation through 360° in 60 minutes.
As the hour hand is pointing 3 and minutes hand is at 12 means 00 minutes
Thus the time is 3 ‘ 0 clock .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 3
Answer:
Digital clock showing time 3’o clock
Explanation:
In digital clock the time is represented with 4 numbers and two numbers are seperated with a colon in the middle.
the first two numbers indicates the hour and the other two numbers after the colon indicates the minutes. 00 minutes is indicated as 0 ‘ clock.
As the hour is showing 3 so the time is 3 ‘ 0 clock .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 4
Answer:
Hour hand
Explanation:
The red hand in the above clock is shorter hand called as a hour hand. It indicates the hour. It is between 3 and 4 so the time is half past 3′ o clock

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 5
Answer:
longer hand – Minutes hand
Explanation:
The blue hand in the above watch indicates the minute hand. it is showing 6 in the watch means 30 minutes.

Lesson 12.1 Tell Time to the Hour

Explore and Grow

Write the missing numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Clocks are used to measure time. A clock in general has 12 numbers written on it, from 1 to 12, an hour hand, and a minute hand.

Show and Grow

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 7
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
3 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 3 in the above clock. so the time is 3 o ‘ clock

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 8
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
7 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 7 in the above clock so the time is 7 o ‘ clock

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 9
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
1 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 1 in the above clock so the time is 1 o ‘ clock

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 10
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
9 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 9 in the above clock. so the time is 9 o ‘ clock

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 11
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
6 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 6 in the above clock. so the time is 6 o ‘ clock

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 12
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
11 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 11 in the above clock. so the time is 11 o ‘ clock

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 13
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
8 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 8 in the above clock. so the time is 8 o ‘ clock

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 14
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
12 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 12 in the above clock. so the time is 12 o ‘ clock

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 15
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
4 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 4 in the above clock. so the time is 4 o ‘ clock

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 10.
5 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 5 in the above clock. so the time is 5 o ‘ clock

Question 11.
10 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11
Explanation:
To represent 10 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 10 .

Question 12.
2 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12
Explanation:
To represent 2 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 2 .

Question 13.
MP Precision
You wake up at 7 o’clock. Which clock shows the time you wake up?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 19
Answer:
I waked at 7 o’clock. the correct figure is second figure .
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 7 in the second clock. so the time is 7 o ‘ clock

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You eat dinner I hour later than your friend. Show and write the time you eat dinner.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 20
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 21

__________ o’ clock
Answer:
My friend had dinner at 5 o’ clock
I had my dinner at= 5 o’ clock + 1 hour = 6 o’ clock
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Explanation:
I had my dinner at one hour later than my friend = 5 o’ clock + 1 hour = 6 o’ clock
To represent 6 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 6.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
Math class starts 1 hour earlier than science class. Show and write the time math class starts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 22
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 23

__________ o’ clock
Answer:
Time of science class =10 o’ clock
Time of Math class = 10 o’ clock – 1 hour = 9 o’ clock
Explanation:
Math class starts 1 hour earlier than science class that means one hour before 10 o’ clock.
One hour before 10 o’ clock is 9 o’clock.
To represent 9 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 9.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.1-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Show-Grow-Question-14

Tell Time to the Hour Practice 12.1 Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 24
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
10 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 10 in the above clock. so the time is 10 o ‘ clock

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 25
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
5 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 5 in the above clock. so the time is 5 o ‘ clock

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 26
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
1 o ‘ clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 1 in the above clock. so the time is 1 o ‘ clock

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 4.
4 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-4
Explanation:
To represent 4 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 4.

Question 5.
12 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-5
Explanation:
To represent 12 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 12.

Question 6.
8 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 29
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-6
Explanation:
To represent 8 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 8.

Question 7.
MP Precision
You eat a snack at 2 o’clock. Which clock shows the time you eat a snack?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 30
Answer:
The time we eat snacks is at 2 o’clock. which is the first orange clock showing the time 2 .
Explanation:
To represent 2 o’ clock the short hand – hour hand should point to 2.only in the first orange clock the hour hand is pointing to 2 o’clock.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend gets on the bus I hour later than you. Show and write the time your friend gets on the bus.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 31
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 32

__________ o’ clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-8
Time when i get into the bus is at 7 o’clock.
My friend get into bus 1 hour later than me = 7 o’clock + 1 hour  = 8 o’clock
Explanation:
My friend get into bus 1 hour later than me.one hour later than 7 o’ clock.
One hour after 7 o’ clock is 8 o’clock.
To represent 8 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 8.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
6 – ? = 4
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 33
6 – _________ = 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-9
2 + 4 = 6
Explanation:
As per the above figure we observe that there are two sections in one section we contain 2 circles and in other sections we have 4 circles .
Total number of circles in all = 6 = 2 + 4 .
from there we get 6 – 2 = 4 .

Question 10.
8 – ? = 4
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 34
8 – _________ = 3
Answer:
8 – 5 = 3
8 = 3 + 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Practice-12.1-Write-the-time-shown-by-the- hour-hand-Question-10
Explanation:
To get 8 we need to add 3 to 5
so 8 – 5 = 3

Lesson 12.2 Tell Time to the Half Hour

Explore and Grow

Draw the hour hand and tell the time.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 35
The hour hand points to the 3.
It is __________ o’clock.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 3.
It is 3 o’clock.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 36
The hour hand points between the 3 and the 4.
It is half past ___________ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Explore-Grow-2
Explanation:
The hour hand points between the 3 and the 4.
It is half past 3 . so Time is 3 : 30
Show and Grow

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 37
half past __________
Answer:
half past 10 o’ clock
Time is 10:30
Explanation:
Half-past ten is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 10:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 10 and 11.
so the Time is 10:30.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 38
half past __________
Answer:
half past 8 o’ clock
Time is 8:30
Explanation:
Half-past 8 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 8:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 8 and 9.
so the Time is 8:30.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 39
half past __________
Answer:
half past 5 o’ clock
Time is 5:30
Explanation:
Half-past 5 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 5:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 5 and 6.
so the Time is 5:30.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 40
half past __________
Answer:
half past 3 o’ clock
Time is 3:30
Explanation:
Half-past 3 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 3:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 3 and 4.
so the Time is 3:30.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 41
half past __________
Answer:
half past 12 o’ clock
Time is 12:30
Explanation:
Half-past 12 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 12:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 12 and 1.
so the Time is 12:30.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 42
half past __________
Answer:
half past 2 o’ clock
Time is 2:30
Explanation:
Half-past 2 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 2:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 2 and 3.
so the Time is 2:30.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 43
half past __________
Answer:
half past 7 o’ clock
Time is 7:30
Explanation:
Half-past 7 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 7:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 7 and 8.
so the Time is 7:30.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 44
half past __________
Answer:
half past 4 o’ clock
Time is 4:30
Explanation:
Half-past 4 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 4:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 4 and 5.
so the Time is 4:30.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 45
half past __________
Answer:
half past 5 o’ clock
Time is 5:30
Explanation:
Half-past 5 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 5:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points in between 5 and 6.
so the Time is 5:30.

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 10.
half past 6
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 46
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
To indicate half past 6 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 6 and 7 .
Half-past 6 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 6:00.
so the Time is 6:30.

Question 11.
1 o’clock
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 47
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11
Explanation:
To indicate half past 1 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 1 and 2 .
Half-past 1 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 1:00.
so the Time is 1:30.

Question 12.
half past 9
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 48
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12
Explanation:
To indicate half past 9 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 9 and 10 .
Half-past 9 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 9:00.
so the Time is 9:30.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Is it time for lunch or recess?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 49
Answer:
Lunch time – half past 11
Explanation:
The short hand or hour hand in between 11 and 12 . so the time is half past 11.
So the time is 11 : 30

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Soccer practice lasts a half hour. Show and circle the time practice ends.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 50
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 51
half past 3      5 o’ clock       half past 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
The Time when soccer match started is  half past 4 that is 4 : 30 as per the above figure.
match lasts only half hour that is 30 minutes
So match ends at 4:30 + 30 minutes = 5 o’ clock
the time practice ends =5 o’ clock.
Explanation:
To represent 5 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 5 .

Show and Grow

Question 14.
A television show lasts a half hour. Show and circle the time the show ends.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 52
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 53
7 o’clock         half past 7        6 o’clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Lesson-12.2-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Show-Grow-Question-14
The Time when Television show started is  half past 6 that is 6 : 30 as per the above figure.
Television show lasts only half hour that is 30 minutes
So show ends at 6:30 + 30 minutes = 7 o’ clock
the time practice ends =7 o’ clock.
Explanation:
To represent 7 o’ clock we need to point short hand – hour hand to 7 .

Tell Time to the Half Hour Practice 12.2

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 54
half past _____________
Answer:
half past 1 o’ clock
Time is 1:30
Explanation:
Half-past 1 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 1:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points is in between 1 and 2.
so the Time is 1:30.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 55
half past _____________
Answer:
half past 5 o’ clock
Time is 5:30
Explanation:
Half-past 5 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 5:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points is in between 5 and 6.
so the Time is 6:30.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 56
half past _____________
Answer:
half past 12 o’ clock
Time is 12:30
Explanation:
Half-past 12 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 12:00.
Here the short hand or hour hand points is in between 12 and 1.
so the Time is 12:30.

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 4.
half past 9
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 57
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-4
Explanation:
To indicate half past 9 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 9 and 10 .
Half-past 9 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 9:00.
so the Time is 9:30.

Question 5.
half past 2
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 58
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-5
Explanation:
To indicate half past 2 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 2 and 3 .
Half-past 2 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 2:00.
so the Time is 2:30.

Question 6.
10 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 59
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-6
Explanation:
To indicate half past 10 we need to point short hand or hour hand in between 10 and 11 .
Half-past 10 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 10:00.
so the Time is 10:30.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Is it time for art class or math class?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 60
Answer:
Art class half past 9
Explanation:
The short hand or hour hand in between 9 and 10 . so the time is half past 9.
So the time is 9 : 30 . It is art class at half past 9 .

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Your music class lasts a half hour. Show and circle the time your music class ends.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 61
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 62
half past 12            half past 1          2 o’clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-8
The Time when Music class started is at 1 o’clock as per the above figure.
Music class lasts only half hour that is 30 minutes
So Music class ends at 1:00 + 30 minutes = 1 : 30
the time practice ends = 1 : 30.
Explanation:
To represent half past 1 or 1:30 we need to point short hand – hour hand in between 1 and  2 .

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Your friend has 9 peanuts. You have 2 fewer than your friend. How many peanuts do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 63
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 64
___________ ○ ___________ = ___________ peanuts
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Time-Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Practice-12.2-Question-9
Explanation:
Number of peanuts with my friend = 9
Number of peanuts with me are 2 fewer than my friend means two less peanuts than my friend
So, Number of peanuts with me = 9 – 2 = 7 peanuts.

Lesson 12.3 Tell Time to the Hour and Half Hour

Explore and Grow

Complete the sentences.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 65
The hour hand points to the __________ .
The minute hand points to the __________ .
It is __________ o’clock.
Answer:
The hour hand points to the 2 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 2 o’clock.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 66
The hour hand points halfway between the __________ and the __________ .
The minute hand points to the __________ .
It is half past __________ .
Answer:
The hour hand points halfway between the 2 and the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 6.
It is half past 2 .
The time is 2 : 30

Show and Grow

Write the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 67
__________
Answer:
7 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 7 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 7 o’clock.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 68
__________
Answer:
2 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 2 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 2 o’clock.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 69
__________
Answer:
half past 9
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 9 and the 10 .
The minute hand points to the 6 means 30 minutes
It is half past 9 .
The time is 9 : 30

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 70
__________
Answer:
8 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 8 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 8 o’clock.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 71
__________
Answer:
half past 12
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 12 and the 1 .
The minute hand points to the 6 . it means 30minutes
It is half past 12 .
The time is 12 : 30

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 72
__________
Answer:
The hour hand points halfway between the 1 and the 2 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 1 .
The time is 1 : 30

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw to show the time.

Question 7.
half past 5
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 73
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Question-7
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 5 and the 6 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 5 .
The time is 5 : 30

Question 8.
6 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 74
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8
6 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 6 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 6 o’clock.

Question 9.
half past 10
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 75
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-9
It is half past 10
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 10 and the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 10 .
The time is 10 : 30

Question 10.
3 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 76
Answer:
3 o’clock
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 3 o’clock.

Question 11.
11 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 77
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 11 o’clock.

Question 12.
half past 4
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 78
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12

Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4 .
The time is 4 : 30

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton shows half past 6. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 79
Answer:
No
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-13
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 6 and the 7 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 6 .
The time is 6 : 30

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You spend an hour at the park. Show and write the time you leave.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 80
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 81

____________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
I arrive at park = 11 : 00
I spend one hour in park
Time I leave from park = 11 : 00 + 1 hour = 12:00
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 12 o’clock.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You spend a half hour on your homework. Show and write the time you finish.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 82
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 83

____________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.3-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Show-Grow-Question-14
I started my home work at 3 : 00
Time spend on home work = half and hour = 30 minutes.
Time to finish home work = 3:00 + 30 minutes = 3 : 30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 3 and the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 3 .
The time is 3 : 30

Tell Time to the Hour and Half Hour Practice 12.3

Write the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 84
____________
Answer:
Time is 11:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 11 and the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 11 .
The time is 11 : 30

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 85
____________
Answer:
Time is 3 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 3 o’clock.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 86
____________
Answer:
Time is 1 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 1 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 1 o’clock.

Draw to show the time.

Question 4.
5 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 87
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-4
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 5 o’clock.

Question 5.
half past 7
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 88
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-5
Time is 7:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 7 and the 8 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 7 .
The time is 7 : 30

Question 6.
half past 2
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 93
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-6
Time is 2:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 2 and the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 2 .
The time is 2 : 30

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes shows 12 o’clock. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 89
Answer:
Yes
Time is 12 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 12 o’clock.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You play tag for an hour. Show and write the time you stop playing tag.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 90
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 91

________________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-8
The Time I started playing tag = 9 : 00
Duration of play tag = 1 hour.
The Time I stopped playing tag = 9:00 + 1 hour = 10: 00
Time is 10 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .
It is 12 o’clock.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Circle the cube. Draw a rectangle around the sphere.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 92
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-Half-Hour-Practice-12.3-Question-9
Explanation:
Cube – A solid body having six equal square sides.
Sphere – A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices .

Lesson 12.4 Tell Time Using Analog and Digital Clocks

Explore and Grow

Show the time on the analog clock. What is the same about the clocks? What is different?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 94
The time is __________ o’clock.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Explore-Grow-1
Explanation:
Time is 4 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 95
The time is half past _________ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Explore-Grow-2

Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4 .
The time is 4 : 30

Show and Grow

Show the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 96
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
Time is 9 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 9 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 97
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 7 and the 8 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 7 .
The time is 7 : 30

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 98
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation:
Time is 12 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 99
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 2 and the 3 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 2 .
The time is 2 : 30

Apply and Grow: Practice

Show the time.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 100
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Time is 2 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 2 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 101
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 11 and the 12 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 11 .
The time is 11 : 30

Draw to show the time.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 102
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 8 and the 9 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 8 .
The time is 8 : 30

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 103
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8
Explanation:
Time is 4 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

DIG DEEPER!
Complete the clocks to show the same time.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 104
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-DIG-DEEPER-Question-9
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the hour hand is between 9 and 10 .
In digital clock we notice 30 minutes:
From the above two given statements we can conclude the time is 9 : 30.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 105
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-DIG-DEEPER-Question-10
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the Minutes hand is at 12.
In digital clock we notice hour as 1 o’clock
From the above two given statements we can conclude the time is 1:00.

Question 11.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which time does not belong with the other three? Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 106
Answer:
Figure 1 , 2 and 4 describes half past 3 time whereas figure 3 describes half past 4 time .
Figure 3 is different from other 3 figures.
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 3 and the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 3 .
The time is 3 : 30

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A play starts 1 hour later than a movie. Show and circle the time the play starts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 107
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 108
half past 2           half past 4               3 o’clock            4 o’clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Time when Movie started = 3:30
Time when play starts is one hour later than movie
Time when play starts = 3:30 + 1 hour = 4:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4 .
The time is 4:30

Show and Grow

Question 12.
Tumbling starts a half hour later than dance. Show and circle the time tumbling starts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 109
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 110
half past 5            4 o’clock               6 o’clock                half past 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Lesson-12.4-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Show-Grow-Question-12
Time when dance started = 5:00
Tumbling starts a half hour later than dance
Time when tumbling starts = 5:00 + 0:30 minutes = 5:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 5 and the 6 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 5 .
The time is 5:30

Tell Time Using Analog and Digital Clocks Practice 12.4

Show the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 111
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-1
Explanation:
Time is 7 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 7 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 112
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-2
Explanation:
Time is 4 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 113
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-3
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 10 and the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 10 .
The time is 10:30

Draw to show the time.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 114
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-4
Explanation:
As per the digital clock the time is 12:30 . The same time is represented in analog clock
The hour hand points halfway between the 12 and the 1 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 12 .
The time is 12:30

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 115
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-5
Explanation:
As per the digital clock the time is 11:00 . The same time is represented in analog clock
Time is 11 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 116
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-6
Explanation:
As per the digital clock the time is 4:30 . The same time is represented in analog clock
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4 .
The time is 4:30

Question 7.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which time does not belong with the other three? Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 117
Answer:
The figure does not belong to the 3 figures as it shows time as 7:30 and all other 3 figures shows time as 6:30 or half past 6
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 6 and the 7 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 6 .
The time is 6:30

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Bowling starts I hour later than ice skating. Show and circle the time bowling starts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 118
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 119
half past 5            5 o’clock            half past 4               3 o’ clock
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-8
Time when Ice skating starts = 4:00
Bowling starts I hour later than ice skating
Time when bowling starts = 4:00 + 1:00 = 5:00
Explanation:
Time is 5 o’clock
The hour hand points to the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 12

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Circle the cone. Draw a rectangle around the cylinder.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 120
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-Using-Analog-Digital-Clocks-Practice-12.4-Question-9
Explanation:
Cone-A cone is a shape formed by using a set of line segments or the lines which connects a common point, called the apex or vertex, to all the points of a circular base.
Cylinder-A cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Tell Time Performance Task

Question 1.
Your class is on a field trip to a nature center.
Complete the schedule.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 121

Field Trip Schedule
Activity Time
Arrive 9:00
The Wildlife Walk 9:30
Scavenger Hunt 10 : 30
Pond study 11:30
Lunch 12:00
Recess 12:30
Live Animal Show 1:00
Leave 2: 00

a. The Pond Study starts at the time shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 122
Answer: 11:30

b. The Wildlife Walk starts at half past 9
Answer:
9:30

c. The Scavenger Hunt starts 1 hour after the Wildlife Walk starts.
Answer: 10 :30

d. Recess starts a half hour after lunch.
Answer: 12:30

e. You leave 1 hour before 3:00.
Answer: 2:00

Question 2.
Lunch lasts a half hour. Write the time that lunch ends.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 123
Answer: 12:30
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Performance-Task-Question-2

Question 3.
Draw the time the Live Animal Show starts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 124
Answer: 1:00
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Performance-Task-Question-3

Tell Time Chapter Practice

Tell Time to the Hour Homework & Practice 12.1

Write the time shown by the hour hand.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 125
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
1 o’clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 1 in the above clock. so the time is 1 o ‘ clock

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 126
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
11 o’clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 11 in the above clock. so the time is 11 o ‘ clock

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 127
__________ o’ clock
Answer:
8 o’clock
Explanation:
As the hour hand is pointing 8 in the above clock. so the time is 8 o ‘ clock

Tell Time to the Half Hour Homework & Practice 12.2

Draw the hour hand to show the time.

Question 4.
half past 9
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 128
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Homework-&-Practice-12.2-Question-4
Explanation:
To represent half past 9 we need to point short hand or hour hand in halfway between 9 and 10 .
Half-past 6 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 9:00.
so the Time is 9:30.

Question 5.
2 o’ clock
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 129
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Homework-&-Practice-12.2-Question-5
Explanation:
As the hour hand or short hand is pointing 2 in the above clock. so the time is 2 o ‘ clock

Question 6.
half past 5
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 130
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell- Tell-Time-to-the-Half-Hour-Homework-&-Practice-12.2-Question-6
Explanation:
To represent half past 5 we need to point short hand or hour hand in halfway between 5 and 6 .
Half-past 6 is a short way of saying it’s half an hour (30 minutes) after 5:00.
so the Time is 5:30.

Question 7.
MP Precision
Is it time to brush your teeth or go to bed?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 131
Answer:
Brush teeth : half past 7
Explanation:
As per the above clock it shows the short hand or hour hand is halfway pointing between 7 and 8. It is half past 7
so the Time is 7:30.

Tell Time to the Hour and Half Hour Homework & Practice 12.3

Write the time.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 132
__________
Answer:
Time is 6 o’clock
Explanation:
The hour hand points to the 6 .
The minute hand points to the 12 .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 133
__________
Answer:
The time is 10:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 10 and the 11 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 10

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 134
__________
Answer:
The time is 3:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 3 and the 4 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 3

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You read for a half hour. Show and write the time you stop reading.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 135
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 136
___________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-to-the-Hour-and-Half-Hour-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-11
Time when i started reading = 4:00
You read for a half hour
Time when i stopped reading = 4:00 + 0:30 = 4:30
Explanation:
The hour hand points halfway between the 4 and the 5 .
The minute hand points to the 6 it means 30 minutes
It is half past 4

Tell Time Using Analog and Digital Clocks Homework & Practice 12.4

Complete the clocks to show the same time.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 137
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-and-Digital-Clocks-Homework-Practice-12.4-Question-12
Time is 1:30
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the hour hand is between 1 and 2 .
In digital clock we notice 30 minutes:
From the above two given statements we can conclude the time is 1:30.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 138
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-and-Digital-Clocks-Homework-Practice-12.4-Question-13
Time is 9:00
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the hour hand is pointing 9
In digital clock we notice 00 minutes:
From the above two given statements we can conclude the time is 9:00.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time 139
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Tell-Tell-Time-Using-Analog-and-Digital-Clocks-Homework-Practice-12.4-Question-14
Time is 12:30
Explanation:
From the given figure in Analog clock we notice the minutes hand is pointing 6
In digital clock we notice hour as 12
From the above two given statements, we can conclude the time is 12:30

Conclusion:

The Answer Key for Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time is helpful for you. Students who are lagging in maths can overcome their difficulties by practicing the problems from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time. Bookmark our site to get the latest updates regarding the BIM Grade 1 Chapter 12 Tell Time Solution Key.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Percents is on the line to help students who are willing to be perfect in their Math skills and also to the parents guiding their children to have a best score in examinations. This chapter Percent have conceptualized lessons on Discounts , Simple interest , all along with the subject knowledge, which will also be useful to check whether their Practical skills are intact . Get started to stop those hurdling times to studying hard to grasping the solutions by learning these methods of solving modern math problem in an effective way from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Percents

Students who are facing difficulties in solving Math problems can at ease now! Big ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer key  Chapter 6 percents  gives the most accurate answers to all the questions you have related to this chapter . It contains different methods of solving each question in a easy way to perform in their exams .This chapter deals with percents , decimals and fractions , It also helps the students to have the real life calculation to go very smooth and neat defining their quick responses to daily life tasks .

STEAM Video/Performance Task

Getting Ready for Chapter 6

Lesson 1 : Fractions, Decimals, and Percents

Lesson 2 : The Percent Proportion

Lesson 3 : The Percent Equation

Lesson 4 : Percents of Increase and Decrease

Lesson 5 : Discounts and Markups

Lesson 6 : Simple Interest

Percents Connecting Concepts

STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Tornado!
More tornadoes occur each year in the United States than in any other country. How can you use a percent to describe the portion of tornadoes in the United States that occur in your state?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 1
Watch the STEAM Video “Tornado!” Then answer the following questions.
1. The map below shows the average annual number of tornadoes in each state. Which regions have the most tornadoes? the fewest tornadoes?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 2
2. Robert says that only Alaska, Hawaii, and Rhode Island average less than 1 tornado per year. What percent of states average more than 1 tornado per year?

Performance Task

Tornado Alley
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given information about the average annual numbers of tornadoes in several states over a 25-year period. For example:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 3
You will be asked to solve various percent problems about tornadoes. Why is it helpful to know the percent of tornadoes that occur in each state?

Getting Ready for Chapter 6

Chapter Exploration
Work with a partner. Write the percent of the model that is shaded. Then write the percent as a decimal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 4

Answer : The Percent and decimal for the given models are
1. percent = 30%, decimal = 0.3
2. percent = 100%, decimal = 1
3. percent = 33%, decimal = 0.33
4. percent = 50%, decimal = 0.5
5. percent = 40%, decimal = 0.4
6. percent = 64%, decimal = 0.64
7. percent = 60%, decimal = 0.6

Explanation:
All the models given here are 10 by 10 grid forming a Square of 100 equal sections.
This entire square represents a whole and the shaded part is fraction.
Each of these shaded squares represents 1/100. So by using this data we have ,
1.    =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{30}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{30}{100}\) = 30%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.3

2.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{100}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{100}{100}\) = 100%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 1

3.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{33}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{33}{100}\) = 33%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.33

4.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{50}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{50}{100}\) = 50%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.5

5.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{40}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{40}{100}\) = 40%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.4

6.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{64}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{64}{100}\) = 64%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.64

7.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{60}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{60}{100}\) = 60%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.6

8. WRITE A PROCEDURE Work with a partner. Write a procedure for rewriting a percent as a decimal. Use examples to justify your procedure.

Answer:
Let us say that the fraction be \(\frac{44}{100}\),
Then its percentage will be 44%,
To rewrite it as decimal, we divide 44 by 100 we get 0.44 (a decimal number). So, to convert from percent to decimal divide by 100 and remove the “%” sign.
We get 0.44 as decimal of 44%.

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
percent of change
percent of decrease
discount
percent of increase
percent error
markup

Answer:
percent of change:
Percentage Change is all about comparing old values to new values.

percent of decrease:
percent of decrease is a measure of percent change, which is the extent to which something loses value. or
A negative percent of change indicates a decrease from the original value to the second value.

discount: A reduction of price  is known as discount .Sometimes discounts are in percent, such as a 10% discount, and then you need to do a calculation to find the price reduction.

percent of increase :
Percent increase is a measure of percent change, which is the extent to which something gains value. or
A positive percent of change indicates an increase from the original value to the second value.

percent error :
Percent error is the difference between estimated value and the actual value in comparison to the actual value and is expressed as a percentage.

markup:
Markup is all about how much a retailer increases the price over what they paid for it to buy the product or item in order to which is how they make money to pay for all their costs and hopefully make a profit.

Lesson 6.1 Fractions, Decimals, and Percents

EXPLORATION 1

Comparing Numbers in Different Forms
Work with a partner. Determine which number is greater. Explain your method.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 1
Answer:
a. 7% sales tax is greater than 5% sales tax
b. 0.37 cup of flour is greater than 0.33 cup of flour
c. 0.625 inch wrench is greater than 0.375 inch wrench
d. 12.6 dollars are greater than 12.56 dollars
e. 5.83 fluid ounces is greater than 5.6 fluid ounces

Explanation:
a. 7% sales tax or \(\frac{1}{20}\) sales tax
By using the method of converting fraction into Percent and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{1}{20}\) as  0.05 in decimal form,
To get get the percent , multiply 100 to 0.05, then we get 5%.
So, \(\frac{1}{20}\) can be write as 5%,
Finally, by comparing two values 7% sales tax is greater than 5% sales tax

b. 0.37 cup of flour or \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup for flour
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{1}{3}\) as  0.33 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 0.37 cup of flour is greater than 0.33 cup of flour.

c. \(\frac{5}{8}\) inch wrench or 0.375 inch wrench
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{8}\) by dividing 5 by 8, we have  0.625 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 0.625 inch wrench is greater than 0.375 inch wrench.

d. \(12\) \({\Large\frac{3}{5}}\) dollars or 12.56 dollars
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite fraction\(\frac{63}{5}\) by dividing 63 by 5, we have 12.6 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 12.6 dollars are greater than 12.56 dollars

e.  \(5\) \({\Large\frac{5}{6}}\) fluid ounces or 5.6 fluid ounces
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite fraction \(\frac{35}{6}\)  by dividing 35 by 6, we have 5.83 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 5.83 fluid ounces is greater than 5.6 fluid ounces

 

EXPLORATION 2

Work with a partner and follow the steps below.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 2

  • Write five different numbers on individual slips of paper. Include at least one decimal, one fraction, and one percent.
  • On a separate sheet of paper, create an answer key that shows your numbers written from least to greatest.
  • Exchange slips of paper with another group and race to order the numbers from least to greatest. Then exchange answer keys to check your orders.

Answer: 78%, 0.95, \(\frac{83}{45}\), 6, 21

Explanation:
Let the numbers be 6,  21, 0.95, \(\frac{83}{45}\), 78%
In order to put them in an ascending order we have to calculate the fraction, percent, decimal in their respective form, So Fraction \(\frac{83}{45}\) can be rewrite as 1.84 in decimal form
Then 78% can be rewrite as 0.78 in decimal form,
As we can see 0.78 is less than 0.95 , 0.95 is less than \(\frac{83}{45}\),\(\frac{83}{45}\) is less than 6, 6 is less than 21,
Finally, we have the ascending order as 78%, 0.95, \(\frac{83}{45}\), 6, 21.

Try It

Write the percent as a decimal or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 1.
39%
Answer: 0.39

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 39% in decimal form is 0.39

Question 2.
12. 6 %
Answer: 0.126

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 12.6% in decimal form is 0.126

Question 3.
0.05
Answer: 5%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.05 can be rewrite as 5%

Question 4.
1.25
Answer:  125%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 1.25 can be rewrite as 125%

Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 5.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)
Answer: 0.625 or 62.5%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{5}{8}\) we have to divide 5 by 8 ,
Then, we get 0.625,
To get the percent of 0.625 multiply by 100 , it will be 62.5%
So, \(\frac{5}{8}\) can be written as  0.625 or 62.5%

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{6}\)
Answer: 0.166 or 16.6%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{1}{6}\) we have to divide 1 by 6 ,
Then, we get 0.166,
To get the percent of 0.166 multiply by 100 , it will be 16.6%
So, \(\frac{1}{6}\) can be written as  0.166 or 16.6%

Question 7.
\(\frac{11}{3}\)
Answer:  3.66 or 366%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{11}{3}\) we have to divide 11 by 3 ,
Then, we get 3.66,
To get the percent of 3.66 multiply by 100 , it will be 366%
So, \(\frac{11}{3}\) can be written as  3.66 or 366%

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{1000}\)
Answer: 0.003 or 0.3%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{3}{1000}\) we have to divide 3 by 1000 ,
Then, we get 0.003,
To get the percent of 0.003 multiply by 100 , it will be 0.3%
So, \(\frac{3}{1000}\) can be written as  0.003 or 0.3%

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

CONVERTING BETWEEN PERCENTS AND DECIMALS Write the percent as a decimal or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 9.
46%
Answer: 0.46

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 46% in decimal form is 0.46

Question 10.
\(66 . \overline{6} \%\)
Answer: \(0 .66 \overline{6}\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(66 . \overline{6} \%\) in decimal form is \(0 .66 \overline{6}\)

Question 11.
0.18
Answer: 18%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.18 can be rewrite as 18%

Question 12.
\(2 . \overline{3}\)
Answer: \(233 . \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, \(2 . \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(233 . \overline{3} \%\)

WRITING FRACTIONS AS DECIMALS AND PERCENTS Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 13.
\(\frac{7}{10}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.7, percent = 70%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{7}{10}\) as  0.7 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.7 can be rewrite as 70%
So, \(\frac{7}{10}\) in decimal = 0.7, percent = 70%

Question 14.
\(\frac{5}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = \(0 .\overline{5}\), percent = \(55 . \overline{5} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{9}\) as  \(0 .\overline{5}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(0 .\overline{5}\) can be rewrite as \(55 . \overline{5} \%\)
So, \(\frac{5}{9}\) in decimal = \(0 .\overline{5}\), percent = \(55 . \overline{5} \%\)

Question 15.
\(\frac{7}{2000}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.0035, percent = 0.35%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{7}{2000}\) as  0.0035 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.0035 can be rewrite as 0.35%
So, \(\frac{7}{2000}\) in decimal = 0.0035, percent = 0.35%

Question 16.
\(\frac{17}{15}\)
Answer: decimal = \(1.1 \overline{3}\) , percent = \(113 . \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{17}{15}\) as \(1.1 \overline{3}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(1.1 \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(113 . \overline{3} \%\)
So, \(\frac{17}{15}\) in decimal = \(1.1 \overline{3}\), percent = \(113 . \overline{3} \%\)

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 17.
An astronaut spends 53% of the day working, 0.1 of the day eating, \(\frac{3}{10}\) of the day sleeping, and the rest of the day exercising. Order the events by duration from least to greatest. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 3
Answer:  An astronaut spends the day 7% by exercising, 10% by eating, 30% by sleeping, 53% by working.

Explanation:
An astronaut spends 53% of the day working,
0.1 of the day eating, in terms of percent we can write it as 10%,
\(\frac{3}{10}\) of the day sleeping, in decimals we ca rewrite as 0.3 and in percent it will be 30%,
Let us say that the whole day be 100% , The sum of the works he is doing in percent we get,
53% + 10% + 30% = 93%, and
Given that the rest of the day exercising, so 100% – 93% = 7%, A whole day is completed with these works.
To put them in Order the events by duration from least to greatest, we have , 7%, 10%, 30%, 53%.
An astronaut spends the day 7% by exercising, 10% by eating, 30% by sleeping, 53% by working.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
A band plays one concert in Arizona, one concert in California, and one concert in Georgia. In California, the band earned \(\frac{3}{2}\) the profit that they earned in Arizona. Of the total profit earned by the band, 32% is earned in Arizona. How many times more money did the band earn at the most profitable concert than at the least profitable concert? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Explanation:

Fractions, Decimals, and Percents Homework & Practice 6.1

Review & Refresh

Find the missing dimension. Use the scale 1 : 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 4
Answer: The model height of the Figure skater is 4.5inches and The Actual length of pipe is 75 feet .

Explanation:
Given , to use the scale oof 1 : 15 , Let the model height  be x
The model height of Figure skater is \(\frac{1}{15}\) = \(\frac{x}{67.5}\)
15x = 67.5
x = \(\frac{67.5}{15}\)
x = 4.5
So , The model height of the Figure skater is 4.5inches

Let the Actual length is y
The Actual length of pipe is \(\frac{1}{15}\) = \(\frac{5}{y}\)
y = 15 × 5 = 75
So , The Actual length of pipe is 75 feet .

Simplify the expression.
Question 3.
2(3p – 6) + 4p
Answer: p = 1.2

Explanation:
Let us say that whole expression is equal to 0
2(3p – 6) + 4p = 0
[2(3p) – 2(6)] + 4p = 0
6p – 12 + 4p = 0
10p – 12 = 0
p = 12/10 = 1.2
So, p = 1.2

Question 4.
5n – 3(4n + 1)
Answer: n = -0.42

Explanation:
Let us say that whole expression is equal to 0
5n – 3(4n + 1) = 0
5n – [ 3(4n) + 3(1) ] = 0
5n – 12n – 3 = 0
– 3 – 7n = 0
7n = – 3
n = -3/7 = -0.42
So, n = -0.42

Question 5.
What is the solution of 2n – 4 > – 12?
A. n < – 10
B. n < – 4
C. n > – 2
D. n > – 4
Answer:  D . n > -4

Explanation:
Given, 2n – 4 > – 12
add 4 in both sides,
2n – 4 + 4 > – 12 + 4
2n > – 8
divide both sides by 2
2n/2 > -8/2
n > – 4 .

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
COMPARING NUMBERS IN DIFFERENT FORMS Determine which number is greater. Explain your method. (See Exploration 1, p. 235.)
Question 6.
4\(\frac{2}{5}\) tons or 4.3 tons
Answer: 4\(\frac{2}{5}\) tons is greater than 4.3 tons

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite fraction \(\frac{22}{5}\)  by dividing 22 by 5, we have 4.4 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 4\(\frac{2}{5}\) tons is greater than 4.3 tons

Question 7.
82% success rate or \(\frac{5}{6}\) success rate
Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) success rate is greater than 82% success rate

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into Percent and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{6}\)  as  0.833 in decimal form,
To get get the percent , multiply 100 to 0.833, then we get 83.3%.
So, \(\frac{5}{6}\)  can be write as 83.3%,
Finally, by comparing two values \(\frac{5}{6}\) success rate is greater than 82% success rate

CONVERTING BETWEEN PERCENTS AND DECIMALS Write the percent as a decimal or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 8.
26%
Answer: 0.26

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 26% in decimal form is 0.26

Question 9.
0.63
Answer: 63%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.63 can be rewrite as 63%

Question 10.
9%
Answer: 0.09

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 9% in decimal form is 0.09

Question 11.
0.6
Answer: 60%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.6 can be rewrite as 60%

Question 12.
44.7%
Answer: 0.447

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 44.7% in decimal form is 0.447

Question 13.
55%
Answer: 0.55

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 55% in decimal form is 0.55

Question 14.
\(39 . \overline{2} \%\)
Answer: \(0.39 \overline{2}\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(39 . \overline{2} \%\) in decimal form is \(0.39 \overline{2}\)

Question 15.
3.554
Answer: 355.4%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 3.554  can be rewrite as 355.4%

Question 16.
123%
Answer: 1.23

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 123% in decimal form is 1.23

Question 17.
0.041
Answer: 4.1%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.041 can be rewrite as 4.1%

Question 18.
0.122
Answer: 12.2%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.122 can be rewrite as 12.2%

Question 19.
\(49 . \overline{92} \%\)
Answer: \(0.49 \overline{92}\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(49 . \overline{92} \%\) in decimal form is \(0.49 \overline{92}\)

Question 20.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend writes \(49 . \overline{8} \%\) as a decimal. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 5
Answer: He wrote the decimal for \(4. \overline{8} \%\) instead of \(49 . \overline{8} \%\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(49 . \overline{8} \%\)  in decimal form is \(0.49 \overline{8}\)

WRITING FRACTIONS AS DECIMALS AND PERCENTS Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 21.
\(\frac{29}{100}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.29, percent = 29%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{29}{100}\) as  0.29 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.29 can be rewrite as 29%
So, \(\frac{29}{100}\) in decimal = 0.29, percent = 29%

Question 22.
\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.75, percent = 75%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite\(\frac{3}{4}\) as  0.75 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.75 can be rewrite as 75%
So, \(\frac{3}{4}\) in decimal = 0.75, percent = 75%

Question 23.
\(\frac{7}{8}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.875, percent = 87.5%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{7}{8}\) as  0.875 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.875 can be rewrite as 87.5%
So, \(\frac{7}{8}\) in decimal = 0.875, percent = 87.5%

Question 24.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer: decimal = \(0. \overline{6}\), percent = \(66. \overline{6} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{2}{3}\) as \(0. \overline{6}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then\(0. \overline{6}\) can be rewrite as \(66. \overline{6} \%\)
So, \(\frac{2}{3}\) in decimal =\(0. \overline{6}\), percent = \(66. \overline{6} \%\)

Question 25.
\(\frac{7}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.77, percent = 77.7%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite\(\frac{7}{9}\) as  0.77 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.77 can be rewrite as 77.7%
So, \(\frac{7}{9}\) in decimal = 0.77, percent = 77.7%

Question 26.
\(\frac{12}{5}\)
Answer: decimal = 2.4, percent = 240%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{12}{5}\) as  2.4 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 2.4 can be rewrite as 240%
So, \(\frac{12}{5}\) in decimal =2.4, percent = 240%

Question 27.
\(\frac{9}{2}\)
Answer: decimal = 4.5, percent = 450%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite\(\frac{9}{2}\) as 4.5 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 4.5 can be rewrite as 450%
So, \(\frac{9}{2}\) in decimal = 4.5, percent = 450%

Question 28.
\(\frac{1}{1000}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.0010, percent = 0.10%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{1}{1000}\) as  0.0010 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.0010 can be rewrite as 0.10%
So, \(\frac{1}{1000}\) in decimal = 0.0010, percent = 0.10%

Question 29.
\(\frac{17}{6}\)
Answer: decimal = \(2.8 \overline{3}\), percent = \(283 . \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{17}{6}\) as \(2.8 \overline{3}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then\(2.8 \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(283 . \overline{3} \%\)
So, \(\frac{17}{6}\) in decimal = \(2.8 \overline{3}\), percent = \(283 . \overline{3} \%\)

Question 30.
\(\frac{3}{11}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.27, percent = 27%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{3}{11}\) as  0.27 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.27 can be rewrite as 27%
So, \(\frac{3}{11}\) in decimal = 0.27, percent = 27%

Question 31.
\(\frac{1}{750}\)
Answer: decimal = \(0.001 \overline{3}\), percent =\(0.1 \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{1}{750}\) as  \(0.001 \overline{3}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(0.001 \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(0.1 \overline{3} \%\)
So, \(\frac{1}{750}\) in decimal = \(0.001 \overline{3}\), percent = \(0.1 \overline{3} \%\)

Question 32.
\(\frac{22}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = \(2. \overline{4}\), percent = \(244 . \overline{4} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{22}{9}\) as  \(2. \overline{4}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(2. \overline{4}\) can be rewrite as \(244 . \overline{4} \%\)
So, \(\frac{22}{9}\) in decimal = \(2. \overline{4}\), percent = \(244 . \overline{4} \%\)

PRECISION Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 33.
66.1%, 0.66, \(\frac{2}{3}\), 0.667
Answer: 0.66, 66.1%, \(\frac{2}{3}\), 0.667

Explanation:
In order to put them in an ascending order we have to calculate the fraction, percent, decimal in their respective form, So Fraction \(\frac{2}{3}\) can be rewrite as \(0. \overline{6}\) in decimal form
Then 66.1% can be rewrite as 0.661 in decimal form,
As we can see 0.66 is less than 66.1% , 66.1% is less than \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{3}\)  is less than 0.667,
Finally, we have the ascending order as 0.66, 66.1%, \(\frac{2}{3}\), 0.667.

Question 34.
\(\frac{2}{9}\), 21%, \(0.2 \overline{1}\), \(\frac{11}{50}\)
Answer: 21%, \(0.2 \overline{1}\), \(\frac{11}{50}\), \(\frac{2}{9}\)

Explanation:
In order to put them in an ascending order we have to calculate the fraction, percent, decimal in their respective form, So Fraction \(\frac{11}{50}\) can be rewrite as 0.22 in decimal form,
\(\frac{2}{9}\) can be rewrite as \(0.22 \overline{2}\)in decimal form,
Then 21% can be rewrite as 0.21 in decimal form,
As we can see 21%  is less than \(0.2 \overline{1}\) ,\(0.2 \overline{1}\) is less than \(\frac{11}{50}\),  \(\frac{11}{50}\)  is less than \(\frac{2}{9}\),
Finally, we have the ascending order as 21%, \(0.2 \overline{1}\), \(\frac{11}{50}\), \(\frac{2}{9}\)

MATCHING Tell which letter shows the graph of the number.
Question 35.
\(\frac{7}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.777 , it is in the graph at the point A

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{7}{9}\) as 0.777 in decimal form,
So, looking at the graph given, it is at point A.

Question 36.
0.812
Answer:  it is at the point C in the given graph.

Question 37.
\(\frac{5}{6}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.833 , it is in the graph at the point D

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{6}\) as 0.833 in decimal form,
So, looking at the graph given, it is at point D.

Question 38.
79.5%
Answer: 0.795, it is in the graph at the point B

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 79.5% in decimal form is 0.795
0.795 is in the graph given , at the point B vb

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 6

Question 39.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table shows the portion of students in each grade that participate in School Spirit Week. Order the grades by portion of participation from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 7
Answer: The grades by portion of participation from least to greatest are 7 , 6 , 8.

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left. So, 65% in decimal form is 0.65.
By using the method of converting fraction into Percent  ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{6}\) as 0.6 in decimal form,
Then grade 6 = 0.64 , grade 7 = 0.6 , grade 8 = 0.65 ,
So, The grades by portion of participation from least to greatest are 7 , 6 , 8.

Question 40.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the portion of gold medals that were won by the United States in five summer Olympic games. In what year did the United States win the least portion of gold medals? the greatest portion? Justify your answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 8
Answer: The United States win the least portion of gold medals in the year 2004 and the greatest portion of gold medals won in the year 2012

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into Percent and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{36}{301}\)  as  0.119 in decimal form,
\(\frac{23}{150}\) as 0.153 in decimal form,
\(\frac{46}{307}\) as 0.149 in decimal form,
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
\(12. \overline{3} \%\) as \(0.12 \overline{3}\) in decimal form.
So, according to their years and portions of gold medals we have ,
year 2000 – \(0.12 \overline{3}\),
year 2004 – 0.119,
year 2008 – \(0. \overline{12}\),
year 2012 – 0.153,
year 2016 – 0.149,
Finally, The United States win the least portion of gold medals in the year 2004 and the greatest portion of gold medals won in the year 2012.

Question 41.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You, your friend, and your cousin have a basketball competition where each person attempts the same number of shots. You make 70% of your shots, your friend makes of her shots, \(\frac{7}{9}\) and your cousin makes \(0.7 \overline{2}\) of his shots. How many times more shots are made by the first place finisher than the third place finisher?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 9
Answer: The first place finisher made 0.077 more shorts than the third place finisher.

Explanation:
The shorts made by 1st person are 70%, that is 0.7 in decimal,
The shorts made by 2nd person are \(\frac{7}{9}\) rewriting as 0.777 in decimal,
The shorts made by 3rd person are \(0.7 \overline{2}\)
The shorts made by  the first place finisher is  0.777 and by the Third place finisher is 0.7,
To know how many more shorts are made by first place finisher than third place finisher is the difference between 0.777 and 0.7 , that is 0.777 – 0.7 = 0.077.
So, the first place finisher made 0.077 more shorts than the third place finisher.

Question 42.
DIG DEEPER!
Three different mixtures contain small amounts of acetic acid. Mixture A is 0.036 acetic acid, Mixture B is 4.2% acetic acid, and Mixture C is \(\frac{1}{22}\) acetic acid. Explain how to use this information to determine which mixture contains the greatest amount of acetic acid.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 10
Answer: 0.045 , Mixture C has more amount of acetic acid as compared to Mixture A and Mixture B.

Explanation:
Mixture A is 0.036 acetic acid,
Mixture B is 4.2% acetic acid, in decimal we can write it as 0.042,
Mixture C is \(\frac{1}{22}\) acetic acid, rewriting as 0.045 in decimal form,
So, 0.036 is less than 0.042 , 0.042 is less than 0.045,
Finally,  0.045 Mixture c has the more amount of acetic acid as compared to Mixture A and Mixture B.

Question 43.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Over 44% of the 30 students in a class read a book last month. What are the possible numbers of students in the class who read a book last month? Justify your answer.
Answer: 13 number of students in the class read the book last month.

Explanation:
Given, 44% of 30 students
=(44%) × 30
= \(\frac{44}{100}\) × 30
= \(\frac{44 × 30}{100}\)
= \(\frac{1320}{100}\)
=13.2
So, 13 number of students in the class read the book last month.

Question 44.
NUMBER SENSE
Fill in the blanks using each of the numbers 0 – 7 exactly once, so that the percent, decimal, and fraction below are ordered from least to greatest. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 11
Answer:  The percent, decimal, and fraction are ordered from least to greatest are 12.3%, 0.57, \(\frac{4}{6}\) by using 0 – 7 numbers only once .

Explanation:
Given , using each of the numbers 0 – 7 exactly once,
Estimating on the numbes
Using numbers 1 , 2 , 3 for percent gives 12.3% as shown and can be writen as 0.123
Using numbers 0 , 5 , 7 for decimal gives 0.57 as shown
Using numbers 4 and 6 for fraction gives \(\frac{4}{6}\) and can be writen as 0.66
The order from least to greatest is 0.123 , 0.57 , 0.66 .
So , The percent, decimal, and fraction are ordered from least to greatest are 12.3%, 0.57, \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Lesson 6.2 The Percent Proportion

EXPLORATION 1

Using Percent Models
Work with a partner.
a. Complete each model. Explain what each model represents.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 1
b. Use the models in part (a) to answer each question.

  • What number is 50% of 30?
  • 15 is what percent of 75?
  • 96 is 133\(\frac{1}{3}\)% of what number?

c. How can you use ratio tables to check your answers in part(b)? How can you use proportions? Provide examples to support your reasoning.
d. Write a question different from those in part (b) that can be answered using one of the models in part(a). Trade questions with another group and find the solution.
Answer: All the answers are given below the explanation.

Explanation:
a.
This model represents the number 30 which is divided in to two equal halves ,which can be represented in percent and numbers,
that is 50% of 30 is 15.
50 percent × 30 =
(50:100) × 30 =
(50 × 30):100 =
1500:100 = 15


This model represents the number 75 which is divided in to five equal halves, which can be represented in percent and numbers ,That is
20% of 75 is 15,
40% of 75 is 30,
60% of 75 is 45,
80% of 75 is 60.


This model represents the number 96 which is divided in to four equal halves, which can be represented in percent and numbers ,That is
33\(\frac{1}{3}\%\) of 96 is 24,
66\(\frac{2}{3}\%\) of 96 is 48,
100% of 96 is 72.

b. As shown in the models in part (a) 15 is the number which is 50% of 30,
From the figure 2 of part (a) we know, 15 is the number which is 20% of 75,
From the figure 3 of part (a) we know, 96 is the number which is 133\(\frac{1}{3}\%\) of 96.

c. The models provided in the part (a) are representing the each of the number individually which are divided in to equal number of parts in respective of their numbers , Also the divided parts can be represented as percent and number form
Since the divided equal parts are equally represents the whole number given ,So that the ratios of the parts can be easily combined in to the whole number .
Thus, the proportion can be used to calculate the percent of each ratio and have the unchanged output .
For example,

In the picture shown The number 30 is divided into 1:1 ratio equally which is exactly the half of the number and percent that is 15 is 50% of 30.

d. From the figure 2 of part (a), we can assume the question as
What number is 80% of 75?

Answer: 60 is the number which is 80% of 75 , as shown in the model above.

Try It

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 1.
What percent of 5 is 3?
Answer: 60%

Explanation:
3 : 5 × 100 =
(3 × 100): 5
300 : 5 = 60
So, 5 is 60% of 3.

Question 2.
24 is what percent of 20?
Answer: 120%

Explanation:
24 : 20 × 100 =
(24 × 100) : 20 =
2400 : 20 = 120
So, 24 is the 120% of 20.

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 3.
What number is 80% of 60?
Answer:  48

Explanation:
80 % × 60 =
(80 :100) × 60 =
(80 × 60) :100 =
4800 : 100 = 48
So, 48 is 80% of 60.

Question 4.
10% of 40.5 is what number?
Answer: 4.05

Explanation:
10 % × 40.5 =
(10 : 100) × 40.5 =
(10 × 40.5) : 100 =
4.05 : 100 = 4.05
So, 4.05 is the 10% of 40.5

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 5.
0.1% of what number is 4?
Answer: 4,000

Explanation:
Let the number be X
0.1% × X = 4
X = 4 ÷ 0.1%
= 4 ÷ (0.1 ÷ 100)
= (100 × 4 ) ÷ 0.1
= 400 ÷ 0.1
=4,000
So, 4 is the 0.1% of 4,000.

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) is 25% of what number?
Answer:  2

Explanation:
To make calculation easier we can rewrite \(\frac{1}{2}\) as 0.5
let the number be X
25% × X = 0.5
X = 0.5 ÷ 25%
= 0.5 ÷ (25 ÷ 100)
= (100 × 0.5 ) ÷ 25
= 50 ÷ 25
=2
So, 0.5 is the 25% of 2.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
USING THE PERCENT PROPORTION
Write and solve a proportion to determine what percent of 120 is 54.
Answer:  45%

Explanation:
By using percent proportion, we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{54}{120}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{54 × 100}{120}\) = p
p = \(\frac{5400}{120}\)
p = 45%
so, 54 is the 45% of 120.

Question 8.
CHOOSE TOOLS
Use a model to find 60% of 30.
Answer: 18

Explanation:
60% × 30
= (60 : 100) × 30
= (60 × 30) : 100
= 1800 : 100
= 18
So, 60% of 30 is 18.

Question 9.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which proportion at the left does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 2
Answer: second proportion doesn’t belong to other three

Explanation:
second proportion: 15/50 = p /100
p = (15 × 100) ÷50
p = 150 ÷ 5
p = 30
Here we got 30% , as the p values of the other three proportions are 50%
So, second proportion does not fit in to the other three proportions.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
An arctic woolly-bear caterpillar lives for 7 years and spends 90% of its life frozen. How many days of its life is the arctic woolly-bear frozen?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 3
Answer: The arctic woolly-bear frozen for 6.3 years in their life time.

Explanation:
Given, An arctic woolly-bear caterpillar lives for 7 years and spends 90% of its life frozen
We have, 90% × 7
= (90 : 100 ) × 7
= (90 × 7) : 100
= 630 : 100
= 6.3 years
So, The arctic woolly-bear frozen for 6.3 years in their life time.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the numbers of pictures you upload to a social media website for 5 days in a row. How many total pictures do you upload during the week when 32% of the total pictures are uploaded on Saturday and Sunday?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 4
Answer: The total pictures uploaded during the week are 53.

Explanation:
Given,  32% of the total pictures are uploaded on Saturday and Sunday
And adding the photos that we uploaded during the 5 days are 2 + 2 + 4 + 1 + 8 = 17
Let the number we should find be X
32% × X = 17
X = 17 ÷ 32%
= 17 ÷ (32 ÷ 100)
= (100 × 17 ) ÷ 32
= 1700 ÷ 32
= 53.12
So, 17 is the 32% of 53.
Finally we have, The total pictures uploaded during the week are 53.

The Percent Proportion Homework & Practice 6.2

Review & Refresh

Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 1.
\(\frac{42}{100}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.42 , percent = 42%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from fraction \(\frac{42}{100}\) we have to divide 42 by 100 ,
Then, we get 0.42,
To get the percent of 0.42 multiply by 100 , it will be 42%
So, \(\frac{42}{100}\) can be written as  0.42 or 42%

Question 2.
\(\frac{7}{1000}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.007 , percent = 0.7%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{7}{1000}\) we have to divide 7 by 1000 ,
Then, we get 0.007,
To get the percent of 0.007 multiply by 100 , it will be 0.7%
So, \(\frac{7}{1000}\) can be written as  0.007 or 0.7%

Question 3.
\(\frac{13}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = 1.444 , percent = 144.4%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from \(\frac{13}{9}\)  fraction we have to divide 13 by 9 ,
Then, we get 1.444,
To get the percent of 1.444 multiply by 100 , it will be 144.4%
So, \(\frac{13}{9}\) can be written as  1.444 or 144.4%

Question 4.
\(\frac{41}{66}\)
Answer: decimal = \(0.62 \overline{12}\) , percent = \(62. \overline{12} \%\)

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{41}{66}\) we have to divide 41 by 66 ,
Then, we get \(0.62 \overline{12}\),
To get the percent of \(0.62 \overline{12}\) multiply by 100 , it will be \(62. \overline{12} \%\)
So, \(\frac{41}{66}\) can be written as  \(0.62 \overline{12}\) or \(62. \overline{12} \%\)

Evaluate the expression when a = – 15 and b = – 5.
Question 5.
a ÷ 5
Answer: -3

Explanation:
Given , a = – 15
Then , – 15 ÷ 5
= \(\frac{-15}{5}\)
= – 3.
so, a ÷ 5 = – 3.

Question 6.
\(\frac{b+14}{a}\)
Answer: \(\frac{9}{-15}\)

Explanation:
Given , a = -15 , b = -5 , by substituting the given values in the expression, we get
= \(\frac{(- 5)+14}{-15}\)
= \(\frac{9}{-15}\)
So, \(\frac{b+14}{a}\) = \(\frac{9}{-15}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{b^{2}}{a+5}\)
Answer: \(\frac{25}{-10}\)

Explanation:
Given , a = -15 , b = -5, by substituting the given values in the expression, we get
= \(\frac{(-5)^{2}}{(-15)+5}\)
= \(\frac{25}{-10}\)
So, \(\frac{b^{2}}{a+5}\) = \(\frac{25}{-10}\)

What is the solution of 9x = 1.8?
A. x = – 5
B. x = – 0.2
C. x = 0.2
D. x = 5
Answer: C . x = 0.2

Explanation:
Given, 9x = 1.8
x = \(\frac{1.8}{9}\)
x = 0.2.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

CHOOSE TOOLS Use a model to answer the question. Use a proportion to check your answer. (See Exploration 1, p. 241.)
Question 9.
What number is 20% of 80?
Answer: 16

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{80}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{80}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
a = \(\frac{80}{5}\)
a = 16.
So, 16 is 20% of 80.

Question 10.
10 is what percent of 40?
Answer: 25%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{10}{40}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{100}{4}\)
p = 25
So, 10 is 25% of 40.

Question 11.
15 is 30% of what number?
Answer: 50

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{15}{w}\)  = \(\frac{30}{100}\)
by cross multiplication we get,
30 × w = 15 × 100
w  = \(\frac{1500}{30}\)
w = \(\frac{150}{30}\)
w = 50.
So, 15 is 30% of 50.

Question 12.
What number is 120% of 70?
Answer: 84

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{70}\)  = \(\frac{120}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{70}\)  = \(\frac{6}{5}\)
a = \(\frac{70 × 6}{5}\)
a = \(\frac{420}{5}\)
a = 84
So, 84 is 120% of 70.

Question 13.
20 is what percent of 50?
Answer: 40%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{20}{50}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{20 × 100}{50}\)
p = \(\frac{200}{5}\)
p = 40
So, 20 is 40% of 50.

Question 14.
48 is 75% of what number?
Answer: 64

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{48}{w}\)  = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
w =\(\frac{48 × 100}{75}\)
w = \(\frac{4800}{75}\)
w = 64
So, 48 is 75% of 64.

USING THE PERCENT PROPORTION Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 15.
What percent of 25 is 12?
Answer: 48%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{12}{25}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{12 × 100}{25}\)
p = \(\frac{1200}{25}\)
p = 48
So, 12 is 48% of 25.

Question 16.
14 is what percent of 56?
Answer: 25%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{14}{56}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{14 × 100}{56}\)
p = \(\frac{1400}{56}\)
p = 25
So, 14 is 25% of 56.

Question 17.
25% of what number is 9?
Answer: 36

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{w}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{w}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
w = 9 × 4
w = 36.
So, 9 is 25% of 36.

Question 18.
36 is 0.9% of what number?
Answer: 4,000

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{36}{w}\) = \(\frac{0.9}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{36 × 100}{0.9}\)
w = \(\frac{3600}{0.9}\)
w = \(\frac{36,000}{9}\)
w = 4,000
So, 36 is 0.9% of 4,000.

Question 19.
75% of 124 is what number?
Answer: 93

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{124}\) = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{75 × 124}{100}\)
a  = \(\frac{9,300}{100}\)
a = 93
So, 93 is 75% of 124.

Question 20.
110% of 90 is what number?
Answer: 99

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{90}\)  = \(\frac{110}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{110 × 90}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{9900}{100}\)
a = 99
So, 99 is 110% of 90.

Question 21.
What number is 0.4% of 40?
Answer: 0.16

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{40}\)  = \(\frac{0.4}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{0.4 × 40}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{16}{100}\)
a = 0.16
So, 0.16 is 0.4% of 40.

Question 22.
72 is what percent of 45?
Answer:  160%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{72}{45}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{72 × 100}{45}\)
p = \(\frac{7200}{45}\)
p = 160
So, 72 is 160% of 45.

Question 23.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses the percent proportion to answer the question below. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
“40%of what number is 34?”
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 5
Answer:  yes, he used the correct percent proportion.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{34}{w}\) = \(\frac{40}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{34 × 100}{40}\)
w = \(\frac{3400}{40}\)
w = 85
So, 34 is 40% of 85.

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Of 140 seventh-grade students, 15% earn the Presidential Youth Fitness Award. How many students earn the award?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 6
Answer: 21 students earn the Presidential Youth Fitness Award.

Explanation:
Given, Of 140 seventh-grade students, 15% earn the Presidential Youth Fitness Award.
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{140}\) = \(\frac{15}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{15 × 140}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2100}{100}\)
a = 21
So, 21 is 15% of 140.
Totally ,21 students earn the Presidential Youth Fitness Award.

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A salesperson receives a 3% commission on sales. The salesperson receives $180 in commission. What is the amount of sales?
Answer: The total amount of sale is $6,000.

Explanation:
Given, A salesperson receives a 3% commission on sales, The salesperson receives $180 in commission.
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{180}{w}\) = \(\frac{3}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{180 × 100}{3}\)
w = \(\frac{18,000}{3}\)
w = 6,000
So, $180 is 3% of $6,000.
Total amount of sale is $6,000.

USING THE PERCENT PROPORTION Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 26.
0.5 is what percent of 20?
Answer: 2.5%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{0.5}{20}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{0.5 × 100}{20}\)
p = 0.5 × 5
p = 2.5
So, 0.5 is 2.5% of 20.

Question 27.
14.2 is 35.5% of what number?
Answer: 40

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{14.2}{w}\) = \(\frac{35.5}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{14.2 × 100}{35.5}\)
w = \(\frac{142 × 10}{35.5}\)
w = 40
So, 14.2 is 35.5% of 40.

Question 28.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) is 60% of what number?
Answer: 1.25

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) can be rewrite as 0.75 in decimal,
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{0.75}{w}\) = \(\frac{60}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{0.75 × 100}{60}\)
w = \(\frac{75}{60}\)
w = 1.25
So, 0.75 is 60% of 1.25.

Question 29.
What number is 25% of \(\frac{7}{8}\)?
Answer: 0.218

Explanation:
\(\frac{7}{8}\) can be rewrite as 0.875 in decimal,
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{0.875}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{0.875 × 25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{21.87}{100}\)
a = 0.218
So, 0.218 is 25% of 0.875.

Question 30.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You are assigned 32 math exercises for homework. You complete 75% of the exercises before dinner. How many exercises do you have left to do after dinner?
Answer: 24 exercises are left .

Explanation:
You are assigned 32 math exercises for homework. You complete 75% of the exercises before dinner.
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{32}\) = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{32 × 75}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2,400}{100}\)
a = 24
So, 24 is 75% of 32.
Totally, 24 exercise are left .

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your friend earns $10.50 per hour, which is 125% of her hourly wage last year. How much did your friend earn per hour last year?
Answer: Friend earned $8.4 per hour last year

Explanation:
Your friend earns $10.50 per hour, which is 125% of her hourly wage last year,
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{10.5}{w}\) = \(\frac{125}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{10.5 × 100}{125}\)
w = \(\frac{1050}{125}\)
w = 8.4
So, 8.4 is 125% of 10.5.

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The bar graph shows the numbers of reserved campsites at a campground for one week. What percent of the reservations were for Friday or Saturday?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 7
Answer: The percent of reservations For Friday is 74.2% and for Saturday is  85%

Explanation:
As per the graph shown, The reservations made for the week are 35 ,
Friday reservations are 26, so
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{26}{35}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{26 × 100}{35}\)
p = \(\frac{2600}{35}\)
p = 74.2
So, 26 is 74.2% of 35.

Saturday reservations are 30, so
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{30}{35}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{30 × 100}{35}\)
p = \(\frac{3,000}{35}\)
p = 85
So, 30 is 85% of 35.

Totally, The percent of reservations For Friday is 74.2% and for Saturday is  85%.

Question 33.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Your friend displays the results of a survey that asks several people to vote on a new school mascot.
a. What is missing from the bar graph?
b. What percent of the votes does the least popular mascot receive? Explain your reasoning.
c. There are 124 votes total. How many votes does tiger receive?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 8
Answer: a. The numerical values for the votes are missing from the graph

b. In order to calculate the percent of the votes does the least popular mascot received will be halted due to lack of clear mentioning of of the proportion of the votes or the ratio of the votes.

c. The votes acquired by the tiger are cannot be determined because of figure which does not contain proper information.

Question 34.
DIG DEEPER!
A quarterback completes 18 of 33 passes during the first three quarters of a football game. He completes every pass in the fourth quarter and 62.5% of his passes for the entire game. How many passes does the quarterback throw in the fourth quarter? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 9
Answer: Quarterback throw 20.6 passes in the fourth quarter

Explanation:
A quarterback completes 18 of 33 passes during the first three quarters of a football game,
He completes every pass in the fourth quarter and 62.5% of his passes for the entire game.
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{33}\) = \(\frac{62.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{33 × 62.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2,062.5}{100}\)
a = 20.6
So, 20.6 is 62.5% of 33.

Hence, Quarterback thrown 20.6 passes in the fourth quarter

Question 35.
REASONING
20% of a number is x. What is 100% of the number? Assume x > 0.
Answer: 5x

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
substitute a = x and p = 20
\(\frac{x}{w}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
by cross multiplication , we get
w × 20 = x × 100
20w = 100x
Divide both sides by 20,
\(\frac{20w}{20}\) = \(\frac{100x}{20}\)
w = 5x
So, 100% of the number is 5x.

Question 36.
STRUCTURE
Answer each question. Assume x > 0.
a. What percent of 8x is 5x?
b. What is 65% of 80x?
Answer: a. 62.5% , b. 52x

Explanation:
a. percent of 8x is 5x
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{5x}{8x}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
by cross multiplying
8p = 500
p = \(\frac{500}{8}\)
p = 62.5
So, 5x is 62.5% of 8x.

b. By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{8x}\) = \(\frac{65}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{8x × 65}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{520x}{100}\)
a = 52x
So, 52x is 65% of 80x.

Lesson 6.3 The Percent Equation

EXPLORATION 1

Using Percent Equations
Work with a partner.
a. The circle graph shows the number of votes received by each candidate during a school election. So far, only half of the students have voted. Find the percent of students who voted for each candidate. Explain your method.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 1
c. The circle graph shows the final results of the election after every student voted. Use the equation you wrote in part(b) to find the number of students who voted for each candidate.
d. Use a different method to check your answers in part(c). Which method do you prefer? Explain.
Answer:
a. The percent of students who voted for each candidate are
For Person A = 20% ,
For Person B = 25%
For Person C = 15%
For Person D = 40%

b. The equation is a = \(\frac{w × p}{100}\)

c. The number of students who voted for each candidate are
For Person A = 30
For Person B = 24
For Person C = 24
For Person D = 42

d. ratio proportion is used as another method.

Explanation:
a. Given, The circle graph shows the number of votes received by each candidate during a school election. So far, only half of the students have voted.
The number of votes received till now are 12 + 15 + 9 + 24 = 60,
To know the percent of students who voted for each candidate we have ,
For person A, w = 60 , a = 12 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{12}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{12 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{1200}{60}\)
p = 20
So, 12 is 20% of 60.
The percent of  students who voted for person A is 20%

For person B , w = 60 , a = 15 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{15}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{15 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{1500}{60}\)
p = 25
So, 15 is 25% of 60.
The percent of  students who voted for person B is 25%

For person C , w = 60 , a = 9 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{9 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{900}{60}\)
p = 15
So, 9 is 15% of 60.
The percent of  students who voted for person C is 15%

For person D , w = 60 , a = 24 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{24}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{24 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{2400}{60}\)
p = 40
So, 24 is 40% of 60.
The percent of  students who voted for person D is 40%

b. we know that percent proportion is \(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
where as a = part , w= whole , p = percent ,
To solve for a , we can write it as a = \(\frac{w × p}{100}\)

c. The figure showing the percent of all the candidates individually are after the final results ,
as shown in part (a)  half of the students are 60 ,
The half of the students voted in all the students are 60 and total strength of students are 60 + 60 = 120
To calculate the number of voting acquired by each candidate we have,
For person A , w  = 120 , p = 25 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{120}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120 × 25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120}{4}\)
a = 30
So, 30 is 25% of 120.
The number of students who voted for person A after final results are 30

For person B , w  = 120 , p = 20 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{120}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120 × 20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120}{5}\)
a = 24
So, 24 is 20% of 120.
The number of students who voted for person B after final results are 24

For person C , w  = 120 , p = 20 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
same as for person B ,
So, 24 is 20% of 120.
The number of students who voted for person C after final results are 24

For person D , w  = 120 , p = 35 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{120}\) = \(\frac{35}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120 × 35}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{4,200}{100}\)
a = 42
So, 42 is 35% of 120.
The number of students who voted for person D after final results are 42.

d. We are using ratio proportion method , To check the answers of  part (c),
For person A , 25 % × 120 =
(25 : 100) × 120 =
(25 × 120) : 100 =
3,000 : 100 = 30
So, 30 is the 25% of 120.

For person B , 20 % × 120 =
(20 : 100) × 120 =
(20 × 120) : 100 =
2,400 : 100 = 24
So, 24 is the 20% of 120.

For person C , 20% × 120 is same as person B
So, 24 is the 20% of 120.

For person D , 35 % × 120 =
(35 : 100) × 120 =
(35 × 120) : 100 =
4,200 : 100 = 42
So, 42 is the 35% of 120.
All the answers are verified with ratio proportion method.

Try It

Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 1.
What number is 10% of 20?
Answer:  2

Explanation:
10 % × 20 =
(10 : 100) × 20 =
(10 × 20) : 100 =
200 : 100 = 2
So, 2 is the 10% of 20.

Question 2.
What number is 150% of 40?
Answer: 60

Explanation:
150 % × 40 =
(150 : 100) × 40 =
(150 × 40) : 100 =
6,000 : 100 = 60
So, 60 is the 150% of 40.

Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 3.
3 is what percent of 600?
Answer: 0.5%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{3}{600}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{3 × 100}{600}\)
p = \(\frac{300}{600}\)
p = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
p = 0.5
So, 3 is 0.5% of 600.

Question 4.
18 is what percent of 20?
Answer:

By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{18}{20}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{18 × 100}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{1800}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{180}{2}\)
p = 90
So, 18 is 90% of 20.

Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 5.
8 is 80% of what number?
Answer: 10

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{8}{w}\) = \(\frac{80}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{8 × 100}{80}\)
w = \(\frac{800}{80}\)
w = 10
So, 8 is 80% of 10.

Question 6.
90 is 180% of what number?
Answer: 50

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{90}{w}\) = \(\frac{180}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{90 × 100}{180}\)
w = \(\frac{9,000}{180}\)
w = 50
So, 90 is 180% of 50.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
VOCABULARY
Write the percent equation in words.
Answer:
Percent Equation:
In this equation, the whole is the number of which we are taking a percentage and the part is the value that results from taking the percent of the whole. This means that in any percent problem, there are three basic values to be concerned about: the percent, the whole, and the resulting part.
we can represent percent = p , whole = w , part = a
So, we have the percent equation as,
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\).

USING THE PERCENT EQUATION Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 8.
14 is what percent of 70?
Answer: 20%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{14}{70}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{14 × 100}{70}\)
p = \(\frac{1400}{70}\)
p = 20
So, 14 is 20% of 70.

Question 9.
What number is 36% of 85?
Answer: 30.6

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{85}\) = \(\frac{36}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{85 × 36}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{3,060}{100}\)
a = 30.6
So, 30.6 is 36% of 85.

Question 10.
9 is 12% of what number?
Answer: 75

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{w}\) = \(\frac{12}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{9 × 100}{12}\)
w = \(\frac{900}{12}\)
w = 75
So, 9 is 12% of 75.

Question 11.
108 is what percent of 72?
Answer: 150%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{108}{72}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{108 × 100}{72}\)
p = \(\frac{10,800}{72}\)
p = 150
So, 108 is 150% of 72.

Question 12.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 2
Answer: 55 is 20% of what number ? , is different  from other three questions.

Explanation:
Given , 20% of 55 , we have to find the part of whole number
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{55}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{55 × 20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1,100}{100}\)
a = 11
So, 11 is 20% of 55.

But this 55 is 20% of what number ? is different  from other three, because here we have to find out the whole number
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{55}{w}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{55 × 100}{20}\)
w = \(\frac{5500}{20}\)
w = 275
So, 55 is 20% of 275.
Hence , 55 is 20% of what number ? , is different  from other three questions.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
A school offers band and chorus classes. The table shows the percents of the 1200 students in the school who are enrolled in band, chorus, or neither class. How many students are enrolled in both classes? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 3
Answer: The total number of students enrolled for both classes  are 744.

Explanation:
Given, The table shows the percent of the 1200 students in the school who are enrolled in band, chorus, or neither class.
For Band , w = 1200 , p = 34 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{1200}\) = \(\frac{34}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1200 × 34}{100}\)
a = 12 × 34
a = 408
So, 408 is 34% of 1200.
The number of students enrolled for the Band are 408.

For Band , w = 1200 , p = 28 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{1200}\) = \(\frac{28}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1200 × 28}{100}\)
a = 12 × 28
a = 336
So, 336 is 28% of 1200.
The number of students enrolled for the chorus are 336.

The total number of students enrolled for both classes  are 408 + 336 = 744.

Question 14.
Water Tank A has a capacity of 550 gallons and is 66% full. Water Tank B is 53% full. The ratio of the capacity of Water Tank A to Water Tank B is 11:15.
a. How much water is in each tank?
b. What percent of the total volume of both tanks is filled with water?
Answer:
a. The water tank A is filled with 363 gallons of water.
The water tank B is filled with 397.5 gallons of water.

b. The percent of the total volume of both tanks is filled with water is 58.5%.

Explanation:
a.  Given , Water Tank A has a capacity of 550 gallons and is 66% full.
w = 550 gallons , p = 66% , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{550}\) = \(\frac{66}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{550 × 66}{100}\)
a = 550 × 0.66
a = 363
So, 363 is 66% of 550.
The water tank A is filled with 363 gallons of water.

Given, Water Tank B is 53% full.
The ratio of the capacity of Water Tank A to Water Tank B is 11:15.
The capacity of Water Tank A is 550 gallons
Let the capacity of tank B is x gallons
\(\frac{550}{x}\) = \(\frac{11}{15}\)
x = \(\frac{550 × 15}{11}\)
x =  \(\frac{8,250}{11}\)
x = 750.
The capacity of the water Tank B is 750 gallons,
To know the amount of water filled in the tank we have,
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{750}\) = \(\frac{53}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{750 × 53}{100}\)
a = 7.5 × 53
a = 397.5
So, 397.5 is 53% of 750.
The water tank B is filled with 397.5 gallons of water.

b. To know the percent of the total volume of both tanks is filled with water, we have
The total capacity of Water tank A and Water tank B = 550 + 750 = 1,300 gallons
The total amount of water filled in both tanks are 363 + 397.5 =  760.5 gallons
So, w = 1,300 , a = 760.5 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{760.5}{1,300}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{760.5 × 100}{1,300}\)
p = \(\frac{760.5}{13}\)
p = 58.5
So, 760.5 is 58.5% of 1,300.
The percent of the total volume of both tanks is filled with water is 58.5%.

The Percent Equation Homework & Practice 6.3

Review & Refresh

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 1.
30% of what number is 9?
Answer: 30

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{w}\) = \(\frac{30}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{9 × 100}{30}\)
w = \(\frac{900}{30}\)
w = 30
So, 9 is 30% of 30.

Question 2.
42 is what percent of 80?
Answer:  52.5%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{42}{80}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{42 × 100}{80}\)
p = \(\frac{420}{8}\)
p = 52.5
So, 42 is 52.5% of 80.

Question 3.
What percent of 36 is 20?
Answer:

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{20}{36}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{20 × 100}{36}\)
p = \(\frac{2,000}{36}\)
p = 5.55
So, 20 is55.5% of 36.

Question 4.
What number is 120% of 80?
Answer: 96

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{80}\) = \(\frac{120}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{80 × 120}{100}\)
a =  8 × 12
a = 96
So, 96 is 120% of 80.

Find the distance between the two numbers on a number line.
Question 5.
– 4 and 10
Answer: The distance between the two numbers  – 4 and 10  on a number line is 14 .

Explanation: 
For the number line above we have divided each segment in to equal parts ,
So, The distance between the two numbers  – 4 and 10  on a number line is 14 .

Question 6.
–\(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\)
Answer: The distance between the two numbers –\(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\) on a number line is 6 .

Explanation:
For the number line above we have divided each segment in to equal parts ,
So, The distance between the two numbers –\(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\) on a number line is 6 .

Question 7.
– 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) and – 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Answer: The distance between the two numbers  – 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) and – 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\) on a number line is 6.

Explanation:
Given , – 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) and – 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
can be written as \(\frac{-13}{3}\) and  \(\frac{-7}{10}\)
converting into decimal form we get , -4.3 and -0.7
For the number line above we have divided each segment in to equal parts ,
So, The distance between the two numbers  – 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) and – 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\) on a number line is 6.

Question 8.
– 4.3 and 7.5
Answer: The distance between the two numbers  – 4.3 and 7.5  on a number line is 8 .

Explanation:
For the number line above we have divided each segment in to equal parts ,
So, The distance between the two numbers  – 4.3 and 7.5  on a number line is 8 .

Question 9.
There are 160 people in a grade. The ratio of boys to girls is 3 to 5. Which proportion can you use to find the number x of boys?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 4
Answer:  A. \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{x}{160}\)

Explanation:
Given, The ratio of boys to girls is\(\frac{3}{5}\)
The ratio of boys to the grade is \(\frac{3}{8}\)
to find the number of x boys, we have to
\(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{x}{160}\)
x = \(\frac{3 × 160}{8}\)
x = \(\frac{480}{8}\)
x = 60.
So, A =  \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{x}{160}\) is the correct answer.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING PERCENT EQUATIONS The circle graph shows the number of votes received by each candidate during a school election. Find the percent of students who voted for the indicated candidate. Each Candidate(See Exploration 1, p. 247.)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 5
Question 10.
Candidate A
Answer: The percent of students who voted for the candidate A is  36%

Explanation:
Given, the circle graph shows the number of votes received by each candidate during a school election.
The total number of students voted are 54 + 60 + 36 = 150
For candidate A we have , w = 150 , a = 54 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{54}{150}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{54 × 100}{150}\)
p = \(\frac{540}{15}\)
p = 36
So, 54 is 36% of 150.
The percent of students who voted for the candidate A is 36%.

Question 11.
Candidate B
Answer: The percent of students who voted for the candidate B is 40%.

Explanation:
For candidate B we have , w = 150 , a = 60 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{60}{150}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{60 × 100}{150}\)
p = \(\frac{600}{15}\)
p = 40
So, 60 is 40% of 150.
The percent of students who voted for the candidate B is 40%.

Question 12.
Candidate C
Answer: The percent of students who voted for the candidate C is 24%.

Explanation:
For candidate C we have , w = 150 , a = 36 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{36}{150}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{36 × 100}{150}\)
p = \(\frac{360}{15}\)
p = 24
So, 36 is 24% of 150.
The percent of students who voted for the candidate C is 24%.

USING THE PERCENT EQUATION Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 13.
20% of 150 is what number?
Answer:  30

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{150}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{150 × 20}{100}\)
a = 15 × 2
a = 30
So, 30 is 20% of 150.

Question 14.
45 is what percent of 60?
Answer: 75%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{45}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{45 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{4,500}{60}\)
p = 75
So, 45 is 75% of 60.

Question 15.
35% of what number is 35?
Answer: 35 is 35% of 100.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{35}{w}\) = \(\frac{35}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{35 × 100}{35}\)
w = \(\frac{3500}{35}\)
w = 100
So, 35 is 35% of 100.

Question 16.
0.8% of 150 is what number?
Answer: 1.2 .

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{150}\) = \(\frac{0.8}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{150 × 0.8}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120}{100}\)
a = 1.2
So, 1.2 is 0.8% of 150.

Question 17.
29 is what percent of 20?
Answer: 145%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{29}{20}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{29 × 100}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{2,900}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{2,90}{2}\)
p = 145
So, 29 is 145% of 20.

Question 18.
0.5% of what number is 12?
Answer:

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{12}{w}\) = \(\frac{0.5}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{12 × 100}{0.5}\)
w = \(\frac{1200}{0.5}\)
w = 2,400.
So, 12 is 0.5% of 2,400.

Question 19.
What percent of 300 is 51?
Answer: 17%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{51}{300}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{51 × 100}{300}\)
p = \(\frac{51}{3}\)
p = 17
So, 51 is 17% of 300.

Question 20.
120% of what number is 102?
Answer: 85

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{102}{w}\) = \(\frac{120}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{102 × 100}{120}\)
w = \(\frac{1020}{12}\)
w = 85
So, 102 is 120% of 85.

YOU BE THE TEACHER Your friend uses the percent equation to answer the question. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 21.
What number is 35% of 20?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 6
Answer: yes , He is correct .

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{20}\) = \(\frac{35}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{20 × 35}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{700}{100}\)
a = 7
So, 7 is 35% of 20.

Question 22.
30 is 60% of what number?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 7
Answer: 30 is 60% of 50.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{30}{w}\) = \(\frac{60}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{30 × 100}{60}\)
w = \(\frac{300}{6}\)
w = 50
So, 30 is 60% of 50.

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A salesperson receives a 2.5% commission on sales. What commission does the salesperson receive for $8000 in sales?
Answer: He receives $200 for commission of the sale.

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{8000}\) = \(\frac{2.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{8000 × 2.5}{100}\)
a = 80 × 2.5
a = $200
So, $200 is 2.5% of $8000.
He receives $200 for commission of the sale.

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your school raised 125% of its fundraising goal. The school raised $6750. What was the goal?
Answer: The fundraising goal of the school is $5,400.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{6750}{w}\) = \(\frac{125}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{6750 × 100}{125}\)
w =54 × 100
w = $5,400
So, $6750 is 125% of $5,400.
The fundraising goal of the school is $5,400.

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The sales tax on the model rocket shown is $1.92. What is the percent of sales tax?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 8
Answer: The percent of sales tax on the rocket model  is 8%.

Explanation:
Given, The sales tax on the model rocket shown is $1.92.
The tax on the rocket is $24 , we have ,
w = 24 , a = 1.92 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{1.92}{24}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{1.92 × 100}{24}\)
p = \(\frac{192}{24}\)
p = 8
So, $1.92 is 8% of $24.
The percent of sales tax on the rocket model  is 8%.

PUZZLE There were n signers of the Declaration of Independence. The youngest was Edward Rutledge, who was x years old. The oldest was Benjamin Franklin, who was y years old.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 9
Question 26.
x is 25% of 104. What was Rutledge’s age?
Answer: The age of Rutledge is 26.

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{104}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{104 × 25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{104}{4}\)
a = 26
x = 26.
So, 26 is 25% of 104.

Question 27.
7 is 10% of y. What was Franklin’s age?
Answer: The Franklin’s age is 70.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{7}{w}\) = \(\frac{10}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{7 × 100}{10}\)
w = \(\frac{700}{10}\)
w = 70
y = 70.
So, 7 is 10% of 70.
The Franklin’s age is 70.

Question 28.
n is 80% of y. How many signers were there?
Answer: There are n = 56 members signers.

Explanation:
y = 70 , p = 80 ,
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{70}\) = \(\frac{80}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{70 × 80}{100}\)
a = 7 × 8
a =56
n = 56
So, 56 is 80% of 70.
There are n = 56 members signers.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 10

Question 29.
LOGIC
How can you tell whether a percent of a number will be greater than, less than, or equal to the number? Give examples to support your answer.
Answer: The percent of a number is less than 100% , Then the percent of the number will be less than the number.
The percent of a number is 100% , Then the percent of the number will be equal the number.
The percent of a number is greater than 100% , Then the percent of the number will be greater than the number.

Explanation:
If the percent of a number is less than 100% , Then the percent of the number will be less than the number.
For example , 80% of 50
= 0.8 × 50
= 40
80% < 100% ,  so 40 < 50.

If the percent of a number is 100% , Then the percent of the number will be equal the number.
For example , 100% of 50
= 1 × 50
= 50.
100% = 100% , So, 50 = 50.

If the percent of a number is greater than 100% , Then the percent of the number will be greater than the number.
For example , 120% of 50
= 1.2 × 50
= 60.
120% > 100% , So, 60 > 50.

Question 30.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In a survey, a group of students is asked their favorite sport. Eighteen students choose “other” sports.
a. How many students participate in the survey?
b. How many choose football?
Answer:  a. The number of students participated  are 80.
b. The number of students chose football are 30.

Explanation:
a. 18 students chose ” other” sports So, a = 18 ,
The percent of the “other” sport = 100% – (40% + 37.5%) = 22.5%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{18}{w}\) = \(\frac{22.5}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{18 × 100}{22.5}\)
w = \(\frac{1800}{22.5}\)
w =  80
So, 18 is 22.5% of 80.
The number of students participated  are 80.

b. 80 students are participated , so w = 80
The percent of the students who chose football is 37.5%
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{80}\) = \(\frac{37.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{80 × 37.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{3,000}{100}\)
a = 30
So, 30 is 37.5% of 80.
The number of students chose football are 30.

Question 31.
TRUE OR FALSE?
Tell whether the statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.
If W is 25% of Z, then Z : W is 75 : 25.
Answer: The statement is False.

Explanation:
Given , W is 25% of Z
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{W}{Z}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
So, \(\frac{Z}{W}\) = \(\frac{100}{25}\)
But given that Z : W is 75 : 25
So, The statement is False.

Question 32.
DIG DEEPER!
At a restaurant, the amount of your bill before taxes and tip is $19.83. A 6% sales tax is applied to your bill, and you leave a tip equal to 19% of the original amount. Use mental math to estimate the total amount of money you pay. Explain your reasoning. (Hint: Use 10% of the original amount.)
Answer: The total amount of the money to be paid is $22.18.

Explanation:
Given ,The amount of your bill before taxes and tip is $19.83.
A 6% sales tax is applied to your bill, and you leave a tip equal to 19% of the original amount.
bill before the tax = $19.83
sales tax = 6%
So, $19.83 – 6%
= $19.83 – 0.06
= $18.64
Tip = 19%
So, $18.64 + 19%
= $18.64 + 0.19
= $22.18
The total amount of the money to be paid is $22.18.

Question 33
REASONING
The table shows your test results in a math class. What score do you need on the last test to earn 90% of the total points on the tests?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 11
Answer: Of all the total test points you need 720 points to earn 90%

Explanation:
Total point value = 100 + 250 + 150 + 300 = 800
Given p = 90% , w = 800 , a= ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{800}\) = \(\frac{90}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{800 × 90}{100}\)
a = 8 × 90
a = 720
So, 720 is 90% of 800.
Finally, of all the total test points you need 720 points to earn 90%

Lesson 6.4 Percents of Increase and Decrease

EXPLORATION 1

Exploring Percent of Change
Work with a partner. Each year in the Columbia River Basin, adult salmon swim upriver to streams to lay eggs.
To go up the river, the adult salmon use fish ladders. But to go down the river, the young salmon must pass through several dams.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 1
At one time, there were electric turbines at each of the eight dams on the main stem of the Columbia and Snake Rivers. About 88% of the young salmon pass through a single dam unharmed.
a. One thousand young salmon pass through a dam. How many pass through unharmed?
b. One thousand young salmon pass through the river basin. How many pass through all 8 dams unharmed?
c. By what percent does the number of young salmon decrease when passing through a single dam?
d. Describe a similar real-life situation in which a quantity increases by a constant percent each time an event occurs.
Answer: a. 880 salmon passed through single dam unharmed.
b. Totally , 358 salmon pass through all 8 dams unharmed.
c. The percent of the number of young salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 12%
d. An example for, real-life situation in which a quantity increases by a constant percent each time an event occurs. is given below in explanation.

Explanation:
a. Given , One thousand young salmon pass through a dam. 88% of the young salmon pass through a single dam unharmed.
To know the number of salmon passed through unharmed we have,
88% of 1,000
= 88% × 1,000
= 0.88 × 1,000
= 880.
So, 880 salmon passed through single dam unharmed.

b. Given , One thousand young salmon pass through a dam. 88% of the young salmon pass through a single dam unharmed. To calculate number of salmon pass through all 8 dams unharmed are
number of  salmon passed through dam 1 , unharmed are 880 (as shown in part a)
number of  salmon passed through dam 2 , unharmed =  88%  of  880
= 0.88 × 880
= 774
number of  salmon passed through dam 3 , unharmed =  88%  of  774
= 0.88 × 774
= 681
number of  salmon passed through dam 4 , unharmed =  88%  of  681
= 0.88 × 681
= 599
number of  salmon passed through dam 5 , unharmed =  88%  of  599
= 0.88 × 599
= 527
number of  salmon passed through dam 6 , unharmed =  88%  of  527
= 0.88 × 527
= 463
number of  salmon passed through dam 7 , unharmed =  88%  of  463
= 0.88 × 463
= 407
number of  salmon passed through dam 8 , unharmed =  88%  of  407
= 0.88 × 407
= 358
Totally , 358 salmon pass through all 8 dams unharmed.

c. To calculate The percent of the number of young salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
The total percent of salmon is 100%, The percent of salmon pass through a single dam is 88%
So, 100% – 88% = 12%
Finally , The percent of the number of young salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 12%

d.  An Example of real-life situation in which a quantity increases by a constant percent each time an event occurs.  is ,  while we are filling the tank with water , The amount of water ingoing increases constantly with the speed of the motor power running the water , water levels in the tank increases by a constant percent each time until the tank is filled up with the water fully.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 2

Try It

Find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 1.
10 inches to 25 inches
Answer:  percent of change is 150%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 25 and old value = 10 , because a change of 10 to 25 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{25 – 10}{10}\)
= \(\frac{15}{10}\)
= \(\frac{15}{10}\) × 100
= 150%
So, percent of change is 150%

Question 2.
57 people to 65 people
Answer:  percent of change is 14%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 65 and old value = 57 , because a change of 57 to 65 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{65 – 57}{57}\)
= \(\frac{8}{57}\)
= \(\frac{8}{57}\) × 100
= 14.03 %
Approximately We can write it as 14 %
So, percent of change is 14%

Question 3.
In Example 2, what was the percent of change from 2014 to 2015?
Answer: percent of change is  – 44%

Explanation:
In Example 2, change from 2014 to 2015 , that is 18 to 10
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New  value – old  value}{old  value}\)
where New value = 10 and old value = 18 , because a change of 18 to 10 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{10 – 18}{18}\)
= \(\frac{-8}{18}\)
= – 0.444
=  – 0.444 × 100
=  – 44.4 %
Approximately We can write it as  – 44 %
So, percent of change is  – 44%

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
VOCABULARY
What does it mean for a quantity to change by n%?
Answer: The meaning of a quantity to change is given by, which the amount of quantity increases or decreases of its original value to new value is called percent of change,
Then percent of change can be in positive or negative depending on the value of change , if it is for n% then it can be increase or decrease in the quantity of change.

Question 5.
NUMBER SENSE
Without calculating, determine which situation has a greater percent of change. Explain.

  • 5 bonus points added to 50 points
  • 5 bonus points added to 100 points

Answer: 5 bonus points added to 50 points has the greater percent of change.

Explanation:
5 bonus points added to 50 points
Then 50 points to 55 points
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 55 and old value = 50 , because a change of 50 to 55 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{55 – 50}{50}\)
= \(\frac{5}{50}\)
= \(\frac{1}{10}\) × 100
= 10%
So, percent of change is 10%

5 bonus points added to 100 points
Then 100 points to 105 points
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 105 and old value = 100 , because a change of 100 to 105 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{105 – 100}{100}\)
= \(\frac{5}{100}\)
= \(\frac{1}{20}\) × 100
= 5%
So, percent of change is 5%

Percent of change of 5 bonus points added to 50 points is 10%
Percent of change of 5 bonus points added to 100 points is 5%
So, 5 bonus points added to 50 points has the greater percent of change.

FINDING A PERCENT OF CHANGE Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change.
Question 6.
8 feet to 24 feet
Answer: percent of change is increased that is 200%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 24 and old value = 8 , because a change of 8 to 24 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{24 -8}{8}\)
= \(\frac{16}{8}\)
= 2 × 100
= 200%
So, percent of change is 200%

Question 7.
300 miles to 210 miles
Answer: percent of change is decreased that is -30%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 210 and old value = 300 , because a change of300 to 210 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{210 – 300}{300}\)
= \(\frac{-90}{300}\)
= \(\frac{-9}{30}\) × 100
= -0.3 × 100
= -30%
So, percent of change is -30%

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
In one round of a game, you are asked how many bones are in a human body. If the percent error of your answer is at most 5%, you earn two points. If the percent error is at most 10%, but greater than 5%, you earn one point. You guess 195 bones. The correct answer is 206 bones. How many points do you earn?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 3
Answer: The percent Error we calculated  is at most of 5% so points we earned is 2 points

Explanation:
Given, You guess 195 bones. The correct answer is 206 bones.
The amount of error is 206 – 195 = 11
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 11 and Actual value = 206 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{11}{206}\)
= 0.053
= 0.053 × 100
=  5.3%
Approximately we can write as 5%
So, percent Error is 5%
Then , the percent Error we calculated  is at most of 5% so points we earned is 2 points

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
The manager of a restaurant offers a 20% decrease in price to tennis teams. A cashier applies a 10% decrease and then another 10% decrease. Is this the same as applying a 20% decrease? Justify your answer.
Answer: There is slight difference between these two methods but are approximately equal.

Explanation:
Given, The manager of a restaurant offers a 20% decrease in price to tennis teams.
Let the total price be 100
So, 100 decrease 20%
= 100 × (1 – 20%)
= 100 × (1 – 0.2)
= 80.

Given, A cashier applies a 10% decrease and then another 10% decrease.
Let the total price be 100
So, 100 decrease 10%
= 100 × (1 – 10%)
= 100 × (1 – 0.1)
= 90.

Again applying 10% decrease
90 decrease 10%
= 90 × (1 – 10%)
= 90 × (1 – 0.1)
= 81.

So, There is slight difference between these two methods but are approximately equal

Percents of Increase and Decrease Homework & Practice 6.4

Review & Refresh

Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 1.
What number is 25% of 64?
Answer:  16

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{64}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{64 × 25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{64}{4}\)
a = 16
So, 16 is 25% of 64.

Question 2.
39.2 is what percent of 112?
Answer: 35%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{39.2}{112}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{39.2 × 100}{112}\)
p = \(\frac{3,920}{112}\)
p = 35
So, 39.2 is 35% of 112.

Find the sum. Write fractions in simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{4}{7}\) + (- \(\frac{6}{7}\))
Answer:  – \(\frac{2}{7}\)

Explanation:
To find the sum of the fractions given, we have to do addition, that is
\(\frac{4}{7}\) + (- \(\frac{6}{7}\))
= \(\frac{4 – 6}{7}\)
= – \(\frac{2}{7}\)
So, The sum of \(\frac{4}{7}\) + (- \(\frac{6}{7}\)) is – \(\frac{2}{7}\)

Question 6.
– 4.621 + 3.925
Answer: – 0.696

Explanation:
To find the sum we have to add the given numbers , that is
– 4.621 + 3.925
=  3.925 – 4.621
= – 0.696
So, the sum of – 4.621 + 3.925 is – 0.696.

Question 7.
–\(\frac{5}{12}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
To find the sum of the fractions given, we have to do addition, that is
Given , –\(\frac{5}{12}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{5}{12}\)
Expand the fraction , multilpy the numerator and denominator by 3
We get , \(\frac{3 × 3}{3 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{3 × 3}{3 × 4}\) – \(\frac{5}{12}\)
= \(\frac{9}{12}\) – \(\frac{5}{12}\)
= \(\frac{9 – 5}{12}\)
= \(\frac{4}{12}\)
The simplest form of \(\frac{4}{12}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
So, The sum of –\(\frac{5}{12}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

EXPLORING PERCENT CHANGE You are given the percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed. By what percent does the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam? (See Exploration 1, p. 253.)
Question 8.
75%
Answer:  The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 25%

Explanation:
The percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed is 75%
Let the percent of salmon coming to the dam are 100%
The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
100% – 75% = 25%
So, The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 25%

Question 9.
80%
Answer: The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 20%

Explanation:
The percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed is 80%
Let the percent of salmon coming to the dam are 100%
The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
100% – 80% = 20%
So, The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 20%

Question 10.
62%
Answer: The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 38%

Explanation:
The percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed is 62%
Let the percent of salmon coming to the dam are 100%
The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
100% – 62% = 38%
So, The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 38%

Question 11.
94%
Answer: The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 6%

Explanation:
The percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed is 94%
Let the percent of salmon coming to the dam are 100%
The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
100% – 94% = 6%
So, The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 6%

FINDING A PERCENT OF CHANGE Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 12.
12 inches to 36 inches
Answer: percent of change is 200%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 36 and old value = 12 , because a change of 12 to 36 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{36 – 12}{12}\)
= \(\frac{24}{12}\)
= 2 × 100
= 200%
So, percent of change is 200%

Question 13.
75 people to 25 people
Answer: percent of change is 66%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 25 and old value = 75 , because a change of 75 to 25 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{25 – 75}{75}\)
= \(\frac{- 50}{75}\)
=  – 0.666
= – 0.666 × 100
= – 66.6%
Approximately we can write it as – 66%
So, percent of change is – 66%

Question 14.
50 pounds to 35 pounds
Answer: percent of change is – 30%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 35 and old value = 50 , because a change of 35 to 50 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{35 – 50}{50}\)
= \(\frac{- 15}{50}\)
= – 0.3
= – 0.3 × 100
= – 30%
So, percent of change is – 30%

Question 15.
24 songs to 78 songs
Answer: percent of change is 225%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 78 and old value = 24 , because a change of 24 to 78 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{78 – 24}{24}\)
= \(\frac{54}{24}\)
= 2.25 × 100
= 225%
So, percent of change is 225%

Question 16.
10 gallons to 24 gallons
Answer: percent of change is 140%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 24 and old value = 10 , because a change of 10 to 24 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{24 – 10}{10}\)
= \(\frac{14}{10}\)
= 1.4
= 1.4 × 100
= 140%
So, percent of change is 140%

Question 17.
72 paper clips to 63 paper clips
Answer: percent of change is – 12.5%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 63 and old value = 72 , because a change of 72 to 63 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{63 – 72}{72}\)
= \(\frac{- 9}{72}\)
= \(\frac{- 1}{8}\)
= – 0.125
= – 0.125 × 100
= – 12.5%
So, percent of change is – 12.5%

Question 18.
16 centimeters to 44.2 centimeters
Answer: percent of change is 176%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 44.2 and old value = 16 , because a change of 16 to 44.2 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{44.2 – 16}{16}\)
= \(\frac{28.2}{16}\)
= 1.76
= 1.76 × 100
= 176%
So, percent of change is 176%

Question 19.
68 miles to 42.5 miles
Answer: percent of change is – 37.5%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 42.5 and old value = 68 , because a change of 68 to 42.5 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{42.5 – 68}{68}\)
= \(\frac{- 25.5}{68}\)
= – 0.375
= – 0.375 × 100
= – 37.5%
So, percent of change is – 37.5%

Question 20.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the percent increase from 18 to 26. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 4
Answer: No , The percent of change of 18 to 26 is positive (increase) that is 44.4%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 26 and old value = 18 , because a change of 18 to 26 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{26 – 18}{18}\)
= \(\frac{8}{18}\)
= 0.444
= 0.444 × 100
= 44.4%
So, percent of change is 44.4%

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Last week, you finished Level 2 of a video game in 32 minutes. Today, you finish Level 2 in 28 minutes. What is the percent of change?
Answer: The percent of change from last week to today is – 12.5%

Explanation:
Given, you finished Level 2 of a video game in 32 minutes. Today, you finish Level 2 in 28 minutes.
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 28 and old value = 32 , because a change of 32 to 28 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{28 – 32}{32}\)
= \(\frac{- 4}{32}\)
= \(\frac{- 1}{8}\)
= – 0.125
= – 0.125 × 100
= – 12.5%
So, percent of change is – 12.5%

Question 22.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You estimate that a baby pig weighs 20 pounds. The actual weight of the baby pig is 16 pounds. Find the percent error.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 5
Answer: The percent Error is 20%.

Explanation:
Given , You estimate that a baby pig weighs 20 pounds. The actual weight of the baby pig is 16 pounds.
The amount of error is 20 – 16 = 4
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 4 and Actual value = 20 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{4}{20}\)
= \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= 0.2
= 0.2 × 100
=  20%
So, percent Error is 20% .

Question 23.
PRECISION
A researcher estimates that a fossil is 3200 years old. Using carbon-14 dating, a procedure used to determine the age of an object, the researcher discovers that the fossil is 3600 years old.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 6.1
a. Find the percent error.
b. What other estimate gives the same percent error? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: a. The percent Error is 11.1%
b. The other estimate that gives the same percent error is 3,199 years old.

Explanation:
a. Given, A researcher estimates that a fossil is 3200 years old  the researcher discovers that the fossil is 3600 years old.
The amount of error is 3600 – 3200 = 400
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 400 and Actual value = 3600 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{400}{3600}\)
= \(\frac{1}{9}\)
= 0.111
= 0.111 × 100
=  11.1%
So, percent Error is 11.1% .

b. If The other estimate that gives the same percent error is 3,199 years old.
The amount of error is 3600 – 3199 = 401
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 401 and Actual value = 3600 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{401}{3600}\)
= 0.111
= 0.111 × 100
=  11.1%
So, percent Error is 11.1% .
So , The other estimate that gives the same percent error is 3,199 years old.

FINDING A PERCENT OF CHANGE Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 24.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) to \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer: percent of change is 100%

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) as 0.25
\(\frac{1}{2}\) as  0.5 , so , 0.25 to 0.5
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 0.5 and old value = 0.25 , because a change of 0.25 to 0.5 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{0.5 – 0.25}{0.25}\)
= \(\frac{0.25}{0.25}\)
= 1 × 100
= 100%
So, percent of change is 100%

Question 25.
\(\frac{4}{5}\) to \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Answer: percent of change is – 25%

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{4}{5}\) as 0.8
\(\frac{3}{5}\) as 0.6 , so , 0.8 to 0.6
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 0.6 and old value = 0.8 , because a change of 0.8 to 0.6 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{0.6 – 0.8}{0.8}\)
= \(\frac{-0.2}{0.8}\)
= – 0.25
= – 0.25 × 100
= – 25%
So, percent of change is – 25%

Question 26.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) to \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Answer: percent of change is 135%

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{3}{8}\) as 0.37
\(\frac{7}{8}\) as 0.87 , So 0.37 to 0.87
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 0.87 and old value = 0.37 , because a change of 0.37 to 0.87 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{0.87 – 0.37}{0.37}\)
= \(\frac{0.5}{0.37}\)
= 1.35
= 1.35 × 100
= 135%
So, percent of change is 135%

Question 27.
\(\frac{5}{4}\) to \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Answer: percent of change is – 70.4%

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{5}{4}\) as 1.25
\(\frac{3}{8}\) as 0.37 , So, 1.25 to 0.37
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 0.37 and old value = 1.25 , because a change of 1.25 to 0.37 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{0.37 – 1.25}{1.25}\)
= \(\frac{- 0.88}{1.25}\)
= – 0.704
= – 0.704 × 100
= – 70.4%
So, percent of change is – 70.4%

Question 28.
CRITICAL THINKING
Explain why a change from 20 to 40 is a 100% increase, but a change from 40 to 20 is a 50% decrease.
Answer: From 20 to 40 is a 100% increase because of increase in number value and from 40 to 20 is a 50% decrease because of decrease in number value.

Explanation:
Given , 20 to 40
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 40 and old value = 20 , because a change of 20 to 40 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{40 – 20}{20}\)
= \(\frac{20}{20}\)
= 1 × 100
= 100%
Then , percent of change is 100%
So, The percent of change from 20 to 40 is a 100% increase

Given , 40 to 20
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 20 and old value = 40 , because a change of 40 to 20 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{20 – 40}{40}\)
= \(\frac{- 20}{40}\)
= \(\frac{- 1}{2}\)
= – 0.5
= – 0.5 × 100
= – 50%
Then , percent of change is – 50%
So , The percent of  change from 40 to 20 is a 50% decrease.

Finally , From 20 to 40 is a 100% increase because of increase in number value and from 40 to 20 is a 50% decrease because of decrease in number value.

Question 29.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows population data for a community.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 6
a. What is the percent of change from 2011 to 2017?
b. Predict the population in 2023. Explain your reasoning.
Answer: a.  The percent of change from 2011 to 2017  is 169%
b. The estimated population of 2023 will be 158,000.

Explanation:
a. Given 2011 to 2017 , so from the table we know it as , 118,000 to 138,000
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 138,000  and old value = 118,000 , because a change of 118,000 to 138,000 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{138,000 – 118,000}{118,000}\)
= \(\frac{20,000}{118,000\)
= 0.169
=0.169 × 100
= 169%
So, percent of change is 169%

b. The population from 2011 to 2017 increased from 118,000 to 138,000,
The difference between 2011 to 2017 is 6 years ,So the population increase in numbers are
138,000 – 118,000 = 20,000.
If the population in 6 years is increased by 20,000.
Then from 2017 to 2023 is 6 years , So increase in population is 20,000
Then for 2023 The population will be 138,000 + 20,000 = 158,000
finally, The estimated population of 2023 will be 158,000.

Question 30.
GEOMETRY
Suppose the length and the width of the sandbox are doubled.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 7
a. Find the percent of change in the perimeter.
b. Find the percent of change in the area.
Answer: a. the percent of change in the perimeter of sandbox is 100%
b. the percent of change in the area of sandbox is

Explanation:
a. Given , length of sandbox = 10 ft , width of sandbox = 6 ft
The sandbox is in the form of a rectangle , So the perimeter of a rectangle is P = 2 ( l + w) , where l = length of the rectangle and  w = width of the rectangle,
Then P = 2( l + w )
= 2 ( 10 + 6 )
= 2 × 16
=18
So, the perimeter of sandbox is 32 ft

Given that , the length and the width of the sandbox are doubled.
Then l = 20 ft and w = 12 ft ,
P = 2( l + w )
= 2 ( 20 + 12 )
= 2 × 32
= 64
So, the perimeter of sandbox after the length and the width are doubled. is 64 ft .
The perimeter of sandbox changed  from 32 ft to 64 ft , Then
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 64 and old value = 32 , because a change of 32 to 64 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{64 – 32}{32}\)
= \(\frac{32}{32}\)
= 1 × 100
= 100%
So, percent of change is 100%
Finally , the percent of change in the perimeter of sandbox is 100%

b. Given , length of sandbox = 10 ft , width of sandbox = 6 ft
The sandbox is in the form of a rectangle , So the area of a rectangle is A = l × w ,
Then A = l × w
= 10 × 6 = 60
So , The Area of Sandbox is 60 ft

Given that , the length and the width of the sandbox are doubled.
Then , l = 20 ft and w = 12 ft ,
Then A = l × w
= 20 × 12 = 240
So , The Area of Sandbox after the length and the width are doubled is 240 ft
The area of sandbox changed from 60 ft to 240 ft
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 240 and old value = 60 , because a change of 60 to 240 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{240 – 60}{60}\)
= \(\frac{180}{60}\)
= 3
= 3 × 100
= 300%
So, percent of change is 300%
Finally , the percent of change in the area of sandbox is 300%.

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A company fills boxes with about 21 ounces of cereal. The acceptable percent error in filling a box is 2.5%. Box A contains 20.4 ounces of cereal and Box B contains 21.5 ounces of cereal. Tell whether each box is an acceptable weight.
Answer: The percent error of Box A is greater than acceptable percent error that is 2.8% and The percent error of Box B is less than acceptable percent error that is 2.3%.

Explanation:
For Box A , Given , A company fills boxes with about 21 ounces of cereal and Box A contains 20.4 ounces of cereal
The amount of error is 21 – 20.4 = 0.6
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 0.6 and Actual value = 21 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{0.6}{21}\)
= 0.028
= 0.028 × 100
=  2.8%
So, percent Error is 2.8%
The percent error of Box A is greater than acceptable percent error that is 2.8%

For Box B A company fills boxes with about 21 ounces of cereal and  Box B contains 21.5 ounces of cereal.
The amount of error is 21.5 – 21 = 0.5
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 0.5 and Actual value = 21 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{0.5}{21}\)
= 0.023
= 0.023 × 100
=  2.3%
So, percent Error is 2.3%
The percent error of Box B is less than acceptable percent error that is 2.3%

Question 32.
PRECISION
Find the percent of change from June to September in the mile-run times shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 8
Answer: The percent of change from June to September in the mile-run times is -26%.

Explanation:
Given , change from 7.45 to 5.51
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 5.51 and old value = 7.45 , because a change of 7.45 to 5.51 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{5.51 – 7.45}{7.45}\)
= \(\frac{- 1.94}{7.45}\)
= – 0.26
= – 0.26 × 100
= – 26%
So, percent of change is – 26%
Finally , The percent of change from June to September in the mile-run times is -26%.

Question 33.
CRITICAL THINKING
A number increases by 10% and then decreases by 10%. Will the result be greater than, less than or equal to, the original number? Explain.
Answer: A number increases by 10% and then decreases by 10% , the result will be less than the original number.

Explanation:
Let original number is 100
Given ,The original number increases by 10%
The new number = original number + The original number increases by 10%
= 100 + ( 100 × 10%)
= 100 + ( 100 × 0.1)
= 100 + 10
= 110
So, The new number is 110.

Let the original number is 110
Given ,The original number decreases by 10%
The new number = original number – The original number decreases by 10%
= 110 – ( 110 × 10%)
= 110 – ( 110 × 0.1)
= 110 – 11
= 99
So, The new number is 99

99 < 100 .
So , A number increases by 10% and then decreases by 10% , the result will be less than the original number.

Question 34.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You want to reduce your daily calorie consumption by about 9%. You currently consume about 2100 calories per day. Use mental math to estimate the number of calories you should consume in one week to meet your goal. Explain.
Answer: The estimated calories you should consume per week is 13,377.

Explanation:
Given ,You currently consume about 2100 calories per day, reduce your daily calorie consumption by about 9%.
so, The calories you have to consume after reduction of 9% is
The new number = original number – The original number decreases by 9%
= 2100 – ( 2100 × 9%)
= 2100 – (2100 × 0.09)
= 2100 – 189
= 1,911 .
The calories you have to consume after reduction of 9% is 1,911

The calories you should consume per day is 1,911.
The calories you should consume per week (7 days) = 1,911 × 7 = 13,377.

Finally , The estimated calories you should consume per week is 13,377.

Question 35.
DIG DEEPER!
Donations to an annual fundraiser are 15% greater this year than last year. Last year, donations were10% greater than the year before. The amount raised this year is $10,120. How much was raised two years ago?
Answer: The amount raised 2 years ago is $7,741.8.

Explanation:
Given , The amount raised this year is $10,120.
Let the amount raised last year = x
Donations are 15% greater than last year
The amount raised last year = The amount raised this year – ((The amount raised this year .15%)
x = 10,120 – ( 10,120 × 0.15)
x = 10,120 – 1,518
x = 8,602
The amount raised last year = $8,602.

We know that , The amount raised last year = $8,602.
Let the amount raised the year before = x
Donations are 10% greater than the year before
The amount raised the year before = The amount raised last year – ((The amount raised last year .10%)
x = 8,602 – ( 8,602 × 0.1)
x = 8,602 – 860.2
x = 7,741.8
The amount raised the year before = $7,741.8.

So, The amount raised 2 years ago is $7,741.8.

Question 36.
REASONING
Forty students are in the science club. Of those, 45% are girls. This percent increases to 56% after more girls join the club. How many more girls join?
Answer:  The number of new girls join the club is 10.

Explanation:
Let the number of new girls = x
The number of girls = x + 18
The number of students = x + 40
So, the number of girls = 56% The number of students
x + 18 = 0.56( x + 40 )
x + 18  = 0.56x + 22.4
0.56x – x = 22.4 – 18
0.44x = 4.4
x = \(\frac{4.4}{0.44}\)
x = 10.
So , The number of new girls is 10.

Lesson 6.5 Discounts and Markups

EXPLORATION 1

Comparing Discounts
Work with a partner.
a. The same pair of earrings is on sale at three stores. Which store has the best price? Use the percent models to justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 1
b. You buy the earrings on sale for 30% off at a different store. You pay $22.40. What was the original price of the earrings? Use the percent model to justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 2
c. You sell the earrings in part(b) to a friend for 60% more than what you paid. What is the selling price? Use a percent model to justify your answer.
Answer:
a. For store A ,The sales price is $27
For store B  ,The sales price is $24.5
For store C ,The sales price is $31.2

b. the original price  of the earrings is $32

c. the selling price is $35.84.

Explanation:
a. Given store A = $45 with 40% off

We know , The sales price be 100% – 40% = 60% of the original price
sales price = 60% of 45
= 0.6 × 45 = 27
So, The sales price is $27

For store B = $49 with 50% off

We know , The sales price be 100% – 50% = 50% of the original price
sales price = 50% of 49
= 0.5 × 49 = 24.5
So, The sales price is $24.5

For store c = $39 with 20% off

We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 39
= 0.8 × 39 = 31.2
So, The sales price is $31.2

b. Given , You buy the earrings on sale for 30% off at a different store. You pay $22.40
The saples price = 100% – 30% = 70%

we know  a = 22.4 , p = 70% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
22.4 = 0.7 × w
w = \(\frac{22.4}{0.7}\)
w = 32.
So , the original price of the earrings is $32

c. Given , You sell the earrings in part(b) to a friend for 60% more than what you paid.
If the selling price is more than the buying price then it is called markup


Here , the markup is 60% of $22.4
a = p% × w
a = 0.6 × 22.4
a = 13.44
So, the markup is  $13.44
We know that selling price = cost of buying + markup
= 22.4 + 13.44
= 35.84
So , the selling price is $35.84.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 3

Try It

Question 1.
The original price of a skateboard is $50. The skateboard is on sale for 20% off. What is the sale price?
Answer: The sales price of skateboard is $40

Explanation:
Given , skateboard is $50 with 20% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 50
= 0.8 × 50 = 40
So, The sales price is $40

Question 2.
The discount on a DVD is 50%. It is on sale for $10. What is the original price of the DVD?
Answer: The original price of DVD is $20.

Explanation:
Given , discount on a DVD is 50%. , It is on sale for $10
We know , The sales price be 100% – 50% = 50%
a = p% × w
10 = 0.5 × w
w = \(\frac{10}{0.5}\)
w = 20
So, The original price is $20.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
WRITING
Describe how to find the sale price of an item that has a 15% discount.
Answer: To get the sales price , The discount percent must be cleared from the total percent of sales price , it gives the sales percentage of the original price , which is used to find the sales price.
So, The sales price = original price minus discount.

Explanation:
Let the original price be $50 with 15% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 15% = 85% of the original price
sales price = 85% of 50
= 0.85 × 50 = 42.5
So, The sales price is $42.5

FINDING A SALE PRICE Find the sale price. Use a percent model to check your answer.
Question 4.
A portable table tennis set costs $30 before a 30% discount.
Answer: The sales price of portable table tennis set is $21.

Explanation:
Given , tennis set is $30 with 30% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 30% = 70% of the original price
sales price = 70% of 30
= 0.7 × 30 = 21
So, The sales price is $21.

Question 5.
The original price of an easel is $70. The easel is on sale for 20% off.
Answer: The sales price  of an easel is $56.

Explanation:
Given , easel is $70 with 20% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 70
= 0.8 × 70 = 56
So, The sales price is $56.

FINDING AN ORIGINAL PRICE Find the original price. Use a percent model to check your answer.
Question 6.
A bracelet costs $36 after a 25% discount.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 4
Answer: The original price of bracelet is $48.

Explanation: 
Given , discount on a bracelet is 25%. , It is cost  $36  after discount
We know , The sales price be 100% – 25% = 75%
a = p% × w
36 = 0.75 × w
w = \(\frac{36}{0.75}\)
w = 48
So, The original price is $48.

Question 7.
The discount on a toy robot is 40%. The toy robot is on sale for $54.
Answer: The sale price toy robot is $32.4 .

Explanation: 
Given , discount on a toy robot is 40%. The toy robot is on sale for $54.
We know , The sales price be 100% – 40% = 60%
a = p% × w
a = 0.6 × 54
a = 32.4
So, The sale price is $32.4 .

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You have two coupons for a store. The first coupon applies a $15 discount to a single purchase, and the second coupon applies a 10% discount to a single purchase. You can only use one coupon on a purchase. When should you use each coupon? Explain.
Answer: The first coupon of $15 discount is to be used on your highest cost of purchase  and the second coupon with 10% off is to be used on your least cost of purchase .

Explanation:
Given , The first coupon applies a $15 discount to a single purchase,
Let the purchase be $50
Then the first coupon applies = $50 – $15 = $35.
So, when the first coupon applies price will be $35.

Given , the second coupon applies a 10% discount to a single purchase
Let the original price be $50 and with 10% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 10% = 90% of the original price
sales price = 90% of 50
= 0.9 × 50 = 45
So, The sales price is $45.
Here , we can see that $15 discount is offering the reduction of the original price and  discount with 10% of is offering to pay the 90% of its original price.

Finally , The first coupon of $15 discount is to be used on your highest cost of purchase  and the second coupon with 10% off is to be used on your least cost of purchase .

Question 9.
A store sells memory cards for $25 each.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 5
a. The markup for each memory card is 25%. How much did the store pay for 50 memory cards?
b. The store offers a discount when a customer buys two or more memory cards. A customer pays $47.50 for two memory cards. What is the percent of discount?
c. How much does a customer pay for three memory cards if the store increases the percent of discount in part (b) by 2%?
Answer: a. The store pay $937.5 for 50 memory cards
b. The discount offered by the store is 5%
c. The customer paid $69.75 for 3 memory cards.

Explanation:
a. The markup is 25% of $25
a = p% × w
= 25% × 25
= 0.25 × 25
= 6.25
So , the markup is $6.25.
To , find the cost to store , we have
cost to store = selling price – markup
= $25 – $6.25
= $18.75.
The cost to store for each memory card is $18.75.
Then for 50 memory cards = 50 × $18.75 = $937.5

b. A customer pays $47.50 for two memory cards.
Then for one memory card \(\frac{47.5}{2}\) = $23.75
we have , a = $23.75 , w = $25 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{23.75}{25}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{23.75 × 100}{25}\)
p = \(\frac{2375}{25}\)
p = 95
So, 23.75 is 95% of 25.
To find the discount , = The percent of original price – the percent of selling price
=  100% – 95% = 5%
So, The discount offered by the store is 5%

c. If the discount is increased by 2% , Then the discount offered by store is 5% + 2% = 7%
The amount of selling price = 100% – 7% = 93%
So , 93% of $25
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{25}\) = \(\frac{93}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{25 × 93}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2325}{100}\)
a = 23.25
So, The amount after  the discount is $23.25
Then for 3 memory cards = $23.25 × 3 = $69.75

The customer paid $69.75 for 3 memory cards.

Discounts and Markups Homework & Practice 6.5

Review & Refresh

Identify the percent of change as an increase or decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 1.
16 meters to 20 meters
Answer: The percent of change is 25%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 20 and old value = 16 , because a change of 16 to 20 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{20 – 16}{16}\)
= \(\frac{4}{16}\)
= \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 0.25
= 0.25 × 100
= 25%
So, percent of change is 25%

Question 2.
9 points to 4 points
Answer: The percent of change is – 55.5%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 4 and old value = 9 , because a change of 9 to 4 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{4 – 9}{9}\)
= \(\frac{- 5}{9}\)
= – 0.555
= – 0.555 × 100
= – 55.5%
So, percent of change is – 55.5%

Question 3.
15 ounces to 5 ounces
Answer: The percent of change is – 66.6%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 5 and old value = 15 , because a change of 15 to 5 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{5 – 15}{15}\)
= \(\frac{- 10}{15}\)
= – 0.666
= – 0.666 × 100
= – 66.6%
So, percent of change is – 66.6%

Question 4.
38 staples to 55 staples
Answer:

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 55 and old value = 38 , because a change of 38 to 55 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{55 – 38}{38}\)
= \(\frac{17}{38}\)
= 0.447
= 0.447 × 100
= 44.7%
So, percent of change is 44.7%

Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{4}{7}\left(-\frac{1}{6}\right)\)
Answer: The product of  \(\frac{4}{7}\left(-\frac{1}{6}\right)\) is 0.094.

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{4}{7}\left(-\frac{1}{6}\right)\) as 0.571 ( – 0.166)
To find the product we have to multiply the two numbers
= 0.571 × ( – 0.166)
= 0.094
So, The product of  \(\frac{4}{7}\left(-\frac{1}{6}\right)\) is 0.094.

Question 6.
– 1.58(6.02)
Answer: The product of – 1.58(6.02) is  – 9.51.

Explanation:
To find the product we have to multiply the two numbers
= – 1.58 × (6.02)
=  – 9.51
So, The product of – 1.58(6.02) is  – 9.51.

Question 7.
– 3(- 2\(\frac{1}{8}\))
Answer:

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
– 3(- 2\(\frac{1}{8}\)) as – 3 ( – 2.12)
To find the product we have to multiply the two numbers
= – 3 × ( – 2.12)
=  6.36
So, The product of  – 3 ( – 2.12) is 6.36

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

COMPARING DISCOUNTS The same item is on sale at two stores. Which one is the better price? Use percent models to justify your answer. (See Exploration 1, p. 259.)
Question 8.
60% off $60 or 55% off $50
Answer: The item has better price at 55% off $50 .

Explanation:
a. Given , 60% off $60.
We know , The sales price be 100% – 60% = 40% of the original price
sales price = 40% of 60
= 0.4 × 60 = 24
So, The sales price is $24

b. Given , 55% off $50

We know , The sales price be 100% – 55% = 45% of the original price
sales price = 45% of 50
= 0.45 × 50 = 22.5
So, The sales price is $22.5

Question 9.
85% off $90 or 70% off $65
Answer: The item has better price at 85% off $90 .

Explanation:

a. Given , 85% off $90
We know , The sales price be 100% –85% = 15% of the original price
sales price = 15% of 90
= 0.15 × 90 = 13.5
So, The sales price is $13.5 .

b. Given , 70% off $65

We know , The sales price be 100% –70% = 30% of the original price
sales price = 30% of 65
= 0.3 × 65 = 19.5
So, The sales price is $19.5.

USING TOOLS Copy and complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 6
Answer:
10. Given , Original price of the item is $ 80 , percent of discount is 20% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $64.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 80
= 0.8 × 80 = 64
So, The sales price is $64.

11. Given , Original price of the item is $42 , percent of discount is 15% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $35.7.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 15% = 85% of the original price
sales price = 85% of 42
= 0.85 × 42 = 35.7
So, The sales price is $35.7.

12. Given , Original price of the item is $120 , percent of discount is 80% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $24.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 80% = 20% of the original price
sales price = 20% of 120
= 0.2 × 120 = 24
So, The sales price is $24.

13. Given , Original price of the item is $112 , percent of discount is 32% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $76.16.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 32% = 68% of the original price
sales price = 68% of 112
= 0.68 × 112 = 76.16
So, The sales price is $76.16.

14. Given , Original price of the item is $69.8 , percent of discount is 60% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $27.92.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 60% = 40% of the original price
sales price = 40% of 69.8
= 0.4 × 69.8 = 27.92
So, The sales price is $27.92.

15. Given , sales price of the item is $40 , percent of discount is 25% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $53.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 25% = 75%
we know  a = 40 , p = 75% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 75% × w
40 = 0.75 × w
w = \(\frac{40}{0.75}\)
w = 53
So , the original price of the earrings is $53.

16. Given , sales price of the item is $57 , percent of discount is 5% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $60.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 5% = 95%
we know  a = 57 , p = 95% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 95% × w
57 = 0.95 × w
w = \(\frac{57}{0.95}\)
w = 60
So , the original price of the earrings is $60.

17. Given , sales price of the item is $90 , percent of discount is 80% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $450.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 80% = 20%
we know  a = 90 , p = 20% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 20% × w
90 = 0.2 × w
w = \(\frac{90}{0.2}\)
w = 450
So , the original price of the earrings is $450.

18. Given , sales price of the item is $72 , percent of discount is 64% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $200.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 64% = 36%
we know  a = 72 , p = 36% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 36% × w
72 = 0.36 × w
w = \(\frac{72}{0.36}\)
w = 200
So , the original price of the earrings is $200.

19. Given , sales price of the item is $146.54 , percent of discount is 15% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $172.4.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 15% = 85%
we know  a = 146.54 , p = 85% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 85% × w
146.54 = 0.85 × w
w = \(\frac{146.54}{0.85}\)
w = 172.4
So , the original price of the earrings is $172.4.

20. Given , original price  of the item is $60 , sales price of the item is $45 , Find percent of discount ?
Answer: The percent of discount is 25% .

Explanation:
We have a = 45 , w = 60 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{45}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{45 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{4,500}{60}\)
p = 75
So, 45 is 75% of 60.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 75%
= 25%.
So, The percent of discount is 25% .

21. Given , original price  of the item is $82 , sales price of the item is $65.6 , Find percent of discount ?
Answer: The percent of discount is 20% .

Explanation:
We have a = 65.6 , w = 82 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{65.6}{82}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{65.6 × 100}{82}\)
p = \(\frac{6,560}{82}\)
p = 80
So, 65.6 is 80% of 82.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 80%
= 20%.
So, The percent of discount is 20% .

22. Given , original price  of the item is $95 , sales price of the item is $61.75 , Find percent of discount ?
Answer: The percent of discount is 35% .

Explanation:
We have a = 61.75 , w = 95 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{61.75}{95}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{61.75 × 100}{95}\)
p = \(\frac{6,175}{95}\)
p = 65
So, 61.75 is 65% of 90.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 65%
= 35%.
So, The percent of discount is 35% .

FINDING A SELLING PRICE .

Question 23.
Cost to store: $50
Markup: 10%
Answer:  The selling price is $55.

Explanation:
The markup is 10% of $50
a = p% × w
= 10% × 50
= 0.1 × 50
= 5
So , the markup is $5.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $50 + $5
= $55.
The selling price is $55.

Question 24.
Cost to store: $80
Markup: 60%
Answer: The selling price is $128.

Explanation:
The markup is 60% of $80
a = p% × w
= 60% × 80
= 0.6 × 80
= 48
So , the markup is $48.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $80 + $48
= $128.
The selling price is $128.

Question 25.
Cost to store: $140
Markup: 25%
Answer: The selling price is $175.

Explanation:
The markup is 25% of $140
a = p% × w
= 25% × 140
= 0.25 × 140
= 35
So , the markup is $35.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $140 + $35
= $175.
The selling price is $175.

Question 26.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
A store pays $60 for an item. Your friend finds the selling price when the markup is 20%. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 7
Answer: No , The selling price is $72.

Explanation:
Given , The markup is 20% of $60
a = p% × w
= 20% × 60
= 0.2 × 60
= 12
So , the markup is $12.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $60 + $12
= $72.
The selling price is $72.

Question 27.
STRUCTURE
The scooter is being sold at a 10% discount. The original price is shown. Which methods can you use to find the new sale price? Which method do you prefer? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 8
Answer: The sales price is $37.8. Used the method of Multiplying $42 by 0.9.

Explanation:
By Using the method of Multiplying $42 by 0.9
We know , The sales price be 100% – 10% = 90% of the original price
sales price = 90% of 42
= 0.9 × 42 = 37.8
So, The sales price is $37.8.

Question 28.
NUMBER SENSE
The original price of an item is P dollars. Is the price of the item with an 18% markup the same as multiplying the original price by 1.18? Use two expressions to justify your answer.
Answer: The selling price is $1.18P and it is same as multiplying the original price by 1.18 .

Explanation:
Given , The original price of an item is P dollars.
The markup is 18% of $P
a = p% × w
= 18% × P
= 0.18 × P
= $0.18P
So , the markup is $0.18P.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $P + $0.18P
= $P ( 1 + 0.18 )
= $1.18P.
The selling price is $1.18P.

The given method is multiplying the original price by 1.18,
The original price is $P = $P × 1018.
So , The selling price is $1.18P.

Finally , The selling price is $1.18P and it is same as multiplying the original price by 1.18 .

Question 29.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are shopping for a video game system.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 9
a. At which store should you buy the system?
b. Store A has a weekend sale. What discount must Store A offer for you to buy the system there?
Answer: a. you should buy the system at store C has The selling price is $200.
b. To buy the system at store A  , it should have the discount of  28.6%.

a. Given , For store A cost to store is $162 , Markup is 40%
Then , The markup is 40% of $162
a = p% × w
= 40% × 162
= 0.4 × 162
= 64.8
So , the markup is $64.8.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $162 + $64.8
= $226.8.
So , For store A , The selling price is $226.8.

Given , For store B cost to store is $155 , Markup is 30%
Then , The markup is 30% of $155
a = p% × w
= 30% × 155
= 0.3 × 155
= 46.5
So , the markup is $46.5.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $155 + $46.5
= $201.5.
So , For store B , The selling price is $201.5.

Given , For store C cost to store is $160 , Markup is 25%
Then , The markup is 25% of $160
a = p% × w
= 25% × 160
= 0.25 × 160
= 40
So , the markup is $40.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $160 + $40
= $200.
So , For store C , The selling price is $200.

you should buy the system at store C has The selling price is $200.

b. Given , Store A has a weekend sale, to buy the system there , it should have the discount of ,
For store A , The selling price is $226.8 , cost to store is $162
We know a = $162 , w = $226.8
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{162}{226.8}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{162 × 100}{226.8}\)
p = \(\frac{16,200}{226.8}\)
p = 71.4%
So, 162 is 71.4% of 226.8.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 71.4%
= 28.6%.
So, The percent of discount is 28.6% .
Hence , To buy the system at store A  , it should have the discount of  28.6%.

Question 30.
DIG DEEPER!
A pool manager balances the pH level of a pool. The price of a bucket of chlorine tablets is $90, and the price of a pH test kit is $11. The manager uses a coupon that applies a 40% discount to the total cost of the two items. How much money does the pool manager pay for each item?
Answer: The pool manager pays for each item $60.6.

Explanation:
Now, to find the money the pool manager pay for each item
The price of a bucket of  chlorine tablets is = $90.
The price of a pH test kit = $11.
So, to get the total price of both items we add both prices:
$90 + $11 = $101.
Total cost of two items = $101.
As, given a coupon that applies a 40% discount to the total cost of the two items.
Now, to get the total cost by applying discount:
101 – (40%  of 101)
= 101 – (0.4 × 101)
= 101 – 40.4
= 60.6
So, The pool manager pays for each item $60.6

 

 

Question 31.
PRECISION
You buy a pair of jeans at a department store.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 10
a. What is the percent of discount to the nearest percent?
b. What is the percent of sales tax to the nearest tenth of a percent?
c. The price of the jeans includes a 60% markup. After the discount, what is the percent of markup to the nearest percent?
Answer: a. The percent of discount is to the nearest percent 25% .
b. The percent of sales tax to the nearest percent is 7%.
c. The percent of markup to the nearest percent is 54%

Explanation:
a. To find the percent of discount to the nearest percent , we have
a = 29.99 , w = 39.99 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{29.99}{39.99}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{29.99 × 100}{39.99}\)
p = 0.749 × 100
p = 74.9
So, 29.99 is 74.9% of 39.99.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 74.9%
= 24.9%.
So, The percent of discount is 25% .

b. To find the percent of sales tax to the nearest tenth of a percent we have
sales tax = 1.95 , price = 29.99 , so , a = 1.95 , w = 29.99 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{1.95}{29.99}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{1.95 × 100}{29.99}\)
p = 0.065 × 100
p = 6.5
So, 1.95 is 6.5% of 29.99.
Thus , The percent of sales tax is 7%

c. Given , The price of the jeans includes a 60% markup.
The markup is 60% of $39.99
a = p% × w
= 60% × 39.99
= 0.6 × 39.99
= 23.99
So , the markup is $23.99.
To , find the original price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
cost to store = selling price – markup
= $39.99 – $23.99
= $15.99.
The selling price is $15.99.
After the discount, The amount is $29.99
To know the mark up we have , a = 15.99 , w = 29.99
a = p% × w
p% = \(\frac{a}{w}\)
p% = \(\frac{15.99}{29.99}\)
p% = 0.533
p = 0.533 × 100
p = 53.3 .%
So , The percent of markup to the nearest percent is 54%

Question 32.
CRITICAL THINKING
You buy a bicycle helmet for $22.26, which includes 6% sales tax. The helmet is discounted 30% off the selling price. What is the original price?
Answer: The original price of the helmet is $30.

Explanation:
Given , You buy a bicycle helmet for $22.26, which includes 6% sales tax.
Then , 6% of $22.26 is $1.33 , by decreasing the tax amount from the buying price  we get $20.93
The helmet is discounted 30% off the selling price.
The sales price be 100% – 30% = 70%
we know  a = 20.93 , p = 70% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 70% × w
20.93 = 0.7 × w
w = \(\frac{20.93}{0.7}\)
w = 29.9 , approximately equal to 30
So , the original price of the helmet is $30.

Question 33.
REASONING
A drone that costs $129.50 is discounted 40%. The next month, the sale price is discounted an additional 60%. Is the drone now “free”? If so, explain. If not, find the sale price.
Answer: The sales price of the next month is $31.8 , The drone not for free.

Explanation:
Given , A drone that costs $129.50 is discounted 40%.
We know , The sales price be 100% – 40% = 60% of the original price
sales price = 60% of 129.50
= 0.6 × 129.5 = $77.7
So, The sales price is $77.7.

Given , The next month, the sale price is discounted an additional 60%.
The original price this time is $77.7
We know , The sales price be 100% – 60% = 40% of the original price
sales price = 40% of 77.7
= 0.4 × 77.7 = $31.8
So, The sales price of the next month is $31.8 .

Thus , The drone not for free.

Lesson 6.6 Simple Interest

EXPLORATION 1

Understanding Simple Interest
Work with a partner. You deposit $150 in an account that earns 6% simple interest per year. You do not make any other deposits or withdrawals. The table shows the balance of the account at the end of each year.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 1
a. Describe any patterns you see in the account balance.
b. How is the amount of interest determined each year?
c. How can you find the amount of simple interest earned when you are given an initial amount, an interest rate, and a period of time?
d. You deposit $150 in a different account that earns simple interest. The table shows the balance of the account each year. What is the interest rate of the account? What is the balance after 10 years?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 2
Answer: a. we observe the pattern of $9 increment in each year of the deposited amount.
b. the amount of interest each year is ,
For 0 years = $0
For 1 years  I = $9.54
For 2 years  I = $20.16
For 3 years  I = $31.86
For 4 years  I = $44.64
For 5 years  I = $58.5
For 6 years  I = $73.44
c. Formula for simple interest is I = Prt
d. The annual rate of interest is $ 2.60 .

Explanation:
a. As the table shows , we have a series of pattern among the years of amount deposited.
that is , For 0 years = $150
For 1 years = $150 + $9 = $159
For 2 years = $159 + $9 = $168
For 3 years = $168 + $9 = $177
For 4 years = $177 + $9 = $186
For 5 years = $186 + $9 = $195
For 6 years = $195 + $9 = $204 ,
Here, we observe the pattern of $9 increment in each year of the deposited amount.

b. From the table, we have , simple interest for each year as,
Principal = P , t = time in years , r = Annual interest rate
That is P = $150 , t = 0 years , r = 0.06
To find the simple interest  I  we know , I = Prt ,
For 0 years  I = 150 × 0 × 0.06 = $0 .
For 1 years , P = $159 , t = 1 year , r = 0.06
I = 159 × 1 × 0.06 = $9.54
For 2 years , P = $168 , t = 2 year , r = 0.06
I = 168 × 2 × 0.06 = $20.16
For 3 years , P = $177 , t = 3 year , r = 0.06
I = 177 × 3 × 0.06 = $31.86
For 4 years , P = $186 , t = 4 year , r = 0.06
I = 186 × 4 × 0.06 = $44.64
For 5 years , P = $195 , t = 5 year , r = 0.06
I = 195 × 5 × 0.06 = $58.5
For 6 years , P = $204 , t = 6 year , r = 0.06
I = 204 × 6 × 0.06 = $73.44

C. To find the simple interest , we have Principal = P , t = time in years , r = Annual interest rate ,
Formula for simple interest is I = Prt , So by using this formula we can find the simple interest of the deposit .

d. From the table given , we have the pattern of increment of $5 in each year ,
in this case the deposit in the 10 year will be $230 .
To find the interest rate of the account ,
r = \(\frac{I}{pt}\)
r = \(\frac{0.06}{230 × 10}\)
r = 2.60
So , the annual rate of interest is $ 2.60 .

Interest principal is money paid or earned for using or lending money. The is the amount of money borrowed or deposited.

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 3

Try It

Question 1.
What is the balance of the account after 9 months?
Answer: The balance after 9 months = $500 + $1.66 = $501.66 .

Explanation:
From the example given , we know P = $500 , r = 0.03 , t =  9 months
I = prt
I = \(\frac{500 × 0.03}{9}\)
I = \(\frac{15}{9}\)
I = 1.66
The interest earned is $1.66 after 9 months ,
The balance after 9 months = $500 + $1.66 = $501.66 .

Question 2.
You deposit $350 in an account. The account earns $17.50 simple interest in 2.5 years. What is the annual interest rate?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 2%

Explanation:
Given , P = $350 , I = $17.5 , t = 2.5 ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{17.5}{350 × 2.5}\)
= \(\frac{17.5}{875}\)
= 0.02
we can write in percent as 2%
So , The annual interest rate is 2% .

Question 3.
In Example 3, how long does it take an account with a principal of $10,000 to earn $750 in interest?
Answer: It takes 3.75years to an account with a principal of $10,000 to earn $750 in interest .

Explanation:
Given , P = $10,000 , I = $750 , r = 0.02 , t = ? ,
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{750}{10,000 × 0.02}\)
= \(\frac{750}{200}\)
= 3.75
So, It takes 3.75years to an account with a principal of $10,000 to earn $750 in interest .

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
VOCABULARY
Explain the meaning of simple interest.
Answer:
Simple interest is interest calculated on the principal portion of a loan or the original contribution to a savings account. Simple interest does not compound, meaning that an account holder will only gain interest on the principal, and a borrower will never have to pay interest on interest already accrued.
So , To put in simplest form we can say that ,  simple interest money paid or earned only on the principal .

USING THE SIMPLE INTEREST FORMULA Use the simple interest formula.
Question 5.
You deposit $20 in a savings account. The account earns 4% simple interest per year. What is the balance after 4 years?
Answer: The balance of after 4 years is $23.2 .

Explanation:
To fin the principal , Given , P = $20 , r = 0.04 , t = 4 ,
We know that  I = Prt
I = 20 × 0.04 × 4
= 3.2
Simple interest I = $3.2
To find the balance after 4 years we have to add the simple interest to principal amount = $20 + $3.2 = $23.2 .
The balance of after 4 years is $23.2 .

Question 6.
You deposit $800 in an account. The account earns $360 simple interest in 3 years. What is the annual interest rate?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 15% .

Explanation:
Given , P = $800 , I = $360 , t = 3 years ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{360}{800 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{360}{2400}\)
= 0.15
we can write in percent as 15%
So , The annual interest rate is 15% .

Question 7.
You deposit $650 in a savings account. How long does it take an account with an annual interest rate of 5% to earn $178.25 in interest?
Answer: It takes 7.13 years an account with an annual interest rate of 5% to earn $178.25 in interest .

Explanation:
Given , P = $650 , I = $178.25 , r = 0.05 , t = ? ,
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{178.25}{650 × 0.05}\)
= \(\frac{178.25}{32.5}\)
= 7.13
So, It takes 7.13 years an account with an annual interest rate of 5% to earn $178.25 in interest .

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
You want to deposit $1000 in a savings account for 3 years. One bank adds a $100 bonus to your principal and offers a 2% simple annual interest rate. Another bank does not add a bonus, but offers 6% simple interest per year. Which bank should you choose? Explain.
Answer: Second bank offers the best deal .

Explanation:
Given , we know P = $1000 , t =  3 years ,
And one bank adds $100 bonus and offers  a 2% simple annual interest rate.
Then p = $1000 + $100 = $1100 , r = 0.02 ,
I = Prt
I = 1100 × 0.02 × 3
I = 11 × 2 × 3
I = 66
The simple interest of one bank = $66 .
The balance of the account will be = $1100 + $66 = $1166 .

Another bank offers no bonus, but  6% simple interest per year , r = 0.06  , p = $1000 , t = 3 years
I = prt
I = 1000 × 0.06 × 3
I = 10 × 6 × 3
I = 180
The simple interest of Another bank = $180 .
The balance of the account will be = $1000 + $180 = $1180 .

So, Second bank offers the best deal .

Question 9.
Your cousin borrows $1125 to repair her car. The simple annual interest rate is 10%. She makes equal monthly payments of $25. How many years will it take to pay off the loan?
Answer: It takes 2.2 years to pay off the loan.

Explanation:
Given , P = $1125 , r = 0.01 , I = $25 , t = ?
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{25}{1125 × 0.01}\)
= \(\frac{25}{11.25}\)
= 2.2
So, It takes 2.2 years to pay off the loan.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You borrow$900 to buy a laptop. You plan to pay off the loan after 5 years of equal monthly payments. After 10 payments, you have $1200 left to pay. What is the simple annual interest rate of your loan?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 15% .

Explanation:
Given , P = $900 , I = $1200 , t = 5 years ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{900}{1200 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{900}{6000}\)
= 0.15
we can write in percent as 15%
So , The annual interest rate is 15% .

Simple Interest Homework & Practice 6.6

Review & Refresh

Find the selling price.
Question 1.
A store pays $8 for a pool noodle. The markup is 20%.
Answer: The selling price is $9.6

Explanation:
Then , The markup is 20% of $8
a = p% × w
= 20% × 8
= 0.2 × 8
= 1.6
So , the markup is $1.6 .
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $8 + $1.6
= $9.6.
So ,The selling price is $9.6 .

Question 2.
A store pays $3 for a magazine. The markup is 5%.
Answer: The selling price is $3.15

Explanation:
Then , The markup is 5% of $3
a = p% × w
= 5% × 3
= 0.05 × 3
= 0.15
So , the markup is $0.15 .
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $3 + $0.15
= $3.15.
So ,The selling price is $3.15 .

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 3.
x + 5 < 2
Answer:  x  < -3

Explanation:
Given , x + 5 < 2
add  – 5 on both sides ,
x + 5 – 5 < 2 – 5
x  < -3

Question 4.
b – 2 ≥ – 1
Answer: b  ≥ 1

Explanation:
Given , b – 2 ≥ – 1
add  2 on both sides
b – 2 + 2  ≥ – 1 + 2
b  ≥ 1

Question 5.
w + 6 ≤ – 3
Answer: w  ≤ – 9

Explanation:
Given , w + 6 ≤ – 3
add -6 on both sides
w + 6 – 6  ≤ – 3 – 6
w  ≤ – 9

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

UNDERSTANDING SIMPLE INTEREST The table shows the balance of an account each year. What is the interest rate of the account? What is the balance after 10 years? (See Exploration 1, p. 265.)
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 4
Answer: The annual interest rate is 3% .

Explanation:
Given , There is an increment of $2 each year , for 10 years it will be $60 .
Now we have , P = $60 , t = 10 years , I = $2 , r = ?
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{2}{60 × 10}\)
= \(\frac{2}{60}\)
= 0.03
we can write in percent as 3%
So , The annual interest rate is 3% .

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 5
Answer: The annual interest rate is 0.4% .

Explanation:
Given , There is an increment of $14 each year , for 10 years it will be $315 .
Now we have , P = $315 , t = 10 years , I = $14 , r = ?
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{14}{315 × 10}\)
= 0.004
we can write in percent as 0.4%
So , The annual interest rate is 0.4% .

FINDING INTEREST EARNED An account earns simple annual interest. (a) Find the interest earned. (b) Find the balance of the account.
Question 8.
$600 at 5% for 2 years
Answer: The simple interest of  bank is $60 .
The balance of the account will be $660 .

Explanation:
Given ,  P = $600 , t =  2 years , r = 0.05
I = prt
I = 600 × 0.05 × 2
I = 6 × 5 × 2
I = 60
The simple interest of bank is $60 .
The balance of the account will be = $600 + $60 = $660 .

Question 9.
$1500 at 4% for 5 years
Answer: The simple interest  is $300 .
The balance of the account will be  $1800 .

Explanation:
Given ,  P = $1500 , t =  5 years , r = 0.04
I = prt
I = 1500 × 0.04 × 5
I = 15 × 4 × 5
I = 300
The simple interest of  bank = $300 .
The balance of the account will be $1500 + $300 = $1800 .

Question 10.
$350 at 3 % for 10 years
Answer: The simple interest of  bank is $105 .
The balance of the account will be $455 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $350 , t =  10 years , r = 0.03
I = prt
I = 350 × 0.03 × 10
I = 35 × 3
I = 105
The simple interest of  bank is $105 .
The balance of the account will be $350 + $105 = $455 .

Question 11.
$1800 at 6.5% for 30 months
Answer:  The interest earned is $3.9 ,
The balance of the account will be $1,803.9 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $1800 , t =  30 months , r = 0.065
I = prt
I = \(\frac{1800 × 0.065}{30}\)
I = \(\frac{117}{30}\)
I = 3.9
The interest earned is $3.9 ,
The balance of the account will be $1800 + $3.9 = $1,803.9 .

Question 12.
$925 at2.3% for 2.4 years
Answer: The interest earned is $638.1 ,
The balance of the account will be $1,563.1 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $925 , t =  28 months , r = 0.023
I = prt
I = \(\frac{925 × 0.023}{28}\)
I = \(\frac{21.27}{30}\)
I = 638.1
The interest earned is $638.1 ,
The balance of the account will be $925 + $638.1 = $1,563.1 .

Question 13.
$5200 at 7.36% for 54 months
Answer: The interest earned is $7.08 ,
The balance of the account will be $5,207.

Explanation:
Given , P = $5200 , t = 54 months , r = 0.0736
I = prt
I = \(\frac{5200 × 0.0736}{54}\)
I = \(\frac{382.72}{54}\)
I = 7.08
The interest earned is $7.08 ,
The balance of the account will be $5200 + $7.08 = $5,207.

Question 14.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the simple interest earned on $500 at 6% for 18 months. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 6
Answer: No , The simple interest is $1.6 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $500 , t =  18 months , r = 0.06
I = prt
I = \(\frac{500 × 0.06}{18}\)
I = \(\frac{30}{18}\)
I = 1.6
The simple interest is $1.6 .

FINDING AN ANNUAL INTEREST RATE Find the annual interest rate.
Question 15.
I = $24, P = $400, t = 2 years
Answer: The annual interest rate is 3% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{24}{400 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{24}{800}\)
= 0.03
we can write in percent as 3%
So , The annual interest rate is 3% .

Question 16.
I = $562.50, P = $1500, t = 5 years
Answer: The annual interest rate is 7.5% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{562.5}{1500 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{562.5}{7500}\)
= 0.075
we can write in percent as 7.5%
So , The annual interest rate is 7.5% .

Question 17.
I = $54, P = $900, t = 18 months
Answer: The annual interest rate is 108% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{54 × 18 }{900 }\)
= \(\frac{972}{900}\)
= 1.08
we can write in percent as 108%
So , The annual interest rate is 108% .

Question 18.
I = $160, P = $2000, t = 8 months
Answer: The annual interest rate is 64% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{160 × 8 }{2000 }\)
= \(\frac{1,280}{2,000}\)
= 0.64
we can write in percent as 64%
So , The annual interest rate is 64% .

FINDING AN AMOUNT OF TIME Find the amount of time.
Question 19.
I $30, P = $500, r = 3%
Answer: The amount of time is 1.6 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac30}{500 × 0.03}\)
= \(\frac{30}{18}\)
=1.6
So , The amount of time is 1.6 years .

Question 20.
I = $720, P = $1000, r = 9%
Answer: The amount of time is 8 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{720}{1000 × 0.09}\)
= \(\frac{720}{90}\)
= 8
So , The amount of time is 8 years .

Question 21.
I = $54, P = $800, r = 4.5%
Answer: The amount of time is 1.5 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{54}{800 × 0.045}\)
= \(\frac{54}{36}\)
= 1.5
So , The amount of time is 1.5 years .

Question 22.
I = $450, P = $2400, r = 7.5%
Answer:  The amount of time is 2.5 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{450}{2400 × 0.075}\)
= \(\frac{450}{180}\)
= 2.5
So , The amount of time is 2.5 years .

Question 23.
FINDING AN ACCOUNT BALANCE
A savings account earns 5% simple interest per year. The principal is $1200. What is the balance after 4 years?
Answer: The bank balance is $1440 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $1200 , t =  4 years , r = 0.05
I = prt
I = 1200 × 0.05 × 4
I = 12 × 5 × 4
I = 240
The simple interest of  bank is $240 .
The bank balance is $1200 + $240 = $1440 .

Question 24.
FINDING AN ANNUAL INTEREST RATE
You deposit $400 in an account. The account earns $18 simple interest in 9 months. What is the annual interest rate?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 40.5% .

Explanation:
Given , P = $400 , I = $18 , t = 9 months ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{18 × 9}{400}\)
= \(\frac{162}{400}\)
= 0.405
we can write in percent as 40.5%
So , The annual interest rate is 40.5% .

Question 25.
FINDING AN AMOUNT OF TIME
You deposit $3000 in a CD (certificate of deposit) that earns 5.6% simple annual interest. How long will it take to earn $336 in interest?
Answer: It takes 2 years to earn $336 in interest .

Explanation:
Given , P = $3000  , r = 0.056 , I = $336
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{336}{3000 × 0.056}\)
= \(\frac{336}{168}\)
= 2
So , It takes 2 years to earn $336 in interest .

FINDING AN AMOUNT PAID Find the amount paid for the loan.
Question 26.
$1500 at 9% for 2 years
Answer: The amount paid for the loan is $270 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $1500 , t =  2 years , r = 0.09
I = prt
I = 1500 × 0.09 × 2
I = 15 × 9 × 2
I = 270
So , The amount paid for the loan is $270 .

Question 27.
$2000 at 12% for 3 years
Answer: The amount paid for the loan is $72 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $2000 , t =  3 years , r = 0.012
I = prt
I = 2000 × 0.012 × 3
I = 2 × 12 × 3
I = 72
So , The amount paid for the loan is $72 .

Question 28.
$2400 at 10.5% for 5 years
Answer: The amount paid for the loan is $1,260 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $2400 , t =  5 years , r = 0.105
I = prt
I = 2400 × 0.105 × 5
I = 252 × 5
I = 1,260
So , The amount paid for the loan is $1,260 .

Question 29.
$4800 at 9.9% for 4 years
Answer: The amount paid for the loan is $1,900 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $4800 , t =  4 years , r = 0.099
I = prt
I = 4800 × 0.099 × 4
I = 475.2 × 4
I = 1,900
So , The amount paid for the loan is $1,900 .

USING THE SIMPLE INTEREST FORMULA Copy and complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 7
Answer: 
30. The simple interest  is $1,530 .
31. The principal amount is $2,29,491 .
32. The time required is 4 years .
33. The annual interest rate is 1,275% .

30.  Explanation:
Given , P = $12,000 , t =  5 years , r = 0.0425
I = prt
I = 12,000 × 0.0425 × 5
I = 510 ×
I = 1,530
So , The simple interest  is $1,530 .

31.  Explanation:
Given , I = $828.75 , t =  18 months , r = 0.065
I = Prt
P = \(\frac{I}{rt}\)
= \(\frac{828.75 × 18}{0.065}\)
= \(\frac{14,916.96}{0.065}\)
= 2,29,491
So , The principal amount is $2,29,491 .

32. Explanation:
Given , P = $15,500 , I = $5425 , r = 0.0875
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{5425}{15,500 × 0.0875}\)
= \(\frac{5425}{1,356.25}\)
= 4
So , The time required is 4 years .

33. Explanation:
Given , P = $18,000 , I = $4252.5 , t = 54 months ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{4252.5 × 54}{18,000}\)
= \(\frac{2,29,635}{18,000}\)
= 12.75
we can write in percent as 1,275%
So , The annual interest rate is 1,275% .

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A family borrows money for a rainforest tour. The simple annual interest rate is 12%. The loan is paid after 3 months. What is the total amount paid for the tour?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 8
Answer: The total amount paid for the tour will be $1,230 + $49.2 = $1,279.2 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $940 + $170 + $120 = 1,230
P = $1,230 , t =  3 months , r = 0.12
I = prt
I = \(\frac{1,230 × 0.12}{3}\)
I = \(\frac{147.6}{3}\)
I = 49.2
The simple interest  is $49.2 .
So , The total amount paid for the tour will be $1,230 + $49.2 = $1,279.2 .

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You deposit $5000 in an account earning 7.5% simple interest per year. How long will it take for the balance of the account to be $6500?
Answer: It takes 4 years for the balance of the account to be $6500.

Explanation:
Given , the balance of the account  be $6500 ,  You deposit $5000
We know that . The total balance = deposit + simple interest
So, To get simple interest we have = The total balance – deposit = $6500 – $5000 = $1500 ,
P = $5000 , r = 0.075 , I = $1500 , t = ?
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{1500}{5000 × 0.075}\)
= \(\frac{1500}{375}\)
= 4
So , It takes 4 years for the balance of the account to be $6500.

Question 36.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You borrow$1300 to buy a telescope. What is the monthly payment?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 9
Answer: The monthly payment is $66.95 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $1300 , t =  2 years , r = 0.118
I = prt
I = 1300 × 0.118 × 2
I = 153.4 × 2
I = 306.8
The simple interest of  bank is $306.8 .
The balance of the account will be $1300 + $306.8 = $1,606.8 .
To get the monthly payment ,  convert 2 years into 24 months then , \(\frac{1,606.8}{24}\) = 66.95
So , The monthly payment is $66.95 .

Question 37.
REASONING
How many years will it take for $2000 to double at a simple annual interest rate of 8%? Explain how you found your answer.
Answer: It will take 12.5 years to make the principal amount double .

Explanation:
Given , it take for $2000 to double  , so the total balance will be $2000 + $2000 = $4000
We know that . The total balance = deposit + simple interest
So, To get simple interest we have = The total balance – deposit = $4000 – $2000 = $2000
P = $2000 , r = 0.08 , I = $2000 , t = ?
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{2000}{2000 × 0.08}\)
= \(\frac{2000}{160}\)
= 12.5
So , It will take 12.5 years to make the principal amount double .

Question 38.
DIG DEEPER!
You take out two loans. After 2 years, the total interest for the loans is $138. On the first loan, you pay 7.5% simple annual interest on a principal of $800. On the second loan, you pay 3% simple annual interest. What is the principal for the second loan?
Answer: The principal amount of the second loan is $300 .

Explanation:
Given , For first loan , P = $800 , t =  2 years , r = 0.075
I = prt
I = 800 × 0.075 × 2
I = 120
The simple interest of  bank is $120 .

For Second loan , Given , the total interest for the loans is $138
So , I = $138 – $120 = $18 ,
Given r = 0.03 , t = 2 years , I = $18
I = Prt
p = \(\frac{I}{rt}\)
= \(\frac{18}{0.03 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{18}{0.06}\)
= 300
So, The principal amount of the second loan is $300 .

Question 39.
REPEATED REASONING
You deposit $500 in an account that earns 4% simple annual interest. The interest earned each year is added to the principal to create a new principal. Find the total amount in your account after each year for 3 years.
Answer:  The balance of the account for the first year will be $500 + $20 = $520
The balance of the account for the 2 year will be $520 + $41.6 = $561.6 .
The balance of the account for the 3 year will be $561.6 + $67.3 = $5683.9.

Explanation:
Given , P = $500 , t =  1 years , r = 0.04
I = prt
I = 500 × 0.04 × 1
I = 5 × 4
I = 20
The simple interest of  bank is $20 .
The balance of the account for the first year will be $500 + $20 = $520 .

For 2 years , p = $520 , t = 2 , r = 0.04
I = prt
I = 520 × 0.04 × 2
I = 20.8 × 2
I = 41.6
The simple interest of  bank is $41.6 .
The balance of the account for the 2 year will be $520 + $41.6 = $561.6 .

For 3 years , p = $561.6 , t = 3 , r = 0.04
I = prt
I = 561.6 × 0.04 × 3
I = 22.46× 3
I = 67.3
The simple interest of  bank is $67.3 .
The balance of the account for the 3 year will be $561.6 + $67.3 = $5683.9.

Question 40.
NUMBER SENSE
An account earns r% simple interest per year. Does doubling the initial principal have the same effect on the total interest earned as doubling the amount of time? Justify your answer.
Answer: Yes ,Doubling the initial principal have the same effect on the total interest earned as doubling the amount of time

Explanation:
Given , An account earns r% simple interest per year. Does doubling the initial principal
Let us say P = 2P , t = t years , r = r%
we know I = Prt ,
I = 2P × t × r
I = 2Prt
The simple interest of the doubling initial principal is 2Prt .

Now , doubling the amount of time , t = 2t years
we know I = Prt ,
I = P × 2t × r
I = 2Prt
The simple interest of the doubling the amount  is 2Prt .
So, Doubling the initial principal have the same effect on the total interest earned as doubling the amount of time

Percents Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
The table shows the percent of successful shots for each team in a hockey game. A total of 55 shots are taken in the game. The ratio of shots taken by the Blazers to shots taken by the Hawks is 6 : 5. How many goals does each team score?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cc 1
Understand the problem.
You know that 55 shots are taken in a hockey game and that the Blazers take 6 shots for every 5 shots taken by the Hawks. You also know the percent of successful shots for each team.
Make a plan.
Use a ratio table to determine the number of shots taken by each team. Then use the percent equation to determine the number of successful shots for each team.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer: The goals made by Hawks are 50. and The goals made by Blazers are 60

Explanation:
Given , The ratio of shots taken by the Blazers to shots taken by the Hawks is 6 : 5
the percent of successful shots for each team in a hockey game is  Blazers is 10% , Hawks is 16% ,
The goals made by Blazers are w = ? , a = 6 , p = 10%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{6}{w}\) = \(\frac{10}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{6 × 100}{10}\)
w = \(\frac{600}{10}\)
w = 60
So, The goals made by Blazers are 60
The goals made by Hawks  are w= ? , a = 5 , p = 16%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{5}{w}\) = \(\frac{10}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{5 × 100}{10}\)
w = \(\frac{500}{10}\)
w = 50
So , The goals made by Hawks are 50.

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks with positive numbers so that the sum of the fractions is 37.5% of the first fraction. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cc 2
Answer:  \(\frac{2}{5}\) + (- \(\frac{0.1}{4}\)) = 37.5%

Explanation:
Let us say that missing values be x and y
we have ,\(\frac{x}{5}\) + (- \(\frac{y}{4}\))
To get the simplified answer cross check the values of x and y
If x = 2 and y = 0.1 ,then
\(\frac{2}{5}\) + (- \(\frac{0.1}{4}\))
0.4 – 0.025 = 0.375
0.375 can be written as 37.5%
So ,  \(\frac{2}{5}\) + (- \(\frac{0.1}{4}\)) = 37.5%

Question 3.
The graph shows the distance traveled by a motorcycle on a dirt road. After turning onto a paved road, the motorcycle travels \(\frac{1}{5}\) mile every \(\frac{1}{4}\) minute. Find the percent of change in the speed of the motorcycle. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cc 3
Answer: The percent of change in the speed of the bike is 38%

Explanation:
speed of the bike on the dirty road  is  \(\frac{2.33}{4}\) = 0.58
speed of the bike on the paved road is \(\frac{0.2}{0.25}\) = 0.8
old value = 0.58 , new value = 0.8 ,
The amount of change = 0.8 – 0.58  = 0.22
So , percent of change is \(\frac{amount of change }{original amount}\)
= \(\frac{ 0.22}{0.58}\)
= 0.379
= 0.379 × 100
= 37.9 = 38%
So, the percent of change is 38%

Performance Task

Tornado Alley
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Tornado!” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cc 4
Answer:

Percents Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 1
percent of change : It is the percent that a quantity changes from the original amount =  \(\frac{amount of change }{original amount}\)
Example:
2 feet to 6 feet
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 6 and old value = 2 , because a change of 2 to 6 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{6 – 2}{2}\)
= \(\frac{4}{2}\)
= 2 × 100
= 200%
So, percent of change is 200%

percent of increase: When the original amount increases then the percent of change is called percent of increase = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
Example:
5 cups to 10 cups
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 10 and old value = 5 , because a change of 5 to 10 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{10 – 5}{5}\)
= \(\frac{5}{5}\)
= 1 × 100
= 100%
So, percent of increase is 100%

percent of decrease:  When the original amount decrease then the percent of change is called percent of decrease =\(\frac{old value – New value}{old value}\)
Example:
15 inches to 12 inches
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{old value – new value}{old value}\)
where New value = 12 and old value = 15 , because a change of 15 to 12 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{15 – 12}{15}\)
= \(\frac{3}{15}\)
= 0.2 × 100
= 20%
So, percent of decrease is 20%

percent error: It is the percent that estimated value differs from Actual value \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
Example:
Estimated value = 40 , Actual value = 30
The amount of error is  40 – 30 = 10
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 10 and Actual value = 30 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{10}{30}\)
= 0.333
= 0.333 × 100
=  33.3%
So, percent Error is 33.3%

Discount:  It is a decrease in amount of original price of an item
Example:
A box is $5 with 20% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 5
= 0.8 × 5 = 4
So, The sales price is $4.

Markup: The increase from what the stores pays to the selling price is called as Markup
Example:
The markup is 15% of $40
a = p% × w
= 15% × 40
= 0.15 × 40
= 6
So , the markup is $6.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $40 + $6
= $46.
The selling price is $46.

Interest: A money paid or earned for using or lending money is called interest
Example:
A bank offers a loan of $500 with an interest of $10 .
Here $10 is the interest amount to be paid for the loan

Principal: The amount of money borrowed or deposited
Example:
A bank offers a loan of $500 with an interest of $10 .
here the loan amount is the principal amount

Simple Interest: It is the money paid or earned only on the principal I = Prt , where I = simple interest , P = principal , r = rate of interest , t = time in years
Example:
A bank offers a loan of $500 with an interest rate of 3% for 2 years  . the simple interest is
p = $500 , r  = 0.03 , t = 2
I = 500 × 0.03 × 2
I = 30
So , The simple interest is $15 .

Graphic Organizers
You can use a Summary Triangle to explain a concept. Here is an example of writing a percent as a decimal a Summary Triangle for Writing a percent as a decimal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 2

Answer: Summary triangle for writing a decimal into percent is 
Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 3
1. writing a decimal as a percent
2. comparing and ordering fractions, decimals, and percents
3. the percent proportion
4. the percent equation
5. percent of change
6. discount
7. markup

Writing a decimal as a percent

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 4

6.1 Fractions, Decimals, and Percents (pp. 235–240)
Learning Target: Rewrite fractions, decimals, and percents using different representations.

Write the percent as a decimal or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 1.
74%
Answer: decimal form is 0.74

Explanation: 
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 74% in decimal form is 0.74

Question 2.
2%
Answer: decimal form is 0.02

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 2% in decimal form is 0.02

Question 3.
221%
Answer: decimal form is 2.21

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 221% in decimal form is 2.21

Question 4.
0.17
Answer: 17%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.17 can be rewrite as 17%

Question 5.
\(4 . \overline{3}\)
Answer: \(433. \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, \(4 . \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(433. \overline{3} \%\)

Question 6.
0.079
Answer: 7.9%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.079  can be rewrite as 7.9%

Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 7.
\(\frac{17}{20}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.85, percent = 85%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{17}{20}\) as  0.85 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.85 can be rewrite as 85%
So,\(\frac{17}{20}\) in decimal = 0.85, percent = 85%

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{8}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.375, percent = 37.5%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{3}{8}\) as  0.375 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.375 can be rewrite as 37.5%
So, \(\frac{3}{8}\) in decimal = 0.375, percent = 37.5%

Question 9.
\(\frac{14}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = \(1 . \overline{5}\), percent = \(155. \overline{5} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{14}{9}\) as  \(1. \overline{5}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(1 . \overline{5}\)can be rewrite as \(155. \overline{5} \%\)
So, \(\frac{14}{9}\) in decimal = \(1 . \overline{5}\), percent = \(155. \overline{5} \%\)

Question 10.
For school spirit day, 11.875% of your class wears orange shirts, \(\frac{5}{8}\) of your class wears blue shirts, 0.15625 of your class wears white shirts, and the rest of your class wears gold shirts. Order the portions of shirts of each color from least to greatest. Justify your answer.
Answer:  In ascending order we have 10.1% , 15.6% , 62.5% , 11.875%

Explanation:
Given , 11.875% of your class wears orange shirts,
\(\frac{5}{8}\) of your class wears blue shirts,
It can be written as 0.625 in decimals and 62.5% in percent
0.15625 of your class wears white shirts,
it can be written as 15.6%
And the rest of your class wears gold shirts.
Let the total be 100% , The percent in all colors is 11.875% + 62.5% +  15.6%  = 89.9%
So , the rest of the girls wears 100% – 89.9% = 10.1% ,
In ascending order we have 10.1% , 15.6% , 62.5% , 11.875%

6.2 The Percent Proportion (pp. 241–246)
Learning Target: Use the percent proportion to find missing quantities.

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 11.
What percent of 60 is 18?
Answer: 18 is 30% of 60.

Explanation:
Given , a = 18 , w = 60 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{18}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{18 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{1800}{60}\)
p = 30
So, 18 is 30% of 60.

Question 12.
40 is what percent of 32?
Answer: 40 is 125% of 32.

Explanation:
Given , a = 40 , w = 32 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{40}{32}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{40 × 100}{32}\)
p = \(\frac{4,000}{32}\)
p = 125
So, 40 is 125% of 32.

Question 13.
What number is 70% of 70?
Answer: 49 is 70% of 70.

Explanation:
Given , a = ? , w = 70 , p = 70%
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{70}\) = \(\frac{70}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{70 × 70}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{4900}{100}\)
a = 49
So, 49 is 70% of 70.

Question 14.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) is 75% of what number?
Answer: 0.75 is 755% of 1.

Explanation:
we can write \(\frac{3}{4}\) as 0.75 in decimal
Given , a = 0.75 , w = ? , p = 75%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{0.75}{w}\) = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{0.75 × 100}{75}\)
w = \(\frac{75}{755}\)
w = 1
So, 0.75 is 755% of 1.

Question 15.
About 29% of the Earth’s surface is covered by land. The total surface area of the Earth is about 510 million square kilometers. What is the area of the Earth’s surface covered by land?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 15
Answer: The area of the Earth’s surface covered by land is 147.9 million square kilometers .

Explanation:
Given , p = 29% , w = 510 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{510}\) = \(\frac{29}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{510 × 29}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{14,790}{100}\)
a = 147.9
So, 147.9 is 29% of 510.
The area of the Earth’s surface covered by land is 147.9 million square kilometers .

6.3 The Percent Equation (pp. 247–252)
Learning Target: Use the percent equation to find missing quantities. Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 16.
What number is 24% of 25?
Answer: 6 is 24% of 25.

Explanation:
Given p = 24% , w = 25 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{25}\) = \(\frac{24}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{25 × 24}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{600}{100}\)
a = 6
So, 6 is 24% of 25.

Question 17.
9 is what percent of 20?
Answer: 9 is 45% of 20.

Explanation:
Given p = ? , w = 20 , a = 9
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{20}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{9 × 100}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{900}{20}\)
p = 45
So, 9 is 45% of 20.

Question 18.
60.8 is what percent of 32?
Answer: 60.8 is 190% of 32.

Explanation:
Given p = ? , w = 32, a = 60.8
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{60.8}{32}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{60.8 × 100}{32}\)
p = \(\frac{6080}{32}\)
p = 190
So, 60.8 is 190% of 32.

Question 19.
91 is 130% of what number?
Answer: 91 is 130% of 70.

Explanation:
Given p = 130% , w = ? , a = 91
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{91}{w}\) = \(\frac{130}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{91 × 100}{130}\)
w = \(\frac{9100{130}\)
w = 70
So, 91 is 130% of 70.

Question 20.
85% of what number is 10.2?
Answer: 10.2 is 85% of 12.

Explanation:
Given p = 85% , w = ? , a = 10.2
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{10.2}{w}\) = \(\frac{85}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{10.2 × 100}{85}\)
w = \(\frac{1020}{85}\)
w = 12
So, 10.2 is 85% of 12.

Question 21.
83% of 20 is what number?
Answer: 16.6 is 83% of 20.

Explanation:
Given p = 83% , w = 20 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{20}\) = \(\frac{83}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{20 × 83}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1,660}{100}\)
a = 16.6
So, 16.6 is 83% of 20.

Question 22.
15% of the parking spaces at a school are handicap spaces. The school has 18 handicap spaces. How many parking spaces are there in total?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 22
Answer: Totally , there are 120 parking spaces .

Explanation:
Given , p = 15% , a = 18 , w = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{18}{w}\) = \(\frac{15}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{18 × 100}{15}\)
w = \(\frac{1800}{15}\)
w = 120
So, 18 is 15% of 120.
Totally , there are 120 parking spaces .

Question 23.
Of the 25 students on a field trip, 16 bring cameras. What percent of the students bring cameras?
Answer: 64% of students brought the cameras .

Explanation:
Given , a = 16 , w = 25 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{16}{25}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{16 × 100}{25}\)
p = \(\frac{1600}{25}\)
p = 64
So, 16 is 64% of 25.
Thus, 64% of students brought the cameras .

6.4 Percents of Increase and Decrease (pp. 253–258)
Learning Target: Find percents of change in quantities.

Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 24.
6 yards to 36 yards
Answer: percent of change is 500%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 36 and old value = 6 , because a change of 6 to 36 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{36 – 6}{6}\)
= \(\frac{30}{6}\)
= 5× 100
= 500%
So, percent of change is 500%

Question 25.
120 meals to 52 meals
Answer: percent of change is – 56.6%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 52 and old value = 120 , because a change of 120 to 52 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{52 – 120}{120}\)
= \(\frac{- 68}{120}\)
= – 0.566
= – 0.566 × 100
= – 56.6%
So, percent of change is – 56.6%

Question 26.
You estimate that a jar contains 68 marbles. The actual number of marbles is 60. Find the percent error.
Answer: percent Error is 13%

Explanation:
The amount of error is 68 – 60 = 8
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 8 and Actual value = 60 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{8}{60}\)
= 0.133
= 0.133 × 100
=  13.3%
Approximately we can write as 13%
So, percent Error is 13%

Question 27.
The table shows the numbers of skim boarders at a beach on Saturday and Sunday. What was the percent of change in boarders from Saturday to Sunday?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 27
Answer: percent of change is – 12.5%

Explanation:
Given , 12 to 9
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 63 and old value = 72 , because a change of 72 to 63 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{63 – 72}{72}\)
= \(\frac{- 9}{72}\)
= \(\frac{- 1}{8}\)
= – 0.125
= – 0.125 × 100
= – 12.5%
So, percent of change is – 12.5%

6.5 Discounts and Markups (pp. 259–264)
Learning Target: Solve percent problems involving discounts and markups.

Find the sale price or original price.
Question 28.
Original price: $50
Discount: 15%
Sale price: ?
Answer: The sales price is $42.5

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 15% = 85% of the original price
sales price = 85% of 50
= 0.85 × 50 = 42.5
So, The sales price is $42.5

Question 29.
Original price: ?
Discount: 20%
Sale price: $75
Answer: The original price is $93.75.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80%
a = p% × w
75 = 0.8 × w
w = \(\frac{75}{0.8}\)
w = 93.75
So, The original price is $93.75.

Question 30.
What is the original price of the tennis racquet?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 30
Answer: The original price is $30.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 30% = 70%
a = p% × w
21 = 0.7 × w
w = \(\frac{21}{0.7}\)
w = 30
So, The original price is $30.

Question 31.
A store pays $50 for a pair of shoes. The markup is 25%.
a. What is the selling price for the shoes?
b. What is the total cost for a person to buy the shoes including a 6% sales tax?
Answer: a. The selling price is $62.5.
b. Total cost for a person is  $66.25 .

Explanation:
The markup is 25% of $50
a = p% × w
= 25% × 50
= 0.25 × 50
= 12.5
So , the markup is $12.5.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $50 + $12.5
= $62.5.
The selling price is $62.5.

b. with 6% sales tax we have ,
6% of $62.5
= 0.06 × 62.5
= 3.75 , it is the tax rate
So , total cost for a person is $62.5 + $3.75 = $66.25

6.6 Simple Interest (pp. 265–270)
Learning Target: Understand and apply the simple interest formula.

An account earns simple interest. (a) Find the interest earned. (b) Find the balance of the account.
Question 32.
$300 at 4% for 3 years
Answer: a. The interest earned is $36
b. The balance of the account is $336 .

Explanation:
we know P = $300 , r = 0.04 , t = 3 years
I = prt
I = 300 × 0.04 × 3
I = 3 × 4 × 3
I = $36
The interest earned is $36
The balance of the account  = $300 + $36 = $336 .

Question 33.
$2000 at 3.5% for 4 years
Answer: a. The interest earned is $280
b. The balance of the account  is $2,280 .

Explanation:
we know P = $2000 , r = 0.035 , t = 4 years
I = prt
I = 2000 × 0.035 × 4
I = 2 × 35 × 4
I = $280
The interest earned is $280
The balance of the account  = $2000 + $280 = $2,280 .

Find the annual interest rate.
Question 34.
I = $17, P = $500, t = 2 years
Answer: The annual interest rate is 1.7% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{17}{500 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{17}{1000}\)
= 0.017
we can write in percent as 1.7%
So , The annual interest rate is 1.7% .

Question 35.
I = $426, P = $1200, t = 5 years
Answer: The annual interest rate is 7.1% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{426}{1200 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{426}{6000}\)
= 0.071
we can write in percent as 7.1%
So , The annual interest rate is 7.1% .

Find the amount of time.
Question 36.
I = $60, P = $400, r = 5%
Answer: The amount of time is 3 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{60}{400 × 0.05}\)
= \(\frac{60}{20}\)
= 3
So, The amount of time is 3 years .

Question 37.
I = $237.90, P = $1525, r = 2.6%
Answer: The amount of time is 6 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{237.9}{1525 × 0.026}\)
= \(\frac{237.9}{39.65}\)
= 6
So, The amount of time is 6 years .

Question 38.
You deposit $100 in an account. The account earns $2 simple interest in 6 months. What is the annual interest rate?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 12%

Explanation:
Given , p = $100 , I = $2 , t = 6 months ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{2 × 6}{100}\)
= \(\frac{12}{100}\)
= 0.12
we can write in percent as 12%
So , The annual interest rate is 12%

Question 39.
Bank A is offering a loan with a simple interest rate of 8% for 2 years. Bank B is offering a loan with a simple interest rate of 6.5% for 3 years.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 39
a. Assuming the monthly payments are equal, what is the monthly payment for the four wheeler from Bank A? from Bank B?
b. Give reasons for why a person might choose Bank A and why a person might choose Bank B for a loan to buy the four wheeler. Explain your reasoning.
Answer: a. The monthly payment for bank A is $261 and for Bank B is $179.25 .
b. If a person chooses Bank A , it will be high in monthly payment but within 2 years loan will be cleared .
If a person chooses Bank B , it will be low monthly payment and can pay the loan a year extra in small amounts.

Explanation:
For bank A , Then p = $5400 , r = 0.08 , t = 2 years
I = Prt
I = 5400 × 0.08 × 2
I = 54 × 8 × 2
I = 864
The simple interest of one bank = $864 .
The balance of the account will be = $5400 + $864 = $6,264 .
The monthly payment = \(\frac{6,264}{24}\) = $261 .

For bank B,  Then p = $5400 , r = 0.065 , t = 3 years
I = Prt
I = 5400 × 0.065 × 3
I = 54 × 6.5 × 3
I = 1,053
The simple interest of one bank = $1,053 .
The balance of the account will be = $5400 + $1,053 = $6,453 .
The monthly payment = \(\frac{6,453}{36}\) = $179.25 .

b. If a person chooses Bank A , it will be high in monthly payment but within 2 years loan will be cleared .
If a person chooses Bank B , it will be low monthly payment and can pay the loan a year extra in small amounts.

Percents Practice Test

Write the percent as a decimal, or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 1.
0.96%
Answer: 0.0096

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 0.96% in decimal form is 0.0096

Question 2.
3%
Answer: 0.03

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 3% in decimal form is 0.03

Question 3.
\(25 . \overline{5} \%\)
Answer: \(0 .25 \overline{5}\)

Explanation:   
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(25 . \overline{5} \%\) in decimal form is \(0 .25 \overline{5}\)

Question 4.
\(0 . \overline{6} \%\)
Answer: \(0 .006\overline{6}\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(0 . \overline{6} \%\)  in decimal form is\(0 .006 \overline{6}\)

Question 5.
7.88
Answer: 788%

Explanation: 
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 7.88 can be rewrite as 788%

Question 6.
0.58
Answer: 58%

Explanation: 
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.58 can be rewrite as 58%

Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 7.
86%, \(\frac{15}{18}\), 0.84, \(\frac{8}{9}\), \(0 . \overline{86} \%\)
Answer: The numbers from least to greatest are  \(0 .00 \overline{86}\) , \(0 .8 \overline{3}\) , 0.84 , 0.86 , \(0 .\overline{8}\)

Explanation:
86%,  in decimals as 0.86
\(\frac{15}{18}\), can be \(0 .8 \overline{3}\)
\(\frac{8}{9}\),  can be \(0 .\overline{8}\)
\(0 . \overline{86} \%\) can be written as \(0 .00 \overline{86}\)
So, The numbers from least to greatest are  \(0 .00 \overline{86}\) , \(0 .8 \overline{3}\) , 0.84 , 0.86 , \(0 .\overline{8}\)

Question 8.
91.6%, 0.91, \(\frac{11}{12}\), 0.917, 9.2%
Answer:  The numbers from least to greatest are 0.092 , 0.91 , 0.916 , \(0 .91\overline{6}\) , 0.917 .

Explanation:
91.6%, can be written as 0.916
\(\frac{11}{12}\), ca be written as \(0 .91\overline{6}\)
9.2% can be written as 0.092
So, The numbers from least to greatest are 0.092 , 0.91 , 0.916 , \(0 .91\overline{6}\) , 0.917 .

Write and solve a proportion or equation to answer the question.
Question 9.
What percent of 28 is 21?
Answer:  21 is 75% of 28.

Explanation:
Given , a = 21 , w = 28 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{21}{28}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{21 × 100}{28}\)
p = \(\frac{2100}{28}\)
p = 75
So, 21 is 75% of 28.

Question 10.
64 is what percent of 40?
Answer: 64 is 160% of 40.

Explanation:
Given , a = 64 , w = 40 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{64}{40}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{64 × 100}{40}\)
p = \(\frac{6400}{40}\)
p = 160
So, 64 is 160% of 40.

Question 11.
What number is 80% of 45?
Answer: 36 is 80% of 45.

Explanation:
Given , a = ? , w = 45 , p = 80%
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{45}\) = \(\frac{80}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{45 × 80}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{3600}{100}\)
a = 36
So, 36 is 80% of 45.

Question 12.
0.8% of what number is 6?
Answer: 6 is 0.8% of 750.

Explanation:
Given , a = 6 , w = ? , p = 0.8%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{6}{w}\) = \(\frac{0.8}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{6 × 100}{0.8}\)
w = \(\frac{600}{0.8}\)
w = 750
So, 6 is 0.8% of 750.

Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 13.
4 strikeouts to 10 strikeouts
Answer: percent of change is 150%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 10 and old value = 4 , because a change of 4 to 10 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{10 – 4}{4}\)
= \(\frac{6}{4}\)
= 1.5 × 100
= 150%
So, percent of change is 150%

Question 14.
$24 to $18
Answer: percent of change is – 25%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 18 and old value = 24 , because a change of 24 to 18 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{18 – 24}{24}\)
= \(\frac{- 6}{24}\)
= – 0.25
= – 0.25 × 100
= – 25%
So, percent of change is – 25%

Find the sale price or selling price.
Question 15.
Original price: $15
Discount: 5%
Sale price: ?
Answer: The sales price is $14.25

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 5% = 95% of the original price
sales price = 95% of 15
= 0.95 × 15 = 14.25
So, The sales price is $14.25

Question 16.
Cost to store: $5.50
Markup: 75%
Selling price: ?
Answer: The selling price is $9.625.

Explanation:
The markup is 75% of $5.50
a = p% × w
= 75% × 5.5
= 0.75 × 5.5
= 4.125
So , the markup is $4.125.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $5.5 + $4.125
= $9.625.
The selling price is $9.625.

An account earns simple interest. Find the interest earned or the principal.
Question 17.
Interest earned: ?
Principal: $450
Interest rate: 6%
Time: 8 years
Answer: The interest earned is $216 .

Explanation:
we know P = $450 , r = 0.06 , t = 8 years
I = prt
I = 450 × 0.06 × 8
I = 27 × 8
I = $216
The interest earned is $216 .

Question 18.
Interest earned: $27
Principal: ?
Interest rate: 1.5%
Time: 2 years
Answer: The principal is $900 .

Explanation:
Given , P = ? , I = $27 , t = 2 years , r = 0.015
We know that  I = Prt
So , p = \(\frac{I}{rt}\)
p = \(\frac{27}{0.015 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{27}{0.03}\)
= 900
So, The principal is $900 .

Question 19.
You spend 8 hours each weekday at school. (a) Write the portion of a weekday spent at school as a fraction, a decimal, and a percent. (b) What percent of a week is spent at school if you go to school 4 days that week? Round to the nearest tenth.
Answer: a. the portion of a weekday spent at school is 33% , It can be written as \(\frac{100}{3}\) and in decimal as 0.333
b . The 9% of a week is spent at school if you go to school 4 days that week.

Explanation:
Given , You spend 8 hours each weekday at school.
a. In a day we have 24 hours so , The percent of 8 hours in 24 hours is
a = 8 , w = 24 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{8}{24}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{8 × 100}{24}\)
p = \(\frac{800}{24}\)
p = 33.3 %
It can be written as \(\frac{100}{3}\) and in decimal as 0.333
So, 8 is 33% of 24.

b. The number of hours in a week  , that is 7 days are 168 hours
The number of hours in 4 days to school are 32
So , we have a = 32 , w = 168 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{32}{168}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{32 × 100}{168}\)
p = \(\frac{3200}{168}\)
p = 9.04 %
p = 9%
So , The 9% of a week is spent at school if you go to school 4 days that week.

Question 20.
Research indicates that90% of the volume of an iceberg is below water. The volume of the iceberg above the water is 160,000 cubic feet. What is the volume of the iceberg below water?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents pt 20
Answer: The volume of the iceberg below water is  1,77,777 cubic feet

Explanation:
Given , p = 90% , a = 160,000 , w = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{160,000}{w}\) = \(\frac{90}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{160,000 × 100}{90}\)
w = \(\frac{1050}{125}\)
w = 1,77,777.7
So, the volume of the iceberg below water is  1,77,777 cubic feet

Question 21.
You estimate that there are 66 cars in a parking lot. The actual number of cars is 75.
a. Find the percent error.
b. What other estimate gives the same percent error? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: a. percent Error is 12%
b, If the estimated number is 66.1 then percent error will be 12%

Explanation:
The amount of error is 75 – 66 = 9
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 9 and Actual value = 75 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{9}{75}\)
= 0.12
= 0.12 × 100
=  12%
So, percent Error is 12%

b. if the estimation is 66.1
The amount of error is 75 – 66.1 = 8.9
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 8.9 and Actual value = 75 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{8.9}{75}\)
= 0.1198
= 0.1198 × 100
=  11.9%
Apporximately 12%
So, percent Error is 12%

Percents Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 1
Question 1.
A movie theater offers 30% a movie ticket to students from your school. The regular price of a movie ticket is $8.50. What is the discounted price that you pay for a ticket?
A. $2.55
B. $5.50
C. $5.95
D. $8.20
Answer:  C. $5.95

Explanation:
Given , original price = $8.5 , with 30% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 30% = 70% of the original price
sales price = 70% of 8.5
= 0.7 × 8.5 = 5.95
So, The sales price is $5.95.

Question 2.
What is the least value of x for which the inequality is true?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 2
16 ≥ – 2x
Answer: x = 1

Explanation:
Let us say X = 1
16 ≥ – 2(1)
16 ≥ – 2
So , x = 1 , for 16 ≥ – 2x

Question 3.
You are building a scale model of a park that is planned for a city. The model uses the scale 1 centimeter = 2 meters. The park will have a rectangular reflecting pool with a length of 20 meters and a width of 12 meters. In your scale model, what will be the area of the reflecting pool?
F. 60 cm2
G. 120 cm2
H. 480 cm2
I. 960 cm2
Answer:  F .  60 cm2

Explanation:
Given ,actual  l = 20 meters , The model uses the scale 1 centimeter = 2 meters.  let the model length be x
The model length x will be , \(\frac{1cm}{2m}\) = \(\frac{x cm}{20m}\)
2x = 20
x = 10 ,
Let the model width be y , The model width y will be \(\frac{1 cm}{2m}\) = \(\frac{y}{12}\)
y= 6 ,
So The model area of the reflecting pool , Area of rectangle = l × w
l = 10 , y = 6 , then A = 10 × 6 = 60 cm2
The model area of the reflecting pool is 60 cm2

Question 4.
Which proportion represents the problem?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 4
Answer: D . \(\frac{43}{n}\) = \(\frac{17}{100}\)

Explanation:
Given ,  p = 17% , a = 43
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{43}{w}\) = \(\frac{17}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{43 × 100}{17}\)
w = \(\frac{4300}{17}\)
w = 252.9
So, 43 is 17% of 252.9.

Question 5.
Which list of numbers is in order from least to greatest?
F. 0.8, \(\frac{5}{8}\), 70%, 0.09
G. 0.09, \(\frac{5}{8}\), 0.8, 70%
H. \(\frac{5}{8}\), 70%, 0.8, 0.09
I. 0.09, \(\frac{5}{8}\), 70%, 0.8
Answer: H. \(\frac{5}{8}\), 70%, 0.8, 0.09

Explanation:
Given,
\(\frac{5}{8}\) can be written as 0.625 ,
70% can be written as 0.7
The order from least to greatest  is  \(\frac{5}{8}\) , 70% , 0.8 , 0.9

Question 6.
What is the value of \(\frac{9}{8}\) ÷ (-\(\frac{11}{4}\))?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 6
Answer: the value of \(\frac{9}{8}\) ÷ (-\(\frac{11}{4}\)) is – 0.413

Explanation:
\(\frac{9}{8}\)  can be written as  1.125
–\(\frac{11}{4}\) can be written as  – 2.75
then , \(\frac{1.125}{-2.75}\) = – 0.413

Question 7.
The number of calories you burn by playing basketball is proportional to the number of minutes you play. Which of the following is a valid interpretation of the graph?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 7
A. The unit rate is \(\frac{1}{9}\) calorie per minute.
B. You burn 5 calories by playing basketball for 45 minutes.
C. You do not burn any calories if you do not play basketball for at least 1 minute.
D. You burn an additional 9 calories for each minute of basketball you play.
Answer: C. You do not burn any calories if you do not play basketball for at least 1 minute.

Explanation:
As , the graph shows the coordinates of the minutes to calories by (0,0) at the initial stage of playing basketball for at least a minute .
So , the graph represents , You do not burn any calories if you do not play basketball for at least 1 minute.

Question 8.
A softball team is ordering uniforms. Each player receives one of each of the items shown in the table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 8
Which expression represents the total cost (in dollars) when there are 15 players on the team?
F. x + 24.86
G. 15x + 372.90
H. x + 372.90
I. x + 387.90
Answer: G. 15x + 372.90

Explanation:
Given , jersey = x
So , the only option in the options with an x for 15 members is 15x ,
So, G. 15x + 372.90 is the correct option

Question 9.
Your friend solves the equation. What should your friend do to correct the error that he made?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 9
A. Multiply – 45 by – 3.
B. Add 3 to – 45.
C. Add 2 to – 15.
D. Divide – 45 by – 3.
Answer: A. Multiply – 45 by – 3.

Explanation:
Given , – 3(2 + w) = -45
By , Multiply – 45 by – 3.
we get 2 + w = 15
w = 15 – 2
w = 13.

Question 10.
You are comparing the costs of a certain model of ladder at a hardware store and at an online store.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 10
Part A What is the total cost of buying the ladder at each of the stores? Show your work and explain your reasoning.
Part B Suppose that the hardware store is offering 10% off the price of the ladder and that the online store is offering free shipping and handling. Which store offers the lower total cost for the ladder? by how much? Show your work and explain your reasoning.
Answer: Part A , The total cost at hardware store is $371 and The total cost at online store is $355.2
Part B ,The hardware store offers the best price $336 by $3.2 less than the online store $339.2

Explanation:
Part A , The ladder cost at hardware store is $350 , with 6% tax ,
So, 6% of 350
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{350}\) = \(\frac{6}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{350 × 6}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2100}{100}\)
a = 21
So, 21 is 6% of 350.
The total cost at hardware store is $350 + $ 21 = $371

The ladder cost at online store is $320 , with 6% tax ,
So, 6% of 320
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{320}\) = \(\frac{6}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{320 × 6}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1920}{100}\)
a = 19.2
So,19.2 is 6% of 320.
Additionally shipping cost is 5% of $320
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{320}\) = \(\frac{5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{320 × 5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1600}{100}\)
a = 16
So,16 is 5% of 320.
The total cost at online store is $320 + $ 19.2 + $16 = $355.2

Part B, If the hardware store offers 10% off
Then , We know , The sales price be 100% – 10% = 90% of the original price
sales price = 90% of 350
= 0.9 × 350 = 315
So, The sales price is $315 .
The 6% of 320  is  $21
The total cost in hardware store after 10% off is $315 + $ 21 = $336

The online store offers free shipping and handling then the price will be $320 and 6% tax
So , 6% of 320  is $19.2
The total cost online store is $320 + $ 19.2 = $339.2

The hardware store offers the best price $336 by $3.2 less than the online store $339.2

Question 11.
Which graph represents the inequality – 5 – 3x ≥ – 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 11
Answer:

Explanation:
Option F represents the x value from -4 to 2
So , if x = -4 ,
Then – 5 – 3(-4) ≥ – 11
-5 + 12 ≥ – 11
7 ≥ – 11
if x = 2
– 5 – 3(2) ≥ – 11
-5 – 6 ≥ – 11
-11 ≥ – 11
So, option F represents the inequality – 5 – 3x ≥ – 11.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers

The best Big Ideas Math Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers Answer Key PDF is available here. The students who are seeking help in math learning in an easy way can refer to this page. You can find the professionals suggested ways of solving Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers questions and learn the best methods to solve the problems. The students can practice all the questions from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers to score good marks in the examination.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers

The topics covered in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 are multiplying integers, dividing integers, conversion between fractions and decimals, multiplying rational numbers, and dividing rational numbers. Students who are willing to practice exercise questions can go through the Chapter Review, Practice Test, Cumulative Practice which is provided at the end of the chapter.

Performance

Lesson: 1 Multiplying Integers

Lesson: 2 Dividing Integers

Lesson: 3 Converting Between Fractions and Decimals

Lesson: 4 Multiplying Rational Numbers

Lesson: 5 Dividing Rational Numbers

Chapter: 2 – Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers

Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers STEAM Video/Performance

STEAM Video

Carpenter or Joiner

Carpenters and joiners must be precise with their measurements when building structures. In what other real-life situations must measurements be precise?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 1

Watch the STEAM Video “Carpenter or Joiner.” Then answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Robert says that changes in water content cause wood to shrink or expand across the grain more than along the grain. What does this mean?

Answer:
Robert says that changes in water content cause wood to expand across the grain. So, the carpenter has to make the measurements 1/16 inches.

Question 2.
Describe how you can cut a log so that the pieces shrink in different ways as they dry out.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 1.1

Answer:
While cutting the log, you need to take the correct measurement to avoid the pieces shrink in different ways as they dry out.

Performance Task

Precisely Perfect

After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the Video Performance Task. You will be given the accuracies of seven telescopes. For example:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 3
You will be asked to compare the accuracies of the telescopes. Why do different telescopes have different accuracies?

Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers Getting Ready for Chapter 2

Chapter Exploration

Question 1.
Work with a partner. Use integer counters to find each product. Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4.1

Work with a partner. Use integer counters to find the product.

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 1

Explanation:
a. (+3) x (-2) = -6
The integers have different signs, so the product is a negative value.
b. (-2) x (-2) = 4
The integers have the same sign, so the product is a positive value.
c. (-2) x (+3) = -6

Question 2.
(+3) × (+2)

Answer:
(+3) x (+2) = +6

Explanation:
The given expression is (+3) x (+2)
The integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive value.
(+3) x (+2) = +6

Question 3.
(+3) × (-1)

Answer:
(+3) × (-1) = -3

Explanation:
The given expression is (+3) × (-1)
The integers have different signs. So the product is a negative value.
(+3) × (-1) = -3

Question 4.
(+2) × (-4)

Answer:
(+2) × (-4) = -8

Explanation:
The given expression is (+2) × (-4)
The integers have different signs. So the product is a negative value.
(+2) × (-4) =-8

Question 5.
(-3) × (+2)

Answer:
(-3) × (+2) = -6

Explanation:
The given expression is
The integers have different signs. So the product is a negative value.
(-3) × (+2) = -6

Question 6.
(-2) × (-3)

Answer:
(-2) × (-3) = +6

Explanation:
The given expression is (-2) × (-3)
The integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive value.
(-2) × (-3) = +6

Question 7.
(-1) × (-4)

Answer:
(-1) × (-4) = +4

Explanation:
The given expression is (-1) × (-4)
The integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive value.
(-1) × (-4) = +4

Question 8.
(-1) × (-2)

Answer:
(-1) × (-2) = +2

Explanation:
The given expression is (-1) × (-2)
The integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive value.
(-1) × (-2) = +2

Question 9.
(+3) × (+1)

Answer:
(+3) × (+1) = 3

Explanation:
The given expression is (+3) × (+1) = 3
The integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive value.
(+3) × (+1) = 3

Question 10.
(-3) × (-2)

Answer:
(-3) × (-2) = +6

Explanation:
The given expression is (-3) × (-2)
The integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive value.
(-3) × (-2) = +6

Question 11.
(-2) × (+2)

Answer:
(-2) × (+2) = -4

Explanation:
The given expression is (-2) × (+2)
The integers have different signs. So the product is a negative value.
(-2) × (+2) = -4

Question 12.
(-2) × (+4)

Answer:
(-2) × (+4) = -8

Explanation:
The given expression is (-2) × (+4)
The integers have different signs. So the product is a negative value.
(-2) × (+4) = -8

Question 13.
(-4) × (-2)

Answer:
(-4) × (-2) = +8

Explanation:
The given expression is (-4) × (-2)
The integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive value.
(-4) × (-2) = +8

Question 14.
MAKE A CONJECTURE
Use your results in Exercises 1–13 to determine the sign of each product.
a. negative integer and a positive integer
b. two negative integers
c. two positive integers

Answer:
a. When you multiply a negative integer and a positive integer, the product is a negative integer.
b. When you multiply two negative integers, then the product is a positive integer.
c. If you multiply two positive integers, then the product is a positive integer.

Explanation:
a. negative integer and a positive integer
When you multiply a negative integer and a positive integer, the product is a negative integer.
b. two negative integers
When you multiply two negative integers, then the product is a positive integer.
c. two positive integers
If you multiply two positive integers, then the product is a positive integer.

Vocabulary

The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4.2

Lesson 2.1 Multiplying Integers

EXPLORATION 1
Understanding Products Involving Negative Integers
Work with a partner.
a. The number line and integer counters model the product 3 • 2. How can you find 3 • (-2)? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4.3
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4.4
b. Use the tables to find -3 • 2 and -3 • (-2). Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4.5
c.
INDUCTIVE REASONING
Complete the table. Then write general rules for multiplying

  1. two integers with the same sign and
  2. two integers with different signs.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4.6

Answer:
a. 3 . 2 = 6
3 . (-2) = -6
b. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 2
c. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 3

Explanation:
a. The product of 3 and 2 is 6
Both the integers are positive. So, the product is also positive.
3 . (-2) = -6
The reason is one integer is positive and another integer is negative. So, the result is negative.
b. The product of two positive or negative integers is a positive integer. The product of one positive and second negative integers is a negative integer.
c. In any expression, integers are having the same sign, which means the product is positive. If the integers are having a different sign, then the product is negative.

2.1 Lesson

Try It

Find the product.

Question 1.
5 • 5

Answer:
5 . 5 = 25

Explanation:
The given expression is 5 . 5
The given integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive integer.
5 . 5 = 25

Question 2.
-1(-9)

Answer:
-1(-9) = +9

Explanation:
The given expression is -1(-9)
The given integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive integer.
-1(-9) = +9

Question 3.
-7 • (-8)

Answer:
-7 • (-8) = 56

Explanation:
The given expression is -7 • (-8)
The given integers have the same sign. So the product is a positive integer.
-7 • (-8) = 56

Question 4.
12 • (-2)

Answer:
12 • (-2) = -24

Explanation:
The given integers are 12, -2
Integers have different signs. So, the product is a negative integer.
12 • (-2) = -24

Question 5.
4(-6)

Answer:
4(-6) = -24

Explanation:
The given integers are 4, -6
Integers have different signs. So, the product is a negative integer.
4(-6) = -24

Question 6.
-25(0)

Answer:
-25(0) = 0

Explanation:
The given integers are -25, 0
Integers have different signs. So, the product is a negative integer.
-25(0) = 0
When you multiply any number with zero, the product is also zero.

Try It

Evaluate the expression.

Question 7.
8 • (-15) • 0

Answer:
8 • (-15) • 0 = 0

Explanation:
The given expression is 8 • (-15) • 0
Use the commutative property of the multiplication
= -120 . 0
= 0

Question 8.
24 – 33

Answer:
24 – 3³ = -3

Explanation:
The given expression is 24 – 3³
Write 3³ as a repeated multiplication
= 24 – (3 . 3 . 3)
= 24 – 27
= -3

Question 9.
10 – 7(3 – 5)

Answer:
10 – 7(3 – 5) = 24

Explanation:
The given expression is 10 – 7(3 – 5)
Perform the operations in the parenthesis
= 10 – 7(-2)
= 10 + 14
= 24

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
WRITING
What can you conclude about two integers whose product is (a) positive and (b) negative?

Answer:
If the product of two integers is positive, then those integers are with the same sign. If the product of two integers is negative, then those integers are having different signs.

Explanation:
The two integers product is a positive integer means those integers are with two positive signs or two negative signs.
For example 4 . 2 = 8, (-4) . (-2) = 8
The two integers is a negative integer means those are having one positive integer and negative integer irrespective of the order.
Examples are -4 . 2 = -8, 4 . -2 = -8

EVALUATING AN EXPRESSION
Evaluate the expression.

Question 11.
4(-8)

Answer:
4(-8) = -32

Explanation:
The given expression is 4(-8)
Here integers are having different signs. So the product is a negative integer.
4(-8) = -32

Question 12.
-5(-7)

Answer:
-5(-7) = 35

Explanation:
The given expression is -5(-7)
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-5(-7) = 35

Question 13.
12 – 32 • (-2)

Answer:
12 – 3² • (-2) = 30

Explanation:
The given expression is 12 – 3² • (-2)
Write 3² as a repeated multiplication
= 12 – (3 . 3) . (-2)
= 12 – 9 . (-2)
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
= 12 + 18
= 30

REASONING
Tell whether the statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.

Question 14.
The product of three positive integers is positive.

Answer:
True

Explanation:
The product of three positive integers is positive The reason is the product of two positive integers is positive. Again perform the product of an obtained positive integer with the third positive integer to get a positive integer.

Question 15.
The product of three negative integers is positive.

Answer:
False

Explanation:
The product of three negative integers is always a negative integer. Because the product of two negative integers is a positive integer. The product of obtained positive integer and remaining negative integer is a negative integer. So, the product of three integers is not positive.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 16.
On a mountain, the temperature decreases by 18°F for each 5000-foot increase in elevation. At 7000 feet, the temperature is 41°F. What is the temperature at 22,000 feet? Justify your answer.

Answer:
The temperature at 22,000 feet is 95°F

Explanation:
Change in temperature over 5000 feet = 18°F
The temperature at 7000 feet = 41°F
The temperature at 22000 feet = 7000 + 5000x
22000 – 7000 = 5000x
15000 = 5000x
x = 15000/5000
x = 3
So, the temperature at 22000 feet is 41 + 3(18)
= 41 + 54 = 95°F

Question 17.
Players in a racing game earn 3 points for each coin they collect. Each player loses 5 points for each second that he or she finishes after the first-place finisher. The table shows the results of a race. List the players in order from greatest to least number of points.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4.7
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 4.8

Answer:
Player 3, Player 2, Player 1, Player 4.

Explanation:
Players in a racing game earn 3 points for each coin they collect.
The number of coins earned by the players are listed here.
Player 2 = 18 x 3 = 54 points
Player 3 takes 3 seconds more than player 2 to finish the game.
So, player 3 number of points = (24 . 3) – (5 . 3) = 72 – 15 = 57
Player 4 takes 6 seconds more than player 2 to finish the game.
So, the number of points earned by player 4 = (27 . 3) – (5 . 6)
= 81 – 30 = 51
Player 1 takes 8 seconds more than player 2 to finish the game.
So, the number of points earned by player 1 = (31 . 3) – (5 . 8)
= 93 – 40 = 53
Hence, the number of coins earned by the players are Player 3 = 57, Player 2 = 53, Player 1 = 53, Player 4 = 51

Multiplying Integers Homework & Practice 2.1

Review & Refresh

Find the distance between the two numbers on a number line.

Question 1.
-4.3 and 0.8

Answer:
5.1

Explanation:
The distance between -4.3 and 0.8 = | 0.8 – (-4.3) |
= | 0.8 + 4.3 | = | 5.1 |
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers4

Question 2.
-7.7 and -6.4

Answer:
1.3

Explanation:
The distance between -7.7 and -6.4 = | -6.4 – (-7.7) |
= | -6.4 + 7.7 | = | 1.3 |
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 5

Question 3.
-2\(\frac{3}{5}\) and -1

Answer:
3.6

Explanation:
The distance between -2(3/5) or -13/5 and 1 = | 1 – (-13/5) |
= | 1 + 13/5 | = | (5 + 13)/5 |
= | 18/5 | = | 3.6 |
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 6

Divide.

Question 4.
27 ÷ 9

Answer:
27 ÷ 9 = 3

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 7

Question 5.
48 ÷ 6

Answer:
48 ÷ 6 = 8

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 8

Question 6.
56 ÷ 4

Answer:
56 ÷ 4 = 14

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 9

Question 7.
153 ÷ 8

Answer:
153 ÷ 8 = 19 R 1

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 10

Question 8.
What is the prime factorization of 84?
A. 22 × 32
B. 23 × 7
C. 33 × 7
D. 22 × 3 × 7

Answer:
D. 2² x 3 x 7

Explanation:
Divide 84 by 2
84/2 = 42
Divide 42 by 2
42/2 = 21
divide 21 by 3
21/3 = 7
Divide 7 by 7
7/7 = 1
So, the prime factorization of 84 is 2 x 2 x 3 x 7 = 2² x 3 x 7

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
CHOOSE TOOLS
Use a number line or integer counters to find the product. (See Exploration 1, p. 49.)

Question 9.
2(-4)

Answer:
2(-4) = -8

Explanation:
2 . -4
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 11

Question 10.
-6(3) = -18

Answer:
-6(3)

Explanation:
-6. 3
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 12

Question 11.
4(-5)

Answer:
4(-5) = -20

Explanation:
4(-5)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 13
So, 4(-5) = -20

MULTIPLYING INTEGERS
Find the product.

Question 12.
6 • 4

Answer:
6 • 4 = 24

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
6 • 4 = 24

Question 13.
7(-3)

Answer:
7(-3) = -21

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the different sign is negative.
7(-3) = -21

Question 14.
-2(8)

Answer:
-2(8) = -16

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
-2(8) = -16

Question 15.
-3(-4)

Answer:
-3(-4) = 12

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-3(-4)= 12

Question 16.
-6 • 7

Answer:
-6 • 7= -42

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
-6 • 7 = -42

Question 17.
3 • 9

Answer:
3 • 9 = 27

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
3 • 9 = 27

Question 18.
8 • (-5)

Answer:
8 • (-5) = -40

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
8 • (-5) = -40

Question 19.
-1 • (-12)

Answer:
-1 • (-12) = 12

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-1 • (-12) = 12

Question 20.
-5(10)

Answer:
-5(10) = -50

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
-5(10) = -50

Question 21.
-13(0)

Answer:
-13(0) = 0

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
-13(0) = -0 = 0

Question 22.
-9 • 9

Answer:
-9 • 9 = -81

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
-9 • 9 = -81

Question 23.
15(-2)

Answer:
15(-2) = -30

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
15(-2) = -30

Question 24.
-10 • 11

Answer:
-10 • 11 = -110

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
-10 • 11 = -110

Question 25.
-6 • (-13)

Answer:
-6 • (-13) = 78

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-6 • (-13) = 78

Question 26.
7(-14)

Answer:
7(-14) = -98

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
7(-14) = -98

Question 27.
-11 • (-11)

Answer:
-11 • (-11) = 121

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-11 • (-11) = 121

Question 28.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You burn 10 calories each minute you jog. What integer represents the change in your calories after you jog for 20 minutes?

Answer:
The change in your calories after you jog for 20 minutes is 200.

Explanation:
The number of calories you burn per minute = 10
The change in your calories after you jog for 20 minutes = 20 x 10 = 200

Question 29.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In a four-year period, about 80,000 acres of coastal wetlands in the United States are lost each year. What integer represents the total change in coastal wetlands?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 6

Answer:
The total change in coastal wetlands is 20000 acres.

Explanation:
In A 4 year period, About 80,000 acres of coastal wetlands in United States are lost each year.
so, total area =80000 acres
total time = 4 years
now, we can use formula
total change in wetlands = ( total area)/(total time)
now, we can put values
total change in wetlands = 80000/4 = 20000

EVALUATING EXPRESSIONS
Evaluate the expression.

Question 30.
(-4)2

Answer:
(-4)² = 16

Explanation:
(-4)² = -4 . -4 = 16

Question 31.
-62

Answer:
-6² = -36

Explanation:
-6² = -6. 6 = -36

Question 32.
-5 • 3 • (-2)

Answer:
-5 • 3 • (-2) = 30

Explanation:
-5 • 3 • (-2) = -15 . (-2)
= 30

Question 33.
3 • (-12) • 0

Answer:
3 • (-12) • 0 = 0

Explanation:
3 • (-12) • 0 = -36 . 0 = 0

Question 34.
-5(-7)(-20)

Answer:
-5(-7)(-20) = -700

Explanation:
-5(-7)(-20) = -5 . -7 (-20) = 35 . -20 = -700

Question 35.
5 – 82

Answer:
5 – 8² = -59

Explanation:
5 – 8² = 5 – (8 . 8)
= 5 – 64 = -59

Question 36.
-52 • 4

Answer:
-5² . 4 = -100

Explanation:
-5² . 4 = -5 . 5 . 4
= -25 . 4 = -100

Question 37.
-2 • (-3)3

Answer:
-2 • (-3)³ = 54

Explanation:
-2 • (-3)³ = -2 . (-3 . -3 . -3)
= -2 . (-3 . 9)
= -2 . -27 = 54

Question 38.
2 + 1 • (-7 + 5)

Answer:
2 + 1 • (-7 + 5) = 0

Explanation:
2 + 1 • (-7 + 5) = 2 + 1 . (-2)
= 2 – 2 = 0

Question 39.
4 – (-2)3

Answer:
4 – (-2)³ = 12

Explanation:
4 – (-2)³ = 4 – (-2 . -2 . -2)
= 4 – (-2 . 4) = 4 – (-8)
= 4 + 8 = 12

Question 40.
4 • (25 • 32)

Answer:
4 • (25 • 3²) = 900

Explanation:
4 • (25 • 3²) = 4 . (25 . 3 . 3)
= 4 . (25 . 9) = 4 . 225
= 900

Question 41.
-4(32 – 8) + 1

Answer:
-4(3² – 8) + 1 = -3

Explanation:
-4(3² – 8) + 1 = -4(3 . 3 – 8) + 1
= -4(9 – 8) + 1
= -4(1) + 1 = -4 + 1 = -3

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend evaluates the expression. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 42.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 7

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
So, -2(-7) = 14

Question 43.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 8

Answer:
Correct

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different sign is negative.
-10² = -10 . 10 = -100

PATTERNS
Find the next two numbers in the pattern.

Question 44.
-12, 60, -300, 1500, ….

Answer:
The next two numbers in the pattern are -7500, 37500

Explanation:
Multiply each integer by -5
-12 x -5 = 60
60 x -5 = -300
-300 x -5 = 1500
1500 x -5 = -7500
-7500 x -5 = 37500

Question 45.
7, -28, 112, -448,…..

Answer:
The next two numbers in the pattern are 1792, -7168

Explanation:
Multiply each integer by -4
7 x -4 = -28
-28 x -4 = 112
112 x -4 = -448
-448 x -4 = 1792
1792 x -4 = -7168

Question 46.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In a scavenger hunt, each team earns 25 points for each item that they find. Each team loses 15 points for every minute after 4:00 P.M. that they report to the city park. The table shows the number of items found by each team and the time that each team reported to the park. Which team wins the scavenger hunt? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 9

Answer:
Team D wins the scavenger hunt.

Explanation:
Each team earns 25 points for each item that they find. Each team loses 15 points for every minute after 4:00 P.M
The points earned by Team A = (13 x 25) – (15 x 3) = 325 – 45 = 280
The points earned by Team B = (15 x 25) – (15 x 7) = 375 – 105 = 270
The points earned by Team C = (11 x 25) = 275
The points earned by Team D = (12 x 25) – (1 x 15) = 300 – 15 = 285
Finally, Team D scores the highest points.
Hence, Team D wins the scavenger hunt.

Question 47.
REASONING
The height of an airplane during a landing is given by 22,000 + (-480t), where t is the time in minutes. Estimate how many minutes it takes the plane to land. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
It takes 45 minutes for the plane to land.

Explanation:
The height of an airplane during a landing = 22,000 + (-480t)
= 22,000 – 480t
After landing, the height of the airplane = 0
So, 22,000 – 480t = 0
22000 = 0 + 480t
480t = 22000
t = 22000/480
t = 2200/48
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 14
So, it takes 45 minutes for the plane to land.

Question 48.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table shows the price of a bluetooth speaker each month for 4 months.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 10
a. Describe the change in the price of the speaker.
b. The table at the right shows the amount of money you save each month. When do you have enough money saved to buy the speaker? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 11

Answer:
a. The Bluetooth speaker price decreased by 12 dollars every month.
b. You can buy the speaker in the month of September.

Explanation:
a. The table shows that the change in the price of the Bluetooth speaker per every month is -12. So, the Bluetooth speaker price decreased by 12 dollars per every month.
b.
The amount of money you saved in June is $35, the price of the speaker is $165.
The amount of money you saved in July is 35 + 55 = $90, the price of the speaker is 165 – 12 = $153
The amount of money you saved in august is 90 + 45 = $135, the price of the speaker is 165 – 24 = $141
The amount of money you saved in September is 135 + 18 = $153, the price of the speaker is 165 – 36 = 129
So, you can buy the speaker in the month of September.

Question 49.
DIG DEEPER!
Two integers, a and b, have a product of 24. What is the least possible sum of a and b?

Answer:
The least possible sum of a and b is -25.

Explanation:
The product of a and b = 24
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 15
The least possible sum of a and b is -25.

Question 50.
NUMBER SENSE
Consider two integers p and q. Explain why p × (-q) = (-p) × q = -pq

Answer:
We know that,
the product of two integers with the different sign is negative.
p × (-q)
Here p is a positive integer, q is a negative integer
(-p) × q
Here p is a negative integer and q is a positive integer.
So, the product is negative

Lesson 2.2 Dividing Integers

EXPLORATION 1

Understanding Quotients Involving Negative Integers
Work with a partner.
a. Discuss the relationship between multiplication and division with your partner.
b. INDUCTIVE REASONING
Complete the table. Then write general rules for dividing

  1. two integers with the same sign and
  2. two integers with different signs.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 12
c. Find the values of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 13 What do you notice? Is this true for Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 14 when a and b are integers? Explain.
d. Is every quotient of integers a rational number? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
a. Multiplication and division are two opposite operations.
b. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 16
c. True
d. Yes

Explanation:
a. Multiplication and division are the reverse operations. When you multiply two numbers, you will get the product. Divide the product by any one of the multiplicand to get another multiplicand.
b. When two integers have the same sign then the quotient is positive. If two integers have different signs then the quotient is negative. When any one of the integers is zero, then the quotient is zero.
c. -(8/4) = -(2) = -2
-8/4 = -2
8/-4 = -2
Yes, -(8/4), 8/-4, -8/4 are true.
d. Every quotient of integers a rational number.

2.2 Lesson

Try It

Find the quotient.

Question 1.
14 ÷ 2

Answer:
14 ÷ 2 = 7

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
14 ÷ 2 = 7

Question 2.
-32 ÷ (-4)

Answer:
-32 ÷ (-4) = 8

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-32 ÷ (-4) = 8

Question 3.
-40 ÷ (-8)

Answer:
-40 ÷ (-8) = 5

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-40 ÷ (-8) = 5

Try It

Find the quotient.

Question 4.
0 ÷ (-6)

Answer:
0 ÷ (-6) = 0

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
0 ÷ (-6) = 0

Question 5.
\(\frac{-49}{7}\)

Answer:
-49 ÷ 7 = -7

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-49 ÷ 7 = -7

Question 6.
\(\frac{21}{-3}\)

Answer:
21 ÷ -3 = -7

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
21 ÷ -3 = -7

Try It

Evaluate the expression when a = 18 and b = -6.

Question 7.
a ÷ b

Answer:
18 ÷ -6 = -3

Explanation:
a ÷ b
Put a = 18, b = -6
18 ÷ -6 = -3
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 13.1

Answer:
8

Explanation:
The given expression is (a + 6)/3
Put a = 18
= (18 + 6)/3 = 24/3
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
24/3 = 8

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 14.1

Answer:
-50

Explanation:
The given expression is b²/a + 4
Put a = 18, b = -6
= 18²/-6 + 4
= 324/-6 + 4
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
= -54 + 4 = -50

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
WRITING
What can you conclude about two integers whose quotient is (a) positive, (b) negative, or (c) zero?

Answer:
If the quotient of two integers is positive then the integers are having the same sign.
The quotient of two integers is negative when the integers are having different signs.
The quotient of two integers is zero when any one of the integers is zero.

DIVIDING INTEGERS
Find the quotient.

Question 11.
-12 ÷ 4

Answer:
-12 ÷ 4 = -3

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-12 ÷ 4 = -3

Question 12.
\(\frac{-6}{-2}\)

Answer:
-6 ÷ -2 = 3

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-6 ÷ -2 = 3

Question 13.
15 ÷ (-3)

Answer:
15 ÷ (-3) = -5

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
15 ÷ (-3) = -5

Question 14.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which expression does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 15

Answer:
-10/-5

Explanation:
Out of all expressions, -10/-5 is different. Because in all remaining expressions, the negative sign is applicable to either numerator or denominator. But in -10/-5 the negative sign is applicable to both numerator and denominator.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 15.
A female grizzly bear weighs 500 pounds. After hibernating for 6 months, she weighs only 350 pounds. What is the mean monthly change in weight?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 15.2

Answer:
The mean change in weight per month is 50 pounds.

Explanation:
A female grizzly bear weighs 500 pounds
After hibernating for 6 months, she weighs only 200 pounds
Mean change in weight = 500 – 200 = 300
6 months = 300 pounds
Divide both sides by 6
6 months/6 = 300/6
1 month = 50 pounds
The mean change in weight per month is 50 pounds.

Question 16.
The table shows the change in the number of crimes committed in a city each year for 4 years. What is the mean yearly change in the number of crimes?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 16

Answer:
The mean yearly change in the number of crimes are -49.

Explanation:
Mean = (sum of observations)/ number of observations
= (215 – 321 – 185 + 95)/4
= -196/4 = -49
The mean yearly change in the number of crimes are -49.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
At a restaurant, when a customer buys 4 pretzels, the fifth pretzel is free. Soft pretzels cost $3.90 each. You order 12 soft pretzels. What is your mean cost per pretzel?

Answer:
The mean cost per pretzel is $2.925.

Explanation:
At a restaurant, when a customer buys 4 pretzels, the fifth pretzel is free.
The cost of soft pretzels is $3.90
You order 12 soft pretzels
So, you need to pay for (4 + 4 + 4) – 3 = 12 – 3 = 9
The cost for 9 soft pretzels = 9 x 3.90 =35.1
The mean cost per pretzel = (35.1)/12 = $2.925

Dividing Integers Homework & Practice 2.2

Review & Refresh

Find the product.

Question 1.
8 • 10

Answer:
8 • 10 = 80

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
8 • 10 = 80

Question 2.
-6(9)

Answer:
-6(9) = -54

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different signs is negative.
-6(9) = -54

Question 3.
4(7)

Answer:
4(7) = 28

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
4(7) = 28

Question 4.
-9(-8)

Answer:
-9(-8) = 72

Explanation:
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-9(-8) = 72

Order the numbers from least to greatest.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 17

Answer:
0.24, 1/4, 28%

Explanation:
28% = 28/100 = 0.28
1/4 = 0.25
0.24
The order of numbers from the least to greatest is 0.24, 0.25, 0.28

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 18

Answer:
2/5, 42%, 0.45

Explanation:
42% = 42/100 = 0.42
0.45
2/5 = 0.4
The order of numbers from the least to greatest is 0.4, 0.42, 0.45

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 19

Answer:
0.69, 7/10, 71%, 0.84, 9/10

Explanation:
7/10 = 0.7
0.69
71% = 71/100 = 0.71
9/10 = 0.9
0.84
The order of numbers from the least to greatest is 0.69, 0.7, 0.71, 0.84, 0.9

Write an addition expression and write a subtraction expression represented by the number line. Then evaluate the expressions.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 20

Answer:
Addition expression is 0 + 5 = 5
Subtraction expression is 5 – 1 = 4

Explanation:
The red line on the number line represents
5 – 1 = 4
The blue line on the number line represents
0 + 5 = 5

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 21

Answer:
The addition expression is -3 + 3 = 0
The subtraction expression is 0 – 3 = -3

Explanation:
The red line on the number line represents
0 – 3 = -3
The blue line on the number line represents
-3 + 3 = 0

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
CHOOSE TOOLS
Complete the table. (See Exploration 1, p. 55.)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 22

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 17

Explanation:
10. 14 ÷ (-2) = -7
11. -24 ÷ 12 = -2
12. -55 ÷ (-5) = 11

DIVIDING INTEGERS
Find the quotient, if possible.

Question 13.
4 ÷ (-2)

Answer:
4 ÷ (-2) = -2

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
4 ÷ (-2) = -2

Question 14.
21 ÷ (-7)

Answer:
21 ÷ (-7) = -3

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
21 ÷ (-7) = -3

Question 15.
-20 ÷ 4

Answer:
-20 ÷ 4 = -5

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-20 ÷ 4 = -5

Question 16.
-18 ÷ (-3)

Answer:
-18 ÷ (-3) = 6

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-18 ÷ (-3) = 6

Question 17.
\(\frac{-14}{2}\)

Answer:
-14 ÷ 2 = -7

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-14 ÷ 2 = -7

Question 18.
\(\frac{0}{6}\)

Answer:
0 ÷ 6 = 0

Explanation:
If any of the integers is zero in the division expression, then the quotient is zero.
0 ÷ 6 = 0

Question 19.
\(\frac{-15}{-5}\)

Answer:
-15 ÷ -5 = 3

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-15 ÷ -5 = 3

Question 20.
\(\frac{54}{-9}\)

Answer:
54 ÷ -9 = -6

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
54 ÷ -9 = -6

Question 21.
\(-\frac{33}{11}\)

Answer:
-33 ÷ 11 = -3

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-33 ÷ 11 = -3

Question 22.
-49 ÷ (-7)

Answer:
-49 ÷ (-7) = 7

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-49 ÷ (-7) = 7

Question 23.
0 ÷ (-2)

Answer:
0 ÷ (-2) = 0

Explanation:
If any of the integers is zero in the division expression, then the quotient is zero.
0 ÷ (-2) = 0

Question 24.
\(\frac{60}{-6}\)

Answer:
60 ÷ -6 = -10

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
60 ÷ -6 = -10

Question 25.
\(\frac{-56}{14}\)

Answer:
-56 ÷ 14 = -4

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-56 ÷ 14 = -4

Question 26.
\(\frac{18}{0}\)

Answer:
18 ÷ 0 = 0

Explanation:
If any of the integers is zero in the division expression, then the quotient is zero.
18 ÷ 0 = 0

Question 27.
\(-\frac{65}{5}\)

Answer:
-65 ÷ 5 = -13

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-65 ÷ 5 = -13

Question 28.
\(\frac{-84}{-7}\)

Answer:
-84 ÷ -7 = 12

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-84 ÷ -7 = 12

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the quotient. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 23

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-63 ÷ -9 = 7

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 24

Answer:
0 ÷ (-5) = 0

Explanation:
If any of the integers is zero in the division expression, then the quotient is zero.
0 ÷ (-5) = 0

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You read 105 pages of a novel over 7 days. What is the mean number of pages you read each day?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 24.1

Answer:
The mean is 15 pages a day.

Explanation:
To find the mean of the pages we read each day we will evaluate the quotient of the division of the number of pages we read over these days (105 days) by the number of days (7 days).
105 / 7 = 15
The mean is 15 pages a day.

USING ORDER OF OPERATIONS
Evaluate the expression.

Question 32.
-8 – 14 ÷ 2 + 5

Answer:
-8 – 14 ÷ 2 + 5 = -10

Explanation:
The given expression is -8 – 14 ÷ 2 + 5
-8 – (14 / 2) + 5
= -8 – 7 + 5
= -15 + 5 = -10

Question 33.
24 ÷ (-4) + (-2) • (-5)

Answer:
24 ÷ (-4) + (-2) • (-5) = 4

Explanation:
The given expression is 24 ÷ (-4) + (-2) • (-5)
= -6 + (-2) . (-5)
= -6 + 10
= 4

EVALUATING EXPRESSIONS
Evaluate the expression when x = 10, y = -2, and z = -5.

Question 34.
x ÷ y

Answer:
-5

Explanation:
The given expression is x ÷ y
Put x = 10, y = -2
= 10 ÷ -2
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
= -5

Question 35.
12 ÷ 3y

Answer:
-2

Explanation:
The given expression is 12 ÷ 3y
Put y = -2
= 12 ÷ 3(-2)
= 12 ÷ -6
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
= -2

Question 36.
\(\frac{2 z}{y}\)

Answer:
5

Explanation:
The given expression is 2z/y
Put y = -2, and z = -5.
= 2(-5)/(-2)
= -10/-2
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
= 5

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 25

Answer:
-2

Explanation:
The given expression is (-x + y)/6
Put x = 10, y = -2
= (-10 + (-2))/6
= (-10 – 2)/6
= -12/6
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
= -2

Question 38.
100 ÷ (-z2)

Answer:
4

Explanation:
The given expression is 100 ÷ (-z2)
Put z = -5
= 100 ÷(-(-5)²)
= 100 ÷ (25)
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
= 4

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 25.1

Answer:
-8

Explanation:
The given expression is (10y²)/z
Put y = -2, and z = -5
= (10(-2)²)/-5
= 10(4)/-5
= 40/-5
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
= -8

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 25.2

Answer:
25

Explanation:
The given expression is | (xz)/-y |
Put x = 10, y = -2, and z = -5
= | (10 . -5)/-(-2) |
= | -50/2 |
= 50/2
= 25

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 25.3

Answer:
65

Explanation:
The given expression is (-x² + 6z)/y
Put x = 10, y = -2, and z = -5
= (-(10)² + 6(-5))/-2
= (-100 – 30)/-2
= -130/-2
= 65

Question 42.
PATTERNS
Find the next two numbers in the pattern -128, 64, -32, 16, . . .. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
The next two numbers in the pattern are -8, 4.

Explanation:
Divide each integer by -2
-128/-2 = 64
64/-2 = -32
-32/-2 = 16
16/-2 = -8
-8/-2 = 4
So, the next two numbers in the pattern are -8, 4.

Question 43.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The Detroit-Windsor Tunnel is an underwater highway that connects the cities of Detroit, Michigan, and Windsor, Ontario. How many times deeper is the roadway than the bottom of the ship?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 26

Answer:
5 times deeper is the roadway than the bottom of the ship.

Explanation:
The deep of the bottom of the ship = -15 ft
The deep of the roadway = -75 ft
To find out how many times deeper is the roadway than the bottom of the ship, divide the deep of the roadway by the deep of the bottom of the ship
-75 / -15 = 5 times
So, 5 times deeper is the roadway than the bottom of the ship

Question 44.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A snowboarder descends from an elevation of 2253 feet to an elevation of 1011 feet in 3 minutes. What is the mean change in elevation per minute?

Answer:
The mean change in elevation per minute is 414 ft.

Explanation:
A snowboarder descends from an elevation of 2253 feet to an elevation of 1011 feet in 3 minutes
So, the mean change in elevation per minute = (2253 – 1011)/3
= 1242/3 = 414 ft

Question 45.
REASONING
The table shows a golfer’s scores relative to par for three out of four rounds of a tournament.
a. What was the golfer’s mean score per round for the first 3 rounds?
b. The golfer’s goal for the tournament is to have a mean score no greater than -3. Describe how the golfer can achieve this goal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 25.5
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 28

Answer:
a. The golfer’s mean score per round for the first 3 rounds is -2
b. The score in round 4 should be less than -6.

Explanation:
a. The golfer’s mean score per round for the first 3 rounds = (1 + (-4) + (-3))/3
= (1 – 4 – 3)/3 = (1 – 7)/3
= -6/3 = -2
b. The golfer’s goal for the tournament is to have a mean score no greater than -3.
(1 + (-4) + (-3) + x)/4 < -3
(1 – 4 – 3 + x)/4 <-3
(1 – 7 + x)/4 <-3
(-6 + x)/4 < -3
(-6 + x) < -3 . 4
(-6 + x) < -12
x < -12 + 6
x < -6
The score at the round 4 should be less than -6.

Question 46.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The regular admission price for an amusement park is $72. For a group of 15 or more, the admission price is reduced by $25 per person. How many people need to be in a group to save $500?

Answer:
20 people needed in the group to save $500.

Explanation:
Let the number of people is x
The price of the person reduced by $25
The total price we want to save is $500
x = 500/25 = 20
So, the number of people x needs to be in the group to save $500 is 20 people.

Question 47.
DIG DEEPER!
Write a set of five different integers that has a mean of -10. Explain how you found your answer.

Answer:
The set of five different integers whose mean is -10 are (-12, -11, -10, -9 -8).

Explanation:
Let us take the 5 integers as x, x + 1, x + 2, x + 3, x + 4
The mean of these integers is -10
(x + x + 1 + x + 2 + x + 3 + x + 4)/5 = -10
(5x + 10)/5 = -10
5x + 10 = -10 . 5
5x + 10 = -50
5x = -50 – 10
5x = -60
x = -60/5
x = -12
So, the set of 5 integers are -12, -12 + 1 = -11, -12 + 2 = -10, -12 +3 = -9, -12 + 4 = -8

Lesson 2.3 Converting Between Fractions and Decimals

EXPLORATION 1

Analyzing Denominators of Decimal Fractions
Work with a partner.
a. Write each decimal as a fraction or mixed number.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 29
b. What do the factors of the denominators of the fractions you wrote have in common? Is this always true for decimal fractions?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 30

EXPLORATION 2
Exploring Decimal Representations
Work with a partner.
a. A fraction \(\frac{a}{b}\) can be interpreted as a ÷ b. Use a calculator to convert each unit fraction to a decimal. Do some of the decimals look different than the others? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 31
b. Compare and contrast the fractions in part(a) with the fractions you wrote in Exploration 1. What conclusions can you make?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 32
c. Does every fraction have a decimal form that either terminates or repeats? Explain your reasoning.

2.3 Lesson

Try It

Write the fraction or mixed number as a decimal.

Question 1.
\(-\frac{6}{5}\)

Answer:
-6/5 = -1.2

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 19

Question 2.
-7\(\frac{3}{8}\)

Answer:
-7(3/8) = -7.375

Explanation:
-7(3/8) = -59/8
Use long division to divide 59 by 8
g Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 20

Question 3.
\(-\frac{3}{11}\)

Answer:
-3/11 = 0.2727

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 21
The remainder repeats. So, it is a repeating decimal.

Question 4.
1\(\frac{5}{27}\)

Answer:
1(5/27) =1.185

Explanation:
1(5/27) =32/27
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 22

Try It

Write the decimal as a fraction or mixed number in simplest form.

Question 5.
-0.3

Answer:
-0.3 = -3/10

Explanation:
-0.3 = -3/10

Question 6.
0.125

Answer:
0.125 = 1/8

Explanation:
0.125 = 125/1000
= (5 . 25)/(5 . 200)
= (5 . 5)/(5 . 40)
= 5/(8 . 5)
= 1/8

Question 7.
-3.1

Answer:
-3.1 = -31/10

Explanation:
-3.1 = -31/10

Question 8.
-10.25

Answer:
-10.25 = -41/4

Explanation:
-10.25 = -1025/100
= -(5 . 205)/(20 . 5)
= -(5 . 41)/(5 . 4)
= -41/4

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
WRITING
Compare and contrast terminating decimals and repeating decimals.

Answer:
A rational number can be expressed as either a terminating decimal or a repeating decimal. Divide numerator by the denominator you will get a remainder of 0, then you have a terminating decimal. The remainders will begin to repeat after some point, and you have a repeating decimal.
The example for terminating decimal is 5/8 = 0.625
The example for repeating decimal is 7/12 = 0.58333.

WRITING A FRACTION OR MIXED NUMBER AS A DECIMAL
Write the fraction or mixed number as a decimal.

Question 10.
\(\frac{3}{16}\)

Answer:
3/16 = 0.1875

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 23

Question 11.
–\(\frac{7}{15}\)

Answer:
-7/15 = -0.4666

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 24

Question 12.
6\(\frac{17}{20}\)

Answer:
6(17/20) = 6.85

Explanation:
6(17/20) = 137/20
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 25

WRITING A DECIMAL AS A FRACTION OR MIXED NUMBER
Write the decimal as a fraction or mixed number in simplest form.

Question 13.
0.6

Answer:
0.6 = 3/5

Explanation:
0.6 = 6/10
= 3/5

Question 14.
-12.48

Answer:
-12.48 = -312/25

Explanation:
-12.48 = -1248/100
= -(4 . 312)/(4 . 25)
= -312/25

Question 15.
0.408

Answer:
0.408 = 51/125

Explanation:
0.408 = 408/1000
= (51 . 8)/(125 . 8)
= 51/125

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 16.
A box turtle hibernates in sand at an elevation of 1.625 feet. A spotted turtle hibernates at an elevation of -1\(\frac{7}{12}\) feet. Which turtle hibernates deeper in the sand? How much deeper?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 33

Answer:
Box turtle hibernates deeper in the sand.

Explanation:
A box turtle hibernates in sand at an elevation of 1.625 feet.
A spotted turtle hibernates at an elevation of -1(7/12) feet
= -19/12 = -1.58333
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 26
1.625 is greater than -1.5833.
So, box turtle hibernates deeper in the sand.

Question 17.
A red sprite is an electrical flash that occurs in Earth’s upper atmosphere. The table shows the elevations of four red sprites. What is the range of the elevations?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 34

Answer:
The range of elevations are 51.66 miles, 50.6 miles, 50.53 miles, 50.52 miles.

Explanation:
First, write each fraction or mixed fraction as a decimal.
50.6
50(8/15) = 758/15 = 50.533
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 27
50(13/25) = 1263/25 = 50.52
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 28
155/3 = 51.66
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 29
So, the range of elevations are 51.66, 50.6, 50.53, 50.52

Converting Between Fractions and Decimals Homework & Practice 2.3

Review & Refresh

Find the quotient.

Question 1.
12 ÷ (-6)

Answer:
12 ÷ (-6) = -2

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
12 ÷ (-6) = -2

Question 2.
-48 ÷ 8

Answer:
-48 ÷ 8 = -6

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-48 ÷ 8 = -6

Question 3.
-42 ÷ (-7)

Answer:
-42 ÷ (-7) = 6

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-42 ÷ (-7) = 6

Question 4.
-33 ÷ (-3)

Answer:
-33 ÷ (-3) = 11

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-33 ÷ (-3) = 11

Find the product.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 35

Answer:
35.28

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 30

Question 6.
2.0035 • 4

Answer:
2.0035 • 4 = 8.0140

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 31

Question 7.
5.49 × 13.509

Answer:
5.49 × 13.509 = 74.16441

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 32

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 36

Answer:
0.0030018

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 33

Question 9.
Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 37

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 34

Explanation:
72/18 = 4. So, x/2 = 4
x = 4 . 2
x = 8
2 . 2/3 = 4/3
So, 18 . 2/3 = 36/3 = 12

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

STRUCTURE
Without dividing, determine whether the decimal form of the terminates or repeats. Explain. (See Explorations 1 & 2, p. 61.)

Question 10.
\(\frac{3}{8}\)

Answer:
3/8 is a terminating decimal.

Explanation:
3, 8 have no common factors.
The denominator 8 is in the form of 2m x 5n
Hence, 3/8 is a terminating decimal.
3/8 = 0.375

Question 11.
\(\frac{5}{7}\)

Answer:
5/7 is a repeating decimal.

Explanation:
5, 7 have no common factors
The denominator 7 is not in the form of 2m x 5n
Hence, 5/7 is a repeating decimal.

Question 12.
\(\frac{11}{40}\)

Answer:
11/40 is a terminating decimal.

Explanation:
11, 40 have no common factors
The denominator 40 is in the form of 2³ x 5¹
Hence, 11/40 is a terminating decimal.

Question 13.
\(\frac{5}{24}\)

Answer:
5/24 is a repeating decimal.

Explanation:
5, 24 have no common factors
The denominator 24 is not in the form of 2m x 5n
Hence, 5/24 is a repeating decimal.

WRITING A FRACTION OR MIXED NUMBER AS A DECIMAL
Write the fraction or mixed number as a decimal.

Question 14.
\(\frac{7}{8}\)

Answer:
7/8 = 0.875

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 35

Question 15.
\(\frac{1}{11}\)

Answer:
1/11 = 0.9090

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 36

Question 16.
-3\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer:
-3(1/2) = -3.5

Explanation:
-3(1/2) = -7/2
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 37

Question 17.
–\(\frac{7}{9}\)

Answer:
-7/9 = -0.77

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 38

Question 18.
–\(\frac{17}{40}\)

Answer:
-17/40 = -0.425

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 39

Question 19.
1\(\frac{5}{6}\)

Answer:
1(5/6) = 1.83333

Explanation:
1(5/6) = 11/6
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 40

Question 20.
4\(\frac{2}{15}\)

Answer:
4(2/15) = 4.133

Explanation:
4(2/15) = 62/15
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 41

Question 21.
\(\frac{25}{24}\)

Answer:
25/24 = 1.04166

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 42

Question 22.
–\(\frac{13}{11}\)

Answer:
-13 / 11 = -1.1818

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 43

Question 23.
-2\(\frac{17}{18}\)

Answer:
-2(17/18) = -2.944

Explanation:
-2(17/18) = -53/18
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 44

Question 24.
-5\(\frac{7}{12}\)

Answer:
-5(7/12) = -5.5833

Explanation:
-5(7/12) = -67/12
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 45

Question 25.
8\(\frac{15}{22}\)

Answer:
8(15/22) = 8.681818

Explanation:
8(15/22) = 191/22
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 46

Question 26.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend writes –\(\frac{7}{11}\) as a decimal. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 38

Answer:
Correct

Explanation:
-7/11 = -0.636363
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 47

WRITING A DECIMAL AS A FRACTION OR MIXED NUMBER
Write the decimal as a fraction or mixed number in simplest form.

Question 27.
-0.9

Answer:
-0.9 = -9/10

Explanation:
-0.9 = -9/10

Question 28.
0.45

Answer:
0.45 = 9/20

Explanation:
0.45 = 45/100
= (9 . 5)/(20 . 5)
= 9/20

Question 29.
-0.258

Answer:
-0.258 = -129/500

Explanation:
-0.258 = -258/1000
= -(129 . 2)/(500 . 2)
= -129/500

Question 30.
-0.312

Answer:
-0.312 = 39/125

Explanation:
-0.312 = -312/1000
= (39 . 8) / (125 . 8)
= 39/125

Question 31.
-2.32

Answer:
-2.32 = -58/25

Explanation:
-2.32 = -232/100
= -(58 . 4)/(25 . 4)
= -58/25

Question 32.
-1.64

Answer:
-1.64 = -41/25

Explanation:
-1.64 = -164/100
= -(41 . 4)/(25 . 4)
= -41/25

Question 33.
6.012

Answer:
6.012 = 1503/250

Explanation:
6.012 = 6012/1000
= (1503 . 4)/(250 . 4)
= 1503/250

Question 34.
-12.405

Answer:
-12.405 = -2481/200

Explanation:
-12.405 = -12405/1000
= -(2481 . 5)/(200 . 5)
= -2481/200

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You find one quarter, two dimes, and two nickels.
a. Write the dollar amount as a decimal.
b. Write the dollar amount as a fraction or mixed number in simplest form.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 39

Answer:
a. $0.55
b. 11/20

Explanation:
You find one quarter, two dimes, and two nickels.
a. Convert each one into dollars
1 quarter is equal to 0.25 dollars
1 dime is equal to 0.1 dollars.
1 nickels is equal to 0.05 dollars.
$0.25 + 2(0.1) + 2(0.05)
= 0.25 + 0.2 + 0.1
= $0.55
b. $0.55 = 55/100
= (5 . 11)/(5. 20)
= 11/20

COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Copy and complete the statement using < or >.

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 40

Answer:
-4(6/10) > -4.65

Explanation:
-4(6/10) = -46/10 = -4.6
-4.65 < -4.6
So, -4(6/10) > -4.65

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 41

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 49

Explanation:
-5(3/11) = -58/11 = -5.2727
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 48
-5.2727 < -5.222

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 42

Answer:
-2(13/16) < -2(11/14)

Explanation:
-2(13/16) = -45/16 = -2.8125
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 50
-2(11/14) = -39/14 = -2.7857
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 51
-2(13/16) < -2(11/14)

Question 39.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Is the half pipe deeper than the skating bowl? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 43

Answer:
No. They have the same depth.

Explanation:
As a decimal, 5/6 = 0.833333
9(5/6) = 59/6 = 9.838383
This means that half-pipe and the skating bowl have the same depth.
No. They have the same depth.

Question 40.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In softball, a batting average is the number of hits divided by the number of times at bat. Does Player 1 or Player 2 have the greater batting average?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 44

Answer:
Player 2 has the greater batting average.

Explanation:
Batting average = Number of hits / number of times at bat
Player 1 average = 42 / 90 = 0.466
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 52
Player 2 average = 38/80 = 0.475
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 53
Player 2 has the greater batting average

ORDERING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Order the numbers from least to greatest.

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 45

Answer:
The order from least to greatest -7/3, -3/4, 0.5, 2/3, 1.2

Explanation:
Express each term as a decimal
-3/4 = -0.75
2/3 = 0.666
-7/3 = -2.333
The order from least to greatest -7/3, -3/4, 0.5, 2/3, 1.2

Question 42.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 46

Answer:
The order from least to greatest is -2.5, -1.1, -4/5, 0.8, 9/5

Explanation:
Express each term as a decimal
9/5 = 1.8
-4/5 = -0.8
The order from least to greatest is -2.5, -1.1, -4/5, 0.8, 9/5

Question 43.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 47

Answer:
The order from least to greatest is -8/5, -1.4, -0.9, 1/4, 0.6

Explanation:
Express each term as a decimal
-8/5 = -1.6
1/4 = 0.25
The order from least to greatest is -1.6 < -1.4 < -0.9 < 0.25 < 0.6

Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 48

Answer:
The order from least to greatest is -9/4, -0.75, -6/10, 5/3, 2.1

Explanation:
Express each term as a decimal
-6/10 = -0.6
-9/4 = -2.25
5/3 = 1.666
The order from least to greatest is -2.25 < -0.75 < -0.6 < 1.666 < 2.1

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 49

Answer:
The order from least to greatest is -7/2, -2.8, -5/4, 1.3, 4/3

Explanation:
Express each term as a decimal
-7/2 = -3.5
-5/4 = -1.25
4/3 = 1.333
The order from least to greatest is -3.5 < -2.8 < -1.25 < 1.3 < 1.333

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 50

Answer:
The order from least to greatest is -2.4 -2.25, -11/5, 15/10, 1.6

Explanation:
Express each term as a decimal
-11/5 = -2.2
15/10 = 1.5
The order from least to greatest is -2.4 < -2.25 < -2.2 < 1.5 < 1.6

Question 47.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the changes in the water level of a pond over several weeks. Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 51

Answer:
The order from the least to greatest is Week 4, Week 2, Week 3, Week 1.

Explanation:
Week 1 = -7/5 = -1.4
Week 2 = -1(5/11) = -1.4545
Week 3 = -1.45
Week 4 = -1(91/200) = -1.455
The order from the least to greatest is Week 4 < Week 2 < Week 3 < Week 1

Question 48.
OPEN-ENDED
Find one terminating decimal and one repeating decimal between \(-\frac{1}{2}\) and \(-\frac{1}{3}\).

Answer:
-23/60 = -0.383333 is a repeating decimal
-24/60 = -0.4 is a terminating decimal.

Explanation:
To find one terminating decimal and one repeating decimal between -1/2 and -1/3 multiply each fraction by the denominator of the other fraction
-1/2 . 3/3 = -3/6 and -1/3 . 2/2 = -2/6
Multiply the resulting fractions by 10
-3/6 . 10/10 = -30/60 and -2/6 . 10/10 = -20/60
Find two numbers between -20 and -30
-23/60 = -0.383333 is a repeating decimal
-24/60 = -0.4 is a terminating decimal.

Question 49.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You miss 3 out of 10 questions on a science quiz and 4 out of 15 questions on a math quiz. On which quiz did you have a greater percentage of correct answers?

Answer:
You have a higher percent of correct answers on a math quiz.

Explanation:
You miss 3 out of 10 questions on a science quiz
So, the coorect answers = 10 – 3 = 7
The percent of correct answers on a science quiz = 7/10 . 100 = 70%
You miss 4 out of 15 questions on a math quiz
So, the correct answers = 15 – 4 = 11
The percent of correct answers on a math quiz = 11/15 . 100 = 73.3%
Thus, you have a higher percent of correct answers on a math quiz.

Question 50.
CRITICAL THINKING
A hackberry tree has roots that reach a depth of 6\(\frac{5}{12}\) meters. The top of the tree is \(18.2 \overline{8}\) meters above the ground. Find the total height from the bottom of the roots to the top of the tree.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 52

Answer:
The total height from the bottom of the roots to the top of the tree is 23.70544 meters.

Explanation:
The depth of the tree = 6(5/12) = 65/12 meters
The top of the tree = 18.288 meters
The total height from the bottom of the roots to the top of the tree = 65/12 + 18.288
= 5.41666 + 18.2888
= 23.70544 meters
So, the total height from the bottom of the roots to the top of the tree is 23.70544 meters.

Question 51.
DIG DEEPER!
Let a and b be integers.
a. When can –\(\frac{1}{a}\) be written as a positive, repeating decimal?
b. When can \(\frac{1}{ab}\) be written as a positive, terminating decimal?

Answer:
a. a = -7
b. b = -2

Explanation:
a. Let us take a = -7
Then -1/a = -1/-7 = 0.142857142
b. 1/ab = 1/(-7)(-2) = 1/14 = 0.7142

Lesson 2.4 Multiplying Rational Numbers

EXPLORATION 1
Finding Products of Rational Numbers
Work with a partner.
a. Write a multiplication expression represented by each area model. Then find the product.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 53
b. Complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 54
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 54.1
c. Do the rules for multiplying integers apply to all rational numbers? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
a. 9 x 10 = 90
5 x 10 = 50
b. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 54
c. The rules for multiplying integers apply to all rational numbers.

2.4 Lesson

Try It

Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 1.
-5.1 × 1.8

Answer:
-5.1 × 1.8 = -9.18

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 55

Question 2.
-6.3(-0.6) = 3.78

Answer:
-6.3(-0.6)

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 56

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 55

Answer:
-4/5(-2/3) = 8/15

Explanation:
-4/5(-2/3) = (-4 . -2)/(5 . 3)
= 8/15

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 56

Answer:
4(1/2) . (-2(1/3)) = -21/2

Explanation:
4(1/2) . (-2(1/3)) = 9/2 . (-7/3)
= (9 . -7)/(2 . 3)
= (-7 . 3)/2 = -21/2

Try It

Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 57

Answer:
-2/3 . 7(7/8) . 3/2 = -63/8

Explanation:
-2/3 . 7(7/8) . 3/2 = -2/3 . 63/8 . 3/2
= (-2 . 63 . 3)/(3 . 8 . 2)
= -63/8

Question 6.
-7.02(0.1)(100)(-10)

Answer:
-7.02(0.1)(100)(-10) = 702

Explanation:
-7.02(0.1)(100)(-10) = (-7.02 . 0.1)(100 . -10)
= (-0.702)(-1000)
= 702

Self-Assessmentfor Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
WRITING
Explain how to determine whether a product of two rational numbers is positive or negative.

Answer:
The product of two rational numbers is positive when they have the same sign.
The product of two rational numbers is negative when they have different signs.

MULTIPLYING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 58

Answer:
-3/10 x (-8/15) = 4/25

Explanation:
-3/10 x (-8/15) = (-3 x -8)/(10 x 15)
= 24/150 = 4/25

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 59

Answer:
-2/3 . 1(1/3) = -8/9

Explanation:
-2/3 . 1(1/3) = -2/3 . 4/3
= (-2 . 4)/(3 . 3) = -8/9

Question 10.
-2.8(-1.7)

Answer:
-2.8(-1.7) = 4.76

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 57

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 60

Answer:
1(3/5) . (-3(3/4)) = -10

Explanation:
1(3/5) . (-3(3/4)) = 8/3 . -15/4
= (8 . -15)/(3 . 4)
= (2 . -5) = -10

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
A swimmer’s best time in an event is 53.87 seconds. On average, his best time decreases by 0.28 second each of the next five times he swims the event. Does he accomplish his goal of swimming the event in less than 52.5 seconds?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 61

Answer:
Yes. This is because his fifth attempt was 52.47 seconds

Explanation:
From the question, we are informed that Swimmers best time in an event is 53.87 seconds and that on average, his best time decreases by 0.28 seconds each of the next five times he swims the event.
The time for the fifth time he swims will be = 53.87 – 5(0.28)
= 53.87 – 1.4
= 52.47 seconds
This means that he accomplishes his goal of swimming the event in less than 52.5 seconds.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Terminal velocity is the fastest speed that an object can fall through the air. A skydiver reaches a terminal velocity of 120 miles per hour. What is the change in elevation of the skydiver after falling at terminal velocity for 15 seconds? Justify your answer.

Answer:
The change in elevation of the skydiver after falling at terminal velocity for 15 seconds is 30 miles.

Explanation:
A skydiver reaches a terminal velocity of 120 miles per hour = 120/60 = 2 miles per seconds
The change in elevation of the skydiver after falling at terminal velocity for 15 seconds is 2 x 15 = 30 miles

Multiplying Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 2.4

Review & Refresh

Write the fraction or mixed number as a decimal.

Question 1.
\(\frac{5}{16}\)

Answer:
5/16 = 0.3125

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 58

Question 2.
–\(\frac{9}{22}\)

Answer:
-9/22 = -0.4090909

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 59

Question 3.
6\(\frac{8}{11}\)

Answer:
6(8/11) = 6.727272

Explanation:
6(8/11) = 74/11
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 60

Question 4.
–\(\frac{26}{24}\)

Answer:
-26/24 = -1.08333

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 61

Find the area of the figure.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 62

Answer:
Area is 36 sq inches

Explanation:
Given that,
a = 2 in, b = 10 in, h = 6 in
Area of the trapezoid = 1/2 (a + b) . h
= 1/2 (2 + 10) . 6
= (12) . 3
= 36 sq inches

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 63

Answer:
Area is 9 m².

Explanation:
p = 1.5 + 3 = 4.5 m
q = 2 + 2 = 4 m
Area of rhombus = (pq)/2
= (4.5 . 4)/2
= 18/2 = 9 m²

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 64

Answer:
The area is 121 ft².

Explanation:
The area of the rectangle formed by extending the base line and the top line is l x b
= 13 x 11 = 143 ft²
The area of the formed triangle is 1/2 x b x h
base = 13 – 9 = 4 ft
height = 11 ft
Triangle area = 1/2 x 4 x 11
= 2 x 11 = 22 ft²
Area of the given shape = Area of the rectangle – area of the triangle
= 143 – 22 = 121 ft²

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving
FINDING PRODUCTS OF RATIONAL NUMBERS
Write a multiplication expression represented by the area model. Then find the product. (See Exploration 1, p. 67.)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 65

Answer:
The area is 90 sq units.

Explanation:
The number of shaded rows = 9
The number of shaded columns = 10
Area model = rows x columns
= 9 . 10 = 90

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 66

Answer:
The area is 50 sq units.

Explanation:
The number of shaded rows = 5
The number of shaded columns = 10
Area model = rows x columns
= 5 . 10 = 50

REASONING
Without multiplying, tell whether the value of the expression is positive or negative. Explain your reasoning.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 67

Answer:
The expression is negative.

Explanation:
When you multiply a positive fraction by a negative integer, you will get a negative fraction.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 68

Answer:
The expression is negative.

Explanation:
The product of two fractions with different signs is negative.

Question 12.
-0.25(-3.659)

Answer:
The expression is positive.

Explanation:
The product of two fractions with different signs is positive.

MULTIPLYING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 69

Answer:
-1/4 x (-4/3) = 1/3

Explanation:
-1/4 x (-4/3) = (-1 . -4)/(4 . 3)
= 1/3

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 70

Answer:
5/6(-8/15) = -4/9

Explanation:
5/6(-8/15) = (5 . -8) / (6 . 15)
= (5 . -2 . 4) / (3 . 2 . 5 . 3)
= -4/9

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 71

Answer:
-2(-1(1/4)) = 5/2

Explanation:
-2(-1(1/4)) = -2(-5/4)
= -2(-5/2 . 2) = 5/2

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 72

Answer:
-3(1/3) . (-2(7/10)) = 9

Explanation:
-3(1/3) . (-2(7/10)) = -10/3 . -27/10
= (-10 . -27)/(3 . 10)
= (9 . 3)/3 = 9

Question 17.
0.4 × (-0.03)

Answer:
0.4 × (-0.03) = -3/250

Explanation:
0.4 × (-0.03) = 4/10 . (-3/100)
= (4 . -3)/(10 . 100)
= (2 . 2 . -3)/(5 . 2 . 50 . 2)
= -3/250

Question 18.
-0.05 × (-0.5)

Answer:
-0.05 × (-0.5) = 1/40

Explanation:
-0.05 × (-0.5) = -5/100 x -5/10
= (-5 x -5)/(100 x 10)
= (-5 x -5)/(5 x 20 x 5 x 2)
= 1/40

Question 19.
-8(0.09)(-0.5)

Answer:
-8(0.09)(-0.5) = 9/25

Explanation:
-8(0.09)(-0.5) = -8(9/100)(-5/10)
= (-8 . 9 . -5)/(100 . 10)
= 9/25

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 74

Answer:
5/6 . (-4(1/2)) . (-2(1/5)) = 33/4

Explanation:
5/6 . (-4(1/2)) . (-2(1/5)) = 5/6 . -9/2 . -11/5
= (5 . -9 . -11)/(6 . 2 . 5) = 33/4

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 75

Answer:
(-1(2/3))³ = -125/27

Explanation:
(-1(2/3))³ = (-5/3)³
= (-5 . -5 . -5)/(3 . 3 . 3)
= -125/27

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend evaluates the expression. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 76

Answer:
Correct

Explanation:
-14 x 3/2 = (-1 . 3)/(4 . 2)
= -3/8

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 77

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
-2.2 x (-3.7) = 8.14

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The hour hand of a clock moves 30° every hour. How many degrees does it move in 2\(\frac{1}{5}\) hours?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 78

Answer:
In 2(1/5) hours, the hour hand of a clock moves -66 degrees.

Explanation:
2(1/5) = 11/5 = 2.2You can here use the rule of three as an easier way, and let x be the degrees it moves in 2(1/5) hours.
1 hour –> -30
2.2 hour –>x
x = 2.2 * -30
x = -66
So, in 2(1/5) hours, the hour hand of a clock moves -66 degrees.

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A 14.5-gallon gasoline tank is \(\frac{3}{4}\) full. How many gallons will it take to fill the tank?

Answer:
We need 3.625 gallons to fill the tank.

Explanation:
3/4 of the tank is full so, 1/4 of the tank is empty
The number of gallons will it take to fill the tank = 1/4 * 14.5
= 0.25 * 14.5 = 3.625
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 62
We need 3.625 gallons to fill the tank.

Question 26.
OPEN-ENDED
Write two fractions whose product is –\(\frac{3}{5}\).

Answer:
The two fractions are -2/3 and 9/10

Explanation:
= -2/3 . 9/10
= (-2 . 9)/(3 . 10)
= -3/5

USING PROPERTIES
Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 79

Answer:
1/5 . 3/8 . (-5) = -3/8

Explanation:
1/5 . 3/8 . (-5) = (1 . 3 . -5)/(5 . 8)
= -3/8

Question 28.
0.01(4.6)(-200)

Answer:
0.01(4.6)(-200) = -46/5

Explanation:
0.01(4.6)(-200) = 1/100 . 46/10 . -200
= (1 . 46 . -200)/(100 . 10)
= -46/5

Question 29.
(-17.2 × 2.5) × 4

Answer:
(-17.2 × 2.5) × 4 = -172

Explanation:
(-17.2 × 2.5) × 4 = (-172/10 x 25/10) x 4
= (-172 x 25)/(10 x 10) x 4
= (-172 / 2 x 2) x 4
= -172

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 80

Answer:
(-5/9 x 2/7) x (-7/2) = 5/9

Explanation:
(-5/9 x 2/7) x (-7/2) = (-5 x 2)/(9 x 7) x (-7/2)
= (-10/63)  (-7/2)
= (-10 x -7)/(63 x 2)
= 5/9

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 81

Answer:
[-2/3 . (-5/7)] . (-9/4) = -15/14

Explanation:
[-2/3 . (-5/7)] . (-9/4) = (-2 . -5)/(3 . 7) . (-9/4)
= 10/21 . (-9/4)
= (10 . -9)/(21 . 4)
= (5 . -3)/(7 . 2)
= -15/14

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 82

Answer:
(-4.5 . 8.61) . (-2/9) = 861/100

Explanation:
(-4.5 . 8.61) . (-2/9) = (-45/10 . 861/100) . (-2/9)
= (-45 . 861)/(10 . 100) . (-2/9)
= 861/100

Question 33.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Fencing costs $25.80 per yard. How much does it cost to enclose two adjacent rectangular pastures as shown? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 83

Answer:
The cost of fencing is $3558.249312.

Explanation:
Fencing costs $25.80 per yard.
Length = 30(2/9) = 272/9 yd
Width = 50(5/8) = 405/8 yd
The rectangular pastures perimeter = 2(length + width) + length
= 2(272/9 + 405/8) + 272/9
= 2(30.222 + 50.625) + 30.2222
= 2(53.8472) + 30.2222
= 107.6944 + 30.2222
= 137.91664 yards
Multiply the perimeter by $25.80 to get the cost
= 137.91664 x 25.80 = $3558.249312
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 63
So, the cost of fencing is $3558.249312.

ALGEBRA
Evaluate the expression when x = -2, y = 3, and z = –\(\frac{1}{5}\).

Question 34.
x • z

Answer:
2/5

Explanation:
The given expression is x • z
Put x = -2, z = -1/5
= -2 . (-1/5)
= 2/5

Question 35.
xyz

Answer:
6/5

Explanation:
The given expression is xyz
x = -2, y = 3, and z = –\(\frac{1}{5}\)
= -2 . 3 . (-1/5)
= -6 . (-1/5)
= 6/5

Question 36.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) + x • z

Answer:
11/15

Explanation:
The given expression is 1/3 + x . z
Put x = -2, z = -1/5
= 1/3 + (-2) . (-1/5)
= 1/3 + 2/5
= (5 + 6)/15
= 11/15

Question 37.
\(\frac{1}{2}\)z – \(\frac{2}{3}\)y

Answer:
-21/10

Explanation:
The given expression is 1/2 z – 2/3 y
Put y = 3 , z = -1/5
= 1/2 . (-1/5) – 2/3 . 3
= -1/10 – 2
= (-1 – 20)/10
= -21/10

EVALUATING AN EXPRESSION
Evaluate the expression. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 38.
-4.2 + 8.1 × (-1.9)

Answer:
-4.2 + 8.1 × (-1.9) = -19.59

Explanation:
-4.2 + 8.1 × (-1.9) = -4.2 + (8.1 x -1.9)
= -4.2 – 15.39
= -19.59

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 84

Answer:
-3(3/4) x 5/6 – 2(1/3) = -131/24

Explanation:
-3(3/4) x 5/6 – 2(1/3) = (-15/4) x 5/6 – 7/3
= (-15 . 5)/(4 . 6) – 7/3
= -25/8 – 7/3
= (-75 – 56)/24
= -131/24

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 85

Answer:
(-2/3)² – 3/4 (2(1/3)) = -47/36

Explanation:
(-2/3)² – 3/4 (2(1/3)) = (-2/3).(-2/3) – 3/4 (7/3)
= 4/9 – 7/4
= (16 – 63)/36
= -47/36

Question 41.
DIG DEEPER!
Use positive or negative integers to fill in the blanks so that the product is \(\frac{1}{4}\). Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 86

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 64= 1/4

Explanation:
One of the possibilities of arranging numbers in the fill in the blanks are as follows:
9/2 x (-5/144) x (8/-5) = (9 x -5 x 8)/(2 x  x -5)
= 1/4

Lesson 2.5 Dividing Rational Numbers

EXPLORATION 1
Work with a partner
a. Write two division expressions represented by the area model. Then find the quotients.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 87
b. Complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 88
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 89
c. Do the rules for dividing integers apply to all rational numbers? Explain your reasoning.
d. Write a real-life story involving the quotient 0.75 ÷ 3. Interpret the quotient in the context of the story.

Answer:
a. 100 ÷ 60 = 1.666, 200 ÷ 120 = 1.666
b. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 66
c. Yes
d. 0.75 ÷ 3 = 0.25

2.5 Lesson

Try It

Find the quotient. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 1.
-2.4 ÷ 3.2

Answer:
-2.4 ÷ 3.2 = -0.75

Explanation:
-2.4 ÷ 3.2
Write the division expression as a fraction.
= -24/32 = -0.75
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 67

Question 2.
-6 ÷ (-1.1)

Answer:
-6 ÷ (-1.1) = 5.454545

Explanation:
-6 ÷ (-1.1)
= 60/11
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 68

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 90

Answer:
-6/5 ÷ (-1/2) = 12/5

Explanation:
-6/5 ÷ (-1/2)
= 6/5 ÷ 1/2
= 6/5 . (2/1)
= (6 . 2)/(5 . 1)
= 12/5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 91

Answer:
-1/3 ÷ 2(2/3) = -1/8

Explanation:
-1/3 ÷ 2(2/3)
= -1/3 ÷ 8/3
= -1/3 . (3/8)
= (-1 . 3)/(3 . 8)
= -1/8

Try It

Evaluate the expression. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 92

Answer:
-1/2 / 6 = -1/12

Explanation:
-1/2 / 6 = (-1/2) . (1/6)
= (-1 . 1)/(2 . 6)
= -1/12

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 93

Answer:
-2(1/2) / -3/4 = 10/3

Explanation:
-2(1/2) / -3/4 = -5/2 / -3/4
= (-5/2) . (4/-3)
= (-5 . 4)/(2 . -3)
= 10/3

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 94

Answer:
[-1(2/3) . (-3/5)] / (1/3)² = 9

Explanation:
[-1(2/3) . (-3/5)] / (1/3)² = [(-5/3) . (-3/5)] / (1/9)
= [(-5 . -3)/(3 . 5)]/(1/9)
= (1/1) / (1/9)
= (1/1) . (9/1)
= 9

Self-Assessmentfor Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
WRITING
Explain how to determine whether a quotient of two rational numbers is positive or negative.

Answer:
The simple and easy strategy to find whether the quotient of two rational numbers is positive or negative is mentioned here.
The quotient of two rational numbers is positive when those numbers have the same sign.
The quotient of two rational numbers is negative when they have different signs.

EVALUATING AN EXPRESSION
Evaluate the expression. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 95

Answer:
3/8 ÷ (-9/5) = -5/24

Explanation:
3/8 ÷ (-9/5) = 3/8 . (-5/9)
= (3 . -5)/(8 . 9)
= -5/(8 . 3)
= -5/24

Question 10.
-6.8 ÷ (-3.6)

Answer:
-6.8 ÷ (-3.6) = 17/9

Explanation:
-6.8 ÷ (-3.6) = -68/10 ÷ (-36/10)
= -68/10 . (-10/36)
= (-68 . -10)/(10 . 36)
= 68/36
= 17/9

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 97

Answer:
(-2/9)/(2(2/5)) = -5/54

Explanation:
(-2/9)/(2(2/5)) = (-2/9)/(12/5)
= -2/9 . 5/12
= (-2 . 5)/(9 . 12)
= (-5)/(9 . 6)
= -5/54

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Soil is composed of several layers. A geologist measures the depths of the subsoil and the bedrock, as shown. Find and interpret two quotients involving the depths of the subsoil and the bedrock.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 98

Answer:
The depths of the subsoil and the bedrock is 2.244 ft

Explanation:
The depth of the subsoil = -22.5 ft
The depth of the bedrock = -50.5 ft
The distance between subsoil and bedrock =50.5 – 22.5
= 28 ft
The depths of the subsoil and the bedrock = -50.5/-22.5
= 2.244
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 69

Question 13.
The restaurant in Example 3 receives additional scores of 0.75, 1.5, 1.25, 4.75, 0.25, 0.5, 5, and 0.5 for the lasagna. Given the additional data, should the restaurant consider changing the recipe? Explain.

Answer:
The restaurant should not change the recipe.

Explanation:
The restaurant received scores are 2.25, -3.5, 0, -4.5, 1.75, -1, 3.5, -2.5, -0.75, -1.5, -1.25, 4.75, -0.25, -0.5, 5 and -0.5
The mean of scores = sum of scores / number of scores
= (2.25 + (-3.5) + 0 + (-4.5) + 1.75 + (-1) + 3.5 + (-2.5) + (-0.75) + (-1.5) + (-1.25) + 4.75 + (-0.25) + (-0.5) + 5 + (-0.5))/16
= (2.25 – 3.5 – 4.5 + 1.75 – 1 + 3.5 – 2.5 – 0.75 – 1.5 – 1.25 + 4.75 – 0.25 – 0.5 + 5 – 0.5)/16
= 1/16 = 0.0625
The mean score is above 0.
So, the restaurant should not change the recipe.

Dividing Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 2.5

Review & Refresh

Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 1.
-0.5(1.31)

Answer:
-0.5(1.31) = -131/200

Explanation:
-0.5(1.31) = -5/10 (131/100)
= (-5 . 131) / (10 . 100)
= -131/(2 . 100)
= -131/200

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 99

Answer:
9/10 (-1(1/4)) = -9/8

Explanation:
9/10 (-1(1/4)) = 9/10 (-5/4)
= (9 . -5)/(10 . 4)
= -9/(2 . 4)
= -9/8

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 100

Answer:
-7/12 (-3/14) = 1/8

Explanation:
-7/12 (-3/14) = (-7 . -3) / (12 . 14)
= (-1 . -1)/(4 . 2)
= 1/8

Identify the terms, coefficients, and constants in the expression.

Question 4.
3b + 12

Answer:
The coefficients are 3, the constant is 12, terms are 3b, 12

Explanation:
The coefficients are 3, the constant is 12, terms are 3b, 12

Question 5.
14 + z + 6f

Answer:
The terms are 14, z, 6f, coefficients are 6, 1 and constant is 14 in 14 + z + 6f

Explanation:
The terms are 14, z, 6f, coefficients are 6, 1 and constant is 14 in 14 + z + 6f

Question 6.
8g + 14 + 5c + 7

Answer:
The terms are 8g, 14, 5c, 7 and coefficients are 8, 5, and constants are 14, 7

Explanation:
The terms are 8g, 14, 5c, 7 and coefficients are 8, 5, and constants are 14, 7

Question 7.
42m + 18 + 12c2

Answer:
The terms are 42m, 18, 12c², coefficients are 42, 12 and constants are 18.

Explanation:
The terms are 42m, 18, 12c², coefficients are 42, 12 and constants are 18.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving
USING TOOLS
Write two division expressions represented by the area model. Then find the quotients. (See Exploration 1, p. 73.)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 101

Answer:
20/50, 40/100

Explanation:
The first division expression is 20/50 = 0.4
The second division expression is 40/100 = 0.4

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 102

Answer:
6/10, 54/100

Explanation:
The first division expression is 6/10 = 0.6
The second division expression is 54/100 = 0.54

DIVIDING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the quotient. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 103

Answer:
-7/5 ÷ 2/5 = -3.5

Explanation:
-7/5 ÷ 2/5 = -7/5 . 5/2
= (-7 . 5)/(5 . 2)
= -7/2
= -3.5

Question 11.
-0.18 ÷ 0.03

Answer:
-0.18 ÷ 0.03 = -6

Explanation:
-0.18 ÷ 0.03 = -18/100 ÷ 3/100
= -18/100 . 100/3
= (-18 . 100) / (100 . 3)
= -6

Question 12.
-3.45 ÷ (-15)

Answer:
-3.45 ÷ (-15) = 0.03

Explanation:
-3.45 ÷ (-15) = -45/100 ÷ -15/1
= -45/100 . -1/15
= (-45 . -1)/(100 . 15)
= 3/100
= 0.03

Question 13.
-8 ÷ (-2.2)

Answer:
-8 ÷ (-2.2) = 3.636363

Explanation:
-8 ÷ (-2.2) = -8 ÷ -22/10
= -8/1 . -10/22
= (-8 . -10) / (1 . 22)
= (-4 . -10) / 11
= 40/11 = 3.636363
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 70

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 104

Answer:
1/4 ÷ (-3/8) = -0.6666

Explanation:
1/4 ÷ (-3/8) = 1/4 . (-8/3)
= (1 . -8) / (4 . 3)
= -2/3
= -0.66666

Question 15.
8.722 ÷ (-3.56)

Answer:
8.722 ÷ (-3.56) = -2.45

Explanation:
8.722 ÷ (-3.56) = 8722/1000 ÷ (-356/100)
= 8722/1000 . (100/-356)
= (8722 . 100)/(1000 . -356)
= (8722) / (10 . -356)
= -8722/3560 = -2.45
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 71

Question 16.
12.42 ÷ (-4.8)

Answer:
12.42 ÷ (-4.8) = -2.5875

Explanation:
12.42 ÷ (-4.8) = 1242/100 ÷ (-48/10)
= 1242/100 . (-10/48)
= (1242 . -10)/(100 . 48)
= (-1242) / (480)
= -2.5875
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 72

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 105

Answer:
-2(4/5) ÷ (-7) = 0.4

Explanation:
-2(4/5) ÷ (-7) = -14/5 ÷ (-7)
= -14/5 . -1/7
= (-14 . -1) / (7 . 5)
= 2/5
= 0.4

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 106

Answer:
-10(2/7) ÷ (-4(4/11)) = 2.3571

Explanation:
-10(2/7) ÷ (-4(4/11)) = -72/7 ÷ -48/11
= -72/7 . (-11/48)
= (-72 . -11) / (7 . 48)
= 99/42 = 2.3571
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 73

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend evaluates the expression. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 107

Answer:
wrong

Explanation:
-2/3 ÷ 4/5 = -2/3 . 5/4
= (-2 . 5)/(3 . 4)
= -5/6

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 108

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
-4.25 ÷ 1.7 = -2.5
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 74

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
How many 0.75-pound packages can you make with 4.5 pounds of sunflower seeds?

Answer:
6 0.75-pound packages are required to make 4.5 pounds of sunflower seeds.

Explanation:
Divide 4.5 by 0.75 to get the solution.
= 4.5 ÷ 0.75 = 45/10 ÷ 75/100
= 45/10 . 100/75
= (45 . 100)/ (10 . 75)
= 6
So, 6 0.75-pound packages are required to make 4.5 pounds of sunflower seeds.

EVALUATING AN EXPRESSION
Evaluate the expression. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 109

Answer:
(14/9) / (-1/3-1/6) = -28/9

Explanation:
(14/9) / (-1/3-1/6) = (14/9) / ((-2 – 1)/6)
= 14/9 / -3/6
= 14/9 . (-6/3)
= (14 . -6) / (3 . 9)
= -28/9

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 110

Answer:
(-125 + 3/10) / (11/4 – (-9/14)) = -77/100

Explanation:
(-125 + 3/10) / (11/4 – (-9/14)) = (-24 + 13)/10 / (11/14 + 9/14)
= -11/10 / (20/14)
= -11/10 . 14/20
= (-11 . 14) / (10 . 20)
= (-11 . 7) / (5 . 20)
= -77/100

Question 24.
-0.42 ÷ 0.8 + 0.2

Answer:
-0.42 ÷ 0.8 + 0.2 = -13/40

Explanation:
-0.42 ÷ 0.8 + 0.2 = -4.2 ÷ 8 + 0.2
= -0.525 + 0.2
= -0.325 = -325/1000
= -13/40

Question 25.
2.85 ÷ 6.2 ÷ 22

Answer:
2.85 ÷ 6.2 ÷ 2² = 28.25/248

Explanation:
2.85 ÷ 6.2 ÷ 2² = 2.85 ÷ 6.2 ÷ 4
= (2.825 ÷ 6.2) ÷ 4
= 2.825/6.2 . 1/4
= (2.825 . 1) / (6.2 . 4)
= 2.825/24.8
= 28.25/248

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 111

Answer:
3/4 + 7/10 – 1/8 ÷ (-1/2) = 17/10

Explanation:
3/4 + 7/10 – 1/8 ÷ (-1/2) = 3/4 + 7/10 + (1/8 ÷ 1/2)
= 3/4 + 7/10 + (1/8 . 2)
= 3/4 + 7/10 + 1/4
= 1 + 7/10
= 17/10

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 112

Answer:
7/6 / [(-11/5)(10(1/2))(-5/11)] = 1/9

Explanation:
7/6 / [(-11/5)(10(1/2))(-5/11)] = 7/6 / [(-11/5)(21/2)(-5/11)]
= 7/6 / [(-11 . 21 . -5) / (5 . 2 . 11)]
= 7/6 / [21/2]
= 7/6 . 2/21
= (7 . 2) / (6 . 21)
= 1/9

Question 28.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The section of the boardwalk shown is made using boards that are each 9\(\frac{1}{4}\)inches wide. The spacing between each board is equal. What is the width of the spacing between each board?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 113

Answer:
The width of the spacing between each section is 5.25 inches

Explanation:
15 boards each board is 9(1/4) inches wide
The total width of 15 boards = 9(1/4) . 15
= 37/4 . 15
= 555/4 = 138.75
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 77
The total width of 15 boards = 138.75 inches
The total width of the section = 144 inches
The width of the spacing between each section = 144 – 138.75 = 5.25 inches

Question 29.
REASONING
The table shows the daily changes in the barometric pressure(in inches of mercury) for four days.
a. What is the mean change?
b. The mean change for Monday through Friday is -0.01 inch. What is the change in the barometric pressure on Friday? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 114

Answer:
a. Mean change is -0.02
b. The change in the barometric pressure on Friday is 0.03

Explanation:
a. Mean change = sum of observations / total number of observations
= (-0.05 + 0.09 – 0.04 – 0.08)/4
= -0.08/4
= -0.02
b. The mean change for Monday through Friday is -0.01 inch
Mean change = sum of observations / total number of observations
-0.01 = (-0.05 + 0.09 – 0.04 – 0.08 + x)/5
-0.01 =  (-0.08 + x)/5
5 * -0.01 = -0.08 + x
-0.05 = -0.08 + x
-0.05 + 0.08 = x
0.03 = x
So, the change in the barometric pressure on Friday is 0.03

Question 30.
LOGIC
In an online survey, gym members react to the statement shown by adjusting the position of the needle. The responses have values of -4.2, 1.6, 0.4, 0, 2.1, -5.0, -4.7, 0.6, 1.1, 0.8, 0.4, and 2.1. Explain how two people can use the results of the survey to reach different conclusions about whether the gym should adjust its membership prices.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 115

Answer:
The gym should adjust its membership prices.

Explanation:
Use mean to determine whether adjust the gym membership prices or not.
Mean = sum of observations / total number of observations
= (-4.2 + 1.6 + 0.4 + 0 + 2.1 – 5.0 – 4.7 + 0.6 + 1.1 + 0.8 + 0.4 + 2.1)/12
= -4.8/12
= -0.4
The mean score is below 0.
So, the gym should adjust its membership prices.

Question 31.
CRITICAL THINKING
Determine whether the statement is sometimes, always, or never true. Explain your reasoning.
a. The product of two terminating decimals is a terminating decimal.
b. The quotient of two terminating decimals is a terminating decimal.

Answer:
a. The product of two terminating decimals is always a terminating decimal
b. The quotient of two terminating decimals is always a terminating decimal.

Explanation:
a. The product of two terminating decimals is always a terminating decimal
The example to check the product of terminating decimals is a terminating decimal
4.5 x 6.27 = 28.215
b. The quotient of two terminating decimals is a terminating decimal.
The example is 36.257 / 24.85
= 1.459034205

Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
You feed several adult hamsters equal amounts of a new food recipe over a period of 1 month. You record the changes in the weights of the hamsters in the table. Use the data to answer the question “What is the typical weight change of a hamster that is fed the new recipe?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 116
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 117

Understand the problem.
You know the weight changes of 15 hamsters. You want to use this information to find the typical weight change.
Make a plan.
Display the data in a dot plot to see the distribution of the data. Then use the distribution to determine the most appropriate measure of center.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.

Answer:
The typical weight change of a hamster that is fed the new recipe is -0.06266 ounces.

Explanation:
The typical weight change is measured by calculating the mean change.
Mean = (-0.07 – 0.03 – 0.11 – 0.04 – 0.08 + 0.02 – 0.08 – 0.08 – 0.06 – 0.05 – 0.11 – 0.1 + 0 – 0.07 – 0.08)/15
= -0.94/15
= -0.06266
So, typical weight change of a hamster that is fed the new recipe is -0.06266 ounces

Question 2.
Evaluate the expression shown at the right. Write your answer in simplest form.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 118

Answer:
-4/9

Explanation:
(-1/2 + 2/3) / [3/5(3/4 – 11/8)] = [(-3 + 4)/6] / [3/5((6 – 11)/8)]
= 1/6 / [3/5(-5/8)
= 1/6 / -3/8
= 1/6 . -8/3
= (1 . -8) / (3 . 6)
= -4/9

Question 3.
You drop a racquetball from a height of 60 inches. On each bounce, the racquetball bounces to a height that is 70% of its previous height. What is the change in the height of the racquetball after 3 bounces?

Answer:
The change in height of the racquetball after 3 bounces is 20.58 inches

Explanation:
You drop a racquetball from a height of 60 inches. On each bounce, the racquetball bounces to a height that is 70% of its previous height.
The change in height of the racquetball after 1 bounce = (60 x 70)/100
= 4200 / 100 = 42 inches
The change in height of the racquetball after 2 bounces = (42 x 70)/100
= 29.4
The change in height of the racquetball after 3 bounces = (29.4 x 70)/100
= 2058/100 = 20.58 inches

Performance Task

Precisely Perfect

At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Carpenter or Joiner.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 119

Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 120

Graphic Organizers

You can use an Information Frame to help organize and remember a concept. Here is an example of an Information Frame for multiplying integers.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 121
Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.

  1. dividing integers
  2. writing fractions or mixed numbers as decimals
  3. writing decimals as fractions or mixed numbers
  4. multiplying rational numbers
  5. dividing rational numbers

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 122

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 123

2.1 Multiplying Integers (pp. 49–54)

Find the product.

Question 1.
-8 • 6

Answer:
-8 • 6 = -48

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different signs is negative.
-8 • 6 = -48

Question 2.
10(-7)

Answer:
10(-7) = -70

Explanation:
The product of two integers with different signs is negative.
10(-7) = -70

Question 3.
-3 • (-6)

Answer:
-3 • (-6) = 18

Explanation:
-3 • (-6) = 18
The product of two integers with the same sign is positive.

Question 4.
You and a group of friends participate in a game where you must use clues to escape from a room. You have a limited amount of time to escape and are allowed 3 free clues. Additional clues may be requested, but each removes 5 minutes from your remaining time. What integer represents the total change in the time when you use 5 clues?

Answer:
The total change in time when you use 5 clues is -10 minutes

Explanation:
You are allowed 3 clues for free
The amount of time removes for each clue is 5 minutes
If you want to take 2 clues, then 5 x 2 = 10 minutes are removed
So, the total change in time when you use 5 clues is -10 minutes

Evaluate the expression.

Question 5.
(-3)3

Answer:
(-3)³ = -27

Explanation:
(-3)³ = -3 • -3 • -3
= 9 • -3
= -27

Question 6.
(-3)(-4)(10)

Answer:
(-3)(-4)(10) = 120

Explanation:
(-3)(-4)(10) = 12(10)
= 120

Question 7.
24 – 3(2 – 42)

Answer:
24 – 3(2 – 4²) = 66

Explanation:
24 – 3(2 – 4²) = 24 – 3(2 – 16)
= 24 – 3(-14)
= 24 + 42
= 66

Question 8.
Write three integers whose product is negative.

Answer:
-5, -2, 6

Explanation:
If three integers product is negative, then all integers would have negative signs or only one integer should have a negative sign.
(-5)(-2)6 = 10(6)
= 60

Question 9.
You are playing laser tag. The table shows how many points you gain or lose when you tag or are tagged by another player in different locations. You are tagged three times on the back, twice on the shoulder, and twice on the laser. You tag two players on the front, four players on the back, and one player on the laser. What is your score?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 124

Answer:
Score = 727 points

Explanation:
You are tagged three times on the back, twice on the shoulder, and twice on the laser.
You have tagged means points lost.
= 3(25) + 2(12) + 2(12)
= 123
You tag two players on the front, four players on the back, and one player on the laser.
you tagged others means points gained
= 2(200) + 4(100) + 1(50)
= 850
Score = points gained – points lost
= 850 – 123 = 727

Question 10.
The product of three integers is positive. How many of the integers can be negative? Explain.

Answer:
If the product of three integers is positive, then only 2 integers can be negative.

Explanation:
If the product of three integers is positive, then only 2 integers can be negative.
We know the product of two negative integers is positive.
Find the product of an obtained positive integer with the third integer.

Question 11.
Two integers, c and d, have a product of -6. What is the greatest possible sum of c and d?

Answer:
The greatest possible sum of c and d are {-1, 6}

Explanation:
Two integers, c and d, have a product of -6
cd = -6
The possibilities of c, d are {-1, 6}, {1, -6}, {6, -1}, {-6, 1}, {-2, 3}, {3, -2}, {2, -3}, {-3, 2}
Find sum of c and d = 5, -5, 5, -5, 1, 1, -1, -1
The greatest possible sum of c and d are {-1, 6}

Dividing Integers (pp. 55–60)

Find the quotient.

Question 12.
-18 ÷ 9

Answer:
-18 ÷ 9 = -2

Explanation:
-18 ÷ 9 = -2
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.

Question 13.
\(\frac{-42}{-6}\)

Answer:
-42/-6 = 7

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.
-42/-6 = 7

Question 14.
\(\frac{-30}{6}\)

Answer:
-30/6 = -5

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
-30/6 = -5

Question 15.
84 ÷ (-7)

Answer:
84 ÷ (-7) = -12

Explanation:
The quotient of two integers with the different signs is negative.
84 ÷ (-7) = -12

Evaluate the expression when x = 3, y = -4, and z = -6.

Question 16.
z ÷ x

Answer:
z ÷ x = -2

Explanation:
The given expression is z ÷ x
Put x = 3, z = -6
-6 ÷ 3 = -2

Question 17.
\(\frac{xy}{z}\)

Answer:
xy/z = 2

Explanation:
The given expression is xy/z
Put x = 3, y = -4, and z = -6
= (3 . -4)/-6
= -4/-2
= 2

Question 18.
\(\frac{z – 2x}{y}\)

Answer:
(z – 2x)/y = 3

Explanation:
The given expression is (z – 2x)/y
Put x = 3, y = -4, and z = -6
= (-6 – 2(3))/-4
= (-6 – 6)/-4
= -12/-4
= 3

Find the mean of the integers.

Question 19.
-3, -8, 12, -15, 9

Answer:
Mean = -1

Explanation:
Mean = sum of integers / total number of integers
= (-3 – 8 + 12 – 15 + 9)/5
= -5/5
= -1

Question 20.
-54, -32, -70, -25, -65, -42

Answer:
Mean = -48

Explanation:
Mean = (-54 – 32 – 70 – 25 – 65 – 42)/6
= -288/6
= -48

Question 21.
The table shows the weekly profits of a fruit vendor. What is the mean profit for these weeks?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 125
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 126

Answer:
The mean profit for 4 weeks is -$48

Explanation:
The mean profit = (sum of the profits) / number of weeks
= (-125 – 86 + 54 – 35)/4
= -192/4
= -48
The mean profit for 4 weeks is -$48.

2.3 Converting Between Fractions and Decimals (pp. 61–66)

Write the fraction or mixed number as a decimal.

Question 22.
– \(\frac{8}{15}\)

Answer:
-8/15 = -0.533333

Explanation:
-8/15 = -0.533333
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 78

Question 23.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer:
5/8 = 0.625

Explanation:
5/8 = 0.625
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 79

Question 24.
–\(\frac{13}{6}\)

Answer:
-13/6 = -2.16666

Explanation:
-13/6 = -2.16666
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 80

Question 25.
1\(\frac{7}{16}\)

Answer:
1\(\frac{7}{16}\) = 1.4375

Explanation:
1(7/16) = 23/16
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 81

Write the decimal as a fraction or mixed number in simplest form.

Question 26.
-0.6

Answer:
-0.6 = -3/5

Explanation:
-0.6 = -6/10
= -3/5

Question 27.
-0.35

Answer:
-0.35 = -7/20

Explanation:
-0.35 = -35/100
= -7/20

Question 28.
-5.8

Answer:
-5.8 = -29/5

Explanation:
-5.8 = -58/10
= -29/5

Question 29.
24.23

Answer:
24.23 = 2423/100

Explanation:
24.23 = 2423/100

Question 30.
The table shows the changes in the average yearly precipitation (in inches) in a city for several months. Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 127

Answer:
The order of numbers from least to greatest is -1(7/9), -1.75, 3/11, 0.3

Explanation:
Order the numbers -1.75, 3/11, 0.3, -1(7/9) from least to greatest
Express each number as a decimal
3/11 = 0.272727
-1(7/9) = -16/9 = -1.77777
-1.7777 < -1.75 < 0.272727 < 0.3
The order of numbers from least to greatest is -1(7/9), -1.75, 3/11, 0.3

2.4 Multiplying Rational Numbers (pp. 67–72)

Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 128

Answer:
-4/9(-7/9) = 28/81

Explanation:
-4/9(-7/9) = (-4 . -7)/(9 . 9)
= 28/81

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 129

Answer:
8/15(-2/3) = -16/45

Explanation:
8/15(-2/3) = (8 . -2)/(15 . 3)
= -16/45

Question 33.
-5.9(-9.7)

Answer:
-5.9(-9.7) = 5723/100

Explanation:
-5.9(-9.7) = -59/10 (-97/10)
= (-59 . -97)/100
= 5723/100
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 82

Question 34.
4.5(-5.26)

Answer:
4.5(-5.26) = 2367/100

Explanation:
4.5(-5.26) = 45/10 (-526/100)
= (45 . -526) / (10 . 100)
= (9 . 263) / 100
= 2367/100
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 83

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 130

Answer:
-2/3 (2(1/2))(-3) = -5

Explanation:
-2/3 (2(1/2))(-3) = -2/3 (5/2) (-3)
= (-2 . 5 . -3) / (2 . 3)
= -5

Question 36.
-1.6(0.5)(-20)

Answer:
-1.6(0.5)(-20) = 16

Explanation:
-1.6(0.5)(-20) = -16/10(5/10)(-20)
= (-16 . 5 . -20)/(10 . 10)
= 16

Question 37.
The elevation of a sunken ship is -120 feet. You are in a submarine at an elevation that is \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the ship’s elevation. What is your elevation?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 131

Answer:
Your elevation is -300 feet.

Explanation:
You are in a submarine at an elevation that is 5/8 of the ship’s elevation
Ship elevation = -120 feet
Your elevation = 5/8 (-120)
= 15(-20) = -300

Question 38.
Write two fractions whose product \(\frac{1}{5}\) and \(\frac{1}{2}\), and whose sum is negative.

Answer:
Two fractions are-1/2 and -1/2

Explanation:
The product of two fractions is between 1/5 and 1/2 and sum is negative.
Let us say the product of fractions is 1/4.
Then two fractions are -1/2 and -1/2
the sum is -1/2 – 1/2 = -2/2 = -1

2.5 Dividing Rational Numbers (pp. 73–78)

Find the quotient. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 132

Answer:
-3/4

Explanation:
9/10 ÷ (-6/5) = 9/10 • (-5/6)
= (9 • -5)/ (10 . 6)
= -3/4

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 133

Answer:
-14/11

Explanation:
-4/11 ÷ 2/7 = -4/11 • 7/2
= (-4 • 7) / (2 • 11)
= -14/11

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 134

Answer:
21/10

Explanation:
-7/8 ÷ (-5/12) = -7/8 • (-12/5)
= (-7 • -12) / (8 • 5)
= 21/10

Question 42.
6.4 ÷ (-3.2)

Answer:
-512/25

Explanation:
6.4 ÷ (-3.2) = 64/10 ÷ (-32/10)
= (64 • -32) / (10 • 10)
= -512/25

Question 43.
-15.4 ÷ (-2.5)

Answer:
77/2

Explanation:
-15.4 ÷ (-2.5) = -154/10 ÷(-25/10)
= (-154 • -25)/(10 • 10)
= 77/2

Question 44.
-23.8 ÷ 5.6

Answer:
-3332/25

Explanation:
-23.8 ÷ 5.6 = -238/10 ÷ 56/10
= (-238 • 56) / (10 • 10)
= -3332/25

Question 45.
You use a debit card to purchase several shirts. Your account balance after buying the shirts changes by -$30.60. For each shirt you purchased, the change in your account balance was -$6.12. How many shirts did you buy?

Answer:
The number of T-shirts bought was 5

Explanation:
After using a debit card, to purchase several t-shirts. Your account balance after buying the t-shirts changes by -$30.60. The negative sign means there was a total debit of $30.6 after your transactions.
For each t-shirt you purchased, the changes in your account balance were -6.12. If you purchased n T-shirts, the changes would be n × -6.12 = -6.12n. This means a total debit of 6.12n for all the T-shirts you bought.
Therefore, 6.12n = 30.6
n = 30.6/6.12 = 5
So the number of T-shirts bought was 5

Question 46.
Evaluate Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 136 when x = 4, y = -3, and \(-\frac{1}{8}\).

Answer:
-1/2

Explanation:
The given expression is z / (y – 3/4 + x)
Put x = 4, y = -3 and z = -1/8
= -1/8 / (-3 – 3/4 + 4)
= -1/8 / ((-12 – 3 + 16)/4)
= -1/8 / (1/4)
= -1/8 • 4/1
= -1/2

Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers Practice Test

Evaluate the expression. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 1.
-9 • 2

Answer:
-9 • 2 = -18

Explanation:
-9 • 2 = -18
The product of two integers with different signs is negative.

Question 2.
-72 ÷ (-3)

Answer:
-72 ÷ (-3) = 24

Explanation:
-72 ÷ (-3) = 24
The quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 136.1

Answer:
-52/5

Explanation:
3(9/10) x (-8/3) = 39/10 x (-8/3)
= (39 . -8) / (10 . 3)
= (13 . -4)/5
= -52/5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 137

Answer:
-11/25

Explanation:
-1(5/6) ÷ 4(1/6) = -11/6 ÷ 25/6
= -11/6 • 6/25
= (-11 • 6) / (6 • 25)
= -11/25

Question 5.
-4.4 × (-6.02)

Answer:
-4.4 × (-6.02) = 6622/25

Explanation:
-4.4 × (-6.02) = -44/10 x -602/10
= (-44 x -602) / (10 x 10)
= (-11 x -602)/25
= 6622/25

Question 6.
-5 ÷ 1.5

Answer:
-5 ÷ 1.5 = -10/3

Explanation:
-5 ÷ 1.5 = -5 ÷ 15/10
= -5 • 10/15
=(-5 • 10) / 15
= -10/3

Write the fraction or mixed number as a decimal.

Question 7.
\(\frac{7}{40}\)

Answer:
\(\frac{7}{40}\) = 0.175

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 84

Question 8.
\(-\frac{1}{9}\)

Answer:
\(-\frac{1}{9}\) = -0.11111

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 85

Question 9.
-1\(\frac{5}{16}\)

Answer:
-1\(\frac{5}{16}\) = -1.3125

Explanation:
-1\(\frac{5}{16}\) = -21/16
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 86

Write the decimal as a fraction or mixed number in simplest form.

Question 10.
-0.122

Answer:
-0.122 = -61/500

Explanation:
-0.122 = -122/1000
= (-2 x 61) / (2 x 500)
= -61/500

Question 11.
0.33

Answer:
0.33 = 33/100

Explanation:
0.33 = 33/100

Question 12.
-7.09

Answer:
-7.09 = -709/100

Explanation:
-7.09 = -709/100

Evaluate the expression when x = 5, y = -3, and z = -2.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 138

Answer:
-6/5

Explanation:
The given expression is (y + z)/x
Put x = 5, y = -3, and z = -2
= (-3 + (-2)) / 5
= (-3 – 2)/5
= -6/5

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 139

Answer:
-5

Explanation:
The given expression is (x – 5z)/y
Put x = 5, y = -3, and z = -2
= (5 – 5(-2))/-3
= (5 + 10)/-3
= 15/-3 = -5

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 140

Answer:
10/9

Explanation:
The given expression is 1/3 x / y/z
Put x = 5, y = -3, and z = -2
= [1/3 (5)]/[-3/-2]
= 5/3 / 3/2
= 5/3 . 2/3
= 10/9

Question 16.
Find the mean of 11, -7, -14, 10, and -5.

Answer:
Mean = -1

Explanation:
Mean = (11 – 7 – 14 + 10 – 5)/5
= -5/5
= -1

Question 17.
A driver receives -25 points for each rule violation. What integer represents the change in points after 4 rule violations?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 141

Answer:
The change in points after 4 rule violations is -100 points

Explanation:
A driver receives -25 points for each rule violation.
The change in points after 4 rule violations = 4(-25)
= -100

Question 18.
How many 2.25-pound containers can you fill with 24.75 pounds of almonds?

Answer:
The number of containers = 11

Explanation:
The number of containers = 24.75 / 2.25
= 2475/225 = (495 . 5)/(45 . 5)
= (99 . 5) / (9 . 5)
= 11

Question 19.
In a recent 10-year period, the change in the number of visitors to U.S.national parks was about 11,150,000 visitors.
a. What was the mean yearly change in the number of visitors?
b. During the seventh year, the change in the number of visitors was about 10,800,000. Explain how the change for the 10-year period can be negative.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 142

Answer:
a. Mean yearly change in the number of visitors = 1,15,000
b. The change is -35000

Explanation:
a. Mean yearly change in the number of visitors = 11,150,000/10
= 1,15,000
b. During the seventh year, the change in the number of visitors was about 10,800,000
The change in the number of visitors to U.S.national parks was about 11,150,000 visitors
(10,800,000 – 11,150,000)/10 = -350000/10 = -35000

Question 20.
You have a $50 gift card to go shopping for school supplies. You buy 2 packs of pencils, 5 notebooks, 6 folders, 1 pack of pens, 3 packs of paper, 1 pack of highlighters, and 2 binders.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 143
a. What number represents the change in the value of the gift card after buying your school supplies?
b. What percentage of the value remains on your gift card?

Answer:
a. The change in the value of the gift card after buying your school supplies = $12.06
b. The percentage of the value that remains on your gift card = 24.12%

Explanation:
You buy 2 packs of pencils, 5 notebooks, 6 folders, 1 pack of pens, 3 packs of paper, 1 pack of highlighters, and 2 binders.
a. The change in the value of the gift card after buying your school supplies = 50 – [2(1.98) + 5(2.95) + 6(0.75) + 1(1.57) + 3(0.89) + 1(3.45) + 2(3.55)]
= 50 – [3.9 + 14.75 + 4.5 + 1.57 + 2.67 + 3.45 + 7.1]
= 50 – 37.94
= 12.06
b. The amount remains on the gift card = $12.06
The percentage of the value that remains on your gift card = (100 x 12.06)/50
= 2 x 12.06 = 24.12%

Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
When José and Sean were each 5 years old, José was 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) inches taller than Sean. Then José grew at an average rate of 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) inches per year until he was 13 years old. José was 63 inches tall when he was 13 years old. How tall was Sean when he was 5 years old?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 146

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 145

Answer:
A. 39(1/2)

Explanation:
José grew at an average rate of 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) inches per year until he was 13 years old.
2.75 * (13 – 5) = 2.75 (8) =  22
José was 63 inches
= 63 – 22 = 41
41 – 1.5 = 39.5 = 39(1/2)
sean was only 39.5 inches tall when he was 5.

Question 2.
Whatis the value of -5 + (-7) ?
F. -12
G. -2
H. 2
I. 12

Answer:
F. -12

Explanation:
-5 + (-7) = -5 – 7
= -12

Question 3.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 147

Answer:
9/16

Explanation:
-9/16 + 9/8 = (-9 + 18)/16
= 9/16

Question 4.
What is the value of Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 158 when a = -2, b = 3, and c = -5?
A. -9
B. -1
C. 1
D. 9

Answer:
C. 1

Explanation:
| a² – 2ac + 5b |
Put a = -2, b = 3, and c = -5
= | (-2)² – 2(-2)(-5) + 5(3) |
= | 4 – 20 + 15 |
= | -1 |
= 1

Question 5.
Your friend evaluated the expression.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 148
What should your friend do to correct the error that he made?
F. Subtract 5 from -5 instead of adding.
G. Rewrite 2 – 3 as -1.
H. Subtract -5 from 3 before subtracting 3 from 2.
I. Rewrite -5 + 5 as -10

Answer:
H. Subtract -5 from 3 before subtracting 3 from 2.

Explanation:
2 – 3 – (-5) = 2 – 3 + 5
= -1 + 5
= 4

Question 6.
What is the value of Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 149?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 149.1

Answer:
B. 1/4

Explanation:
-1(1/2) – (-1(3/4)) = -3/2 + 7/4
= (-6 + 7)/4
= 1/4

Question 7.
What is the value of the expression when q = -2, r = -12, and s = 8?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 150
F. -2
G. -1
H. 1
I. 2

Answer:
H. 1

Explanation:
The given expression is (-q² – r)/s
Put q = -2, r = -12, and s = 8
= (-(-2)² – (-12))/8
= (-4 + 12)/8
= 8/8 = 1

Question 8.
You are stacking wooden blocks with the dimensions shown. How many blocks do you need to stack vertically to build a block tower that is 7\(\frac{1}{2}\) inches tall?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 151
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 152

Answer:
We need 6 blocks to stack vertically to build a block tower.

Explanation:
The length of block tower = 7(1/2) = 15/2 inches
The length of each block = 1(1/4) = 5/4 inches
So, 5/4 x = 15/2
x = 15/2 . 4/5
x = 6
Therefore, we need 6 blocks to stack vertically to build a block tower.

Question 9.
Your friend evaluated an expression.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 153
What should your friend do to correct the error that she made?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 154

Answer:
C.

Explanation:
-4(3/4) + 2(1/5) = -19/4 + 11/5
= (-95 + 44)/20
= -51/20

Question 10.
Which expression has the greatest value when x = 2 and y = -3?
F. -xy
G. xy
H. x – y
I. -x – y

Answer:
F. -xy

Explanation:
Put x = 2 and y = -3
F. -xy
= -2(-3) = 6
G. xy = 2(-3) = -6
H. x – y = 2 – (-3) = 2 + 3 = 5
I. -x – y = -2 – (-3) = -2 + 3 = 1

Question 11.
Four points are graphed on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 155
Part A
Choose the two points whose values have the greatest sum. Approximate this sum. Explain your reasoning.
Part B
Choose the two points whose values have the greatest difference. Approximate this difference. Explain your reasoning.
Part C
Choose the two points whose values have the greatest product. Approximate this product. Explain your reasoning.
Part D
Choose the two points whose values have the greatest quotient. Approximate this quotient. Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
A. T + U
B. R – S
C. R . S
D. U/T

Explanation:
Values of the points are R = -2.75, S = -1.25, T = 0.4, U = 2.1
A. T + U = 0.4 + 2.1 = 2.5
B. R – S = -2.75 – (-1.25) = -2.75 + 1.25 = -1.5
S – T = -1.25 – 0.4 = -1.65
T – U = 0.4 – 2.1 = -1.7
S – U = -1.25 – 2.1 = -3.35
R – T = -2.75 – 0.4 = -3.15
R – U = -2.75 – 2.1 = -4.85
Out of all R – S has the greatest difference.
C. R . S = -2.75 . -1.25 = 3.4375
T. U = 0.4 . 2.1 = 0.84
D. R/s = -2.75/1.25 = 2.2
T/U = 0.4/2.1 = 0.19
U/T = 2.1/0.4 = 5.25

Question 12.
What number belongs in the box to make the equation true?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 156
A. -1
B. -0.2
C. 0.2
D. 1

Answer:
A. -1

Explanation:
-0.4/-1 + 0.8 = 0.4 + 0.8 = 1.2
-0.4/1 + 0.8 = -0.4 + 0.8 = 0.4
-0.4/0.2 + 0.8 = -2

Question 13.
Which expression has a negative value when x = -4 and y = 2?
F. -x + y
G. y – x
H. x – y
I. -x – y

Answer:
H. x – y

Explanation:
Put x = -4 and y = 2
F. -x + y = -(-4) + 2 = 4 + 2 = 6
G. y – x = 2 – (-4) = 6
H. x – y = -4 – 2 = -6
I. -x – y = -(-4) – 2 = 4 – 2 = 2

Question 14.
What is the area of a triangle with a base of 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) inches and a height of 2 inches?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 157

Answer:
B

Explanation:
Area of triangle = 1/2 . base . height
= 1/2 . 2(1/2) . 2
= 2(1/2)

Question 15.
Which decimal is equivalent to \(\frac{2}{9}\)?
F. 0.2
G. \(0 . \overline{2}\)
H. 0.29
I. 4.5

Answer:
F. 0.2

Explanation:
2/9 = 0.222
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 2 Multiplying and Dividing Rational Numbers 87

Conclusion:

All the answers to the above questions are prepared by the math experts. We have provided the solutions in pdf format so that you can practice through offline mode also. Go through all the topics and feel free to clarify your doubts by posting the comments in the below comment box.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data

As students work with data in Grade 5, they build foundations for their study of statistics beyond. Enhance your knowledge by practicing the problems from Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data. You can get the free pdfs of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data. We have provided the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data in pdf format so that you can practice online and offline mode.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data

Take the given resources as references and score well in the exams. Improve your math skills with the help of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Ch 11 Represent and Interpret Data. Unlimited practice with all the maths questions and answers along with the practice questions. It is mandatory to practice with the Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data to score maximum marks in the exams.

Lesson: 1 Sort and Organize Data

Lesson: 2 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Lesson: 3 Read and Interpret Bar Graphs

Lesson: 4 Represent Data

Lesson: 5 Solve Problems Involving Data

Performance Task

Represent and Interpret Data Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
category
mark

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Vocabulary

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to match.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Vocabulary-Define-It
Explanation:
Bar chart – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Picture graph – A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Lesson 11.1 Sort and Organize Data

Explore and Grow

Explain how you can sort the objects.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Here we can classify the given data in two tabular forms .
In First tabular column we can classify it based on favorite item.
we have pencils – 3 ; Crayons – 3 and Markers – 3
In Second tabular column we can classify it based on favorite Color.
we have yellow color – 3 items , Green color – 3 items and Blue color – 3 items.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
As per the above given figure we can see the number of stickers in the given figure
we observe
The number of umbrellas – 4
The number of bucket – 5
The number of Crab – 6

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
As per the above given figure we can see the number of balls in the given figure
we observe
The number of balls Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
The number of Foot balls – 5 + 3 = 8
The number of Soccer ball – 5
The number of Basket ball – 3

Question 3.
MP Reasoning
Which sentences are correct?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 6
There are 7 tigers. The numbers of foxes and raccoons are the same.
There are 7 foxes. There are 3 raccoons.
Answer:
The numbers of foxes and raccoons are the same and There are 7 foxes are true statements as per the given information in the tabular column .
Explanation:
There are 7 tigers statement is false because as per the tabular column there are 10 tigers
There are 3 raccoons statement is false because as per the tabular column there are 7 raccoons

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 7
How many sunny days are there? ________ days
Is the number of cloudy days greater than or less than the number of rainy days?
greater than           less than
Answer:
Number of sunny days =  5 + 3 = 8
Number of cloudy days = 4
Number of rainy days = 3
Therefore Number of cloudy days are greater than Number of rainy days.
4 > 3 .
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 8
How many sunflowers are there? ___________ sunflowers
Is the number of roses greater than or less than the number of daisies?
greater than           less than
Answer:
Number of sunflowers = 2
Number of roses = 5 + 1 = 6
Number of daisies =5 + 2 = 7
The Number of roses are lesser than number of daises
6 > 7
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Sort and Organize Data Practice 11.1

Question 1.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Sort-Organize-Data-Practice-11.1-Question-1
Explanation:
As per the above given figure we can see the number of Insects
we observe
The number of Insects in Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
The number of Caterpillars =5 + 2 = 7
The number of Flies = 5 + 3 = 8
The number of lady bugs = 2

Question 2.
MP Reasoning
Which sentences are correct?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 10
9 students like princess movies.
4 students like superhero movies.
Princess movies are the most favorite
Answer:
9 students like princess movies is correct
Princess movies are the most favorite is correct
Explanation:
As per the given tally chart of Favorite movie we notice
The number of students like super heroes movies= 5
The number of students like Princess movies = 5 + 4 = 9
The number of students like Mystery movies = 5
Princess movies are the most favorite is correct because more number of students likes this movie

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 11
How many students chose fruit? ________ students
Is the number of students who chose yogurt greater than or less than the number of students who chose cereal?
greater than               less than
Answer:
Number of students chose fruit = 4 students.
Number of students chose Yogurt = 5 students.
Number of students chose Cereal = 5 + 1 = 6 students.
Number of students chose Yogurt are less than Number of students chose Cereal
5 < 6

Review & Refresh

Compare.

Question 4.
45 ○ 55
Answer:
45 < 55

Question 5.
74 ○ 47
Answer:
74 > 47

Question 6.
22 ○ 22
Answer:
22 = 22

Lesson 11.2 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Explore and Grow

How are the graphs similar? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 12
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 13
Each ○ = 1 counter.
Answer:
The First picture is the Tally chart of Yellow and Red color counters.
Tally chart marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
In this tally chart we see Red color shows group of five counters and another 1 counter total = 5 + 1 = 6 counters.
Yellow color shows four counters with four vertical lines.
The second graph is the Picture graph. A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
In this each counter is marked as ○. In this picture chart we notice the red color counter has 6 counters marked with 6 ○.
In the yellow color we have 4 counters marked with four ○ .
In both the charts the representation is different from each other .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 14
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 = 1 student.
How many students chose museum? _________
Which trip is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 16
Answer:
As we have 8 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 in the museum row that means 8 students chose the museum trip
as Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 = 1 student
Number of students chose museum = 8
Number of students chose Zoo = 6
Number of students chose play = 2
The trip which is least favorite is play as only two students chooses it .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 17
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 18 = 1 student.
How many students chose pasta? _________
How many students chose soup? _________
Which lunch is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 19
Answer:
As per the above picture graph we know Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 18 = 1 student.
Number of students chose pasta = 5
Number of students chose soup = 3
Number of students chose Taco = 8
Explanation:
The least favorite lunch is soup because less students chooses it compared to pasta and Taco
Only 3 students chooses soup so it is least Favorite.

Question 3.
Writing
In Exercise 2. how do you know which lunch is the most favorite?

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Number of students chose pasta = 5
Number of students chose soup = 3
Number of students chose Taco = 8
Taco is the favorite lunch
Explanation:
Taco lunch is chose by 8 number of students compared to soup and pasta 5 and 3 respectively.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 20

Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose rides greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose animals?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chose Rides are greater than number of students chose animals .
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses Rides = 5
Number of students chooses Animals = 2
Number of students chooses Games = 4
Number of students chose Rides are greater than number of students chose animals .
5 > 2 .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 22
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose frog greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose bear?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students who chose frog are lesser than number of students chose bear.
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses frog = 3
Number of students chooses Bear = 6
3 < 6.
3 lesser than 6 so Number of students who chose frog are lesser than number of students chose bear.

Read and Interpret Picture Graphs Practice 11.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 23
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 = 1 student.
How many students chose summer? ________
How many students chose fall? _________
Which season is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 25
Answer:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses summer = 7
Number of students chooses Fall = 4
Winter is the least favorite among other seasons.
Explanation:
Number of students chose spring = 3
Number of students chooses summer = 7
Number of students chooses Fall = 4
Number of students chooses Winter = 1.
Among all 4 seasons only winter season is chosen by only one student compared to other seasons .

Question 2.
Writing
How do you know which category has the least when looking at a picture graph?

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Winter
Explanation:
Less number of Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 means less number of students chosen so Winter is least favorite has it has only one Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 26
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose water greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose juice?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses water = Number of students chooses Juice .
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses water =4
Number of students chooses juice = 4
As both juice and water have equal number students that is 4 so both are equal .
Number of students chooses water = Number of students chooses Juice = 4

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
31 + 40 = ___________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-and-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Practice-11.2-Review-Refresh-Question-4
Explanation:
Step 1: Write the numbers one below the other as per the places of the digits.
Step 2 :Start adding from the ones digit. Write the sum under the ones digit.If the sum of the ones digit is greater than 9, write the ones digit of the sum under the ones and carry forward its tens digit to the tens column.
Step 3: Add the tens digits.(If there was a carry forward digit, add it along)

Numbers are arranged as shown in above picture . then add the numbers in one place 1 + 0 = 1
Then add the values in tens place 3 + 4 = 7.
Therefore sum = 71
Lesson 11.3 Read and Interpret Bar Graphs

Question 5.
62 + 20 = ___________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-and-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Practice-11.2-Review-Refresh-Question-5
Explanation:
Step 1: Write the numbers one below the other as per the places of the digits.
Step 2 :Start adding from the ones digit. Write the sum under the ones digit.If the sum of the ones digit is greater than 9, write the ones digit of the sum under the ones and carry forward its tens digit to the tens column.
Step 3: Add the tens digits.(If there was a carry forward digit, add it along)

Numbers are arranged as shown in above picture . then add the numbers in one place 2 + 0 = 2
Then add the values in tens place 6 + 2 = 8.
Therefore sum = 82

Explore and Grow

How are the graphs similar? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 28

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 30
Answer:
Picture Graph – A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
Here as per the given diagram the representation is done with Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27
Bar Graph – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Here as per the given diagram the representation is done in strips with different colors .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 31
How many students chose coins? ______________
Which object is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 32
Answer:
Number of students chooses coins = 6
The object which s least favorite is stickers
Explanation:
Number of students chooses Rocks = 4
Number of students chooses Stickers = 2
Number of students chooses Coins = 6
Compared with Rocks and Coins the stickers are chosen less that is only 2 students .
The object which s least favorite is stickers

Apply and Grow: practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 33
How many students chose card games?
____________

How many students chose board games?
____________

Which activity is the most favorite?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 34
Answer:
Number of students chooses card games = 5
Number of students chooses board games =6
The most favorite activity is Board games as it chosen by 6 number of students .
Explanation:
Number of students chooses card games = 5 (as bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses board games =6 (as bar is marked up to 6)
Number of students chooses puzzles = 2 (as bar is marked up to 2)
Compared to card games and puzzles , the board games are chosen by more students that is 6 number of students.
So , The most favorite activity is Board games

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Order the activities in Exercise 2 from the most favorite to the least favorite.

_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Board games (6) , Card games (5) and Puzzles (2).

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 35

Is the number of students who chose firefighter greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose doctor?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses firefighter are greater than number of students chooses than doctor .
Explanation:
Number of students chooses firefighter = 5 (bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses Police Officer = 7 (bar is marked up to 7)
Number of students chooses Doctor =4 (bar is marked up to 4)
Compare the students of firefighter and Doctor = 5 > 4
So Number of students chooses firefighter are greater than number of students who chooses doctor .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 36
Is the number of students who chose bike greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose kite?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses bike are equal to the number of students who chooses kite.
Explanation:
Number of students chooses bike = 6
Number of students chooses kite = 6
Both have same number of students.
So Number of students chooses bike are equal to the number of students who chooses kite = 6

Read and Interpret Bar Graphs Practice 11.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 37
How many students chose reading? _____________
How many students chose kickball? _____________
Which activity is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 38
Answer:
Number of students chooses Reading = 3
Number of students chooses Computer = 5
Least Favorite activity is Reading
Explanation:
Number of students chooses Reading = 3 (the bar is marked up to 3)
Number of students chooses Computer = 5 (the bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses Kickball = 6 (the bar is marked up to 6)
Among three activities the Reading is chosen by only 3 students .
Compared to other two activities it is less chosen by  the students .

Question 2.
Writing
How do you know which category has the most when looking at a bar graph?

___________________________________________

___________________________________________

___________________________________________

___________________________________________
Answer:
The category which has the most is Kick ball as it is marked up to 6 bars.
longer the bar marking the most favorite is the activity .

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 39
Is the number of pairs of shorts greater than, less than, or equal to the number of shirts?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of pairs of shorts is lesser than the number of the shirts.
Explanation:
Number of Shirts = 5 (as the bar is marked up to 5 )
Number of Shorts = 4 (as the bar is marked up to 4 )
Number of Shirts are greater than Number of shirts = 5 > 4.
So, Number of pairs of shorts is lesser than the number of the shirts.

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
9 + 1 + 7 = ____________
Answer:
9+ 1 + 7 = 17

Question 5.
6 + 3 + 6 = ___________
Answer:
6 + 3 + 6 =15

Lesson 11.4 Represent Data

Explore and Grow

Use your color tiles to complete the tally chart and the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 40
Each ○ = 1 color tile.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Explore-Grow
Number of Red Tiles = 4
Number of Blue Tiles = 6
Number of Yellow Tiles = 2
Bar chart – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 41
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different colors .
The number of students who chooses Blue color = 6 ( group of 5 + 1 )
The number of students who chooses pink color = 5 (group of 5 )
The number of students who chooses Yellow color = 2
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with respective colors and marking the respective number of students as per the color .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 42
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 43
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
We should complete the Picture graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Farm Animals .
The number of students who chooses Pig = 4
The number of students who chooses Cow = 6 ( group of 5 + 1 )
The number of students who chooses Horse = 5 ( group of 5 )
The same is represented in the Picture chart representing the Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15  = 1 student with respective Farm Animals and marking the respective number of students in the picture graph

Question 3.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 44
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Sports .
The number of students who chooses Swimming = 4
The number of students who chooses Karate = 2
The number of students who chooses Soccer = 5 (group of 5 )
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with Sports and marking the bars with respective number of students with different colors .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You ask 10 students whether they are right-handed or left-handed. 2 are left-handed. The rest are right-handed. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 45
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 46
Each Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 47 = 1 student.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Explanation:
Number of students = 10
Number of students left handed = 2
Number of students Right handed = 10 – 2 = 8
Represent Eight Students with Eight Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 in the above figure .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
You ask 11 students whether they like the swings or the slide. 5 like the swings. The rest like the slide. Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 48
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 49
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
Number of students = 11
Number of students like swing = 5
Number of students like slide = 11 – 5 = 6
Mark the slide up to 6 with yellow color as bars.

Represent Data Practice 11.4

Question 1.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 50
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 51
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-1
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Winter Activities. .
The number of students who chooses Sledding = 6 (Group of 5 + 1)
The number of students who chooses Skating = 3
The number of students who chooses Snowman = 4
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars  and marking the bars with respective number of students with different colors .

Question 2.
Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 52
Each ○ = 1 balloon.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-2
Explanation:
We should complete the Picture graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 2 different Balloons .
The number of students who chooses Blue balloon = 5 ( group of 5)
The number of students who chooses Red balloon = 2
The same is represented in the Picture chart representing the Each ○ = 1 balloon with respective Balloons color and marking the respective number of students in the picture graph

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
You ask 8 students whether they buy or pack their lunches. 6 students buy. The rest pack. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 53
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 54
Each Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 55 = 1 student.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-3
Explanation:
Total Number of students = 8
Number of students who buys lunch = 6
Number of students who packs their lunches = 8 – 6 = 2
Now mark 2 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 55 in the pack category as 2 students pack there lunches in the picture graph

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends. Write the new equation.

Question 4.
2 + 6 = _____________
_____________ + _____________ = _____________
Answer:
2 + 6 = 8
6 + 2 = 8
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same .

Question 5.
_____________ = 8 + 1
_____________ = _____________ + _____________
Answer:
9 = 8 + 1
9 = 1 + 8
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same.

Lesson 11.5 Solve Problems Involving Data

Explore and Grow

Complete the bar graph to show 19 toys in all.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 56

Write a question about your graph. Have your partner answer the question.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.5-Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Total Number of Toys = 19
Number of Stuffed animals = 6
Number of Cars = 8
Number of Dinosaurs = 5
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars  and marking the bars with respective number of Toys with different colors .
My Partner answered the question with different numbers. but the overall number of toys = 19 .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 57
Each Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 58 = 1 student.
How many more students like butterflies than birds? _________ students
How many students were asked? _________ students
Answer:
Number of students like bats = 4
Number of students like butterflies = 7
Number of students like birds = 6
Number of more students like butterflies than birds = 7 – 6 = 1 students
Number of students asked = total number of students
Total number of students = Number of students like( Bats + Butterflies + Birds ) = 4 + 7 + 6=17.
Therefore Number of students asked = 17.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 59
Each Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 60 = 1 student.
How many fewer students chose circle than square? _________ fewer students
How many students chose square or triangle?_________ students
Answer:
Number of students chooses square = 7
Number of students chooses Circle = 5
Number of students chooses Triangle = 7
Number of Fewer students chose circle than square = 7 – 5 = 2 students
Number of students chooses square = Number of students chooses Triangle = 7

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 9 students to name their favorite rainy-day activity. Complete the bar graph to show how many chose reading. Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 61
Answer:
Number of students asked favorite rainy-day activity = 9
Number of students likes Games = 3
Number of students likes Painting = 1
Number of students likes Reading = total number of students – games – painting =9 – 3 – 1
= 9 – 4 = 9 – 5
Number of students likes Reading = 5
Explanation:
Now the number of students like reading is marked with bars up to 5 with Yellow color as shown in the below figure .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.5-Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Show-Grow-Question-3

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 62
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many more hits did Newton hit than Descartes? _________ More Hits
Answer:
Number of Hits by me = 4
Number of hits by Newton = 5
Number of hits by Descartes = 2
Number of more hits by Newton than Descartes = 5 – 2 = 3

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Write and answer a question using the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 63
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 64
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Who Laps more runs than me ? ________ runs.
Answer:
Number of lap runs by me = 2
Number of lap runs by Descartes = 5 ( group of 5)
Number of lap runs by Newton = 1.
Descartes lap runs more than me
Number of lap runs more than me = 5 – 2 = 3.
Therefore number of runs more than me by Descartes = 3

Solve Problems Involving Data Practice 11.5

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 65
How many more dogs are there than penguins? _________ more dogs
How many bears and dogs are there in all? _________ bears and dogs
Answer:
Number of Bears = 7
Number of Penguins = 2
Number of Dogs = 5
Number of dogs more than penguins = 5 – 2 = 3
3 more dogs are there than penguins
Number of Bears and Dogs = 7 + 5 = 12

Question 2.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 19 students to name their favorite fruit. Complete the tally chart to show how many chose apples. Explain how you know.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 66
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Total Number students = 19
Number of students like Banana = 5+2 = 7
Number of students like Orange = 2
Number of students like apple = 19 – 7 – 2 = 19 – 9 = 10
Explanation:
Now mark 10 apples in the above tally graph with 2 sets of group of 5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-2

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 67
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many more students like potato than carrot ? _________ more Potatoes .
Explanation:
Number of students like carrots = 3
Number of Students like Potatoes = 6
Number of more students like potatoes than carrots = 6 – 3 = 3
Therefore 3 more students like potatoes than carrot .

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
51 + 40 = __________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-4

Question 5.
76 + 3 = __________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-5

Represent and Interpret Data Performance Task

Question 1.
Ask your classmates about their eye colors. Use your data to complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 68
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Performance-Task-Question-1
Total number of class mates = 15
Number of class mates with black eye color = 9
Number of class mates with brown eye color = 4
Number of class mates with blue eye color = 2
All the above data is marked in the tally graph as shown in above figure .

Question 2.
Use your tally chart to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 69
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Performance-Task-Question-2

Question 3.
Describe two ways to tell how many students you asked.

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Number of students with black eyes = 9
Number of students with brown eyes = 4
Number of students with blue eyes = 2
The Total Number of students asked = Number of students with (black eyes + brown eyes + blue eyes)
= 9 + 4 = 2 = 15
By counting the number of bars will also say the total number of students .

Question 4.
Write and answer a question about your graphs.

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Is the number of Students with brown greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students with blue eyes?
greater than         less than             equal to
Explanation:
Number of students with brown eyes = 4
Number of students with blue eyes = 2
Therefore Number of students with brown eyes are greater than number of students with blue eyes.

Represent and Interpret Data Chapter Practice

Sort and Organize Data Homework & Practice 11.1

Complete the tally chart.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 70
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Chapter-Practice-Sort-Organize-Data-Homework-Practice-11.1-Question-1
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart of Number of Cars
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
Number of red cars = 4 (represented with four vertical lines)
Number of white cars = 3 (represented with three vertical lines)
Number of blue cars = 5 (represented with four vertical lines and the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 71
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Chapter-Practice-Sort-Organize-Data-Homework-Practice-11.1-Question-2
Explanation:
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart of Number of pets
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
Number of Cats = 4 (represented with four vertical lines)
Number of Dogs = 2 (represented with two vertical lines)
Number of Fishes = 8 (represented with four vertical lines and the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four and three vertical lines)

Read and Interpret Picture Graphs Homework & Practice 11.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 72
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 73 = 1 student.
How many students chose science? ____________
Which subject is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 74
Answer:
Numbers of Students Who likes Art = 5
Number of students who likes Math = 6
Number of students who likes Science = 4
Among the three subjects the less favorite subject is Science .
As it has less number of students .

Read and Interpret Bar Graphs Homework & Practice 11.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 75
How many students chose turtle? __________
Which is the most favorite sea creature? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 76
Answer:
Number of students choose turtle = 5
Number of students choose jellyfish = 2
Number of students choose Shark = 6
Among the three sea creature shark was chosen by more number of student compared with other two .
Therefore Most Favorite sea creature is Shark .

Represent Data Homework & Practice 11.4

Question 5.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 77
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Homework-Practice-11.2-Question-3
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers Beads of 3 different colors.
The number of Beads of Blue color = 5 ( group of 5)
The number of Beads of Red color = 2
The number of Beads of  Yellow color = 4
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with respective colors and marking the respective number of Beads as per the color .

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You ask 13 students whether they like volleyball or basketball. 7 like volleyball. The rest like basketball. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 78
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 79 = 1 student.
Answer:
Total Number of Students = 13
Number of Students who likes Volley ball = 7
Number of students who likes Basketball = 13 – 7 = 6
Now Number of students who likes basketball is represented with 7 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 79 in the above figure.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Homework-Practice-11.4-Question-6

Solve Problems Involving Data Homework & Practice 11.5

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 80
How many fewer students chose green than purple? ____________ fewer students
How many students were asked? ____________ students
Answer:
Number of Students who like purple = 5 + 4 =9
Number of Students who likes Green = 5
Number of Students who likes Orange = 2
Number of Fewer Students choose Green than purple = 9 – 5 = 4
Number of Students were asked =Numbers of Students who likes (purple + green +orange )
= 9 + 5 + 2 = 16
Therefore Number of Students were asked = 16

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 81

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many students were asked? ____________ students
Answer:
Number of Students who like Computer = 4
Number of Students who likes Stuffed Animals = 3
Number of Students who likes Train = 6
Number of Students were asked =Numbers of Students who likes (Computer + Stuffed Animals + Train )
= 4 + 3 + 6 = 13
Therefore Number of Students were asked = 13

Represent and Interpret Data Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Match each number on the left with a number that is 10 more.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 82
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-1

Question 2.
Complete.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 83
56 + 6 = __________
Answer:
56 + 6 = 62
60 + 2 = 62
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-2

Question 3.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 84
____________, ____________, ____________
Answer:
Yellow , Blue , Red
Explanation:
Red is the longest line
Blue is second longest line
Yellow is third line which is less than both

Question 4.
Shade the circle next to the number that tells how many horns there are.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 85
○ 3
○ 10
○ 6
○ 19
Answer:
Number of horns = 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-4

Question 5.
Shade the circle next to the sum.
12 + 5 = ____________
○ 15
○ 17
○ 16
○ 7
Answer:
12+5=17
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-5

Question 6.
There are 85 pages in a book. You read 10 of them. How many pages are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 86
○ 95
○ 85
○ 75
○ 80
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-6
Explanation:
Total Number of pages in a book = 85
Number of pages read by me = 10
Remaining number pages left to read = 85 – 10 = 75.

Question 7.
Is each sentence true?
52 is greater than 36.       Yes         No
100 < 90                          Yes         No
75 is less than 57.            Yes         No
89 > 81                            Yes         No
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-7

Question 8.
You collect 22 cans for a food drive. Your friend collects 36. How many cans do you and your friend collect in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 87

______________ cans
Answer:
Total Number of Cans collected by me = 22
Total Number of cans collected by my friend = 36
Total Number of cans collected by me and my friend = 22 + 36 = 58

Question 9.
Measure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 88
about ___________ color tiles
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-9
we need to know the measure of the given figure
From the above figure it is clearly marked that it measures 13 cms long .

Question 10.
Shade the circles next to the choices that match the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 89
○ 50 – 30
○ 5 tens – 2 tens
○ 50 – 20
○ 3 tens – 2 tens
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
We notice in the given figure we have 5 tens in that 2 tens were crossed that means 2 tens were subtracted so remaining number of tens = 5 tens – 2 tens .

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 90
How many students chose ham? ___________

Which sandwich is the least favorite?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 91
Answer:
As per the given bar graph we observe
Number of students choose ham  = 2
Numbers of students choose turkey = 4
Number of students choose Cheese = 4
Number of students choose turkey = Number of students choose Cheese = 4
So only ham is left with 2 less than turkey and cheese
Therefore ham sandwich is the least favorite

Question 12.
Use each card once to write an addition equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 92
___________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
2 + 3 =5
3 + 2 =5
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same .

Conclusion:

Hence Download a Free pdf of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data from the direct links. Along with this chapter, you can also find other Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Chapters. Stay with us to get the latest updates regarding the Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Answer Key.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability

In order to solve real-life mathematical problems, students must understand the concept behind the question. You have to know what is probability. This is the most interesting chapter among all the grade 7 chapters. Download Free Pdf of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability to practice the exercise and homework problems.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 Probability

Improve your math skills with the help of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability. Unlimited practice with all the question and answers along with the practice test. It is mandatory to practice with the Big Ideas Math Answer Key for Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability to secure maximum marks in the exams. Check out the links given the below sections before you start your preparation.

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Probability

Lesson: 2 Experimental and Theoretical Probability

Lesson: 3 Compound Events

Lesson: 4 Simulations

Chapter: 7 – Probability 

Probability STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Massively Multiplayer Rock Paper Scissors.
You can use experimental probability to describe the percent of times that you win, lose, or tie in Rock Paper Scissors. Describe a real-life situation where it is helpful to describe the percent of times that a particular outcome occurs.

Watch the STEAM Video “Massively Multiplayer Rock Paper Scissors.”Then answer the following questions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 1
1. The table shows the ways that you can win, lose, or tie in Rock Paper Scissors. You and your opponent throw the signs for rock, paper, or scissors at random. What percent of the time do you expect to win? lose? tie?
2. You play Rock Paper Scissors 15 times. About how many times do you expect to win? Explain your reasoning.

Performance Task

Fair and Unfair Carnival Games
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 2
You will be given information about a version of Rock Paper Scissors used at a carnival. Then you will be asked to design your own “unfair” carnival game using a spinner or a number cube, and test your game with a classmate.
In what ways can a game of chance be considered fair? unfair? Explain your reasoning.

Probability Getting Ready for Chapter 7

Chapter Exploration
Work with a partner.
1. Play Rock Paper Scissors 30 times. Tally your results in the table.
2. How many possible results are there?
3. Of the possible results, in how many ways can Player A win? In how many ways can Player B win? In how many ways can there be a tie?
4. Is one of the players more likely to win than the other player? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 3

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
probability
theoretical probability
simulation
relative frequency
sample space
experimental probability
compound event

Lesson 7.1 Probability

EXPLORATION 1

Determining Likelihood
Work with a partner. Use the spinners shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 1
a. For each spinner, determine which numbers you are more likely to spin and which numbers you are less likely to spin. Explain your reasoning.
b. Spin each spinner 20 times and record your results in two tables. Do the data support your answers in part(a)? Explain why or why not.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 2
c. How can you use percents to describe the likelihood of spinning each number? Explain.
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 3

Try It

Question 1.
You randomly choose one of the tiles shown from a hat.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 4
a. How many possible outcomes are there?

Answer:
There are 5 number of unique possible outcomes
They are { A,B,C,D,E}
Therefore, there are 5 possible outcomes for the event.

b. What are the favorable outcomes of choosing a vowel ?

Answer:
There are 2 favorable outcomes of choosing an vowel
They are {A,E}
Therefore, there are 2 favorable outcomes of choosing an vowel.

C. In how many ways can choosing a consonant occur?
Answer: 3 ways

Explanation:
There are 3 unique consonant tiles. They are {B,C,D}

Describe the likelihood of the event given its probability.
Question 2.
The probability that you land a jump on a snowboard is \(\frac{1}{10}\).
Answer:
Given, Probability of landing a jump on snowboard = 1/10 = 0.1
So, the likelihood of the event of jumping on to the snowboard after every jump is 1 out of 10 times.

Question 3.
There is a 100% chance that the temperature will be less than 120°F tomorrow.
Answer:
Certain event .
Given that , there is 100% chance that the temperature will be less than 120F tomorrow.
The probability for a certain event is P(E)= 1.
So, the probability that the temperature being 120F tomorrow is 1.

Question 4.
You attempt three-point shots on a basketball court and record the number of made and missed shots. Describe the likelihood of each event.̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 5
̇̇a. You make your next shot.
b. You miss your next shot.
Answer:
a.
Explanation:
Total number of shots = 15
Frequency of shots made = 9
The likelihood of making next shot is
Shots made/ Total = 9/15=0.6
So, the next shot is likely to occur

b.
Explanation:
Total number of shots = 15
Frequency of missed shots = 6
The likelihood of the next shot will miss is shots missed/ Total =6/15 0.4
So, the next shot is not likely to occur.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
IDENTIFYING OUTCOMES
You roll a number cube. What are the possible outcomes?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 6

Answer: 6
A cube has 6 faces .
They are {1,2,3,4,5,6} .
There are 6 possible outcomes.
Therefore , there are 6 possible outcomes for a cube.

Question 6.
USING RELATIVE FREQUENCIES
A bag contains only red marbles and blue marbles. You randomly draw a marble from the bag and replace it. The table shows the results of repeating this experiment. Find the likelihood of each event.̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 7
a. The next marble you choose is red. ̇̇
b. The next marble you choose is neither red nor blue.
Answer:

a.
Explanation:
Total number of balls = 42
Number of red balls = 21
The likelihood of drawing the red marble in the next turn=
Number of red balls/ Total number of balls
= 21/42 =0.5
There is only 50% chance of chance of drawing a red ball in the next turn
So, the likelihood of the event is may or ,ay not occur evenly.

b.The likelihood of drawing neither red nor blue ball is 0
0%= Impossible
Because, there are only red and blue marbles
So, it is impossible to draw another ball other than red and blue.
Therefore, the likelihood of the event is cannot occur

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
The table shows the number of days you have a pop quiz and the number of days you do not have a pop quiz in three weeks of school. How many days can you expect to have a pop quiz during a 180-day school year? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 8
Answer:
Total number of days for pop quiz for 3 weeks = 2
Total frequency = 15
Now, the number of times to have a pop quiz in 180 days be x
Total number of days =180
2/15 = x/180
15x = 360
x =  360/ 15
x = 24
Therefore, we can expect 24 days to have a pop quiz during a 180-day school year.

Question 8.
In a football game, the teams pass the ball on 40% of the plays. Of the passes thrown, greater than 75% are completed. You watch the film of a randomly chosen play. Describe the likelihood that the play results in a complete pass. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Given ,
The team pass the ball on 40% of the plays
And also, 75% are completed
75% = 0.75
Therefore 75% = 3/4
Therefore , the likelihood is likely to happen of the plays results in a complete pass = 0.34

Probability Homework & Practice 7.1

Review & Refresh

An account earns simple interest. Find the interest earned.
Question 1
$700 at 3% for 4 years
Answer: $84
The formula for simple interest= Principal x rate x time
I = P x r x t
= $700 x0.03 x 4 =$84
Therefore , the interest earned =  $84

Question 2.
$650 at 2% for 6 years
Answer: $78
The formula for simple interest= Principal x rate x time
I = P x r x t
= $650 x0.02 x 6 =$78
Therefore , the interest earned =  $78

Question 3.
$480 at 1.5% for 5 years
Answer: $36
The formula for simple interest= Principal x rate x time
I = P x r x t
= $480 x0.015 x 5 =$36
Therefore , the interest earned =  $36

Question 4.
$1200 at 2.8% for 30 months
Answer: $84
The formula for simple interest= Principal x rate x time
I = P x r x t
= $1200 x0.028 x 2.5 =$84
Therefore , the interest earned =  $84

Write the indicated ratio. Then find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 9
Question 5.
rolled oats : chopped peanuts
Answer:
2 : 1/2
2/1 : 1/2
Multiplying with 2
2/1 x 2 : 1/2 x 2
4/2 : 2/4
2/1 : 1/2
2/1 x 2 : 1/2:2
4 : 1
Therefore, the value of ratio = 4: 1

Question 6.
sunflower seeds : pumpkin seeds
Answer:
1/3 :1/4
Multiplying with 12
1/3 x 12 : 1/4 x 12
12/36 : 12/ 48
1/3: 1 /4
1/3 x 12 : 1/4 x12
12/3 : 12/4
4 : 3
Therefore, the ratio = 4 : 3

Question 7.
pumpkin seeds : rolled oats
Answer:
1/4 :2
On multiplying with 4
1/4 x 4 : 2/1 x 4
4/16 : 8/4
1/4: 2
1/4 x 4 : 2 x 4
1 : 8
Therefore , ratio = 1:8

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 8.
x + 5 < 9
Answer: x<4

Explanation:
x + 5 < 9
=x < 9-5
x<4
So, the inequality form = x<4
Graph:

Question 9.
b – 2 ≥ – 7
Answer: b≥-5

Explanation:
b – 2 ≥ – 7
= b ≥ -7+2
= b≥-5
Graph:

Question 10.
1 > – \(\frac{w}{3}\)
Answer:

Question 11.
6 ≤ – 2g
Answer: g≤ -3

Explanation:
= g≤ 6/-3
= g≤ -3
The inequality = g≤ -3
Graph:

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

DETERMINING LIKELIHOOD Determine which numbers you are more likely to spin and which numbers you are less likely to spin. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 283.)
Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 10

Answer:
The spinner is divided into 6 parts (unequal)
They are numbered as {1,2,3,4,5,6}
The numbers {2,4,5} are more likely to happen
Because, they occupy more space than remaining.
And , the numbers {1,3,6] are less likely to happen
Because , they occupy less space .

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 11
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 4 equal parts
The 4 parts are numbered as {1,2,3,4}
So, each number have equal chance of spinning
Such events are also called as equally likely happen events.

IDENTIFYING OUTCOMES You spin the spinner shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 12
Question 14.
How many possible outcomes are there?
Answer: 8

Explanation:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
The number of possible outcomes for the spinner are 8
{ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8}

Question 15.
What are the favorable outcomes of spinning a number not greater than 3?
Answer: 3

Explanation:
There are 3 numbers those are not greater than 3, they are  {1,2,3}.
There are 3 favorable outcomes.

Question 16.
In how many ways can spinning an even number occur?
Answer:  4

Explanation:
There are 4 even numbers , they are {2,4,6,8}
So, there are 4 ways of getting an even number.

Question 17.
In how many ways can spinning a prime number occur?

Answer:4

Explanation:
There are 4 prime numbers , they are {2,3,5,7}
So, there are 4 ways of getting a prime number.

IDENTIFYING OUTCOMES You randomly choose one marble from the bag.(a) Find the number of ways the event can occur. (b) Find the favorable outcomes of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 13

There are 9 colored balls in the bag in which ,
The number of red balls = 3 .
The number of blue balls = 2
The number of yellow balls = 1
The number of purple balls = 2.
The number of green balls =1
The number of favorable outcomes = 9.

Question 18.
Choosing blue
Answer: 2/9

Explanation :
The total number of out comes = 9.
The number of blue balls in the bag = 2
Consider B is the event of getting Blue ball
So, the probability of getting blue ball, P(B)=  (Number of Favorable outcomes) / (Total number of outcomes)
P(B) = 2 / 9.
Therefore, the probability of getting blue ball is 2/9 = 0.22.

Question 19.
Choosing green
Answer: 1/9

Explanation :
The total number of out comes = 9.
The number of green balls in the bag = 1
Consider G is the event of getting Blue ball
So, the probability of getting green ball, P(G)=  (Number of Favorable outcomes) / (Total number of outcomes)
P(G) = 2 / 9.
Therefore, the probability of getting green ball is 1/9 = 0.11.

Question 20.

Choosing purple

Answer: 2/9

Explanation :
The total number of out comes = 9.
The number of purple balls in the bag = 2
Consider P is the event of getting purple ball
So, the probability of getting purple ball, P(P)=  (Number of Favorable outcomes) / (Total number of outcomes)
P(P) = 2 / 9.
Therefore, the probability of getting purple ball is 2/9 = 0.22.

Question 21.

Choosing yellow

Answer: 1/9

Explanation :
The total number of out comes = 9.
The number of yellow balls in the bag = 1
Consider Y is the event of getting yellow ball
So, the probability of getting yellow ball, P(Y)=  (Number of Favorable outcomes) / (Total number of outcomes)
P(Y) = 2 / 9.
Therefore, the probability of getting yellow ball is 1/9 = 0.11.

Question 22.

Choosing not red
Answer: 0.67
There are 3 red balls in the bag
The total number of colored balls in the bag are 9
The balls other than red balls are 9 – 3 = 6
Therefore, the probability of getting a ball other than red is
P(E) = Favorable outcomes / Total number of outcomes .
Where, E is the event of getting a ball other than red
P(E) = 6/9 = 2/3
Therefore , the probability of choosing not red ball is 2/3 = 0.67.

Question 23.
Choosing not blue

Answer: 7/9 = 0.78

Explanation:
There are 2 blue balls in the bag
The total number of colored balls in the bag are 9
The balls other than blue balls are 9 – 2 = 7
Therefore, the probability of getting a ball other than blue is
P(E) = Favorable outcomes / Total number of outcomes .
Where, E is the event of getting a ball other than blue
P(E) = 7/9 = 0.78
Therefore , the probability of choosing not blue ball is 7/9.

Question 24.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the number of ways that choosing not purple can occur. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 14

Answer: Yes, he is correct
Given, the number of not purple colors=4
They are red, blue, green, yellow
Therefore the number of ways that choosing not purple can occur = 4 .

CRITICAL THINKING Tell whether the statement is true or false. If it is false, change the italicized word to make the statement true.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 15
Question 25.
Spinning blue and spinning green have the same number of favorable outcomes on Spinner A.
Answer: False
Spinning blue and spinning Red have the same number of favorable outcomes on spinner A.

Question 26.
There are three possible outcomes of spinning Spinner A.
Answer: True

Question 27.
Spinning red can occur in four ways on Spinner B.
Answer: True

Question 28.
Spinning not green can occur in three ways on Spinner B.
Answer: False

Spinning not green can occur in four ways on Spinner B.

DESCRIBING LIKELIHOOD Describe the likelihood of the event given its probability.
Question 29.
Your soccer team wins \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the time.
Answer:50
The likelihood of the event is may or may not happen .

Question 30.
There is a 0% chance that you will grow12 feet.
Answer:
The probability =0
Thus, the likelihood of the event is Impossible
Therefore , It is impossible to to grow 12 feet.

Question 31.
The probability that the sun rises tomorrow is 1.
Answer:
The probability 1=100%
The likelihood of the event is  certain
So, it is sure that the sun rises tomorrow

Question 32.
It rains on \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the days in June.
Answer:
The likelihood of the event is not likely to happen .

Question 33.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You have a 50% chance of being chosen to explain a math problem in front of the class. Describe the likelihood that you are chosen.
Answer:
Given,  there is 50% chance of being chosen to explain a math problem in front of the class
50% = 0.5
So, the likelihood of the event is may or may not occur .
there is 50% chance

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You roll a number cube and record the number of times you roll an even number and the number of times you roll an odd number. Describe the likelihood of each event.̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 16
a. You roll an even number on your next roll.
b. You roll an odd number on your next roll.
Answer:

a.Explanation:
Total number times cube rolled = 50
The frequency for even number =26
Consider E be the event of rolling an even number
P(E)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(E)= 26/50 = 0.72
Therefore , the chances of rolling an even number = 0.72

b.Explanation:
Total number times cube rolled = 50
The frequency for odd number =24
Consider O be the event of rolling a odd number
P(O)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(O)= 24/50 = 0.48
Therefore , the chances of rolling a odd number = 0.48

Question 35.
REASONING
You want to determine whether a coin is fair. You flip the coin and record the number of times you flip heads and the number of times you flip tails.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 17
a Describe the likelihood that you flip heads on your next flip.
b. Describe the likelihood that you flip tails on your next flip.
c. Do you think the coin is a fair coin? Explain. ̇̇̇̇̇
Answer:

a.Total number of flips = 25
The total frequency for heads = 22
Now, the likelihood that you flip heads on your next flip
= Number of heads/ total
= 22 / 25 = 0.88
=88%
The likelihood of the event is more likely to occur

b.Total number of flips =25
The total frequency for tails = 3
Now, the likelihood that you flip tails on your next flip
= Number of tails/ Total
= 3/25 =0.12
Therefore, the likelihood of the event is not likely to occur

c.Every coin has both sides, { heads, tails}
But, the probability of tossing coin is not fair
They do not have 50/50 outcomes for both heads and tails .
So the coin is not fair in tossing.

Question 36.
LOGIC
At a carnival, each guest randomly chooses 1 of 50 rubber ducks and then replaces it. The table shows the numbers of each type of duck that have been drawn so far. Out of 150 draws, how many can you expect to not be a losing duck? Justify your answer.̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇̇
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 18

Answer:
Total number of ducks = 25
Total number of win ducks = 6
Now,
The probability to expect to not be a losing duck after 105 draws =
won ducks/ total =x/150
6/25 =x/150
25x= 900
x= 900/25
x= 36 =0.36
The chance to expect to not be a losing duck after 105 draws is ‘not likely to occur

Question 37.
CRITICAL THINKING
A dodecahedron has twelve sides numbered 1 through 12. Describe the likelihood that each event will occur when you roll the dodecahedron. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 19
a. rolling a 1
b. rolling a multiple of 3
c. rolling a number greater than 6

a. rolling a 1

Answer: The probability of rolling a 1 is 1/12

Explanation :
There are 12 number of outcomes for a dodecahedron,
{1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12}
P{O}= favorable outcomes / Total number of outcomes.
Where O is the event of getting number 1
p{O}= 1 /12
Therefore , the probability of rolling 1 is 1/12.

b. Rolling a multiple of 3

Answer:  1/3

Explanation:
There are 4 multiples of 3 in a dodecahedron.
They are, {3,6,9,12}
There are 12 number of outcomes for a dodecahedron,
{1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12}
P{M}= Favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes
Where, M is the event of rolling a multiple of 3
P{M}= 4/12 = 1/3
Therefore, the probability of getting a multiple of 3 is 1/3

C. Rolling a number greater than 6.

Answer: 1/2

Explanation:
There are 6 numbers of which are greater than 6 . they are, {7,8,9,10,11,12}
There are 12 number of outcomes for a dodecahedron,
{1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12}
P{G}= Favorable outcome / Total number of outcomes
Where, G is the event of getting a number greater than 6
P{G} = 6/12=1/2
Therefore, the probability of getting a number greater than 6 is 1/2.

Question 38.
DIG DEEPER!
A bargain bin contains classical CDs and rock CDs. There are 60 CDs in the bin. Choosing a rock CD and not choosing a rock CD have the same number of favorable outcomes. How many rock CDs are in the bin?

Answer: 30 Rock CDs

Explanation:
Given that,
There are 60 CDs in the bin
So, There are 60 total number of outcomes
Also given that, choosing a rock CD and not choosing a rock CD have the same number of favorable outcomes
So, there is equal probability .
We can conclude that there are same number of classical CDs and rock CDs
Which means , 30 +30 = 60
Therefore, there are 30 rock CDs in the bin.

Question 39.
REASONING
You randomly choose one of the cards and set it aside. Then you randomly choose a second card. Describe how the number of possible outcomes changes after the first card is chosen.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 20
Answer:
Initially,
Total number cards =5
So, the number of possible outcome =5
If you choose one card and set it aside , the number of possible outcomes decreases by 1
Then when you randomly choose second card , there are only four cards left
Therefore, the number of possible outcomes decreases by 1 after the first card is chosen.

STRUCTURE A Punnett square is a grid used to show possible gene combinations for the offspring of two parents. In the Punnett square shown, a boy is represented by XY. A girl is represented by XX.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.1 21
Question 40.
Complete the Punnett square. Explain why the events “having a boy” and “having a girl” are equally likely.
Answer:

There is a chance of 50% female and 50% male
The probability = 50%
Therefore , the likelihood of the event is equally likely.

Question 41.
Two parents each have the gene combination Cs. The gene C is for curly hair. The gene s is for straight hair. Any gene combination that includes a C results in curly hair. When all outcomes are equally likely, what is the probability of a child having curly hair?
Answer: 4
C is considered as X which results for curly hair
since, there are 4 outcomes includes X
Thus, the probability of child having curly hair = 4/4 =1
Therefore , the probability = 1
So, the likelihood or the chances of a child having curly hair is certain.

Lesson 7.2 Experimental and Theoretical Probability

EXPLORATION 1

Conducting Experiments
Work with a partner. Conduct the following experiments and find the relative frequencies.
Experiment 1
• Flip a quarter 25 times and record whether each flip lands heads up or tails up.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 1
Experiment 2
• Toss a thumbtack onto a table 25 times and record whether each toss lands point up or on its side.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 2
a. Combine your results with those of your classmates. Do the relative frequencies change? What do you notice?
b. Everyone in your school conducts each experiment and you combine the results. How do you expect the relative frequencies to change?
c. How many times in 1000 flips do you expect a quarter to land heads up? How many times in 1000 tosses do you expect a thumbtack to land point up? Explain your reasoning.
d. In a uniform probability model, each outcome is equally likely to occur. Can you use a uniform probability model to describe either experiment? Explain.
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 3

Try It

The table shows the results of rolling a number cube 50 times. Find the experimental probability of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 4
Question 1.
rolling a 3
Answer: 8/50 =  0.16

Explanation:
Total number of trails = 50
Frequency for  3 = 8
Consider T be the event of rolling a 3
Experimental probability = P(T)(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(T)= 8/50= 0.16
Therefore , the probability of rolling a 3 is 0.16.

Question 2.
rolling an odd number.
Answer:
The probability of rolling an odd number = 0.58

Explanation:
Total number of odd numbers = 3
They are {1,3,5,}
The frequency for 1 = 10
The frequency for 3 =8
The frequency for 5= 11
Total frequency = 10 +8+11 = 29
Total number of trails = 50
Consider O be the event of rolling a Odd number
Experimental probability = P(O)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(O)= 29/50= 0.58
Therefore , the probability of rolling an odd number = 0.58

Question 3.
What is the theoretical probability of randomly choosing an X?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 5
Answer: 1/7 =0.142

Explanation:
Number of favorable outcomes = 7
Consider X be the event of choosing an X
Theoretical probability P(X)=(Number of favorable outcomes)/(Total number of outcomes)
P(X)= 1/7 = 0.142
Therefore, the probability of randomly choosing X =0.142

Question 4.
How does the experimental probability of rolling a number greater than 1 compare with the theoretical probability?
Answer:
Theoretical probability  is what we expect to happen, where experimental probability is what actually happens when we try it out.
The experimental probability of an event cannot be greater than 1 since the number of trials in which the event can happen cannot be greater than the total number of trials.

Question 5.
An inspector randomly selects 200 pairs of jeans and finds 5 defective pairs. About how many pairs of jeans do you expect to be defective in a shipment of 5000?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 6
Answer: 125 defective jeans

Explanation:
Total number of pairs = 200
Number of defective pairs = 5
Let ,x be the number of defective pairs of jeans in a shipment of 5000
Now, the number of defective pair of jeans in a shipment of 5000 =
Defective / Total= x/5000
5/200 = X/5000
200 x x =  5000 x 5
200x = 25000
x = 25000/200
x = 125
Therefore there are 125 pairs of jeans are expected  to be defective in a shipment of 5000

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 6.
Explain what it means for an event to have a theoretical probability of 0.25 and an experimental probability of 0.3.
Answer:
If you have a fair coin, and flip it twice,
The  theoretical probability of getting 2 heads = 0.25
There’s 4 outcomes: HH, TT, TH, and HT.
1 out of 4 is 0.25 chance of 2 heads.
But if you run the experiment and do actual flips, maybe 100 times,
The average times you get 2 heads might be 0.3 if you got 2 heads 30 times out of a 100.
It could be just random chance or maybe the coin is slightly heavier on the head side, causing slightly more heads than the theoretical probability.

Question 7.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
You flip a coin and record the results in the table. Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 7
Answer:

  1. Experimental probability of flipping heads = frequency of heads / Total number of trails = 32/60 =0.53

2.       The fraction of the flips you can expect a result of heads = 32/60 =0.53

3.        The percent of flips result in heads = 0.53 =53%

4.        The relative frequency of flipping heads =  32/60 = 0.53

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
Contestants randomly draw a ticket from a hat and replace it. The table shows the results after 40 draws. There are 7 winning tickets in the hat. Predict the total number of tickets in the hat. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 8
Answer:
Let, the total numbers of tickets in the hat = x
Given that , Number of winning tickets = 7
Number of winning won after 40 draws = 2
Total number of tickets =
2/40 = 7/x
2x = 280
x = 280/2
x= 140
Therefore, The total number of tickets in the hat = 140

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
You choose two different songs on a music play list at random. Out of 80 songs on the playlist, 36 are hip hop songs. The first song you choose is a hip hop song. What is the probability that the second song is also a hip hop song? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 9
Answer:
Total number of songs = 80
Number of hip pop songs = 36
Given that the first song is hip pop
The probability of playing second song also hip pop =
Total number of hip pop songs / total number of songs
Consider H be the event of playing hip pop
P(H)= 36/ 80 =0.45
If there is no repeat :
Total number of hip pop songs after playing one song = 35
P(H)= 0.43
Therefore ,the likelihood of the event is unlikely to happen.

Experimental and Theoretical Probability Homework & Practice 7.2

Review & Refresh

Describe the likelihood of the event given its probability.
Question 1.
You randomly guess the correct answer of a multiple choice question \(\frac{1}{4}\) of the time.
Answer:
The likelihood of the event is not likely to happen .

Question 2.
There is a 95% chance that school will not be cancelled tomorrow.
Answer:
Given , 95% chance that school will be cancelled tomorrow
95%= 0.95
Probability = 0.95
So the likelihood of the event is more likely to happen

Find the annual interest rate.
Question 3.
I = $16, P = $200, t = 2 years
Answer: 4%
The formula for simple interest= Principal x rate x time
I = P x r x t
$16 = $200 x r x 2
$16= 400r
r = 16/400
r= 0.04
0.04 x 100= 4
Therefore, the annual interest rate = 4%

Question 4.
I = $26.25, P = $500, t = 18 months
Answer:3.5
The formula for simple interest= Principal x rate x time
I = P x r x t
$26.25 = $500 x r x 1.5
$26.25= 750r
r = 26.25/750
r= 0.035
0.035 x 100= 3.5
Therefore, the annual interest rate = 3.5%

Tell whether x and y are proportional.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 10
Answer:
The ratio of x and y for the given values is
1/8 = 0.12
3/24= 0.12
9/75 = 0.12
We get equal values for all the ratios
Therefore, the relationship given in the table is proportional.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 11
Answer:
The ratio of x and y for the given values is
0.75/0.3 =2.5
1.5/0.6 = 2.5
2.25/0.9 = 2.5
We get equal values for all the ratios
Therefore, the relationship given in the table is proportional.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

CONDUCTING AN EXPERIMENT Use the bar graph below to find the relative frequency of the event. (See Exploration 1, p. 291.)
Question 7.
spinning a 6
Answer: 0.14

Explanation:
Total number of spins =50
The number of times 6 spun =7
Consider X be the event of spinning a 6
Experimental probability = P(T)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(X)= 7/50= 0.14
Therefore, the probability spinning a 6= 0.14

Question 8.
spinning an even number
Answer:0.48

Explanation:
Total number of spins =50
Numbers of even numbers = 3
They are {2,4,6}
Number of times 2 spun = 6
Number of times 4 spun = 11
Number of times 6 spun =7
Total : 24
Consider E be the event of spinning a number less than 3
Experimental probability  P(E)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(T)= 24/50=0.48
Therefore the probability of spinning a even number = 0.48

FINDING AN EXPERIMENTAL PROBABILITY Spinning a Spinner .Use the bar graph to find the experimental probability of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 12
Question 9.
spinning a number less than 3
Answer:  14/50=0.28

Explanation:
Total number of spins =50
Numbers less than 3 are {1,2}
Number of times 1 spun =8
Number of times 2 spun =6
Total : 8 +6 = 14
Consider T be the event of spinning a number less than 3
Experimental probability = P(T)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(T)= 14/50=0.28
Therefore, the probability spinning a number less than 3 =0.28

Question 10.
not spinning a 1
Answer: 42/50= 0.84

Explanation:
Total number of spins =50
The numbers other than 1 are{2,3,4,5,6}
The number of times 2 spun = 6
The number of times 3 spun= 9
The number of times 4 spun= 11
The number of times 5 spun= 9
The number of times 6 spun= 7
Total : 6+9+11+9+7=42
Consider O be the event of spinning a number less than 3
Experimental probability = P(O)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(O)= 42/ 50= 0.84
Therefore, the probability of spinning a number other than 1 is 0.84.

Question 11.
spinning a 1 or a 3
Answer:
Total number of spins =50
Number of times 1 spun = 8
The number of times 3 spun= 9
Total : 8+9 = 17
Consider S be the event spinning a 1 or 3
Experimental probability = P(S)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(S)= 17/ 50= 0.34
Therefore, the probability of spinning a  1 OR 3 is 0.34.

Question 12.
spinning a 7
Answer: 0

Explanation:
The bar graph consists 6 numbers
They are, {1,2,3,4,5,6}
So, it is impossible to spin 7
Therefore the probability of spinning is 0.

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses the bar graph above to find the experimental probability of spinning. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 13
Answer:
No, he is wrong

Explanation:
The formula for finding experimental probability is
Experimental probability P(O)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
Consider O be the event of spinning 4
P(O)=11/50
Therefore, the experimental probability of spinning a 4 is 0.22
So, he is wrong

Question 14.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You check 20 laser pointers at random. Three of the laser pointers are defective. What is the experimental probability that a laser pointer is defective?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 14
Answer: 0.3
Experimental probability = P(T)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
Total number of lasers = 20
Number of defective lasers =3
P(T) = 3/20
= 0.3
Therefore, the experimental probability that a laser pointer is defective is 0.3

FINDING A THEORETICAL PROBABILITY Use the spinner to find the theoretical probability of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 15
Question 15.
spinning red
Answer: 0.33

Explanation:
The spinner is divided into 6 equal parts.
So, the total number of outcomes of a spinner = 6
In which 2 parts are red and remaining parts are blue, green , orange and purple
Consider R is the event of getting a red color.
So, the probability of spinning red color P(R) = ( number of favorable outcomes)/(Total number of outcomes)
P(R)= 2/6= 0.33

Question 16.
spinning a 1
Answer: 1/6 = 0.16

Explanation:
The spinner is divided into 6 equal parts.
So, the total number of outcomes of a spinner = 6
{1,2,3,4,5,6}
Consider ,O is the event of getting 1
So, the probability of getting 1 is P(O)=( number of favorable outcomes)/(Total number of outcomes)
P(O)= 1/6 = 0.16
Therefore the probability of spinning a 1= 0.16

Question 17.
spinning an odd number
Answer: 3/6= 0.5

Explanation:
The number of total outcomes of a spinner = 6
They are , {1,2,3,4,5,6}
There are 3 odd numbers, They are {1,3,5}
Consider N is the event of getting an odd number
So, the probability of spinning an odd number P(N) =( number of favorable outcomes)/(Total number of outcomes)
P(N)= 3/6= 0.5.
Therefore, the probability of spinning an odd number = 3/6 =0.5

Question 18.
spinning a multiple of 2
Answer: 3/6= 0.5

Explanation:
The total number of outcomes of a spinner = 6
They are , {1,2,3,4,5,6}
There are 3 multiples of 2 , They are {2,4,6}
Consider M is the event of getting an odd number
So, the probability of spinning a multiple of 2is  P(M) =( number of favorable outcomes)/(Total number of outcomes)
P(M)= 3/6= 0.5.
Therefore, the probability of spinning a multiple of 2 = 3/6 =0.5

Question 19.
spinning a number less than 7
Answer: 1

Explanation:
The spinner is divided into 6 equal parts.
So, the total number of outcomes of a spinner = 6
{1,2,3,4,5,6}
Consider, S is the event of spinning a number less than 7
So, the probability of spinning a number less than 7 P(S) =( number of favorable outcomes)/(Total number of outcomes)
P(S)= 6/6 =1
So, the probability of spinning a number less than 7 = 1

Question 20.
spinning a 9
Answer: 0
The spinner is divided into 6 equal parts numbering from 1 to 6
={1,2,3,4,5,6}
There is no 9 in the spinner
So, the probability of spinning 9 is 0
It is also called as impossible event .

Question 21.
REASONING
Each letter of the alphabet is printed on an index card. What is the theoretical probability of randomly choosing any letter except Z?
Answer: 25/26 =0.96

Explanation:
We know that, there are 26 alphabets.
Also, the number of  alphabets other than Z are: 25
Let us consider Z is the event of choosing any letter except Z .
P(Z)= (number of favorable outcomes) / (Total number of outcomes )
p(Z)= 25/ 26 =0.96
Therefore, the theoretical probability of choosing a letter except Z is 25/26 = 0.96

COMPARING PROBABILITIES The bar graph shows the results of spinning the spinner below 200 times. Compare the theoretical and experimental probabilities of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 16.
Question 22.
spinning a 4
Answer:
Theoretical probability:
Total number of outcomes = 5
Consider F be the event of spinning 4
Theoretical probability P(F)= (Number of favorable outcome )/(Total number of outcomes)
P(F)= 1/5= 0.2
Experimental probability :
Total number of spins = 200
Number of times 4 spun =37
Consider F be the event of spinning 4
Experimental probability = P(F)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(F)= 37/200= 0.185
Therefore, the theoretical probability = 0.2
The experimental probability = 0.18

Question 23.
spinning a 3
Answer:
Theoretical probability:
Total number of outcomes = 5
Consider T be the event of spinning 3
Theoretical probability P(T)= (Number of favorable outcome )/(Total number of outcomes)
P(T)= 1/5= 0.2
Experimental probability :
Total number of spins = 200
Number of times 3 spun = 39
Consider T be the event of spinning 3
Experimental probability = P(T)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(T)= 39/200= 0.195
Therefore, the theoretical probability = 0.16
The experimental probability = 0.195

Question 24.
spinning a number greater than 4
Answer:
Theoretical probability:
Total number of outcomes = 5
Consider N be the event of spinning a number greater than 4
Numbers greater than 4 = {5}
Theoretical probability P(T)= (Number of favorable outcome )/(Total number of outcomes)
P(T)= 1/5= 0.2
Experimental probability :
Total number of spins = 200
Consider N be the event of spinning a number greater than 4
Number of times 5 spun =40
Experimental probability = P(T)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(T)= 40/200= 0.2
Therefore, the theoretical probability = 0.2
The experimental probability = 0.2

Question 25.
spinning an odd number
Answer:
Theoretical probability:
Total number of outcomes = 5
Consider S be the event of spinning an odd number
Total odd numbers = 3
They are {1,3,5}
Theoretical probability P(T)= (Number of favorable outcome )/(Total number of outcomes)
P(T)= 3/5= 0.6
Experimental probability :
Total number of spins = 200
Consider S be the event of spinning an odd number
The number of time 1 spun=41
The number of time 3 spun=39
The number of time 5 spun=40
Total : 41+39+40= 120
Experimental probability = P(T)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(T)= 120/200= 0.6
Therefore, the theoretical probability = 0.6
The experimental probability = 0.6

Question 26.
REASONING
Should you use theoretical or experimental probability to predict the number of times you will spin a 3 in 10,000 spins? Explain.
Answer: theoretical probability

Explanation:
Theoretical probability of event =
Theoretical probability = P(T)=(Number of favorable outcomes)/ (Total number of outcomes)
Now,
Consider T be the event of spinning 3
P(T)= 1/6.

Question 27.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A board game uses a bag of 105 lettered tiles. You randomly choose a tile and then return it to the bag. The table shows the number of vowels and the number of consonants after 50 draws. Predict the number of vowels in the bag.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 16
Answer:
let , X be the number of vowels in the bag.
Total number of tiles = 105
Number of vowels after 50 draws = 18
Now, the number of vowels in the bag =
X/150 = 18/50
50X=2700
X = 2700/50
X = 54
Therefore, 54  vowels are expected to be in the bag.

Question 28.
MODELING REAL LIFE
On a game show, a contestant randomly draws a chip from a bag and replaces it. Each chip says either win or lose. The theoretical probability of drawing a winning chip is \(\frac{3}{10}\). The bag 10contains 9 winning chips.
a. How many chips are in the bag?
b. Out of 20 contestants, how many do you expect to draw a winning chip?
Answer:
Given , the probability of drawing a winning chip = 3/10
Consider , x be the number of chips in the bag
The number of chips = 9
The ration of strikes in the bag = 9/x
3/10 = 9/x
3x = 90
x= 30
Therefore , there are 30 chips in the bag

Question 29.
PROBLEM SOLVING
There are 8 females and 10 males in a class.
a. What is the theoretical probability that a randomly chosen student is female?
b. One week later, there are 27 students in the class. The theoretical probability that a randomly chosen student is a female is the same as last week. How many males joined the class?
Answer:

a.Number of females=8
Total number of students = 8+10= 18
The theoretical probability that a randomly chosen student is female
Consider F be the event of chosen a female =
P(F)= Number of favorable outcomes / Total number of outcomes
P(F)= 8/18 =0.44

b.Initially,
Total number of students = 18
In which , number of females =8
Number of males =10
one week later , the total number of students = 27
Given, the theoretical probability for choosing girl is same
So, Number of males joined = 27 -18 = 9
Therefore, 9 males joined

Question 30.

NUMBER SENSE
The table at the right shows the results of flipping two coins 12 times each.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 17
a. What is the experimental probability of flipping two tails? Using this probability, how many times can you expect to flip two tails in 600 trials?
b. The table at the left shows the results of flipping the same two coins 100 times each. What is the experimental probability of flipping two tails? Using this probability, how many times can you expect to flip two tails in 600 trials?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 18
c. Why is it important to use a large number of trials when using experimental probability to predict results?
Answer:

a.Explanation:
According to table,
Number of turns = 12
Frequency of flipping 2 tails = 1
The probability of flipping two tails in 600 trails =
1/12 = x/600
12x =600
x = 600/ 12
x = 50
In 600 trails , flipping 2 tails is expected to be 50 times.

b.Explanation:
According to table,
Number of turns = 100
Frequency of flipping 2 tails = 22
The probability of flipping two tails in 600 trails =
22/100= x/600
100x =13,200
x = 13200/100
x = 132
In 600 trails , flipping 2 tails is expected to be 132 times.

c.In experimental probability, as the number of trials increases, the experimental probability gets closer to the theoretical probability.
So, it is important to use a large number of trails.

Question 31.
COMPARING PROBABILITIES
The table shows the possible outcomes of rolling a pair of number cubes. You roll a pair of number cubes 60 times and record your results in the bar graph shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 19
a. Compare the theoretical and experimental probabilities of rolling each sum.
b. Which sum do you expect to be most likely after 500 trials? 1000 trials? Explain your reasoning.
c. Predict the experimental probability of rolling each sum after 10,000 trials. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

a.

b. 6 sum is more likely to happen after after 500 trials, 1000 trials, and even after 10,000 trails because the the number of times 6 rolled is greater than other numbers sum.

Question 32.
PROJECT
When you toss a paper cup into the air, there are three ways for the cup to land: open-end up, open-end down, or on its side.
a. Toss a paper cup 100 times and record your results. Do the outcomes for tossing the cup appear to be equally likely? Explain.
b. Predict the number of times each outcome will occur in 1000 tosses. Explain your reasoning.
c. Suppose you tape a quarter to the bottom of the cup. Do you think the cup will be more likely less likely or to land open-end up? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability 7.2 20
Answer:
The answer will vary

a. The results of tossing a cup 100 times are :
Open end up      = 18
Open end down = 31
On its side           = 51
The events of tossing the cup are not equally likely.

b.The probability of the events in 1000 tosses
open end up =18/ 100 x 1000 =180
Open end down = 31/100 x 1000 =310
On its side = 51 / 100 x1000 =510

c.If you tape quarter to the bottom, it will probably be more likely to land open end up since the weight of the bottom
will pull the bottom of the cup down and the top of the cap up.

Lesson 7.3 Compound Events

EXPLORATION 1

Comparing Combination Locks
Work with a partner. You are buying a combination lock. You have three choices.
a. One lock has 3 wheels. Each wheel is numbered from 0 to 9. How many possible outcomes are there for each wheel? How many possible combinations are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 1
b. How can you use the number of possible outcomes on each wheel to determine the number of possible combinations?
c. Another lock has one wheel numbered from 0 to 39. Each combination uses a sequence of three numbers.How many possible combinations are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 2
d. Another lock has 4 wheels as described. How many possible combinations are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 3
e. For which lock are you least likely to guess the combination? Why?
Answer:

The set of all possible outcomes of one or more events is called the sample space. You can use tables and tree diagrams to find the sample space of two or more events.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 4

Try It

Question 1.
WHAT IF?
The sandwich shop adds a multi-grain bread. Find the sample space. How many sandwiches are possible?
Answer: sample space = {Sandwich , multi grain bread }

Question 2.
Find the total number of possible outcomes of spinning the spinner and randomly choosing a number from 1 to 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 5
Answer:
Number of colors in the spinner(a) =4
They are {red, blue, green, yellow}
Total numbers (b)= 5
{1,2,3,4,5}
Total number of possible outcomes =
According to fundamental principle ,(a x b)=
4 x 5 = 20
Therefore , total number of outcomes = 20

Question 3.
How many different outfits can you make from 4 T-shirts, 5 pairs of jeans, and 5 pairs of shoes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 6

Answer: 100

Explanation:
Number of T-shirts(a) = 4
Number of jeans pairs(b) = 5
Number of pair of shoes (C)= 5
According to fundamental principle,
Total number of outcomes = a x b x c
=4 x 5 x5
=100
Therefore , about 100 outfits can be made .

Question 4.
In Example 2, what is the probability of rolling at most 4 and flipping heads?
Answer:

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
FINDING THE SAMPLE SPACE
You randomly choose a flower and ornament for a display case. Find the sample space. How many different displays are possible?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 7

Answer:
Total number of flowers =3
They are {daffodil, hyacinth, tulip}
Total number of ornament =2
They are {figurine, trophy}
Total number of outcomes = 3 x 2 = 6
sample space =
{daffodil, figurine} {daffodil, trophy}
{hyacinth, figurine } {hyacinth, trophy }
{tulip, figurine}{tulip, trophy }.

Question 6.
FINDING THE TOTAL NUMBER OF POSSIBLE OUTCOMES
You randomly choose a number from 1 to 5 and a letter from A to D. Find the total number of possible outcomes.
Answer: 20
Total numbers (a) = 5
They are {1,2,3,4,5}
Total number of letters (b)=4
They are {A,B,C,D}
According to fundamental theory ,
Total number of possible outcomes = a x b
= 4 x 5
=20
Therefore , the total number of possible outcomes = 20

Question 7.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
You roll a number cube and flip a not coin. Which probability does belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 8
Answer: P(greater than 2 and tails ) probability does not belong with the other three.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
A tour guide organizes vacation packages at a beach side town. There are 7 hotels, 5 cabins, 4 meal plans, 3 escape rooms, and 2 amusement parks. The tour guide chooses either a hotel or a cabin and then selects one of each of the remaining options. Find the total number of possible vacation packages.
Answer:
Given, the tour guide chooses either a hotel or a cabin and then selects one of each of the remaining options.
Event 1 :
If the tour guide choose hotel , the total number of possible vacation packages.
According to fundamental counting principle ,
7 hotels x 4 meal plans x 3 escape rooms x 2 amusement parks =168
Therefore, The total number of possible vacation packages = 168
Event 2 :
If the tour guide choose cabin , the total number of possible vacation packages.
According to fundamental counting principle ,
5 cabins x4 meal plans x 3 escape rooms x 2 amusement parks =120
Therefore, The total number of possible vacation packages = 120

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
A fitness club with 100 members offers one free training session per member in either running, swimming, or weightlifting. Thirty of the fitness center members sign up for the free session. The running and swimming sessions are each twice as popular as the weightlifting session. What is the probability that a randomly chosen fitness club member signs up for a free running session?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 9
Answer:
Total number of fitness club = 100
The number of members signed for free up session = 30
Given , the running and swimming sessions are each twice as popular as the weightlifting session
let , x be the event of weight lifting and 2x be the event of running and swimming
2x + 2x + x = 30
5x = 30
x = 6
Now,
the probability that a randomly chosen fitness club member signs up for a free running session=
P(R) =2x /30
= 2×6/ 30
= 12/30
P(R) = 0.4
Therefore , the probability of that a randomly chosen fitness club member signs up for a free running session= 0.4

Compound Events Homework & Practice 7.3

Review & Refresh

Use the bar graph to find the experimental probability of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 10
Question 1.
rolling a 5
Answer:

Explanation:
Total number of spins =100
Total number of times 5 rolled= 19
Consider T be the event of rolling a 5
Experimental probability = P(T)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(T)= 19/100=0.19
Therefore, the probability of rolling 5 =19/100=0.19

Question 2.
rolling a 2 or 6
Answer:
Total number of spins =100
The number of times 2 rolled =16
The probability of rolling 2 = 16 /100 =0.16
The number of times 6 rolled = 20
The probability of rolling 6 = 20/100 =0.20

Question 3.
rolling at least a 3
Answer:

Explanation:
The number of spins = 100
The number of times 3 =15
Consider S be the event of spinning at least 3 =
P(S) = 15/100
P(S) = 0.15

Question 4.
rolling a number less than or equal to 4
Answer: 0.6

Explanation:
Total number of spins =100
Total number of times 1 rolled = 12
Total number of times 2 rolled= 16
Total number of times 3 rolled = 15
Total number of times 4 rolled= 17
Total : 12 + 16 + 15 +17 = 60
Consider L be the event of rolling a number less than or equal to 4
Experimental probability = P(T)=(Number of times an event occurs)/ (Total number of trails)
P(T)= 60 /100=0.6
Therefore, the probability of rolling a number less than or equal to 4 = 0.6

Find the product.
Question 5.
3 . 2
Answer: 6

Question 6.
5(- 3)
Answer:
= -12

Question 7.
– 6(- 2)
Answer:
= 12

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

COMPARING PASSWORDS Determine which password is less likely to be guessed. (See Exploration 1, p. 299.)
Question 8.
a password with 3 numbers or a password with 3 capital letters
Answer: the likelihood of the event is certain to happen with the passwords

Question 9.
a password with 6 numbers or a password with 4 capital letters
Answer: The password with 4 capital letters is more likely to guess than the password with 6 numbers .

USING A TREE DIAGRAM Use a tree diagram to find the sample space and the total number of possible outcomes.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 11

Answer:

Total number of possible outcomes = 3x 2 =6

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 12
Answer:

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 13
Answer:

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 14
Answer:

Question 14.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the total number of ways that you can answer a quiz with five true-false questions. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 15
Answer: No,

Explanation ,
The number of outcomes for each question =
Possible answers for question number 1 = 2
Possible answers for question number 2 = 2
Possible answers for question number 3= 2
Possible answers for question number 4= 2
Possible answers for question number 5 = 2
According to fundamental counting principle ,
Total number of outcomes = 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 = 32
Therefore , You can answer the quiz in 32 different ways

USING THE FUNDAMENTAL COUNTING PRINCIPLE Use the Fundamental Counting Principle to find the total number of possible outcomes.
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 16
Answer: 12

Explanation:
Total number of sizes (a) = 3
Number of flavors (b) = 4
By using fundamental counting principle ,(a x b)
The total number of possible outcomes = 3 x 4 = 12
Therefore, total number of outcomes = 12

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 17
Answer:20

Explanation:
Number of batteries (a)= 4
Number of colors (b)= 5
By using fundamental counting principle ,( a x b)
The total number of possible outcomes = 4 x 5 = 20
Therefore, total number of outcomes = 20

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 18
Answer:24

Explanation:
Number of suits (a)= 3
Number of wigs (b)= 2
Number of talents (c)= 4
By using fundamental counting principle ,( a x b x c)
The total number of possible outcomes = 3 x 2 x 4=24
Therefore, total number of outcomes = 24

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 19
Answer:36

Explanation:
Number of appetizer (a)= 3
Number of Entre (b)= 4
Number of dessert (c)= 3
By using fundamental counting principle ,( a x b x c)
The total number of possible outcomes = 3 x 4 x 3 = 36
Therefore, total number of outcomes = 36

Question 19.
CHOOSE TOOLS
You randomly choose one of the marbles. Without replacing the first marble, you choose a second marble.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 20
a. Name two ways you can find the total number of possible outcomes.
b. Find the total number of possible outcomes.
Answer:

a. Explanation:
The tree diagram and fundamental counting principle

b.There are 12 number of possible outcomes
Total number of balls = 4
Therefore, there are 4 possible outcomes
without replacing the first ball, the number of possible outcomes =3
According to fundamental principle ,( a x b )
= 4 x 3 = 12
Therefore there are 12 number of outcomes
Tree diagram:

Question 20.
FINDING A PROBABILITY
You roll two number cubes. What is the probability of rolling double threes?
Answer:
Number of cubes =2
{1,2,3,4,5,6} , {1,2,3,4,5,6}
Total number of  possible outcomes = 6 x 6 = 36
The probability of rolling double threes =
P(T) = 2/36 = 0.05
Therefore, the probability of rolling double threes = 0.05

FINDING THE PROBABILITY OF A COMPOUND EVENT You spin the spinner and flip a coin. Find the probability of the compound event.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 21
Question 21.
spinning a 1 and flipping heads
Answer: 0.1

Explanation:
The spinner is divided into 5 equal parts
They are {12,3,4,5}
Total number of outcomes =5
Consider O be the event of spinning a 1
P(O)= (Number of favorable outcomes )/ (Total number of outcomes)
P(O)= 1/ 5
Total number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads, Tails}
The probability of flipping a heads
P(H)= 1/2
The probability of compound event =
1/5 x 1/2 = 1/10 =0.1
Therefore ,the probability of compound event = 1/10

Question 22.
spinning an even number and flipping heads
Answer: 0.2

Explanation:
Number of even numbers = 2
They are {2,4}
Total number of outcomes = 5
Consider E be the event of spinning an even number
P(E) = 2/5
Total number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads, Tails}
The probability of flipping a heads
P(H)= 1/2
The probability of compound event (a x b)=
2/5 x 1/2 = 2/10 =0.2
Therefore, the probability of compound event = 0.2

Question 23.
spinning a number less than 3 and flipping tails
Answer: 0.2

Explanation:
Total number of outcomes = 5
Number of numbers less than 3 =2
They are {1,2}
Consider, S be the event of spinning a number less than 3
P(S) = 2/5
Total number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads, Tails}
The probability of flipping a heads
P(H)= 1/2
The probability of compound event (a x b)=
2/5 x 1/2 =2/10 =0.2
Therefore the probability of compound event = 0.2

Question 24.
spinning a 6 and flipping tails
Answer: 0

Explanation:
The spinner is divided into 5 equal parts
They are {12,3,4,5}
Total number of outcomes =5
Consider O be the event of spinning a 6
P(O)= (Number of favorable outcomes )/ (Total number of outcomes)
P(O)= 0
Therefore it is impossible to spin 6
Total number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads, Tails}
The probability of flipping a tails
P(H)= 1/2
The probability of compound event =
0 x 1/2 =0
Therefore ,the probability of compound event =0

Question 25.
not spinning a 5 and flipping heads
Answer:0.4

Explanation:
The spinner is divided into 5 equal parts
They are {12,3,4,5}
Total number of outcomes =5
Consider N be the event of  not spinning a 5
Favorable outcomes = 4 .They are {1,2,3,4}
P(N)= (Number of favorable outcomes )/ (Total number of outcomes)
P(N)= 4/ 5
Total number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads, Tails}
The probability of flipping a heads
P(H)= 1/2
The probability of compound event =
4/5 x 1/2 = 4/10 =0.4
Therefore ,the probability of compound event = 0.4

Question 26.
spinning a prime number and not flipping heads
Answer:0.3

Explanation:
Total number of outcomes = 5
Number of prime numbers = 3
They are {2,3,5}
Consider P be the event of spinning a prime number
P(P) = (Number of favorable outcomes )/ (Total number of outcomes)
P(P) = 3/5
Total number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads, Tails}
The probability of not flipping a heads
P(H)= 1/2
The probability of compound event =
3/5 x 1/2 = 3/10 =0.3
Therefore ,the probability of compound event = 0.3

FINDING THE PROBABILITY OF A COMPOUND EVENT You spin the spinner, flip a coin, and then spin the spinner again. Find the probability of the compound event.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 22
Question 27.
spinning blue, flipping heads, then spinning a 1
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 3 equal parts
Indicated numerally as {1,2,3} also colored in {red, blue , yellow}
Consider B be the event of spinning blue
P(B) = 1/3
Number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads , Tails }
Consider H be the event of flipping heads
P(H) = 1/2
Consider O be the event of spinning 1
P(O)= 1/3
The compound probability of compound event =
= 1/3 x 1/2 x1/3
= 1/18
Therefore , the compound probability of the event is 1/18.

Question 28.
spinning an odd number, flipping heads, then spinning yellow
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 3 equal parts
Indicated numerally as {1,2,3} also colored in {red, blue , yellow}
Consider Y be the event of spinning yellow
P(Y) = 1/3
Number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads , Tails }
Consider H be the event of flipping heads
P(H) = 1/2
Consider O be the event of spinning Odd  number
Number of odd numbers = 2
They are {1,3}
P(O)= 2/3
The compound probability of compound event =
= 1/3 x 1/2 x2/3
= 2/18 =0.11
Therefore , the compound probability of the event is 2/18.

Question 29.
spinning an even number, flipping tails, then spinning an odd number
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 3 equal parts
Indicated numerally as {1,2,3} also colored in {red, blue , yellow}
Consider E be the event of spinning an even number
Number of even numbers =1
They are {2}
P(B) = 1/3
Number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads , Tails }
Consider T be the event of flipping Tails
P(T) = 1/2
Consider O be the event of spinning an odd number
Number of odd numbers =2
They are {1,3}
P(O)= 2/3
The compound probability of compound event =
= 1/3 x 1/2 x2/3
= 2/18 =0.11
Therefore , the compound probability of the event is 2/18.

Question 30.
not spinning red, flipping tails, then not spinning an even number
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 3 equal parts
Indicated numerally as {1,2,3} also colored in {red, blue , yellow}
Consider R be the event of  not spinning red
The colors other than red are {blue , yellow}
P(R) = 2/3
Number of outcomes for a coin =2
They are {Heads , Tails }
Consider T be the event of flipping tails
P(T) = 1/2
Consider E be the event of not spinning an even number
number of not even numbers =2
They are {1,3}
P(E)= 2/3
The compound probability of compound event =
= 2/3 x 1/2 x2/3
= 4/18 =0.22
Therefore , the compound probability of the event is 0.22

Question 31.
REASONING
You randomly guess the answers to two questions on a multiple-choice test. Each question has three choices: A,B, and C.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 23
a. What is the probability that you guess the correct answers to both questions?
b. Suppose you can eliminate one of the choices for each question. How does this change the probability that both of your guesses are correct?
Answer:
Probability of an event = Number of favorable outcomes / Total number of outcomes
There is one correct answer for each question.
So, the number of favorable outcomes = 2
Given that, there are 3 choices {a, b, c} for each question
So, total number of outcomes = 6
Consider, C be event that you guess the correct answers to both questions=
P(C)= 2/6 = 1/3
Therefore, the probability that you guess the correct answers to both questions =1/3

b.
Answer:
There is a correct answer for each question
So, the favorable outcomes =2
If you eliminate one of the choices for each question ,
Now, the choices for the questions are {a, b}
So, the total number of outcomes =4
Consider, S be the event of choosing correct answer
P(S) = 2/4
= 0.5
Therefore, the probability of choosing a correct answer is 0.5

Question 32.
REASONING
You forget the last two digits of your cell phone password.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 24
a. What is the probability that you randomly choose the correct digits?
b. Suppose you remember that both digits are even. How does this change the probability that you choose the correct digits?
Answer:

a.Number of digits to be guessed = 2
There are 10 possible numbers from 0 to 9
By using fundamental counting principle,
Number of possible outcomes = 10 x 10 =100
Each digit has one correct answer
So, the number of favorable outcomes = 2
Probability = Number of favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes
Consider C be the event of choosing correct digits
P(C) = 2/100 =1/50
Therefore the probability of choosing correct digits is 1/50

b.Given that, the two digits to be guessed are even numbers
The number of even numbers from 0 to 9 = 5
They are {0,2,4,6,8}
According to fundamental counting principle ,
So, total number of possible outcomes = 5 x 5= 25
Each digit has only one correct answer,
So number of favorable outcomes = 2
Consider S be the event of choosing correct digits
P(S) = 2/25 =0.08
Therefore, the probability of choosing correct answer = 0.08

Question 33.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A combination lock has 3 wheels, each numbered from 0 to 9. You try to guess the combination by writing five different numbers from 0 to 999 on a piece of paper. Find the probability that the correct combination is written on the paper.
Answer:
The number of digits numbered from 0 to 9 = 10
You get to try 5 of the 1000 possible combinations
So, the probability of getting them all right is 5/1000 or 1/200
Therefore ,5 tries, with a 1/1000 chance each time = 5/1000 = 1/200

Question 34.

MODELING REAL LIFE
A train has one engine and six train cars. Find the total number of ways an engineer can arrange the train. (The engine must be first.)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.3 25
Answer:
Total number of train cars = 6
The engine must be first So, the total outcomes for train cars
So , there are 6 possible places for the train cars
Number of possible outcomes for the first train car = 6
Number of possible outcomes for the second train car =5
Number of possible outcomes for the third train car = 4
Number of possible outcomes for the fourth train car = 3
Number of possible outcomes for the fifth train car = 2
Number of possible outcomes for the sixth train car = 1
According to fundamental principle ,
6 x 5 x 4 x 3 x 2 x 1 = 720
Therefore, the number of ways you can arrange the train = 720

Question 35.
REPEATED REASONING
You have been assigned a nine-digit identification number.
a. Should you use the Fundamental Counting Principle or a tree diagram to find the total number of possible identification numbers? Explain.
b. How many identification numbers are possible?
c. RESEARCH Use the Internet to find out why the possible number of Social Security numbers is not the same as your answer to part(b).
Answer:

a.It is difficult to use tree diagram to find the total number of possible identification numbers because, the total number of identification is very large . So, it is impossible to use tree diagram
Therefore , it is easy to easy to use the fundamental counting principle .

b.Total number of identification digits are from 0 to 9
They are {0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9}
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for first digit = 10
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for second digit = 10
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for third  digit = 10
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for fourth digit = 10
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for fifth digit = 10
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for sixth digit = 10
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for seventh digit = 10
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for eighth digit = 10
The number of possible numbers from 0 to 9 for ninth digit = 10
According to fundamental principle
10x10x10x10x10x10x10x10x10 = 1,000,000,000
Therefore there are 1,000,000,000 possible identification numbers

c.The possible number of Social Security numbers is not the same as your answer to part(b)
Because , some special numbers are never allocated.

Question 36
DIG DEEPER!
A social media account password includes a number from 0 to 9, an uppercase letter, a lowercase letter, and a special character, in that order.
a. There are 223,080 password combinations. How many special characters are there?
b. What is the probability of guessing the account password if you know the number and uppercase letter, but forget the rest?
Answer:

a.From 0 to 9, there are a total of 10 values.
For uppercase letters, there are a total of 26 values from A, B, C, D …Z
For lower case letters, there are also a total of 26 values from a, b, c, d …z.
So out of these three characters, we have a total of 10 × 26 × 26 = 6,760 different combinations.
If there are 223,080 password combinations
We need to divide this by 6,760 to calculate the possible values of the special characters.
6,760 × Number of possible special characters = 223,080,
Number of special characters = 223,080 / 6760= 33.
So there are 33 special characters.
If the number and uppercase values are known then the various lowercase letters and special characters are the unknown values.
The number of possible combinations = number of lowercase letters × number of special characters = 26 × 33 = 858.
So the probability of guessing the password is 1 out of 858 combinations.

Question 37.
PROBLEM SOLVING
From a group of 5 scientists, an environmental committee of 3 people is selected. How many different committees are possible?
Answer:
Let,
The 5 scientists be indicated as A,B,C,D,E
The environmental committee of three people =
ABC, ABD, ABE ,ACD,ACE , ADE
BCD,BCE, BDE,CDE .
Therefore, there are 10 different ways to form a committee.

Lesson 7.4 Simulations

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Simulation
Work with a partner. A basketball player makes 80% of her free throw attempts.
a. Is she likely to make at least two of her next three free throws? Explain your reasoning.
b. The table shows 30 randomly generated numbers from 0 to 999. Let each number represent three shots. How can you use the digits of these numbers to represent made shots and missed shots?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 1
c. Use the table to estimate the probability that of her next three free throws, she makes

  • exactly two free throws.
  • at most one free throw.
  • at least two free throws.
  • at least two free throws in a row.

d. The experiment used in parts (b) and (c) is called a simulation. Another player makes \(\frac{3}{5}\) of her free throws. Describe a simulation that can be 5used to estimate the probability that she makes three of her next four free throws.
Answer:
A simulation is an experiment that is designed to reproduce the conditions of a situation or process.Simulations allow you to study situations that are impractical to create in real life.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 2

Try It

Question 1.
You randomly guess the answers to four true-false questions.
a. Design a simulation that you can use to model the answers.
b. Use your simulation to find the experimental probability that you answer all four questions correctly.

Answer:a.  There are two answers in a true-false question.
There is an equal chance of being correct or incorrect.
Therefore, we can use a coin to simulate answers where heads is correct and tails is incorrect.
Flip 4 coins in each trial to simulate the four answers. Run the simulation 50 times.

b.The table below shows the  results of simulation 50 times
Out of 50 trails , there are only 4 times all the answers are correct
So, the probability that you answer all four questions correct =
Consider C be the event of answer all four questions correct
P(C) =4 /50 = 0.08

   

Question 2.
A baseball team wins 70% of the time. Design and use a simulation to estimate the probability that the team wins the next three games.
Answer:
Given that there is 70% chance of winning
let us use numbers to determine the win or lose of game
Assume 0-6 numbers to represent win and 7-9 numbers represent lose since, there is 70% chance of winning.
The table below shows the possible results after simulation 3 numbers 50 times on a random number on a graphing calculator.
Out of 50 trails , 19 of them had three wins
Therefore, the probability = 19/50 =0.38

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
SIMULATING OUTCOMES
Four multiple-choice questions on a quiz each have five answer choices. You randomly guess the answer to each question. Design and use a simulation to find the experimental probability that you answer all of the questions correctly.
Answer:
Given , the number of questions = 4
The number of answer choices for each question = 5
The experimental probability that you answer all of the questions correctly = 0.5%

Question 4.
SIMULATING OUTCOMES
You select a marble from a bag and a chip from a box. You have a 20% chance of choosing a green marble and a 90% chance of choosing a red chip. Estimate the probability that you choose a green marble and a red chip.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 3
Answer:
Given ,
The chance of  choosing green marble = 20%
The chance of choosing a red chip =90%
The simulation about the probability that you choose green marble and red marble
88  5  86  13  31  49  33  21  99  97
30  62  18  4  63  3  32  94  8  77
24  87  74  56  19  42  61  75  81
45  84  51  17  15  46  66  69  34  28
36  9  64  53  59  10  58  57  39  43  93
The digits from 1 through 2 in tens place indicate green marble
The digits from 1 through 9 in tens place indicates red chip
The experimental probability of choosing green marble and red marble
P(B) = 8/50 = 0.16

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
Each day there is a 50% chance that your tablet overheats. Estimate the probability that your tablet overheats on exactly 2 of the next 3 days.
Answer:
Given that ,
The percent of  tablet overheats each day = 50%
The digits from 1 through 5 in the numbers
460  677  330  467  654  942  875  217  734  692
646  421  222  804  399  380  103  977  991  996
367  337  760  495  280  359  726  349  605  649
573  836  413  196  475  470  315  911  122  970
369  666  908  431  396  230  885  863  333  762
The digits 1 through 5 at least two in a three digit number indicate that your tablet overheats on exactly 2 of the next 3 days.
The experimental probability that your tablet overheats on exactly 2 of the next 3 days
P(S) = 15/ 50 = 0.3

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER
The probability that a homeowner needs a plumber this year is 22%. The probability that the homeowner needs a septic tank specialist is 14%. Estimate the probability that the homeowner needs a plumber, but not a septic tank specialist.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 4
Answer:
Given that,
The probability home owner needs a plumber this year = 22%
The probability that home owner needs septic tank specialist = 14%
The probability that the home owner needs plumber but not septic tank specialist
80  52  96  94  77  49  74  16  79  68
45  98  34  47  48  57  12  62  21  71
60  82  78  11  64  28  43  22  75  19
76  65  17  81  87  14  38  27  6  42
37  40  51  15  2  13  92  90  73  7
The numbers 1 through 2 in tens place indicates owner needs plumber
The number 2 through 9 in once place  indicate owner does not needs tank specialist
P(S) = 11 / 50 = 0.22

Simulations Homework & Practice 7.4

Review & Refresh
You flip a coin and roll the 20-sided figure. Find the probability of the compound event.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 5
Question 1.
Flipping tails and rolling at least a 14
Answer:
The total numbers of outcomes for a coin = 2
They are {Tails, heads }
Consider T be the event of flipping tails
P(T) = 1/2
The number of outcomes for a 20 sided figure  = 20
The probability of rolling at least a 14
Consider F be the event of rolling at least a 14
P(F) = 1/ 20
Compound event ( a x b )
= 1/2 x 1/20 = 1/40

Question 2.
Flipping heads and rolling less than 3
Answer:
The total numbers of outcomes for a coin = 2
They are {Tails, heads }
Consider H be the event of flipping heads
P(H ) = 1/2
The number of outcomes for a 20 sided figure  = 20
Consider L be the event of rolling less than 3
Number of numbers less than 3 = 2
They are {1,2}
P(L) = 2/ 20 = 1/10
Compound event ( a x b )
= 1/2 x 1/10 = 1/20

Simplify the expression.
Question 3.
5(a – 2)
Answer:
5(a – 2) =0
5a -10 =0
5a =10
a=10/5
a =2

Question 4.
– 7(1 + 3x)
Answer:
– 7(1 + 3x) =0

-7 – 21x=0
-21x= 7
x= 7/-21
x = -0.33

Question 5.
– 1(3p – 8)
Answer:
– 1(3p – 8) =0
-3p +8 =0
p =-8/-3  =-2.6

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A SIMULATION A medicine is effective for 80% of patients. The table shows 30 randomly generated numbers from 0 to 999. Use the table to estimate the probability of the event. (See Exploration 1, p. 307.)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 6
Question 6.
The medicine is effective on each of three patients.
Answer:
Let the, digits 1 through 8 in the tens place represent the medicine is effective
P(E) = 24/30

Question 7.
The medicine is effective on fewer than two of the next three patients.
Answer:
P(N) = 6/30 = 0.2

SIMULATING OUTCOMES Design and use a simulation to find the experimental probability.
Question 8.
In your indoor garden, 50% of seeds sprout. What is the experimental probability that at least one of your next three seeds sprouts?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 7
Answer:
Use the random number generator on a graphing calculator.
Randomly generate 50 numbers from 0 to 99. The table below shows the results.
Let the digits 1 through 5 in the tens place represent the seeds are sprout

P(rain both days) =6/50
The experimental probability is 6/50 = 0.12, or 12%.

Question 9.
An archer hits a target 50% of the time. What is the experimental probability that the archer hits the target exactly four of the next five times?
Answer:
Given , the archer hits the target = 50%
25  82  53  49  24  95  31  66  40  90
42  30  9  78  4  80  16  99  23  85  39
44  6  61  46  5  87  64  36  21  57  58
98  81  13  97  29  18  92  22  77  35
55  14  60  28  38  89  56  69
Because, the makes 50 % of shots 1 to 50 represents successful shots .
the experimental probability that the archer hits the target exactly four of the next five times
P(X) = 25/50 =0.5 = 50%.

Question 10.
A bank randomly selects one of four free gifts to send to each new customer. Gifts include a calculator, a key chain, a notepad, and a pen. What is the experimental probability that the next two new customers both receive calculators? that neither receives a calculator?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 8
Answer:
Given that ,
Gifts include a calculator, a key chain, a notepad, and a pen.
The experimental probability that the next two new customers both receive calculators=
P(C) =1/4 x1/4 = 1/16
The experimental probability that the next two new customers both neither receive calculators=
P(N) = 3/4 x 3/4 = 9/16

Question 11.
Employees spin a reward wheel. The wheel is equally likely to stop on each of six rewards labeled A–F. What is the experimental probability that fewer than two of the next three spins land on reward A?
Answer:
Given , The six rewards are labelled as {A,B,C,D,E,F}
What is the experimental probability that fewer than two of the next three spins land on reward A
92  72  41  33  83  4  60  32  6  81
1  12  61  57  93  27  46  29  42  47
21  79  23  45  16  63  26  87  14  68
75  38  94  24  20  86  82  70  8  97
39  59  19  64  55  25  77  9  88  37
the experimental probability that fewer than two of the next three spins land on reward A = 4/50

USING NUMBER CUBES Design and use a simulation with number cubes to estimate the probability.
Question 12.
Your lawnmower does not start on the first try \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the time. Estimate the probability that your lawnmower will not start on the first try exactly one of the next two times you move the lawn.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 9
Answer:
Given the probability of the event is 1/6 = 16
The simulation of random generate calculator about 50 numbers
The digits from 1 through 16 indicates the event
50  99  88  6  98  76  63  21  65  42
96  84  92  37  27  33  11  57  69  68
48  40  10  30  24  26  67  47  60  34
59  87  18  78  7  79  12  95  9  8  1
86  38  45  93  44  4  15  73  39
The experimental probability of the event is 10/50
P(S) = 0.2

Question 13.
An application on your phone correctly identifies four out of every six songs. Estimate the probability that at least three of the next four songs are correctly identified.
Answer:

SIMULATING OUTCOMES Design and use a simulation to find the experimental probability.
Question 14.
Two beakers are used in a lab test. What is the experimental probability that there are reactions in both beakers during the lab test?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 10
Answer:
The simulation of beaker 1 and beaker 2 have reactions
The digits 1 through 8 in tens place indicate probability of beaker 1
The digits 1 through 5 in once place indicate probability of beaker 2
52 66 73 68 75 28 35 47 48 2
16 68 49 3 77 35 92 78 6 6
58 18 89 39 24 80 32 41 77 21
32 40 96 59 86 1 12 0 94 73
40 71 28 61 1 24 37 25 3 25
The experimental probability that there are reactions in both beakers during the lab test
P(R) =32/50 = 0.64

Question 15.
You use a stain remover on two separate stains on a shirt. What is the experimental probability that the stain remover removes both the mud stain and the food stain?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 11
Answer:
The simulation of random generator calculator is as follows:
The digits 1 through 9 in tens place indicate the event in mud
The digits 1 through 8 in once place indicate the event of stain removal in food
62  35  50  43  96  37  70  31  59  40
55  92  89  14  10  41  87  95  11  99
12  53  71  26  38  24  80  36  16  42
85  32  3  33  47  1  49  51  8  23  88
69  15  64  84  81  60  66  72  74
The experimental probability that the stain remover removes both the mud stain and the food stain
P(S) = 41/50 = 0.82

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
The probability that a computer crashes one or more times in a month is 10%. Estimate the probability that the computer crashes at least one or more times per month for two months in a row during the first half of the year.
Answer:

Question 17.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You visit an orchard. The probability that you randomly select a ripe apple is 92%. The probability that you randomly select a ripe cherry is 86%. Estimate the probability that you pick an apple that is ripe and a cherry that is not ripe.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability 7.4 12
Answer:
Given , the probability that you randomly select a ripe apple = 92%
The probability  that you pick a ripe cherry = 86%
The digits from 1 through 8 in tens place indicates event of choosing a ripe apple
The digits 9  in once place indicates event of not choosing a ripe cherry
75  99  69  33  67  1  22  17  18  37
29  27  9  12  54  7  31  39  26  87
10  72  82  42  36  85  74  3  5  92
29  11  21  81  76  77  52  13  90
15  73  69  70  8  23  53  59  51  44  48
The probability that you pick an apple that is ripe and a cherry that is not ripe = 9/50

Question 18
CRITICAL THINKING
You use a simulation to find an experimental probability. How does the experimental probability compare to the theoretical probability as the number of trials increases?
Answer:
Experimental probability is the result of an experiment. Theoretical probability is what is expected to happen.
In experimental probability, as the number of trials increases, the experimental probability gets closer to the theoretical probability.

Question 19.
LOGIC
At a restaurant,30% of customers donate to charity in exchange for a coupon. Estimate the probability that it will take at least four customers to find one who donates.
Answer:

Probability Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
In an Internet contest, gift cards and bicycles are given as prizes in the ratio 9 : 1. Estimate the probability that at least two of three randomly selected winners receive bicycles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cc 1
Understand the problem.
You know the ratio of gift cards to bicycles awarded in the contest. You want to find the probability that atleast two of three randomly selected winners receive bicycles.
Make a plan.
Use the ratio to find the theoretical probability that a randomly selected winner receives a bicycle. Then use a simulation involving 50 randomly generated three-digit numbers to estimate the probability that at least two of three randomly selected winners receive bicycles.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.

Answer:

Question 2.
A board game uses the spinner shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cc 2
a. Use theoretical probability to predict the number of times you will spin a number greater than or equal to 8 in 30 spins.
b. You play the game and record the results of 30 spins. Find the percent error of your prediction in part(a).
Answer:
a. Theoretical probability = number of favorable/ outcomes by total number of outcomes
Total number of outcomes = 10
The probability of spinning a number greater than or equal to 8 P(S) = 3/8 = 0.375
b. The experimental probability =
P(S) = 12/30= 0.4

Question 3.
The tiles shown are placed in a bag. You randomly select one of the tiles, return it to the bag, and then randomly select another tile. What is the probability that the product of the numbers on the tiles selected is greater than zero? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cc 3
Answer:
Total number of tiles = 5
= 5×5 = 25 total number of outcomes
The probability that the product of the numbers on the tiles selected is greater than zero
P(Z) = 2/ 25
They are {1 x 2= 2 } and {2x 1 = 2 }
Therefore the probability of the product of the numbers on the tiles selected is greater than zero = 2/25 = 0.08

Performance Task

Fair and Unfair Carnival Games
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Massively Multi player Rock Paper Scissors.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cc 4

Probability Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 1

Graphic Organizers

You can use a Four Square to organize information about a concept. Each of the four squares can be a category, such as definition, vocabulary, example, non-example, words, algebra, table, numbers, visual, graph,or equation. Here is an example of a Four Square for probability.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 2
Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 3
1. favorable outcomes
2. relative frequency
3. experimental probability
4. theoretical probability
5. Fundamental Counting Principle
6. compound event
7. simulation

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 4

7.1 Probability (pp. 283–290)
Learning Target: Understand how the probability of an event indicates its likelihood.

You randomly choose one toy race car.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 5
Question 1.
How many possible outcomes are there?
Answer:
There are 5 green cars , one blue car and one red car
So the possible outcomes are 7
They are {green , red, blue}

Question 2.
What are the favorable outcomes of choosing a car that is not green?
Answer: 2
Number of green cars = 5
Number of cars that is not green = 2
They are {blue , red}
Therefore the possible outcomes of choosing a car that is not green = 2

Question 3.
In how many ways can choosing a green car occur?
Answer: 5
Number of green cars = 5
So, choosing a green car can occur in 5 ways
You spin the spinner. (a) Find the number of ways the event can occur. (b) Find the favorable outcomes of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 6
Question 4.
spinning a 1
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
numbered with two 1s , three 2s and three 3s
{1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3}
The number of favorable outcomes of spinning a 1 = 2
Total number of outcomes = 8
Consider O be the event of spinning a 1
Probability P(O) = Number of favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes
P(O) = 2/8 =1/4
So, the probability of spinning a 1 is 0.25

Question 5.
spinning a 3
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
numbered with two 1s , three 2s and three 3s
{1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3}
The number of favorable outcomes of spinning a 3 = 3
Total number of outcomes = 8
Consider T be the event of spinning a 3
Probability P(T) = Number of favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes
P(T) = 3/8 = 0.37
Therefore, the probability of spinning a 3 = 0.37

Question 6.
spinning an odd number
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
numbered with two 1s , three 2s and three 3s
{1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3}
The number of favorable outcomes of spinning an odd number  = 5
They are {1,1,3,3,3}
Total number of outcomes = 8
Consider O be the event of spinning an odd number
Probability P(O) = Number of favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes
P(O) = 5/8 =0.62
Therefore , the probability of spinning an odd number = 0.62

Question 7.
spinning an even number
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
numbered with two 1s , three 2s and three 3s
{1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3}
The number of favorable outcomes of spinning an even number = 3
They are {2,2,2}
Total number of outcomes = 8
Consider E be the event of spinning an even number
Probability P(E) = Number of favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes
P(E) = 3/8 = 0.37

Question 8.
spinning a number greater than 0
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
numbered with two 1s , three 2s and three 3s
{1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3}
The number of favorable outcomes of spinning a number greater than 0 =8
They are {1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3}
Total number of outcomes = 8
Consider S be the event of spinning a 1
Probability P(S) = Number of favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes
P(S) = 8/8 =1

Question 9.
spinning a number less than 3
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
numbered with two 1s , three 2s and three 3s
{1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3}
The number of favorable outcomes of spinning a number less than a 3 = 5
They are {1,1,2,2,2}
Total number of outcomes = 8
Consider T be the event of spinning a number less than a 3
Probability P(T) = Number of favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes
P(T) = 5/8 = 0.62

Describe the likelihood of the event given its probability.
Question 10.
There is a 0% chance of snow in July for Florida.
Answer:
Given , the probability = 0
So the likelihood of the event is impossible

Question 11.
The probability that you are called on to answer a question in class is \(\frac{1}{25}\).
Answer:

Question 12.
There is an 85% chance the bus is on time.
Answer:
Given, 85% chance = 0.85
So, the probability is more likely to happen

Question 13.
The probability of flipping heads on a coin is 0.5.
Answer:
Given 0.5 = 50%
So, the probability of flipping heads is may or may not occur

Question 14.
During a basketball game, you record the number of rebounds from missed shots for each team. (a)Describe the likelihood that your team rebounds the next missed shot. (b) How many rebounds should your team expect to have in 15 missed shots?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 7
Answer:
a.Total number of shots = 10
Consider M be the event of rebounds the next missed shot
The probability  = Number of missed shots / total number of trails
P(M) = 7/10 = 0.7
Therefore , the likelihood that your team rebounds the next missed shot is likely to happen

b.Total number of shots = 15
Consider S be the event of rebounds the your team misses the shot
probability P(S) = Number of rebounds / total number of trails
P(S) = 7/15 = 0.46
Therefore, the likelihood that the rebounds are expected to happen in 15 shots is not likely to occur

7.2 Experimental and Theoretical Probability (pp. 291–298)
Learning Target :Develop probability models using experimental and theoretical probability.

The bar graph shows the results of spinning a spinner 100 times. Use the bar graph to find the experimental probability of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 15
Question 15.
spinning a 2
Answer: 0.18

Explanation :
Total number of spins = 100
The number of times 2 spun = 18
Experimental probability = Number of times an event occur / Total number of spins
Consider T be the event of spinning a 2
P(T) = 18/100 =0.18
Therefore , experimental probability of spinning a 2 = 0.18

Question 16.
spinning an even number
Answer: 0.39

Explanation:
Total number of spins = 100
Number of even numbers = 2
They are {2,4}
The number of times 2 spun = 18
The number of times 4 spun = 21
Total : 18+21 = 39
Experimental probability = Number of times an event occur / Total number of spins
Consider T be the event of spinning an even number
P(T) = 38/100 =0.39
Therefore , experimental probability of spinning an even number = 0.39

Question 17.
not spinning a 5
Answer: 0.81
Total number of spins = 100
Number of numbers other than 5 = 4
They are {1,2,3,4}
The number of times 1 spun = 20
The number of times 2 spun = 18
The number of times 3 spun = 22
The number of times 4 spun = 21
Total : 81
Experimental probability = Number of times an event occur / Total number of spins
Consider F be the event of not spinning a 5
P(F) = 81/100 =0.81
Therefore , experimental probability of not spinning a 5 = 0.81

Question 18.
spinning a number less than 3
Answer:
Total number of spins = 100
The numbers less than 3 = 2
They are {1,2}
The number of times 1 spun = 20
The number of times 2 spun = 18
Total : 18 + 20 = 38
Experimental probability = Number of times an event occur / Total number of spins
Consider T be the event of spinning a number less than 3
P(T) = 38/100 =0.38
Therefore , experimental probability of spinning a number less than 3  = 0.38

Question 19.
In Exercise 16, how does the experimental probability of spinning an even number compare with the theoretical probability?
Answer:

Use the spinner to find the theoretical probability of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 20
Question 20.
spinning blue
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
They are numbered with three 1 s ,one 2 ,one 4 ,one 6 , one 8 , and one 10
And colored in 2 red , 2 blue , 2 purple and 2 orange in color
Consider , B be the event of spinning a blue
P(B) = 2/8
P(B) = 0.25

Question 21.
spinning a 1
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
They are numbered with three 1 s ,one 2 ,one 4 ,one 6 , one 8 , and one 10
Consider , O be the event of spinning a 1
P(O) = 3/8
P(O) = 0.37

Question 22.
spinning an even number
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
They are numbered with three 1 s ,one 2 ,one 4 ,one 6 , one 8 , and one 10
Total number of even numbers = 5
They are {2,4,6,8,10}
Consider , E be the event of spinning an even number
P(E) = 5/8
P(E) = 0.62

Question 23.
spinning a 4
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 8 equal parts
They are numbered with three 1 s ,one 2 ,one 4 ,one 6 , one 8 , and one 10
Consider , F be the event of spinning a blue
P(F) = 1/8
P(F) = 0.125

Question 24.
The theoretical probability of choosing a red grape from a bag of grapes is \(\frac{2}{9}\). There are 8 red grapes in the bag. How many grapes are in the bag?
Answer:
Given theoretical probability = 2/9
Number of red grapes = 8
Total number of grapes = x
8/x = 2/9
72 = 2x
x = 72/2
x = 35

Question 25.
The theoretical probability of choosing Event A is \(\frac{2}{7}\). What is the theoretical probability of not choosing Event A? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

7.3 Compound Events (pp. 299–306)
Learning Target: Find sample spaces and probabilities of compound events.

Question 26.
You have 6 bracelets and 15 necklaces. Find the number of ways you can wear one bracelet and one necklace.
Answer:
Number of bracelets = 6
Number of necklaces = 15
According to fundamental counting principle,
a x b = 6 x 15 = 90
Therefore, In 90 ways you can wear one bracelet and one necklace

Question 27.
Use a tree diagram to find how many different home theater systems you can make from 6 DVD players,8 TVs, and 3 brands of speakers.
Answer:
Number of DVDs = 6
Number of TVs = 8
Number of brands of speaker = 3
Total number of outcomes = 6 x 8 x 3 = 144

Question 28.
A red, green, and blue book are on a shelf. You randomly pick one of the books. Without replacing the first book, you choose another book. What is the probability that you picked the red and blue book?
Answer:
Number of books in shelf = 3

Question 29.
You flip two coins and roll a number cube. What is the probability of flipping two tails and rolling an even number?
Answer:
number of total outcomes for coin = 2
The probability of flipping tails P(T ) = 1/2
For two coins , probability of flipping tails = 1/2 x 2 = 1/4
The number of total outcomes for 6
even numbers = {2,4,6}
The probability for flipping an even number = 3/6 = 1/2
So, the probability of flipping two tails and rolling an even number
= 1/4 x 1/2 = 1/8

Question 30.
Describe a compound event that has a probability between 50% and 80%.
Answer:

Question 31.
Your science teacher sets up six flasks. Two of the flasks contain water and four of the flasks contain hydrogen peroxide. A reaction occurs when you add yeast to hydrogen peroxide. You add yeast to two of the flasks. What is the probability that at least one reaction will occur?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 31
Answer:

7.4 Simulations (pp. 307–312)
Learning Target: Design and use simulations to find probabilities of compound events.

Question 32.
You select a marble from two different bags. You have a 30% chance of choosing a blue marble from the first bag and a 70% chance of choosing a blue marble from the second bag. Design and use a simulation to estimate the probability that you choose a blue marble from both bags.
Answer:
Given , the chance of choosing blue marble from first bag =30%
The chance of choosing blue marble from second bag = 70%
82  4  90  96  18  65  11  71  97  53
48  63 32  54  52  17  14  5  83  50
61  36  10  81 58  84  9  80  94  95
15  42  2  45  68  64  33 38  12  60
35  16  21  99  59  55  22  20  37  87
Let the digits 1 through 3 in the tens place represents choosing blue marble from first bag
the digits 1 and 7 in the ones place represent choosing blue marble from second bag
let P(S) be the event choosing both blue marbles from both bags = 18/50
Therefore, the experimental probability = 0.36 = 36%

Question 33.
A cereal company is including a prize in each box. There are 5 different prizes, all of which are equally likely.
a. Describe a simulation involving 50 trials that you can use to model the prizes in the next 3 boxes of cereal you buy.
b. Use your simulation to find the experimental probability that all three boxes contain a different prize.
Answer:
Given ,
There are 5 different prizes, all of which are equally likely.

Question 34.
In the past month, your cell phone has lost its entire charge on 40% of days. Design and use a simulation to estimate the experimental probability that your cell phone loses its entire charge on exactly 2 of the next 5 days.
Answer:
Given,
Cell phone has lost its entire charge on 40%
Let the numbers 1 through 40 represents possible
6  79  3  23  82
84  67  14  59 88
11  47  26 68  18
 69  91  51  56  42
 15  99  58  92  62
 13  41  55  17  35
 28  54  85  97  65
 98  57  71  73  38
 89  90  87  39  72
 19  8  21  45  31
There are 2 or more successes in trails {1,3,6,10 }
The experimental probability that your cell phone loses its entire charge on exactly 2 of the next 5 days = 4/50
P(S) = 0.08 = 8%

Question 35.
You and your friends form a team in gym class. You have an 80% chance of winning a game of basketball and a 10% chance of winning a game of soccer. Design and use a simulation involving 50 randomly generated numbers to estimate the probability of winning both games.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 7 Probability cr 35
Answer:
Given , The chance of winning a game of basket ball = 80%
The probability of winning a soccer game = 10%
33  91  74  87  53  67  63  9  47  52  17  8
40  58  100  11  44  20  49  72  60  66  79  51
69  73  76  43  77  97  2  93  12  36  6  86  92 59
 84  29  15  85  88  96  32  38  64  71  98  34
Let the digits 1 through 8 in the tens place represents winning a basketball
Let digits 1 and 2 in the ones place represent winning a soccer game.
let P(S) be the event of winning both the games = 7/50
Therefore, the experimental probability = 0.14 = 14%

Probability Practice Test

You randomly choose one game piece. (a) Find the number of ways the event can occur. (b) Find the favorable outcomes of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability pt 1
Question 1.
choosing green
Answer:
Number of game pieces = 10
In which , 3 are yellow , 2 blue , 2 red and 1 are green in color
Probability P(G)= Number of favorable outcomes / Total number of outcomes
Consider G be the event of choosing green
P(G) = 1 / 10= 0..1
Therefore, the probability of choosing green = 0.1

Question 2.
choosing not yellow
Answer:
Number of game pieces = 10
In which , 3 are yellow , 2 blue , 2 red and 1 are green in color
Number of not yellow colors = 5
They are { blue , green , red }
P(N) = Number of favorable outcomes / Total umber of outcomes
P(N) = 5/10 = 0.5
Therefore, the probability of not choosing yellow= 0.5

Find the sample space and the total number of possible outcomes.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability pt 3
Answer:
Number of SPF = 5
Number of types = 3
The total number of outcomes = 5 x 3 =15
Therefore number of possible outcomes = 15
{10,lotion} {15,lotion} {30, lotion} {45, lotion} {50, lotion}
{10, spray } {15, spray} {30, spray } {45, spray} {50, spray}
{10,gel} {15, gel} {30 , gel} {45 ,gel} {50 , gel}

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability pt 4
Answer:
Number of types = 4
Number of colors = 3
Total number of possible outcomes = 4 x3 = 12
{Basic display, Black  } {Basic display, white } {Basic display , silver}
{Scientific, Black} {Scientific, white} {Scientific , silver}
{Graphing ,black } {Graphing , white} {Graphing , silver}

Use the bar graph to find the experimental probability of the event.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability pt 5
Question 5.
rolling a 1 or a 2
Answer:
Total Number of rolls = 90
The number of times 1 rolled = 12
The number of times 2 rolled = 18
Total = 30
The probability of rolling a 1 or a 2 =
P(R) = 30/90
P(R) = 0.33

Question 6.
rolling an odd number
Answer:
The number of odd numbers = 3
They are {1,3,5}
Number of times 1 rolled = 12
Number of times 3 rolled = 14
Number of times 5 rolled =  16
Total : 12 + 14 + 16 =42
Consider O be the event of spinning an odd number
P(O) = 42/90 = 0.46

Question 7.
not rolling a 5
Answer:
The total number of rolls = 90
The number of  numbers other than 5 are =5
They are 1,2,3,4,6
The number of times 1 rolled = 12
The number of times 2 rolled = 18
The number of times 3 rolled = 14
The number of times 4 rolled = 17
The number of times 6 rolled = 13
Total = 74
The probability of rolling not 5 = 74/ 90
P(G) = 0.82

Question 8.
rolling a number less than 7
Answer:
The total number of rolls = 90
The number of  numbers less than 7 are = 6
They are 1,2,3,4,5,6
The number of times 1 rolled = 12
The number of times 2 rolled = 18
The number of times 3 rolled = 14
The number of times 4 rolled = 17
The number of times 5 rolled = 16
The number of times 6 rolled = 13
Total = 90
The probability of rolling a number less than 7 = 90/ 90
P(L) =1

Use the spinner to find the theoretical probability 93of the event(s).
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability pt 9
Question 9.
spinning an even number
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 9 equal parts
Numbered as {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9}
So, total number of outcomes = 9
Number of even numbers = 4
They are {2,4,6,8}
Theoretical probability = Number of favorable outcomes / Total number of outcomes
Consider , E be the event of choosing an even number
P(E) = 4/ 9 = 0.44
Therefore , the probability for spinning an even number =0.44

Question 10.
spinning a 1 and then a 2
Answer:
The spinner is divided into 9 equal parts
Numbered as {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9}
So, total number of outcomes = 9
The probability of spinning 1 = 1/9
Then the probability of spinning 2 = 1/9
Total probability of the event spinning a 1 and then 2 = 1/9 x 1/9
Total P(B) = 1/ 81
Therefore , the probability of spinning a 1 and then 2 = 0.012

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability pt 11
Question 11.
You randomly choose one of the pens shown. What is the theoretical probability of choosing a black pen?
Answer:
Theoretical probability = Number of favorable outcomes / Total number of outcomes
Total number of pens = 5
Number of black pens = 2
Consider B be the event of choosing a black pen
P(B) = 2/5 = 0.4
Therefore, the theoretical probability of choosing a black pen = 0.4

Question 12.
You randomly choose one of the pens shown. Your friend randomly chooses one of the remaining pens. What is the probability that you and your friend both choose a blue pen?
Answer:
Total number of pens = 5
Number of blue pens = 2
The probability that you and your friend both choose a blue pen
P(B) = 2/5
P(B) = 0.4

Question 13.
There is an 80% chance of a thunderstorm on Saturday. Describe the likelihood that there is not a thunderstorm on Saturday.
Answer:
Given probability 80% = 0.8
Not thunder storm probability = 20 % = 0.2
The likelihood of the event is not likely to happen

Probability Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability cp 1
Question 1.
A school athletic director asked each athletic team member to name his or her favorite professional sports team. The results are below:

  • D.C.United: 3
  • Florida Panthers: 8
  • Jacksonville Jaguars: 26
  • Jacksonville Sharks: 7
  • Miami Dolphins: 22
  • Miami Heat: 15
  • Miami Marlins: 20
  • Minnesota Lynx: 4
  • New YorkKnicks: 5
  • Orlando Magic: 18
  • Tampa Bay Buccaneers: 17
  • Tampa Bay Lightning: 12
  • Tampa Bay Rays: 28
  • Other: 6

One athletic team member is picked at random. What is the likelihood that this team member’s favorite professional sports team is not located in Florida?
A. certain
B. likely, but not certain
C. unlikely, but not impossible
D. impossible
Answer: B
13/14 = 0.92
The likelihood of the event is likely, but not certain

Question 2.
Each student in your class voted for his or her favorite day of the week. Their votes are shown in the circle graph:
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability cp 2
A student from your class is picked at random. What is the probability that this student’s favorite day of the week is Sunday?
Answer:
Total number of students =30
Total number of Sunday = 6
The probability of that this student’s favorite day of the week is Sunday
P(S) = 6/30
= 0.2

Question 3.
What value makes the equation 11 – 3x = – 7 true?
F. – 6
G. \(-\frac{4}{3}\)
H. 6
I. 54
Answer:  F

Explanation:
11 – 3x = -7
Consider the value of x = -6
L.H.S  = 11-3X
11 – 3 (-6)
11 – 18
= -4
L.H.S = R.H.S
Therefore, the value of x =-6

Question 4.
Your friend solved the proportion in the box below.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability cp 4
What should your friend do to correct the error that he made?
A. Add 40 to 16 and 27 to p.
B. Subtract 16 from 40 and 27 from p.
C. Multiply 16 by 27 and p by 40.
D. Divide 16 by 27 and p by 40.
Answer: C
Multiply 16 by 27 and p by 40

Question 5.
Which value is a solution of the inequality?
3 – 2y < 7
F. – 6
G. – 3
H. – 2
I. – 1
Answer: H
3- 2y < 7 =0
3-2y >7
-2y > 7-3
-2y >4
y > -4/2
y > -2

Question 6.
A spinner is divided into eight equal sections, as shown. You spin the spinner twice. What is the probability that the arrow will stop in a yellow section both times?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability cp 6
Answer:
The spinner is divided 8 equal parts
In which , 3 are red , 2 are blue, 2 are yellow and 1 part is in pink color
so the probability of landing on yellow would be
P(Y) = 3/8 on first spun.
Therefore, for spinning the spinner twice then the probability of landing it on yellow would be
P(Y) = (3/8)/2
P(Y) =3/16

Question 7.
A pair of running shoes is on sale for 25% off the original price. Which price is closest to the sale price of the running shoes?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability cp 7
A. $93
B. $99
C. $124
D. $149
Answer: A

Explanation :
Original price = $122.76
Percent of discount = 25% = 0.25
The amount of discount :
Amount of discount = Discount x original price
= 0.25 x $125
= $30.39
Sale price :
Sale price = Original price – discount
= $122.76 – $30.39
= $92.07
It is very close to the sale price of the running shoes = $ 93

Question 8.
The value of a baseball card was $6 when it was sold. The value of this card is now $15. What is the percent increase in the value of the card?
F. 40%
G. 90%
H. 150%
I. 250%
Answer: H
Given,
Original price of the basket ball  = $6
New price = $15
The original price increases so, the percent of change is called percent of increase
Percent of increase = New price – original price/ Original price
On substituting ,
= 15 – 6/ 6
= 9 / 6
=3/2
On multiplying with 100
= 3/2 x 100
= 150%
Therefore , the percent increase in the value of the card = 150%

Question 9.
You roll a number cube twice. You want to roll two even numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 7 Probability cp 9
Part A Find the number of favorable outcomes and the number of possible outcomes of each roll.
Part B Find the probability of rolling two even numbers. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Part A :
The even numbers on a number cube are 2, 4, and 6
The favorable outcomes for 2 are =3
They are : 2 and 2 , 2 and 4 , 2 and 6
The favorable outcomes for 4 are =3
They are : 4 and 2 , 4 and 4 , 4 and 6
The favorable outcomes for 6 are =3
They are : 6 and 2 , 6 and 4 , 6 and 6
So,  total number favorable outcomes = 9
There are 6 outcomes for each cube so there are 6(6) = 36 total outcomes.

Part B :
There are 9 favorable outcomes of a total of 36 outcomes
So, the probability is 9/36 = 1/4

Question 10.
You put $600 into an account. The account earns 5% simple interest per year. What is the balance after 4 years?
A. $120
B. $720
C. $1800
D. $12,600
Answer: B
Simple interest = principle x annual rate of interest x Time
I = P x r x t
5% = 0.5
I = 600 x 0.05 x 4
I = $120
The interest earned = $120
The balance after 4 years = principle + Interest
= 600 + 120
=$720

Question 11.
You are comparing the prices of four boxes of cereal. Two of the boxes contain free extra cereal.

  • Box F costs $3.59 and contains 16 ounces.
  • Box G costs $3.79 and contains 16 ounces, plus an additional 10% for free.
  • Box H costs $4.00 and contains 500 grams.
  • Box  I costs $4.69 and contains 500 grams, plus an additional 20% for free.

Which box has the least unit cost?
F. Box F
G. Box G
H. Box H
I. Box I
Answer: Box G

Explanation :
Box F
The unit cost of box F = 3.59/16
The unit cost = $0.224 per ounces
Box G
Given 10% free
Which means, 10% = 16.01 = 0.6 ounces
The unit cost box G = $3.79 / 16 +0.6
=$0.215 ounces
Box H
Given, 500 grams
Which means , 500/28.35 = 17. 64 ounces

The unit cost for box H = $4.00/ 17.64
= 0.227 ounces
Box I
Given 500 grams and 20 % additional
Which means , 500/28.35 = 17. 64 ounces
20% = 17.64 .02 = 3.53 ounces
The unit cost = 4.69/ 17.64+3.54
= 0.222 ounces
Therefore, Box G has the least unit cost .
Final Words:
We wish the information prevailed here is helpful for all the students of grade 7. For any doubts post the comments in the below comment section. We will try to clarify your doubts as early as possible.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths

Big Ideas Math 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths answer key is useful for scholars who are preparing for various types of examinations and can download this pdf for free of cost. In this chapter, each and every question was explained in detail which helps students to understand easily. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths explains different types of questions on Measuring and comparing lengths.

Big Ideas Math 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths

In this chapter, we can see different topics on Measuring and Comparing, Order Objects by Length, Compare Lengths Indirectly, Measure Lengths, Measure More Lengths, Solve Compare Problems Involving Length, etc. Those topics were being set up by the mathematical professionals as indicated by the most recent release. Look down this page to get the answers to all the inquiries. Click on the links to look at the subjects shrouded in this chapter Measuring and comparing lengths.

Lesson 1 Order Objects by Length

Lesson 2 Compare Lengths Indirectly

Lesson 3 Measure Lengths

Lesson 4 Measure More Lengths

Lesson 5 Solve Compare Problems Involving Length

Performance Task

Measure and Compare Lengths Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
longer
shorter

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 1
Answer:
The first image longer and the second image is shorter.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-1

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to identify the words. Find each word in the word search.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-2

Lesson 10.1 Order Objects by Length

Explore and Grow

Draw an object that is shorter than the pencil and longer than the crayon.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 3

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-5
Chalk is smaller than crayon.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Order from longest to shortest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 5
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Purple, Pink, Blue.

Explanation:
In the above image, the purple color tube is the longest after that the pink color tube is the longest, and the blue color tube is the shortest.

Question 2.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 6
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Yellow, Green, Black.

Explanation:
In the above image, the yellow brush is the longest, and then the green brush is the longest. The black brush is the shortest.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Order from longest to shortest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 7
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Purple crayon, Red crayon, Green crayon.

Explanation:
In the above image, the Purple crayon is the longest, and then the red crayon is the longest. The green crayon is the shortest.

Question 4.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 8
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
The order from shortest to longest is, Pink is the shortest, green is the largest, and blue is the longest.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that the order from shortest to longest is, Pink is the shortest, green is the largest, and blue is the longest.

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend ordered from shortest to longest. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 9
  Yellow   ,          green  ,           red   
Answer:
No, my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
No, my friend is not correct. He represented the order from longest to shortest. In the above image, the red chill is the shortest, and the green chili is the longest. The black brush is the shortest.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your yarn is longer than Newton’s. Descartes’s is longer than Newton’s and shorter than yours. Who has the longest yarn?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 10
Draw a picture:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 11
Who has the longest yarn?
You             Newton      Descartes
Answer:
My yarn is the longest yarn.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-img-1
As my yarn is longer than Newton’s and Descartes’s is longer than Newton’s and shorter than mine. So the longest yarn is mine, and the largest yarn is Descartes. The shortest yarn is Newton’s.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
Descartes’s pencil is shorter than Newton’s. Yours is shorter than Newton’s and longer than Descartes’s. Who has the shortest pencil?
Draw a picture:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 12
Who has the shortest pencil?
Descartes        Newton           You
Answer: Your pencil is shorted among the three.

Order Objects by Length Practice 10.1

Order from longest to shortest.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 13
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
The order of the bats from longest to the shortest is
Bat 2, Bat 1, Bat 3.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see the longest bat is bat 2 and then the largest bat is bat 1. The shortest bat is bat 3.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 14
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
The order of the colors from longest to shortest is
Gold, Blue, Red.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that the longest color is gold and then the largest color is blue. The shortest color is red.

Question 3.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 15
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
The order from shortest to longest is
Vine 3, Vine 1, Vine 2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that the shortest vine is vine 3 after that the largest vine is vine 1 and the longest vine is Vine 2.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Use the clues to match. The red pencil is longer than the yellow pencil. The shortest pencil is blue.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 16
Answer:
The order from shortest to longest is
Blue pencil, Yellow pencil, Red pencil.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-16
As by the given clue, the Blue pencil is the shortest pencil, the Yellow pencil is the largest pencil, and the Red pencil is the longest pencil.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Your jump rope is longer than Newton’s. Descartes’s is longer than Newton’s and shorter than yours. Who has the longest jump rope?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 17
Who has the longest jump rope?
You           Newton        Descartes
Answer:
My rope is the longest jump rope.

Explanation:
As my jump rope is longer than Newton’s and Descartes’s jump rope longer than Newton’s and Newton’s jump rope is shorter than yours. So my jump rope is Longer, Newton’s jump rope is the Largest, and the shortest rope is Descartes.

Review & Refresh

Compare.

Question 6.
25 ○ 52
Answer:
25 > 52.

Explanation:
Given that to compare 25 and 52. So we can see that 52 is greater than 25.

Question 7.
41 ○ 44
Answer:
41 > 44.

Explanation:
Given that to compare 41 and 44. So we can see that 44 is greater than 41.

Lesson 10.2 Compare Lengths Indirectly

Explore and Grow

Use string to compare the keys. Which key is longer?
How do you know?

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 18

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 19
Answer:
Key 1 is longer than Key 2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that key 1 is longer than key 2.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 20
Answer:
The Pen is longer than Eraser.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-20
In the above image, we can see that the Pen is longer than the Easer.

Question 2.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 21
Answer:

Explanation:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 22
Answer:
Object 2 is shorter than object 1.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-22
In the above image, we can see that object two is shorter than object 1.

Question 4.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 23
Answer:
The spoon is longer than the brush.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-23
We can see in the above image, that the spoon is longer than the brush. So we will round off the spoon.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER
Which object is longer? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 24
Answer:
The book’s shelf is longer than the key.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-24
As we can see in the above image, that the books shelf is longer than the key. So we will circle the books shelf.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A green crayon is shorter than a blue crayon. The blue crayon is shorter than a yellow crayon. Is the green crayon longer than or shorter than the yellow crayon?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 25
Draw a picture:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 26
Longer              Shorter
Answer:
The green crayon is shorter than the yellow crayon.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-img-1-1
Given that green crayon is shorter than blue crayon, and blue crayon is shorter than yellow crayon. So green crayon is shorter than yellow crayon.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
A yellow ribbon is longer than a pink ribbon. The pink ribbon is longer than a blue ribbon. Is the yellow ribbon longer than or shorter than the blue ribbon?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 27
Draw a picture:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 28
Longer            Shorter
Answer:
The Yellow ribbon is longer than the blue ribbon.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths- img 2
Given that yellow ribbon is longer than pink ribbon, and the pink ribbon is longer than a blue ribbon. So yellow ribbon is longer than the blue ribbon.

Compare Lengths Indirectly Practice 10.2

Question 1.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 29
Answer:
Object 1 is longer than object 2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that object one is longer than image two. So we will circle object one.

Question 2.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 30
Answer:
Object two is shorter than object one.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-30
In the above image, we can see that object two is shorter than object one. So we will circle object two.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER
Use the clues to match.
The blue string is longer than the orange string.
The purple string is shorter than the orange string.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 31
Answer:
The order of the strings from longest to shortest is
Blue string, Orange string, Purple string.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-31
Given that the blue string is longer than the orange string, and the purple string is shorter than the orange string.
So the order of the strings is the blue string is longer, the orange string is the largest and the purple string is the shortest.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
A kayak is shorter than a canoe. The canoe is shorter than a paddle board. Is the kayak longer than or shorter than the paddle board?

Longer             Shorter
Answer:
The Kayak is shorter than the paddle board.

Explanation:
Given that the Kayak is shorter than a canoe, and the canoe is shorter than a paddle board. So the Kayak is shorter than the paddle board.

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Circle the objects that have capacity as an attribute.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 32
Answer:
The objects which have the capacity to store are circled in the below image.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-32
The circled items have the capacity to store. As we can see that the lid jar is used to store any items, and chalk box is used to store chalk pieces, and glass is used to store water or any liquids, and a glue bottle is used to store glue. So these items have the capacity to store. And the remaining things do not have that much capacity to store.

Lesson 10.3 Measure Lengths

Explore and Grow

Find and measure the objects shown in your classroom.

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 33

Answer:
The length of the table is about two colored red tiles.

Explanation:
The table is measured by using the colored red tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored red tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 34

Answer:
The length of the pencil is about one tile.

Explanation:
The pencil is measured by using the colored red tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the pencil is one colored red tile, which means one unit. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Show and Grow

Measure

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 35

about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about one tile.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about one colored tile, which means one unit. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 36

about ___________ color tile

Answer:
The length of the object is about five colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about five colored tiles, which means five units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Measure

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 37

about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about four colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 38

about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about three colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about three colored tiles, which means three units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 5.
MP Precision
Which picture shows the correct way to measure the straw?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 39
Answer:
The red color tiles are the correct way to measure the straw.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that the correct way to measure the straw is the red color tiles.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Will the scissors fit inside a pencil case that is 7 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 40
Circle:      Yes     No
Tell how you know:
Answer:
Yes, the scissors can fit inside a pencil case that is 7 color tiles long.

Explanation:
Yes, the scissors can fit inside a pencil case. As the length of the scissors is four colored tiles. As the scissors are measured by using the colored tile. And each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the scissors is about four colored tiles, which means four units. And the pencil case is 7 colored tiles long. So the scissors can fit. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
Will the cell phone fit inside a case that is 5 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 41
Circle:     Yes     No
Tell how you know:
Answer:
No, the cell phone cannot fit inside a case of 5 color tiles long.

Explanation:
No, the cell phone cannot fit inside a case of 5 color tiles long. As the length of the cell phone is six colored tiles. And the cell phone is measured by using the colored tile. And each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the cell phone is about six colored tiles, which means six units. And cannot fit inside 5 colored tiles long. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Measure Lengths Practice 10.3

Measure.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 42
about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about four colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 43
about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about two colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about two colored tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 44
about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the glue stick is about three colored tiles.

Explanation:
The glue stick is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the glue stick is about three colored tiles, which means three units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 4.
MP Reasoning
The green yarn is about 3 color tiles long. How long is the blue yarn?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 45
about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the blue yarn is about six color tiles.

Explanation:
Given that the length of the green yarn is three color tiles long, so we should find the length of the blue yarn. To measure the length of the blue yarn, we will take the colored tiles without gaps or any overlaps between them. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the blue yarn is about six colored tiles, which means six units.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Will the gift card fit inside an envelope that is 8 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 46
Circle:      Yes      No
Tell how you know:
Answer:
Yes, the gift can fit inside an envelope that is 8 color tiles long.

Explanation:
Yes, the gif card can fit inside an envelope that is 8 color tiles long. As the length of the gift card is four colored tiles. And the gift card is measured by using the colored tile. And each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the gift is about four colored tiles, which means four units. And the envelope is 8 colored tiles long. So the gift card can fit. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Complete the fact family.
7 + 3 = _________                                     __________ – 3 = 7
_________ + _________ = _________             _________ – 7 = _________
Answer:
7 + 3 is 10,
3 + 7 is 10
10 – 3 is 7,
10 –  7 is 3.

Explanation:
As a fact family represents a group of math facts, equations, which are created by using the same set of digits. This fact family defines the relation between the three numbers which are involved. In addition or subtraction in a fact family, there will be four addition and subtractions will be created using these three numbers. So
7 + 3 is 10,
3 + 7 is 10
10 – 3 is 7,
10 –  7 is 3.

Lesson 10.4 Measure More Lengths

Explore and Grow

Find and measure the objects shown in your classroom two ways. What do you notice?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 47

Answer:
The length of the table is about two colored red tiles and the length of the table which is measured using a paper clip is one paper clip.

Explanation:
The table is measured by using the colored red tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored red tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the table with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the table using the paper clip is one paper clip, which means one unit. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the table will be two color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the table will be one paper clip. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 48
Answer:
The length of the pencil is about two colored red tiles and the length of the pencil which is measured using a paper clip is one paper clip.

Explanation:
The pencil is measured by using the colored red tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored red tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the table with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the pencil using the paper clip is one paper clip, which means one unit. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the table will be two color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be one paper clip. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Show and Grow

Measure

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 49
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the brush is about four colored tiles and the length of the brush which is measured using a paper clip is two paper clips.

Explanation:
The brush is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the brush with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the brush using the paper clip is one paper clip, which means one unit. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the table will be two color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the brush will be one paper clip. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 50
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the skating board is about two colored tiles and the length of the pencil which is measured using a paper clip is one paper clip.

Explanation:
The skating board is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the skating board with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the skating board using the paper clip is one paper clip, which means one unit. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the skating board will be two color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be one paper clip. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Measure.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 51
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the object is about six colored tiles and the length of the pencil which is measured using a paper clip is three paper clips.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is six colored tiles, which means six units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the table with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the object using the paper clip is three paper clips, which means three units. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the object will be six color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be three paper clips. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 52
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:

The length of the sunscreen lotion bottle is about four colored tiles and the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle which is measured using a paper clip is two paper clips.

Explanation:
The sunscreen lotion bottle is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle is four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the sunscreen lotion bottle with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle using the paper clip is two paper clips, which means two units. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle will be four color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle will be two paper clips. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the pencil is more paper clips long than color tiles. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 53
Answer:
No, my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
No, my friend is not correct. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So my friend is not correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your guitar is 33 color tiles long. Is your guitar more than or less than 33 paper clips long?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 54
Circle:      more than 33         less than 33
Tell how you know:
Answer:
My guitar will be less than 33 paper clips.

Explanation:
My guitar will be less than 33 paper clips. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be fewer paper clips than the color tiles.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
Your mailbox is 11 paper clips long. Is your mailbox more than or less than 11 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 55
Circle:       more than 11         less than 11
Tell how you know:
Answer:
My mailbox will have more than 11 color tiles long.

Explanation:
My mailbox will have more than 11 color tiles. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be more color tiles than the paper clips.

Measure More Lengths Practice 10.4

Measure

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 56
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the rocket is about six colored tiles and the length of the pencil which is measured using a paper clip is three paper clips.

Explanation:
The rocket is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the rocket is six colored tiles, which means six units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the rocket with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the rocket using the paper clip is three paper clips, which means three units. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the rocket will be six color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be three paper clips. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 2.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the marker is more color tiles long than paper clips. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 57
Answer:
Yes, the marker has more color tiles long than paper clips. So my friend is correct.

Explanation:
Yes, the marker has more color tiles long than paper clips. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be more color tiles than the paper clips for the marker. So my friend is correct.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Your folder is 15 color tiles long. Is your folder more than or less than 15 paper clips long?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 58
Circle:       more than 15         less than 15
Tell how you know:

Answer:
My folder will be less than 15 paper clips.

Explanation:
My folder will be less than 15 paper clips. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be fewer than 15 paper clips than the color tiles for my folder.

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
8 tigers swim.
5 tigers leave.
How many tigers are left?
___________ – ___________ = ___________ tigers
Answer:
the number of tigers left is
8 – 5= 3 tigers.

Explanation:
The number of tigers swim is 8 and the number of tigers which leave is 5 tigers. So the number of tigers left is
8 – 5= 3 tigers.

Question 5.
You have 6 pencils.
You lose 2 pencils.
How many pencils are left?
___________ – ___________ = ___________ pencils
Answer:
the remaining pencils are
6 – 2= 4 pencils.

Explanation:
The number of pencils I have is 6 pencils, and the number of pencils lost is 2 pencils. So the remaining pencils are
6 – 2= 4 pencils.

Lesson 10.5 Solve Compare Problems Involving Length

Explore and Grow

Draw a line that is 2 color tiles longer than the pencil.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 59

Draw a line that is 2 color tiles shorter than the pencil.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 59
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Your lunch box is 6 paper clips long. Your friend’s is 3 paper clips long. How many paper clips longer is your lunch box?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 60
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 61
__________ paper clips
Answer:
My lunch box is three paper clips longer than my friend’s and my friend’s lunch box is three times shorter than my friend’s lunch box.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-84-1
Given that my lunch box is six paper clips long and my friend’s lunch box is three paper clips long. So there will be three paper clips longer than my friend’s. And my friend’s lunch box is three paper clips shorter than my lunch box.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Your scarf is 10 paper clips long. Your friend’s is 7 paper clips long. How many paper clips longer is your scarf?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 62
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 63
Answer:
Myscarf is three paper clips longer than my friend’s and my friend’s scarf is three times shorter than my friend’s scarf.

Eplanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-84-2
Given that my scarf is ten paper clips long and my friend’s scarf is seven paper clips long. So there will be three paper clips longer than my friend’s. And my friend’s scarf is three paper clips shorter than my scarf.

Question 3.
Your marker is 6 color tiles long. Your friend’s is 7 color tiles long. How many tiles shorter is your marker?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 64
Answer:
My marker is one tile shorter than my friend’s marker.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-64
Given that my marker is 6 color tiles long and my friend’s marker is 7 color tiles. So my marker is 7 – 6 which is one color tile shorter than my friend’s. And my friend’s marker is one color tile longer than mine.

Question 4.
MP Reasoning
Your pencil is 4 color tiles long. Your
friend’s is 2 color tiles long. Complete the sentences.

Your pencil is ________ color tiles ________ than your friend’s.
Your friend’s pencil is ________ color tiles ________ than yours.
Answer:
Your pencil is two color tiles longer than your friend’s.
Your friend’s pencil is two color tiles shorter than yours.

Explanation:
Given that my pencil is 4 color tiles long and my friend’s pencil is 2 color tiles. So my pencil is 4 – 2 which is two color tiles longer than my friend’s. And my friend’s pencil is two color tiles shorter than mine.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend’s paper chain is 6 paper clips shorter than yours. Your chain is 12 paper clips long. How long is your friend’s?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 65
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 66
Equation:

____________ paper clips long
Answer:
My paper chain is six color tiles longer than my friend’s.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-66
Given that my paper chain is 12 color tiles long and my friend’s paper chain is 6 color tiles. So my paper chain is 12 – 6 which is six color tile shorter than my friend’s. And my friend’s paper chain is six color tile longer than mine.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Your paper airplane is 9 color tiles shorter than your friend’s. Your friend’s paper airplane is 16 color tiles long. How long is yours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 67
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 68
Answer:
Equation:

____________ color titles long
Answer:
My airplane is seven color tiles longer than my friend.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-68
Given that my airplane is 9 color tiles long and my friend’s airplane is 16 color tiles. So my marker is 16 – 9 which is seven color tile shorter than my friend’s. And my friend’s airplane is seven color tile longer than mine.

Solve Compare Problems Involving Length Practice 10.5

Question 1.
Your backpack is 15 paper clips long. Your friend’s is 12 paper clips long. How many paper clips longer is your backpack?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 69
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 70
Answer:
Three paper clips longer than my friend’s

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-61
Given that my backpack is 15 paper clips long and my friend’s backpack is 12 paper clips long. So there will be three paper clips longer than my friend’s.

Question 2.
MP Reasoning
Your baseball miff is 8 paper clips long. Your friend’s is 7 paper clips long. Complete the sentences.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 71
Your friend’s baseball mitt is ________ paper clip _________ than yours.
Your baseball mitt is _________ paper clip _________ than your friends.
Answer:
Your friend’s baseball mitt is 1 paper clip shorter than yours.
Your baseball mitt is 1 paper clip longer than your friends.

Explanation:
Given that my baseball miff is 8 paper clips long and my friend’s baseball miff is 7 paper clips. So my baseball miff is 8 – 7 which is 1 paper clip longer than my friend’s. And my friend’s baseball miff is 1 paper clip shorter than mine.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Your desk is 7 paper clips longer than your friend’s. Your friend’s desk is 14 paper clips long. How long is yours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 72
___________ paper clips long
Answer:
7 paper clips long.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-61-1
As my desk is 7 paper clips longer than my friend’s and my friend’s desk is 14 paper clips long. So my desk will be 14 – 7= 7 paper clips long.

Review & Refresh

Use the picture to complete the number bond.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 73
Answer:
By number bond, the total number of flowers is 5 + 3= 8 flowers.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-73
This number bond explains to us how the numbers are joined together and how they break down into a certain number of parts. In the above image, we can see that there are five yellow flowers and three red flowers. By number bond, we will add all the flowers. So the total number of flowers is 5 + 3= 8 flowers. Now they break down by five yellow flowers in one circle and three red flowers in another circle.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 74
Answer:
By number bond, the total number of cans is 3 + 3= 8 cans.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-74

This number bond explains to us how the numbers are joined together and how they break down into a certain number of parts. In the above image, we can see that there are three green cans and three red cans. By number bond, we will add all the cans. So the total number of cans is 3 + 3= 6 flowers. Now they break down by three green cans in one circle and three red cans in another circle.

Measure and Compare Lengths Performance Task

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 75

Question 1.
Use a piece of string to compare the routes from your house to the library, the post office, and the school.Order the routes from shortest to longest.
____________, ____________, ____________
Answer:
The order from shortest to longest is the post office, the library, and the school.

Explanation:
The route from my house to the library is three meters and the route from my house to the post office is two meters and the route from my house to the school is four meters. So the order from shortest to longest is the post office, the library, and the school.

Question 2.
Use a piece of string to measure the different routes from your house to your friend’s house. Color the route you would use to ride your bike to your friend’s house.
Answer:

Question 3.
a. The bakery is farther from your house than the pool. The park is closer to your house than the pool. Which place is closest to your house?
Park             Bakery              Pool
Answer:

b. Label the park, bakery, and pool on the map.
Answer:

Measure and Compare Lengths Chapter Practice

Order Objects by Length Homework & Practice 10.1

Question 1.
Order from longest to shortest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 76
____________, _____________, ______________
Answer:
The order from longest to shortest is
Shark, Lobster, Fish.

Explanation:
In the above image, the longest is the shark, the largest is the lobster and the shortest is the fish.

Question 2.
MP Problem Solving
A green snake is shorter than a black snake. A brown snake is shorter than a black snake. Which snake is the longest?
green        block         brown
Answer:
The black snake is the longest.

Explanation:
Given that a green snake is shorter than a black snake and a brown snake is shorter than a black snake. So the longest snake is a black snake.

Compare Lengths Indirectly Homework & Practice 10.2

Question 3.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 77
Answer:
We will circle the second image.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-77
In the above image, the longest object is the second image. So we will circle the second image.

Question 4.
Circle the longer Object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 78
Answer:
We will circle the second image.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-78
In the above image, the longest object is the second image. So we will circle the second image.

Question 5.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 79
Answer:
The first image is the shorter image.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-79
In the above image, the shorter object is the first image. So we will circle the first image.

Measure Lengths Homework & Practice 10.3

Measure

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 80
about ___________ color tiles
Answer:
The length of the object is about four colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 81
about ___________ color tiles
Answer:
The length of the object is about five colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about five colored tiles, which means five units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Measure More Lengths Homework & Practice 10.4

Measure

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 82
about ___________ color tiles
about ___________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the object is about four colored tiles and the length of the object which is measured using a paper clip is two paper clips.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the object with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the object using the paper clip is two paper clips, which means two units. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the object will be four color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be two paper clips. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Your hockey stick is 18 paper clips long. Is your hockey stick more than or less than 18 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 83
Circle: more than 18 less than 18
Tell how you know:
Answer:
My hockey stick has more than 18 color tiles.

Explanation:
My hockey stick has more than 18 color tiles. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be more than 18 color tiles than the paper clips for the hockey stick.

Solve Compare Problems Involving Length Homework & Practice 10.5

Question 10.
Your water bottle is 5 paper clips long. Your Friend’s is 4 paper clips long. How many paper clips longer is your water bottle?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 84
Answer:
One paper clip long.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-84
Given that my water bottle is 5 paper clips long and my friend’s water bottle is 4 paper clips long. So there will be one paper clip longer than my friend’s.

Question 11.
Your bookshelf is 19 color tiles long. Your friend’s is 15 color tiles long. How many tiles longer is your bookshelf?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 85
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 86
Answer:
My bookshelf is four tiles longer.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-86
Given that my bookshelf is 19 paper clips long and my friend’s bookshelf is 15 paper clips long. So there will be four paper clips longer than my friend’s.

Question 12.
MP Reasoning
Your pencil is 6 color tiles long. Your friend’s is 3 color tiles long. Complete the sentences.

Your pencil is ____________ color tiles ____________ than your friend’s.
Your friend’s pencil is ____________ color tiles ____________ than yours.
Answer:
Your pencil is three color tiles longer than your friend’s.
Your friend’s pencil is three color tiles shorter than yours.

Explanation:
As my pencil is six color tiles long, and my friend’s pencil is three color tiles long. So my pencil will be three color tiles longer than my friend’s pencil. And my friend’s pencil is three color tiles shorter than my pencil.

Conclusion:

Hope the information prevailed in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths is helpful for you. If you have any doubts regarding the solutions please post the comments in the below-mentioned comment box. Share this pdf link and help them to overcome the difficulties in maths.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions

Big Ideas Math 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions Answer Key: Get the free step by step detailed solutions to all Big Ideas Math Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions is available here. The solutions for 7th-grade chapter 3 expressions are given in pdf format. So, download Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 3 Expressions pdf for free of cost and prepare. By referring to the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions you can finish your assignment and homework in time.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 3 Expressions

The list of topics in the Expressions Chapter are given below. The answers are prepared as per the list of topics in Big Ideas Math Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions. Check out the solutions for Algebraic Expressions, Adding and Subtracting Linear Expressions, The Distributive Property, Factoring Expressions are mentioned below. After solving this chapter, you can be able to solve problems using algebraic expressions, identify parts of an algebraic expression, write algebraic expressions, and interpret algebraic expressions in real-life problems.

Performance

Lesson: 1 Algebraic Expressions

Lesson: 2 Adding and Subtracting Linear Expressions

Lesson: 3 The Distributive Property

Lesson: 4 Factoring Expressions

Chapter: 3 – Expressions 

Expressions STEAM VIDEO/Performance

STEAM Video

Trophic Status

In an ecosystem, energy and nutrients flow between abiotic and components. Biotic components are the living parts of an ecosystem. Abiotic components are the non-living parts of an ecosystem. What is an example of an ecosystem?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 1

Watch the STEAM video “Trophic Status.” Then answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Give examples of both biotic and abiotic components in an ecosystem. Explain.

Answer:
Examples of biotic components are plants, animals, bacteria, fungi. Examples of abiotic components are water, soil, sunlight, gases, etc.

Explanation:
Biotic components are the living organisms in an ecosystem. Examples of biotic components are plants, animals, bacteria, fungi. Abiotic components are the non-living physical and chemical factors in the environment that affect ecosystems. Examples of abiotic components are water, soil, sunlight, gases, etc. Abiotic factors affect the ability of organisms to reproduce, survive, help determine the types and number of organisms able to exist in the environment. Limiting factors restrict growth. Biotic factors are the living things that directly or indirectly affect organisms in the environment.

Question 2.
When an organism is eaten, its energy flows into the organism that consumes it. Explain how to use an expression to represent the total energy that a person gains from eating each of the items shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 2

Answer:
bx + lx + fx

Explanation:
Let us take the energy gained by eating a banana is bx, by eating leaves is lx, by eating fish is fx.
So, the expression becomes the sum of all those energies.
bx + lx + fx

Performance Task

Chlorophyll in Plants

After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the STEAM concepts you learned to answer the questions in the Video Performance Task. You will be given the numbers of atoms found in molecules involved in photosynthesis.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 3
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 4
You will be asked to determine the total cost for a model of a molecule given the costs of different types of atom models. How can you find the total cost of purchasing several identical objects?

Expressions Getting Ready for Chapter 3

Chapter Exploration

Work with a partner. Rewrite the algebraic expression so that it has fewer symbols x but still has the same value when evaluated for any value of x.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 5

Answer:
1. 3x + 4
2. 3x – 1
3. 2x – 3
4. 2(1 + x)
5. 3x – 1
6. x + 5

Explanation:
1. Original expression is 2x + 4 + x
Simplified expression is 3x + 4
2. Original expression is 3(x + 1) – 4
3x + 3 – 4 = 3x – 1
Simplified expression is 3x – 1
3. Original expression is x – (3 – x)
x – 3 + x
Simplified expression is 2x – 3
4. Original expression is 5 + 2x – 3
Simplified expression is 2 + 2x = 2(1 + x)
5. Original expression is x + 3 + 2x – 4
Simplified expression is 3x – 1
6. Original expression is 2x + 2 – x + 3
Simplified expression is x + 5

Question 7.
WRITING GUIDELINES
Work with a partner. Use your answers in Exercises 1-6 to write guidelines for simplifying an expression.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 6

Answer:
First, you need to take the given original expression as it is.
If there are any braces, then eliminate them by expanding the expression
Then, add or subtract variables and constants together to get the solution

Explanation:
Let us take question 2. 3(x + 1) – 4
Expand 3
3x + 3 – 4
Simplify
3x – 1

APPLYING A DEFINITION
Work with a partner. Two expressions are equivalent if x they have the same value when evaluated for any value of x. Decide which two expressions are equivalent. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 7

Answer:
8. x – (2x + 1) is equivalent to -x – 1
9. 2x + 3 – x + 4 is equivalent to x + 7 in expression B
10. 3 + x -2(x + 1) is equivalent to -x + 1
11. 2 – 2x – (x + 2) is equivalent to -3x

Explanation:
8. x – (2x + 1) = x – 2x – 1
= -x – 1
So, x – (2x + 1) is equivalent to -x – 1
9. 2x + 3 – x + 4 = x + 7
So, 2x + 3 – x + 4 is equivalent to x + 7 in expression B
10. 3 + x -2(x + 1) = 3 + x -2x – 2
= 1 – x
So, 3 + x -2(x + 1) is equivalent to -x + 1
11. 2 – 2x – (x + 2) = 2 – 2x – x – 2
= -3x
So, 2 – 2x – (x + 2) is equivalent to -3x

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 8

Lesson 3.1 Algebraic Expressions

EXPLORATION 1
Simplifying Algebraic Expressions
Work with a partner.
a. Choose a value of other than 0 or 1 for the last column in the table. Complete the table by evaluating each algebraic expression for each value of x. What do you notice?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 9
b. How can you use properties of operations to justify your answers in part(a)? Explain your reasoning.
c. To subtract a number, you can add its opposite. Does a similar rule apply to the terms of an algebraic expression? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
a. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 1
b. Just simplify the expression and put the values of x in simplified expression
c. Yes

Explanation:
a.
A. -1/3 + x + 7/3 = (-1 + 7)/3 + x
= -6/3 + x = -2 + x
If x = 0, then -2 + 0 = -2
If x = 1, then -2 + 1 = -1
If x = 4, then -2 + 4 = 2
B. 0.5x + 3 – 1.5x – 1 = -x + 4
If x = 0, then -0 + 4 = 4
If x = 1, then -1 + 4 = 3
If x = 4, then -4 + 4 = 0
C. 2x + 6
If x = 0, then 2(0) + 6 = 6
If x = 1, then 2(1) + 6 = 8
Ifx = 4, then 2(4) + 6 = 14
D. x + 4
If x = 0, then 0 + 4 = 4
If x = 1, then 1 + 4 = 5
If x = 4, then 4 + 4 = 8
E. -2x + 2
If x = 0, then -2(0) + 2 = 2
If x = 1, then -2(1) + 2 = 0
If x = 4, then -2(4) + 2 = -6
F. 1/2 x – x + 3/2 x + 4 = 4/2 x – x + 4
= 2x – x + 4 = x + 4
If x = 0, then 0 + 4 = 4
If x = 1, then 1 + 4 = 5
If x = 4, then 4 + 4 = 8
G. -4.8x + 2 – x + 3.8x = -2x + 2
If x = 0, then -2(0) + 2 = 2
If x = 1, then -2(1) + 2 = 0
If x = 4, then -2(4) + 2 = -6
H. x + 2
If x = 0, then 0 + 2 = 2
If x = 1, then 1 + 2 = 3
If x = 4, then 4 + 2 = 6
I. -x + 2
If x = 0, then -0 + 2 = 2
If x = 1, then -1 + 2 =1
If x = 4, then -4 + 2 = -2
J. 3x + 2 – x + 4 = 2x + 6
If x = 0, then 2(0) + 6 = 6
If x = 1, then 2(1) + 6 = 8
If x = 4, then 2(4) + 6 = 14

3.1 Lesson

In an algebraic expression, are terms that have the same variables raised to the same exponents. Constant terms are also like terms. To identify terms and like terms in an expression, first write the expression as a sum of its terms.

Try It
Identify the terms and like terms in the expression.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 10

Answer:
Terms are 10, y, -3/2y, like terms are y, -3/2y.

Explanation:
The given expression is y + 10 – 3/2 y
Like terms are y, -3/2y
Because they have the same variable y
Terms are 10, y, -3/2y

Question 2.
2r2 + 7r – r2 – 9

Answer:
The like terms are 2r², -r², Terms are -9, 7r, 2r², -r²

Explanation:
Given expression is 2r² + 7r -r² – 9
The like terms are 2r², -r²
Terms are -9, 7r, 2r², -r²

Question 3.
7 + 4p – 5 + p + 2q

Answer:
The like terms are 4p, p
The terms are 7, -5, 2q, 4p, p

Explanation:
Given expression is 7 + 4p – 5 + p + 2q
The like terms are 4p, p
The terms are 7, -5, 2q, 4p, p

Try It
Simplify the expression.

Question 4.
-10y + 15y

Answer:
-10y + 15y = 5y

Explanation:
Given expression is -10y + 15y
5y

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 11

Answer:
3/8 b – 3/4 b = -3/8 b

Explanation:
Given expression is 3/8 b – 3/4 b
L.C.M of 8, 4 is 8
(3 – 6)/8 b = -3/8 b

Question 6.
2.4g – 2.4g – 9.8g

Answer:
-9.8g

Explanation:
Given expression is 2.4g – 2.4g – 9.8g
-9.8g

Try It

Simplify the expression.

Question 7.
14 – 3z + 8 + z

Answer:
22 – 2z

Explanation:
Given expression is 14 – 3z + 8 + z
Add constants and like terms
22 – 2z

Question 8.
2.5x + 4.3x – 5

Answer:
6.8x – 5

Explanation:
Given expression is 2.5x + 4.3x – 5
6.8x – 5

Question 9.
2s – 9s + 8t – t

Answer:
7(t – s)

Explanation:
Given expression is 2s – 9s + 8t – t
-7s + 7t = 7(t – s)

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
WRITING
Explain how to identify the terms and like terms of 3y – 4 – 5y.

Answer:
The like terms are 3y, -5y
Terms are -4, 3y, -5y

Explanation:
Given expression is 3y – 4 – 5y
Like terms are the terms in the expression which have the same variable
The following are the like terms because each term contains a variable y and numeric coefficient
3y, -5y
Other than like terms are called the terms
Terms are -4, 3y, -5y

SIMPLIFYING ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS
Simplify the expression.

Question 11.
7p + 6p

Answer:
13p

Explanation:
Given expression is 7p + 6p
13p

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 12

Answer:
3n/2 – 3

Explanation:
Given expression is 4/5 n – 3 + 7/10 n
(8n + 7n)/10 – 3
= 15n/10 – 3
= 3n/2 – 3

Question 13.
2w – g – 7w + 3g

Answer:
-5w + 2g

Explanation:
Given expression is 2w – g – 7w + 3g
Perform the arithmetic operations between the like terms
-5w + 2g

Question 14.
VOCABULARY
Is the expression 3x + 2x – 4 in simplest form? Explain.

Answer:
The expression 3x + 2x – 4 is not in the simplest form.

Explanation:
Given expression is 3x + 2x – 4
= 5x – 4
The simplest form of 3x + 2x – 4 is 5x – 4

Question 15.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which expression does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 13

Answer:
5x – 10 – 2x does not belong with the other three.

Explanation:
The first expression is -4 + 6 + 3x = 2 + 3x
The second expression is 3x + 9 – 7 = 3x + 2
The third expression is 5x – 10 – 2x = 3x – 10
Fourth expression is 5x – 4 + 6 – 2x = 3x + 2
So, out of all 5x – 10 – 2x does not belong with the other three.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 16.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An exercise mat is 3.3 times as long as it is wide. Write expressions in simplest form that represent the perimeter and the area of the exercise mat.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 14

Answer:
The perimeter of the exercise mat is 8.6l, Area of the exercise mat is 3.3l²

Explanation:
Let us take the l is the length of the exercise mat
Then, the width of the exercise mat = 3.3l
Perimeter of exercise mat = 2(length + width)
= 2(l + 3.3l)
= 2(4.3l) = 8.6 l
Area of the exercise mat = length x width
= l x 3.3l
= 3.3l²
Therefore, the perimeter of the exercise mat is 8.6l, Area of the exercise mat is 3.3l²

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
A group of friends visits the movie theater in Example 4. Each person buys a daytime ticket and a small drink. The group shares 2 large popcorns. What is the average cost per person when there are 4 people in the group?

Answer:
The total cost for a group of 4 people is $35.

Explanation:
Number of tickets . cost per ticket + number of small drinks . cost per small drink + Number of large popcorns . Cost per large popcorn
The same number of tickets, small drinks are purchased. So, can represent the number of tickets, the number of small drinks.
5x + 1.75x + $8 = x(5 + 1.75) + $8
= 6.75x + $8
2 popcorns cost is 2 x 4 = $8
The expression 6.75x + $8 indicates that the cost per person is $6.75 + $8 = 14.75
To find the cost for a group of 4 people, evaluate the expression when x = 4
= 6.75 (4 ) + 8 = 27 + 8 = 35
The total cost for a group of 4 people is $35.

Algebraic Expressions Homework & Practice 3.1

Review & Refresh

Find the product or quotient. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 15

Answer:
-1/2

Explanation:
Given that,
-2/7 x 7/4 = -2/4
= -1/2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 16

Answer:
3/5

Explanation:
Given that,
-2/3(-9/10) = 2/3 x 9/10
= 6/10 = 3/5

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 17

Answer:
-13/6

Explanation:
Given that,
1(4/9) ÷ (-2/3) = 13/9 ÷ (-2/3)
= 13/9 x (-3/2) = -13/6

Order the numbers from least to greatest.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 18

Answer:
3/4, 78%, 0.85, 87%, 7/8

Explanation:
Given that
7/8 = 0.875, 0.85, 87% = 87/100 = 0.87 3/4 = 0.75, 78% = 78/100 = 0.78
So, the numbers are 0.875, 0.85, 0.87, 0.75, 0.78
Ordering from the least to the greatest is 0.75,0.78,0.85,0.87,0.875
i.e 3/4, 78%, 0.85, 87%, 7/8

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 19

Answer:
15%, 1450%, 14.8, 15(4/5)

Explanation:
Given that,
15% = 15/100 = 0.15, 14.8, 15(4/5) = 79/5 = 15.8, 1450% = 1450/100 = 14.5
So the numbers are 0.15, 14.8, 15.8, 14.5
The order of number from least to greatest is 0.15, 14.5, 14.8, 15.8
i.e 15%, 1450%, 14.8, 15(4/5)

Question 6.
A bird’s nest is 12 feet above the ground. A mole’s den is 12 inches below the ground. What is the difference in height of these two positions?
A. 24 in.
B. 11 ft
C. 13 ft
D. 24 ft

Answer:
The difference in height of these two positions is 13 feet.

Explanation:
Given that,
The bird nest is 12 feet above the ground and a mole’s den is 12 inches below the ground.
So, the mole’s den have to travel 12 inches +12 feet to reach the bird nest
So, the difference in height of these two positions is 12 feet + 12 inches
= 12 feet + 1 feet = 13 feet

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
REASONING
Determine whether the expressions are equivalent. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 91.)

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 20

Answer:
The expressions are not equivalent

Explanation:
Expression 1 is 3 – 5x
Expression 2 is 4.25 – 5x – 4.25
= -5x
So, expressions are not equivalent

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 21

Answer:
Both the expressions are equivalent.

Explanation:
Expression 1 is 1.25x + 4 + 0.75x – 3
= 2x + 4 – 3 = 2x + 1
Expression 2 is 2x + 1
So, both the expressions are equivalent.

IDENTIFYING TERMS AND LIKE TERMS
Identify the terms and like terms in the expression.

Question 9.
t + 8 + 3t

Answer:
Like terms are t, 3t
Terms are 8, t, 3t

Explanation:
Given expression is t + 8 + 3t
Like terms are t, 3t
Terms are 8, t, 3t

Question 10.
3z + 4 + 2 + 4z

Answer:
Like terms are 3z, 4z
terms are 4, 2, 3z, 4z

Explanation:
Given expression is 3z + 4 + 2 + 4z
Like terms are 3z, 4z
terms are 4, 2, 3z, 4z

Question 11.
2n – n – 4 + 7n

Answer:
Like terms are 2n, -n, 7n
Terms are -4, 2n, -n, 7n

Explanation:
Given expression is 2n – n – 4 + 7n
Like terms are 2n, -n, 7n
Terms are -4, 2n, -n, 7n

Question 12.
-x – 9x2 + 12x2 + 7

Answer:
Like terms are -9x², 12x²
Terms are 7, -x, -9x², 12x²

Explanation:
Given expression is -x – 9x² + 12x² + 7
Like terms are -9x², 12x²
Terms are 7, -x, -9x², 12x²

Question 13.
1.4y + 5 – 4.2 – 5y2 + z

Answer:
There are no like terms
Terms are 1.4y, 5, -4.2, -5y², z

Explanation:
Given expression is 1.4y + 5 – 4.2 – 5y² + z
There are no like terms
Terms are 1.4y, 5, -4.2, -5y², z

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 22

Answer:
Like terms are 1/2 s, 3/4 s
Terms are -4, 1/8, -s³, 1/2 s, 3/4 s

Explanation:
Given expression is 1/2 s – 4 + 3/4 s + 1/8 – s³
Like terms are 1/2 s, 3/4 s
Terms are -4, 1/8, -s³, 1/2 s, 3/4 s

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend identifies the terms and like terms in the expression 3x – 5 – 2x + 9x. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 23

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
Given expression is 3x – 5 – 2x + 9x
like terms are 3x, -2x, 9x
Terms are 3x, -2x, 9x, 5

SIMPLIFYING ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS
Simplify the expression.

Question 16.
12g + 9g

Answer:
21g

Explanation:
The given expression is 12g + 9g
= 21g

Question 17.
11x + 9 – 7

Answer:
11x + 2

Explanation:
Given expression is 11x + 9 – 7
= 11x + 2

Question 18.
8s – 11s + 6s

Answer:
3s

Explanation:
Given expression is 8s – 11s + 6s
= 14s – 11s = 3s

Question 19.
4b – 24 + 19

Answer:
4b – 5

Explanation:
Given expression is 4b – 24 + 19
= 4b – 5

Question 20.
4p – 5p – 30p

Answer:
-31p

Explanation:
Given expression is 4p – 5p – 30p
= 4p – 35p = -31p

Question 21.
4.2v – 5 – 6.5v

Answer:
-2.3v – 5

Explanation:
Given expression is 4.2v – 5 – 6.5v
= -2.3v – 5

Question 22.
8 + 4a + 6.2 – 9a

Answer:
14.2 – 5a

Explanation:
Given expression is 8 + 4a + 6.2 – 9a
= 14.2 – 5a

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 24

Answer:
3 – 1/2 y

Explanation:
Given expression is 2/5y – 4 + 7 – 9/10y
= (4 – 9)/10 y + 3
= -5/10 y + 3
= -1/2 y + 3

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 25

Answer:
40c/3 – 3/2

Explanation:
Given expression is -2/3 c -9/5 + 14c + 3/10
= (-2 + 42)c/3 – (18 – 3)/10
= 40c/3 – 15/10
= 40c/3 – 3/2

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
On a hike, each hiker carries the items shown. Write and interpret an expression in simplest form that represents the weight carried by x hikers. How much total weight is carried when there are 4 hikers?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 26

Answer:
When there are 4 hikers the total weight is 40.8 lb.

Explanation:
A hiker has thw following items:
A sleeping bag of 3.4 lb weight, camping bag of 4.6 lb weight, and a water bottle of 2.2 lb weight
The expression can be
3.4x + 4.6x + 2.2x = x
Here x is the weight each hiker is carrying
10.2x = x
So, each hiker carries a total weight of 10.2 pounds
When there are 4 hikes, the total weight is 10.2 x 4 = 40.8

Question 26.
STRUCTURE
Evaluate the expression -8x + 5 – 2x – 4 + 5 when x = 2 before and after simplifying. Which method do you prefer? Explain.

Answer:
-14

Explanation:
Given expression is -8x + 5 – 2x – 4 + 5
Put x = 2
-8(2) + 5 -2(2) – 4 + 5
= -16 + 5 – 4 – 4 + 5 = -14
Simplify -8x + 5 – 2x – 4 + 5
= -10x + 10 – 4 = -10x + 6
Put x = 2 in -10x + 6
= -10(2) + 6
= -20 + 6 = -14
I just prefer putting x = 2 after simplifying the expression.

Question 27.
OPEN-ENDED
Write an expression with five different terms that is equivalent 8x2 + 3x2 + 3y. Justify your answer.

Answer:
3x² + 2y + y + 7x² + x²

Explanation:
Given expression is 8x² + 3x² + 3y.
The expression which is equivalent to 8x² + 3x² + 3y and having 5 different terms can be as follows
3x² + 2y + y + 7x² + x²
by simplifying the above expression, you will get the original expression.

Question 28.
STRUCTURE
Which of the following shows a correct way of simplifying 6 + (3 – 5x)? Explain the errors made in the other choices.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 27

Answer:
C. 6 + (3 – 5x) = (6 + 3) – 5x = 9 – 5x

Explanation:
A. 6 + (3 – 5x) = (6 + 3 – 5)x
Here, x is applicable to only -5x, it is not multiplied with whole expression
B. 6 + (3 – 5x) = 6 + (3 – 5)x
Here, x is the multiple of only -5x, but you have included 3 also which is false
C. 6 + (3 – 5x) = (6 + 3) – 5x = 9 – 5x
This is true
D. 6 + (3 – 5x) = (6 + 3 + 5) – x
5 is the multiple of x, it is not constant.

Question 29.
PRECISION
Two comets orbit the Sun. One comet travels 30,000 miles per hour and the other comet travels 28,500 miles per hour. What is the most efficient way to calculate the difference of the distances traveled by the comets for any given number of minutes? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 28

Answer:
The difference between those distances is 1500 miles for 60 minutes.

Explanation:
Given that,
One comet travels 30,000 miles per hour and the other comet travels 28,500 miles per hour.
Let us say, the time given for the comets is 60 minutes.
So, in 60 minutes, the first one travels 30,000 miles, and the second one travels 28,500 miles
The difference between those distances = 30,000 – 28,500 = 1500 miles

Question 30.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Find the earnings for washing and waxing 12 cars and 8 trucks. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 29

Answer:
and waxing 12 cars and 8 trucks is $440

Explanation:
The earnings for washing and waxing 12 cars = 12(washing one car cost) + 12(waxing one car cost)
= 12($8) + 12($12)
= 12(8 + 12) = $240
The earnings for washing and waxing 8 trucks = 8(washing one truck cost) + 8(waxing one truck cost)
= 8($10) + 8($15)
= 8(10 + 15) = 8(25) = $200
So, the earnings for washing and waxing 12 cars and 8 trucks is $ 240 + $200 = $440

Question 31.
CRITICAL THINKING
You apply gold foil to a piece of red poster board to make the design shown.
a. Find the area of the gold foil when x = 3. Justify your answer.
b. The pattern at the right is called “St. George’s Cross.” Find a country that uses this pattern as its flag.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 30

Answer:
a. Area of the gold foil = 87 sq in
b. England

Explanation:
You apply gold foil to a piece of red poster board to make the design.
a. Area of rectangle = length x breadth
= 20 x 12 = 240 sq in.
Length of the gold foil = (12 – x) in
The breadth of gold foil = (20 – x) in
Area of horizontal gold foil = length x breadth
= 20 * x = 20x sq. in
Area of the vertical gold foil = length x breath
= 12 * x = 12x sq. in
Area of the middle gold foil = length x breadth
= x * x = x² sq. in
Area of the gold foil = Area of horizontal gold foil + Area of vertical gold foil – Area of the middle gold foil
= 20x + 12x – x²
The area of gold foil when x = 3 is 20(3) + 12(3) – (3)²
= 60 + 36 – 9
= 87 sq in
b. The pattern at the right is called “St. George’s Cross.” Find a country that uses this pattern as its flag.
England

Question 32.
GEOMETRY
Two rectangles have different dimensions. Each rectangle has a perimeter of (7x + 5) inches. Draw and label diagrams that represent possible dimensions of the rectangles.

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 3
Rectangle 1 dimensions are 3.5x and 2.5, rectangle 2 dimensions are 1/2(5x + 1), x + 2

Explanation:
Perimeter of rectangle = (7x + 5) inches
2(length + width) = 7x + 5
length + width = (7x + 5)/2
Rectangle 1 dimensions can be 3.5x and 2.5
Rectangle 2 dimensions can be 1/2(5x + 1), x + 2

Lesson 3.2 Adding and Subtracting Linear Expressions

EXPLORATION 1

Using Algebra Tiles
Work with a partner. You can use the algebra tiles shown at the left to find sums and differences of algebraic expressions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 31
a. How can you use algebra tiles to model a sum of terms that equals 0? Explain your reasoning.
b. Write each sum or difference modeled below. Then use the algebra tiles to simplify the expression.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 32
c. Write two algebraic expressions of the form ax + b, where a and b are rational numbers. Find the sum and difference of the expressions.

EXPLORATION 2
Using Properties of Operations
Work with a partner.
a. Do algebraic expressions, such as 2x, -3y, and 3z + 1 have additive inverses? How do you know?
b. How can you find the sums and differences modeled in Exploration 1 without using algebra tiles? Explain your reasoning.

3.2 Lesson

Try It

Find the sum.

Question 1.
(x + 3) + (2x – 1)

Answer:
(x + 3) + (2x – 1) = 3x + 2

Explanation:
The given expression is (x + 3) + (2x – 1)
Add the like terms and constant
= 3x + 3 – 1
= 3x + 2

Question 2.
(-8z + 4) + (8z – 7)

Answer:
(-8z + 4) + (8z – 7) = -3

Explanation:
The given expression is (-8z + 4) + (8z – 7)
= -8z + 4 + 8z – 7
= -3

Question 3.
(4.5 – n) + (-10n + 6.5)

Answer:
(4.5 – n) + (-10n + 6.5) = 11(1 – n)

Explanation:
The given expression is (4.5 – n) + (-10n + 6.5)
= 4.5 – n – 10n + 6.5
= 11 – 11n
= 11(1 – n)

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 34

Answer:
(1/2w – 3) + (1/4w + 3) = 3w/4

Explanation:
The given expression is (1/2w – 3) + (1/4w + 3)
= 1/2w – 3 + 1/4w + 3
= (2w + w)/4 = 3w/4

Try It

Find the difference.

Question 5.
(m – 3) – (-m + 12)

Answer:
(m – 3) – (-m + 12) = 2m – 15

Explanation:
The given expression is (m – 3) – (-m + 12)
= m – 3 + m – 12
= 2m – 15

Question 6.
(-2c + 5) – (6.3c + 20)

Answer:
(-2c + 5) – (6.3c + 20) = -83c – 15

Explanation:
The given expression is (-2c + 5) – (6.3c + 20)
= -2c + 5 – 6.3c – 20
= -83c – 15

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
WRITING
Describe how to distinguish a linear expression from a nonlinear expression. Give an example of each.

Answer:
An example of a linear expression is 2x + 1.
An example of a non-linear expression is 2x² + 1

Explanation:
Linear expressions are the expressions where the sum of constants and products of constants and raised to a power of 0 or 1. Non-linear expressions are the expressions where the sum of constants and products of constants and raised to a power that is not 0 or 1.
So, an example of a linear expression is 2x + 1.
An example of a non-linear expression is 2x² + 1

Question 8.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 35

Answer:
What is x more than 3x – 1 is different.

Explanation:
What is x more than 3x – 1 = x + 3x – 1 = 4x – 1
Find 3x – 1 decreased by x = 3x – 1 – x = 2x – 1
What is the difference of 3x – 1 and x = 3x – 1 – x = 2x – 1
Subtract (x + 1) from 3x = 3x – (x + 1) = 3x – x – 1 = 2x – 1

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
In a basketball game, the home team scores (2m + 39) points and the away team scores (3m + 40) points, where m is the number of minutes since halftime. Who wins the game? What is the difference in the scores minutes after halftime? Explain.

Answer:
The away team wins the game. And the difference in the scores minutes after halftime is 2m + 2.

Explanation:
Given that,
The score of home team = 2m + 39 points
The score of away team = 3m + 40 points
Here, m is the number of minutes since halftime
Let us consider the teams that score the same points after the half time
The score of home team = 2m + 39 + 2m + 39 = 4m + 78
The score of away team = 3m + 40 + 3m + 40 = 6m + 80
The difference between those scores = 6m + 80 – (4m + 78)
= 6m + 80 – 4m – 78 = 2m + 2
The away team wins the game.

Question 10.
Electric guitar kits originally cost d dollars online. You buy the kits on sale for 50% of the original price, plus a shipping fee of $4.50 per kit. After painting and assembly, you sell each guitar online for (1.5d + 4.5) dollars. Find and interpret your profit on each guitar sold.

Answer:
Your profit on each electric guitar kit is d dollars

Explanation:
Electric guitar kits originally cost d dollars online.
You buy the kits on sale for 50% of the original price. So, the purchase price of kit is = d/2 + 4.50
After painting and assembly, you sell each guitar online for (1.5d + 4.5) dollars
Profit = Selling price – Purchased price
= 1.5d + 4.5 – (d/2+ 4.50)
= 1.5d + 4.5 – 0.5d – 4.50
= d dollars
Your profit on each electric guitar kit is d dollars. You pay (0.5d + 4.50) dollars for each kit. so, you are getting 4.50 dollars less than double your money.

Adding and Subtracting Linear Expressions Homework & Practice 3.2

Review & Refresh

Simplify the expression.

Question 1.
4f + 11f

Answer:
4f + 11f = 15f

Explanation:
Given expression is 4f + 11f
Add the like terms
= 15f

Question 2.
b + 4b – 9b

Answer:
b + 4b – 9b = -4b

Explanation:
Given expression is b + 4b – 9b
Perform required operations between like terms
= 5b – 9b = -4b

Question 3.
-4z – 6 – 7z + 3

Answer:
-4z – 6 – 7z + 3 = -11z- 3

Explanation:
Given expression is -4z – 6 – 7z + 3
Perform required operations between like terms and constants
= -11z- 3

Evaluate the expression when x = \(-\frac{4}{5}\) and y = \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Question 4.
x + y

Answer:
-7/15

Explanation:
Given expression is x + y
Put x = -4/5, y = 1/3
= -4/5 + 1/3
= (-12 + 5)/15 = -7/15

Question 5.
2x + 6y

Answer:
2/5

Explanation:
Given expression is 2x + 6y
Put x = -4/5, y = 1/3
= 2(-4/5) + 6(1/3) = -8/5 + 6/3
= (-24 + 30)/15 = 6/15
= 2/5

Question 6.
-x + 4y

Answer:
32/15

Explanation:
Given expression is -x + 4y
Put x = -4/5, y = 1/3
= -(-4/5) + 4(1/3)
= 4/5 + 4/3
= (12 + 20)/15
= 32/15

Question 7.
What is the surface area of a cube that has a side length of 5 feet?
A. 25 ft2
B. 75 ft2
C. 125 ft2
D. 150 ft2

Answer:
D. 150 ft²

Explanation:
Given that,
the side length of cube = 5 feet
The surface area of a cube = 6side²
= 6 x (5)² = 6 x 25
= 150 ft²

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING ALGEBRA TILES
Write the sum or difference modeled by the algebra tiles. Then use the algebra tiles to simplify the expression. (See Exploration 1, p. 97.)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 36

Answer:
3x – 1

Explanation:
Convert the given algebra tiles to the expressions
(x – 1 – 1 – 1 + x – 1 – 1 – 1) + (x + 1 + 1+ 1+ 1+ 1)
= (2x – 6) +(x + 5)
= 2x – 6 + x + 5
= 3x – 1

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 37

Answer:
11

Explanation:
Convert the given algebra tiles to the expressions
(x + 1 + 1 + 1+ 1 + 1 + x + 1 + 1) – (x – 1 – 1 – 1 – 1 + x)
= (2x + 7) – (2x – 4)
= 2x + 7 – 2x + 4
= 11

ADDING LINEAR EXPRESSIONS
Find the sum.

Question 10.
(n + 8) + (n – 12)

Answer:
(n + 8) + (n – 12) = 2n – 4

Explanation:
Given linear expression is (n + 8) + (n – 12)
= n + 8 + n – 12
= 2n – 4

Question 11.
(7 – b) + (3b + 2)

Answer:
(7 – b) + (3b + 2) = 9 + 2b

Explanation:
Given linear expression is (7 – b) + (3b + 2)
= 7 – b + 3b + 2
= 9 + 2b

Question 12.
(2w – 9) + (-4w – 5)

Answer:
(2w – 9) + (-4w – 5) = -2w – 14

Explanation:
Given linear expression is (2w – 9) + (-4w – 5)
= 2w – 9 – 4w- 5
= -2w – 14

Question 13.
(2x – 6) + (4x – 12)

Answer:
(2x – 6) + (4x – 12) = 8x – 18

Explanation:
Given linear expression is (2x – 6) + (4x – 12)
= 2x – 6 + 4x – 12
= 8x – 18

Question 14.
(-3.4k – 7) + (3k + 21)

Answer:
(-3.4k – 7) + (3k + 21) = -0.4k + 14

Explanation:
Given linear expression is (-3.4k – 7) + (3k + 21)
= -3.4k – 7 + 3k + 21
= -0.4k + 14

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 38

Answer:
(-7/2 z+ 4) + (1/5 z- 15) = -33z/10 – 11

Explanation:
Given linear expression is (-7/2 z+ 4) + (1/5 z- 15)
= -7/2 z + 4 + 1/5 z- 15
= (-35z + 2z)/10 – 11
= -33z/10 – 11

Question 16.
(6 – 2.7h) + (-1.3j – 4)

Answer:
(6 – 2.7h) + (-1.3j – 4) = 2 – 2.7h – 1.3j

Explanation:
Given linear expression is (6 – 2.7h) + (-1.3j – 4)
= 6 – 2.7h – 1.3j – 4
= 2 – 2.7h – 1.3j

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 39

Answer:
(7/4 x – 5) + (2y – 3.5) + (-1/4 x + 5) = 3x/2 + 2y – 3.5

Explanation:
Given linear expression is (7/4 x – 5) + (2y – 3.5) + (-1/4 x + 5)
= 7/4 x – 5 + 2y – 3.5 – 1/4x + 5
= (7x – x)/4 + 2y – 3.5
= 6x/4 + 2y – 3.5
= 3x/2 + 2y – 3.5

Question 18.
MODELING REAL LIFE
While catching fireflies, you and a friend decide to have a competition. After m minutes, you have (3m + 13) fireflies and your friend has (4m + 6) fireflies.
a. How many total fireflies do you and your friend catch? Explain your reasoning.
b. The competition lasts 3 minutes. Who has more fireflies? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 40

Answer:
a. The total number of fireflies collected is 7m + 19
b. You have more fireflies when compared with your friend.

Explanation:
The number of fireflies you collected after m minutes is (3m + 13)
The number of fireflies your friend collected after m minutes is (4m + 6)
a.
The number of fireflies you collected is (3m + 13)
The number of fireflies your friend collected is (4m + 6)
The total number of fireflies collected = (3m + 13) + (4m + 6)
= 3m + 13 + 4m + 6 = 7m + 19
b. The competition lasts 3 minutes
So, The number of fireflies you collected is 3(1) + 13 = 3 + 13 = 16
The number of fireflies your friend collected is 4(1) + 6 = 4 + 6 = 10
So, you have more fireflies when compared with your friend.

SUBTRACTING LINEAR EXPRESSIONS

Find the difference.

Question 19.
(-2g + 7) – (g + 11)

Answer:
(-2g + 7) – (g + 11) = -3g – 4

Explanation:
The given linear expression is (-2g + 7) – (g + 11)
= -2g + 7 – g – 11
= -3g – 4

Question 20.
(6d + 5) – (2 – 3d)

Answer:
(6d + 5) – (2 – 3d) = 9d + 3

Explanation:
The given linear expression is (6d + 5) – (2 – 3d)
= 6d + 5 – 2 + 3d
= 9d + 3

Question 21.
(4 – 5y) – (2y – 16)

Answer:
(4 – 5y) – (2y – 16) = 20 – 7y

Explanation:
The given linear expression is (4 – 5y) – (2y – 16)
= 4 – 5y – 2y + 16
= 20 – 7y

Question 22.
(2n – 9) – (-2.4n + 4)

Answer:
(2n – 9) – (-2.4n + 4) = 4.4n – 13

Explanation:
The given linear expression is (2n – 9) – (-2.4n + 4)
= 2n – 9 + 2.4n – 4
= 4.4n – 13

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 41

Answer:
(-1/8 c + 16) – (3/8 + 3c) = (-25c + 125)/8

Explanation:
The given linear expression is (-1/8 c + 16) – (3/8 + 3c)
= -1/8 c + 16 – 3/8 – 3c
= (-c – 24c)/8 + (128 – 3)/8
= -25c/8 + 125/8
= (-25c + 125)/8

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 42

Answer:
(9/4 x + 6) – (-5/4 x – 24) = 7x/2 + 30

Explanation:
The given linear expression is (9/4 x + 6) – (-5/4 x – 24)
= 9x/4 + 6 + 5x/4 + 24
= (9x + 5x)/4 + 30
= 14x/4 + 30
= 7x/2 + 30

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 43

Answer:
(1/3 – 6m) – (1/4 n – 8) = 25/4 – 6m – n/4

Explanation:
The given linear expression is (1/3 – 6m) – (1/4 n – 8)
= 1/3 – 6m – 1/4 n + 8
= (1 + 24)/3 – 6m – n/4
= 25/4 – 6m – n/4

Question 26.
(1 – 5q) – (2.5s + 8) – (0.5q + 6)

Answer:
(1 – 5q) – (2.5s + 8) – (0.5q + 6) = -5.5q – 2.5s – 13

Explanation:
The given linear expression is (1 – 5q) – (2.5s + 8) – (0.5q + 6)
= 1 – 5q – 2.5s – 8 – 0.5q – 6
= 1 – 5.5q – 2.5s – 14
= -5.5q – 2.5s – 13

Question 27.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the difference (4m + 9) – (2m – 5). Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 44

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
The given expression is (4m + 9) – (2m – 5)
= 4m + 9 – 2m + 5
= 2m + 14

Question 28.
GEOMETRY
The expression 17n + 11 represents the perimeter of the triangle. What is the length of the third side? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 45

Answer:
The length of the third side is 8n.

Explanation:
Perimeter of the triangle = 17n + 11
5n + 6 + 4n + 5 + third side = 17n + 11
9n + 11 + third side = 17n + 11
third side = 17n + 11 – (9n +11)
= 17n + 11 – 9n – 11
= 8n
The length of the third side is 8n.

Question 29.
LOGIC
Your friend says the sum of two linear expressions is always a linear expression. Is your friend correct? Explain.

Answer:
yes, the sum of two linear expressions is always a linear expression.

Explanation:
The sum of two linear expressions is always a linear expression. But the product of linear expressions may not be the linear expression.

Question 30.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You burn 265 calories running and then 7 calories per minute swimming. Your friend burns 273 calories running and then 11 calories per minute swimming. You each swim for the same number of minutes. Find and interpret the difference in the amounts of calories burned by you and your friend.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 46

Answer:
The difference in the amounts of calories burned by you and your friend is 8 + 4m.

Explanation:
The number of calories your burn by running and swimming is 265 + 7m
The number of calories your friend burns by running and swimming is 273 + 11m
The difference in amount of calories burn = 273 + 11m – (265 + 7m)
= 273 + 11m – 265 – 7m
= 8 + 4m
The difference in the amounts of calories burned by you and your friend is 8 + 4m.

Question 31.
DIG DEEPER!
You start a new job. After w weeks, you have (10w + 120) dollars in your savings account and (45w + 25) dollars in your checking account.
a. What is the total amount of money in the accounts? Explain.
b. How much money did you have before you started your new job? How much money do you save each week?
c. You want to buy a new phone for $150, and still have $500 left in your accounts afterwards. Explain how to determine when you can buy the phone.

Answer:
a. The total amount of money in the accounts = (55w + 145) dollars
b. You started a new job with 120 dollars savings and you earned 10 dollars savings each week.
c. You can buy the phone after 9 weeks of starting new job.

Explanation:
You have (10w + 120) dollars in your savings account and (45w + 25) dollars in your checking account.
a.
The total amount of money in the accounts = 10w + 120 + 45w + 25
= 55w + 145
b.
In the saving’s account the multiple of w is the amount earned during job and other constant is the amount you have before the new job.
So, you started a new job with 120 dollars savings and you earned 10 dollars savings each week.
c.
The total amount in accounts is (55w + 145) dollars
You want to buy a new phone for $150, and still have $500 left in your accounts afterwards
Deduct $150 from total amount so that the remaining amount should be $500.
55w + 145 – 150 = 500
55w – 5 = 500
55w = 500 + 5
55w = 505
w = $505/55
w = 9.1818
So, you can buy the phone after 9 weeks of starting new job.

Question 32.
REASONING
Write an expression in simplest form that represents the vertical distance between the two lines shown. What is the distance when x = 3? when x = -3?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 47

Answer:
The vertical distance between the two lines is 3 units.

Explanation:
Given equations are y = x – 1, y = 2x – 4
Equating those two
x – 1 = 2x – 4
-1 + 4 = 2x – x
3 = x
So, the vertical distance between the two lines is 3 units.

Lesson 3.3 The Distributive Property

EXPLORATION 1

Using Models to Write Expressions
Work with a partner.
a. Write an expression that represents the area of the shaded region in each figure.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 48
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 48.1
b. Compare your expressions in part(a) with other groups in your class. Did other groups write expressions that look different than yours? If so, determine whether the expressions are equivalent.

3.3 Lesson

Try It
Simplify the expression.

Question 1.
-1(x + 9)

Answer:
-1(x + 9) = 9 – x

Explanation:
Given expression is -1(x + 9)
= -x + 9

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 49

Answer:
2/3 (-3z – 6) = -2z – 4

Explanation:
Given expression is 2/3 (-3z – 6)
= 2/3(-3z) – 2/3(6)
= -2z – 2(2)
= -2z – 4

Question 3.
-1.5(8m – n)

Answer:
-1.5(8m – n) = -12m + 1.5n

Explanation:
Given expression is -1.5(8m – n)
= -1.5(8m) + 1.5(n)
= -12m + 1.5n

Try It

Simplify the expression.

Question 4.
2(-3s + 1 – 5)

Answer:
2(-3s + 1 – 5) = -6s – 8

Explanation:
Given expression is 2(-3s + 1 – 5)
= 2(-3s) + 2(1) + 2(-5)
= -6s + 2 – 10
= -6s – 8

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 50

Answer:
-3/2 (a – 4 – 2a) = 3a/2 + 6

Explanation:
Given expression is -3/2 (a – 4 – 2a)
= -3/2 (a) + 3/2(4) + 3/2(2a)
= -3a/2 + 3(2) + 3(a)
= -3a/2 + 6 + 3a
= (-3a + 6a)/2 + 6
= 3a/2 + 6

Try It

Simplify the expression.

Question 6.
3.5m – 1.5(m – 10)

Answer:
3.5m – 1.5(m – 10) = 2m + 15

Explanation:
Given expression is 3.5m – 1.5(m – 10)
= 3.5m – 1.5(m) + 1.5(10)
= 3.5m – 1.5m + 15
= 2m + 15

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 51

Answer:
4/5(10w – 5) – 2(w + 9) = 6w – 22

Explanation:
Given expression is 4/5(10w – 5) – 2(w + 9)
= 4/5(10w) – 4/5(5) – 2w – 18
= 4(2w) – 4 – 2w – 18
= 8w – 2w – 22
= 6w – 22

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
WRITING
Explain how to use the Distributive Property when simplifying an expression.

Answer:
Distributive property says that a(b+ c) = ab + ac and a(b – c) = ab – ac
So, you need to expand the outer number with the sum or difference inside the braces
And perform the required arithmetical operations to get the simplified expression.

USING THE DISTRIBUTIVE PROPERTY
Simplify the expression.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 52

Answer:
5/6 (-2y + 3) = -5y/3 + 5/2

Explanation:
Given expression is 5/6 (-2y + 3)
= 5/6(-2y) + 5/6(3)
= -10y/6 + 15/6
= -5y/3 + 5/2

Question 10.
6(3s – 2.5 – 5s)

Answer:
6(3s – 2.5 – 5s) = -15 – 12s

Explanation:
Given expression is 6(3s – 2.5 – 5s)
= 6(-2.5 – 2s)
= 6(-2.5) – 6(2s)
= -15 – 12s

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 53

Answer:
3/10(4m – 8) + 9m = (51m – 12)/5

Explanation:
Given expression is 3/10(4m – 8) + 9m
= 3/10(4m) – 3/10(8) + 9m
= 3/5(2m) – 3/5(4) + 9m
= 6m/5 – 12/5 + 9m
= (6m + 45m)/5 – 12/5
= 51m/5 – 12/5
= (51m – 12)/5

Question 12.
2.25 – 2(7.5 – 4h)

Answer:
2.25 – 2(7.5 – 4h) = 8h – 12.75

Explanation:
Given expression is 2.25 – 2(7.5 – 4h)
= 2.25 – 2(7.5) + 2(4h)
= 2.25 – 15 + 8h
= 8h – 12.75

Question 13.
STRUCTURE
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 54
Use the terms at the left to complete the expression below so that it is equivalent to 9x – 12. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 55

Answer:
3/2 (4x – 8) + 3x

Explanation:
The expression can be
3/2 (4x – 8) + 3x
= 3/2(4(x – 2)) + 3x
= 3(2(x – 2)) + 3x
= 6(x – 2) + 3x
= 6x – 12 + 3x
= 9x – 12

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 14.
A rectangular room is 10 feet longer than it is wide. How many 1-foot square tiles does it take to tile along the inside walls of the room?

Answer:
The number of tiles required is 4w + 20.

Explanation:
Let the width of the rectangular room is w
The length of the rectangular room is w + 10
Perimeter of the rectangular room = 2(length + with)
= 2(w + 10 + w)
= 2(2w +10)
= 4w + 20
So, the number of tiles required is 4w + 20.

Question 15.
How many 2-foot square tiles does it take to tile the border of the pool in Example 4? Explain.

Answer:
(4s + 8) 2 foot square tiles are required.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 6
The diagram shows that the tiled border can be divided into two sections that each requires s + 4 tiles and two sections that each requires s tiles. So, the number of tiles can be represented as 2(s + 4) + 2s
2(s + 4) + 2s = 2(s) + 2(4) + 2s
= 4s + 8
So, (4s + 8) 2 foot square tiles are required.

The Distributive Property Homework & Practice 3.3

Review & Refresh

Find the sum or difference.

Question 1.
(5b – 9) + (b + 8)

Answer:
(5b – 9) + (b + 8) = 6b – 1

Explanation:
Given expression is (5b – 9) + (b + 8)
= 5b – 9 + b + 8
= 6b – 1

Question 2.
(3m + 5) – (6 – 5m)

Answer:
(3m + 5) – (6 – 5m) = 8m – 1

Explanation:
Given expression is (3m + 5) – (6 – 5m)
= 3m + 5 – 6 + 5m
= 8m – 1

Question 3.
(1 – 9z) + 3(z – 2)

Answer:
(1 – 9z) + 3(z – 2) = -5 – 6z

Explanation:
Given expression is (1 – 9z) + 3(z – 2)
= 1 – 9z + 3(z) – 3(2)
= 1 – 9z + 3z – 6
= -5 – 6z

Question 4.
(7g – 6) – (-3n – 4)

Answer:
(7g – 6) – (-3n – 4) = 7g + 3n – 2

Explanation:
Given expression is (7g – 6) – (-3n – 4)
= 7g – 6 -(-3n) -(-4)
= 7g – 6 + 3n + 4
= 7g + 3n – 2

Evaluate the expression.

Question 5.
-62

Answer:
-6² = -36

Explanation:
Given expression is -62
-6 x 6 = -36

Question 6.
-92 . 3

Answer:
-9² . 3 = -243

Explanation:
Given expression is -9² . 3
= -9 . 9 . 3
= -9 . 27
= -243

Question 7.
(-7) . (-2) . (-4)

Answer:
(-7) . (-2) . (-4) = -56

Explanation:
Given expression is (-7) . (-2) . (-4)
= -7 . -2 . -4
= 14 . -4
= -56

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 56

Answer:
11 = | -11 |

Explanation:
11 = | -11 |
mod of -11 is positive 11
So, they are equal.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 57

Answer:
| 3.5 | <  | -5.8 |

Explanation:
| 3.5 | _  | -5.8 |
3.5 < 5.8

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 58

Answer:
| -3.5 | <  | 17/5 |

Explanation:
| -3.5 | _  | 17/5 |
3.5 < 3.4

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING MODELS
Write two different expressions that represent the area of the shaded region. Show that the expressions are equivalent. (See Exploration 1, p. 103.)

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 59

Answer:
6.5(2x + 2), 13x + 13

Explanation:
The length of the shaded region is 6.5
The width of the shaded region is (3x + 4) – (x + 2) = 3x + 4 – x – 2
= 2x + 2
The area of the shaded region = length . width
= 6.5 . (2x + 2)
= 6.5(2x + 2)
= 6.5(2x) + 6.5(2)
= 13x + 13
The second way is as follows
The length of bigger rectangle is 3x + 4
Width of the bigger rectangle is 6.5
Area of the bigger rectangle = length . width
= 6.5(3x + 4)
The length of unshaded region is x + 2
width of the unshaded region is 6.2
Area of the unshaded region = length . width
= 6.5(x + 2)
Area of the shaded region = Area of the bigger rectangle – area of the shaded region
= 6.5(3x + 4) – 6.5(x + 2)
= 6.5(3x + 4 -(x + 2))
= 6.5(3x + 4 – x – 2)
= 6.5(2x + 2)
= 6.5(2x) + 6.5(2)
= 13x + 13

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 60

Answer:
2.5m² – 2m, 1.5m² + m(m – 2)

Explanation:
The first way is here.
The length of the bigger rectangle is 1.5m
The width of the bigger rectangle is 2m
The area of the bigger rectangle = length . width
= 1.5m x 2m = 3m²
Length of the unshaded region is 1.5m – (m – 2) = 1.5m – m + 2
= 0.5m + 2
Width of the unshaded region = 2m – m = m
Area of the unshaded region = length . width
= (0.5m + 2) . m
Area of the shaded region = The area of the bigger rectangle – Area of the unshaded region
= 3m² – m(0.5m + 2)
= 3m² – 0.5m² -2m
= 2.5m² – 2m
The second way is as follows
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 7
The length of the first shaded rectangle = 1.5m
The width of the first shaded rectangle = m
Area of the first shaded rectangle = length . width
= 1.5m x m
= 1.5m²
The length of the second shaded rectangle = m – 2
The width of the first shaded rectangle = 2m – m = m
Area of the second shaded rectangle = length . width
= m(m – 2)
Therefore, area of the shaded region = Area of the first shaded rectangle + Area of the second shaded rectangle
= 1.5m² + m(m – 2)
= 1.5m² + m² – 2m
= 2.5m² – 2m
Therefore, two expressions that represent the area of the shaded region is 2.5m² – 2m, 1.5m² + m(m – 2).

USING THE DISTRIBUTIVE PROPERTY
Simplify the expression.

Question 13.
3(a – 7)

Answer:
3(a – 7) = 3a – 21

Explanation:
The given expression is 3(a – 7)
= 3(a) – 3(7)
= 3a – 21

Question 14.
-6(2 + x)

Answer:
-6(2 + x) = -12 – 6x

Explanation:
The given expression is -6(2 + x)
= -6(2) +(-6)(x)
= -12 -6(x)
= -12 – 6x

Question 15.
-5(3m – 4)

Answer:
-5(3m – 4) = -15m + 20

Explanation:
The given expression is -5(3m – 4)
= -5(3m) – (-5) (4)
= -15m +5(4)
= -15m + 20

Question 16.
-9(-5 – 4c)

Answer:
-9(-5 – 4c) = 45 + 36c

Explanation:
The given expression is -9(-5 – 4c)
= -9(-5) – (-9) (4c)
= 45 + 9(4c)
= 45 + 36c

Question 17.
4.5 (3s + 6)

Answer:
4.5 (3s + 6) = 13.5s+ 27

Explanation:
The given expression is 4.5 (3s + 6)
= 4.5(3s) + 4.5(6)
= 13.5s+ 27

Question 18.
-1.4 (-5 + 7g)

Answer:
-1.4 (-5 + 7g) = 7 – 9.8g

Explanation:
The given expression is -1.4 (-5 + 7g)
= -1.4(-5) -1.4(7g)
= 7 – 9.8g

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 61

Answer:
2/5(6 – 5p) = 12/5 – 2p

Explanation:
The given expression is 2/5(6 – 5p)
= 2/5(6) – 2/5(5p)
= 12/5 – 2p

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 3 Expressions 62

Answer:
-4/3 (3q – 10) = -4q + 40/3

Explanation:
The given expression is -4/3 (3q – 10)
= -4/3 (3q) + 4/3(10)
= -4q + 40/3

Question 21.
2(3 + 4y + 5)

Answer:
2(3 + 4y + 5) = 16 + 8y

Explanation:
The given expression is 2(3 + 4y + 5)
= 2(8 + 4y)
= 2(8) + 2(4y)
= 16 + 8y

Question 22.
-9(8 + 6n – 4)

Answer:
-9(8 + 6n – 4) = -36 – 54n

Explanation:
The given expression is -9(8 + 6n – 4)
= -9(4 + 6n)
= -9(4) – 9(6n)
= -36 – 54n

Question 23.
-6(-4d – 8.3 + 3d)

Answer:
-6(-4d – 8.3 + 3d) = 6d + 49.8

Explanation:
The given expression is -6(-4d – 8.3 + 3d)
= -6(-d – 8.3)
= -6(-d) + 6(8.3)
= 6d + 49.8

Question 24.
2.3h(6 – k)

Answer:
2.3h(6 – k) = 13.8h – 2.3hk

Explanation:
The given expression is 2.3h(6 – k)
= 2.3h(6) – 2.3h(k)
= 13.8h – 2.3hk

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 63

Answer:
-3/8 (-4y + z) = 3y/2 – 3z/8

Explanation:
The given expression is -3/8 (-4y + z)
= -3/8 (-4y) – 3/8(z)
= 3y/2 – 3z/8

Question 26.
2(-2w – 1.2 + 7x)

Answer:
2(-2w – 1.2 + 7x) = -4w- 2.4 + 14x

Explanation:
The given expression is 2(-2w – 1.2 + 7x)
= 2(-2w) + 2(-1.2) + 2(7x)
= -4w- 2.4 + 14x

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 64

Answer:
5/3(4/3 a + 9b + 2/3 a) = 10a/3 + 15b

Explanation:
The given expression is 5/3(4/3 a + 9b + 2/3 a)
= 5/3 ( 6a/3 + 9b)
= 5/3 (2a + 9b)
= 5/3 (2a) + 5/3 (9b)
= 10a/3 + 5 (3b)
= 10a/3 + 15b

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend simplifies the expression. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 65

Answer:
Wrong.

Explanation:
-2(h + 8k) = -2(h) -2(8k)
= -2h – 16k

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 66

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
-3(4 – 5b + 7) = -3(11 – 5b)
= -3(11) -3(-5b)
= -33 + 15b

SIMPLIFYING EXPRESSIONS
Simplify the expression.

Question 30.
-3(5g + 1) + 8g

Answer:
-3(5g + 1) + 8g = -7g – 3

Explanation:
The given expression is -3(5g + 1) + 8g
= -3(5g) -3(1) + 8g
= -15g – 3 + 8g
= -7g – 3

Question 31.
-6a + 7(-2a – 4)

Answer:
-6a + 7(-2a – 4) = -20a – 28

Explanation:
The given expression is -6a + 7(-2a – 4)
= -6a + 7(-2a) +7(-4)
= -6a – 14a – 28
= -20a – 28

Question 32.
9 – 3(5 – 4x)

Answer:
9 – 3(5 – 4x) = -6 + 12x

Explanation:
The given expression is 9 – 3(5 – 4x)
= 9 – 3(5) -3(-4x)
= 9 – 15 + 12x
= -6 + 12x

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 67

Answer:
-3/4(5p – 12) + 2(8 – 1/4 p) = -17p/4 + 25

Explanation:
The given expression is -3/4(5p – 12) + 2(8 – 1/4 p)
= -3/4 (5p) -3/4(-12) + 2(8) + 2(-1/4p)
= -15p/4 + 9 + 16 – p/2
= (-15p -2p)/4 + 25
= -17p/4 + 25

Question 34.
c(4 + 3c) – 0.75(c + 3)

Answer:
c(4 + 3c) – 0.75(c + 3) = 4c + 3c² – 0.75c – 2.25

Explanation:
The given expression is c(4 + 3c) – 0.75(c + 3)
= c(4) + c(3c) – 0.75(c) – 0.75(3)
= 4c + 3c² – 0.75c – 2.25

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 68

Answer:
-1 – 2/3(6/7 – 3/7 n) = -33/21 + 6n/21

Explanation:
The given expression is -1 – 2/3(6/7 – 3/7 n)
= -1 -2/3(6/7) – 2/3(-3/7 n)
= -1 – 12/21 + 6n/21
= (-21 – 12)/21 + 6n/21
= -33/21 + 6n/21

Question 36.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The cost (in dollars) of a custom-made sweatshirt is represented by 3.5n + 29.99, where n is the number of different colors in the design. Write and interpret a simplified expression that represents the cost of 15 sweatshirts.

Answer:
The cost of 15 sweatshirts is 52.5n + 449.85

Explanation:
The cost (in dollars) of a custom-made sweatshirt is represented by 3.5n + 29.99
To find the cost of 15 sweatshirts, we need to multiply the expression by 15
= 15(3.5n + 29.99)
= 15(3.5n) + 15(29.99)
= 52.5n + 449.85
Therefore, the cost of 15 sweatshirts is 52.5n + 449.85

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A ski resort makes snow using a snow fan that costs $1200. The fan has an average daily operation cost of $9.50. Write and interpret a simplified expression that represents the cost to purchase and operate 6 snow fans.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 69

Answer:
The expression that represents the cost to purchase and operate 6 snow fans is 7200 + 57d.

Explanation:
Given that,
A ski resort makes snow fan that costs $1200
The fan has an average daily operation cost of $ 9.50
We have to write a simplified expression that represents the cost to purchase and operate 6 snow fans.
And variable d represents the number of days that the resort operates the fans.
Now, cost of 6 snow fans = 6 x cost of each snow fan = 6 x 1200 = 7200
The cost to operate 6 fans = 6 x number of days x cost to operate each fan
= 6 x d x 9.5 = 57d
So, the expression for total cost will be cost of fans + cost to operate = 7200 + 57d.

Question 38.
NUMBER SENSE
Predict whether the instructions below will produce equivalent expressions. Then show whether your prediction is correct.

  • Subtract 3 from n, add 3 to the result, and then triple that expression.
  • Subtract 3 from n, triple the result, and then add 3 to that expression.

Answer:
Your prediction is wrong.

Explanation:
a. Subtract 3 from n = n – 3
Add 3 to the result = n – 3 + 3 = n
And then triple that expression = n x n x n = n³.
b. Subtract 3 from n = n – 3
Triple the result = (n – 3) . (n – 3) . (n – 3) = (n – 3)³
And then add 3 to that expression = (n – 3)³ + 3
Therefore, n³ is not equivalent to (n – 3)³ + 3
Hence, the prection is wrong.

USING A MODEL
Draw a diagram that shows how the expression can represent the area of a figure. Then simplify the expression.

Question 39.
5(2 + x + 3)

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 8

Explanation:
The area of rectangle = length . width
= 5(2 + x + 3)
= 5(5 + x)
= 5(5) + 5(x)
= 25 + 5x
Therefore, area is (25 + 5x)

Question 40.
(4 + 1)(x + 2x)

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 9

Explanation:
Length = 4 + 1
width = x + 2x
The area of rectangle = length . width
= (4 + 1) . (x + 2x)
= 5 . (3x)
= 15x
Therefore, area is 15x.

Question 41.
DIG DEEPER!
A square firepit with a side length of s feet is bordered by 1-foot square stones as shown.
a. How many stones does it take to border the firepit with two rows of stones? Use a diagram to justify your answer.
b. You border the fire pit with rows of stones. How many stones are in the nth row? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 70

Answer:
a. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 11
The number of stones = (s + 2)² + (s + 4)²
b. The area of the nth row square is (s + 2n)² ft².

Explanation:
a. The side length of the inner sqaure is s
The area of the sqaure = side²
= s²
The side length of the 1st row square is s + 1 + 1 = s + 2 ft
The area of the 1st row square = side²
= (s + 2)² ft²
The side length of the 2nd row of the sqaure is s + 2 + 2 = s + 4 ft
The area of the 2st row square = side²
= (s + 4)² ft²
So, the number of stones = (s + 2)² + (s + 4)²
b.
The side length of the nth row is s + 2n ft
The area of the nth row square = side²
= (s + 2n)² ft²

Question 42.
PUZZLE
Your friend asks you to perform the following steps.

  1. Pick any number except 0.
  2. Add 2 to your number.
  3. Multiply the result by 3.
  4. Subtract 6 from the result.
  5. Divide the result by your original number.

Your friend says, “The final result is 3!” Is your friend correct? If so, explain how your friend knew the final result. If not, explain why not.

Answer:
Yes, my friend is correct.

Explanation:

  1. Pick any number except 0.
    I have taken 2.
  2. Add 2 to your number.
    2 + 2 = 4
  3. Multiply the result by 3.
    4 x 3 = 12
  4. Subtract 6 from the result.
    12 – 6 = 6
  5. Divide the result by your original number.
    6/2 = 3

Lesson 3.4 Factoring Expressions

Factoring Expressions

EXPLORATION 1

Finding Dimensions
Work with a partner.
a. The models show the areas (in square units) of parts of rectangles.
Use the models to find the missing values that complete the expressions. Explain your reasoning.?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 71
b. Are the expressions you wrote in part(a) equivalent to the original expressions? Explain your reasoning.
c. Explain how you can use the Distributive Property to find rational number factors of an expression.

Try It

Factor the expression using the GCF.

Question 1.
15x + 25

Answer:
15x + 25 = 5(3x + 5)

Explanation:
Find the G.C.F of 15x and 25
15x = 3 . 5 . x
25 = 5. 5
The common prime factor is 5.
So, the GCF of 15x and 25 is 5
Use the GCF to factor the expression
15x + 25 = 5(3x) + 5(5)
= 5(3x + 5)

Question 2.
4y – 20

Answer:
4y – 20 = 4(y – 5)

Explanation:
Find the G.C.F of 4y and 20
15x = 2 . 2 . y
20 = 2 . 2 . 5
The common prime factors are 2 . 2 = 4
So, the GCF of 4y and 20 is 4
Use the GCF to factor the expression
4y – 20 = 4(y) – 4(5)
= 4(y – 5)

Question 3.
36c + 24d

Answer:
36c + 24d = 12(3c + 2d)

Explanation:
The G.C.F of 36c, 24d is
36c = 2 . 2 . 3 . 3 . c
24d = 2 . 3 . 2 . 2 . d
The common prime factors are 2 . 2 . 3 = 12
The G.C.F of 36c, 24d is 12
Use the GCF to factor the expression
36c + 24d = 12(3c) + 12(2d)
= 12(3c + 2d)

Try It

Factor out the coefficient of the variable term.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 72

Answer:
½n – ½ = ½(n – 1)

Explanation:
Given that,
½n – ½
½n = ½ . n
½ = ½ . 1
Use the distributive property to factor out ½.
½n – ½ = ½(n) – ½(1)
= ½(n – 1)

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 73

Answer:
3/4 p – 3/2 = 3/2(p/2 – 1)

Explanation:
Given that,
3/4 p – 3/2
3/2 = 3/2 . 1
3/4 p = 3/2 . 1/2 . p
Use the distributive property to factor out 3/2
3/4 p – 3/2 = 3/2(1/2 p) – 3/2(1)
= 3/2(p/2 – 1)

Question 6.
5 + 2.5q

Answer:
5 + 2.5q = 2.5(2 + q)

Explanation:
Given that,
5 + 2.5q
5 = 2.5 . 2
2.5 = 2.5 . 1
Use the distributive property to factor out 2.5
5 + 2.5q = 2.5(2) + 2.5(q)
= 2.5(2 + q)

Try It

Question 7.
Factor -5 out of -5d + 30.

Answer:
-5d + 30 = -5(d – 6)

Explanation:
Given that,
-5d + 30.
-5d = -5 . d
30 = 5 . 6 = -5 . -6
-5d + 30 = -5(d) – 5(-6)
= -5(d – 6)

Question 8.
Factor -4 out of -8k – 12.

Answer:
-8k – 12 = -4(2k + 3)

Explanation:
given that,
-8k – 12
-8k = -2 . 4 . k
-12 = -4 . 3
The G.C.f of -8k, -12 is -4.
-8k – 12 = -4(2k) – 4(3)
= -4(2k + 3)

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

FACTORING OUT THE GCF
Factor the expression using the GCF.

Question 9.
16n – 24

Answer:
16n – 24 = 8(2n – 3)

Explanation:
Find the G.C.F of 16n, 24
16n = 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . n
24 = 2 . 2 . 2 . 3
The G.C.F of 16n, 24 is 2 . 2 . 2 = 8
Use the GCF to factor the expression
16n – 24 = 8(2n)- 8(3)
= 8(2n – 3)

Question 10.
42a + 14b

Answer:
42a + 14b = 14(3a + b)

Explanation:
Find the G.C.F of 42a, 14b
42a = 2 . 3 . 7 . a
14b = 2 . 7 . b
The greatest common factor of 42a, 14b is 2 . 7 = 14
Use the GCF to factor the expression
42a + 14b = 14(3a) + 14(b)
= 14(3a + b)

FACTORING OUT A RATIONAL NUMBER
Factor out the coefficient of the variable term.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 74

Answer:
1/10 k – 7/10 = 1/10(k – 7)

Explanation:
Given that,
1/10 k – 7/10
The factors of 1/10, 7/10 are
1/10 = 1/10 . 1
7/10 = 7 . 1/10
Use the distributive property to factor out 1/10
1/10 k – 7/10 = 1/10 (k) – 1/10(7)
= 1/10(k – 7)

Question 12.
42 + 3.5h

Answer:
42 + 3.5h = 3.5(12 + h)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 42, 3.5
42 = 4 . 3 . 3.5
3.5 = 3.5 . 1
Use the distributive property to factor out 3.5
42 + 3.5h = 3.5(12) + 3.5(h)
= 3.5(12 + h)

FACTORING OUT A NEGATIVE NUMBER
Factor out the indicated number.

Question 13.
Factor -8 out of -3d + 56.

Answer:
-3d + 56 = -8(3d/8  – 7)

Explanation:
Get the factors of -3d, 56
-3d = 3d/8 . -8
56 = -7 . -8
Use the distributive property to factor out -8
-3d + 56 = -8(3d/8) – 8(-7)
= -8(3d/8  – 7)

Question 14.
Factor -12 out of -24k + 120.

Answer:
-24k + 120 = -12(2k – 10)

Explanation:
Get the factors of -24k, 120
-24k = -12. 2. k
120 = -12. -10
Use the distributive property to factor out -12
-24k + 120 = -12(2k) -12(-10)
= -12(2k – 10)

Question 15.
WRITING
Describe the relationship between using the Distributive Property to simplify an expression and to factor an expression. Give an example to justify your answer.

Answer:
The distributive property tells that a(b – c) = ab – ac and a(b + c) = ab + ac. It means you can seperate the common term and represent it as the factor.

Explanation:
The relationship between using the Distributive Property to simplify an expression and to factor an expression is mentioned here.
The distributive property tells that a(b – c) = ab – ac and a(b + c) = ab + ac. It means you can seperate the common term and represent it as the factor.
Let us take one example question 12x + 40y
The factors of 12x = 3 . 4 . x, the factors of 40y = 5 . 2 . 4 . y
The common factor is 4. So, take out the common factor and use the distribuyive property.
12x + 4y = 4(3x) + 4(10y)
= 4(3x + 10y)

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 16.
An organization drills 3 wells to provide access to clean drinking water. The cost (in dollars) to drill and maintain the wells for n years is represented by 34,500 + 540n. Write and interpret an expression that represents the cost to drill and maintain one well for n years.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 75

Answer:
The cost to drill and maintain one well for n years is 10(1150 + 18n).

Explanation:
The cost to drill and maintain 3 wells for n years is 34,500 + 540n
To get the drill and maintainance cost for 1 well, you need to find the factors
34500 = 10 . 10 . 3 . 5 . 23
540n = 3. 9 . 2 . 10 . n
The G.C.F of 34500 and 540n is 10 . 3 = 30
34,500 + 540n = 30(1150) + 30(18n)
= 30(1150 + 18n)
Divide the expression by 3 to get the drill and maintainance cost for 1 well
= 30(1150 + 18n)/ 3 = 10(1150 + 18n)
So, the cost to drill and maintain one well for n years is 10(1150 + 18n)

Question 17.
A photograph is 16 inches long and has an area of (16x + 96) square inches. A custom-made frame is 2 inches wide and costs $0.50 per square inch. Write an expression that represents the cost of the frame.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 76

Answer:
The cost of frame is $0.50(4x + 104)

Explanation:
Given that,
Length of photograph = 16 inches
Area of photograph = (16x + 96) sq inches
Factor out 16 from the expression
= 16(x) + 16(6) = 16(x + 6)
So, the width of the photograph is x + 6 inches
A custom-made frame is 2 inches wide and costs $0.50 per square inch.
The length of frame and photograph is 16 + 2 + 2 = 20 inches
The bredth of the frame & photograph is (x + 6 + 4) = x + 10 inches
Area of the photograph and frame = length . width
= 20(x + 10)
The area of frame = The area of photograph and frame – Area of photograph
= 20(x + 10) – (16x + 96)
= 20x + 200 – 16x – 96
= 4x + 104 sq inches
The cost of frame is $0.50 per square inch
So, the cost of the frame is 0.50(4x + 104).

Factoring Expressions Homework & Practice 3.4

Review & Refresh

Simplify the expression.

Question 1.
8(k – 5)

Answer:
8(k – 5) = 8k – 40

Explanation:
The given expression is 8(k – 5)
= 8(k) – 8(5)
= 8k – 40

Question 2.
-4.5(-6 + 2d)

Answer:
-4.5(-6 + 2d) = 27 – 9d

Explanation:
The given expression is -4.5(-6 + 2d)
= -4.5(-6) – 4.5(2d)
= 27 – 9d

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 77

Answer:
-1/4 (3g – 6 – 5g) = 3/2 + g/2

Explanation:
The given expression is -1/4 (3g – 6 – 5g)
= -1/4(-6 – 2g)
= -1/4(-6) – 1/4(-2g)
= 3/2 + 1/2 g

Find the difference. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 78

Answer:
2/3 – (-5/3) = 7/3

Explanation:
Given that,
2/3 – (-5/3) = 2/3 + 5/3
= (2 + 5)/3 = 7/3

Question 5.
-4.7 – 5.6

Answer:
-4.7 – 5.6 = -10.3

Explanation:
Given that,
-4.7 – 5.6 = -10.3

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 79

Answer:
-4(3/8) – (-2(1/4) = -17/8

Explanation:
Given that,
-4(3/8) – (-2(1/4) = -35/8 – (-9/4)
= -35/8 + 9/4 = (-35 + 18)/8
= -17/8

Evaluate the expression when x = 4, y = -6, and z = -3.

Question 7.
y ÷ z

Answer:
y ÷ z = 2

Explanation:
Given expression is y ÷ z
Put y = -6, and z = -3
y ÷ z = -6 ÷ -3
= 6 ÷ 3 = 2

Question 8.
\(\frac{4 y}{2 x}\)

Answer:
4y/2x = -3

Explanation:
Given expression is 4y/2x
Put x = 4, y = -6
4y/2x =(4 x -6)/ (2 x 4)
= -24/8 = -3

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 80

Answer:
(3x – 2y)/z = -8

Explanation:
Given expression is (3x – 2y)/z
Put x = 4, y = -6, and z = -3
= (3 x 4 – 2(-6))/-3
= (12 + 12)/-3
= 24/-3
= -24/3
= -8

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
FINDING DIMENSIONS
The model shows the area (in square units) of each part of a rectangle. Use the model to find the missing values that complete the expression. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 109.)

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 81

Answer:
2.25x + 3 = 1.5(1.5x + 2)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 2.25x, 3
2.25x = 1.5 . 1.5 . x
3 = 1.5 . 2
So, 2.25x + 3 = 1.5(1.5x) +1.5(2)
= 1.5(1.5x + 2)

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 82

Answer:
5/6 m + 2/3 n = 1/3(5m/2 + 2n)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 5m/6, 2n/3
5m/6 = 1/3 . 5/2 . m
2n/3 = 1/3 . 2 . n
So, 5/6 m + 2/3 n = 1/3(5m/2) + 1/3(2n)
= 1/3(5m/2 + 2n)

FACTORING OUT THE GCF
Factor the expression using the GCF.

Question 12.
9b + 21

Answer:
9b + 21 = 3(3b + 7)

Explanation:
The given expression is 9b + 21
Find the factors of 9b, 21
9b = 3 . 3 . b
21= 7 . 3
G.C.F of 9b, 21 is 3
Use the GCF to factor the expression
9b + 21 = 3(3b) + 3(7)
= 3(3b + 7)

Question 13.
32z – 48

Answer:
32z – 48 = 16(2z – 3)

Explanation:
The given expression is 32z – 48
Find the factors of 32z, -48
32z = 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . z
48 = 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . 3
G.C.F of 32z, -48 is 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 = 16
Use the GCF to factor the expression
32z – 48 = 16(2z) – 16(3)
= 16(2z – 3)

Question 14.
8x + 2

Answer:
8x + 2 = 2(4x + 1)

Explanation:
The given expression is 8x + 2
find the factors of 8x, 2
8x = 2 . 2 . 2 . x
2 = 2. 1
G.C.F of 8x, 2 is 2
Use the GCF to factor the expression
8x + 2 = 2(4x) + 2(1)
= 2(4x + 1)

Question 15.
3y – 24

Answer:
3y – 24 = 3(y – 4)

Explanation:
The given expression is 3y – 24
Find the factors of 3y, 24
3y = 3 . y
24 = 4 . 3
G.C.F of 3y, 24 is 3
Use the GCF to factor the expression
3y – 24 = 3(y) – 3(4)
= 3(y – 4)

Question 16.
14p – 28

Answer:
14p – 28 = 14(p – 2)

Explanation:
The given expression is 14p – 28
Find the factors of 14p, 28
14p = 7 . 2 . p
28 = 7 . 2 . 2
G.C.F of 14p, 28 is 14
Use the GCF to factor the expression
14p – 28 = 14(p) – 14(2)
= 14(p – 2)

Question 17.
6 + 16k

Answer:
6 + 16k = 2(3 + 8k)

Explanation:
The given expression is 6 + 16k
Find the factors of 6, 16k
6 = 2 . 3
16k = 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . k
G.C.F of 6, 16k is 2
Use the GCF to factor the expression
6 + 16k = 2(3) + 2(8k)
= 2(3 + 8k)

Question 18.
21 – 14d

Answer:
21 – 14d = 7(3 – 2d)

Explanation:
The given expression is 21 – 14d
Get the factors of 21, 14d
21 = 7 . 3
14d = 7 . 2 . d
G.C.F of 21, 14d is 7
Use the GCF to factor the expression
21 – 14d = 7(3) – 7(2d)
= 7(3 – 2d)

Question 19.
20z – 8

Answer:
20z – 8 = 4(5z – 2)

Explanation:
The given expression is 20z – 8
Get the factors of 20z, 8
20z = 5 . 2 . 2 . z
8 = 2 . 2 . 2
G.C.F of 20z, 8 is 4
Use the GCF to factor the expression
20z – 8 = 4(5z) – 4(2)
= 4(5z – 2)

Question 20.
15w + 65

Answer:
15w + 65 = 5(3w + 13)

Explanation:
The given expression is 15w + 65
Get the factors of 15w, 65
15w = 5 . 3 . w
65 = 5 . 13
G.C.F of 15w, 65 is 5
Use the GCF to factor the expression
15w + 65 = 5(3w) + 5(13)
= 5(3w + 13)

Question 21.
36a + 16b

Answer:
36a + 16b = 4(9a + 4b)

Explanation:
The given expression is 36a + 16b
Get the factors of 36a, 16b
36a = 3 . 2 . 3 . 2 . a
16b = 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . b
G.C.F of 36a, 16b is 4
Use the GCF to factor the expression
36a + 16b = 4(9a) + 4(4b)
= 4(9a + 4b)

Question 22.
21m – 49n

Answer:
21m – 49n = 7(3m + 7n)

Explanation:
The given expression is 21m – 49n
Get the factors of 21m, 49n
21m = 7 . 3 . m
49n = 7 . 7 . n
G.C.F of 21m, 49n
Use the GCF to factor the expression
21m – 49n = 7(3m) + 7(7n)
= 7(3m + 7n)

Question 23.
12 + 9g – 30h

Answer:
12 + 9g – 30h = 3(4 + 3g – 10h)

Explanation:
The given expression is 12 + 9g – 30h
Get the factors of 12, 9g, 30h
12 = 3 . 2 . 2
9g = 3 . 3 . g
30h = 3 . 5 . 2 . h
G.C.F of 12, 9g, 30h is 3
Use the GCF to factor the expression
12 + 9g – 30h = 3(4) + 3(3g) – 3(10h)
= 3(4 + 3g – 10h)

FACTORING OUT A RATIONAL NUMBER
Factor out the coefficient of the variable term.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 83

Answer:
1/7 a + 1/7 = 1/7 (a + 1)

Explanation:
The given expression is 1/7 a + 1/7
1/7a = 1/7 . a
1/7 = 1/7 . 1
Use the distributive property to factor out 1/7
1/7 a + 1/7 = 1/7(a) + 1/7(1)
= 1/7 (a + 1)

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 84

Answer:
1/3 b – 1/3 = 1/3(b – 1)

Explanation:
The given expression is 1/3 b – 1/3
1/3b = 1/3 . b
1/3 = 1/3 . 1
Use the distributive property to factor out 1/3
1/3 b – 1/3 = 1/3(b) – 1/3(1)
= 1/3(b – 1)

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 85

Answer:
3/8 d + 3/4 = 3/4(d/2 + 1)

Explanation:
The given expression is 3/8 d + 3/4
3/8 d = 3/4 . 1/2 . d
3/4 = 3/4 . 1
Use the distributive property to factor out 3/4
3/8 d + 3/4 = 3/4 (d/2) + 3/4(1)
= 3/4(d/2 + 1)

Question 27.
2.2x + 4.4

Answer:
2.2x + 4.4 = 2.2(x +2)

Explanation:
The given expression is 2.2x + 4.4
2.2x = 1.1 . 2 . x
4.4 = 1.1 . 2 . 2
Use the distributive property to factor out 2.2
2.2x + 4.4 = 2.2(x) + 2.2(2)
= 2.2(x +2)

Question 28.
1.5y – 6 = 1.5(y – 4)

Answer:
1.5y – 6

Explanation:
The given expression is 1.5y – 6
1.5y = 1.5 . y
6 = 1.5 . 2 . 2
Use the distributive property to factor out 1.5
1.5y – 6 = 1.5(y) – 1.5(4)
= 1.5(y – 4)

Question 29.
0.8w + 3.6

Answer:
0.8w + 3.6 = 0.8(w + 4.5)

Explanation:
The given expression is 0.8w + 3.6
0.8w = 0.8 . w
3.6 = 0.8 . 4.5
Use the distributive property to factor out 0.8
0.8w + 3.6 = 0.8(w) + 0.8(4.5)
= 0.8(w + 4.5)

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 86

Answer:
15/4 + 3/8 x = 3/4(5 + x/2)

Explanation:
The given expression is 15/4 + 3/8 x
15/4 = 3/4 . 5
3/8x = 3/4 . 1/2 . x
Use the distributive property to factor out 3/4
15/4 + 3/8 x = 3/4(5) + 3/4(x/2)
= 3/4(5 + x/2)

Question 31.
4h – 3

Answer:
4h – 3 = 2(2h – 1.5)

Explanation:
The given expression is 4h – 3
4h = 2 . 2 h
3 = 2 . 1.5
Use the distributive property to factor out 2
4h – 3 = 2(2h) – 2(1.5)
= 2(2h – 1.5)

Question 32.
0.15c – 0.072

Answer:
0.15c – 0.072 = 0.03(5c – 2.4)

Explanation:
The given expression is 0.15c – 0.072
0.15c = 0.03 . 5 . c
0.072 = 0.03 . 2.4
Use the distributive property to factor out 0.03
0.15c – 0.072 = 0.03(5c) – 0.03(2.4)
= 0.03(5c – 2.4)

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 87

Answer:
3/8 z + 1 = 1/8(3z + 8)

Explanation:
The given expression is 3/8 z + 1
3/8 z = 1/8 . 3 . z
1 = 1/8 . 8
Use the distributive property to factor out 1/8
3/8 z + 1 = 1/8(3z) + 1/8(8)
= 1/8(3z + 8)

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 88

Answer:
6s – 3/4 = 3(2s – 1/4)

Explanation:
The given expression is 6s – 3/4
6s = 3 . 2 . s
3/4 = 3 . 1/4
Use the distributive property to factor out 3
6s – 3/4 = 3(2s) – 3(1/4)
= 3(2s – 1/4)

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 89

Answer:
5/2 k – 2 = 1/2(5k – 4)

Explanation:
The given expression is 5/2 k – 2
5/2k = 1/2 . 5 . k
2 = 1/2 . 4
Use the distributive property to factor out 1/2
5/2 k – 2 = 1/2 (5k) – 1/2(4)
= 1/2(5k – 4)

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend factors the expression. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 90

Answer:
Wrong

Explanation:
Factors of 16p, 28
16p = 4 . 4 . p
28 = 4 . 7
Use the distributive property to factor out 4
16p – 28 = 4(4p) – 4(7)
= 4(4p – 7)

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 91

Answer:
Correct.

Explanation:
Find the factors of 2/3y, 14/3
2/3y = 2 . 1/3 . y
14/3 = 2 . 7 . 1/3
Use the distributive property to factor out 2/3
2/3y – 14/3 = 2/3(y) – 2/3(7)
= 2/3(y – 7)

FACTORING OUT A NEGATIVE NUMBER
Factor out the indicated number.

Question 38.
Factor -4 out of -8d + 20.

Answer:
-4(2d – 5)

Explanation:
Given expression is -8d + 20
Find factors of 8d, 20
-8d = -4 . 2 . d
20 = -4. -5
Use the distributive property to factor out -4
-8d + 20 = -4(2d) – 4(-5)
= -4(2d – 5)

Question 39.
Factor -6 out of 18z – 15.

Answer:
18z – 15 = -6(-3z + 5/2)

Explanation:
Given expression is 18z – 15
Find factors of 18z, -15
18z = -6 . -3 . z
-15 = -3 . 5/2 . 2
Use the distributive property to factor out -6
18z – 15 = -6(-3z) – 6(5/2)
= -6(-3z + 5/2)

Question 40.
Factor -0.25 out of 7g+ 3.5.

Answer:
7g+ 3.5 = -0.25(-28g – 14)

Explanation:
Given expression is 7g+ 3.5
Find factors of 7g, 3.5
7g = -0.25 x -28 x g
3.5 = -0.25 x -14
Use the distributive property to factor out -0.25
7g+ 3.5 = -0.25(-28g) -0.25(-14)
= -0.25(-28g – 14)

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 92

Answer:
-1/2 x + 6 = -1/2(x – 12)

Explanation:
Given expression is -1/2 x + 6
Find factors of -1/2 x, 6
-1/2x = -1/2 . x
6 = -1/2 . -4 . 3
Use the distributive property to factor out -1/2
-1/2 x + 6 = -1/2(x) – 1/2(-12)
= -1/2(x – 12)

Question 42.
Factor -1.75 out of -14m – 5.25n.

Answer:
-14m – 5.25n = -1.75(8m + 3n)

Explanation:
Given expression is -14m – 5.25n
Find factors of -14m, -5.25n
-14m = -1.75 . 8 . m
-5.25n = -1.75 . 3 . n
Use the distributive property to factor out -1.75
-14m – 5.25n = -1.75(8m) -1.75(3n)
= -1.75(8m + 3n)

Question 43.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 92.1

Answer:
-1/2 x – 5/4 y = -1/4(2x + 5y)

Explanation:
Given expression is -1/2 x – 5/4 y
Find factors of -1/2 x, – 5/4 y
-1/2x = -1/4 . 2. x
-5/4y = -1/4 . 5 . y
Use the distributive property to factor out -1/4
-1/2 x – 5/4 y = -1/4(2x) -1/4(5y)
= -1/4(2x + 5y)

Question 44.
STRUCTURE
A rectangle has an area of (4x + 12) square units. Write three multiplication expressions that can represent the product of the length and the width of the rectangle.

Answer:
Three multiplication expressions that can represent the product of the length and the width of the rectangle are1/2(4x + 24), 2(2x + 6), 4(x + 3).

Explanation:
Rectangle area is (4x + 12) square units
Find the factors of 4x, 12
4x = 2 . 2 . x
12 = 2 . 2 . 3
Use the distributive property to factor out 2
(4x + 12) = 2(2x) + 2(6)
= 2(2x + 6)
Area of rectangle = length . width
= 2(2x + 6)
Use the distributive property to factor out 4 of (4x + 12)
(4x + 12) = 4(x) + 4(3)
= 4(x + 3)
4x = 1/2 . 4x
12 = 1/2 . 6 . 4
Use the distributive property to factor out 1/2
(4x + 12) = 1/2(4x) + 1/2(24)
= 1/2(4x + 24)
So, three multiplication expressions that can represent the product of the length and the width of the rectangle are1/2(4x + 24), 2(2x + 6), 4(x + 3).

Question 45.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A square wrestling mat has a perimeter of (12x – 32) feet. Explain how to use the expression to find the length (in feet) of the mat. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 93

Answer:
The expression that represents the length of the side of the mat is 3x – 8 feet.

Explanation:
The wrestling mat is a sqauare
Let a is the length of the side of a square
The perimeter of mat = 4 x side = 4 . a
12x – 32 = 4a
In order to find the length of the side of te mat we have to solve the equation above for a
4a = 12x – 32
a = (12x – 32)/4
a = 3x – 8 feet
The expression that represents the length of the side of the mat is 3x – 8 feet.

Question 46.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A table is 6 feet long and 3 feet wide. You extend the length of the table by inserting two identical leaves table. The extended table is rectangular with an area of (18 + 6x) square feet. Write and interpret an expression that represents the length (in feet) of the extended table.

Answer:
The length of the extended table is 6 + 2x

Explanation:
A table is 6 feet long and 3 feet wide.
Table area = length. width
= 6 . 3 = 18 sq feet
The extended table is rectangular with an area of (18 + 6x) square feet.
Find factors of 18, 6x
18 = 3 . 6
6x = 3 . 2 . x
(18 + 6x) = 3(6) + 3(2x)
= 3(6 + 2x)
So, the length of the extended table is 6 + 2x

Question 47.
DIG DEEPER!
A three-dimensional printing pen uses heated plastic to create three-dimensional objects. A kit comes with one 3D-printing pen and packages of plastic. An art club purchases 6 identical kits for (180 + 58.5p) dollars. Write and interpret an expression that represents the cost of one kit.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 94

Answer:
The cost of one kit is (30 + 9.75) dollars.

Explanation:
Art club purchases 6 identical kits for (180 + 58.5p) dollars
Divide (180 + 58.5p) by 6 to get the cost of one kit
= (180 + 58.5p) / 6
= 180/6 + 58.5p/6
= 30 + 9.75
Hence, the cost of one kit is (30 + 9.75) dollars.

Question 48.
STRUCTURE
The area of the trapezoid is Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 95.1 square centimeters. Write two different pairs of expressions that represent the possible base lengths (in centimeters). Justify your answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 95

Answer:
(3x – 1)/2

Explanation:
Area of the trapezoid = height * (sum of parallel lengths)/2
= (3x/4 – 1/4)
= (3x – 1)/4
Here height is 1/2
So, base length is (3x – 1)/2

Expressions Connecting Concepts

3 Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
The runway shown has an area of (0.05x + 0.125) square miles. Write an expression that represents the perimeter (in feet) of the runway.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 96
Understand the problem
You know the area of the rectangular runway in square miles and the width of the runway in miles. You want to know the perimeter of the runway in feet.
Make a plan.
Factor the width of 0.05 mile out of the expression that represents the area to find an expression that represents the length of the runway. Then write an expression that represents the perimeter (in miles) of the runway. Finally, use a measurement conversion to write the expression in terms of feet.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.

Answer:
The perimeter of the runway is 2(x + 2.55) miles.

Explanation:
The runway shown has an area of (0.05x + 0.125)
= 0.05(x) + 0.05(2.5)
= 0.05(x + 2.5)
The length of the run way is (x + 2.5) miles
Width = 0.05
Perimeter of the runway = 2(length + width)
= 2(x + 2.5 + 0.05)
= 2(x + 2.55)

Question 2.
The populations of two towns after t years can be modeled by -300t + 7000 and -200t + 5500. What is the combined population of the two towns after years? The combined population of the towns in Year 10 is what percent of the combined population in Year 0?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 97

Answer:
The combined population of two towns after t years is -500t + 12500.
The combined population of the towns in 10 Years is 60% of the combined population in Year 0.

Explanation:
The populations of two towns after t years can be modeled by -300t + 7000 and -200t + 5500
The combined population of two towns after t years = -300t + 7000 + (-200t + 5500)
= -300t + 7000 – 200t + 5500
= -500t + 12500
The combined population of the towns in 10 Years = -500(10) + 12500
= -5000 + 12500 = 7500
The combined population in Year 0 = -500(0) + 12500
= 12500
The combined population of the towns in 10 Years is what percent of the combined population in Year 0 is 7500/12500 x 100
= 7500/125 = 60
So, The combined population of the towns in 10 Years is 60% of the combined population in Year 0.

Performance Task

Chlorophyll in Plants

At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Tropic Status.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 98

Expressions Chapter Review

3 Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 99

Graphic Organizers

You can use an Example and Non-Example Chart to list examples and non-examples of a concept. Here is an Example and Non-Example Chart for like terms.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 100

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.

  1. simplest form
  2. equivalent expressions
  3. linear expression
  4. Distributive Property
  5. factoring an expression

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 101

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 102

3.1 Algebraic Expressions (pp. 91–96)

Identify the terms and like terms in the expression.

Question 1.
z + 8 – 4z

Answer:
Like terms are z, -4z
Terms are z, 8, -4z

Explanation:
Like terms are z, -4z
Terms are z, 8, -4z

Question 2.
3n + 7 – n – 3

Answer:
Like terms are 3n, -n
Terms are 3n, 7, -n, -3

Explanation:
Like terms are 3n, -n
Terms are 3n, 7, -n, -3

Question 3.
10x2 – y + 12 – 2x2

Answer:
Like terms are10x², -2x²
Terms are 10x², -y, 12, -2x²

Explanation:
Like terms are10x², -2x²
Terms are 10x², -y, 12, -2x²

Simplify the expression.

Question 4.
4h – 8h

Answer:
4h – 8h = -4h

Explanation:
The given expression is 4h – 8h
= -4h

Question 5.
6.4r – 7 – 2.9r

Answer:
6.4r – 7 – 2.9r = 3.5r – 7

Explanation:
The given expression is 6.4r – 7 – 2.9r
= 3.5r – 7

Question 6.
2m – m – 7m

Answer:
2m – m – 7m = -6m

Explanation:
The given expression is 2m – m – 7m
= 2m – 8m = -6m

Question 7.
6y + 9 + 3y – 7

Answer:
6y + 9 + 3y – 7 = 9y + 2

Explanation:
The given expression is 6y + 9 + 3y – 7
= 9y + 2

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 103

Answer:
3/5 x + 19 – 3/20 x – 7 = 9x/20 + 12

Explanation:
The given expression is 3/5 x + 19 – 3/20 x – 7
= 3x/5 + 19 – 3x/20 – 7
= (12x – 3x)/20 + 19 – 7
= 9x/20 + 12

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 104

Answer:
2/3 y + 14 – 1/6 y – 8 = y/2 + 6

Explanation:
The given expression is 2/3 y + 14 – 1/6 y – 8
= (4y – y)/6 + 14 – 8
= 3y/6 + 6
= y/2 + 6

Question 10.
Write an expression with 4 different terms that is equivalent to 5x2 – 8. Justify your answer.

Answer:
5x² – 8 = 3x² + 2x² – 6 – 2

Explanation:
Given expression is 5x² – 8
= 3x² + 2x² – 6 – 2

Question 11.
Find the earnings for selling the same number of each type of sandwich. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 105

Answer:
The earnings in turkey is 2.25x + 1.15y
The earnings in Ham is 1.55x + 1.30y

Explanation:
Let us take the earnings for selling pretzel roll sandwich is x, begel sandwich is y
So, The earnings in turkey is 2.25x + 1.15y
The earnings in Ham is 1.55x + 1.30y

Question 12.
You buy the same number of brushes, rollers, and paint cans.
a. Write and interpret an expression in simplest form that represents the total amount of money you spend on painting supplies.
b. How much do you spend when you buy one set of supplies for each of 3 painters?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 106

Answer:
a. The total amount of money you spend on painting supplies is 32.67x
b. The cost of one set of supplies for each of 3 painters is $98.01.

Explanation:
a.
let us take you buy the x number of brushes, rollers, and paint cans.
So, the amount sped to buy those is 3.99x + 21.79x + 6.89x
= x(3.99 + 21.79 + 6.89)
= x(32.67)
b. The cost for 1 set of painting supplies = (3.99 + 21.79 + 6.89)
= 32.67
The cost for 3 sets of painting supplies = 3(32.67)
= 98.01

3.2 Adding and Subtracting Linear Expressions (pp. 97–102)

Find the sum.

Question 13.
(c – 4) + (3c + 9)

Answer:
(c – 4) + (3c + 9) = 4c + 5

Explanation:
The given expression is (c – 4) + (3c + 9)
= c – 4 + 3c + 9
= 4c + 5

Question 14.
(5z + 4) + (3z – 6)

Answer:
(5z + 4) + (3z – 6) = 8z- 2

Explanation:
The given expression is (5z + 4) + (3z – 6)
= 5z + 4 + 3z – 6
= 8z- 2

Question 15.
(-2.1m – 5) + (3m – 7)

Answer:
(-2.1m – 5) + (3m – 7) = 0.9m – 12

Explanation:
The given expression is (-2.1m – 5) + (3m – 7)
= -2.1m – 5 + 3m – 7
= 0.9m – 12

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 107

Answer:
(5/4 q + 1) + (q – 4) + (-1/4 q + 2) = 2q – 1

Explanation:
The given expression is (5/4 q + 1) + (q – 4) + (-1/4 q + 2)
= 5/4 q + 1 + q – 4 -1/4 q + 2
= (5q – q)/4 + q + 3 – 4
= 4q/4 + q – 1
= q + q – 1
= 2q – 1

Find the difference.

Question 17.
(x – 1) – (3x + 2)

Answer:
(x – 1) – (3x + 2) = -2x – 3

Explanation:
The given expression is (x – 1) – (3x + 2)
= x – 1 – 3x – 2
= -2x – 3

Question 18.
(4y + 3) – (2y – 9)

Answer:
(4y + 3) – (2y – 9) = 2y + 12

Explanation:
The given expression is (4y + 3) – (2y – 9)
= 4y + 3 – 2y + 9
= 2y + 12

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 108

Answer:
(1/2 h + 7) – (3/2 h + 9) = -h – 2

Explanation:
The given expression is  (1/2 h + 7) – (3/2 h + 9)
= 1/2 h + 7 – 3/2 h – 9
= (1 – 3)/2 h – 2
= -2h/2 – 2
= -h – 2

Question 20.
(4 – 3.7b) – (-5.4b – 4) – (1.2b + 1)

Answer:
(4 – 3.7b) – (-5.4b – 4) – (1.2b + 1) = 7 – 0.5b

Explanation:
The given expression is (4 – 3.7b) – (-5.4b – 4) – (1.2b + 1)
= 4 – 3.7b + 5.4b + 4 – 1.2b – 1
= 7 – 4.9b + 5.4b
= 7 – 0.5b

Question 21.
A basket holds apples. You pick (2n – 3) apples, and your friend picks (n + 4) apples. How many apples do you and your friend pick together? How many baskets do you need to carry all the apples? Justify your answer.

Answer:
The number of apples you and your friend picked is 3n + 1.

Explanation:
The number of apples you picked = 2n – 3
The number of apples your friend picked = n + 4
The number of apples you and your friend picked = (2n – 3) + (n + 4)
= 3n + 1
The number of apples you and your friend picked is 3n + 1

Question 22.
Greenland has a population of x people. Barbados has a population of about 4500 more than 5 times the population of Greenland. Find and interpret the difference in the populations of these two countries.

Answer:
The difference in the populations of these two countries is 4500 + 4x.

Explanation:
Greenland population = x
Barbados population = 4500 + 5x
The difference in the populations of these two countries = 4500 + 5x – x
= 4500 + 4x

3.3 The Distributive Property (pp. 103–108)

Simplify the expression.

Question 23.
2(a – 3)

Answer:
2(a – 3) = 2a – 6

Explanation:
The given expression is 2(a – 3)
= 2(a) – 2(3)
= 2a – 6

Question 24.
-3(4x – 10)

Answer:
-3(4x – 10) = -12x + 30

Explanation:
The given expression is -3(4x – 10)
= -3(4x) + 3(10)
= -12x + 30

Question 25.
-2.5(8 – b)

Answer:
-2.5(8 – b) = -20 + 2.5b

Explanation:
The given expression is -2.5(8 – b)
= -2.5(8) + 2.5(b)
= -20 + 2.5b

Question 26.
-7(1 – 3d – 5)

Answer:
-7(1 – 3d – 5) = 21d + 28

Explanation:
The given expression is -7(1 – 3d – 5)
= -7(-3d – 4)
= -7(-3d) – 7(-4)
= 21d + 28

Question 27.
9(-3w – 6.2 + 2w)

Answer:
9(-3w – 6.2 + 2w) = -9w – 55.8

Explanation:
The given expression is 9(-3w – 6.2 + 2w)
= 9(-w – 6.2)
= 9(-w) – 9(6.2)
= -9w – 55.8

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 109

Answer:
3/4 (8g – 1/4 – 2/3 g) = 11g/2 – 3/8

Explanation:
The given expression is 3/4 (8g – 1/4 – 2/3 g)

= 3/4((24g – 2g)/3 – 1/4)
= 3/4(22g/3 – 1/4)
= 3/4(22g/3) – 3/4(1/4)
= 11g/2 – 3/8

Question 29.
Mars has m moons. The number of moons of Pluto is one more than twice the number of moons of Mars. The number of moons of Neptune is one less than 3 times the number of moons of Pluto. Write and interpret a simplified expression that represents the number of moons of Neptune.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 109.1

Answer:
The number of moons of Neptune is 6m + 2.

Explanation:
Number of moons of marks = m
The number of moons of pluto = 1 + 2m
The number of moons of Neptune = 3(1 + 2m) – 1
= 3 + 6m – 1 = 6m + 2

Simplify the expression.

Question 30.
3( 2 + q) + 15

Answer:
3( 2 + q) + 15 = 21 + 3q

Explanation:
The given expression is 3( 2 + q) + 15
= 3(2) + 3(q) + 15
= 6 + 3q + 15
= 21 + 3q

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 110

Answer:
1/8 (16m – 8) – 17 = 2m – 18

Explanation:
The given expression is 1/8 (16m – 8) – 17
= 1/8(16m) + 1/8(-8) – 17
= 2m – 1 – 17
= 2m – 18

Question 32.
-1.5(4 – n) + 2.8

Answer:
-1.5(4 – n) + 2.8 = -3.2 + 1.5n

Explanation:
The given expression is -1.5(4 – n) + 2.8
= -1.5(4)- 1.5(-n) + 2.8
= -6 + 1.5n + 2.8
= -3.2 + 1.5n

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 111

Answer:
2/5 (d – 10) – 2/3 (d + 6) = -4d/15 – 8

Explanation:
The given expression is 2/5 (d – 10) – 2/3 (d + 6)
= 2/5(d) + 2/5(-10) – 2/3(d) – 2/3(6)
= 2d/5 – 4 – 2d/3 – 4
= (6d – 10d)/15 – 8
= -4d/15 – 8

Question 34.
The expression for degrees Fahrenheit is Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 112 where C represents degrees Celsius. The temperature today is 5 degrees Celsius more than yesterday. Write and simplify an expression for the difference in degrees Fahrenheit for these two days.

Answer:
The difference in degrees Fahrenheit for these two days 9 degrees celsius.

Explanation:
The expression for degrees Fahrenheit is 9/5 C + 32
The temperature today is 5 degrees Celsius more than yesterday.
Today temperature = 9/5 (x + 5) + 32
Yesterday Temperature = 9/5 x + 32
The difference in degrees Fahrenheit for these two days = 9/5 (x + 5) + 32 – ( 9/5 x + 32)
= 9/5(x) + 9/5(5) + 32 – 9/5 x – 32
= 9x/5 + 9 + 32 – 9x/5 – 32
= 9

3.4 Factoring Expressions (pp. 109–114)

Factor the expression using GCF.

Question 35.
18a – 12

Answer:
18a – 12 = 6(3a – 2)

Explanation:
The G.C.F of 18a, 12 is
18a = 2 . 3 . 3 . a
12 = 3 . 2 . 2
The common prime factors are 2 . 3 = 6
The G.C.F of 18a, 12 is 6
Use the GCF to factor the expression
18a – 12 = 6(3a) – 6(2)
= 6(3a – 2)

Question 36.
2b + 8

Answer:
2b + 8 = 2(b + 3)

Explanation:
The G.C.F of 2b, 8 is
2b = 2 . b
8 = 2 . 2 . 2
The common prime factors are 2
The G.C.F of 2b, 8 is 2
Use the GCF to factor the expression
2b + 8 = 2(b) + 2(3)
= 2(b + 3)

Question 37.
9 – 15x

Answer:
9 – 15x = 3(3 – 5x)

Explanation:
The G.C.F of 9, 15x is
9 = 3 . 3
15x = 3 . 5 . x
The common prime factor is 3
The G.C.F of 9, 15x is 3
Use the GCF to factor the expression
9 – 15x = 3(3) – 3(5x)
= 3(3 – 5x)

Factor out the coefficient of the variable term.

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 112.1

Answer:
1/4 y + 3/8 = 1/4(y + 3/2)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 1/4 y, 3/8
1/4y = 1/4 . y
3/8 = 1/4 . 1/2 . 3
Use the distributive property to factor out 1/4
1/4 y + 3/8 = 1/4(y) + 1/4(3/2)
= 1/4(y + 3/2)

Question 39.
1.7j – 3.4

Answer:
1.7j – 3.4 = 1.7(j – 2)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 1.7j, 3.4
1.7j = 1.7 . j
3.4 = 1.7 . 2
Use the distributive property to factor out 1.7
1.7j – 3.4 = 1.7(j) – 1.7(2)
= 1.7(j – 2)

Question 40.
-5p + 20

Answer:
-5p + 20 = 5(-p + 4)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 5p, 20
5p = 5 . p
20 = 5 . 4
Use the distributive property to factor out 5
-5p + 20 = 5(-p) + 5(4)
= 5(-p + 4)

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 113

Answer:
3/2 x – 9/4y = -3/4(-2 + 3y)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 3/2 x , -9/4 y
3/2x = -3/4 . -2
-9/4 y = -3/4 . 3 . y
Use the distributive property to factor out -3/4
3/2 x – 9/4y = -3/4(-2) – 3/4(3y)
= -3/4(-2 + 3y)

Question 42.
You and 4 friends are buying tickets for a concert. The cost to buy one ticket is c dollars. If you buy all the tickets together, there is a discount and the cost is (5c – 12.5) dollars. How much do you save per ticket when you buy the tickets together?

Answer:
The amount saved by buying all tickets is 12.5 dollars.

Explanation:
The cost per 1 ticket is c
The cost to buy 5 tickets = 5c dollars
If you buy all the tickets together, there is a discount and the cost is (5c – 12.5) dollars
The amount saved by buying all tickets = 5c – (5c – 12.5) dollars
= 5c – 5c + 12.5
= 12.5 dollars

Question 43.
The rectangular pupil of an octopus is estimated to be 20 millimeters long with an area of (20x – 200) square millimeters. Write an expression that represents the perimeter (in millimeters) of the octopus pupil.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 114

Answer:
Perimeter the octopus pupil is 2x milli meters.

Explanation:
The length of an octopus pupil = 20 millimeters
Area of an octopus = (20x – 200) sq milli meters
Factor 20 out of (20x – 200)
= 20(x) – 20(10)
= 20(x – 20)
So, the width of the octopus pupil = x – 20 milli meters
The perimeter of octopus pupil = 2(length + width)
= 2(20 + (x – 20))
= 2(20 + x – 20)
= 2x milli meters
Perimeter the octopus pupil is 2x milli meters.

Question 44.
A building block has a square base that has a perimeter of (12x – 9) inches. Explain how to use the expression to find the length (in inches) of the wall shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 114.1

Answer:
The length of the wall is 7(3x – 9/4) inches

Explanation:
The perimeter of the square base = (12x – 9) inches
4 x length of the base = (12x – 9)
length of the base = (12x/4 – 9/4)
= (3x – 9/4) inches
The length of wall = 7(3x – 9/4)

Expressions Practice Test

3 Practice Test

Question 1.
Identify the terms and like terms in 4x + 9x2 – 2x + 2.

Answer:
The terms are 4x, 9x², -2x, 2
The like terms are 4x -2x

Explanation:
The given expression is 4x + 9x² – 2x + 2
The terms are 4x, 9x², -2x, 2
The like terms are 4x -2x

Simplify the expression.

Question 2.
8x – 5 + 2x

Answer:
8x – 5 + 2x = 10x – 5

Explanation:
The given expression is 8x – 5 + 2x
= 10x – 5

Question 3.
2.5w – 3y + 4w

Answer:
2.5w – 3y + 4w = 6.5w – 3y

Explanation:
The given expression is 2.5w – 3y + 4w
= 6.5w – 3y

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 115

Answer:
5/7 x + 15 – 9/14 x – 9 = x/14 + 6

Explanation:
The given expression is 5/7 x + 15 – 9/14 x – 9
= (10x – 9x)/14 + 15 – 9
= x/14 + 6

Question 5.
(3j + 11) + (8j – 7)

Answer:
(3j + 11) + (8j – 7) = 11j + 4

Explanation:
The given expression is (3j + 11) + (8j – 7)
= 3j + 11 + 8j – 7
= 11j + 4

Question 6.
(2r – 13) – (-6r + 4)

Answer:
(2r – 13) – (-6r + 4) = 8r – 17

Explanation:
The given expression is (2r – 13) – (-6r + 4)
= 2r – 13 + 6r – 4
= 8r – 17

Question 7.
-2(4 – 3n)

Answer:
-2(4 – 3n) = -8 + 6n

Explanation:
The given expression is -2(4 – 3n)
= -2(4) – 2(-3n)
= -8 + 6n

Question 8.
3(5 – 2n) + 9n

Answer:
3(5 – 2n) + 9n = 15 + 3n

Explanation:
The given expression is 3(5 – 2n) + 9n
= 3(5) – 3(2n) + 9n
= 15 – 6n + 9n
= 15 + 3n

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 116

Answer:
1/3 (6x + 9) – 2 = 2x + 1

Explanation:
The given expression is 1/3 (6x + 9) – 2
= 1/3 (6x) + 1/3(9) – 2
= 2x + 3 – 2
= 2x + 1

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 117

Answer:
3/4 (8p + 12) + 3/8 (16p – 8) = 12p + 6

Explanation:
The given expression is 3/4 (8p + 12) + 3/8 (16p – 8)
= 3/4(8p) + 3/4(12) + 3/8(16p) + 3/8(-8)
= 3(2p) + 3(3) + 3(2p) + 3(-1)
= 6p + 9 + 6p – 3
= 12p + 6

Question 11.
-2.5(2s – 5) – 3(4.5s – 5.2)

Answer:
-2.5(2s – 5) – 3(4.5s – 5.2) = -18.5s + 28.1

Explanation:
The given expression is -2.5(2s – 5) – 3(4.5s – 5.2)
= -2.5(2s) – 2.5(-5) – 3(4.5s) – 3(-5.2)
= -5s + 12.5 – 13.5s + 15.6
= -18.5s + 28.1

Factor out the coefficient of the variable term.

Question 12.
6n – 24

Answer:
6n – 24 = 6(n – 4)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 6n, 24
6n = 6 . n
24 = 6 . 4
Use the distributive property to factor out 6
6n – 24 = 6(n) – 6(4)
= 6(n – 4)

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 118

Answer:
1/2 q + 5/2 = 1/2(q + 5)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 1/2 q, 5/2
1/2q = 1/2 . q
5/2 = 5 . 1/2
Use the distributive property to factor out 1/2
1/2 q + 5/2 = 1/2(q) + 1/2(5)
= 1/2(q + 5)

Question 14.
-4x + 36

Answer:
-4x + 36 = 4(-x + 9)

Explanation:
Find the factors of 4x, 36
4x = 4 . x
36 = 4 . 9
Use the distributive property to factor out 4
-4x + 36 = 4(-x) + 4(9)
= 4(-x + 9)

Question 15.
Find the earnings for giving a haircut and a shampoo to m men and w women. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 119

Answer:
The earnings for giving a haircut and a shampoo to women is 45w + 12w
The earnings for giving a haircut and a shampoo to men is 15m + 7m

Explanation:
The earning for giving haircut to women is 45w
The earning for giving shampoo to women is 12w
The earning for giving haircut to men is 15m
The earning for giving shampoo to men is 7m
The earnings for giving a haircut and a shampoo to women is 45w + 12w
The earnings for giving a haircut and a shampoo to men is 15m + 7m

Question 16.
The expression 15x + 11 represents the perimeter of the trapezoid. What is the length of the fourth side? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 120

Answer:
The length of the fourth side of trapezoid is 6x + 5.

Explanation:
Perimeter of the trapezoid = 15x + 11
2x + 3 + 3x + 4 + 4x – 1 + fourth side length = 15x + 11
9x + 7 – 1 + fourth side length = 15x + 11
9x + 6 + fourth side length = 15x + 11
fourth side length = (15x + 11) – (9x + 6)
= 15x + 11 – 9x – 6
= 6x + 5

Question 17.
The maximum number of charms that will fit on a bracelet is Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 121, where d is the diameter(in centimeters) of the bracelet.
a. Write and interpret a simplified expression that represents the maximum number of charms on a bracelet.
b. What is the maximum number of charms that fit on a bracelet that has a diameter of 6 centimeters?

Answer:
a. The maximum number of charms that will fit on a bracelet = 3d – 2
b. The maximum number of charms that fit on a bracelet that has a diameter of 6 centimeters is 16.

Explanation:
a. The maximum number of charms that will fit on a bracelet = 3(d – 2/3)
= 3(d) – 3(2/3)
= 3d – 2
b. The maximum number of charms that fit on a bracelet that has a diameter of 6 centimeters is 3(6) – 2
= 18 – 2 = 16

Question 18.
You expand a rectangular garden so the perimeter is now twice the perimeter of the old garden. The expression 12w + 16 represents the perimeter of the new garden, where w represents the width of the old garden.
a. Write an expression that represents the perimeter of the old garden. Justify your answer.
b. Write an expression that represents the area of the old garden.

Answer:
a. Perimeter of old rectangular garden is 6w + 8
b. The area of the old garden is 12w.

Explanation:
a. New garden perimeter = 2 * perimeter of old garden
(12w + 16) = 2 * perimeter of old garden
(12w/2 + 16/2) = Perimeter of old garden
6w + 8 = Perimeter of old garden
b. Perimeter of old rectangular garden is 6w + 8
Find the factors of 6w, 8
6w = 2 . 3 . w
8 = 2 . 2 . 2
Use the distributive property to factor out 2
6w + 8 = 2(3w) + 2(4)
= 2(3w + 4)
Perimeter of old garden = 2(length + width) = 2(3w + 4)
So, length of the garden is 3w, width of the garden is 4
The area of old garden = length . width
= 3w . 4 = 12w

Expressions Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
What is the simplified form of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 121.1
A. -3.6x
B. 6x – 5
C. 1.4x – 5
D. 3.7x – 7.3

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 122

Answer:
C. 1.4x – 5

Explanation:
The given expression is 3.7x – 5 – 2.3x
= 1.4x – 5

Question 2.
What is the value of the expression when c = 0 and d = -6?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 123
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 124

Answer:
-9.

Explanation:
The give expression is (cd – d²)/4
Put c = 0, d= -6 in above expression
= (0 . -6 – (-6)²)/4
= -(36)/4
= -9

Question 3.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 125
F. -52
G. -24
H. 24
I. 52

Answer:
G. -24

Explanation:
The given expression is -38 – (-14)
= -38 + 14 = -24

Question 4.
The daily low temperatures for a week are shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 126
What is the mean low temperature of the week?
A. −2°F
B. 6°F
C. 8°F
D. 10°F

Answer:
The mean low temperature of the week is 6°F.

Explanation:
The list of low temperatures are -2°F, -3°F, -1°F, 8°F, 10°F, 12°F, 18°F
The mean temperature of the week = sum of the observations/ number of observations
= (-2 – 3 – 1 + 8 + 10 + 12 + 18)/7
= (-6 + 48)/7
= 42/7
= 6°F
The mean low temperature of the week is 6°F.

Question 5.
You and a friend collect seashells on a beach. After h minutes, you have collected (11 + 2h) seashells and your friend has collected (5h – 2) seashells. How many total seashells have you and your friend collected?
F. 7h + 9
G. 3h – 13
H. 16h
I. 7h + 13

Answer:
F. 7h + 9

Explanation:
The number of seashells collected by you = (11 + 2h)
The number of seashells collected by your friend = (5h – 2)
The total seashells have you and your friend collected = The number of seashells collected by you + The number of seashells collected by your friend
= 11 + 2h + 5h – 2
= 9 + 7h

Question 6.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 127

Answer:
-0.28 ÷ (-0.07) = 4

Explanation:
The value of the expression is -0.28 ÷ (-0.07)
= 0.28 ÷ 0.07 = 4

Question 7.
Which list is ordered from least to greatest?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 128

Answer:
D.

Explanation:
A. -3/4, -1/2, 3/8, -1/4, 7/8 is not in the order
B. -1/2, -1/4, 3/8, -3/4, 7/8 is not in the order
C. 7/8, 3/8, -1/4, -1/2, -3/4 is not in the order
D. -3/4, -1/2, -1/4, 3/8, 7/8 is in the order from least to greatest.

Question 8.
Which number is equivalent to the expression shown?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 129

Answer:
H. 6(1/8)

Explanation:
-2(1/4) – (-8(3/8)) = -9/4 + 67/8
= (-18 + 67)/8 = 49/8
= 6(1/8)

Question 9.
What is the simplified form of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 130
A. 15x + 30
B. x – 12
C. 13x + 12
D. -11x

Answer:
B. x – 12

Explanation:
The given expression is 7x – 2(3x + 6)
= 7x – 2(3x) – 2(6)
= 7x – 6x – 12
= x – 12

Question 10.
Which expression is not equivalent to the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 131
F. 6(12m – 10)
G. 4(18m – 15)
H. 12m
I. 12(6m – 5)

Answer:
I. 12(6m – 5)

Explanation:
The given expression is 72m – 60
Find the factors of 72m, 60
72m = 2 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 2 . m
60 = 2 . 2 . 3 . 5
The G.C.F of 72m, 60 is 2 . 2 . 3 = 12
72m – 60 = 12(6m) – 12(5)
= 12(6m – 5)

Question 11.
You want to buy a bicycle with your friend. You have $43.50 saved and plan to save an additional $7.25 every week. Your friend has $24.50 saved and plans to save an additional $8.75 every week.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 132
Part A
Simplify and interpret an expression that represents the amount of money you and your friend save after weeks.
Part B
After 10 weeks, you and your friend use all of the money and buy the bike. How much does the bike cost? Who pays more towards the cost of the bike? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
A. The total amount of money you and your friend saved after x weeks is 68 + 16x
B. The cost of the bike is 228 dollars
You will pay more money towards the bike.

Explanation:
A. Let the number of weeks we need to save be x
The amount you saved 43.50 + 7.25x
The amount your friend saved = 24.50 + 8.75x
The total amount of money you and your friend saved after x weeks is 43.50 + 7.25x + 24.50 + 8.75x
= 68 + 16x
B. The amount saved after 10 weeks is
The amount you saved = 43.50 + 7.25(10) = 43.50 + 72.5 = 116
The amount your friend saved = 24.50 + 8.75(10) = 24.50 + 87.5 = 112
The cost of bike = The amount you saved + The amount your friend saved
= 116 + 112 = 228 dollars
You will pay more money towards the bike.

Question 12.
Your friend evaluated 3 + x2 ÷ y when x = 2 and y = 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 3 Expressions 133
What should your friend do to correct his error?
A. Divide 3 by 4 before subtracting.
B. Square -2, then divide.
C. Divide -2 by 4, then square.
D. Subtract 4 from 3 before dividing.

Answer:
B. Square -2, then divide.

Explanation:
The given expression is 3 + x2 ÷ y
Put x = 2 and y = 4
= 3 + 2² ÷ 4
= 3 + 4 ÷  4
= 3 + 1
= 4

Conclusion:

To help you out with Chapter 3 Expressions we have jotted down all the exercise problems in your Big Ideas Math Text Book 7th Grade Solution Key. Just tap on the respective link you wish to prepare and learn the fundamentals included within it easily. Bookmark our ccssanswers.com website to get the solutions of all Grade 7 chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics

Enhance your knowledge by practicing the problems from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics. Get the free pdfs of Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Statistics from ccssanswers.com Take the given Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics as references and score well in the exams.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Statistics

Step by Step Solutions is provided by subject experts at Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Statistics. It is necessary for the students to check out the topics before they start the preparation. We have prepared the question and answers according to the latest syllabus. All you have to do is tap the below links and check the questions.

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Samples and Populations

Lesson: 2 Using Random Samples to Describe Populations

Lesson: 3 Comparing Populations

Lesson: 4 Using Random Samples to Compare Populations

Chapter: 8 – Statistics 

Statistics STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Comparing Dogs
Although dogs and wolves are the same species, they can have very different characteristics. How are dogs and wolves similar?
Watch the STEAM Video “Comparing Dogs.” Then answer the following questions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 1
1. In the video, the dogs Devo and Etta are walking in a population park. Describe the of the dogs shown in the sample video. Then describe a of the dogs shown in the video. Explain your reasoning.
2. Dogs, wolves, and dingos are all the same species. This species is called Canis lupus
a. Describe one possible sample of the species. Explain your reasoning.
b. You want to know the average height of an animal in the Canis lupus species. Would you use the entire population of the species or would you use a sample to gather data? Explain.
c. The entire Canis lupus species is a sample of what population? Explain.

Answer:
1. In the video, the dogs Devo and Etta are walking in a population park. The population of the dogs is very big. They may differ from color, size, hair, size and skin yet they all are the same species. Here they have shown Canis Lupus bread dogs. They all are the same bone body structured dogs yet  are differently living for their specification of work performance.

2. Dogs, wolves, and Dingo’s are all the same species. This species is called Canis lupus.
a. A wolf with a grey coat living in forested northern regions of North America is one possible sample of the species for Canis Lupus because they resemble like wolfs yet they match to dogs bone structure and near to dogs D.N.A.

b. If you want to know the average height of an animal in the Canis lupus species you should  use a sample to gather data because they are grand children of extinct dogs species having same D.N.A yet different in color, shapes, hair because they having been changing from one generation to another.

c. The entire Canis lupus species is a sample of what population of mammals and under this genus he listed the dog-like carnivores including domestic dogs, wolves, and jackals.

Performance Task

Estimating Animal Populations
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given a double box-and-whisker plot that represents the weights of male and female gray wolves.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 2
You will be asked to compare the weights of male and female gray wolves. Why might a researcher want to compare data from two different groups of wildlife?

Statistics Getting Ready for Chapter 8

Chapter Exploration
A population is an entire group of people or objects. A sample is a part of the population. You can use a sample to make an inference, or conclusion about a population.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 3
1. Work with a partner. Identify the population and the sample in each pair.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 4
Answer:
A population is an entire group of people or objects. A sample is a part of the population.

a) In the given picture, the school bus students is the population and the class room students  is sample because individual class strength is used for collecting total school population.

b) In the given picture, the grizzly bear with GPS collars in a park is used as sample to collect the population of grizzly bear in a park.

c) In the given picture, 150 quarters coins are used as sample for the calculating all the total  collection in all quarters circulation .

d) In the given picture, 10 fiction books in the library are used as sample to get the total count of all fiction books present in the library.

2. Work with a partner. When a sample is random, each member of the population is equally likely to be selected. You want to know the favorite activity of students at your school. Tell whether each sample is random. Explain your reasoning.
a. members of the school band
b. students in your math class
c. students who enter your school in a morning
d. school newspaper readers

Answer:
c) Students who enter your school in a morning is a random sample because every student data entering into the school is collected and can help to know the favorite activity of them.

Explanation:
2. a) Members of the school band is a not random sample because it gives only the data of the students in the school band not others.

b) Students in your math class is a not random sample because it gives the data of the students who like math.

c) Students who enter your school in a morning is a random sample because every student data entering into the school is collected and can help to know the favorite activity of them.

d) School newspaper readers is not a random sample because here it only collects the data of the students who are in that respective activity of newspaper readers not other students.

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
population
unbiased sample
sample
biased sample

Lesson 8.1 Samples and Populations

A population is an entire group of people or objects. A sample is a part of a population. You can gain information about a population by examining samples of the population.

EXPLORATION 1

Using Samples of Populations
Work with a partner. You want to make conclusions about the favorite extracurricular activities of students at your school.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 1
a. Identify the population. Then identify five samples of the population.
b. When a sample is selected at random, each member of the population is equally likely to be selected. Are any of the samples in part (a) selected at random? Explain your reasoning.
c. How are the samples below different? Is each conclusion valid? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 2
d. Write a survey question about a topic that interests you. How can you choose people to survey so that you can use the results to make a valid conclusion?

Answer:
Option B is correct to make conclusions about the favorite extracurricular activities of students at your school.

Explanation:
Option B is correct because the information is collected randomly and gives the accurate result conclusions about the favorite extracurricular activities of students at your school.

An unbiased sample  is representative of a population. It is selected at random unbiased sample and is large enough to provide accurate data. A biased sample is not representative of a population. One or more parts of the population are favored over others
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 3

Try It

Question 1.
WHAT IF?
You want to estimate the number of twelfth-grade students in a high school who ride a bus to school. Which sample is unbiased? Explain.
Answer:
Option A is correct.

Explanation:
Option A is correct to collect the twelfth- grade population. Then identity five samples of the population n make a conclusion of the students who come in bus to school.

Question 2.
You want to estimate the number of eighth-grade students in your school who find it relaxing to listen to music. You consider two samples.

  • fifteen randomly selected members of the band
  • every fifth student whose name appears on an alphabetical list of eighth-grade students
    Which sample is unbiased? Explain.

Answer:
Every fifth student whose name appears on an alphabetical list of eighth-grade students.

Explanation:
Every fifth student whose name appears on an alphabetical list of eighth-grade students is a unbiased sample because here it covers large data n gives us the correct data about the students who are relaxed while listening to music.

Question 3.
Four out of five randomly chosen teenagers support the new land fill. So, you conclude that 80% of the residents of your town support the new land fill. Is the conclusion valid? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, its a valid conclusion.

Explanation:
Yes, its a valid conclusion because 4 out of 5 people in the town means 80% of the people are supporting the new land bill mathematically.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
WRITING
You want to estimate the number of students in your school who play a school sport. You ask 40 honors students at random whether they play a school sport. Is this sample biased or unbiased? Explain.
Answer:
Yea, its a unbiased sample.

Explanation:
Yes, its a unbiased sample because it gives the information about the number of students who play a school sport in the school randomly and accurate data.

Question 5.
ANALYZING A CONCLUSION
You survey 50 randomly chosen audience members at a theater about whether the theater should produce a new musical. The diagram shows the results. You conclude that 80% of the audience members support production of a new musical. Is your conclusion valid? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 4
Answer:
Yes, its a valid conclusion.

Explanation:
Yes, its a valid conclusion because 80% of 50 people in the audience members at a theater is equal to 40 people, they support production of a new musical. Out of which 20% of 50 people is equal to 10 people, who are against the production of a new musical.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 6.
You want to estimate the mean photo size on your cell phone. You choose 30 photos at random from your phone. The total size of the sample is 186 megabytes. Explain whether you can use the sample to estimate the mean size of photos on your cell phone. If so, what is your estimate?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 5
Answer:
Yes, we can use it for sample to estimate the mean size of photos on your cell phone.

Explanation:
Yes, we can use it for sample to estimate the mean size of photos on your cell phone because it allows to estimate the size of the cell phone.
Mean size of photos = total size of the sample / photos chose
= 186 × 30
= 6.2 bytes.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 50 randomly chosen employees of a company how many books they read each month. The diagram shows the results. There are 600 people employed by the company. Estimate the number of employees who read at least one book each month.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 6
Answer:
Number of employees who read at least one book each month = 12

Explanation:
Total number of chosen employee = 50
Total number of people employed = 600
Number of employees who read at least one book each month = Total number of chosen employee / Total number of people employed
= 600 × 50
= 12.

Samples and Populations Homework & Practice 8.1

Review & Refresh

Design a simulation that you can use to model the situation. Then use your simulation to find the experimental probability.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 7
Question 1.
The probability that a meal at a restaurant is overcooked is 10%. Estimate the probability that exactly 1 of the next 2 meals is overcooked.

Answer:
The probability that exactly 1 of the next 2 meals is overcooked = 3.34%

Explanation:
The probability that a meal at a restaurant is overcooked is 10%
The probability that exactly 1 of the next 2 meals is overcooked = out of 3  meals 1 meal is overcooked of 10%
= 1 × 3 × 10%
= 10 × 3 %
= 3.34 %

Question 2.
The probability that you see a butterfly during a nature center tour is 80%. The probability that you see a turtle is 40%. What is the probability of seeing both?

Answer:
The probability of seeing both = 60%

Explanation:
The probability that you see a butterfly during a nature center tour = 80%.
The probability that you see a turtle = 40%
The probability of seeing both = 80 % + 40%/2
= 120 × 2%
= 60%

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 3.
2x – 5 < 9
Answer:
Graph:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-Solve the inequality.-Graph the solution3

Explanation:
2x – 5 < 9
add 5 on both sides
=> 2x – 5 + 5 < 9 + 5
=>2x < 14
=> Divide both sides by 2
=> 2x ÷ 2 < 14 ÷ 2
=> x < 7.

Question 4.
5q + 2 ≥ – 13
Answer:
Graph:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-Solve the inequality.-Graph the solution4

Explanation:
5q + 2 ≥ – 13
Subtract 2 from both sides
=> 5q + 2 – 2 ≥ – 13 – 2
=> 5q ≥ –  15
Divide both sides by 5
=> 5q ÷  5 ≥ – 15 ÷ 5
=> q ≥ – 3

Question 5.
2 > 6 – 3r
Answer:
Graph :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-Solve the inequality.-Graph the solution5

Explanation:
2 > 6 – 3r
subtract 6 from both sides.
2 – 6 > 6 – 3r – 6
=> -4 > -3r
=> -4 ÷ -3 > r
=> 1. 333 > r

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING SAMPLES OF POPULATIONS You ask 50 randomly chosen artists in your town about their favorite art form. Determine whether your conclusion is valid. Justify your answer. Favorite Art Form(See Exploration 1, p. 325.)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 8
Question 6.
You conclude that drawing is the favorite art form of 60% of artists in your town.
Answer:
The conclusion made is not valid that drawing is the favorite art form of 60% of artists in your town.

Explanation:
Total strength of town people = 50
Number of people interested in drawing = 20
Percentage of people interested in drawing = Total strength of town people \times Number of people interested in drawing
= 20 × 50 ×100
= 40%
Hence, the conclusion made is not valid that drawing is the favorite art form of 60% of artists in your town.

Question 7.
You conclude that ceramics is the favorite art form of 10% of people in your town.

Answer:
The conclusion made is  valid that ceramics is the favorite art form of 10% of people in your town.

Explanation:
Total strength of town people = 50
Number of people interested in ceramics = 5
Percentage of people interested in drawing = Total strength of town people / Number of people interested in ceramics
= 5 × 50 × 100
= 10%
Hence, the conclusion made is  valid that ceramics is the favorite art form of 10% of people in your town.

IDENTIFYING POPULATIONS AND SAMPLES Identify the population and the sample.
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 9
Answer:
Residents of New Jersey is the population.
Residents of Ocean Country is the sample.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 10
Answer:
4 cards is the sample.
All cards in a desk is the population.

IDENTIFYING BIASED AND UNBIASED SAMPLES Determine whether the sample is biased or unbiased. Explain.
Question 10.
You want to estimate the number of books students in your school read over the summer. You survey every fourth student who enters the school.

Answer:
Its a unbiased sample.

Explanation:
You can estimate the number of students who are reading books over the summer by the survey every fourth student who enters the school  because its a unbiased sample which gives you the accurate rate of information.

Question 11.
You want to estimate the number of people in a town who think that a park needs to be remodeled. You survey every 10th person who enters the park.

Answer:
Its a biased sample.

Explanation:
You cannot estimate the number of people in a town who think that a park needs to be remodeled by the survey asking every 10th person who enters the park because its a biased sample as every person entering into the park would like it to be remodeled and its not going to be accurate.

Question 12.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You want to determine the number of students in your school who have visited a science museum. You survey 50 students at random. Twenty have visited a science museum, and thirty have not. So, you conclude that40% of the students in your school have visited a science museum. Is your conclusion valid? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 11
Answer:
Its a valid Conclusion that 40% of the students in your school have visited a science museum.

Explanation:
Total number of students the survey taken = 50
Number of students in visited science museum = 20
Number of students who did not visit science museum = 30
Percentage of students visited a science museum = Total number of students the survey taken – Number of students in visited science museum
= 20 ×50 × 100
= 40%

Question 13.
USING A SAMPLE
Which sample is better for making an estimate? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 12

Answer:
Sample B -A random sample of 500 pencils from 1 machines  is better than Sample A – A random sample of 500 pencils from 20 machines

Explanation:
Sample A = A random sample of 500 pencils from 20 machines.
Sample B = A random sample of 500 pencils from 1 machines.

Sample B -A random sample of 500 pencils from 1 machines  is better than Sample A – A random sample of 500 pencils from 20 machines  because its gives us the accurate and sufficient data of pencils produced and how many are defective among them. Its a biased sample with correct data.

CONDUCTING SURVEYS Determine whether you should survey the population or a sample. Explain.

Question 14.
You want to know the average height of seventh graders in the United States.
Answer:
Survey on sample of the seventh graders should be taken.

Explanation:
Survey on sample of  the seventh graders should be taken because the total population in United States is very large and its very difficult to survey on the population. Sample survey will be easy and we can get the information  regarding the average height of seventh graders in the United States accurately.

Question 15.
You want to know the favorite types of music of students in your homeroom.
Answer:
Survey on Population should be taken.

Explanation:
Survey on the population in your homeroom should be taken because its a very small area of some limited people and its better to take than sample survey to know the favorite types of music of students.

Question 16.
CRITICAL THINKING

Does increasing the size of a sample necessarily make the sample more representative of a population? Give an example to support your explanation.

Answer:
Yes, increasing the size of the sample necessarily makes the sample more representative of a population. A representative sample is a group or set chosen from a larger statistical population according to specified characteristics. A random sample is a group or set chosen in a random manner from a larger population.

Explanation:
Yes, increasing the size of the sample necessarily makes the sample more representative of a population lead to more accurate or representative results at the same time when it comes to surveying large populations, bigger isn’t always better.
For Example:
You want to know the average height of students in the UK .

Question 17.
LOGIC
A person surveys residents of a town to determine whether a skateboarding ban should be overturned. Describe how the person can conduct the survey so that the sample is biased toward overturning the ban.
Answer:
Yes, the sample is biased toward overturning the ban.

Explanation:
If the person takes the survey on a skateboarding ban should be overturned from every tenth person living in a town then the person surveys is  going to be a biased  sample toward overturning the ban because every tenth person wishes to overturning on the ban.

Question 18.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You ask 20 randomly chosen environmental scientists from your state to name their favorite way to eliminate waste. There are 200 environmental scientists in your state. Estimate the number of environmental scientists in your state whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 13
Answer:
Number of environmental scientists in your state whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling = 20

Explanation:
Total number of scientists in your state = 200
Number of scientists randomly ask in your state = 20
Out of 20 randomly asked scientists whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling = 2
=> 2 × 20 = 10%
Number of environmental scientists in your state whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling = Total number of scientists in your state x Out of 20 randomly asked scientists whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling \times100
= 200  × 10 × 100 = 20.

Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
To predict the result of a mayoral election, you survey 50 likely voters at random. The diagram shows the results. Describe whether the sample can be used to predict the outcome of the election. If so, what is your prediction for the number of votes received by the winner assuming that500 people vote?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 14
Answer:
Yes,  the sample can be used to predict the outcome of the election because  it lets us know how voters are going to vote and whose going to be the winner.
Number of votes candidate A gets  = 330

Explanation:
Number of voters randomly taken in the survey = 50
Total number of people voting = 500
Yes,  the sample can be used to predict the outcome of the election because  it lets us know how voters are going to vote and whose going to be the winner.
According to survey candidate A gets 33 out of 50.
=> 33 ÷ 50 ×100 = 66 %
According to survey candidate B gets 12 out of 50.
=> 12 ÷ 50 ×100 = 24%
According to survey others gets 5 out of 50.
=> 5 ÷ 50 ×100 = 10%
So, the winner according to survey prediction is candidate A.
Number of votes candidate A gets  = 66% of 500
=> 330 votes.

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 100 randomly chosen dog owners in your town how many dogs they own. The results are shown in the table. There are 500 dog owners in your town.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 15
a. Estimate the median number of dogs per dog owner in your town. Justify your answer.
b. Estimate the mean number of dogs per dog owner in your town. Justify your answer.

Answer:
a) The median number of dogs per dog owner in your town = 4.
b) The mean number of dogs per dog owner in your town = 20.

Explanation:
a) The median is the middle number in a sorted, ascending or descending, list of numbers and can be more descriptive of that data set than the average.
The sorted order of the frequency = 1 3 4 38 54
The median number of dogs per dog owner in your town = 4

b) Explanation:
The mean is the average  of the numbers.
Number of  listed dogs = 5
Total sum of the frequency of the dogs listed = 54 + 38 + 3 + 1 + 4 = 100
The mean number of dogs per dog owner in your town = 100 ÷ 5 = 20

Lesson 8.2 Using Random Samples to Describe Populations

EXPLORATION 1

Exploring Variability in Samples
Work with a partner. Sixty percent of all seventh graders have visited a planetarium.
a. Design a simulation using packing peanuts. Mark 60% of the packing peanuts and put them in a paper bag. What does choosing a marked peanut represent?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 1
b. Simulate a sample of 25 students by choosing peanuts from the bag, replacing the peanut each time. Record the results.
c. Find the percent of students in the sample who have visited a planetarium. Compare this value to the actual percent of all seventh graders who have visited a planetarium.
d. Record the percent in part(c) from each pair in the class. Use a dot plot to display the data. Describe the variation in the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 2

Try It

Question 1.
Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rap music. Describe the center and the variation of the estimates.

Answer:
The Variance is defined as the average of the squared differences from the Mean.
The center of the estimates = 2
The variation of the estimates = 0.64
The Standard Deviation of the estimates = 0.8

Explanation:
Survey randomly took in the school = 20
Total number of students in the school = 840
Number of students who choose rap music by me =  1
Number of students who choose rap music by friend A = 2
Number of students who choose rap music by friend B = 1
Number of students who choose rap music by friend C = 1
Number of students who choose rap music by friend D = 3
The center of the estimates =  1 2 3 = 2
Mean of the estimates =  1+ 2 + 1 + 1 + 3 ÷5= 8 ÷ 5 = 1.6
The variation of the estimates =  (1- 1.6)^2 + (2 – 1.6)^2 +(1- 1.6)^2 + (1- 1.6)^2 + (3 – 1.6)^2 ÷ 5
= (-0.6)^2 + (0.4)^2 + (-0.6)^2 + (-0.6)^2 + (1.4)^2 ÷ 5
= 0.36 + 0.16 + 0.36 + 0.36 + 1.96  ÷  5
= 3.20 ÷ 5
= 0.64
The Standard Deviation of the estimates = \sqrt{0.64} = 0.8

Question 2.
Repeat Example 2, but estimate the medians instead of the means.
Answer:
Median of the students who choose pop music = 5

Explanation:
The six estimates are that students with part time jobs work = 5 7 7 3 7 7
8 and 9 hours per week. The estimates have an average  range from 9 – 5 = 4 hours.
Sorted estimates that students with part time jobs work =  3 5 7
Median of the students who choose pop music = 5

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
Use each sample in Example 1 to make an estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rock music. Describe the variation of the estimates.

Answer:
The variation of the estimates = 1.84

Explanation:
Estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rock music = 4 7 5 4 3
Sorted estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rock music = 3 4 5  7
Mean of the estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rock music = 4 +7 +5 +4 +3 ÷  5
= 4.6
The variation of the estimates = (4-4.6)^2 + ( 7-4.6)^2 + ( 5 – 4.6)^2 + ( 4-4.6)^2 + ( 3 – 4.6)^2 ÷ 5
= (-0.6)^2 + ( 2.4)^2 + ( 0.4)^2 + (-0.6)^2  + (- 1.6)^2 ÷ 5
= 0.36 + 5.76 + 0.16 + 0.36 + 2.56 ÷ 5
= 9.2 ÷ 5
= 1.84

Question 4.
ESTIMATING AN AVERAGE OF A POPULATION
You want to know the mean number of hours music students at your school practice each week. At each of three music classes you randomly survey 10 students. Your results are shown. Use all three samples to make one estimate for the mean number of hours music students practice each week.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 3
Answer:
Mean value of hours for number of students practiced for each week for all three classes A,B,C
= 4.93

Explanation:
Mean value  of hours for number of students practiced for each week of class A
= 6 + 5 + 5 + 6 + 4 + 6 + 8 + 5 + 5 + 2+ 6 \div 10
= 58 ÷ 10
= 5.8
Mean value of hours for number of students practiced for each week of class B
= 0 + 6 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 3 + 4 + 9 ÷ 10
= 48 ÷ 10
=4.8
Mean value of hours for number of students practiced for each week of class C
= 4 + 5 + 6 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 2 + 3 + 12 + 1 ÷ 10
=  42 ÷10
= 4.2
Mean value of hours for number of students practiced for each week for all three classes A,B,C
= 5.8 + 4.8 + 4.2 ÷3
= 14.8 ÷ 3
= 4.93

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
Repeat Example 3 with the assumption that 50% of all seventh graders have visited a planetarium.

Answer:
So, most of the samples are within 10% of the actual population that of all seventh graders have visited a planetarium.

Explanation:
The actual percentage of 60% , the number of samples is 200 and the sample size is 50.
The estimates are clustered around 50% , most are between 45 and 60.
So, most of the samples are within 10% of the actual population.

Question 6.
Forty percent of all seventh graders have visited a state park. How closely do 200 random samples of 50 students estimate the percent of seventh graders who have visited a state park? Use a simulation to support your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 4
Answer:
Its a biased sample of 200 random samples of 50 students for  estimating  the percent of seventh graders who have visited a state park.

Explanation:
40% of the all seventh graders have visited a state park.
Total samples taken = 200
Number of students randomly taken = 50
Its a biased sample of 200 random samples of 50 students for estimating the percent of seventh graders who have visited a state park because it does not gives the correct information of the seventh graders and they  may or may not be the visitors of the park.

Using Random Samples to Describe Populations Homework & Practice 8.2

Review & Refresh

You ask 100 randomly chosen high school students whether they support a new college in your town. Determine whether your conclusion is valid.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 5
Question 1.
You conclude that 85% of high school students in your town support the new college.
Answer:
No, its not a valid conclusion.

Explanation:
Because it is randomly chosen for only 100 people for one set.
It can be 85  do not support for another set of 100 people who are randomly chosen.
You support the statement if total 85 % of the people in the town support the new college .

 

Question 2.
You conclude that 15% of residents in your town do not support the new college.
Answer:
No, its not a valid conclusion.

Explanation:
No, its not a valid conclusion because this percentage which is taken is only for respected chosen students not on the total population of the town who does not prefer new colleges in the town.

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 3.
What percent of 30 is 12?
Answer:
3.6 is the percent of 30 is 12.

Explanation:
30 = 100 %
X = 12
Cross multiply the equation
=> X × 100 = 30 ×  12
=> X ×  100 = 360
=> X = 360 × 100
=> X = 3.6

Question 4.
17 is what percent of 68?
Answer:
25 percent of 68 is 17.

Explanation:
68 = 100%
17 = X%
Cross multiply the equation
X × 68 = 17 × 100
=> X × 68 = 1700
=> X = 1700 ÷ 68
=> X = 25

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
EXPLORING VARIABILITY IN SAMPLES Thirty percent of all seventh graders own a bracelet. Explain whether the sample closely estimates the percentage of seventh graders who own a bracelet. (See Exploration 1, p. 331.)
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 6
Question 5.
50 seventh graders, 14 own a bracelet
Answer:
Its  not a valid conclusion that 50 seventh graders 14 own a bracelet.

Explanation:
Thirty percent of all seventh graders own a bracelet.
30 percent of 50 seventh graders.
=> 30 × 50 ÷ 100
=> 1500 ÷ 100
=> 15.
Its  not a valid conclusion that 50 seventh graders 14 own a bracelet because 15 out of 30 own a bracelet.

Question 6.
30 seventh graders, 3 own a bracelet
Answer:
Its  not a valid conclusion that 30 seventh graders 3 own a bracelet.

Explanation:
30 percent of 30 seventh graders.
30 × 30 ÷ 100
=> 900 ÷ 100
=> 9.

Question 7.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
A store owner wants to know how many of her 600 regular customers prefer canned vegetables. Each of her three cashiers randomly surveys 20 regular customers. The table shows the results.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 7
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of regular customers of the store who prefer fresh vegetables.
b. Describe the variation of the estimates.

Answer:
a) The Estimation for the number of regular customers of the store who prefer fresh
vegetables = 47.
b) The variation of the estimates = 12.6889.

Explanation:
a) Total number of regular customers to the store = 600
Total number of cashier who takes the survey = 3
Number of customers they have taken survey = 3 × 20 = 60
According to the three survey, number of customers who willing to take fresh vegetables
= (11 + 14 + 12) = 47

b. Describe the variation of the estimates.
Mean of estimates = (11 + 14 + 12) ÷ 3 = 47 ÷ 3 = 15.67
Variation of the estimates = (11 – 15.67)^2 + (14 – 15.67)^2  + (12 – 15.67)^2 ÷ 3
= ( -4.67)^2 + (-1.67)^2 + (-3.67)^2 ÷ 3
= 21.8089 + 2.7889 + 13.4689 ÷ 3
= 38.0667 ÷ 3
= 12.6889

Question 8.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
An arcade manager wants to know how many of his 750 regular customers prefer to visit in the winter. Each of five state members randomly surveys 25 regular customers. The table shows the results.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 8
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of regular customers who prefer to visit in the winter.
b. Describe the variation of the estimates.
Answer:
a) An estimate for the number of regular customers who prefer to visit in the winter according to survey sample = 52.

b) Variation of the estimates = 1.04

Explanation:
a) Total number of regular customers who prefer to visit in the winter taken in the five survey sample = 25 × 5 = 125
An estimate for the number of regular customers who prefer to visit in the winter according to survey sample = 11 + 10 +9 + 10 +12
= 52

b) Mean of estimates = 11 + 10 +9 + 10 +12 ÷ 5 = 52 ÷ 5 = 10.4
Variation of the estimates = (11 – 10.4)^2 + ( 10 -10.4)^2 + (9  – 10.4)^2 + ( 10 – 10.4)^2 + ( 12 -10.4)^ 2 ÷5
= ( 0.6)^2 + ( -0.4)^2 + ( -1.4)^2 + ( -0.4)^2 + (1.6)^2 ÷5
= 0.36 + 0.16 + 1.96 + 0.16 + 2.56 ÷5
= 5.2 ÷5
= 1.04

Question 9.
ESTIMATING A MEAN OF A POPULATION
A park ranger wants to know the mean number of nights students in your school plan to camp next summer. The park ranger randomly surveys 10 students from each class. The results are shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 9
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the mean number of nights students in your school plan to camp next summer. Describe the variation of the estimates.
b. Use all four samples to make one estimate for the mean number of nights students plan to camp next summer.

Answer:
a) The variation of the estimates is quite increasing from one to other sample.

b) One estimate for the mean number of nights students plan to camp next summer = 3.3.

Explanation:
a)  Mean value of  Sample A= 0+5+2+3+0+6+0+10+3+0 ÷ 10 =  29 ÷ 10 = 2.9
Variation of Sample A= (0-2.9)^2 + (5-2.9)^2 + (2-2.9)^2 + (3-2.9)^2 + (0-2.9)^2 + (6-2.9)^2 + (0-2.9)^2 + (10-2.9)^2 + (3-2.9)^2 + (0-2.9)^2  ÷ 10
= (-2.9)^2 + (2.1)^2 + (-0.9)^2 + (0.1)^2 + (-2.9)^2 + (3.1)^2 + (-2.9)^2 + (3.1)^2 + (0.1)^2 + (-2.9)^2  ÷ 10
= 8.41 + 4.41 + 0.81 + 0.01 + 8.41 + 9.61 + 8.41 + 9.61 +0.01 + 8.41 ÷ 10
= 58.1 ÷ 10
=5.81

Mean value of Sample B= 14+0+0+6+5+0+1+2+2+5 ÷ 10 = 35 ÷ 10 = 3.5
Variation of Sample B= (14-3.5)^2 + (0-3.5)^2 + (0-3.5)^2 + (6-3.5)^2 + (5-3.5)^2 + (0-3.5)^2 + (1-3.5)^2 + (2-3.5)^2 + (2-3.5)^2 + (5-3.5)^2 ÷ 10
= (10.5)^2 + (-3.5)^2 + (-3.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (-3.5)^2 + (-2.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 ÷ 10
= 110.25 + 12.25 + 12.25 + 6.25 + 2.25 + 12.25 + 6.25 +2.25 + 2.25 +2.25 ÷ 10
= 168.5 ÷ 10
= 16.85

Mean value of Sample C = 8+8+2+3+4+1+0+0+0+6 ÷ 10 = 32 ÷ 10 = 3.2
Variation of Sample C= (8-3.2)^2 + (8-3.2)^2 + (2-3.2)^2 + (3-3.2)^2 + (4-3.2)^2 + (1-3.2)^2 + (0-3.2)^2 + (0-3.2)^2 + (0-3.2)^2 + (6-3.2)^2 ÷ 10
= (4.8)^2 + (4.8)^2 + (-1.2)^2 + (-0.2)^2 + (0.8)^2 + (-2.2)^2 + (-2.2)^2 + (-2.2)^2 + (-3.2)^2 + (2.8)^2 ÷ 10
= 23.04 + 23.04 + 1.44 + 0.04 + 0.64 + 4.84 + 4.84 + 4.84 + 10.24 + 7.84 ÷ 10
= 80.8 ÷ 10
= 8.08

Mean value = 10+10+5+6+1+0+0+0+4+0 ÷ 10 = 36 ÷ 10 = 3.6
Variation of Sample D= (10-3.6)^2 + (10-3.6)^2 + (5-3.6)^2 + (6-3.6)^2 + (1-3.6)^2 + (0-3.6)^2 + (0-3.6)^2 + (0-3.6)^2 + (4-3.6)^2 + (0-3.6)^2 ÷ 10
= (6.4)^2 + (6.4)^2 + (1.4)^2 + (2.4)^2 + (-2.6)^2 + (-3.6)^2 + (-3.6)^2 + (-3.6)^2 + (0.4)^2 + (-3.6)^2 ÷ 10
= 40.96 + 40.96 + 1.96 + 5.76 + 6.76 + 12.96 + 12.96 + 12.96 + 0.16 +12.96 ÷ 10
= 148.4 ÷ 10
= 14.84

b) One estimate for the mean number of nights students plan to camp next summer
= 2.9 +3.5+3.2+3.6 ÷ 4
= 13.2 ÷ 4
= 3.3

Question 10.
ESTIMATING A MEDIAN OF A POPULATION
Repeat Exercise 9, but estimate the medians instead of the means.
Answer:
Median value of Sample A = 3 + 5 ÷2 = 8 ÷ 2 = 4.
Median value of Sample B = 2 + 5 ÷2 = 7 ÷ 2 = 3.5.
Median value of Sample C = 3 + 4 ÷ 2 = 7 ÷ 2 = 3.5.
Median value  of Sample C = 4 + 5 ÷ 2 = 9 ÷ 2 = 4.5.

Explanation:
Sample A= 0+5+2+3+0+6+0+10+3+0
Ascending order of  Sample A= 0 2 3 5 6 10
Median value of Sample A = 3 + 5 ÷2 = 8 ÷ 2 = 4

Sample B = 14+0+0+6+5+0+1+2+2+5
Ascending order of Sample B = 0 1 2 5 6 14
Median value of Sample B = 2 + 5 ÷2 = 7 ÷ 2 = 3.5

Sample C = 8+8+2+3+4+1+0+0+0+6
Ascending order of Sample C = 0 1 2 3 4 6 8
Median value of Sample C = 3 + 4 ÷ 2 = 7 ÷ 2 = 3.5

Sample D = 10+10+5+6+1+0+0+0+4+0
Ascending order of Sample D = 0 1 4 5 6 10
Median value  of Sample C = 4 + 5 ÷ 2 = 9 ÷ 2 = 4.5

Question 11.
DESCRIBING SAMPLE VARIATION
Fifty-five percent of doctors at a hospital prescribe a particular medication. A simulation with 200 random samples of 50 doctors each is shown. Describe how the sample percentages vary.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 10
Answer:
There is a lot of change in the range of the sample percentages with respective to the frequency. The graph increases from 0 range and reaches to the highest range and later it declines to zero in the last.

Explanation:
The range of sample variation  of frequency from 0.30 to 0.50 is from 0 to 18, here the graph range constantly increases from low to some extent.
The range of the sample variation of frequency from 0.50 to 0.60 is from 18 to 22, here the graph range continuously increased and reached to the highest range and declines to middle range.
The range of the sample variation of frequency from 0.60 to 0.80 is from  18 to 0 , here the graph declines and in between its increases and in the last it declines to zero completely.

Question 12.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Sixty percent of vacationers enjoy water parks. Use technology to generate 20 samples of size 100. How closely do the samples estimate the percent of all vacationers who enjoy water parks?
Answer:
Samples vary slightly in terms of their estimation of  the percent of all vacationers who enjoy water parks compared to the people who does not enjoy the water parks. Out of 2000 total vacationers,  50.65% of  people loves the water parks that compared to 49.35% of  the people who does not like water parks.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-MODELING-REAL-LIFE-12
Total number of vacationers = 20 × 100 = 2000
Total number of vacationers who enjoys the water parks = 48 + 53+ 65 + 79+ 87 +11 + 54 + 25 + 36 + 68 + 51 + 45 + 85 + 73 + 44 + 66 + 33 + 28 + 2 + 60 = 1013
Percent of Total number of vacationers who enjoys the water parks = 1013 ÷2000 ×100
= 50. 65 %
Total number of vacationers who enjoys the water parks  = 52 + 47 + 35 + 21 + 13 + 89 + 46 + 75 + 64 + 32 + 49 + 55 + 15 + 27 + 56 + 34 + 67 + 72 + 98 + 40 = 987.
Percent of Total number of vacationers who enjoys the water parks  = 987 ÷2000 ×100
= 49.35%

Question 13.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Thirty percent of all new wooden benches have a patch of chipped paint. Use technology to simulate 100 random samples of 10 wooden benches. How closely do the samples estimate the percent of all wooden benches with a patch of chipped paint?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 11
Answer:
The samples estimate the percent of all wooden benches with a patch of chipped paint are completely differ because almost 79 % are having chipped paint on the wooden bench and 21 % does not have chipped paint on the wooden bench. Majority goes with yes.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-MODELING-REAL-LIFE-13
This means 79% of the students are having patch of chipped paint and 21% of the students are not having patch of chipped paint.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You want to predict whether a proposal will be accepted by likely voters. You randomly sample 3 different groups of 100 likely voters. The results are shown. Do you expect the proposal to be accepted? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 12
Answer:
No, I think proposal is not to be accepted because out of 300 people opposing people strength is more than supporting people the proposal.

Explanation:
Number of people in the each group = 100
Total number of people in the three groups = 3 × 100 = 300
Number of people who are supporting the proposal in three samples A, B and C
= 48 + 52 +47 = 147
Number of people who are opposing the proposal in three samples A, B and C
= 52 + 48 + 53 = 153
No, I think proposal is not to be accepted because out of 300 people opposing people strength is more than supporting people the proposal.

Question 15.
CRITICAL THINKING
Explain why public opinion polls use sample sizes of more than 1000 people instead of using a smaller sample size.
Answer:
Public opinion polls use sample sizes of more than 1000 people instead of using a smaller sample size because sampling more than 1000 people normally wont add much to the accuracy  given the extra time an money it would cost.

Explanation:
Opinion polls are usually designed to represent the opinions of a population by conducting a series of questions and then extrapolating generalities in ratio or within confidence intervals.
Public opinion polls use sample sizes of more than 1000 people instead of using a smaller sample size because sampling more than 1000 people normally wont add much to the accuracy  given the extra time an money it would cost.
For example, in a population of 5000, 10% would be 500. In a population of 200,000, 10% would be 20,000. This exceeds 1000, so in this case the maximum would be 1000. Even in a population of 200,000, sampling 1000 people will normally give a fairly accurate result.

Lesson 8.3 Comparing Populations

EXPLORATION 1

Comparing Two Data Distributions
Work with a partner.
a. Does each data display show? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 1
b. How can you describe the overlap of two data distributions using words? How can you describe the overlap numerically?
c. In which pair of data sets is the difference in the measures of center the most significant? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
a)  Yes, the female students and male students data is overlapping as they are having same common sleeping hours in them from 8.5 to 10.5 hours and other data distribution gets overlapping from 59 to 63 inches.

b) The data distribution hours for sleeping for both female and male students is commonly same and in the heights both of them are completely different as they is no common height point in them as same. The female students and male students data is overlapping as they are having same common sleeping hours in them  from 8.5 to 10.5 hours. Here, the data distribution gets overlapping from 59 to 63 inches.

c) There is a lot of difference in the graph of age chart data distribution that of  the first and second data distribution because in the center of 4, there is a big difference of 25 in this set.

Explanation:
a) Overlap means to have something in common with. Female students sleeping hours starts from 5 to 10.5 hours, whereas male students sleeping hours starts from 6 to 10.5 hours. The female students and male students data is overlapping as they are having same common sleeping hours in them  from 8.5 to 10.5 hours.

b) In the first data distribution, Female students and male students maximum sleep for 4 hours. Female students sleeping hours are maximum from 5 to 9 hours and male students sleeping hours are maximum from 6 to 8.5 hours. In the second distribution, Female students height starts from 57 to 63 inches. Male students height starts from 59 to 65 inches. Here, the data distribution gets overlapping from 59 to 63 inches. Maximum height of male students is 62 inches whereas female students is 60 inches.

c) The data distribution in the center is more significant because it shows almost same difference. the center difference in data set 1 of  9.5 – 8.5 = 1hour  for female students and male students 9 – 7 = 2hours. And maximum height of the both female and male students and who attended the class more. In the chart, the center of difference  of exercises at  the center of 4, class of 10am has total 9+7+3+2+2+2= 25 and the 8pm class strength is zero, which is a big difference in this set.


Try It
Question 1.
Which data set is more likely to contain a value of 70?
Answer:
No data sets has more likely to contain a value of 70 in them.

Explanation:
About 25% in the data set A data values are between 80 to 130.
About 50%  in the data set B data values are between  80 to 100.

Question 2.
Which data set is more likely to contain a value that differs from the center by no more than 3?
Answer:
Data set B has more likely to contain a value that differs from the center by no more than 3.

Explanation:
Data set A center is 60.
Data set B center is 90.
Difference in the intervals from center of set A = 60 to 30 = 3
Difference in the intervals from center of set B = 90 to 80=1

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
Each value in the dot plot for Data set A increases by 30. How does this affect your answers? Explain.
Answer:
If each value in the dot plot for Data set A increases by 30 there is going to be a difference of 2 increased value in the mean value and MAD Value of both the Data Sets.

Explanation:
Data Set A                                                            Data Set B
Mean = 810 ÷ 15 = 54                                         Mean = 420 ÷ 15 = 28
MAD = 244 ÷ 15 = 16                                        MAD = 236 ÷ 15 = 16
Difference in Mean ÷ MAD = 26 ÷ 16 = 1.6
If 30 increased in Data Set A:
=> Mean = 810+30 ÷ 15 = 840 ÷ 15 = 56
=> MAD = 244 + 30 ÷ 15 = 274 ÷ 15 = 18.267


Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
COMPARING POPULATIONS
The double dot plot shows two data sets. Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation. Then express the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 2
Answer:
So, the difference in the means is about 1.25 times the MAD.

Explanation:
Total value of Data Set A = 1 +2+2+3+3+3+3+4+4+5 = 30
Mean of Data Set A = 30 ÷ 10 = 3
MAD of Data Set A = |∣−3∣ + |2−3∣ +|2−3∣ +|3−3∣ +|3−3∣ + |3−3∣ + |3−3∣ + |4−3∣ + |4−3∣ + |5−3∣ ÷ 10
= 2 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0+ 1 + 1 +2 ÷ 10
= 8 ÷ 10
= 0.8
Variance of Data Set A :
= (1 – 3 )^2 + (2 – 3 )^2 + (2 – 3)^2 + (3 – 3)^2 + (3 – 3)^2 + (3 – 3)^2 + (3 – 3)^2 + (4 – 3)^2 + (4 – 3)^2 +
(5 -3)^2  ÷10
= (-2)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 + (2)^2  ÷10
= 4 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 +1 + 4 ÷10
= 12 ÷10
= 1.2

Total value of Data Set B = 1+1+1+1+2+2+2+2+3+3+3+3 = 24
Mean of Data Set B = 24 ÷ 12 = 2
MAD of  Data Set B = |∣−2∣ + |1−2∣ +|1−2∣ +|1−2∣ +|2−2∣ + |2−2∣ + |2−2∣ + |2−2∣ + |3−2∣ + |3−2∣ +  |3−2∣ + |3−2∣ ÷ 12
= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1
= 8
= 0.8
Variance of Data Set B :
(1 -2)^2 + (1 -2)^2 + (1 -2)^2 + (1 -2)^2 + (2 – 2)^2 + (2 – 2)^2 + (2 – 2)^2 + (2 – 2)^2 + (3 -2)^2 +
(3 -2)^2 + (3 -2)^2 + (3 -2)^2  ÷12
= (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 ÷12
= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 ÷ 12
= 8 ÷ 12
= 0.67
Difference in mean ÷ MAD = 3 – 2 ÷ 0.8 = 1 ÷ 0.8 = 1.25
So, the difference in the means is about 1.25 times the MAD.

Question 5.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
You want to compare two populations represented by skewed distributions. Which measure not does belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 3
Answer:
IQR of first data set does not belong to the other three measurements because its the difference between the first and third quartiles, whereas median is related to the center value of the data and MAD of a data set is the average distance between each data value and the mean.

Explanation:
Data of first set = 1 2 4
Median of first data =  2
Data of second set = 3
Median of second data = 3
MAD of second data set = 0.8
IQR of first data set = 4 – 1 = 3


Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 6.
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the weights of cats at two shelters. Are the cats significantly heavier at one shelter than at the other? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 4
Answer:
The cats are  not significantly heavier at one shelter than at the other.

Explanation:
Data of cats weights in shelter A =  4 5 7 9 12 pounds
Data of cats weights in shelter B =  6  7 8 11 12 pounds
Median of shelter A cats = 7                                                      Median of shelter B cats = 8
IQR of shelter A cats = 9 – 5 = 4                                                IQR of shelter B cats =11 – 7 = 4
Because the variables are same, you can describe the vision overlap by the expression of  the difference in the medians as a multiple of the IQR .
Difference in Median ÷ IQR = 8 – 7 ÷ 4 = 1 ÷ 4 = 0.25
Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the medians is not significant.
The cats are  not significantly heavier at one shelter than at the other.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Tornadoes in Region A travel significantly farther than tornadoes in Region B. The tornadoes in Region A travel a median of 10 miles. Create a double box-and-whisker plot that can represent the distances traveled by the tornadoes in the two regions.
Answer:
Double box-and-whisker plot that can represent the distances traveled by the tornadoes in the two regions.

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-8.3-DIG DEEPER7

Explanation:
Data of Tornadoes in Region A = 4 6 10 14 20
Median of Tornadoes in Region A = 10 miles
Data of Tornadoes in Region B = 8 10 12 18 20
Median of Tornadoes in Region B =12

Comparing Populations Homework & Practice 8.3

Review & Refresh

Twenty percent of all seventh graders have watched a horse race. Explain whether the sample closely estimates the percentage of seventh graders who have watched a horse race.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 5
Question 1.
In a sample of 15 seventh graders, 4 have watched a horse race.
Answer:
No, the sample  estimation of  the percentage of 15 seventh graders  who have watched a horse race is not valid.

Explanation:
Number of seventh graders = 15
Twenty percent of all seventh graders have watched a horse race.
=> 20 % of the number of seventh graders = 20 % × 15 = 3
Hence, 3 only watched the horse race not 4.

Question 2.
In a sample of 10 seventh graders, 6 have watched a horse race.
Answer:
No, the sample  estimation of  the percentage of 10 seventh graders  who have watched a horse race is not valid.

Explanation:
Number of seventh graders = 10
Twenty percent of all seventh graders have watched a horse race.
=> 20 % of the number of seventh graders = 20 % × 10 = 2
Hence, 2 only watched the horse race not 6.

 

Find the unit rate.
Question 3.
60 kilometers in 2 hours
Answer:
60 kilometers in 2 hours = 30 kilometer per hour.

Explanation:
Time taken to cover 60 kilometers = 2 hours
Time taken to cover 1 kilometer = 60kilometers ÷ 2 hours
= 30 kilometer per hour

Question 4.
$11.40 for 5 cans
Answer:
Cost for 1 can = $2.28.

Explanation:
Cost for 5 cans = $11.40
Cost for 1 can = $11.40 ÷ 5
= $2.28

 

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

COMPARING TWO DATA DISTRIBUTIONS The double box-and-whisker plot represents the values in two data sets. (See Exploration 1, p. 337.)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 6
Question 5.
Does the data display show overlap? Explain.
Answer:18.2
Yes, the data display show overlap.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 1 3 5 7 9
Mean  of set A = 1 + 3 +  5 + 7 + 9  ÷ 5
= 25 ÷ 5 = 5
MAD of set A = |∣−5∣ + |3−5∣ +|5−5∣ +|7−5∣ + |9−5∣  ÷ 5
= 4 + 2 + 0 + 2 + 4 = 20 ÷ 5
= 20 ÷ 5 =4

Data of set B = 10 11 14 15 16
Mean  of set B = 8.2 + 6.7 + 4.2 + 3.2 + 2.2 ÷ 5
=  24.5 ÷ 5 = 4.9
MAD of set B = |∣0−18.2∣ + |11.5−18.2∣ +|14−18.2∣ +|15−18.2∣ + |16−18.2∣  ÷ 5
= 8.2 + 6.7 + 4.2 + 3.2 + 2.2 ÷ 5
= 24.5 ÷ 5 = 4.9
Differences in means ÷ MAD = 18.2 – 4.9 ÷ 5
= 13.3 ÷ 5 = 2.66
So, the differences in means is about  2.66 times the MAD.

Question 6.
Is there a significant difference in the measures of center for the pair of data sets? Explain.
Answer:
No, there is no significant difference in the measures of center for the pair of data sets because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the medians is not significant.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 1 3 5 7 9                                     Data of set B = 10 11 14 15 16
Median of set A = 5                                            Median of set B = 14
IQR of set A = 7 – 3 = 4                                      IQR of set B = 15 – 11.5 = 3.5
Differences in Median ÷ IQR of set A = 5 – 4 ÷ 4 = 1 ÷ 4 =  0.25
Differences in Median ÷ IQR of set B = 5 – 4 ÷ 3.5 = 0.286

 

COMPARING POPULATIONS Two data sets contain an equal number of values. The double box-and-whisker plot represents the values in the data sets.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 7
Question 7.
Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation.
Answer:
Comparison:
Variation of set A  and Variation of set B
=> 0.5432  is greater than 0.1576.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.5
Mean of set A = 0.8 + 1.0 + 1.1 + 1.2 + 1.5 ÷ 5 = 5.6 ÷ 5 = 1.12
Variation of set A = (0.8 -1.12)^2 + (1.0-1.12)^2 + (1.1 -1.12)^2 + (1.2 – 1.12)^2 + (1.5 – 1.12)^2 ÷ 5
= (-0.32)^2 + (-0.12)^2  + (-0.02)^2  + (0.08)^2  + (0.38)^2  ÷ 5
= 0.1024 + 0.0144 + 0.004 + 0.0064 + 0.1444 ÷ 5
= 0.2716 ÷ 5
= 0.5432

Data of set B = 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.4
Mean of set B = 0.3 + 0.4 + 0.6 + 0.9 + 1.4 ÷ 5 = 3.6 ÷ 5 = 0.72
Variation of set B = (0.3 -0.72)^2 + (0.4 – 0.72)^2 + (0.6 -0.72)^2 + (0.9 – 0.72)^2 + (1.4 – 0.72)^2 ÷ 5
= (-0.42)^2 + (-0.32)^2  + (-0.12)^2  + (0.18)^2  + (0.68)^2  ÷ 5
= 0.1764 + 0.1024 + 0.0144 + 0.0324 + 0.4624 ÷ 5
= 0.788  ÷ 5
= 0.1576

Comparison:
Variation of set A  and Variation of set B
=> 0.5432  is greater than 0.1576.

Question 8.
Which data set is more likely to contain a value of 1.1?
Answer:
Data of set A is more likely to contain a value of 1.1.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.5                                  Data of set B = 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.4
Median of set A = 1.1                                                     Median of set B = 0.6

Question 9.
Which data set is more likely to contain a value that differs from the center by 0.3?
Answer:
No, data set is more likely to contain a value that differs from the center by 0.3.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.5                                      Data of set B = 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.4
Median of set A = 1.1                                                         Median of set B = 0.6

Question 10.
DESCRIBING VISUAL OVERLAP
The double dot plot shows the values in two data sets. Express the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 8
Answer:
Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the median is not significant of data set A.
Because the quotient is more than 2, the difference in the median is significant of data set B.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 30 35 40 45 50 55                                            Data of set B = 10 15 20 25 30
Median of set A = 40 +45 ÷ 2 = 85 ÷ 2 = 42.5                        Median of set B = 20
IQR of set A = 50 – 35 = 15                                                      IQR of set B = 30 – 10 = 20
Differences in medians ÷ IQR of set A = 42.5 – 20 ÷ 15 = 22.5 ÷ 15 = 1.5
Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the median is not significant of data set A.
Differences in medians ÷ IQR of set B = 42.5 – 20 ÷ 10 = 22.5 ÷ 10 = 2.25
Because the quotient is more than 2, the difference in the median is significant of data set B.

Question 11.
The distributions of attendance at basketball games and volleyball games at your school are symmetric. Your friend makes a conclusion based on the calculations shown below. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 9
Answer:
No, my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
Volleyball Game attendance:
Mean = 80
MAD = 20
Basketball Game attendance:
Mean = 160
MAD = 20
The difference in means is 4 times the MAD, so attendance at basketball games is significantly greater than the attendance at volleyball games. Since the MAD is “large”, it implies that the mean of 160 is not a reliable indicator of the other values within the data set.

Question 12.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the goals scored per game by two hockey teams during a 20-game season. Is the number of goals scored per game significantly greater for one team than the other? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 10
Answer:
Yes, the number of goals scored per game significantly greater for one team than the other.

Explanation:
Data of Team A = 0 2 3 4 6                                              Data of Team B = 0 6 7 8 10
Median of data Team A = 3                                             Median of data Team B = 7
IQR of Team A =  4 – 2 = 2                                               IQR of Team B = 8 – 6 = 2
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = 7 – 3 ÷ 2 = 4  ÷ 2 = 2
So, the quotient is equal to 2 the difference in the medians is significant.

Question 13.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The dot plots show the test scores for two classes taught by the same teacher. Are the test scores significantly greater for one class than the other? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 11
Answer:
No, the test scores  are not significantly greater for one class than the other.

Explanation:
Data of Class A = 70 75 80 85 90 95 100                              Data of Class B = 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Median of data Class A = 85                                                 Median of data Class B = 85
IQR of Class A =  95 – 85 = 10                                               IQR of Class B = 80 – 70 = 10
Both the variables and the center are similar. So, it is not significant.

Question 14.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A scientist experiments with mold colonies of equal area. She adds a treatment to half of the colonies. After a week, she measures the area of each colony. If the areas are significantly different, the scientist will repeat the experiment. The results are shown. Should the scientist repeat the experiment? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 12
Answer:
Yes,  the scientist should repeat the experiment because areas are significantly different from one to other.

Explanation:
Order of Data of untreated Mold = 2 3 4 5 6 7                               Order of Data of treated Mold = 0 1 2 3 6
Median of untreated Mold = 4 + 5 ÷ 2 = 9 ÷ 2 = 4.5                    Median of treated Mold = 2
IQR of untreated Mold = 4 – 2 = 2                                                  IQR of treated Mold = 2 – 0 = 2
Because the variables are same, you can describe the overlap in areas by expressing the difference in the medians as a multiple of the IQR.
Difference in Medians ÷ IQR = 4.5 – 2 ÷ 2
= 2.5 ÷ 2 = 1.25
Because the quotient is  less than 2, the differences in the medians is not significant.
The areas are not significantly greater than one and other colony.

Lesson 8.4 Using Random Samples to Compare Populations

EXPLORATION 1

Using Random Samples
Work with a partner. You want to compare the numbers of hours spent on homework each week by male and female students in your state. You take a random sample of 15 male students and 15 female students throughout the state.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 1
a. Compare the data in each sample.
b. Are the samples likely to be representative of all male and female students in your state? Explain.
c. You take 100 random samples of 15 male students in your state and 100 random samples of 15 female students in your state and record the median of each sample. The double box-and-whisker plot shows the distributions of the sample medians. Compare the distributions in the double box-and-whisker plot with the distributions of the data in the tables.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 2
d. What can you conclude from the double box-and-whisker plot? Explain. d. How can you use random samples to make accurate comparisons of two populations?
Answer:
a) According to the given data in the table, the center of the Female students is greater than the center of the Male students.

b) Yes, the samples likely to be representative of all male and female students in your state because they are randomly selected students allover the state.

c) The data given in the table and the data given in the double box-and-whisker plot are both completely different and there is a lot of variation in the values. The double box-and-whisker plot has greater values than in the table.

d) According to the data in double box-and-whisker plot, the medians of male students is less than female students. So, the hours of male students spent are less than female students.

Explanation:
a)Data of Male students = 1.5  3  0  2.5  1  8  2.5  1  3  0  6.5  1  5  0  5
Arrange the data in order : 0  1  1.5  2.5  3  5  6.5  8
Median of Male students =  2.5 + 3 ÷ 2 = 5.5 ÷ 2 = 2.75

Data of Female students = 4   0  3  1  1  5  1  3  5.5  10  2  0  6  3.5  2
Arrange the data in order : 0  1  2  3  3.5  4  5.5  6
Median of Female students = 3 + 3.5 ÷ 2 = 6.5 ÷  2 = 3.25

b) Data of Male students = 1.5  3  0  2.5  1  8  2.5  1  3  0  6.5  1  5  0  5
Data of Female students = 4   0  3  1  1  5  1  3  5.5  10  2  0  6  3.5  2
Yes, the samples likely to be representative of all male and female students in your state because they are randomly selected students allover the state.

c)                                                                         Data in the Table:
Data of Male students = 1.5  3  0  2.5  1  8  2.5  1  3  0  6.5  1  5  0  5
Median of Male students =  2.5 + 3 ÷ 2 = 5.5 ÷ 2 = 2.75
Mean of Male students = 1.5 + 3 + 0 + 2.5 + 1 + 8 + 2.5 + 1 + 3 + 0 + 6.5 + 1 + 5 + 0 + 5 ÷ 15
= 40  ÷ 15
=  2.67
Data of Female students = 4   0  3  1  1  5  1  3  5.5  10  2  0  6  3.5  2
Median of Female students = 3 + 3.5 ÷ 2 = 6.5 ÷  2 = 3.25
Mean of Female students = 4  + 0  +  3 + 1 + 1 + 5  + 1 + 3 + 5.5 + 10 + 2 + 0 + 6 + 3.5 + 2 ÷ 15
= 47  ÷ 15
= 3.13
Data in the double box-and-whisker plot:
Data of Male students = 1.5  2.5  3  3.5   6                          Data of Female students = 2  3.5  4  5  7
Mean of Male students = 1.5 + 2.5 + 3 + 3.5 + 6 ÷ 5        Mean of Female students = 2 + 3.5 + 4 + 5 + 7 ÷ 5
=  16.5 ÷ 5 = 3.3                                                                  = 21.5 ÷ 5 = 4.3

d)                                                                  Data in the double box-and-whisker plot:
Data of Male students = 1.5  2.5  3  3.5   6                          Data of Female students = 2  3.5  4  5  7
Median of Male students = 3                                              Median of Female students = 4

 

Try It

Question 1.
The double dot plot shows the weekly reading habits of a random sample of 10 students in each of two schools. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which school’s students read less? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 3
Answer:
According to the data of distribution, school A students are reading less compared to that of school B students.

Explanation:
Data of school A = 0  0  1  2  2  3  3  4  5  5
Mean of school A = 0 + 0 + 1 + 2 + 2 +3 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 5 ÷ 10
= 25 ÷ 10 = 2.5
Variation of school A = (0-2.5)^2 + (0-2.5)^2 + (1-2.5)^2 + (2-2.5)^2 + (2-2.5)^2 + (3-2.5)^2 + (3-2.5)^2 + (4-2.5)^2 + (5-2.5)^2 + (5-2.5)^2 ÷ 10
= (-2.5)^2 + (-2.5)^2  + (-1.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (0.5)^2 + (0.5)^2  + (-1.5)^2  + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 ÷ 10
=  6.25 + 6.25 + 2.25 + 0.25 + 0.25 +  0.25 +  0.25 + 2.25 + 6.25 + 6.25 ÷ 10
= 30.5 ÷ 10
= 3.05

Data of school B = 0  2  3  3  3   4  4  4 5  7
Mean of school B = 0 + 2 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 4 + 4 + 4+ 5 +7 ÷ 10
= 60 ÷ 10 = 6
Variation of school A = (0-6)^2 + (2-6)^2 + (3-6)^2 + (3-6)^2 + (3-6)^2 + (4-6)^2 + (4-6)^2  + (4-6)^2  + (5-6)^2 + (7-6)^2 ÷ 10
= (-6)^2 + (-4)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-2)^2 + (-2)^2 + (-2)^2 + (-1)^2 + (1)^2 ÷ 10
= 36 + 16 + 9 + 9+ 9 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 1 + 1÷ 10
= 93 ÷ 10
= 9.3

Question 2.
WHAT IF?
Each value in the box-and-whisker plot of the sample medians for Bag A decreases by2. Does this change your answer?
Answer:
Yes, this changes the answer because which makes the medians of Bag A and Bag B same.

Explanation:
Data of bag A = 4  5  5.5  6  6.5                                                        Data of bag B = 2.5  3  3.5  4  5
Median of bag A = 5.5                                                                      Median of bag B = 3.5
IQR of bag A = 6 – 5 = 1                                                                    IQR of bag B = 4 – 3 = 1
If the sample medians for Bag A decreases by 2:
Median of bag A = 5.5 – 2 = 3.5


Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
COMPARING RANDOM SAMPLES
Two boxes each contain 600 numbered tiles. The double dot plot shows a random sample of 8 numbers from each box. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which box contains tiles with greater numbers? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 4
Answer:
Box A contains greater numbers more than Box B because its has greater median and also in variation.

Explanation:
Data of Box A = 3  4  5  5  6  6  7  8
Order of Box A =3 4 5 6 7 8
Median of Box A = 5 + 6 ÷ 2 = 11 ÷ 2 =5.5
Mean of Box A = 3 + 4 + 5 + 5 + 6 + 6 + 7 + 8 ÷ 8
= 44 ÷ 8
= 5.5
Variation of Box A = (3 -5.5)^2 + (4-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (6-5.5)^2 + (6-5.5)^2 + (7-5.5)^2 + (8-5.5)^2 ÷ 8
=  (-2.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (0.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (2.5)^2   ÷ 8
=  6.25 + 2.25 + 0.25 + 0.25 + 0.25 + 2.25 + 2.25 + 6.25 ÷ 8
= 20 ÷ 8
= 2.5

Data of Box B = 0  0  0 1  2  3  3  3
Order of Box B = 0 1 2 3
Median of Box B =  1 +2 ÷ 2 = 3 ÷ 2 =1.5
Mean of Box B = 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 + 2 + 3 + 3 + 3 ÷ 8
= 12 ÷ 8
= 1.5
Variation of Box B = (0-1.5)^2 + (0-1.5)^2 + (0-1.5)^2 + (1-1.5)^2 + (2-1.5)^2 + (3-1.5)^2 + (3-1.5)^2 + (3-1.5)^2  ÷ 8
=  (-1.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (0.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2  ÷ 8
=  2.25 + 2.25 +2.25 + 0.25 +0.25 + 2.25  + 2.25 + 2.25  ÷ 8
=  14 ÷ 8
= 1.75

Question 4.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
Two crates each contain 750 objects. The double box-and-whisker plot shows the median weights of 50 random samples of 10 objects from each crate. Can you determine which crate weighs more? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 5
Answer:
Crate B weighs more than Crate A.

Explanation:
Data of crate A = 6   6.5   7.5   9   9.5
Median of crate A = 7.5
Mean of crate A = 6 + 6.5 + 7.5 + 9 + 9.5 ÷ 5 = 38.5 ÷5 = 7.7
IQR = 9 – 6.5 = 2.5
Data of crate B =  9   10   11   12.5   13.5
Median of crate B = 11
IQR = 12.5 – 10 = 2.5
Mean of crate B = 9 + 10  + 11  + 12.5  + 13.5 ÷ 5 = 56 ÷ 5 = 11.2
The variation in the center of crate B is greater than the measure of crate A. The variation of crate A is similar to the variation of crate B.


Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the medians of 100 random samples of 20 battery lives for two cell phone brands. Compare the battery lives of the two brands.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 6
Answer:
The variation in the center of Brand B batteries is greater than the measure of Brand A batteries and the variation of Brand A batteries is similar to the variation of Brand B batteries.

Explanation:
Data of Brand A = 16.5  20  26  28   30                                 Data of Brand B = 24  26  30  34  36
Median of Brand A = 26                                                        Median of Brand B =  30
IQR of Brand A = 28 – 20 = 8                                                IQR of Brand B = 34 – 28 = 6

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the medians of 50 random samples of 10 wait times at two patient care facilities. Which facility should you choose? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 7
Answer:
Facility B should be chosen than the Facility A.

Explanation:
Data of Facility A =  10  15  20  25  30                      Data of Facility B =  5   15   20   35  45
Median of Facility A = 20                                           Median of Facility B = 20
IQR of Facility A = 25 – 15 = 10                                  IQR of Facility B = 35 – 15 = 20
The variation in the center of  Facility A  is similar to  the measure of Facility B and the variation of Facility B  is greater than  the variation of Facility A .

Using Random Samples to Compare Populations Homework & Practice 8.4

Review & Refresh

The double dot plot shows the values in two data sets.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 8
Question 1.
Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation.
Answer:
The measures of center of set B is greater and the variation of it greater than that of  the variation of set A.

Explanation:
Data of Set A = 10 10 20 20 20 30 30 30  30 40 40 50          Data of set B = 30 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 70 70
Order: 10 20 30 40 50                                                              Order: 30 40 50 60 70
Median of set A = 30                                                              Median of set B = 50
Mean of set A =  10+10 + 20 + 20 + 20 + 30 + 30 + 30 + 30 + 40 + 40 + 50  ÷ 12
=  330  ÷ 12
= 27.5
Variation of set A = (10 -27.5)^2 + (10-27.5)^2 + (20-27.5)^2 + (20-27.5)^2 + (20-27.5)^2 + (30-27.5)^2 + (30-27.5)^2 + (30-27.5)^2 + (30-27.5)^2 + (40-27.5)^2 + (40-27.5)^2 + (50-27.5)^2  ÷ 12
= (-17.5)^2 + (-17.5)^2 + (-7.5)^2 + (-7.5)^2 + (-7.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (12.5)^2 + (12.5)^2 + (22.5)^2  ÷ 12
= 306. 25 + 306.25 + 56.25  + 56.25 + 56.25 + 6.25 + 6.25 +6.25 + 6.25 + 156.25 + 156.25 + 506.25 ÷ 12
=  1625  ÷ 12
= 135.42

Mean of set B= 30 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 50 + 50 + 50 + 50 + 60 + 60 + 70 + 70 ÷ 12
=  610  ÷ 12
= 50.83
Variation of set B = (30-50.83)^2 + (40-50.83)^2 + (40-50.83)^2 + (40-50.83)^2 + (50-50.83)^2 + (50-50.83)^2 + (50-50.83)^2 + (50-50.83)^2 + (60-50.83)^2 + (60-50.83)^2 + (70-50.83)^2 + (70-50.83)^2 ÷ 12
= (-20.83)^2 + (-10.83)^2 + (-10.83)^2 + (-10.83)^2 + (-0.83)^2 + (-0.83)^2 + (-0.83)^2 + (-0.83)^2 + (10.83)^2 + (10.83)^2 + (20.83)^2 + (20.83)^2  ÷ 12
= 433.89 +  117.29 + 117.29 + 117.29 + 0.6889  +  0.6889 + 0.6889 + 0.6889 + 117.29 + 117.29 +  433.89 + 433.89 ÷ 12
= 1890.8756 ÷ 12
= 157.57

Question 2.
Are the values of one data set significantly greater than the values of the other data set? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, the variation of center of set B is greater than the measure of set A and the variation of set B is greater than the variation of set A.

Explanation:
Median of set A = 30                                                              Median of set B = 50
Variation of set A = 135.42                                                    Variation of set B = 157.57

 

Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 3.
5b – 3 = 22
Answer:
b= 5.

Explanation:
5b – 3 = 22
5b =  22 + 3
5b = 25
b = 25/5
b= 5.

Check: substitute b =  5 in 5b – 3 = 22.
LHS => 5b – 3 = 22.
=> (5 x 5) -3 = 22
=> 25 – 3 = 22 = RHS

Question 4.
1.5d  + + 3 = – 4.5
Answer:
d = -5

Explanation:
1.5d  + 3 = – 4.5
=>1.5d = -4.5 -3
=> 1.5d = -7.5
=> d = -7.5 ÷ 1.5
=> d = – 5
Checking:
Substitute d = – 5 in Equation:
LHS:    1.5d  + 3
=> (1.5 × -5) + 3
=> -7.5 + 3
=> -4.5 = RHS

Question 5.
4 = 9z – 2
Answer:
z = 0.67

Explanation:
4 = 9z – 2
=> 4 + 2 = 9z
=> 6 = 9z
=>6 ÷ 9 = z
=> 0.67 = z
Checking:
Substitute z = 0.67 in Equation:
RHS:  9z – 2
=> (9 × 0.67) – 2
=> 6 – 2
= 4 = LHS

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING RANDOM SAMPLES You want to compare the numbers of hours spent on recreation each week by teachers and non-teachers in your state. You take100 random samples of 15 teachers and 100 random samples of 15 non-teachers throughout the state and record the median value of each sample. The double box-and-whisker plot shows the distributions of sample medians. (See Exploration 1, p. 343.)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 9

Question 6.
Are the samples likely to be representative of all teachers and non-teachers in your state?

Answer:
Yes, the samples are likely to be representative of all teachers and non-teachers in your state because it has been given in the question.

Question 7.
What can you conclude from the double box-and-whisker plot? Explain.

Answer:
The number of hours spent by Non-teachers is more than the teachers.

Explanation:
Median of Non-Teachers = 7
Median of Teachers = 5

Question 8.
COMPARING RANDOM SAMPLES
The double dot plot shows the weekly running habits of athletes at two colleges. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which college’s athletes spend more time running? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 10
Answer:
Data of College B has the  greater measure of center and in the measure of variation that of data of college B.
College B athletes spend more time running than college A.

Explanation:
Data of College A = 2  2  4  4  5  5  5  5  6  6  8  8
Order : 2 4 5 6 8
Median of Data A =  5
Variation of Data A = (2-5)^2 + (2-5)^2 + (4-5)^2 + (4-5)^2 + (5-5)^2 + (5-5)^2 + (5-5)^2 + (5-5)^2 + (6-5)^2 + (6-5)^2 + (8-5)^2 + (8-5)^2 ÷  12
= (-3)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 + (3)^2 + (3)^2 ÷  12
= 9 + 9 + 1 + 1 + 0+ 0 + 0 + 0  + 1 + 1 + 9 + 9 ÷ 12
= 40 ÷ 12
= 3.33

Data of College B = 3  4  5  5  5  6  6  7  7  7  8  9
Order : 3 4 5 6  7 8
Median of Data A =  5 + 6 ÷ 2 = 11 ÷ 2 = 5.5
Variation of Data A = (3-5.5)^2 + (4-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (6-5.5)^2 + (6-5.5)^2 + (7-5.5)^2 + (7-5.5)^2 + (7-5.5)^2 + (8-5.5)^2 + (9-5.5)^2  ÷  12
= (-2.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (3.5)^2 + (4.5)^2 ÷  12
= 6.25 + 2.25 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 2.25 + 2.25 + 6.25 + 6.25 + 6.25 + 12.25 + 20.25 ÷ 12
=  64.25  ÷ 12
= 5.35

Question 9.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
Two lakes each contain about 2000 fish. The double box-and-whisker plot shows the medians of 50 random samples of 14 fish lengths from each lake. Can you determine which lake contains longer fish? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 11

Answer:
Lake A is the Lake contains longer fish because the measure in the variation is comparatively greater than the measure of variation of Lake B.

Explanation:
Data of Lake A = 6  7  8  9  10                    Data of Lake B =  3  4  5  6  7
Median of Lake A = 8                                 Median of Lake B = 5
IQR of Lake A = 9 – 7 = 2                          IQR of Lake B = 6 – 4 = 2

Question 10.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Two laboratories each produce 800 chemicals. A chemist takes 10 samples of 15 chemicals from each lab, and records the number that pass an inspection. Are the samples likely to be representative of all the chemicals for each lab? If so, which lab has more chemicals that will pass the inspection? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 12

Answer:
Yes, the samples are likely to be representative of all the chemicals for each lab.
Research Lab B is having the more chemicals that will pass the inspection.

Explanation:
Data of Research Lab A = 14 14 13 15 1515 15 13 14 12
Order : 12  13  14  15
Median of Research Lab A =13 +14 ÷ 2=27 ÷ 2 = 3.5
Mean of Research Lab A = 14 +14 +13+ 15 +15 +15 + 15 + 13 + 14 + 12 ÷ 10
=  140 ÷ 10
=    14

Data of Research Lab B = 12 9 10 14 12 11 14 11 11 15
Order : 9  10  11  12  14  15
Median of Research Lab B = 11+12 ÷ 2 = 23 ÷ 2 = 11.5
Mean of Research Lab B = 12  + 9 + 10 +14 + 12 +11 + 14 + 11 + 11 + 15 ÷ 10
= 119 ÷ 10
=  11.9
So, the variation of Research Lab A is having greater values and the measure of the center  Research Lab B is  greater than the center of the Research Lab A.

Question 11.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A farmer grows two types of corn seedlings. There are 1000 seedlings of each type. The double box-and-whisker plot represents the median growths of 50 random samples of 7 corn seedlings of each type. Compare the growths of each type of corn seedling. Justify your result.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 13
Answer:
The growth of Type B type of corn seedling is more that of growth of Type B of corn seedling.

Explanation:
Data of Type A = 1.5  3  3.5  4  5.5                                                    Data of Type B = 2.5  5  6.5  7  9
Median of Type A = 3.5                                                                     Median of  Type B = 6.5
IQR of Type A = 4 – 3 = 1                                                                   IQR of Type B = 7 – 5 = 2
So, the Variation of Type B is having greater than the measure of Variation of Type A . The measure of the center  of Type B is  greater than the center of the Type A.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You want to compare the number of words per sentence in a sports magazine to the number of words per sentence in a political magazine.
a. The data represent random samples of the number of words in 10 sentences from each magazine. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you use the data to make a valid comparison about the magazines? Explain.
Sports magazine: 9, 21, 15, 14, 25, 26, 9, 19, 22, 30
Political magazine: 31, 22, 17, 5, 23, 15, 10, 20, 20, 17
b. The double box-and-whisker plot represents the means of 200 random samples of 20 sentences from each magazine. Compare the variability of the sample means to the variability of the sample numbers of words in part(a).
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 14
c. Make a conclusion about the numbers of words per sentence in each magazine.

Answer:
a) Variation of Sports magazine is having greater measure in variation and Median of  Sports magazine  is having greater value of center.

b) The variability of the sample is similar  to the variability of the sample numbers of words in part(a).

c) Number of words per sentence in political magazine are more than the number of words per sentence in  sports magazine.

Explanation:
a)
Data of Sports magazine =  9, 21, 15, 14, 25, 26, 9, 19, 22, 30
Order : 9 14 15 19  21 22 25  26 30
Median of  Sports magazine = 21
Mean of Sports magazine = 9 + 21 + 15 + 14 + 25 + 26 + 9 + 19 + 22 + 30 ÷ 10 = 190 ÷ 10 = 19
Variation of Sports magazine = (9-19)^2 + (21-19)^2 + (15-19)^2 + (14-19)^2 + (25-19)^2 + (26-19)^2 + (9-19)^2 + (19-19)^2 + (22-19)^2 + (30-19)^2  ÷ 10
= (-10)^2 + (2)^2 + (-4)^2 + (-5)^2 + (6)^2 + (7)^2 + (-10)^2 + (0)^2 + (3)^2 + (11)^2  ÷ 10
= 100 + 4 + 16 + 25 + 36 + 49 + 100 + 0 + 9 +121 ÷ 10
= 460 ÷ 10
= 46
Data of Political magazine = 31, 22, 17, 5, 23, 15, 10, 20, 20, 17
Order : 5  10 15  17  20  22  23  31
Median of Political magazine = 17 + 20 ÷ 2 = 37 ÷ 2 = 13.5
Mean of Political magazine = 31+ 22 +17 + 5 +23 + 15 +10 + 20 + 20 + 17 ÷ 10
= 180÷ 10
= 18
Variation of Sports magazine = (31-18)^2 + (22-18)^2 + (17-18)^2 + (5-18)^2 + (23-18)^2 + (15-18)^2 + (10-18)^2 + (20-18)^2 + (20-18)^2 + (17-18)^2  ÷ 10
= (13)^2 + (4)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-13)^2 + (5)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-8)^2 + (2)^2 + (2)^2 + (-1)^2  ÷ 10
= 169 + 16 + 1 + 169 + 25 + 9 + 64 + 4 + 4 + 1    ÷ 10
= 462 ÷ 10
= 46.2

b)
Data of Sports magazine = 16  19  20  21 23                  Data of Political magazine = 18  22  23  24  26
Median of Sports magazine = 20                                    Median of Political magazine = 23
IQR of Sports magazine = 21 – 9 = 2                               IQR of Political magazine = 24 -22 = 2
Mean of Sports magazine = 16 + 19 + 20 + 21 + 23  ÷ 5
= 99 ÷ 5  = 19.8
Mean of Political magazine = 18 + 22 + 23 + 24 + 26 ÷ 5
= 113 ÷ 5 = 22.6

c)
Data of Sports magazine = 16  19  20  21 23
Maximum used words in Political magazine = 16 to 23
=> 23 – 16 = 7
Data of Political magazine = 18  22  23  24  26
Maximum used words in Political magazine = 18 to 26.
=> 26 – 18 = 8

Question 13.
PROJECT
You want to compare the average amounts of time students in sixth, seventh, and eighth grade spend on homework each week.
a. Design an experiment involving random sampling that can help you make a comparison.
b. Perform the experiment. Can you make a conclusion about which grade spends the most time on homework? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
a)Number of hours :
Total number of students of sixth spent = 26 + 33 +30 = 89
Total number of students of seventh spent = 32  + 46 + 40 = 118
Total number of students of Eighth spent = 42 +21 +25 = 88

b) Number of students who spent most time on homework  are the seventh grades students.

Explanation:
a) In a school, randomly chosen students are asked  about amounts of time students in sixth, seventh, and eighth grade spend on homework each week. The school has 1000 students.  Randomly 100 students are asked and three different sampling is taken.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-PROJECT-13

b) Average of students spent on homework of sixth grades = 26 + 33 +30 ÷ 3 = 89 ÷ 3= 29.67
Average of students spent on homework of seventh grades = 32  + 46 + 40 ÷ 3 = 118 ÷ 3 = 39.33
Average of students spent on homework of eighth grades = 42 +21 +25 ÷ 3 = 88 ÷ 3 = 29.33

Statistics Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
In a city, 1500 randomly chosen residents are asked how many sporting events they attend each month. The city has 80,000 residents. Estimate the number of residents in the city who attend at least one sporting event each month.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cc 1
Understand the problem.
You are given the numbers of sporting events attended each month by a sample of 1500 residents. You are asked to make an estimate about the population, all residents of the city.
Make a plan.
The sample is representative of the population because it is selected at random and is large enough to provide accurate data. So, find the percent of people in the survey that attend at least one sporting event each month, and use the percent equation to make an estimate.
Solve and .check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution

Answer:
Number of residents attended one sports events = 30
Number of residents in the city who attend at least one sporting event each month = 30÷ 1500 × 80000
= 0.02 × 80000 = 1600

Explanation:
Number of residents attended zero sports events = 660
Number of residents attended zero sports events in the city = 660 ÷ 1500 = 0.44 × 80000 = 35200
Number of residents attended one or two sports events = 447
Number of residents attended one or two sports events in the city = 447 ÷ 1500 = 0.298 × 80000 =23840
Number of residents attended three or four sports events = 276
Number of residents attended three or four sports events in the city= 276 ÷ 1500 = 0.184 × 80000 = 14720
Number of residents attended five or more sports events = 87
Number  of residents attended five or more sports events in the city= 87 ÷ 1500 = 0.058 × 80000 =4640
Total number of residents sample taken = Number of residents attended zero sports events + Number of residents attended one or two sports events + Number of residents attended three or four sports events + Number of residents attended five or more sports events  + Number of residents attended one sports events
=>1500 = 660 + 447 + 276 + 87 + Number of residents attended one sports events
=> 1500 = 1470 + Number of residents attended one sports events
=> 1500 – 1470 = Number of residents attended one sports events
=> 30 = Number of residents attended one sports events
Check :
Total number of all events add = Total population in the city
LHS:
=> 35200 + 23840 + 14720 + 4640 + 1600
=> 80000
= RHS
Hence, LHS = RHS

Question 2.
The dot plots show the values in two data sets. Is the difference in the measures of center for the data sets significant?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cc 2
Answer:
Yes, the difference in the measures of center for the data set of A is not significant because the quotient is not less than 2.
No, the difference in the measures of center for the data set of B is significant because the quotient is less than 2.

Explanation:
Data of set A= – 6 – 5 -4 -4 – 4 -4 -3 -3 -3 -3
Order: -3 -4 -5 -6
Median of set A = -4 + – 5 ÷ 2 = -9 ÷ 2 = -4.5
Mean of set A = – 6 + -5 + -4 + -4 + -4 + -4 + -3 + -3 + -3 + -3 ÷10
= 35 ÷10 = 3.5
IQR of set A = -6 – (-4) = -6 + 4 = -2
Data of set B = -6 -6 -2 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0
Order : 0 -1 -2 -6
Median of set B = -1 + -2 ÷ 2 = -3 ÷ 2 = -1.5
Mean of set B = -6 + -6 + -2 + -2 + -1 + -1 + -1 + -1 + 0 + 0 ÷10
=  20  ÷10 = 2.0
IQR of set B = -6 – (-1) = -6 +1 = -5
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = -4.5 – (-1.5) ÷ -2 = -4.5 + 1.5 ÷ -2 = -3.0 ÷ -2 = 1.5
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = -4.5 – (-1.5) ÷ -5 = -4.5 + 1.5 ÷ -5 = -3.0 ÷ -5 = 0.6

Question 3.
You ask 60 randomly chosen students whether they support a later starting time for school. The table shows the results. Estimate the probability that at least two out of four randomly chosen students do not support a later starting time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cc 3
Answer:

Explanation:

Performance Task

Estimating Animal Populations
At the beginning of the this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Comparing Dogs.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cc 4

Statistics Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 1

Answer:
Population: Population is an entire group of objects or people.
Sample: A Sample  is a part of the population.
Unbiased Sample: Unbiased Sample is a representative of a population. It is selected random and is a large enough to provide accurate data.
Biased Sample: Biased Sample is a not representative of a population. One or more parts of the population are favored over others.

Graphic Organizers
You can use a Definition and Example Chart to organize information about a concept. Here is an example of a Definition and Example Chart for the vocabulary term sample.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 2
Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study each topic.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 3
1. population
2. shape of a distribution
3. mean absolute deviation (MAD)
4. interquartile range
5. double box-and-whisker plot
6. double dot plot

Answer: Its a double box-and-whisker plot.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-Graphic Organizers

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 4


8.1 Samples and Populations (pp. 325–330)

Learning Target: Understand how to use random samples to make conclusions about a population.

Question 1.
You want to estimate the number of students in your school whose favorite subject is biology. You survey the first 10 students who arrive at biology club. Determine whether the sample is biased or unbiased. Explain.
Answer:
The sample is a Biased Sample because the students in the biology club are not representative of a population. One or more parts of the students are favored over others.

Question 2.
You want to estimate the number of athletes who play soccer. Give an example of a biased sample. Give an example of an unbiased sample.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 5
Answer:
Example of Biased sample :
What is your favorite sport? Sample is chosen from people attending a soccer game.
Example of Unbiased sample :
What is your favorite sport? Sample is chosen by picking names out of a register of school.

Question 3.
You want to know how the residents of your town feel about building a new baseball stadium. You randomly survey 100 people who enter the current stadium. Eighty support building a new stadium, and twenty do not. So, you conclude that80% of the residents of your town support building a new baseball stadium. Is your conclusion valid? Explain.
Answer:
The conclusion is valid.

Explanation:
Number of randomly chosen = 100
Number of people support new stadium = 80
Number of people does not support new stadium = 20
Percentage of people support new stadium = 80 ÷100 × 100= 80%

Question 4.
Which sample is better for making an estimate? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 6

Answer:
Sample B is better for making an estimate about predicting the number of students in a school who like gym class because its a unbiased sample and we get accurate data out of it.

Question 5.
You ask 125 randomly chosen students to name their favorite beverage. There are 1500 students in the school. Predict the number of students in the school whose favorite beverage is a sports drink.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 7
Answer:
Number of students in the school whose favorite beverage is a sports drink = 696.

Explanation:
Number of students in the school whose favorite beverage is a sports drink = Favorite Beverage sport drink ÷ randomly chosen students × students in the school.
= 58 ÷ 125 ×1500
= 0.464 ×1500
= 696.

Question 6.
You want to know the number of students in your state who have summer jobs. Determine whether you should survey the population or a sample. Explain.
Answer:
You should survey the sample.

Explanation:
You should survey the sample because a sample is the representation of population and selected at random and is a large which gives you the accurate data.

8.2 Using Random Samples to Describe Populations (pp. 331–336)
Learning Target: Understand variability in samples of a population.

Question 7.
To pass a quality control inspection, the products at a factory must contain no critical defects, no more than 2.5% of products can contain major defects, and no more than 4% of products can contain minor defects. There are 40,000 products being shipped from a factory. Each inspector randomly samples 125 products. The table shows the results.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 8
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of products with minor defects at the factory. Describe the center and the variation of the estimates.
b. Use the samples to make an estimate for the percent of products with minor defects, with major defects, and with critical defects at the factory. Does the factory pass inspection? Explain.

Answer:
a. The median of major defect is greater than the median of minor defect in the factory. The variation of major defects is greater than the measure of variation of minor defects in the factory.

b.  Yes, the factory pass inspection because not more than 2.5% of products can contain major defects, and not more than 4% of products can contain minor defects.

Explanation:
a. Number of products with minor defects at the factory = 5 6 3 6
Order: 3 5 6
Median of minor defects= 5
Mean of minor defects= 5+6+3+6 ÷ 4 = 20 ÷ 4 =5
Variation of minor defects= (5-5)^2 + (6-5)^2 + (3-5)^2 + (6-5)^2  ÷ 4
= (0)^2 + (1)^2 + (-2)^2 + (1)^2  ÷ 4
= 0 +  1 + 4 +1 ÷ 4
= 6÷ 4
= 1.5

Number of products with major defects at the factory = 2  1 3 5
Order: 1 2 3 5
Median of major defects= 2 + 3 ÷ 2 = 5 ÷ 2 = 2.5
Mean of major defects= 2 + 1+ 3 +5 ÷ 4 = 11 ÷ 4 = 2.75
Variation of major defects = (2-2.75)^2 + (1-2.75)^2 + (3-2.75)^2 + (5-2.75)^2  ÷ 4
= (-0.75)^2 + (-1.75)^2 + (0.25)^2 + (2.25)^2  ÷ 4
=  0.5625 + 3.0625 +0.625 + 5.0625 ÷ 4
=  9.3125 ÷ 4
= 2.33

Number of products with critical defects at the factory = 0 0 0 0
Median critical defects = 0
Mean critical defects = 0
Variation critical defects = 0

b. Percent of minor defects in the factory = 20 ÷ 125 = 0.16
Percent of major defects in the factory = 11 ÷125 = 0.088
Percent of critical defects in the factory = 0 ÷ 125 = 0

Question 8.
A scientist determines that 35% of packages of a food product contain a specific bacteria. Use technology to simulate choosing 100 random samples of 20 packages. How closely do the samples estimate the percent of all packages with the specific bacteria?

Answer:
Percent of bacteria in rice food product = 74 × 35 ÷ 100 = 2590 ÷ 100 = 25.9
Percent of bacteria in Wheat food product = 91 × 35 ÷ 100 = 3185 ÷ 100 = 31.85
Percent of bacteria in Milk food product = 78 × 35 ÷ 100 = 2730 ÷ 100 = 27.30
Percent of bacteria in Cereals food product = 57 × 35 ÷ 100 =  1995 ÷ 100 = 19.95

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-8.2-Using-Random-Samples-to-Describe-Populations-(pp. 331–336)8
Total number of Rice food product = 12 + 30 +32 = 74
Percent of bacteria in rice food product = 74 × 35 ÷ 100 = 2590 ÷ 100 = 25.9

Total number of Wheat food product = 34 + 29 + 28 = 91
Percent of bacteria in Wheat food product = 91 × 35 ÷ 100 = 3185 ÷ 100 = 31.85

Total number of Milk food product = 32 + 21 +25 = 78
Percent of bacteria in Milk food product = 78 × 35 ÷ 100 = 2730 ÷ 100 = 27.30

Total number of Cereals food product = 22 +20 +15 =
Percent of bacteria in Cereals food product = 57 × 35 ÷ 100 =  1995 ÷ 100 = 19.95

8.3 Comparing Populations (pp. 337–342)
Learning Target: Compare populations using measures of center and variation.

Question 9.
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the points scored per game by two football teams during the regular season.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 9
a. Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation.
b. Which team is more likely to score 28 points in a game?
Answer:
a. Team B has greater measures of center and both the team have same measures of variation.
b. Team A is most likely to score 28 points in a game.

Explanation:
a. Data of Team A =  0 6 14 22 28
Median of Team A =  14
IQR of Team A = 22 – 6 = 16
Data of Team B = 0  20  32  36  42
Median of Team B = 32
IQR of Team B = 36 – 20 = 16

b. In the data given, 28 points are given in team A not in Team B.

Question 10.
The dot plots show the ages of campers at two summer camps.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 10
a. Express the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation.
b. Are the ages of campers a tone camp significantly greater than at the other? Explain.

Answer:
a. Differences in medians ÷ IQR = 15 – 13 ÷ 2 = 2 ÷ 2 = 1
b. No, the ages of  campers are  significantly greater than at the other.

Explanation:
a. Data of Camp A =  13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 17
Order: 13 14 15 16 17
Median of Camp A = 15
IQR of Camp A = 16 – 14 = 2
Data of Camp B = 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15
Order: 11 12 13 14 15
Median of Camp B = 13
IQR of  Camp B = 14 – 12 = 2
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = 15 – 13 ÷ 2 = 2 ÷ 2 = 1

b. Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the medians is not significant.

8.4 Using Random Samples to Compare Populations (pp. 343–348)
Learning Target: Use random samples to compare populations.

Question 11.
The double dot plot shows the median gas mileages of 10 random samples of 50 vehicles for two car models. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which car model has a better gas mileage? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 11
Answer:
The Variation of Model B measures are greater compared to the measures of  the Variation of Model A.
The measures of center of Model B is greater than the measures of Model A.
Model B cars has a better gas mileage than that of Model A cars.

Explanation:
Data of Model A =  18  19 19  20 20 20 21 21 22 27
Order: 18 19 20 21 22 27
Median of Model A =  20 + 21 ÷ 2 =41 ÷ 2 = 20.5
Mean of Model A = 18 + 19 + 19 + 20 + 20 + 20 + 21 + 21 +22 +27 ÷ 10
=  207 ÷ 10
= 20.7
Variation of Model A = (18-20.7)^2 + (19-20.7)^2 + (19-20.7)^2 + (20-20.7)^2 + (20-20.7)^2 + (20-20.7)^2 + (21-20.7)^2 + (21-20.7)^2 +(22-20.7)^2 + (27-20.7)^2  ÷ 10
= (-2.7)^2 + (-1.7)^2 + (-1.7)^2 + (-0.7)^2 + (-0.7)^2 + (-0.7)^2 + (0.3)^2 + (0.3)^2 +(1.3)^2 + (6.3)^2  ÷ 10
= 7.29 + 2.89 + 2.89 + 0.49 + 0.49 + 0.49 + 0.09 +0.09 + 1.69 + 39.69 ÷ 10
=  56.37  ÷ 10
= 5.637
Data of Model B = 20 21  27  29 29 29 30 30 31 32
Order: 20 21 27 29 30 31 32
Median of Model B = 29
Mean of Model B = 20 + 21 + 27 + 29 + 29 + 29 + 30 + 30 + 31 + 32 ÷ 10
=  278 ÷ 10
= 27.8
Variation of Model B = (20-27.8)^2 + (21-27.8)^2 + (27-27.8)^2 + (29-27.8)^2 + (29-27.8)^2 + (30-27.8)^2 + (30-27.8)^2 + (31-27.8)^2 +(31-27.8)^2 + (32-27.8)^2  ÷ 10
= (-7.8)^2 + (-6.8)^2 + (-0.8)^2 + (1.2)^2 + (1.2)^2 + (2.2)^2 + (2.2)^2 + (3.2)^2 +(3.2)^2 + (4.2)^2  ÷ 10
= 60.84 + 46.24 + 0.64  + 1.44 + 1.44 + 4.84 + 4.84 + 10.24 + 10.24 + 17.64 ÷ 10
= 158.4 ÷ 10
= 15.84

Question 12.
You compare the average amounts of time people in their twenties and thirties spend driving each week. The double box-and-whisker plot represents the medians of 100 random samples of 8 people from each age group. Can you determine whether one age group drives more than the other? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 12
Answer:
Because the variables are same, you can determine the one age group drives more than the other visual overlap by expressing the differences in the medians as the multiples of IQR.

Explanation:
Data of Twenties = 0 5 10 15 25
Median of Twenties = 10
IQR of Twenties = 15 – 5 = 10
Data of Thirties = 0 10 15 20  40
Median of Thirties = 15
IQR of Thirties = 20 – 10 =10
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = 15- 10 ÷10 = 5 ÷10 =0.5
Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference is not significant.

Statistics Practice Test

Question 1.
You want to estimate the number of students in your school who prefer to bring a lunch from home rather than buy one at school. You survey five students who are standing in the lunch line. Determine whether the sample biased or unbiased. Explain.

Answer:
The sample is biased.

Explanation:
The sample taken is biased because it does not gives you the accurate information of the number of students in your school prefer to bring a lunch from home rather than buy one at school. The sample size chosen is incorrect as taking the students in the lunch line..

Question 2.
You want to predict which candidate will likely be voted Seventh Grade Class President. There are 560 students in the seventh grade class. You randomly sample 3 different groups of 50 seventh-grade students. The results are shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics pt 2
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of students in seventh grade that vote for Candidate A.
b. Who do you expect to be voted Seventh Grade Class President? Explain.

Answer:
a. Estimation for the number of students who vote for Candidate A = 64.
b. Candidate B is to be expected to be voted Seventh Grade Class President.

Explanation:
a. Estimation for the number of students who vote for Candidate A = 27 + 22 +15 = 64.
Estimation for the number of students who vote for Candidate B = 23 + 28 + 35 = 86.
b. Candidate B is to be expected to be voted Seventh Grade Class President.

Question 3.
Of 60 randomly chosen students from a school surveyed, 16 chose the aquarium as their favorite field trip. There are 720 students in the school. Predict the number of students in the school who choose the aquarium as their favorite field trip.
Answer:
Number of students in the school who choose the aquarium as their favorite field trip = 192.

Explanation:
Number of students who chose the aquarium as their favorite field trip = 16
Number of students  chosen students from a school surveyed = 60
Total number of students in the school = 720
Number of students in the school who choose the aquarium as their favorite field trip = 720/60 × 16 = 192

Question 4.
The double box-and-whisker plot shows the ages of the viewers of two television shows in a small town.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics pt 4
a. Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation.
b. Which show is more likely to have a 44-year-old viewer?

Answer:
a. The Show A  center is likely to be greater than the measures of the center of Show B. Variation of show B is greater than Variation of show A.
b.  Show A  is more likely to have a 44-year-old viewer.

Explanation:
Data of Show A = 35   40   45    50   55
Median of Show A = 45
Mean of Show A = 35  + 40 +  45  +  50 +  55 ÷ 5 = 225 ÷ 5 = 45
Variation of Show A = (35-45)^2 + (40-45)^2 + (45-45)^2 + (50-45)^2 +  (55-45)^2 ÷ 5
= (-10)^2 + (-5)^2 + (0)^2 + (5)^2 +  (10)^2 ÷ 5
= 100 + 25 + 0 + 25 +100 ÷ 5
= 250 ÷ 5
= 50.

Data of Show B = 20   25    35    40   55
Median of Show B = 35
Mean of Show B = 20 + 25  +  35  +  40 +  55 ÷ 5 = 175 ÷ 5 = 35.
Variation of show B = (20-35)^2 + (25-35)^2 + (35-35)^2 + (40-35)^2 +  (55-35)^2 ÷ 5
= (-15)^2 + (-10)^2 + (0)^2 + (5)^2 +  (5)^2 ÷ 5
= 225 + 100 + 0 + 25 + 25   ÷ 5
= 375 ÷ 5
= 75.

Question 5.
The double box-and-whisker plot shows the test scores for two French classes taught by the same teacher.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics pt 5
a. Express the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation.
b. Are the scores for one class significantly greater than for the other? Explain.

Answer:
a. The difference of the Variation of Class A is similar to the Variation of Class A and the measures of the center of Class A  is comparably greater than the measures of the center of Class B.
b. Yes, the scores for one class significantly greater than for the other.

Explanation:
Data of Class A =  76  84  88  92  100                                          Data of Class B = 68  76  80   84   100
Median of Class A = 76 + 84 + 88 + 92 + 100 ÷ 5                     Median of Class B = 68 + 76 + 80 + 84  + 100 ÷ 5
=  440  ÷ 5 = 88                                                                                = 408  ÷ 5  = 81.6
IQR of Class A = 92 – 84 = 8                                                        IQR of Class B = 84 – 76 =  8

Question 6.
Two airplanes each hold about 400 pieces of luggage. The double dot plot shows a random sample of 8 pieces of luggage from each plane. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which plane has heavier luggage? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics pt 6
Answer:
The measures of center of Plane A  is greater than the measure of center of Plane B.
Plane A is likely to have heavier luggage than Plane B. The Variation of Plane A is greater than Variation of Plane B.

Explanation:
Data of Plane A =  28  36  36  38  38  40  40  40                     Data of plane B = 32  32  34  34  34  36  38 50
Order = 28 36 38 40                                                                Order = 32  34  36  38 50
Median of Plane A = 36 + 38 ÷ 2 = 74 ÷ 2 = 37                Median of Plane B  = 36
Variation of Plane A =  (28-37)^2 + (36-37)^2 + (36-37)^2 + (38-37)^2 +  (38-37)^2 + (40-37)^2 + (40-37)^2 +  (40-37)^2 ÷ 8
=(-9)^2 + (-1)^2 +  (-1)^2  + (1)^2 + (1)^2 +  (3)^2  + (3)^2 + (3)^2  ÷ 8
= 81 + 1 +1 +1 +1 +9 +9 +9  ÷ 8
= 112 ÷ 8
= 14.
Variation of Plane B =  (32-36)^2 + (32-36)^2 +  (34-36)^2  + (34-36)^2 + (34-36)^2 +  (36-36)^2  + (38-36)^2 + (50-36)^2 ÷ 8
= (-4)^2 + (-4)^2 +  (-2)^2 + (-2)^2 + (-2)^2 +  (0)^2  + (2)^2 + (4)^2  ÷ 8
= 16 + 16 + 4+ 4+ 4+ 0 +4 + 16  ÷ 8
=  64  ÷ 8
= 8.

Statistics Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 1
Question 1.
Which of the ratios form a proportion?
A. 5 to 2 and 4 to 10
B. 2 : 3 and 7 : 8
C. 3 to 2 and 15 to 10
D. 12 : 8 and 8 : 42.
Answer:
C. 3 to 2 and 15 to 10 is the  ratios form a proportion

Explanation:
A) 5 to 2 and 4 to 10
B) 2 : 3 and 7 : 8
C) 3 to 2 and 15 to 10
=> 3 : 2 and 15 : 10
=> Divide by 5 on both sides
=> 3 : 2 and  3 : 2
D) 12 : 8 and 8 : 42.
=> Divide by 2 on both sides
=> 6 : 4 and 4 : 21
=> Divide by 2 on both sides
=> 3 : 2 and  2 :21

Question 2.
A student scored 600 the first time. she took the mathematics portion of a college entrance exam. The next time she took the exam, she scored 660. Her second score represents what percent increase over her first score?
F. 9.1%
G. 10%
H. 39.6%
I. 60%
Answer:
F = 9.1 %  is the Percentage increase in her second score over her first score.

Explanation:
Number of marks she scored in first attempt in the exam = 600
Number of marks she scored in second attempt in the exam = 660
Difference in the score = 660 – 600 = 60
Percentage increase in her second score over her first score = 60 ÷ 660 × 100
= 0.9090 × 100 = 9.1%

Question 3.
You ask 100 randomly chosen students to name their favorite food. There are 1250 students in the school. Based on this sample, what is the number of students in the school whose favorite food is chicken?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 3
A. 100
B. 225
C. 450
D. 475
Answer:
Number of students in the school whose favorite food is chicken = 100.

Explanation:
Total number of students in the school = 1250
Number of students randomly chosen = 100
Number of students in the school whose favorite food is chicken = 8 ÷ 100 × 1250
= 0.08 × 1250 = 100.

Question 4.
Which value of makes the equation p + 6 = 5 true?
F. – 1
G. 1
H. 11
I. 30
Answer:
F. – 1
p = -1 makes the equation p + 6 = 5 true.

Explanation:
F) Substitute p = -1 in Equation:
p + 6 = 5 = -1 + 6 = 5
G) Substitute p = 1 in Equation:
p + 6 = 5 = 1 + 6 = 7
H ) Substitute p = 11 in Equation:
p + 6 = 5 = 11 + 6 = 17
I) Substitute p = 30 in Equation:
p + 6 = 5 = 30 + 6 = 36

Question 5.
The table shows the costs for four cans of tomato soup. Which can has the lowest cost per ounce?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 5
A. Can A
B. Can B
C. Can C
D. Can D
Answer:
The lowest cost per ounce has D. Can D.

Explanation:
Cost of Can A cost per ounce= 1.95 ÷ 26 = 0.075
Cost of Can B  cost per ounce= 0.72 ÷ 8 = 0.09
Cost of Can C  cost per ounce=0.86 ÷ 10.75 = 0.08
Cost of Can D  cost per ounce= 2.32 ÷ 23.2 = 0.1

Question 6.
What value of y makes the equation – 3y = – 18 true?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 6
Answer:
y = 6 makes the equation – 3y = – 18 true.

Explanation:
Equation – 3y = – 18
=> y = -18 ÷ -3
Divide by 3 both sides.
=> y = 6

Question 7.
The double dot plot shows the values in two data sets. Which sentence best represents the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 7
F. The difference of the means is about 3.3 times the MAD.
G. The difference of the means is about 3.8 times the MAD.
H. The difference of the means is 36 times the MAD.
I. The difference of the means is 48.7 times the MAD.

Answer:
G. The difference of the means is about 3.8 times the MAD.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 42  43  46  48   48  51  51  51  52  55
Mean of set A = 42 + 43 + 46 + 48 + 48 + 51 + 51 + 51 + 52 + 55 ÷ 10
= 487 ÷ 10
= 48.7
MAD of set A = |42−48.7∣ + |43−48.7∣ +|46−48.7∣ +|48−48.7∣ + |48-48.7∣ + |51-48.7∣ + |51-48.7∣ +|51-48.7∣ +|52-48.7∣ + |55-48.7∣ ÷ 10
=  |-6.7∣ + |-5.7∣ +|-2.7∣ +|-0.7∣ + |-0.7∣ + |2.3∣ + |2.3∣ +|2.3∣ +|3.3∣ + |6.3 ∣ ÷ 10
= 33 ÷ 10
= 3.3
Data of set B = 30  31  33  34  36  36  38  40  41  41
Mean of set B = 30 + 31 + 33 + 34 + 36 + 36 + 38 + 40 + 41 + 41 ÷ 10
= 360÷ 10
= 36.0
MAD of set B = |30-36∣ + |31-36∣ +|33-36∣ +|34-36∣ + |36-36∣ + |36-36∣ + |38-36∣ +|40-36∣ +|41-36∣ + |41-36∣ ÷ 10
= |-6∣ + |-5∣ +|-3∣ +|-2∣ + |0∣ + |0∣ + |2∣ +|4∣ +|5∣ + |5∣ ÷ 10
=  32  ÷ 10
= 3.2
Difference in Means ÷ MAD of set A= 48.7 – 36 ÷ 3.3 = 12.7 ÷ 3.3= 3.85
Difference in Means ÷ MAD of set B= 48.7 – 36 ÷ 3.2 = 12.7 ÷ 3.2 =3.97

Question 8.
What is the missing value in the ratio table?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 8
Answer:
The missing value in the ratio table is 20.

Explanation:
a) 2/3  = 5
=> 2 = 5 × 3
=> 2 = 15

b) 8/3 = X
8 = 3 × =  60
=> 60 ÷ 3
=> 20

Question 9.
You are selling tomatoes. What is the minimum number of 4pounds of tomatoes you need to sell to earn at least $44?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 9
A. 11
B. 12
C. 40
D. 176
Answer:
A. 11 is the minimum number of  tomatoes needed to sell to earn at least $44.

Explanation:
Cost of the tomatoes = $44
cost of the tomatoes per pound = $4
The minimum number of  tomatoes needed to sell to earn at least $44 = 44 ÷ 4 = 11.

Question 10.
You and a group of friends want to know how many students in your school prefer science. There are 900 students in your school. Each person randomly surveys 20 students. The table shows the results. Which subject do students at your school prefer?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 10
Part A Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer science.
Part B Describe the variation of the estimates.
Part C Use the samples to make one estimate for the number of students who prefer science in your school.

Answer:
Number of students who prefer science = 28
Mean = 5.6
Variation of the estimate  = 4.24

Explanation:
Number of students who prefer science = 6 + 7 + 8 +5 + 2 = 28
Mean of number of students who prefer science = 6 + 7 + 8 +5 + 2 ÷ 5 = 28 ÷ 5 = 5.6
Variation of the estimate  = (6-5.6)^2 + (7-5.6)^2 + (8-5.6)^2 + (5-5.6)^2 +  (2-5.6)^2  ÷ 5
= (-0.4)^2 + (1.4)^2 + (2.4)^2 + (0.6)^2 + (-3.6)^2  ÷ 5
=  0.16 +1.96 + 5.76 + 0.36 +  12.96  ÷ 5
=  21.2 ÷ 5
= 4.24

Conclusion:

We believe that the details provided in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics made you happy. Compare the questions in real-time so that you can understand concepts easily. Stay with us to get the answer keys for all the chapters of BIM grade 7.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume

Area and Volume are the important topics in maths. This will be helpful in the real-time environment. Know how and where to apply the formulas from this page. Get a detailed explanation for all the questions here. Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pdf for free of cost. As per your convenience, we have provided the solutions in pdf format so that you can prepare offline.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume

Get the guided notes for Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume from here. This will be the best resource to enhance your math skills.  The topics covered in this chapter are Surface Areas of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids, Volume of Prism, Pyramids, Cross Sections of Three-Dimensional Figures. Test yourself by solving questions given at the end of the chapter.

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Surface Areas of Prisms

Lesson: 2 Surface Areas of Cylinders

Lesson: 3 Surface Areas of Pyramids

Lesson: 4 Volumes of Prisms

Lesson: 5 Volumes of Pyramids

Lesson: 6 Cross Sections of Three-Dimensional Figures

Chapter 10 – Surface Area and Volume

Surface Area and Volume STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Paper Measurements
The thickness of a single piece of paper cannot be precisely measured using a ruler. What another method can you use to measure the thickness of a piece of paper?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 1
Watch the STEAM Video “Paper Measurements.” Then answer the following questions.
1. A stack of 500 pieces of paper is 2 inches tall. How tall is a stack of 250 pieces? 100 pieces? 10 pieces? How thick is a single piece of paper?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 2
2. You have a circular notepad. How can you find the volume of one piece of paper in the notepad?

Answer:
1. for 250 pieces = 46750 cubic inches
2. volume = 187 cubic inches

Explanation:
1. for 250 pieces = l w x h
250 pieces = 250 x 17 x 11
pieces = 46750
100 pieces = 100 x 17 x 11
pieces = 18,700
10 pieces = 10 x 17 x 11
pieces = 1870
piece = 1 x 17 x 11
piece = 187
2. volume = l x w x h
volume = 8.5 x 11 x 2
volume = 187
Performance Task

Volumes and Surface Areas of Small Objects
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given the dimensions of a shipping box and the number of bouncy balls that fit in the box.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 3
You will be asked to use the box to estimate the volume of each bouncy ball. Why might it be helpful to use the volume of a container of objects to estimate the volume of one of the objects?

Answer:
The volume of the object =11,809.8 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
The volume of rectangular prism = l x w x h
where l = length, w = width, h = height
rectangular prism = 27 x 27 x 16.2
volume = 11,809.8 cubic centimeters

Surface Area and Volume Getting Ready for Chapter 10

Chapter Exploration
Question 1.
Work with a partner. Perform each step for each of the given dimensions.
• Use 24 one-inch cubes to form a rectangular prism that has the given dimensions.
• Make a sketch of the prism.
• Find the surface area of the prism.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 4

Answer:
a . 52 inches
b . 98 inches
c . 76 inches
d . 70 inches
e . 68 inches
f . 64 inches
g . 52  inches

prism :

The surface area of the square prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
The surface area of the rectangle prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)

Explanation:
a . The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 4 w = 3 h = 2
rectangular prism =2(4 x 3) +(2 x 3) +(4 x 2)
prism = 2(12) + (6) +(8)
surface area =2( 26)
surface area = 52
b . The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 1 w = 1 h = 24
rectangular prism =2(1 x 1) +(1 x 24) +(1 x 24)
prism = 2(1) + (24) +(24)
surface area =2( 49)
surface area = 98
c . The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 1 w = 2 h = 12
rectangular prism =2(1 x 2) +(2 x 12)+(1 x 12)
prism = 2(2) + (24) +(12)
surface area =2( 38)
surface area = 76
d. The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 1 w = 3 h = 8
rectangular prism =2(1 x 3) +(3 x 8)+(1 x 8)
prism = 2(3) + (24) +(8)
surface area =2( 35)
surface area = 70
e . The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 1 w = 4 h = 6
rectangular prism =2(1 x 4) +(4 x 6)+(1 x 6)
prism = 2(4) + (24) +(6)
surface area =2( 34)
surface area = 68
f . The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 2 w = 2 h = 6
rectangular prism =2(2 x 2) +(2 x 6)+(1 x 6)
prism = 2(4) + (12) +(6)
surface area =2( 32)
surface area = 64
g .  The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 2 w = 4 h = 3
rectangular prism =2(2 x 4) +(4 x 3)+(2 x 3)
prism = 2(8) + (12) +(6)
surface area =2( 26)
surface area = 52

Question 2.
REASONING
Work with a partner. If two blocks of ice have the same volume, the block with the greater surface area will melt faster. The blocks below have equal volumes. Which block will melt faster? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 5

Answer:
The first block will melt faster.

Explanation:
The surface area of the square prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
where l = 1ft w = 1ft h = 1 ft
surface area = 2(1 x 1)+2(1 x 1) + 2(1 x 1)
surface area = 2(1)+2(1) + 2(1)
surface area = 2+2+2
surface area = 6
The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 2 w = 1 h = 0.5
rectangular prism =2(2 x 1) +(2 x 0.5) +(1 x 0.5)
prism = 2(2) + (1) +(0.5)
surface area = 4 + 1 + 0.5
surface area = 5.5

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
lateral surface area
the slant height of a pyramid
regular pyramid
cross section

Answer:
Lateral Surface Area = The lateral surface of an object is all of the sides of the object, excluding its base and top.
Slant Height of a Pyramid = The slant height of an object is the distance measured along a lateral face from the base to the apex along the center of the face.
Regular Pyramid =  In geometry, a pyramid is a polyhedron formed by connecting a polygonal base and a point, called the apex. Each base edge and apex form a triangle.
Cross Section = a surface or shape exposed by making a straight cut through something, especially at the right angles to an axis. ( The cross-section of an octahedron is a square.)

Lesson 10.1 Surface Areas of Prisms

EXPLORATION 1

Writing a Formula for Surface Area
Work with a partner.
a. Use the diagrams to write a formula for the surface area of a rectangular prism. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 1
b. Choose dimensions for a rectangular prism. Then draw the prism and use your formula in part(a) to find the surface area.

Answer:
a :

b : The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height.

EXPLORATION 2

Surface Areas of Prisms
Work with a partner.
a. Identify the solid represented by the net. Then find the surface area of the solid.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 2
b. Describe a method for finding the surface area of any prism.

Answer:
a : The surface area of the solid = 94
b :  The surface area of the solid = 2(lw + lh + wh)

Explanation:
a :

b :
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 3

Try It

Find the surface area of the prism.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 4

Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 52 ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(2 x 3) + 2(3 x 4) +2(2×4)
surface area = 2(6) + 2(12) + 2(8)
surface area = 12 + 24 + 16
surface area = 52 ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 5
Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 288 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(5 x 8) + 2(8 x 8) +2(5×8) where l = 8m,w = 8m, h= 8m
surface area = 2(40) + 2(64) + 2(40)
surface area = 80 + 128 + 80
surface area = 288 sq. m

Question 3.
Find the surface area of the prism at the left.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 6

Answer:
The surface area of the prism at the left  = 288 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(5 x 12) + 2(12 x 13) +2(5×13) where l = 13m,w = 5m, h= 12m
surface area = 2(60) + 2(156) + 2(65)
surface area = 120 + 312 + 130
surface area = 562 sq. m

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.

WRITING
Explain the meaning of each term in the formula for the surface area of a rectangular prism.

Answer:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height

Question 5.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 7

Answer:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 26 sq. cm
The surface area of the bases of the prism = 26 sq. cm

Explanation:

The surface area of the triangular prism = 2B + ph
where B = area of the base, p = perimeter of the base, h = height
surface area = 2( 3) + 4 (5)
surface area = 6 + 20
surface area = 26 sq. cm
The surface area of the bases of the prism = ph + 2B
surface area = 4(5) + 2(3)
surface area = 26 sq. cm
The area of the net of the prism = The sum of the areas of the bases and the lateral faces of the prism.

Question 6.
You want to stain the lateral faces of the wooden chest shown. Find the area that you want to stain in square inches.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 8

Answer:
The area that you want to stain in square inches = 3456 square inches.

Explanation:
The surface area of the lateral faces of the prism = ph + 2B
surface area = 4(4) + 2(4)
surface area = 24 ft
1 feet = 144 square inches
144 x 24 = 3456 square inches.

Question 7.
One can of frosting covers about 280 square inches. Is one can of frosting enough to frost the cake? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 9
Answer:
no one can of frosting is not enough to frost the cake.

Explanation:
The cake piece is in the shape of a rectangle
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(39 + 117 + 27)
183 sq. inches.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the surface area of the bench shown. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 10

Answer:
The surface area of the bench = 16 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(1 x 1.5) +(1.5 x 2) +(2 x 5)
surace area = 2(1.5) + 3 + 10
surface area = 16 sq. ft

Surface Areas of Prisms Homework & Practice 10.1

Review & Refresh
Classify the pair of angles. Then find the value of x.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 11

Answer:
The value of x = 146

Explanation:
The above-shown angle = obtuse angle
given that 34 degrees
180 – 34 = 146

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 12
Answer:
The value of x = 106

Explanation:
The above-shown angle = right angle
given that 74 degrees
180 – 74 = 106Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 13
Answer:
The value of x = 121

Explanation:
The above-shown angle = acute angles.
given that 59 degrees
x + 10 = 59
x = 49
180 – 49 = 121

Question 3.

Find the area of a circle with the indicated dimensions. Use 3.14 or \(\frac{22}{7}\) for π.
Question 4.
radius: 21 in.

Answer:
The area of the circle = 1,384.74 sq. in

Explanation:
The area of the circle = πr2
area = 3.14 x 21 x 21 where π = 3.14 radius = 21 in
area = 1,384.74 sq. in
Question 5.
diameter: 36mm
Answer:
The area of the circle = 530.66 sq. mm

Explanation:
The area of the circle = πr2
area = 3.14 x 13 x 13 where π = 3.14 radius = 13 mm
area = 530.66 sq. mm

Question 6.
radius: 8.5 m

Answer:
The area of the circle = 226.865 sq. m

Explanation:
The area of the circle = πr2
area = 3.14 x 8.5 x 8.5 where π = 3.14 radius = 8.5 m
area = 226.865 sq. m

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

SURFACE AREA OF A PRISM Identify the solid represented by the net. Then find the surface area of the solid. (See Explorations 1 & 2, p. 409.)
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 14

Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 182

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(6 x 8) +(9 x 6) +(10 x 8)
surace area = 2(48) + 54 + 80
surface area = 182

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 15

Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 44

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(5 x 2) +(2 x 3) +(3 x 2)
surace area = 2(10) + 6+ 6
surface area = 44 sq. units

FINDING THE SURFACE AREA OF A PRISM Find the surface area of the prism.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 16

Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 324 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(6 x 16) +(16 x 3) +(3 x 6)
surace area = 2(96) + 48+ 18
surface area = 324 sq. m

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 17

Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 294 sq. yd

Explanation:
The surface area of the prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(7 x 7)+ 2(7 x 7) +2(7×7)
surface area = 2(49) + 2(49) + 2(49)
surface area = 98 + 98 + 98
surface area = 294 sq. yd

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 18
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 32 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 2B + ph
where B = area of the base, p = perimeter of the base, h = height
surface area = 2( 6) + 4 (5)
surface area = 12 + 20
surface area = 32 sq. m

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 19
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 166 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 2B + ph
where B = area of the base, p = perimeter of the base, h = height
surface area = 2( 15) + 17 (8)
surface area = 30 + 136
surface area = 166 sq. ft

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 20
Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 46.4 yds

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(1.2 x 5) +(5 x 3) +(1.2 x 6)
surace area = 2(1) + 15+ 7.2
surface area = 23.2 x 2
surface area = 46.4 sq. yds

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 21
Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 693 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the paralleloram prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(9 x 10) +(9 x 13.5) +(13.5 x 10)
surace area = 2(90) +121.5 + 135
surface area = 346.5 x 2
surface area = 693 sq. inches

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the surface area of the prism. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 22
Answer:
yes my friend is correct.

Explanation:
The surface area of the prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(5 x 3)+ 2(3 x 4) +2(5×3)
surface area = 2(15) + 2(12) + 2(15)
surface area = 30+ 24 + 30
surface area = 84 sq. cm

Question 16.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A cube-shaped satellite has side lengths of 10 centimeters. What is the least amount of aluminum needed to cover the satellite?
Answer:
The least amount of aluminum needed to cover the satellite = 90 centimeters.

Explanation:
Given that cube has the side lengths of 10 and 10 centimeters
10 x 10 = 100
100 -10 = 90
so the least amount of aluminum needed to cover = 90 centimeters.

FINDING SURFACE AREA Find the surface area of the prism.
Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 23
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 80 in

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 2B + ph
where B = area of the base, p = perimeter of the base, h = height
surface area = 2( 16) + 4 (12)
surface area = 32 + 48
surface area = 80 sq. in

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 24
Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 58 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(4 x 4) +(4 x 2) +(2.5 x 2)
surace area = 2(16) + 8+ 5
surface area = 29 x 2
surface area = 58 sq. m

Question 19.
OPEN-ENDED
Draw and label a rectangular prism that has a surface area of 158 square yards.
Answer:

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(4 x 5) +(5x 6) +(4 x 7)
surace area = 2(20) + 30+ 29
surface area = 79 x 2
surface area = 158 square yards

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
A label that wraps around a box of golf balls covers 75% of its lateral surface area. What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 25
Answer:
The value of x = 25%

Explanation:
Given that the label that wraps around a box of golf covers 75%
That means for 100%
100 – 75 = 25%

Question 21.
STRUCTURE
You are painting the prize pedestals shown(including the bottoms). You need 0.5 pint of paint to paint the red pedestal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 26
a. The edge lengths of the green pedestal are one-half the edge lengths of the red pedestal. How much paint do you t do you need to paint the green pedestal?
b. The edge lengths of the blue pedestal are triple the edge lengths of the green pedestal. How much paint do you need to paint the blue pedestal?
c. Compare the ratio of paint volumes to the ratio of edge lengths for the green and red pedestals. Repeat for the green and blue pedestals. What do you notice?
Answer:
a. The paint you need to paint the green pedestal =1024 in
b. The paint you need to paint the blue pedestal = 5798464 in
c. 1 : 2 for green and red , 1 : 3 for green and blue.
b. Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
where l = length , w= width , h = height
surface area = 2(16 x 16) +(16x 24) +(16 x 24)
surace area = 2(256) + 384+ 384
surface area = 1024 x 2
surface area = 2048 sq. in

Question 22.
NUMBER SENSE
A key chain-sized puzzle cube is made up of small cubes. Each small cube has a surface area of 1.5 square inches.
a. What is the edge length of each small cube?
b. What is the surface area of the entire puzzle cube?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.1 27
Answer:
The edge length of each small cube = 1
The surface area of the entire puzzle cube  = 81

Explanation:
The surface area of the prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(0 x 0)+ 2(0 x 0) +1.5(1x 1)
surface area = 2(0) +2(0) +1.5(1)
surface area = 0 + 0 + 1.5
surface area = 1.5
The surface area of the each small cube = 81

Lesson 10.2 Surface Areas of Cylinders

A is a solid that has two parallel, identical circular bases.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 1

EXPLORATION 1

Finding the Surface Area of a Cylinder
Work with a partner.
a. Make a net for the can. Name each shape in the net.
b. How are the dimensions of the paper related to the dimensions of the can?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 2
c. Write a formula that represents the surface area of a cylinder with h a height of and bases with a radius of r.
d. Estimate the dimensions of each can. Then use your formula in part(c) to estimate the surface area of each can.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 3
Answer:
a.
b. The dimensions of the paper = the dimensions of the can
c .

d. The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr (h + r)

Try It

Find the surface area of the cylinder. Round your answer to the nearest tenth if necessary.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 4
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 34138.08 sq. yd

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where r = radius, h = height
2 x 3.14 x 36 + 2 x 3.14 x 6 x 9
226.08 + 33912
34138.08

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 5
Answer:

The surface area of the cylinder = 395.64 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where r = radius, h = height
2 x 3.14 x 9+ 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 18
56.52 + 339.12
395.64 sq. cms

Find the lateral surface area of the cylinder. Round your answer to the nearest tenth.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 6
Answer:
The lateral surface of the cylinder = 75.36 sq. cms

Explanation:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 2πrh
area = 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 4
area = 75.36 sq. cms

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 7
Answer:
The lateral surface of the cylinder = 150.72 sq. yds

Explanation:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 2πrh
area = 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 8
area = 150.72 sq. yds

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
WRITING
Which part of the formula S = 2πr2 + 2πrh represents the lateral surface area of a cylinder? the areas of the bases?
Answer:
The area of the bases of the cylinder.

Explanation:
The area of the bases of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where r = radius , h = height

Question 6.
CRITICAL THINKING
You are given the height of a cylinder and the circumference of its base. Describe how to find the surface area of the cylinder.
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh

Explanation:
The area of the bases of the cylinder =2πr2 + 2πrh
where r = radius, h = height

Question 7.
FINDING A SURFACE AREA
Find the surface area of the cylinder at the left. Round your answer to the nearest tenth.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 8
Answer:
The lateral surface of the cylinder = 351.68 sq. in

Explanation:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 2πrh
area = 2 x 3.14 x 16 + 2 x 3.14x 4 x 10
area = 100.48 + 251.2
area = 351.68 sq. in

Question 8.
FINDING A LATERAL SURFACE AREA
Find the lateral surface area of the cylinder at the right. Round your answer to the nearest tenth.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 9
Answer:

The lateral surface of the cylinder = 351 sq. in

Explanation:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 2πrh
area = 2 x 3.14 x 16 + 2 x 3.14x 4 x 10
area = 100.48 + 251.2
area = 351.68 sq. in
IN the question given that round to the nearest tenth
area = 351 sq. in

Question 9.
You remove the lid of the can. What is the percent of change in the surface area of the can?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 10
Answer:
The percent of the change in the surface area of the can = 22,019.25 mm

Explanation:
The surface area of the can = 2π rx r+ 2πrh
2 x 3.14 x 1806.25 + 2 x 3.14 x 42.5 x 40
22,019.25 mm
The surface area of the triangular prism = 166 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 2B + ph
where B = area of the base, p = perimeter of the base, h = height
surface area = 2( 15) + 17 (8)
surface area = 30 + 136
surface area = 166 sq. ft

Question 10.
After burning half of a cylindrical candle, the surface area is 176 square inches. The radius of the candle is 2 inches. What was the original height of the candle?
Answer:
The original height of the

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
The area of the sheet of wrapping paper is equal to the lateral surface area of a cylindrical tube. The tube is 14 inches tall. What is the surface area of the tube, including the bases? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 11
Answer:
The surface area of the tube including the bases = 42.96 inches

Explanation:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 2 x 3.14 x r x h
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 13 x 14
surface area = 1142.96 inchs

Surface Areas of Cylinders Homework & Practice 10.2

Review & Refresh

Find the surface area of the prism.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 12
Answer:

The surface area of the prism = 142 sq. cms

Explanation:
The surface area of the prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(7 x 3)+ 2(3 x 5) +2(5×7)
surface area = 2(21) + 2(15) + 2(35)
surface area = 42+ 30 + 70
surface area = 142 sq. cm

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 13
Answer:

The surface area of the triangular prism = 649 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 2B + ph
where B = area of the base, p = perimeter of the base, h = height
surface area = 2( 20) + 29 (21)
surface area = 40+ 609
surface area = 649 sq. ft

Question 3.
Which of the following is equivalent to 0.625?
A. \(\frac{5}{8}\)
B. \(\frac{625}{100}\)
C. 0.625%
D. 6.25%
Answer:
A is the correct answer

Explanation:
(5/8) = 0.625

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

FINDING SURFACE AREA Find the surface area of the cylinder. (See Exploration 1, p. 415.)
Question 4.
a can with a radius of 60 millimeters and a height of 160 millimeters
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 82,896 millimeters

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 60 millimeters , height = 160 given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 60 x 60 + 2 x 3.14 x 60 x 160
surface area = 22608 + 60,288
surface area = 82,896 sq. millimeters

Question 5.
a hay bale with a diameter of 30 inches and a height of 72 inches
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 8195.4 inches

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 15 inches , height = 72 inches given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 15 x 15 + 2 x 3.14 x 15 x 72
surface area = 1413 + 6,782.4
surface area = 8195.4 sq. inches

FINDING SURFACE AREA Find the surface area of the cylinder. Round your answer to the nearest tenth if necessary.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 14
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 94.2 ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 3 ft , height = 2 ft given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 2
surface area = 56.52 + 37.68
surface area = 94.2 sq. ft

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 15
Answer:

The surface area of the cylinder = 31.4 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 1 m , height = 4 m given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 1 x 1 + 2 x 3.14 x 1 x 4
surface area = 6.28+ 25.12
surface area = 31.4 sq. m

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 16
Answer:

The surface area of the cylinder = 527.52 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 7 ft , height = 5 ft given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 7 x 7 + 2 x 3.14 x 7 x 5
surface area = 307.72+ 219.8
surface area = 527.52 sq. ft

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 17
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 87.92 sq. mm

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 2mm , height = 5 mm given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 2 x 2 + 2 x 3.14 x 2 x 5
surface area = 25.12+ 62.8
surface area = 87.92 sq. mm

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 18
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 489.84 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 6 ft , height = 7 ft given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 6 x 6 + 2 x 3.14 x 6 x 7
surface area = 226.08+ 263.76
surface area = 489.84 sq. ft

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 19
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 678.24 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 6 cm , height = 12 cm given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 6 x 6 + 2 x 3.14 x 6 x 12
surface area = 226.08+ 452.16
surface area = 678.24 sq. cm

FINDING LATERAL SURFACE AREA Find the lateral surface area of the cylinder. Round your answer to the nearest tenth if necessary.
Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 20
Answer:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 376.8 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 10 ft , height = 6 ft given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 10 x 6
surface area =  376.8 sq. ft
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 21
Answer:
The lateral  surface area of the cylinder = 226.08 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 4 in , height = 9 in given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 4 x 9
surface area =  226.08 sq. in
Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 22
Answer:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 87.92 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 7 m , height = 2 m given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 7 x 2
surface area =  87.92 sq. m
Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the surface area of the cylinder. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 23
Answer:
No my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 5 x 5 + 2 x 3.14 x 5 x 10.6
surface area = 157 + 332.84
surface area = 489.84 sq. yds

Question 16.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The tank of a tanker truck is a stainless steel cylinder. Find the surface area of the tank.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 24
Answer:
The surface area of the tank = 1356.48 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 4 x 4 + 2 x 3.14 x 4 x 50
surface area = 100.48+ 1256
surface area = 1,356.48 sq. ft

Question 17.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The Petri dish shown has no lid. What is the surface area of the outside of the Petri dish?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 25
Answer:
The surface area of the outside of the petri dish= 20,410 sq. mm

Explanation:
The surface area of the outside of the petri dish = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 50 x 50 + 2 x 3.14 x 50x 15
surface area = 15700+ 4710
surface area = 20410 sq. mm

Question 18.
REASONING
You have two 8.5-by-11-inch pieces of paper. You form the lateral surfaces of two different cylinders by taping together a pair of opposite sides on each piece of paper so that one cylinder has a height of 8.5 inches and the other has a height of 11 inches. Without calculating, compare the surface areas of the cylinders (including the bases). Explain.
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder 1= 44.826012 sq. inches
The surface area of the cylinder 2= 56.915012 sq. inches

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder 1 = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 0.77 x 0.77 + 2 x 3.14 x 0.77x 8.5
surface area = 3.723412+ 41.1026
surface area = 44.826012 inches
The surface area of the cylinder 1 = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 0.77 x 0.77 + 2 x 3.14 x 0.77x 11
surface area = 3.723412+ 53.1916
surface area = 56.915012 inches

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
A ganza is a percussion instrument used in samba music.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 26
a. Find the surface area of each of the two labeled ganzas.
b. The smaller ganza weighs 1.1 pounds. Assume that the surface area is proportional to the weight. What is the weight of the larger ganza?
Answer:
a. The surface area of the smaller ganza= 296.73 sq. cm
The surface area of the larger ganza= 1036.2 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the smaller ganza = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 3.5 x 3.5 + 2 x 3.14 x 3.5x 10
surface area = 76.93+ 219.8
surface area = 296.73 sq. cm
The surface area of the larger ganza  = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 5.5 x 5.5 + 2 x 3.14 x 5.5x 24.5
surface area = 189.97+846.23
surface area = 1036.2 sq. cm

Question 20.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The wedge is one-eighth of the wheel of cheese.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 27
a. Find the surface area of the cheese before it is cut.
b. Find the surface area of the remaining cheese after the wedge is removed. Did the surface area increase, decrease, or remain the same?
Answer:
a. The surface area of the cheese before it is cut= 75.36 sq. in
b. The surface area of the cheese after the wedge is removed = 58.875 sq. in
The surface area decreases.

Explanation:
The surface area of the cheese after the wedge is removed = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 1
surface area = 56.52+ 18.84 in
surface area = 75.36 sq. in

The surface area of the cheese after the wedge is removed = 2πr2 + 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.14 x 3 x (1/8) (1/8) = 0.125
surface area = 56.52+ 2.355
surface area = 58.875 in
The surface area decreases

Question 21.
REPEATED REASONING
A cylinder has radius r and height h.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.2 28
a. How many times greater is the surface area of a cylinder when both dimensions are multiplied by2? 3? 5? 10?
b. Describe the pattern in part(a). Write an expression for the surface area of the cylinder when both dimensions are multiplied by a number.
Answer:
a. 2 times greater, 3 times greater, 5 times greater,10 times greater.
b. The expression for the surface area of the cylinder when both dimensions are multiplied 2 = 2r + 2h,3r + 3h,5r + 5h, 10r + 10 h

Lesson 10.3 Surface Areas of Pyramids

Many well-known pyramids have square bases, however, the base of a pyramid can be any polygon.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 1

EXPLORATION 1

Making a Scale Model
Work with a partner. Each pyramid below has a square base.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 2
a. Draw a net for a scale model of one of the pyramids. Describe the scale factor.
b. Find the lateral surface area of the real-life pyramid that you chose in part(a). Explain how you found your answer.
c. Draw a net for a pyramid with a non-rectangular base and find its lateral surface area. Explain how you found your answer.
Answer:
a.
b. The lateral surface of the real life pyramid = A + (1/2 ) ps
where A = area of base ,p= perimeter of base , s = slant height.
c.
The lateral surface area of the rectangular pyramid = A + (1/2)ps
where A = area of base ,p= perimeter of base , s = slant height.
A regular pyramid is a pyramid whose base is a regular polygon. The slant height lateral faces are triangles. The height of each triangle is the of the pyramid.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 3

Try It

Question 1.
What is the surface area of a square pyramid with a base side length of 9 centimeters and a slant height of 7 centimeters?
Answer:
The surface area of the square pyramid = 94.5 sq. centimeters

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of th base, s = slant height
surface area = 63 +(1/2) 9 x 7
surface area = 63 + 0.5 x  63
surface area = 31.5 + 63
94.5 sq. centimeters.

Question 2.
Find the surface area of the regular pyramid at the left.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 4
Answer:

The surface area of the triangle pyramid = 86 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangle pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of th base, s = slant height
surface area = 60 +(1/2) 5.2 x 10
surface area = 60 + 2.6 x  10
surface area = 60+ 26
surface area = 86 sq. ft

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
VOCABULARY
Can a pyramid have rectangles as lateral faces? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, pyramids have rectangles as lateral faces.

Explanation:
In the pyramid diagram, the rectangles included the lateral surfaces.

FINDING THE SURFACE AREA OF A PYRAMID Find the surface area of the regular pyramid.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 5
Answer:
The surface area of the triangle pyramid = 95 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangle pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of th base, s = slant height
surface area = 65+(1/2) 5 x 12
surface area = 65 + 2.5 x  12
surface area = 65 + 30
surface area = 95 sq. m

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 6
Answer:
The surface area of the triangle pyramid = 24 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangle pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of th base, s = slant height
surface area = 12+(1/2) 2 x 6
surface area = 12 + 1 x  12
surface area = 12 + 12
surface area = 24 sq. cm

Question 6.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which description of the solid does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 7
Answer:
regular pyramid does not belong with the other three;

Explanation:
the remaining are square pyramid, rectangular pyramid, triangular pyramid are the three pyramids with different shapes.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
A building in the shape of a square pyramid is covered with solar panels. The building has a slant height of 12 feet and a base with side lengths of 15 feet. The solar panels cost $70 per square foot to install. How much does it cost to install enough solar panels to cover the entire surface of the building?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 8
Answer:
$ 270 is enough for solar planets to cover the entire surface of the building.

Explanation:
The building is in the shape of square pyramid.
surface area = A + (1/2) ps
area = 180 + (1/2) x 180
area = 180 + 90
area = 270 $

Question 8.
You use the glass pyramid shown to display rainbows on the walls of a room. The pyramid is regular and has a surface area of 105.35 square centimeters. Find the height of each triangular face. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 9
Answer:

Surface Areas of Pyramids Homework & Practice 10.3

Review & Refresh

Find the surface area of the cylinder. Round your answer to the nearest tenth.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 10
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 182.12 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 3 ft , height = 10 ft given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.14 x 2 x 10
surface area =  56.52+ 125.6
surface area = 182.12 sq. ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 11
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 345.4 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 5 m , height = 6 m given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 5 x 5 + 2 x 3.14 x 5 x 6
surface area =  157+ 188.4
surface area = 345.4 sq. m

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 12
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 406.944 sq. mm

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 4mm , height = 12.2mm given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 4 x 4+ 2 x 3.14 x 4 x 12.2
surface area =  100.48+ 306.464
surface area = 406.944 sq. mm

Question 4.
The ratio of the distance between bases on a professional baseball field to the distance between bases on a youth baseball field is 3 : 2. Bases on a professional baseball field are 90 feet apart. What is the distance between bases on a youth baseball field?
A. 30 ft
B. 45 ft
C. 60 ft
D. 135 ft
Answer:
The distance between bases on a youth baseball = 60 ft
Explanation:
The ratios between professional base and youth baseball = 3 : 2 already given
90 given
so 60 ft is the distance between bases on a youth baseball field.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A NET Use the net to find the surface area of the regular pyramid. (See Exploration 1, p. 421.)
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 13
Answer:
The surface area of the square pyramid = 18 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of th base, s = slant height
surface area = 12+(1/2) 4 x 3
surface area = 12 + 0.5x  12
surface area = 12 + 6
surface area = 18 sq. in

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 14
Answer:
The surface area of the square pyramid = 88.3 sq. mm

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of th base, s = slant height
surface area = 43.3+(1/2) 10 x 9
surface area = 43.3 + 0.5x  90
surface area = 43.3 + 45
surface area = 88.3 sq. mm

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 15
Answer:
The surface area of the square pyramid = 79.9 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 61.9 +(1/2) 6 x 6
surface area = 61.9 + 0.5x 36
surface area = 61.9 + 18
surface area = 79.9 sq. m

FINDING THE SURFACE AREA OF A PYRAMID Find the surface area of the regular pyramid.
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 16
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular  pyramid = 81 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 54 +(1/2) 6 x 9
surface area = 54 + 0.5x 54
surface area = 54 + 27
surface area = 81 sq. ft

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 17
Answer:

The surface area of the triangular  pyramid = 36 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 24 +(1/2) 6 x 4
surface area = 24 + 0.5x 24
surface area = 24 + 12
surface area = 36 sq. cm

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 18
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular  pyramid = 36 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 13  +(1/2) 15 x 10
surface area = 13 + 0.5x 150
surface area = 13 + 75
surface area = 88 sq. in

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 19
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular  pyramid = 126 sq. yd

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 7.8  +(1/2) 10 x 9
surface area = 7.8 + 0.5x 90
surface area = 7.8 + 48
surface area = 126 sq. yd

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 20
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular  pyramid = 13.5 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 4.5 +(1/2) 4 x 4.5
surface area = 4.5 + 0.5x 18
surface area = 4.5 + 9
surface area = 13.5 sq. m

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 21
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular  pyramid = 600.4 sq. mm

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 440.4 +(1/2) 16 x 20
surface area = 440.4+ 0.5x 320
surface area = 440.4+ 160
surface area = 600.4 sq. mm

Question 14.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The base of the lampshade is a regular hexagon with side lengths of 8 inches. Estimate the amount of glass needed to make the lampshade.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 22
Answer:
The amount of glass needed to make the lampshade = 26.6666667 in

Explanation:
hexagon = 1/3 x b x h
where base = 8 inches , height = 10 in given
hexagon = (80/3)
hexagon = 26.6666667 in
Question 15.
GEOMETRY
The surface area of a square pyramid is 85 square meters. The side length of the base is 5 meters. What is the slant height?
Answer:
The  slant height = 6 meters

Explanation:
The area of the base = side x side = 5 x 5 = 25 m
area of the lateral face = (1/2)bh= (1/2)5h= 2.5 h m
There are  4 identical lateral faces.
area of lateral faces = 4(2.5h) = 10 hm
surface area of regular pyramid = area of base + area of lateral faces
85 = 25 + 10 h
85-25 = 10 h
60 = 10 h
h = (60/10)
h = 6 meters

FINDING SURFACE AREA Find the surface area of the solid.
Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 23
Answer:
The surface area of the square  pyramid = 20 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 5 +(1/2) 5 x 6
surface area = 5 + 0.5x 30
surface area = 5  + 15
surface area = 20 sq. ft

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 24
Answer:
The surface area of the square  pyramid = 22 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 10 +(1/2) 4 x 6
surface area = 10 + 0.5x 24
surface area = 10 + 12
surface area = 22 sq. cm

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 25
Answer:
The surface area of the rectangular  pyramid = 22 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
where A = area of the base ,p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
surface area = 12 +(1/2) 4 x 5
surface area = 12 + 0.5x 20
surface area = 12 + 10
surface area = 22 sq. ft

Question 19.
GEOMETRY
A tetrahedron is a triangular pyramid with four faces that are identical equilateral triangles. The total lateral surface area of a tetrahedron is 93 square centimeters. Find the surface area of the tetrahedron.
Answer:
The surface area  of the tetrahedron = 124 square cm

Explanation:
Area of lateral face (equilateral triangle) = 93/3 = 31
The tetrahedron has four identical equilateral triangles = 4 X 31 =124 cm

Question 20.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are making an umbrella that is shaped like a regular octagonal pyramid.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 26
a. Estimate the amount of fabric that you need to make the umbrella.
b. The fabric comes in rolls that are 60 inches wide. Draw a diagram of how you can cut the fabric from rolls that are 10 feet long.
c. How much fabric is wasted?
Answer:

Question 21.
REASONING
The height of a pyramid is the perpendicular distance between the base and the top of the pyramid. Which is greater, the height of a pyramid or the slant height? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 27
Answer:
The height of the pyramid is greater .

Explanation:
In the above shown figure the slant height is less than the height of the pyramid.

Question 22.
DIG DEEPER!
Both pyramids at the right have regular bases.
a. Without calculating, determine which pyramid has the greater surface area. Explain.
b. Verify your answer to part(a) by finding the surface area of each pyramid.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.3 28
Answer:
The first figure has the greatest surface area.

Explanation:
The surface area of 1st pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
surface area = 112  + (1/2) 8 x 14
surface area = 112 +(112/2)
surface area = 56 +112
surface area = 168 in
The surface area of 2nd pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
surface area = 6.9 + (1/2) 8 x 14
surface area = 6.9 +(112/2)
surface area = 56 +6.9
surface area = 62.9 sq. in

Question 23.
REASONING
Is the total area of the lateral faces of a pyramid greater than, less than or equal to the area of the base? Explain.
Answer:
The lateral surface area of a regular pyramid is the sum of the area of its lateral faces.
The total surface area of a regular pyramid is the sum of the areas of its lateral faces and its base.

Lesson 10.4 Volumes of Prisms

EXPLORATION 1

Finding a Formula for Volume
Work with a partner.
a. In the figures shown, each cube has a volume of 1 cubic unit. Compare the volume V (in cubic units) of each rectangular prism to the area B(in square units) of its base. What do you notice?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 1
b. Repeat part(a) using the prisms below.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 2
c. Use what you learned in parts (a) and (b) to write a formula that gives the volume of any prism.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 3
Answer:
a. The 1st cube has a volume of 1 cubic unit. and it is increased by one horizontal in each cube.
b. The 1st prism has a volume of 1 cubic unit and it is increased by one horizontal in each cube.
c. Triangular prism = 2B + ph
where b = base ,h = height, l = length, p = perimeter of base, B = area of base
Rectangular prism = 2(lw +lh + wh)
where l = length, w = width, h = height
pentagonal prism = (1/2)(5s x a)h
Hexagonal prism = v = bh
octagonal prism = 2(1 +square root )a square

The volume of a three-dimensional figure is a measure of the amount of space that it occupies. Volume is measured in cubic units.

Try It

Find the volume of the prism.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 4
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 16 cu. ft

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = bh
where b = 4 ft , h = 4 ft given
volume of the prism = 16 cu. ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 5
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 51 cu. cm

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = bh
where b = 8.5 cm , h = 6 cm given
volume of the prism = 8.5 x 6 = 51 cu. cm

Find the volume of the prism.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 6
Answer:
The volume of prism = 162 cu. m

Explanation:
The volume of triangular prism = a x b x c x h
where a = b = c = base side , h = height
prism = 12 x 9 x 12 x 5
volume = 60 + 102
volume = 162 cu. m

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 7
Answer:

The volume of prism = 9 cu. m

Explanation:
The volume of triangular prism = a x b x c x h
where a = b = c = base side , h = height
prism = 0.75x 2 x 2 x 3
volume = 0.75 x12
volume = 9 cu. m

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

FINDING THE VOLUME OF A PRISM Find the volume of the prism.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 8
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 56 cu. in

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 7 x 8
v = 56 cu. in

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 9
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 75 cu. ft

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 15 x 5
v = 75 cu. ft

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 10
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 96 cu. yd

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 12 x 8
v = 96 cu. yd

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 11
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 4925 cu. mm

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 197 x 25
v = 4925 cu. mm

Question 9.
OPEN-ENDED
Draw and label a prism with a volume of 144 cubic inches. Justify your answer.
Answer:
v = b x h
144 = 12 x 12
so base = 7 and height = 7 inches.

Explanation:

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You visit an aquarium. One of the tanks at the aquarium holds 450 gallons of water. Draw a diagram to show one possible set of dimensions of the tank. Justify your answer. (1 gal = 231 in.3)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 12
Answer:

Question 11.
A stack of paper contains 400 sheets. The volume of the stack is 140.25 cubic inches. Each sheet of paper is identical, with a length of 11 inches and a width of 8.5 inches. Find the height of each sheet of paper. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Each sheet of paper = 0.0075 inches.

Volumes of Prisms Homework & Practice 10.4

Review & Refresh

Find the surface area of the regular pyramid.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 13
Answer:
Surface area of the regular pyramid = 15 sq. m

Explanation:
Surface area of the regular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
area = 3 +(1/2) 3 x 8
surface area = 3 + 12
surface area = 15 sq. m

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 14
Answer:
Surface area of the regular pyramid =550 sq. mm

Explanation:
Surface area of the regular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
area = 30 +(1/2) 20 x 26
surface area = 30 + 520
surface area = 550 sq. mm

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 15
Answer:
Surface area of the regular pyramid =61 sq. cm

Explanation:
Surface area of the regular pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
area = 7 +(1/2) 6 x 9
surface area = 7 + 54
surface area = 61 sq. cm

Find the selling price.
Question 4.
Cost to store: $75
Markup: 20%
Answer:
Selling price = 1665 $

Explanation:
Selling price = cost to store x markup + cost to store
selling price = $75 x 20% + $75
selling price = $75x 0.20 + $75
s p = 1665 $
Question 5.
Cost to store: $90
Markup: 60%
Answer:
Selling price = 5490$

Explanation:
Selling price = cost to store x markup + cost to store
selling price = $90 x 60% + $90
selling price = $90x 0.60+ $90
s p = 5490 $

Question 6.
Cost to store: $130
Markup: 85%
Answer:
Selling price =10,530 $

Explanation:
Selling price = cost to store x markup + cost to store
selling price = $130 x 85% + $130
selling price = $130 x 0.80+ $130
s p = 10,530$

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING TOOLS In the figure, each cube has a volume of 1 cubic unit. Find the volume of the figure and the area of its base. (See Exploration 1, p. 427.)
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 16
Answer:
The volume of the cube = length + breadth + height
1 x 3 = 3

Explanation:
The volume of the cube = length + breadth + height
where length = l, width = w ,height = h

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 17
Answer:
The volume of the cube = length + breadth + height
1 x 4 = 4

Explanation:
The volume of the cube = length + breadth + height
where length = l, width = w ,height = h

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 18
Answer:
The volume of the cube = length + breadth + height
1 x 2 = 2

Explanation:
The volume of the cube = length + breadth + height
where length = l, width = w ,height = h

FINDING THE VOLUME OF A PRISM Find the volume of the prism.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 19
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 81 cu. in

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 9 x 9
v = 81 cu.in

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 20
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 48 cu. cm

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 6 x 8
v = 48 cu. cm

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 21
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 48 cu. m

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 7 x 8.5
v = 59.5 cu. m

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 22
Answer:

The volume of the prism = 48 cu. yd

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 8.33 x 6
v = 50 cu. yd

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 23
Answer:

The volume of the prism = 54 cu.ft

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 9 x 6
v = 54 cu.ft

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 24
Answer:

The volume of the prism = 84 cu.mm

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 10.5 x 8
v = 84 cu.mm

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 25
Answer:

The volume of the prism = 48 cu.m

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 10 x 4.8
v = 48 cu.m

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 26
Answer:

The volume of the prism = 645 cu. mm

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 15 x 43
v = 645 cu. mm

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 27
Answer:

The volume of the prism =3320 cu. feet

Explanation:
volume v = B h
v = 166 x 20
v = 3320 cu. ft

Question 19.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the volume of the triangular prism. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 28
Answer:
Yes my friend is correct.

Explanation:
Volume of triangular prism = B h
volume = 10 x (5 x 7)
volume = 10 x (35)
volume = 350 cubic centimeters

Question 20.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A battery for an underwater drone is in the shape of a square prism. It is designed to draw in seawater that is then used to produce energy. The base of the battery has side lengths of 15 centimeters and the height of the battery is 10 centimeters. Find the volume of the battery.
Answer:
The volume of the battery  = 2250 cu. centimeters.

Explanation:
Volume of a square prism = a square h
given that a = 15 cm, h = 10 cm
volume = 15 x 15x 10
volume = 2250 cu. centimeters.
Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A cereal box has a volume of 225 cubic inches. The length of the base is 9 inches and the width of the base is 2.5 inches. What is the height of the box? Justify your answer.
Answer:
The heightt of the box = 10 inches.

Explanation:
v = length x width x height
v = 225 cubic inches, l = 9 inches,w = 2.5 in
225 = 9 x 2.5 x h
225 = 22.5 h
h = 225/22.5
h = 10 inches

Question 22.
REASONING
Each locker is shaped like a rectangular prism. Which has more storage space? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 29
Answer:
The school locker has the more storage space.

Explanation:
2. The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
area = 2(10 x 12) +(15 x 48) +(12 x 48) where l= 15 in,w = 12 in,h= 48 in
area = 2(120) +(720) +(576)
area = 2(1416)
area = 2832 sq. in
1. The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
area = 2(15 x 12) +(10 x 60) +(12 x 60) where l= 10 in,w = 12 in,h= 60 in
area = 2(120) +(600) +(720)
area = 2(1440)
area = 2880 sq. in

Question 23.
USING TOOLS
How many cubic inches are in 1 cubic foot? Use a sketch to explain your reasoning.
Answer:
1 cubic foot = 1728 cubic inches.

Explanation:

Question 24.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A concrete construction block has the measurements shown. How much concrete is used to make the block? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 30
Answer:
The concrete used to make the block = 544 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh + wh)
area = 2(16 x 8) +(16 x 6) +(8 x 6) where l= 16in,w = 8 in,h= 6 in
area = 2(128) +(96) +(48)
area = 2(272)
area = 544 sq. in

Question 25.
RESEARCH
The gas tank is 20% full. Use the current price of regular gasoline in your community to find the cost to fill the tank. (1 gal = 231 in.3)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 31
Answer:

Question 26.
DIG DEEPER!
Two liters of water are poured into an empty vase shaped like an octagonal prism. The base area is 100 square centimeters. What is the height of the water? (1 L = 1000 cm3)
Answer:
The height of the water = 20 centimeters

Explanation:
1 liter = 1000 cubic centimeters.
area of the base = 100 square cm
height = h
the volume of water in the vase = 2 liters = 2000 cubic centimeters
the volume of water in the vase = area of base x-height of the prism
2000 = 100 h
h = 20 cm
Question 27.
LOGIC
Two prisms have the same volume. Do they always, sometimes never, or have the same surface area? Justify your answer.
Answer:
If the volume is the same, they do not have the surface area.

Explanation:
if we take two prisms at random that have the same volume, it’s very likely that they don’t have the same surface area.

Question 28.
CRITICAL THINKING
How many times greater is the volume of a triangular prism when one of its dimensions is doubled? when all three dimensions are doubled?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.4 32
Answer:
The volume is 8 times greater when we double all 3 dimensions.

Explanation:
we are doubling only one dimension means that you are multiplying by 2 only 1 time.

Lesson 10.5 Volumes of Pyramids

EXPLORATION 1

Finding a Formula for the Volume of a Pyramid
Work with a partner. Draw the two nets on cardboard and cut them out. Fold and tape the nets to form an open cube and an open square pyramid. Both figures should have the same size square base and the same height.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 1
a. Compare the volumes of the figures. What do you notice?
b. Use your observations in part(a) to write a formula for the volume of a pyramid.
c. The rectangular prism below can be cut to form three pyramids. Use your formula in part(b) to show that the sum of the volumes of the three pyramids is equal to the volume of the prism.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 2
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) Bh

Explanation:
a. the volume of the pyramid =(1/3) B h
1. v = (1/3)  x 2 x2
v = (1/3) x 4
v = 1.33 in

the volume of the pyramid =(1/3) B h
1. v = (1/3)  x 2 x2.5
v = (1/3) x 5
v = 1.66 in
b.  the second figure has a greater volume than the 1st figure
c. the volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
the volume of the prism = Bh
The volume of the 3 pyramids is equal to the volume of the prism.

Try It

Find the volume of the pyramid.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 3
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 42 cubic feet

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
B = 21 square feet h= 6 ft
volume = (1/3) x 21×6
volume = (126/3)
volume = 42 cu. ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 4
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 290 cubic centimeter

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
B =174 square cm h= 5 cm
volume = (1/3) x 174 x 5
volume = (870/3)
volume = 290 cubic centimeter

Find the volume of the pyramid.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 5
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 290 cubic centimeter

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
B =18 in h= 7 in
volume = (1/3) x 18x 7
volume = (126/3)
volume = 42 inches

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 6
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 91.66 square centimeter

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
B =25 cm h= 11 cm
volume = (1/3) x 25x 11
volume = (275/3)
volume = 91.66 cm

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
WRITING
How is the formula for the volume of a pyramid different from the formula for the volume of a prism?
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid h = height
the volume of the prism = B h
where B = base of the prism h= height

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid  is 3 times greater the volume of the prism.

Question 6.
PROBLEM SOLVING
How many different pyramids can you draw with the same height and volume? Explain.
Answer:
We can draw the 2 or 3 pyramids with the same height and volume

Explanation:
We can draw the 2 or 3 pyramids with the same height and volume .
it is our wish to draw as many as possible
FINDING THE VOLUME OF A PYRAMID Find the volume of the pyramid.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 7
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = cubic yard

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 10 and h= 6
v = (1/3) x 10 x 6
v = (60/3)
v = 20 cubic yds

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 8
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 12 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 4 and h= 9
v = (1/3) x 4 x 9
v = (36/3)
v = 12 cu. cm

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
A resort features a square pyramid with a water slide. The length of the water slide is 90% of the height of the pyramid. The base of the pyramid has side lengths of 60 feet. The volume of the pyramid is 60,000 cubic feet. What is the length of the water slide?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 9
Answer:
The length of the water slide = 50 cubic feet

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
To make a candle, you use a mold to create the wax pyramid shown. You cut off the top 3 centimeters of the pyramid to make space for a wick. If the base area of the removed portion is 5.4 square centimeters, what percentage of the wax did you remove?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 10
Answer:
The percentage of the wax we remove = 140 cubic centimeters.

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) x 60 x 7
volume =( 420/3)
volume = 140 cubic centimeters.

Volumes of Pyramids Homework & Practice 10.5

Review & Refresh

Find the volume of the prism.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 11
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 189 cubic feets

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = l x w x h
v = 9 x 7 x 3
v = 189 cubic feets

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 12
Answer:
The volume of the prism = 189 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
The volume of the triangular prism = (b x h x l)/ 2
v = (5 x 3 x 8)/2
v = 60 cubic centimeters

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 3.
r + 0.5 < – 0.4
Answer:
r = – 0.9

Explanation:
r = -0.4 -0.5
r = -0.9

Question 4.
z – 2.4 ≥ – 0.6
Answer:
z = 1.8

Explanation:
z = -0.6  (+ 2.4)
z = 1.8

Question 5.
h – 5 ≤ – 3.7
Answer:
h = -1.3

Explanation:
h = -3.7 +5
h = -1.3

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

VOLUMES OF PYRAMIDS The rectangular prism is cut to form three pyramids. Show that the sum of the volumes of the three pyramids is equal to the volume of the prism. (See Exploration 1, p. 433.)
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 13
Answer:
The volume of the  3 pyramids is equal to the volume of the prism.

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 6 and h= 4
v = (1/3) x 6 x 4
v = (24/3)
v = 8 cubic feet
the volume of the pyramid is 3 times greater than volume of the prism.
The volume of the prism =  B h
where B = base of the prism, h = height
v =  B xh where B = 6 and h= 4
v =  6 x 4
v = 24
8 x 3 = 24

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 14
Answer:
The volume of the  3 pyramids is equal to the volume of the prism.

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 6 and h= 6
v = (1/3) x 6 x 6
v = (36/3)
v = 12 inches
the volume of the pyramid is 3 times greater than volume of the prism.
The volume of the prism=  B h
where B = base of the prism, h = height
v =  B xh where B = 6 and h= 6
v =  6 x 6
v = 36 in
12 x 3 = 36

FINDING THE VOLUME OF A PYRAMID Find the volume of the pyramid.
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 15
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid =  0.66 cubic feet

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 1 and h= 2
v = (1/3) x 1 x 2
v = (2/3)
v = 0.66 cubic feet

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 16
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 6.66  cubic feet

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 2 and h= 10
v = (1/3) x 10 x 2
v = (20/3)
v = 6.66 cubic feet

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 17
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 16  cubic feet

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 8 and h= 7
v = (1/3) x 8 x 7
v = (48/3)
v = 16 cubic feet

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 18
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 20  cubic millimeters

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 15 mm and h= 4
v = (1/3) x 15 x 4
v = (60/3)
v = 20 cubic mm

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 19
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 10.666 cu. yds

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 4 and h= 8
v = (1/3) x 4 x 8
v = (32/3)
v = 10.666 cu. yd

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 20
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 36 cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 6 and h= 8
v = (1/3) x 6 x 8
v = (48/3)
v = 36 cu. in

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 21
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 70 cu. mm

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 14 and h = 15 mm
v = (1/3) x 14x 15
v = (210/3)
v = 70 cu. mm

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 22
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 2.333 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 1 and h = 7 cm
v = (1/3) x 1 x 7
v = (7/3)
v = 2.333 cubic centimeters

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 23
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 252 cubic millimeters

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 63 and h = 12 mm
v = (1/3) x 63 x 12
v = (756/3)
v  = 252 cubic millimeters

Question 17.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the volume of the pyramid. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 24
Answer:
No my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) x B x h
volume = (8 x 4 x 7)/3
volume = (224/3)
volume = 74.666 cu. in

Question 18.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A researcher develops a cage for a living cell in the shape of a square-based pyramid. A scale model of the cage is shown. What is the volume of the model?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 25
Answer:
The volume of the model = 133.33 cu. millimeters

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B = 20 and h = 20 mm
v = (1/3) x 20 x 20
v = (400/3)
v  = 133.33 cu. millimeters

Question 19.
FINDING VOLUME
Find the volume of the composite solid. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 26
Answer:
The volume of the  compositte solid =48 cu. feet

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B =36 and h = 4 ft
v = (1/3) x 36 x 4
v = (144/3)
v  = 48 cu. feet

Question 20.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In 1483, Leonardo da Vinci designed a parachute. It is believed that this was the first parachute ever designed. In a notebook, he wrote, “If a man is provided with a length of gummed linen cloth with a length of 12 yards on each side and 12 yards high, he can jump from any great height whatsoever without injury.” Find the volume of air inside Leonardo’s parachute.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 27
Answer:
The volume of the air inside parachute  =48 cu. yd

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B =12 and h = 12
v = (1/3) x 12 x 12
v = (144/3)
v = 48 cu. yds

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Which sandcastle spire has a greater volume? How much more sand do you need to make the spire with the greater volume?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 28
Answer:
spire B has greater volume
4 % of sand is needed to make the spire

Explanation:
The volume of the spire A = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B =30 and h = 6
v = (1/3) x 30 x 6
v = (180/3)
v = 60 in
The volume of the spire B = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B =24 and h = 8
v = (1/3) x 24 x 8
v = (192/3)
v = 64 cu. in

Question 22.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Use the photo of the tepee.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 29
a. What is the shape of the base? How can you tell?
b. The tepee’s height is about 10 feet. Estimate the volume of the tepee.
Answer:
a. The shape of the base is a triangular pyramid .
b . The volume of the triangular pyramid = 3.33

Explanation:
b . The volume of the triangular pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) B 10
volume = (10 b /3)
10 B = 3
B = (10/3)
B = 3.33

Question 23.
OPEN-ENDED
A rectangular pyramid has a volume of 40 cubic feet and a height of 6 feet. Find one possible set of dimensions of the base.
Answer:
The dimensions of the base = 20 feet

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular pyramid = (1/3) xB x h
volume = (1/3) x B x 6 where h = 6 ,v= 40 given
40 = (1/3) x 6 B
2 B = 40
B = 20  feet

Question 24.
REASONING
Do the two solids have the same volume? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.5 30
Answer:
No, the two solids did not have the same volume.

Explanation:
The volume of rectangular prism = l wh
volume = xyz
The volume of the triangular prism = b hl/2
volume = (xy3z/2)

Lesson 10.6 Cross Sections of Three-Dimensional Figures

EXPLORATION 1

Describing Cross Sections
Work with a partner. A baker is thinking of different ways to slice zucchini bread that is in the shape of a rectangular prism. The shape that is formed by the cut is called a cross section.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 1
a. What is the shape of the cross section when the baker slices the bread vertically, as shown above?
b. What is the shape of the cross section when the baker slices the bread horizontally?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 2
c. What is the shape of the cross section when the baker slices off a corner of the bread?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 3
d. Is it possible to obtain a cross section that is a trapezoid? Explain.
e. Name at least 3 cross sections that are possible to obtain from a rectangular pyramid. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Consider a plane “slicing” through a solid. The intersection of the plane and the solid is a two-dimensional shape called a cross section. For example, the diagram shows that the intersection of the plane and the rectangular prism is a rectangle.

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 4

Try It

Describe the intersection of the plane and the solid.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 5
Answer:
The intersection of the plane of the solid = one dimensional

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 6
Answer:
The intersection of the plane of the solid = two dimensional

Describe the intersection of the plane and the solid.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 7
Answer:
The intersection of the plane of the cylinder = two dimensional

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 8
Answer:
The intersection of the plane of the cone = two dimensional

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
VOCABULARY
What is a cross section?
Answer:
The intersection of the plane of the solid is a two-dimensional is called crosssection.
Question 6.
DESCRIBING CROSS SECTIONS
Describe the intersection of the plane and the solid at the left.
Answer:
The intersection of the plane and the solid at the left is a two dimensional.

Question 7.
REASONING
Name all possible cross sections of a cylinder.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 9
Answer:
The cross-section of the sphere is a circle. The vertical cross-section of a cone is a triangle, and the horizontal cross- section is a circle.

Question 8.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
You slice a square prism. Which cross section does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 10
Answer:
circle crosssection does not belong with the other three.

Explanation:
square, triangle, the rectangle does not belong with the three.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
A steel beam that is 12 meters long is cut into four equal parts. The cross sections are rectangles with side lengths of 1 meter and 2 meters.
a. What is the perimeter of each cross section?
b. What is the area of each cross section?
c. What is the volume of the original beam?
Answer:
a. The perimeter of each cross-section =  3 meters
b. The area of each cross-section = 2 meters
c.  The volume of the original beam = 12 meters.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
A lumberjack saws a cylindrical tree trunk at an angle. Is the cross-section a circle? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Yes, the cross-section is a circle.

Explanation:
The cross-section of the sphere is a circle

Cross Sections of Three-Dimensional Figures Homework & Practice 10.6

Review & Refresh

Find the volume of the pyramid.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 11
Answer:
The volume of the  pyramid = 37.33 cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B =16 and h = 7 in
v = (1/3) x16 x 7
v = (112/3)
v = 37.33 cu. in

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 12
Answer:
The volume of the  pyramid = 2.875 cubic centimeters.

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
where B = base of the pyramid, h = height
v = (1/3) x B xh where B =23 and h = 8
v = (1/3) x23 x 8
v = (112/3)
v = 2.875 cubic centimeters.

Find the sum.
Question 3.
(w – 7) + (- 6w – 5)
Answer:
w = -2

Explanation:
w = -11w+7
w=-4w
2w = -4
w= -2

Question 4.
(8 – b) + (5b + 6)
Answer:
b = 2.33

Explanation:
-b = 5b-2
5b + 6b = 2
b = 2.33

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

DESCRIBING CROSS SECTIONS Determine whether it is possible to obtain the cross section from a cube. (See Exploration 2, p. 439.)
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 13
Question 5.
circle
Answer:
No it is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Question 6.
square
Answer:
No it is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Question 7.
equilateral triangle
Answer:
No it is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Explanation:
equilateral triangle is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Question 8.
pentagon
Answer:
No it is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Explanation:
pentagon is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Question 9.
non-rectangular parallelogram
Answer:
No it is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Explanation:
non rectangular parallelogram is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Question 10.
octagon
Answer:
No it is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

Explanation:
octagon is not possible to obtain the crosssection from a cube.

DESCRIBING CROSS SECTIONS OF PRISMS AND PYRAMIDS Describe the intersection of the plane and the solid.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 14
Answer:
The intersection of the prism and the solid is a two dimensional.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 15
Answer:
The intersection of the pyramid and the solid is a one dimensional.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 16
Answer:
The intersection of the pyramid and the solid is a two dimensional.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 17
Answer:
The intersection of the pyramid and the solid is a three dimensional.

DESCRIBING CROSS SECTIONS OF CYLINDERS AND CONES Describe the intersection of the plane and the solid.
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 18
Answer:
The intersection of the plane and the solid is a circle

Explanation:
The cross section of the cylinder is a circle.
Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 19
Answer:
The intersection of the plane and the solid is a circle

Explanation:
The cross section of the cone is a circle.

DESCRIBING CROSS SECTIONS Describe the shape that is formed by the cut in the food.
Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 20
Answer:
The shape that is formed is circle.

Explanation:
The cross section when it is cut it is formed a circle.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 21
Answer:
The shape that is formed is semi-circle.

Explanation:
The cross section when it is cut it is formed a semi circle.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 22
Answer:
The shape that is formed is  circle.

Explanation:
The cross section when it is cut it is formed  circle.

Question 20.
DESCRIBING CROSS SECTIONS
Describe the intersection of the plane and the cylinder.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 23
Answer:
The intersection of a plane and a cylinder is a rectangle.

REASONING Determine whether the given intersection is possible. If so, draw the solid and the cross section.
Question 21.
The intersection of a plane and a cone is a rectangle.
Answer:
No the intersection of a plane and a cone is a circle.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 19
Question 22.
The intersection of a plane and a square pyramid is a triangle.
Answer:
Yes the intersection of a plane and a square pyramid is a triangle.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 5

Question 23.
REASONING
A plane that intersects a prism is parallel to the bases of the prism. Describe the intersection of the plane and the prism.
Answer:
when a plane intersects a prism and is parallel to the bases of the prism , the intersection is the same shape as the base.

Question 24.
REASONING
Explain how a plane can be parallel to the base of a cone and intersect the cone at exactly one point.
Answer:
A plane will be parallel to the base and intersecting the cone at only one point is only possible when the plana will pass through

Question 25.
DIG DEEPER!
An artist plans to paint bricks.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 24
a. Find the surface area of the brick.
b. The artist cuts along the length of the brick to form two bricks, each with a width of 2 inches. What is the percent of increase in the surface area? Justify your answer.
Answer:
a. The surface area of the brick = 164 in
b. The surface area of the percent increase = 2 %

Explanation:
b.The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw +lh +wh)
surface area = 2(12 x 6 +12 x5  +6 x 5)
surface area = 2(72 + 60+30)
surface area = 2(162)
surface area = 81 in
a. The surface area of the rectangular prism = 2(lw +lh +wh)
surface area = 2(10 x 4 +10 x3 +4 x 3)
surface area = 2(40 + 30 +12)
surface area = 2(82)
surface area = 164 in
Question 26.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A cross section of an artery is shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 25
a. Describe the cross section of the artery.
b. The radius of the artery is 0.22 millimeter. What is the circumference of the artery?
Answer:
a. The cross section of the artery is a circle.
b. The circumference of the artery = 1.3816 millimeters

Explanation:
The circumference of the circle = 2πr
where r= 0.22 mm given π = 3.14
circumference = 2 x 3.14 x 0.22
circumference= 1.3816 millimeters

Question 27.
REASONING
Three identical square pyramids each with a height of meters and a base area of 100 square meters are shown. For each pyramid, a cross section parallel to the base is shown. Describe the relationship between the area of the base and the area of any cross section parallel to the base.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume 10.6 26
Answer:
The relationship between the area of the base and the area of any cross section parallel to the base  for 1st figure = 1: 2 %
The relationship between the area of the base and the area of any cross section parallel to the base  for 2nd figure = 1: 5%
The relationship between the area of the base and the area of any cross section parallel to the base  for 3rd figure = 1: 10%

Explanation:
In the above 3 figures  the base area is same for all the 3 figures = 100 square meters

Surface Area and Volume Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
A store pays $2 per pound for popcorn kernels. One cubic foot of kernels weighs about 45 pounds. Wha tis the selling price of the container shown when the markup is 30%?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cc 1
Understand the problem.
You are given the dimensions of a container of popcorn kernels and the price that a store pays for the kernels. You also know the weight of one cubic foot of popcorn kernels. You are asked to find the selling price of the container when the markup is 30%.
Make a plan.
Use the volume of the container to find the weight of the kernels. Then use the weight of the kernels to find the cost to the store. Finally, use the percent markup to find the selling price of the container.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer:
Selling price = 525 $

Explanation:
Selling price = cost to store x markup + cost to store
selling price = $2 x 30% + $45
selling price = $2x 0.30 + $45
selling price = $525

Question 2.
The pyramid shown has a square base. What is the height of the pyramid? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cc 2
Answer:
The height of the pyramid = 3000 cm

Explanation:
The volume of the triangular pyramid = (1/3) x B h
1500 = (1/3) x 1.5 h
1500 = 0.5 h
h = (1500/3)
h = 3000 cm

Question 3.
A cylindrical can of soup has a height of 7 centimeters and a lateral surface area of 63π square centimeters. The can is redesigned to have a lateral surface area of 45π square centimeters without changing the radius of the can. What is the height of the new design? Justify your answer.
Answer:
The height of the new design can = 5 centimeters.

Explanation:
The can when it is redesigned to have a lateral surface area of 45π = 5 x 9 = 45
The height of the can when it is redesigned = 5 centimeters.

Performance Task

Volumes and Surface Areas of Small Objects
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Paper Measurements.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cc 3

Surface Area and Volume Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary
Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 1

Graphic Organizers
Information Frame You can use an to help organize and remember a concept. Here is an example of an Information Frame for Surface Areas of Rectangular Prisms.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 2

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 3
1. surface areas of prisms
2. surface areas of cylinders
3. surface areas of pyramids
4. volumes of prisms
5. volumes of pyramids
6. cross sections of three-dimensional figures

Chapter Self-Assessment
As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 4

10.1 Surface Areas of Prisms (pp. 409–414)
Learning Target: Find the surface area of a prism.

Find the surface area of the prism.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 5
Answer:
The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 158 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 8 w = 3 h = 5
rectangular prism =2(8 x 3) +(8 x 5) +(3 x 5)
prism = 2(24) + (40) +(15)
surface area =2(79)
surface area = 158 sq. in

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 6
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 562 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(7 x 8) + 2(8 x 15) +2(15×7) where l = 8m,w = 8m, h= 8m
surface area = 2(56) + 2(120)+ 2(105)
surface area =112 + 240 + 210
surface area = 562 sq. cm
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 7
Answer:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 262 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh
surface area = 2(5 x 7) + 2(5x 8) +2(8×7) where l = 5m,w = 7m, h= 8m
surface area = 2(35) + 2(40)+ 2(56)
surface area =70 + 80 + 112
surface area = 262 sq. m

Question 4.
You want to wrap the box using a piece of wrapping paper that is 76 centimeters long by56 centimeters wide. Do you have enough wrapping paper to wrap the box? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 8
Answer:
The enough wrapping  paper to wrap the box = 4180 cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the Rectangular prism = 2(lw + lh +wh)
where l = 35 w = 50 h = 4
rectangular prism =2(35 x 50) +(50 x 4) +(35 x 4)
prism = 2(1750) + (200) +(140)
surface area =2(2090)
surface area = 4180 sq. cm

Question 5.
To finish a project, you need to paint the lateral surfaces of a cube with side length 2.5 inches. Find the area that you need to paint.
Answer:

10.2 Surface Areas of Cylinders (pp. 415–420)
Learning Target: Find the surface area of a cylinder.

Find the surface area and lateral surface area of the cylinder. Round your answers to the nearest tenth.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 9
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 169.56 square yards
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 113.04 square yards

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 3  , height = 6  given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.14 x 3 x 6
surface area =  56.52+ 113.04
surface area = 169.56
The lateral surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 3  , height = 6  given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 3 x 6
surface area = 113.04 sq. yards

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 10
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 34.196 square centimeters
The lateral surface area of the cylinder =30.144 square centimeters

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 0.8  , height = 6  given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 0.8 x 0.8 + 2 x 3.14 x 0.8 x 6
surface area =  4.0192+ 30.144
surface area = 34.196 square centimeters
The lateral surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 0.8  , height = 6  given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 0.8 x 6
surface area = 30.144 square centimeters

Question 8.
The label covers the entire lateral surface area of the can. How much of the can is not covered by the label?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 11
Answer:
The can that is not covered =276.32 square centimeters

Explanation:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 4 , height = 11  given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 4 x11
surface area = 276.32 square centimeters

10.3 Surface Areas of Pyramids (pp. 421–426)
Learning Target: Find the surface area of a pyramid.

Find the surface area of the regular pyramid.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 12
Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid =  5 square inches.

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
surface area = 2 +(1/2) x 3 x 2
surface area= 2 +3
surface area= 5 sq. in
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 13
Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid =  42.5 sq. meters

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
surface area = 8 +(1/2) x 10 x 6.9
surface area= 8 +34.5
surface area= 42.5 sq. m

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 14
Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 115.8 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
surface area = 84.3+(1/2) x 9 x 7
surface area= 84.3 +31.5
surface area= 115.8  sq. cm

Question 12.
The tent is shaped like a square pyramid. There is no fabric covering the ground.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 15
a. Estimate the amount of fabric needed to make the tent.
b. Fabric costs $5.25 per square yard. How much will it cost to make the tent?
Answer:
a. The amount of fabric needed to make the tent = 12 ft
b. The cost to make the tent =

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = A + (1/2) ps
surface area = 3+(1/2) x 3 x 6
surface area= 3 +9
surface area= 12 sq. ft

10.4 Volumes of Prisms (pp. 427–432)
Learning Target: Find the volume of a prism.

Find the volume of the prism.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 16
Answer:
The volume of prism = 96 cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of prism = lwh
where l = 8,w=2,h = 6
volume = 8 x 2 x 6
volume = 96 cu. in

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 17
Answer:
The volume of prism = 240 cu. m

Explanation:
The volume of prism =( lbh/2)
where l = 4,w=8,h = 7.5
volume = 8 x 4 x 7.5
volume = 240 cu. m

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 18
Answer:
The volume of prism =607.5 cu. mm

Explanation:
The volume of prism = lwh
where l = 15,w=4.5,h = 9
volume = 15 x 4.5 x 9
volume = 607.5 cu. mm

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 19
Answer:
The volume of prism =96 cu. m

Explanation:
The volume of prism = lwh
where l = 6,w=3,h = 4
volume = 6 x 3 x 4
volume = 96 cu. m

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 20
Answer:
The volume of prism = 15.6 cu. cm

Explanation:
The volume of prism = lwh
where l = 2.6 ,w=1.5 ,h = 4
volume = 2.6 x1.5 x 4
volume = 15.6 cu. cm

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 21
Answer:
The volume of prism = 105 cubic feet

Explanation:
The volume of prism =( lbh/2)
where l = 7 ,w=5 ,h = 3
volume = 7 x 5 x 3
volume = 105 cu. feet

Question 19.
Two cereal boxes each hold exactly 192 cubic inches of cereal. Which box should a manufacturer choose to minimize the amount of cardboard needed to make the cereal boxes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 22
Answer:
The first cereal box is used to minimize

10.5 Volumes of Pyramids (pp.433-438)
Learning Target: Find the volume of a pyramid.

Find the volume of the pyramid.
Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 23
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 133.33 cu. ft

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) 17 20
volume = (340/3)
volume = 113.33 cu. ft

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 24
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 2100 cubic in

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) 210 x  30
volume = (6300/3)
volume = 2100 cubic in

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 25
Answer:
The volume of the pyramid = 48 cu. mm

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) 16 x  9
volume = (144/3)
volume =48 cu. mm

Question 23.
A pyramid-shaped hip roof is a good choice for a house in an area with many hurricanes.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 26
a. What is the volume of the roof to the nearest tenth of a foot?
b. What is the volume of the entire house, including the roof?
Answer:
a. The volume of the pyramid = 800 cu. ft

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) 80 x  30
volume = (2400/3)
volume =800 cu. ft
b.
The volume of the pyramid = 400 cu. ft

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) 40 x  30
volume = (1200/3)
volume =400 cu. ft

Question 24.
A laboratory creates calcite crystals for use in the study of light. The crystal is made up of two pieces of calcite that form a square pyramid. The base length of the top piece is 2 inches.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 27
a. Find the volume of the entire pyramid.
b. Find the volume of each piece of the pyramid.
Answer:
a. The volume of the entire pyramid = 1.58 cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) 3.5 x  3
volume = (4.75/3)
volume =1.58 cu. in
b.The volume of the pyramid = 1.458 cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of the pyramid = (1/3) B h
volume = (1/3) 3.5 x 1.25
volume = (4.375/3)
volume =1.458 cu. in

10.6 Cross Sections of Three-Dimensional Figures (pp. 439–444)
Learning Target: Describe the cross sections of a solid.

Describe the intersection of the plane and the solid.
Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 28
Answer:
The intersection of the plane of the solid = two dimensional
The  cross section of a solid = rectangular prism

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cr 29
Answer:
The intersection of the plane of the solid = two dimensional
The  cross section of a solid = triangular prism

Sketch how a plane can intersect with a cylinder to form a cross section of the given shape.
Question 27.
rectangle
Answer:

Question 28.
circle
Answer:

Question 29.
line segment
Answer:

Surface Area and Volume Practice Test

Find the surface area of the prism or regular pyramid.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 1
Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 7 ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = (1/3) x B h
surface area = (1/3) X 7 x 3
surface area = (21/3)
surface area = 7 sq. ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 2
Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 0.66 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = (1/3) x B h
surface area = (1/3) X 1 x 2
surface area = (2/3)
surface area = 0.66 sq. in

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 3
Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 47.5 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = (1/3) x B h
surface area = (1/3) X 9.5 x 15
surface area = (142.5/3)
surface area = 47.5 sq. m

Find the surface area and lateral surface area of the cylinder. Round your answers to the nearest tenth.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 4
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 62.8 sq. cm
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 37.68 sq. cm

Explanation:

The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 2 , height = 3 given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 2 x 2 + 2 x 3.14 x 2 x 3
surface area =  25.12+ 37.68
surface area = 62.8 sq. cm
The lateral surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 2  , height = 3 given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 2 x 3
surface area = 37.68 sq. cm

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 5
Answer:
The surface area of the cylinder = 1623.38 sq. in
The lateral surface area of the cylinder = 863.5 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the cylinder = 2πr2 + 2πrh
where  radius = 11 , height = 12.5 given
surface area = 2 x 3.14 x 11 x 11 + 2 x 3.14 x 11 x 12.5
surface area =  759.88+ 863.5
surface area = 1623.38 sq. in
The lateral surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 11  , height = 12.5 given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 11 x 12.5
surface area = 863.5 sq. in

Find the volume of the solid.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 6
Answer:
Volume of the prism = 324 cu. in

Explanation:
Volume of the prism =( bhl/2)
volume = (9 x `12 x 6/2)
volume =(648 /2)
volume = 324 cu. in

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 7
Answer:
Volume of the prism = 41.6 cu. yd

Explanation
Volume of the prism =lwh
volume = (4 x `2 x 5.2)
volume =(41.6)
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 8
Answer:
Volume of the prism = 72 cu. m

Explanation:
Volume of the prism =( bhl/2)
volume = (3 x `8 x 6/2)
volume =(144/2)
volume = 72 cu. m

Question 9.
A quart of paint covers 80 square feet. How many quarts should you buy to paint the ramp with two coats? (Assume you will not paint the bottom of the ramp.)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 9
Answer:
Volume of the prism = 2914.8 cu. ft

Explanation:
Volume of the prism =lwh
volume = (14x 34.7 x 6)
volume =2914.8 cu. ft

Question 10.
A manufacturer wants to double the volume of the graham cracker box. The manufacturer will either double the height or double the width.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 10
a. What is the volume of the new graham cracker box?
b. Which option uses less cardboard? Justify your answer.
c. A graham cracker takes up about 1.5 cubic inches of space. Write an inequality that represents the numbers of graham crackers that can fit in the new box.
Answer:
a. the volume of the new graham cracker box = 108 cu. in

Explanation:
Volume of the prism =lwh
volume = (9 x 2 x 6)
volume = 108 cu. in

Question 11.
The label on the can of soup covers about 354.2 square centimeters. What is the height of the can? Round your answer to the nearest whole number.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 11
Answer:
The height of the can = 10,454.5672 cm

Explanation:
The lateral surface area of the cylinder =  2πrh
where  radius = 4.7 , height = 354.2 given
surface area =  2 x 3.14 x 4.7 x 354.2
surface area = 10,454.5672 cm

Question 12.
A lumberjack splits the cylindrical log from top to bottom with an ax, dividing it in half. Describe the shape that is formed by the cut.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume pt 12
Answer:
cylinder.

Explanation:
The shape that formed by the cut = cylinder

Surface Area and Volume Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 1
Question 1.
A gift box and its dimensions are shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 2
What is the least amount of wrapping paper that you need to wrap the box?
A. 20 in.2
B. 56 in.2
C. 64 in.2
D. 112 in.2
Answer:
option C is correct.

Explanation:
The least amount of wrapping paper that need to wrap the box = l x w x h
8 x 4 x 2
64
Question 2.
James is getting ready for wrestling season. As part of his preparation, he plans to lose 5% of his body weight. James currently weighs 160 pounds. How much will he weigh, in pounds, after he loses 5% of his weight?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 3
Answer:
he weigh after he loses 5 % = 128

Question 3.
How far will the tip of the hour hand of the clock travel in 2 hours? (Use \(\frac{22}{7}\) for π.)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 4
F. 44 mm
G. 88 mm
H. 264 mm
I. 528 mm
Answer:
option G is correct

Explanation:
The circumference of circle = 2 π r h

Question 4.
Which value of x makes the equation true?
5x – 3 = 11
A. 1.6
B. 2.8
C. 40
D. 70
Answer:
option B is correct

Explanation:
5x – 3 = 11
5x = 11 + 3
5x = 14
x = (14/3)
x = 2.8
Question 5.
A hockey rink contains 5 face-off circles. Each of these circles has a radius of 15 feet. What is the total area of all the face-off circles? (Use 3.14 for π.)
F. 706.5 ft 2
G. 2826 ft2
H. 3532.5 ft2
I. 14,130 ft2
Answer:
Option G is correct

Explanation:
The surface area of circle = 2rhπ
circle = 2 x 15 x 5 x 3.14

Question 6.
How much material is needed to make the popcorn container?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 5
A. 76π in.2
B. 84π in.2       
C. 92π in.2
D. 108π in.2

Answer:
The material needed to make the popcorn container = 76π in.2

Explanation:
The lateral surface area = 2πrh
surface area = 2 x 9.5 x 4 π
surface area = 76π in.2

Question 7.
What is the surface area of the square pyramid?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 6
F. 24 in.2
G. 96 in.2
H. 132 in.2
I. 228 in.2
Answer:
Option g is correct

Explanation:
surface area = 2 x l x h
surface area = 2 x 8 x 6
surface area = 96 square inches

Question 8.
A rectangular prism and its dimensions are shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 7
What is the volume, in cubic inches, of a rectangular prism whose dimensions are three times greater?
Answer:
The volume of rectangular prism = 24 cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of rectangular prism l w h
volume = 4 x 3 x 2
volume = 24 cu. in
Question 9.
What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 8
A. 20
B. 43
C. 44
D. 65
Answer:
option A  is correct

Explanation:
(2x + 4) = 46
2x = (46 – 4)
2x = 42
x = 21

Question 10.
Which of the following are possible angle measures of a triangle?
F. 60°, 50°, 20°
G. 40°, 80°, 90°
H. 30°, 60°, 90°
I. 0°, 90°, 90°
Answer:
option H is the correct

Explanation:
The angles of a triangle = 30°, 60°, 90°

Question 11.
The table shows the costs of buying matinee movie tickets.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume cp 9
Part A Graph the data.
Part B Find and interpret the constant of proportionality for the graph of the line.
Part C How much does it cost to buy 8 matinee movie tickets?
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 10 Surface Area and Volume

It is necessary for the students to learn the concepts to answer the questions in maths. The solutions in this chapter are prepared by the math experts. Hence you need not worry about the answers. Just make use of the above links and solve the problems. Keep in touch with us to get the solutions of all Big Ideas Math Grade 7 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations

Free step-by-step solutions for all the questions in equations are available here. So, the students who are browsing for Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations can download the pdf for free of cost. The benefit of referring to our Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Equations is you can learn the simple methods to solve the problems. And also it helps to improve your math skills and score good marks in the exams.

Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Equations

Other than marks it is necessary for the students to understand the concepts in math. So you have to relate the question with the real-time problems so that it will be easy to understand the concept in depth. Keeping all this in mind our team has prepared the BIM 6th Grade Answer Key or Equations topic-wise. So, click on the below-given links and start practicing the problems.

Performance Task

Lesson 1: Writing Equations in One Variable

Lesson: 2 Solving Equations Using Addition or Subtraction

Lesson: 3 Solving Equations Using Multiplication or Division

Lesson: 4 Writing Equations in Two Variables

Chapter 6 – Equations

Equations STEAM Video/ Performance Task

STEAM Video

Rock Climbing
Equations can be used to solve many different kinds of problems in real life, such as estimating the amount of time it will take to climb a rock wall. Can you think of any other real-life situations where equations are useful?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 1
In rock climbing, a pitch is a section of a climbing route between two anchor points. Watch the STEAM Video “Rock Climbing.”en answer the following questions.
1. How can you use pitches to estimate the amount of time it will take to climb a rock wall?
2. Are there any other methods you could use to estimate the amount of time it will take to climb a rock wall? Explain.
3. You know two of the three pieces of information below. Explain how you can find the missing piece of information.
Average climbing speed
Height of rock wall
Time to complete climb

Performance Task

Planning the Climb
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given information about two rock-climbing routes.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 2
Route 1: 500 feet, 125 feet per pitch
Route 2: 1200 feet, 8 pitch
You will find the average speed of the climbers on Route 1 and the amount of time it takes to complete Route 2. Will the average speed of the climbers on Route 1 provide accurate predictions for the amount of time it takes to climb other routes? Explain why or why not.

Equations Getting Ready for Chapter 6

Chapter Exploration

Work with a partner. Every equation that has an unknown variable can be written as a question. Write a question that represents the equation. Then answer the question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 3

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-6-Equations-3

Work with a partner. Write an equation that represents the question. Then answer the question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 4

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-6-Equations-4

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
equation
independent variable
inverse operations
dependent variable
equation in two variables.

Lesson 6.1 Writing Equations in One Variable

EXPLORATION 1

Writing Equations
Work with a partner. Customers order sandwiches at a cafe from the menu board shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 1
a. The equation 6.75x =20.25 represents the purchase of one customer from the menu board. What does the equation tell you about the purchase? What cannot be determined from the equation?
b. The four customers in the table buy multiple sandwiches of the same type. For each customer, write an equation that represents the situation. Then determine how many sandwiches each customer buys. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 2
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 3

An equation
is a mathematical sentence that uses an equal sign, =, to show that two expressions are equal.
Expressions
4 + 8
x + 8
Equations
4 + 8 = 12
x + 8 = 12
To write a word sentence as an equation, look for key words or phrases such as is, the same as, or equals to determine where to place the equal sign.

Try It

Write the word sentence as an equation.
Question 1.
9 less than a number be equals 2.
Answer: 9-x=2

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase “less than” indicates -.
let the number be x.
9 – x = 2

Question 2.
The product of a number g and 5 is 30.
Answer: 5 × g=30

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase “product” indicates ‘×’
g × 5 = 30

Question 3.
A number k increased by 10 is the same as 24.
Answer: k + 10 = 24

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase “increased” indicates ‘+’
The equation is k + 10 = 24

Question 4.
The quotient of a number q and 4 is 12.
Answer: q ÷ 4 = 12

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase quotient indicates ‘÷’
The equation is q ÷ 4 = 12

Question 5.
2\(\frac{1}{2}\) is the same as the sum of a number w and \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = w + \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase sum indicates ‘+’
The equation is 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = w + \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 6.
WHAT IF?
Each server decorates one table. Which equation can you use to find c?
Answer: We can use the multiplication equation to find c.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
VOCABULARY
How are expressions and equations different?
Answer: An expression is a number, a variable, or a combination of numbers and variables and operation symbols. An equation is made up of two expressions connected by an equal sign.

Question 8.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Write “both” equations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 4
Answer: n-4=8
4<8

Question 9.
OPEN-ENDED
Write a word sentence for the equation 28 −n= 5.
Answer: 28 less than a number n is equals to 5.

Question 10.
WRITING
You purchase x items for $4 each. Explain how the variable in the expression 4x and the variable in the equation 4x= 20 are similar. Explain how they are different.
Answer:
You purchase x items for $4 each
4x = 20
x = 20/4
x = 5

Question 11.
After four rounds, 74 teams are eliminated from a robotics competition. There are 18 teams remaining. Write and solve an equation to find the number of teams that started the competition.
Answer:
Given,
After four rounds, 74 teams are eliminated from a robotics competition. There are 18 teams remaining.
Let x be 74 teams
let y be 18 teams
The equation would be
x + y = 92
74 + 18 = 92
Thus the total number of teams are 92.

Question 12.
The mass of the blue copper sulfate crystal is two-thirds the mass of the red fluorite crystal. Write an equation you can use to find the mass (in grams) of the blue copper sulfate crystal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 5
Answer: blue copper sulfate crystal = 2/3 (red fluorite crystal)

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
You print photographs from a vacation. Find the number of photographs you can print for $3.60.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 6
Answer: We can print 15 photographs for $3.60

Explanation:
Cost of each print = $0.24
The total cost for photographs is $3.60
3.60/0.24 = 15
Thus We can print 15 photographs for $3.60

Writing Equations in One Variable Homework & Practice 6.1

Review & Refresh

Factor the expression using the GCF.
Question 1.
6 + 27
Answer: 3 (2 + 9)

Explanation:
Given the expression 6 + 27
Take 3 as the common factor
3(2 + 9)

Question 2.
9w + 72
Answer: 9(w + 8)

Explanation:
Given the expression 9w + 72
Take 9 as the common factor
9w + 72 = 9(w + 8)

Question 3.
42 + 24n
Answer: 6(7 + 4n)

Explanation:
Given the expression 42 + 24n
Take 6 as the common factor
42 + 24n = 6(7 + 4n)

Question 4.
18h + 30k
Answer: 6(3h + 5k)

Explanation:
Given the expression 18h + 30k
Take 6 as the common factor
18h + 30k = 6(3h + 5k)

Question 5.
Which number is not equal to 225%?
A. 2\(\frac{1}{4}\)
B. \(\frac{9}{4}\)
C. \(\frac{50}{40}\)
D. \(\frac{45}{20}\)
Answer: C
225% is not equal to \(\frac{50}{40}\)

Evaluate the expression when a = 7.
Question 6.
6 + a
Answer: 13

Explanation:
Given the expression 6 + a
where a = 7
Substitute the value of a in the expression
6 + 7 = 13

Question 7.
a – 4
Answer: 3

Explanation:
Given the expression a – 4
where a = 7
Substitute the value of a in the expression
a – 4
7 – 4 = 3

Question 8.
4a
Answer: 28

Explanation:
Given the expression 4a
where a = 7
Substitute the value of a in the expression
4 × 7 = 28

Question 9.
\(\frac{35}{a}\)
Answer: 5

Explanation:
Given the expression \(\frac{35}{a}\)
where a = 7
Substitute the value of a in the expression
\(\frac{35}{7}\) = 5

Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 7
Answer:
l = 8 ft
Area = 40 sq ft
We know that,
Area of rectangle = l × w
40 sq. ft = 8 ft × w
w = 40/8 = 5 ft
Thus the width of the above rectangle is 5 ft.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 8
Answer:
l = 13 cm
w = ?
A = 52 sq. cm
We know that,
Area of rectangle = l × w
52 sq. cm = 13 cm × w
w = 52/13
w = 4 cm
Thus the width of the above rectangle is 4 cm.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 9
Answer:
A = 224 sq. miles
l = 14 miles
We know that,
Area of rectangle = l × w
224 sq. miles = 14 × w
w = 224/14
w = 16 miles
Thus the width of the above figure is 16 miles.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

WRITING EQUATIONS A roast beef sandwich costs $6.75. A customer buys multiple roast beef sandwiches. Write an equation that represents the situation. Then determine how many sandwiches the customer buys. (See Exploration 1, p. 245.)
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 10
Answer:
Given,
A roast beef sandwich costs $6.75.
Amount used for payment = $50.
Change Received = $16.25
The total number of sandwich the customer buys = 5

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 11
Answer:
Given,
A roast beef sandwich costs $6.75.
Amount used for payment = $80.
Change Received = $19.25
Amount used for payment – Change Received
= $ 80 – $19.25
= $60.75
1 sandwich = $6.75
The total number of sandwich the customer buys = 9

WRITING EQUATIONS Write the word sentence as an equation.
Question 15.
A number y decreased by 9 is 8.
Answer: y – 9 = 8

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation form.
y – 9 = 8

Question 16.
The sum of a number x and 4 equals 12.
Answer: x + 4 = 12

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation form.
x + 4 = 12

Question 17.
9 times a number b is 36.
Answer: 9b = 36

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation form.
The phrase times indicates ‘×’
The equation would be 9b = 36

Question 18.
A number w divided by 5 equals 6.
Answer: w ÷ 5 = 6

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation form.
The phrase divided by indicates ‘÷’
The equation would be w ÷ 5 = 6

Question 19.
54 equals 9 more than a number t.
Answer: 54 = 9 + t

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation form.
The phrase more than indicates ‘+’
The equation would be 54 = 9 + t

Question 20.
5 is one-fourth of a number c.
Answer: 5 = 1/4 c

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation form.
The phrase of indicates ‘×’
The equation would be 5 = 1/4 c

Question 21.
9.5 less than a number n equals 27.
Answer: 9.5 – n = 27

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation form.
The phrase less than indicates ‘-‘
The equation would be 9.5 – n = 27

Question 22.
11\(\frac{3}{4}\) is the quotient of a number y and 6\(\frac{1}{4}\).
Answer: 11\(\frac{3}{4}\) = y ÷ 6\(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation form.
The phrase quotient indicates ‘÷’
The equation would be 11\(\frac{3}{4}\) = y ÷ 6\(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 23.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend writes the word sentence as an equation. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 12
Answer:
Given the word sentence, 5 less than a number n is 12.

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Students and faculty raise $6042 for band uniforms. The faculty raised $1780. Write an equation you can use to find the amount a (in dollars) the students raised.
Answer:
Given,
Students and faculty raise $6042 for band uniforms (x).
The faculty raised $1780 (y)
The students raised be z
z = x – y
z = 6042 – 1780
z = 4262

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You hit a golf ball 90 yards. It travels three-fourths of the distance to the hole. Write an equation you can use to find the distance d (in yards) from the tee to the hole.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 13
Answer:
Given,
You hit a golf ball 90 yards. It travels three-fourths of the distance to the hole.
3/4 × D = 90
D = 360/3
D = 120

GEOMETRY Write an equation you can use to find the value of x.
Question 26.
Perimeter of triangle: 16 in.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 14
Answer:
side of the triangle = x
Perimeter of triangle 16 in
P = a + b + c
16 in = x + x + x
3x = 16
x = 16/3
x = 5.3
Thus the side of the triangle is 5.3 inches.

Question 27.
Perimeter of square: 30 mm
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 15
Answer:
4x = 30
x = 30/4
x = 7.5 mm

Question 28.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You sell instruments at a Caribbean music festival. You earn $326 by selling 12 sets of maracas,6 sets of claves, and x djembe drums. Find the number of djembe drums you sold.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 16
Answer:
Let the price of maracas be m
Let the price of claves be c
Let the price of djembe drums be x
Number of maracas = 12 sets
Number of claves = 6 sets
Number of djembe drums = xx
Total earned amount = $326
The equation would be
12m + 6c + dxx = 326
The cost for 1 maracas is $14
For 12 sets = 12 × 14 = $168
The cost for 1 clave = $5
For 6 sets = 6 × 5 = $30
The cost for 1 djembe drums is $16
For x sets = 16x
12m + 6c + dxx = 326
168 + 30 + 16x = 326
16x = 128
x = 128 ÷ 16
x = 8

Question 29.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Neil Armstrong set foot on the Moon 109.4 hours after Apollo 11departed from the Kennedy Space Center. Apollo 11landed on the Moon about 6.6 hours before Armstrong’s first step. How many hours did it take for Apollo 11 to reach the Moon?
Answer:
Given,
Neil Armstrong set foot on the Moon 109.4 hours after Apollo 11 departed from the Kennedy Space Center.
Apollo 11landed on the Moon about 6.6 hours before Armstrong’s first step.
To find how many hours did it take for Apollo 11 to reach the Moon we have to subtract 6.6 hours from 109.4 hours
109.4 – 6.6 = 102.8 hours
Thus it took 102.8 hours for Apollo 11 to reach the Moon.

Question 30.
LOGIC
You buy a basket of 24 strawberries. You eat them as you walk to the beach. It takes the same amount of time to walk each block. When you are halfway there, half of the berries are gone. After walking 3 more blocks, you still have 5 blocks to go. You reach the beach 28 minutes after you began. One-sixth of your strawberries are left.
a. Is there enough information to find the time it takes to walk each block? Explain.

Answer:
Yes, you are given enough information to find the time to walk each block
To find the total number of block you, add
3 + 5 + 8 = 16
Also the time it takes to walk the 16 blocks is given 28 minutes.

b. Is there enough information to find how many strawberries you ate while walking the last block? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 17
Answer:
No, there is not enough information to find how many strawberries ate while walking the last block.
You are only given the amount of strawberries you started with 24 and what you have left (1/6) with 5 blocks to go. Therefore you can only be given how many strawberries were eaten walking the last block.

Question 31.
DIG DEEPER!
Find a sales receipt from a store that shows the total price of the items and the total amount paid including sales tax.
a. Write an equation you can use to find the sales tax rate r.
b. Can you use r to find the percent for the sales tax? Explain.
Answer:
Total amount paid = total price + (total price × sales tax rate)
sample equation
14.20 = 13.27 + (13.27 × 0.07)
Yes, you can use r to find the percent for the sales tax.
Multiplying r by 100 gives the percent for the sales tax.

Question 32.
GEOMETRY
A square is cut from a rectangle. The side length of the square is half of the unknown width w. The area of the shaded region is 84 square inches. Write an equation you can use to find the width (in inches).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.1 18
Answer:
Given,
A square is cut from a rectangle. The side length of the square is half of the unknown width w.
The area of the shaded region is 84 square inches.
84 square inches divided by 14 inches equals 6
84 divided by 14 = s
84 ÷ 14 = s

Lesson 6.2 Solving Equations Using Addition or Subtraction

EXPLORATION 1

Solving an Equation Using a Tape Diagram
Work with a partner. A student solves an equation using the tape diagrams below.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 1
a. What equation did the student solve? What is the solution?

Answer: x + 4 = 12

Explanation:
By seeing step 1 we can say that the equation for the above tape diagram x + 4 = 12

b. Explain how the tape diagrams in Steps 2 and 3 relate to the equation and its solution.
Answer:
By seeing the steps 2 and 3 we can say
8 + 4 = 12
x + 4 = 12
x = 12 – 4
x = 8

EXPLORATION 2
Solving an Equation Using a Model
Work with a partner.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 2
a. How are the two sides of an equation similar to a balanced scale?
b. When you add weight to one side of a balanced scale, what can you do to balance the scale? What if you subtract weight from one side of a balanced scale? How does this relate to solving an equation?
c. Use a model to solve x + 2 = 7. Describe how you can solve the equation algebraically.
Answer:
x + 2 = 7
x = 7 – 2
x = 5

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 3

Try It

Tell whether the given value is a solution of the equation.
Question 1.
a + 6 = 17; a = 9
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Given the equation a + 6 = 17
when a = 9
9 + 6 = 17
15 ≠ 17
Thus the equation is not a solution.

Question 2.
9 – g = 5; g = 3
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Given the equation 9 – g = 5
where g = 3
9 – 3 = 5
6 ≠ 5
Thus the equation is not a solution.

Question 3.
35 – 7n; n = 5
Answer: solution

Explanation:
Given the equation 35 – 7n
where n = 5
35 – 7(5)
35 – 35 = 0
Thus the equation is a solution.

Question 4.
\(\frac{q}{2}\) = 28; q = 14
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Given the equation \(\frac{q}{2}\) = 28
where q = 14
\(\frac{14}{2}\) = 28
7 ≠ 28
Thus the equation is not a solution.

You can use inverse operations to solve equations. Inverse operations “undo” each other. Addition and subtraction are inverse operations.

Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 5.
k – 3 = 1
Answer: k = 4

Explanation:
Given the equation k – 3 = 1
k = 1 + 3
k = 4

Question 6.
n – 10 = 4
Answer: n = 14

Explanation:
Given the equation n – 10 = 4
n = 4 + 10
n = 14

Question 7.
15 = r – 6
Answer: r = 21

Explanation:
Given the equation 15 = r – 6
15 + 6 = r
r = 21

Question 8.
s + 8 = 17
Answer: s = 9

Explanation:
Given the equation s + 8 = 17
s = 17 – 8
s = 9

Question 9.
9 = y + 6
Answer: y = 3

Explanation:
Given the equation 9 = y + 6
9 – 6 = y
y = 3

Question 10.
13 + m = 20
Answer: m = 7

Explanation:
Given the equation 13 + m = 20
m = 20 – 13
m = 7

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

CHECKING SOLUTIONS Tell whether the given value is a solution of the equation.
Question 11.
n + 8 = 42; n = 36
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Given the equation n + 8 = 42
where n = 36
36 + 8 = 44
44 ≠ 42
Thus the value is not a solution.

Question 12.
g – 9 = 24; g = 35
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Given the equation g – 9 = 24
where g = 35
35 – 9 = 24
26 ≠ 24
Thus the value is not a solution.

SOLVING EQUATIONS Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 13.
x – 8 = 12
Answer: 20

Explanation:
Given the equation x – 8 = 12
x = 12 + 8
x = 20

Question 14.
b + 14 = 33
Answer: 19

Explanation:
Given the equation b + 14 = 33
b = 33 – 14
b = 19

Question 15.
WRITING
When solving x + 5 =16, why do you subtract 5 from the left side of the equation? Why do you subtract 5 from the right side of the equation?
Answer:
To solve the equation we have to subtract 5.
x + 5 = 16
x = 16 – 5
x = 11

Question 16.
REASONING
Do the equations have the same solution? Explain your reasoning.
x – 8 = 6
x – 6 = 8
Answer:
i. x – 8 = 6
x = 6 + 8
x = 14
ii. x – 6 = 8
x = 8 + 6
x = 14
Yes both the equations has same solutions.

Question 17.
STRUCTURE
Just by looking at the equation x + 6 + 2x = 2x + 6 + 4, find the value of x. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
x + 6 + 2x = 2x + 6 + 4
3x + 6 = 2x + 10
3x – 2x = 10 – 6
x = 4

Question 18.
An emperor penguin is 45 inches tall. It is 24 inches taller than a rockhopper penguin. Write and solve an equation to find the height (in inches) of a rockhopper penguin. Is your answer reasonable? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 4
Answer:
Given,
An emperor penguin is 45 inches tall. It is 24 inches taller than a rockhopper penguin.
45 inches – 24 inches = 21 inches
Thus the height of the rockhopper penguin is 21 inches.

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
You get in an elevator and go up 2 floors and down8 floors before exiting. Then you get back in the elevator and go up 4 floors before exiting on the 12th floor. On what floors did you enter the elevator?
Answer: The answer to your question is 14 floor

Explanation:
To solve this problem start from the end changing the sense if it says up, then consider the action as down, etc.
Last floor = 12
Go down 4 floors = 12 – 4 = 8
Go up 8 floors = 8 + 8 = 16
Go down 2 floors = 16 – 2 = 14

Solving Equations Using Addition or Subtraction Homework & Practice 6.2

Review & Refresh

Write the word sentence as an equation.
Question 1.
Th sum of a number x and 9 is 15.
Answer: x + 9 = 15

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase sum indicates ‘+’
The equation would be x + 9 = 15

Question 2.
12 less than a number m equals 20.
Answer: 12 – m = 20

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase less than indicates ‘-‘
The equation would be 12 – m = 20

Question 3.
The product of a number d and 7 is 63.
Answer: d7 = 63

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase product indicates ‘×’
The equation would be d × 7 = 63

Question 4.
18 divided by a number s equals 3.
Answer: 18 ÷ s = 3

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase divided by indicates ‘÷’
The equation would be 18 ÷ s = 3

Divide. Write the answer in simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer: 2

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{4}{1}\) = 2

Question 6.
12 ÷ \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Answer: 32

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
12 × \(\frac{8}{3}\)
= 4 × 8
= 32

Question 7.
8 ÷ \(\frac{4}{5}\)
Answer: 10

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
8 × \(\frac{5}{4}\)
= 2 × 5
= 10

Question 8.
\(\frac{7}{9}\) ÷ \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Answer: \(\frac{14}{27}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
\(\frac{7}{9}\) × \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{14}{27}\)

Question 9.
Which ratio is not equivalent to 72 : 18?
A. 36 : 9
B. 18 : 6
C. 4 : 1
D. 288 : 72
Answer: B. 18 : 6

Explanation:
72 : 18 = 36:9, 4 : 1, 288 : 72
18 : 6 is not equivalent to 72 : 18
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Evaluate the expression.
Question 10.
(2 + 52) ÷ 3
Answer: 9

Explanation:
Given the expression (2 + 52) ÷ 3
(2 + 25) ÷ 3
27 ÷ 3 = 9

Question 11.
6 + 23 . 3 – 5
Answer: 25

Explanation:
Given the expression 6 + 23 . 3 – 5
6 + 8 . 3 – 5
6 + 24 – 5
6 + 19
25

Question 12.
4 . [3 + 3(20 – 42 – 2)]
Answer: 36

Explanation:
Given the expression 4 . [3 + 3(20 – 42 – 2)]
4(3 + 3(20 – 16 – 2))
4(3 + 3(2))
4 (3 + 6)
4(9)
36

Question 13.
Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-6th-Grade-Chapter-6-Equations-6.2-5

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

CHOOSE TOOLS Use a model to solve the equation. (See Explorations 1 and 2, p. 251.)
Question 14.
n + 7 = 9
Answer: n = 2

Explanation:
n + 7 = 9
n = 9 – 7
n = 2

Question 15.
t + 4 = 5
Answer: t = 1

Explanation:
t + 4 = 5
t = 5 – 4
t = 1

Question 16.
c + 2 = 8
Answer: c = 6

Explanation:
c + 2 = 8
c = 8 – 2
c = 6

CHECKING SOLUTIONS Tell whether the given value is a solution of the equation.
Question 17.
x + 42 = 85; x = 43
Answer: solution

Explanation:
x + 42 = 85
Substitute the value of x in the equation
x = 43
43 + 42 = 85

Question 18.
8b = 48; b = 6
Answer: solution

Explanation:
8b = 48
Substitute the value of b in the equation
b = 6
8(6) = 48
48 = 48

Question 19.
19 – g = 7; g = 15
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
19 – g = 7
Substitute the value of g in the equation
g = 15
19 – 15 = 7
2 ≠ 7
This is not a solution

Question 20.
\(\frac{m}{4}\) = 16; m = 4
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
\(\frac{m}{4}\) = 16
Substitute the value of m in the equation
\(\frac{4}{4}\) = 16
1 ≠ 16
This is not a solution

Question 21.
w + 23 = 41; w = 28
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
w + 23 = 41
Substitute the value of w in the equation
28 + 23 = 41
51 ≠ 41
This is not a solution

Question 22.
s – 68 = 11; s = 79
Answer: solution

Explanation:
Given,
s – 68 = 11
Substitute the value of s in the equation
s = 79
79 – 68 = 11
11 = 11
This is a solution

SOLVING EQUATIONS Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 23.
y – 7 = 3
Answer:
Given the equation
y – 7 = 3
y = 3 + 7
y = 10

Question 24.
z – 3 = 13
Answer:
Given the equation
z – 3 = 13
z = 13 +3
z = 16

Question 25.
8 = r – 14
Answer:
Given the equation
8 = r – 14
r = 8 + 14
r = 22

Question 26.
p + 5 = 8
Answer:
Given the equation
p + 5 = 8
p = 8 – 5
p = 3

Question 27.
k + 6 = 18
Answer:
Given the equation
k + 6 = 18
k = 18 – 6
k = 12

Question 28.
64 = h + 30
Answer:
Given the equation
64 = h + 30
h = 64 – 30
h = 34

Question 29.
f – 27 = 19
Answer:
Given the equation
f – 27 = 19
f = 19 +27
f = 46

Question 30.
25 = q + 14
Answer:
Given the equation
25 = q + 14
q = 25 – 14
q = 11

Question 31.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = j – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
Given the equation
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = j – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = j
j = 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 32.
x + \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{9}{10}\)
Answer:
Given the equation
x + \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{9}{10}\)
x = \(\frac{9}{10}\) – \(\frac{2}{3}\)
x = \(\frac{7}{30}\)

Question 33.
1.2 = m – 2.5
Answer:
Given the equation
1.2 = m – 2.5
m = 1.2 + 2.5
m = 3.7

Question 34.
a + 5.5 = 17.3
Answer:
Given the equation
a + 5.5 = 17.3
a = 17.3 – 5.5
a = 11.8

YOU BE THE TEACHER Your friend solves the equation. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 6
Answer:
x + 7 = 13
x = 13 – 7
x = 4
Your friend is incorrect

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 7
Answer:
34 = y – 12
y – 12 = 34
y = 34 + 12
y = 46

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The main span of the Sunshine SkywayBridge is 366 meters long. The bridge’s main span is 30 meters shorter than the main span of the Dames Point Bridge. Write and solve an equation to find the length (in meters) of the main span of the Dames Point Bridge.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 8
Answer:
Given,
The main span of the Sunshine SkywayBridge is 366 meters long.
The bridge’s main span is 30 meters shorter than the main span of the Dames Point Bridge.
336 – 30 = 306
Let the main span of the Sunshine SkywayBridge be x
Let the main span of the Dames Point Bridge be y
x – y = 306

Question 38.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A park has 22 elm trees. Elm leaf beetles have been attacking the trees. After removing several of the diseased trees, there are 13 healthy elm trees left. Write and solve an equation to find the number of elm trees that were removed.
Answer:
Given,
A park has 22 elm trees. Elm leaf beetles have been attacking the trees.
After removing several of the diseased trees, there are 13 healthy elm trees left.
x – y = 9
22 – 13 = 9
Thus the number of trees removed 9.

Question 39.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The area of Jamaica is 6460 square miles less than the area of Haiti. Find the area (in square miles) of Haiti.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 9
Answer:
Given,
The area of Jamaica is 6460 square miles less than the area of Haiti.
Y = X – 6460
Y = Haiti
X = area of Jamaica

Question 40.
REASONING
The solution of the equation x+ 3 = 12 is shown. Explain each step. Use a property, if possible.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 10
Answer:
The sum of a number x and 3 is 12
x + 3 = 12
x = 12 – 3
x = 9

WRITING EQUATIONS Write the word sentence as an equation. Then solve the equation.
Question 41.
13 subtracted from a number w is 15.
Answer: w – 13 = 15

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase subtracted indicates ‘-‘
The equation would be w – 13 = 15

Question 42.
A number k increased by 7 is 34.
Answer: K + 7 = 34

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase increased indicates ‘+’
The equation would be K + 7 = 34

Question 43.
9 is the difference of a number n and 7.
Answer: n – 7 = 9

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase difference indicates ‘-‘
The equation would be n – 7 = 9

Question 44.
93 is the sum of a number g and 58.
Answer: g + 58 = 93

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase sum indicates ‘+’
The equation would be g + 58 = 93

Question 45.
11 more than a number k equals 29.
Answer: 11 + k = 29

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase more than indicates ‘+’
The equation would be 11 + k = 29

Question 46.
A number p decreased by 19 is 6.
Answer: p – 19 = 6

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase decreased indicates ‘-‘
The equation would be p – 19 = 6

Question 47.
46 is the total of 18 and a number d.
Answer: 18 + d = 46

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase total indicates ‘+’
The equation would be 18 + d = 46

Question 48.
84 is 99 fewer than a number c.
Answer: 84 = 99 – c

Explanation:
We have to write the equation for the word sentence
The phrase fewer than indicates ‘-‘
The equation would be 84 = 99 – c

SOLVING EQUATIONS Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 49.
b + 7 + 12 = 30
Answer:
Given the equation
b + 7 + 12 = 30
b = 30 – 19
b = 11

Question 50.
y + 4 − 1 = 18
Answer:
Given the equation
y + 4 − 1 = 18
y + 3 = 18
y = 18 – 3
y = 15

Question 51.
m + 18 + 23 = 71
Answer:
Given the equation
m + 18 + 23 = 71
m + 41 = 71
m = 71 – 41
m = 30

Question 52.
v − 7 = 9 + 12
Answer:
Given the equation
v − 7 = 9 + 12
v – 7 = 21
v = 21 + 7
v = 28

Question 53.
5 + 44 = 2 + r
Answer:
Given the equation
5 + 44 = 2 + r
49 = 2 + r
r = 49 – 2
r = 47

Question 54.
22 + 15 = d− 17
Answer:
Given the equation
22 + 15 = d− 17
37 = d – 17
d = 37 + 17
d = 54

GEOMETRY Solve for x.
Question 55.
Perimeter = 48 ft
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 11
Answer:
P = a + b + c
48 ft = x + 20 + 12
x = 48 – 32
x = 16 ft

Question 56.
Perimeter = 132 in.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 12
Answer:
P = a + b + c + d
132 = 34 + 16 + 34 + x
132 – 84 = x
x = 50 in

Question 57.
Perimeter = 93 ft
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 13
Answer:
P = 8(a + b + c + d + e)
93 ft = 8(18 + 18 + 15 + d + 15)
d = 93/528
d = 0.17

Question 58.
SIMPLIFYING AND SOLVING Compare and contrast the two problems.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 14
Answer:
2(x + 3) – 4
= 2x + 6 – 4
= 2x + 2

Question 59.
PUZZLE
In a magic square, the sum of the numbers in each row, column, and diagonal is the same. Find the values of a, b, and c. Justify your answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 15
Answer:
The sum of rows and columns is 53.
a = 22
b = 0
c = 0

Question 60.
REASONING
On Saturday, you spend $33, give $15 to a friend, and receive $20 for mowing your neighbor’s lawn. You have $21 left. Use two methods to find how much money you started with that day.
Answer:
Given,
On Saturday, you spend $33, give $15 to a friend, and receive $20 for mowing your neighbor’s lawn.
You have $21 left.
x = a + b + c – d
x = 33 + 15 + 20 – 21
x = 68 – 21
x = 47

Question 61.
DIG DEEPER!
You have $15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations 6.2 16
a. How much money do you have left if you ride each ride once?
b. Do you have enough money to ride each ride twice? Explain.
Answer:
a. bumper cost : $1.75
super pendulum : $1.25 + $1.50= $2.75
giant slide :  $1.75-$0.50= $1.25
ferris wheels : $1.50+$0.50=$2
total money spent=$7.75
money left=$7.75-$15=$7.25

b. No,
money required to ride once =$7.75
total money required to ride twice=$7.75+$7.75=$15.5

Question 62.
CRITICAL THINKING
Consider the equation 15 − y = 8. Explain how you can solve the equation using the Addition and Subtraction Properties of Equality.
Answer:
15 − y = 8
15 = 8 + y
8 + y = 15
y = 15 – 8
y = 7

Lesson 6.3 Solving Equations Using Multiplication or Division

EXPLORATION 1

Solving an Equation Using a Tape Diagram
Work with a partner. A student solves an equation using the tape diagrams below.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 1
a. What equation did the student solve? What is the solution?

Answer:
ax = b
4x = 20
x = 20/4
x = 5

b. Explain how the tape diagrams in Steps 2 and 3 relate to the equation and its solution.
Answer:
Step 2 and step 3 shows that x = 5

EXPLORATION 2

Solving an Equation Using a Model
Work with a partner. Three robots go out to lunch. They decide to split the $12 bill evenly. The scale represents the number of robots and the price of the meal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 2
a. How much does each robot pay?

Answer:
Three robots go out to lunch.
They decide to split the $12 bill evenly.
12/3 = 4
Thus each robot pay $4.

b. When you triple the weight on one side of a balanced scale, what can you do to balance the scale? What if you divide the weight on one side of a balanced scale in half? How does this relate to solving an equation?
c. Use a model to solve 5x = 15. Describe how you can solve the equation algebraically.
Answer:
5x = 15
x = 15/5
x = 3

Try It

Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 1.
\(\frac{a}{8}\) = 6
Answer: a = 48

Explanation:
Given the equation
\(\frac{a}{8}\) = 6
a = 6 × 8
a = 48

Question 2.
14 = \(\frac{2y}{5}\)
Answer: y = 35

Explanation:
Given the equation
14 = \(\frac{2y}{5}\)
14 × 5 = 2y
2y = 70
y = 70/2
y = 35

Question 3.
3z ÷ 2 = 9
Answer: z = 6

Explanation:
Given the equation
3z ÷ 2 = 9
3z = 9 × 2
3z = 18
z = 18/3
z = 6

Question 4.
p . 3 = 18
Answer: p = 6

Explanation:
Given the equation
p . 3 = 18
p = 18/3
p = 6

Question 5.
12q = 60
Answer: q = 5

Explanation:
Given the equation
12q = 60
q = 60/12
q = 5

Question 6.
81 = 9r
Answer: r = 9

Explanation:
Given the equation
81 = 9r
r = 81/9
r = 9

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

SOLVING EQUATIONS Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 7.
6 = \(\frac{2y}{3}\)
Answer: y = 9

Explanation:
Given the equation
6 = \(\frac{2y}{3}\)
6 × 3 = 2y
2y = 18
y = 18/2
y = 9

Question 8.
8s = 56
Answer: s = 7

Explanation:
Given the equation
8s = 56
s = 56/8
s = 7

Question 9.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which equation does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 3
Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)x = 27 does not belong with the other three.
Because
3x= 36
x = 36/3
x = 12
3/4 x = 9
3x = 36
x = 36/3
x = 12
4x = 48
x = 48/4
x = 12

STRUCTURE Just by looking at the equation, find the value of x. Explain your reasoning.
Question 10.
5x + 3x = 5x + 18
Answer:
Given the equation
x(5+3)=5x+18
8x=5x+18
8x-5x=18
3x=18
x=18/3
x=6

Question 11.
8x + \(\frac{x}{2}\) = 8x + 6
Answer:
Given the equation
8x + \(\frac{x}{2}\) = 8x + 6
x (8 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ) = 8x + 6
8.5x = 8x + 6
8.5x – 8x = 6
0.5x = 6
x = 6/0.5
x = 12

Question 12.
The area of the screen of the smart watch is shown. What are possible dimensions for the length and the width of the screen? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 4
Answer:
Given,
Area = 1625 sq.mm
L = 65 mm
W = 25 mm
We know that,
Area of the rectangle = l × w
1625 = 65 × 25
Thus the length and width of the smart watch is 65 mm and 25 mm.

Question 13.
A rock climber climbs at a rate of 720 feet per hour. Write and solve an equation to find the number of minutes it takes for the rock climber to climb 288 feet.
Answer:
Given,
A rock climber climbs at a rate of 720 feet per hour.
The equation is y = 12x
It takes 24 minutes for the rock climber to get 288 feet
288 = 12x
288/12 = 12x/12
24 = x
Now we have time in minutes that it takes to get 288 feet.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A gift card stores data using a black, magnetic stripe on the back of the card. Find the width w of the stripe.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 5
Answer:
Given,
Area = 46 \(\frac{3}{4}\) sq. cm
L = 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cm
w = 4 cm + x+ \(\frac{2}{3}\) cm
We know that,
Area of the rectangle = l × w
46 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 4 cm + x+ \(\frac{2}{3}\) × 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= (4 + 0.6 + x) × 8.5
46.75 = 34 + 5.4 + 8.5x
8.5x = 46.75 – 34 – 5.1
8.5x = 7.6
x = 7.6/8.5
x = 0.89
Thus the width is 0.89 cm

Solving Equations Using Multiplication or Division Homework & Practice 6.3

Review & Refresh
Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 1.
y – 5 = 6
Answer: y = 11

Explanation:
Given the equation
y – 5 = 6
y = 6 + 5
y = 11

Question 2.
m + 7 = 8
Answer: 1

Explanation:
Given the equation
m + 7 = 8
m = 8 – 7
m = 1

Question 3.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 9
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + 9 = \(\frac{9}{4}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) ≠ \(\frac{9}{4}\)
not a solution

Question 4.
What is the value of a3 when a= 4?
A. 12
B. 43
C. 64
D. 81
Answer: 64

Explanation:
a3 when a= 4
4 × 4 × 4 = 64
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Multiply. Write the answer in simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) . \(\frac{2}{9}\)
Answer:
For fraction multiplication, multiply the numerators and then multiply the denominators to get
\(\frac{1}{5}\) . \(\frac{2}{9}\) = \(\frac{2}{45}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{5}{12}\) × \(\frac{4}{7}\)
Answer:
For fraction multiplication, multiply the numerators and then multiply the denominators to get
\(\frac{5}{12}\) × \(\frac{4}{7}\) = \(\frac{5}{21}\)

Question 7.
2\(\frac{1}{3}\) . \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Answer:
For fraction multiplication, multiply the numerators and then multiply the denominators to get
2\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{7}{3}\)
\(\frac{7}{3}\) × \(\frac{3}{10}\) = \(\frac{21}{30}\)

Question 8.
1\(\frac{3}{4}\) × 2\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer:
1\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{7}{4}\)
2\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{8}{4}\)
\(\frac{7}{4}\) × \(\frac{8}{4}\) = \(\frac{56}{16}\)

Multiply.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 6
Answer: 0.36

Explanation:
Multiply the two decimals
0.4 × 0.9 = 0.36

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 7
Answer: 0.39

Explanation:
Multiply the two decimals
0.78 × 0.5 = 0.39

Question 11.
2.63 × 4.31
Answer: 11.3353

Explanation:
Multiply the two decimals
2.63 × 4.31 = 11.3353

Question 12.
1.115 × 3.28
Answer: 69.2

Explanation:
Multiply the two decimals
1.115 × 3.28 = 69.2

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

CHOOSE TOOLS Use a model to solve the equation. (See Explorations 1 and 2, p. 259.)
Question 13.
8x = 8
Answer: 1

Explanation:
Given the equation
8x = 8
x = 8/8
x = 1

Question 14.
9 = 3y
Answer: 3

Explanation:
Given the equation
9 = 3y
y = 9/3
y = 3

Question 15.
2z = 14
Answer: 7

Explanation:
Given the equation
2z = 14
z = 14/2
z = 7

SOLVING EQUATIONS Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 16.
\(\frac{s}{10}\) = 7
Answer: 70

Explanation:
Given the equation
\(\frac{s}{10}\) = 7
s = 7 × 10
s = 70

Question 17.
6 = \(\frac{t}{s}\)
Answer: 6s = t

Explanation:
Given the equation
6 = \(\frac{t}{s}\)
t = 6s

Question 18.
5x ÷ 6 = 20
Answer:
Given the equation
5x ÷ 6 = 20
5x = 20 × 6
5x = 120
x = 120/5
x = 24

Question 19.
24 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)r
Answer:
Given the equation
24 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)r
24 × 4 = 3r
96 = 3r
r = 32

Question 20.
3a = 12
Answer: 4

Explanation:
Given the equation
3a = 12
a = 12/3
a = 4

Question 21.
5 . z = 35
Answer: 7

Explanation:
Given the equation
5 . z = 35
z = 35/5
z = 7

Question 22.
40 = 4y
Answer: 10

Explanation:
Given the equation
40 = 4y
40/4 = y
y = 10

Question 23.
42 = 7k
Answer: 6

Explanation:
Given the equation
42 = 7k
7k = 42
k = 42/7

Question 24.
7x = 105
Answer: 15

Explanation:
Given the equation
7x = 105
x = 105/7
x = 15

Question 25.
75 = 6 . w
Answer: 12.5

Explanation:
Given the equation
75 = 6 . w
w = 75/6
w = 12.5

Question 26.
13 = d ÷ 6
Answer: 78

Explanation:
Given the equation
13 = d ÷ 6
d = 13 × 6
d = 78

Question 27.
9 = v ÷ 5
Answer: 45

Explanation:
Given the equation
9 = v ÷ 5
v = 9 × 5
v = 45

Question 28.
\(\frac{5d}{9}\) = 10
Answer: 18

Explanation:
Given the equation
\(\frac{5d}{9}\) = 10
5d = 10 × 9
5d = 90
d = 18

Question 29.
\(\frac{3}{5}\) = 4m
Answer: 0.15

Explanation:
Given the equation
\(\frac{3}{5}\) = 4m
3 = 4m × 5
20m = 3
m = 3/20
m = 0.15

Question 30.
136 = 17b
Answer: 19.4

Explanation:
Given the equation
136 = 17b
b = 136/17
b = 19.4

Question 31.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)k
Answer: 2.6

Explanation:
Given the equation
\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)k
k = \(\frac{8}{3}\)
k = 2.6

Question 32.
\(\frac{2c}{15}\) = 8.8
Answer: 66

Explanation:
Given the equation
\(\frac{2c}{15}\) = 8.8
2c = 8.8 × 15
2c = 132
c = 132/2
c = 66

Question 33.
7b ÷ 12 = 4.2
Answer: 7.2

Explanation:
Given the equation
7b ÷ 12 = 4.2
7b = 4.2 × 12
b = 7.2

Question 34.
12.5 . n = 32
Answer: 2.56

Explanation:
Given the equation
12.5 . n = 32
n = 32/12.5
n = 2.56

Question 35.
3.4 m = 20.4
Answer: m = 6

Explanation:
Given the equation
3.4 m = 20.4
m = 20.4/3.4
m = 6

Question 36.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend solves the equation x ÷ 4 =28. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 8
Answer: Your friend is correct

Explanation:
Your friend solves the equation x ÷ 4 =28.
x ÷ 4 = 28
x = 28/4
x = 7

Question 37.
ANOTHER WAY
Show how you can solve the equation 3x = 9 by multiplying each side by the reciprocal of 3.
Answer:
3x = 9
x = 9 × 1/3
x = 3

Question 38.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Forty-five basketball players participate in a three-on-three tournament. Write and solve an equation to find the number of three-person teams in the tournament.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 9
Answer: 15

Explanation:
Let the number of teams be x
x × 3 = 45
x = 45/3
x = 15

Question 39.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A theater has 1200 seats. Each row has 20 seats. Write and solve an equation to find the number of rows in the theater.
Answer:
Given,
A theater has 1200 seats. Each row has 20 seats.
Let x be the number of rows.
1200 = 20 × x
x = 1200/20
x = 60

GEOMETRY Solve for x. Check your answer.
Question 40.
Area = 45 square units
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 11
Answer:
l = x
w = 5
Area = 45 square units
We know that,
Area of the Rectangle = l × w
45 = x × 5
x = 45/5
x = 9 units

Question 41.
Area = 176 square units
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 12
Answer:
a = 16
Area = 176 square units
We know that,
Area of the square = a × a
176 = 16 × x
x = 16

Question 42.
LOGIC
Ona test, you earn 92% of the possible points by correctly answering 6 five-point questions and 8 two-point questions. How many points p is the test worth?
Answer:
Given,
Ona test, you earn 92% of the possible points by correctly answering 6 five-point questions and 8 two-point questions.
(6 × 5) + (8 × 2) = 46
92 × 1/100 = 46
0.92x = 46
x = 46/0.92
x = 50

Question 43.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You use index cards to play a homemade game. The object is to be the first to get rid of all your cards. How many cards are in your friend’s stack?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 13
Answer:
The number of cards in your friend’s stack divided by the height of your’s friends stack equals the number of cards in your stack divided by the height of your stack.
x = the number of cards in your friend’s stack
x ÷ 5 = 48 ÷ 12
x ÷ 5 = 4
x = 4 × 5
x = 20

Question 44.
DIG DEEPER!
A slush drink machine fills 1440 cups in 24 hours.
a. Find the number c of cups each symbol represents.
b. To lower costs, you replace the cups with paper cones that hold 20% less. Find the number n of paper cones that the machine can fill in 24 hours.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 14
Answer:
The number of symbols times the number of cups per symbol equals the total number of cups filled.
C = The number of cups filled
30 × c = 1440
c = 1440/30
c = 48

Question 45.
NUMBER SENSE
The area of the picture is 100 square inches. The length is 4 times the width. Find the length and width of the picture.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.3 15
Answer:
Given,
The area of the picture is 100 square inches.
The length is 4 times the width.
We know that,
Area of Rectangle = l × w
100 sq. in = 4w × w
100 = 4w²
w = √25 = 5
L = 4w
L = 4 × 5
L = 20

Lesson 6.4 Writing Equations in Two Variables

EXPLORATION 1

Writing Equations in Two Variables
Work with a partner. section 3.4 Exploration 1, you used a ratio table to create a graph for an airplane traveling 300 miles per hour. Below is one possible ratio table and graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 1
a. Describe the relationship between the two quantities. Which quantity depends on the other quantity?

Answer: By seeing the above graph we can say that miles depend on hours (time).

b. Use variables to write an equation that represents the relationship between the time and the distance. What can you do with this equation? Provide an example.
c. Suppose the airplane is 1500 miles away from its destination. Write an equation that represents the relationship between time and distance from the destination. How can you represent this relationship using a graph?
Answer: The relationship between distance and time is distance is inversely proportional to the time.
5x = 1500

An equation in two variables represents two quantities that change in relationship to one another. A solution of an equation in two variables is an ordered pair that makes the equation true.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 4

Try It

Tell whether the ordered pair is a solution of the equation.
Question 1.
y = 7x, (2, 21)
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given the equation y = 7x
y = 7 × 2
y = 14
21 ≠ 14
The ordered pair is not the solution.

Question 2.
y = 5x + 1; (3, 16)
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Given the equation y = 5x + 1
y = 5 × 3 + 1
y = 15 + 1
y = 16
The ordered pair is the solution.

Question 3.
The equation y = 10x + 25 represents the amount y(in dollars) in your savings account after x weeks. Identify the independent and dependent variables. How much is in your savings account after 8 weeks?
Answer:
Because the amount y remaining depends on the number x weeks.
Y is the dependent variable
X is the independent variable
y = 10x + 25
After 8 weeks x = 8
y = 10 (8) + 25
y = 80 + 25
y = 105

Graph the equation.
Question 4.
y = 3x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_2
When x = 0
y = 3(0) = 0
A(x,y) = (0,0)
When x = 1
y = 3(1) = 3
B(x,y) = (3, 1)
When x = 2
y = 3(2) = 6
C(x,y) = (6, 2)
When x = 3
y = 3(3) = 9
D(x,y) = (9, 3)

Question 5.
y = 4x + 1
Answer:
y = 4x + 1
When x = 0
y = 4(0) + 1
y = 1
When x = 1
y = 4(1) + 1
y = 5
When x = 2
y = 4(2) + 1
y = 9
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_3

Question 6.
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 2
Answer:
Given,
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 2
when x = 0
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)0 + 2
y = 2
when x = 1
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)1 + 2
y = 2\(\frac{1}{2}\)
y = 2.5
when x = 2
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)2 + 2
y = 1 + 2
y = 3
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_4

Question 7.
It costs $25 to rent a kayak plus $8 for each hour. Write and graph an equation that represents the total cost (in dollars) of renting the kayak.
Answer:
Given,
It costs $25 to rent a kayak plus $8 for each hour.
y = 8x + 25

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
WRITING
Describe the difference between independent variables and dependent variables.
Answer:
The independent variable is the cause. Its value is independent of other variables in your study. The dependent variable is the effect. Its value depends on changes in the independent variable.

IDENTIFYING SOLUTIONS Tell whether the ordered pair is a solution of the equation.
Question 9.
y = 3x + 8; (4, 20)
Answer:
Given the equation
y = 3x + 8
x = 4
y = 20
20 = 3(4) 8
20 = 12 + 8
20 = 20
The above equation is the solution.

Question 10.
y = 6x – 14; (7, 29)
Answer:
Given the equation
y = 6x – 14
29 = 6(7) – 14
29 = 42 – 14
29 ≠ 28
The above equation is not the solution.

Question 11.
PRECISION
Explain how to graph an equation in two variables.
Answer:

  • Find three points whose coordinates are solutions to the equation. Organize them in a table.
  • Plot the points in a rectangular coordinate system. Check that the points line up. …
  • Draw the line through the three points. Extend the line to fill the grid and put arrows on both ends of the line.

Question 12.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which one does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 5
Answer: n = 4n – 6 does not belong to the other three equations because we can take n has common and we can solve the equation.
Remaining there is not possible to solve the equation.

Question 13.
A sky lantern rises at an average speed of 8 feet per second. Write and graph an equation that represents the relationship between the time and the distance risen. How long does it take the lantern to rise 100 feet?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 6
Answer:
Given,
A sky lantern rises at an average speed of 8 feet per second.
the lantern to rise 100 feet = ?
8 feets = 1 sec
100 feets = 8 × x
x = 100/8
x = 12.5 sec

Question 14.
You and a friend start biking in opposite directions from the same point. You travel 108 feet every 8 seconds. Your friend travels 63 feet every 6 seconds. How far apart are you and your friend after 15 minutes?
Answer:
Given,
You and a friend start biking in opposite directions from the same point.
You travel 108 feet every 8 seconds. Your friend travels 63 feet every 6 seconds.
Your distance Y,
Y = 108ft/8 seconds × 60 sec/min × 15 min × 1mile/5280 ft
H is determined similarly
Total distance apart in miles = Y + H
You have only 36 minutes while he travels for all 40.

Writing Equations in Two Variables Homework & Practice 6.4

Review & Refresh
Solve the equation.
Question 1.
4x = 36
Answer: 9

Explanation:
Given the equation 4x = 36
x = 36/4
x = 9

Question 2.
\(\frac{x}{8}\) = 5
Answer: 40

Explanation:
Given the equation \(\frac{x}{8}\) = 5
x = 5 × 8
x = 40

Question 3.
\(\frac{4x}{3}\) = 8
Answer: 6

Explanation:
Given the equation \(\frac{4x}{3}\) = 8
4x = 8 × 3
4x = 24
x = 24/4
x = 6

Question 4.
\(\frac{2}{5}\)x = 6
Answer: 15

Explanation:
Given the equation \(\frac{2}{5}\)x = 6
2x = 5 × 6
2x = 30
x = 30/2
x = 15

Divide. Write the answer in simplest form.
Question 5.
3\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ \(\frac{4}{5}\)
Answer: 4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:
Convert any mixed numbers to fractions.
Then your initial equation becomes:
3\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{7}{2}\)
\(\frac{7}{2}\) × \(\frac{5}{4}\)
= \(\frac{35}{8}\)
Now convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{35}{8}\) = 4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Question 6.
7 ÷ 5\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
Convert any mixed numbers to fractions.
Then your initial equation becomes:
7 ÷ 5\(\frac{1}{4}\)
5\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{21}{4}\)
\(\frac{7}{1}\) ÷ \(\frac{21}{4}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{3}{11}\) ÷ 1\(\frac{1}{8}\)
Answer: \(\frac{8}{33}\)

Explanation:
Convert any mixed numbers to fractions.
Then your initial equation becomes:
\(\frac{3}{11}\) ÷ 1\(\frac{1}{8}\)
1\(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{8}\)
\(\frac{3}{11}\) ÷ \(\frac{9}{8}\) = \(\frac{8}{33}\)

Question 8.
7\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 1\(\frac{1}{3}\)
Answer: 5 \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
Convert any mixed numbers to fractions.
Then your initial equation becomes:
7\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{15}{2}\)
1\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\)
\(\frac{15}{2}\) ÷ \(\frac{4}{3}\) = \(\frac{45}{8}\)
Now convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{45}{8}\) = 5 \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 9.
Find the area of the carpet tile. Then find the area covered by120 carpet tiles.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 7
Answer:
a = 16 in
Area of the square = a × a
A = 16 in × 16 in
A = 256 sq. in
Now we have to find the area covered by120 carpet tiles.
120 × 256 = 30720

Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 8
Answer: 800

Explanation:
convert from meters to centimeters
1 m = 100 cm
8 m = 8 × 100 cm = 800 cm
Thus 8m = 800cm

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 9
Answer:
Explanation:
Convert from ounces to pounds
88 oz = 5.5 pounds

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 10
Answer: 709 mL

Explanation:
Convert from cups to milliliters
1 cup = 236.588 mL
3 cups = 709 mL

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 11
Answer: 9.321 mi

Explanation:
Convert from km to miles
1 km = 0.621 mi
15 km = 15 × 0.621 mi
15 km = 9.321 miles

Divide.
Question 14.
\(\sqrt [ 6 ]{ 34.8 } \)
Answer: 6th root of 34.8 is 1.806

Question 15.
\(\sqrt [ 4 ]{ 12.8 } \)
Answer: 4th root of 12.8 is 1.891

Question 16.
45.92 ÷ 2.8
Answer: 16.2

Explanation:
Multiplying two decimal numbers
45.92 ÷ 2.8 = 16.2

Question 17.
39.525 ÷ 4.25
Answer: 9.3

Explanation:
Multiplying two decimal numbers
39.525 ÷ 4.25 = 9.3

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

WRITING EQUATIONS Use variables to write an equation that represents the relationship between the time and the distance. (See Exploration 1, p. 265.)
Question 18.
An eagle flies 40 miles per hour.
Answer:
y = distance, x = time, rate = 40 miles per minute
distance = rate . time
y = 40 . x

Question 19.
A person runs 175 yards per minute.
Answer:
y = distance, x = time, rate = 175 yards per minute
distance = rate . time
so y = 175 . x

IDENTIFYING SOLUTIONS Tell whether the ordered pair is a solution of the equation.
Question 20.
y = 4x; (0, 4)
Answer:
x = 0
y = 4
4 = 4(0)
4 ≠ 0
The ordered pair is not a solution of the equation.

Question 21.
y = 3x; (2, 6)
Answer:
x = 2
y = 6
y = 3x
6 = 3(2)
6 = 6
The ordered pair is a solution of the equation.

Question 22.
y = 5x – 10; (3, 5)
Answer:
x = 3
y = 5
y = 5x – 10
5 = 5(3) – 10
5 = 15 – 10
5 = 5
The ordered pair is a solution of the equation.

Question 23.
y = x + 7; (1, 6)
Answer:
x = 1
y = 6
y = x + 7
6 = 1 + 7
6 ≠ 8
The ordered pair is not a solution of the equation.

Question 24.
y = x + 4; (2, 4)
Answer:
x = 2
y = 4
4 = 2 + 4
4 ≠ 6
The ordered pair is not a solution of the equation.

Question 25.
y = x – 5; (6, 11)
Answer:
x = 6
y = 11
11 = 6 – 5
11 ≠ 1
The ordered pair is not a solution of the equation.

Question 26.
y = 6x + 1; (2, 13)
Answer:
x = 2
y = 13
13 = 6(2) + 1
13 = 12 + 1
13 = 13
The ordered pair is a solution of the equation.

Question 27.
y = 7x + 2; (2, 0)
Answer:
x = 2
y = 0
0 = 7(2) + 2
0 = 14 + 2
0 ≠ 16
The ordered pair is not a solution of the equation.

Question 28.
y = 2x – 3; (4, 5)
Answer:
x = 4
y = 5
y = 2x – 3
5 = 2(4) – 3
5 = 8 – 3
5 = 5
The ordered pair is a solution of the equation.

Question 29.
y = 3x – 3; (1, 0)
Answer:
x = 1
y = 0
y = 3x – 3
0 = 3(1) – 3
0 = 3 – 3
0 = 0
The ordered pair is a solution of the equation.

Question 30.
7 = y – 5x; (4, 28)
Answer:
x = 4
y = 28
7 = y – 5x
7 = 28 – 5(4)
7 = 28 – 20
7 ≠ 8
The ordered pair is not a solution of the equation.

Question 31.
y + 3 = 6x; (3, 15)
Answer:
x = 3
y = 15
y + 3 = 6x
15 + 3 = 6(3)
18 = 18
The ordered pair is a solution of the equation.

Question 32.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend determines whether (5, 1) is a solution of y = 3x + 2. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 12
Answer:
x = 5
y = 1
y = 3x + 2
1 = 3(5) + 2
1 = 15 + 2
1 ≠ 17
Your friend is correct.

IDENTIFYING VARIABLES Identify the independent and dependent variables.
Question 33.
The equation A = 25w represents the area A (in square feet) of a rectangular dance floor with a width of w feet.
Answer:
The area of the dance floor (A) depends on the dance floor
A is the dependent variable
and w is the independent variable

Question 34.
The equation c= 0.09s represents the amount c(in dollars) of commission a salesperson receives for making a sale of s dollars.
Answer:
The commissioner a salesperson receives (c) depends on the sales the salesperson makes
c is dependent variable
s is independent variable

Question 35.
The equation t = 12p+ 12 represents the total cost t (in dollars) of a meal with a tip of p percent (in decimal form).
Answer:
The total cost of a meal depends on the tip of percent
the dependent variable is t
the independent variable is p

Question 36.
The equation h = 60 − 4m represents the height h(in inches) of the water in a tank m minutes after it starts to drain.
Answer:
The height of the water (h) depends on the minutes the tank has been draining
the dependent variable is h
the independent variable is m

OPEN-ENDED Complete the table by describing possible independent or dependent variables.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 24
Answer:
37. Independent variable:
The grade you receive on the test dependent variable
38. Independent variable:
The time you reach your destination dependent variable.
39. Dependent variable:
The amount of minutes used to talk independent variable.
40. Dependent variable:
The number of hours you work independent variable.

GRAPHING EQUATIONS Graph the equation.
Question 41.
y = 2x
Answer:
Given,
y = 2x
when x = 0
y = 2(0)
y = 0
when x = 1
y = 2(1)
y = 2
when x = 2
y = 2(2)
y = 4
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_5

Question 42.
y = 5x
Answer:
Given,
y = 5x
when x = 0
y = 5(0)
y = 0
when x = 1
y = 5(1)
y = 5
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_6

Question 43.
y = 6x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_7

Question 44.
y = x + 2
Answer:
Given
y = x + 2
when x = 0
y = 0 + 2
y = 2
(x, y) = (0,2)
when x = 1
y = 1 + 2
y = 3
(x, y) = (1,3)
when x = 2
y = 2 + 2
y = 4
(x, y) = (2,4)
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_8

Question 45.
y = x + 0.5
Answer:
Given,
y = x + 0.5
when x = 0
y = 0 + 0.5
y = 0.5
when x = 1
y = 1 + 0.5
y = 1.5
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_9

Question 46.
y = x + 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_10

Question 47.
y = x + 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_11

Question 48.
y = 3x + 2
Answer:
Given,
y = 3x + 2
when x = 0
y = 3(0) + 2
y = 0 + 2
y = 2
(x,y) = (0,2)
when x = 1
y = 3(1) + 2
y = 3 + 2
y = 5
(x,y) = (1,5)
when x = 2
y = 3(2) + 2
y = 6 + 2
y = 8
(x,y) = (2,8)
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_12

Question 49.
y = 2x + 4
Answer:
Given,
y = 2x + 4
when x = 0
y = 2x + 4
y = 2(0) + 4
y = 0 + 4
y = 4
when x = 1
y = 2x + 4
y = 2(1) + 4
y = 2 + 4
y = 6
when x = 2
y = 2x + 4
y = 2(2) + 4
y = 4 + 4
y = 8
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_13

Question 50.
y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x + 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_16

Question 51.
y = \(\frac{1}{4}\)x + 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_15

Question 52.
y = 2.5x + 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_14

Question 53.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A cheese pizza costs $5. Additional toppings cost $1.50 each. Write and graph an equation that represents the total cost (in dollars) of a pizza.
Answer:
Let x be the total cost of pizza
let x be the number of toppings
Total cost equals the cost of cheese pizza plus the cost of additional toppings times the number of toppings
The equation would be x = 5 + 1.50t
Table & Graph:
Number of toppings                 Total cost, x = 5 + 1.50 t                 Ordered pairs (t, x)

1                                                                6                                           (1, 6.50)
2                                                                9                                           (2, 8)
3                                                                9                                           (3, 9.50)
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_1

Question 54.
MODELING REAL LIFE
It costs $35 for a membership at a wholesale store. The monthly fee is $15. Write and graph an equation that represents the total cost (in dollars) of a membership.
Answer:
The equation is y = 35 + 25x
Table & Graph:
Number of months(x)                 Total cost, y = 35 + 25x                 Ordered pairs (t, x)

1                                                                60                                           (1, 60)
2                                                                85                                           (2, 85)
3                                                                110                                           (3, 110)

Question 55.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The maximum size of a text message is 160 characters. A space counts as one character.
a. Write an equation that represents the number of remaining (unused) characters in a text message as you type.
b. Identify the independent and dependent variables.
c. How many characters remain in the message shown?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 14
Answer:
x = the number of characters used
y = the number of characters unused
The equation would be y = 160 – x
The number of unused characters (y) depends on the number of used character (x)
The dependent variable is y
The Independent variable is x
Including space and punctuation, 15 characters were used
y = 160 – x
y = 160 – 15
y = 145

Question 56.
CHOOSE TOOLS
A car averages 60 miles per hour on a road trip. Use a graph to represent the relationship between the time and the distance traveled.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_17

PRECISION Write and graph an equation that represents the relationship between the time and the distance traveled.
Question 57.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 15
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Ch 6 Answer Key img_16

Question 58.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Ch 6 Answer Key img_17

Question 59.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 17
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Ch 6 Answer Key img_18

Question 60.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Ch 6 Answer Key img_19

IDENTIFYING SOLUTIONS Fill in the blank so that the ordered pair is a solution of the equation.
Question 61.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 19
Answer:
y = 8x + 3
x = 1
y = 8(1) + 3
y = 11
Thus the ordered pair (1, 11)

Question 62.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 20
Answer:
y = 12x + 2
y = 14
14 = 12x + 2
14 – 2 = 12x
12 = 12x
x = 1
Thus the ordered pair (1, 14)

Question 63.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 21
Answer:
y = 9x + 4
y = 22
22 = 9x + 4
22 – 4 = 9x
9x = 18
x = 2

Question 64.
DIG DEEPER!
Can the dependent variable cause a change in the independent variable? Explain.
Answer:
Just like an independent variable, a dependent variable is exactly what it sounds like. It is something that depends on other factors.

Question 65.
OPEN-ENDED
Write an equation that has (3, 4) as a solution.
Answer:
Standard form linear equation
ax + by = c
When a, b and c are constants
We want to make two equations that
i. have that form
ii. do not have all the same solutions and
iii. (3, 4) is a solution to both
a(3) + b(4) = c
3a + 4b = c

Question 66.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You walk 5 city blocks in 12 minutes. How many city blocks can you walk in 2 hours?
Answer:
Given,
You walk 5 city blocks in 12 minutes.
12 min = 5 city
2 hours = 120 minutes
120 minutes = 300 minutes

Question 67.
GEOMETRY
How fast should the ant walk to go around the rectangle in 4 minutes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 22
Answer:
First find the perimeter of the rectangle
P = 2L + 2W
P = 2(16) + 2(12)
P = 32 + 24 = 56 in
r = d/t
r = 56/4
r = 14 in/min

Question 68.
MODELING REAL LIFE
To estimate how far you are from lightning (in miles), count the number of seconds between a lightning flash and the thunder that follows. Then divide the number of seconds by 5. Use two different methods to find the number of seconds between a lightning flash and the thunder that follows when a storm is 2.4 miles away.
Answer:
If you count the number of seconds between the flash of lightning and the sound of thunder, and then divide by 5, you’ll get the distance in miles to the lightning: 5 seconds = 1 mile, 15 seconds = 3 miles, 0 seconds = very close.

Question 69.
REASONING
The graph represents the cost c (in dollars) of buying n tickets to a baseball game.
a. Should the points be connected with a line to show all the solutions? Explain your reasoning.
b. Write an equation that represents the graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations 6.4 23
Answer: y = 5x + 0.5

Equations Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
A tornado forms 12.25 miles from a weather station. It travels away from the station at an average speed of 440 yards per minute. How far from the station is the tornado after 30 minutes?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations cc 1
Understand the problem.
You know the initial distance between the tornado and the station, and the average speed the tornado is traveling away from the station. You are asked to determine how far the tornado is from the station after 30 minutes.

Make a plan.
First, convert the average speed to miles per minute. Then write an equation that represents the distance d (in miles) between the tornado and the station after t minutes. Use the equation to find the value of d when t = 30.

Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer:
440 × 30 = 13200

Question 2.
You buy 96 cans of soup to donate to a food bank. The store manager discounts the cost of each case for a total discount of $40. Use an equation in two variables to find the discount for each case of soup. What is the total cost when each can of soup originally costs $1.20?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations cc 2
Answer:
Given,
You buy 96 cans of soup to donate to a food bank.
The store manager discounts the cost of each case for a total discount of $40.
1 case = 12 cans
x = 96 cans
96 = 12 × x
x = 96/12
x = 8
8 cases
8 × $40 = $320
8 × $1.20 = $9.6

Question 3.
The diagram shows the initial amount raised by an organization for cancer research. A business agrees to donate $2 for every $5 donated by the community during an additional fundraising event. Write an equation that represents the total amount raised (in dollars). How much money does the community need to donate for the organization to reach its fundraising goal?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations cc 3

Answer: 13,000 – 8000 = 5,000

Performance Task

Planning the Climb
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM video called “Rock Climbing.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations cc 4

Equations Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations cr 1

Graphic Organizers

You can use an Example and Non-Example Chart to list examples and non-examples of a concept. Here is an Example and Non-Example Chart for the vocabulary term equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations cr 2

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations cr 3
1. inverse operations
2. solving equations using addition or subtraction
3. solving equations using multiplication or division
4. equations in two variables
5. independent variables
6. dependent variables

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 1

6.1 Writing Equations in One Variable (pp. 245–250)
Learning Target: Write equations in one variable and write equations that represent real-life problems.

Write the word sentence as an equation.
Question 1.
The product of a number m and 2 is 8.
Answer: m × 2 = 8

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation.
The phrase product indicates ‘×’
The equation would be m × 2 = 8

Question 2.
6 less than a number t is 7.
Answer: 6 – t = 7

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation.
The phrase less than indicates ‘-‘
The equation would be 6 – t = 7

Question 3.
A number m increased by 5 is 7.
Answer: m + 5 = 7

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation.
The phrase increased indicates ‘+’
The equation would be m + 5 = 7

Question 4.
8 is the quotient of a number g and 3.
Answer: g ÷ 3 = 8

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence in the equation.
The phrase quotient indicates ‘÷’
The equation would be g ÷ 3 = 8

Question 5.
The height of the 50-milliliter beaker is one-third the height of the 2000-milliliter beaker. Write an equation you can use to find the height (in centimeters) of the 2000-milliliter beaker.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 5
Answer: y = 3x

Explanation:
Given,
The height of the 50-milliliter beaker is one-third the height of the 2000-milliliter beaker.
Let the height of 2000 ml beaker = x
Given,
Height of 50 ml beaker, y = 1/3 of x
The equation to find the height of the 2000 ml beaker will be
y = 3x
which means the height of the 2000 ml beaker is three times the height of the 500 ml beaker.
Therefore, the equation is y = 3x.

Question 6.
There are 16 teams in a basketball tournament. After two rounds, 12 teams are eliminated. Write and solve an equation to find the number of teams remaining after two rounds.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 6
Answer:
Given,
There are 16 teams in a basketball tournament. After two rounds, 12 teams are eliminated.
x = 16
y = 12
Number of teams remaining after two rounds = z
z = x – y
z = 16 – 12
z = 4

Question 7.
Write an equation that has a solution of x = 8.
Answer: 4x = 32

Question 8.
Write a word sentence for the equation y + 3 = 5.
Answer: The sum of the numbers y and 3 is 5.

6.2 Solving Equations Using Addition or Subtraction (pp. 251–258)
Learning Target: Write and solve equations using addition or subtraction.

Question 9.
Tell whether x = 7 is a solution of x + 9 = 16.
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Given the equation
x + 9 = 16
x = 16 – 9
x = 7

Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 10.
x – 1 = 8
Answer: 9

Explanation:
Given the equation
x – 1 = 8
x = 8 + 1
x = 9

Question 11.
m + 7 = 11
Answer: 4

Explanation:
Given the equation
m + 7 = 11
m = 11 – 7
m = 4

Question 12.
21 = p – 12
Answer: 33

Explanation:
Given the equation
21 = p – 12
p – 12 = 21
p = 21 + 12
p = 33

Write the word sentence as an equation. Then solve the equation.
Question 13.
5 more than a number x is 9.
Answer: 5 + x = 9

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence as an equation
The phrase more than indicates ‘+’
Thus the equation would be 5 + x = 9

Question 14.
82 is the difference of a number b and 24.
Answer: b – 24 = 82

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence as an equation
The phrase difference indicates ‘-‘
Thus the equation would be b – 24 = 82

Question 15.
A stuntman is running on the roof of a train. His combined speed is the sum of the speed of the train and his running speed. The combined speed is 73 miles per hour, and his running speed is 15 miles per hour. Find the speed of the train.
Answer:
Given,
A stuntman is running on the roof of a train. His combined speed is the sum of the speed of the train and his running speed.
The combined speed is 73 miles per hour, and his running speed is 15 miles per hour.
Speed of the train = ?
Z =  x – y
z = 73 – 15
z = 58

Question 16.
Before swallowing a large rodent, a python weighs 152 pounds. After swallowing the rodent, the python weighs 164 pounds. Find the weight of the rodent.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 16
Answer:
Given that,
Before swallowing a large rodent, a python weighs 152 pounds.
After swallowing the rodent, the python weighs 164 pounds.
164 – 152 = 12 pounds

6.3 Solving Equations Using Multiplication or Division (pp. 259–264)
Learning Target: Write and solve equations using multiplication or division.

Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 17.
6 . q = 54
Answer: 9

Explanation:
Given the equation
6 . q = 54
q = 54/6
q = 9

Question 18.
k ÷ 3 = 21
Answer: 63

Explanation:
Given the equation
k ÷ 3 = 21
k = 21 × 3
k = 63

Question 19.
\(\frac{5}{7}\)a = 25
Answer: 35

Explanation:
Given the equation
\(\frac{5}{7}\)a = 25
5a = 7 × 25
a = 7 × 5
a = 35

Question 20.
The weight of an object on the Moon is about 16.5% of its weight on Earth. The weight of an astronaut on the Moon is 24.75 pounds. How much does the astronaut weigh on Earth?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 20
Answer: 150 pounds

Explanation:
Given,
The weight of an object on the Moon is about 16.5% of its weight on Earth.
The weight of an astronaut on the Moon is 24.75 pounds.
Let the astronaut weight on Earth be represented by x.
Based on the information given in the question, thus can be formed into an equation as:
16.5% of x = 24.75
16.5% × x = 24.75
16.5/100 × x = 24.75
0.165x = 24.75
x = 24.75/0.165
x = 150 pounds
The astronaut weighs 150 pounds on Earth.

Question 21.
Write an equation that can be solved using multiplication and has a solution of x = 12.
Answer: 3x = 36

Question 22.
At a farmers’ market, you buy 4 pounds of tomatoes and 2 pounds of sweet potatoes. You spend 80% of the money in your wallet. How much money is in your wallet before you pay?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 22
Answer: The money in your wallet before you pay is 20 dollars

Explanation:
Cost of 1 pound of tomato = 3 dollars
Therefore,
Cost of 4 pound of tomato = 4 x 3 = 12 dollars
Cost of 4 pound of tomato = 12 dollars
Cost of 1 pound of sweet potatoes = 2 dollars
Therefore,
Cost of 2 pound of sweet potatoes = 2 x 2 = 4 dollars
Cost of 2 pounds of sweet potatoes = 4 dollars
The combined cost spend at the market is:
cost spend at market = Cost of 4 pound of tomato + Cost of 2 pound of sweet potatoes
cost spend at market = 12 + 4 = 16 dollars
You spent 80% of the money in your wallet
Therefore, 80% of the money in your wallet is equal to 16 dollars
Let x be the money in your wallet
Then, we get
80 % of x = 16
80/100 × x = 16
0.8 x = 16
x = 16/0.8
x = 20
Thus money in your wallet before you pay is $20.

6.4 Writing Equations in Two Variables (pp. 265-272)
Learning Target: Write equations in two variables and analyze the relationship between the two quantities.

Tell whether the ordered pair is a solution of the equation.
Question 23.
y = 3x + 1; (2, 7)
Answer:
Given the equation
x = 2
y = 7
7 = 3(2) + 1
7 = 6 + 1
7 = 7
Yes, it is the solution of the equation.

Question 24.
y = 7x – 4; (4, 22)
Answer:
Given the equation
x = 4
y = 22
22 = 7(4) – 4
22 = 28 – 4
22 ≠ 24
No, it is not the solution of the equation.

Question 25.
The equation E = 360m represents the kinetic energy E (in joules) of a roller-coaster car with a mass of m kilograms. Identify the independent and dependent variables.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 25
Answer: E is the dependent variable
m is the independent variable

Graph the equation.
Question 26.
y = x + 1
Answer:
Given,
y = x + 1
when x = 0
y = 0 + 1
y = 1
(x, y)  = (0, 1)
when x = 1
y = 1 + 1
y = 2
(x, y)  = (1, 2)
when x = 2
y = 2 + 1
y = 3
(x, y)  = (2, 3)
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_19

Question 27.
y = 7x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_20

Question 28.
y = 4x + 3
Answer:

Question 29.
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 5
Answer:
Given,
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 5
when x = 0
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)0+ 5
y = 5
when x = 0
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)1+ 5
y = 5\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations img_21

Question 30.
A taxi ride costs $3 plus $2.50 per mile. Write and graph an equation that represents the total cost (in dollars) of a taxi ride. What is the total cost of a five-mile taxi ride?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 30
Answer:
Given,
A taxi ride costs $3 plus $2.50 per mile.
5 × 2.50 = $25.50

Question 31.
Write and graph an equation that represents the total cost (in dollars) of renting the bounce house. How much does it cost to rent the bounce house for 6 hours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 6 Equations crr 31
Answer:
C= $25 x 6 = $150
25×6=150+100=250

Question 32.
A car averages 50 miles per hour on a trip. Write and graph an equation that represents the relationship between the time and the distance traveled. How long does it take the car to travel 525 miles?
Answer:
Given,
A car averages 50 miles per hour on a trip.
50 miles – 1 hour
525 miles – x
50 × x = 525
x = 525/50
x = 10.50 hours
Thus it takes 10.5 hours to travel 525 miles.

Equations Practice Test

Question 1.
Write “7 times a number is 84” as an equation.
Answer: 7 × n = 84

Explanation:
We have to write the word sentence into the equation
The phrase times indicates ‘×’
Thus the equation would be 7 × n = 84

Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 2.
15 = 7 + b
Answer: b = 8

Explanation:
Given,
15 = 7 + b
b = 15 – 7
b = 8

Question 3.
v – 6 = 16
Answer: v = 22

Explanation:
Given,
v – 6 = 16
v = 16 + 6
v = 22

Question 4.
5x = 70
Answer: x = 14

Explanation:
Given,
5x = 70
x = 70/5
x = 14

Question 5.
\(\frac{6m}{7}\) = 30
Answer:
Given,
\(\frac{6m}{7}\) = 30
6m = 30 × 7
6m = 210
m = 210 ÷ 6
m = 35

Question 6.
Tell whether (3, 27) is a solution of y = 9x
Answer: solution

Explanation:
Given,
y = 9x
x = 3
y = 27
27 = 9(3)
27 = 27
Thus the ordered pair is a solution.

Question 7.
Tell whether (8, 36) is a solution of y = 4x + 2.
Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Given,
y = 4x + 2.
x = 8
y = 36
36 = 4(8) + 2
36 = 32 + 2
36 ≠ 34

Question 8.
The drawbridge shown consists of two identical sections that open to allow boats to pass. Write s an equation you can use to find the length (in feet) of each section of the drawbridge.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations pt 8
Answer: 2s = 366ft

Question 9.
Each ticket to a school dance is $4. The total amount collected in ticket sales is $332. Find the number of students attending the dance.
Answer:
Given,
Each ticket to a school dance is $4.
The total amount collected in ticket sales is $332.
The equation would be
4s = 332
s = 83

Question 10.
A soccer team sells T-shirts for a fundraiser. The company that makes the T-shirts charges $10 per shirt plus a $20 shipping fee per order.
a. Write and graph an equation that represents the total cost (in dollars) of ordering the shirts.

Answer:
For this case, the first thing we must do is define variables:
c = total cost
x = x number of shirts.
The equation that adapts to the problem is:
c (x) = 10x + 20

b. Choose an ordered pair that lies on your graph in part(a). Interpret it in the context of the problem.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations pt 10
Answer:
Let’s choose the next ordered pair:
(x, c (x)) = (0, 20)
We verify that it is in the graph:
c (20) = 10 (0) + 20
c (20) = 20 (yes, it belongs to the graph).
In the context of the problem, this point means that the cost per shipment is $ 20

Question 11.
You hand in 2 homework pages to your teacher. Your teacher now has 32 homework pages to grade. Find the number of homework pages that your teacher originally had to grade.
Answer:
Given that,
You hand in 2 homework pages to your teacher.
Your teacher now has 32 homework pages to grade.
32 – 2 = 30

Question 12.
Write an equation that represents the total cost (in dollars) of the meal shown with a tip that is a percent of the check total. What is the total cost of the meal when the tip is 15%?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations pt 12
Answer: $41.40

Equations Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations cp 1
Question 1.
You buy roses at a flower shop for $3 each. How many roses can you buy with $27?
A. 9
B. 10
C. 24
D. 81
Answer: 9

Explanation:
given,
You buy roses at a flower shop for $3 each.
27/3 = 9
Thus you can buy 9 roses with $27.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
You are making identical fruit baskets using 16 apples, 24 pears, and 32 bananas. What is the greatest number of baskets you can make using all of the fruit?
F. 2
G. 4
H. 8
I. 16
Answer: 8

Explanation:
Given,
You are making identical fruit baskets using 16 apples, 24 pears, and 32 bananas.
8 baskets
MULTIPLES OF 16, 24, and, 32
16: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
24: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24
32: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32

Question 3.
Which equation represents the word sentence?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations cp 3
A. 18 – 5 = 9 – y
B. 18 + 5 = 9 – y
C. 18 + 5 = y – 9
D. 18 – 5 = y – 9
Answer: 18 + 5 = 9 – y

Explanation:
The suitable equation for the above word sentence is
18 + 5 = 9 – y
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
The tape diagram shows the ratio of tickets sold by you and your friend. How many more tickets did you sell than your friend?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations cp 4
F. 6
G. 12
H. 18
I. 30
Answer: 6

Explanation:
Each rectangle = 6
6 × 5 = 30
6 × 2 = 12
30 + 12 = 42
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 5.
What is the value of x that makes the equation true?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations cp 5
59 + x = 112
Answer:
Given the equation
59 + x = 112
x = 112 – 59
x = 53
Thus the value of x that makes the equation true is 53

Question 6.
The steps your friend took to divide two mixed numbers are shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations cp 6
What should your friend change in order to divide the two mixed numbers correctly?
A. Find a common denominator of 5 and 2.
B. Multiply by the reciprocal of \(\frac{18}{5}\).
C. Multiply by the reciprocal of \(\frac{3}{2}\).
D. Rename 3\(\frac{3}{5}\) as 2\(\frac{8}{5}\).
Answer:  Multiply by the reciprocal of \(\frac{3}{2}\).

Question 7.
A company ordering parts receives a charge of $25 for shipping and handling plus cp$20 per part. Which equation represents the cost (in dollars) of ordering parts?
F. c = 25 + 20p
G. c = 20 + 25p
H. p = 25 + 20c
I. p = 20 + 25c
Answer: c = 25 + 20p

Question 8.
Which property is illustrated by the statement?
5(a + 6) = 5(a) + 5(6)
A. Associative Property of Multiplication
B. Commutative Property of Multiplication
C. Commutative Property of Addition
D. Distributive Property
Answer: Distributive Property

Question 9.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations cp 5
46.8 ÷ 0.156
Answer:
Divide the two decimal numbers
we get the answer
300

Question 10.
In the mural below, the squares that are painted red are marked with the letter R.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations cp 10
What percent of the mural is painted red?
F. 24%
G. 25%
H. 48%
I. 50%
Answer: 48%

Question 11.
Which expression is equivalent to 28x + 70?
A. 14 (2x + 5)
B. 14 (5x + 2)
C. 2 (14x + 5)
D. 14 (7x)
Answer: 14 (2x + 5)

Explanation:
28x + 70
Taking 14 as the common factor
14(2x + 5)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 12.
What is the first step in evaluating the expression?
3 . (5 + 2)2 ÷ 7
F. Multiply 3 and 5.
G. Add 5 and 2
H. Evaluate 52.
I. Evaluate 22.
Answer: G. Add 5 and 2

Question 13.
Jeff wants to save $4000 to buy a used car. He has already saved $850. He plans to save an additional $150 each week.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 6 Equations cp 13
Part A Write and solve an equation to represent the number of weeks remaining until he can afford the car.
Jeff saves $150 per week by saving \(\frac{3}{4}\) of what he earns at his job each week.
He works 20 hours per week.
Part B Write an equation to represent the amount per hour that Jeff must earn to save $150 per week. Explain your reasoning.
Part C What is the amount per hour that Jeff must earn? Show your work and explain your reasoning.
Answer: 21 weeks

Explanation:
150 × 21 = 3150
3150 + 850 = 4000

Conclusion:

We have tried a lot to prepare the solutions in a simple manner. Hope you are satisfied with the Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Equations. If you have any doubts regarding the problems don’t hesitate to post the comments in the below-mentioned comment box. All the Best!!!

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane

Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane

 

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Integers

  • Lesson 8.1 Integers
  • Integers Homework & Practice 8.1

Lesson: 2 Comparing and Ordering Integers

  • Lesson 8.2 Comparing and Ordering Integers
  • Comparing and Ordering Integers Homework & Practice 8.2

Lesson: 3 Rational Numbers

  • Lesson 8.3 Rational Numbers
  • Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 8.3

Lesson: 4 Absolute Value

  • Lesson 8.4 Absolute Value
  • Absolute Value Homework & Practice 8.4

Lesson: 5 The Coordinate Plane

  • Lesson 8.5 The Coordinate Plane
  • The Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 8.5

Lesson: 6 Polygons in the Coordinate Plane

  • Lesson 8.6 Polygons in the Coordinate Plane
  • Polygons in the Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 8.6

Lesson: 7 Writing and Graphing Inequalities

  • Lesson 8.7 Writing and Graphing Inequalities
  • Writing and Graphing Inequalities Homework & Practice 8.7

Lesson: 8 Solving Inequalities

  • Lesson 8.8 Solving Inequalities
  • Solving Inequalities Homework & Practice 8.8

Chapter: 8 – Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane

  • Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Connecting Concepts
  • Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Chapter Review
  • Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Practice Test
  • Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Cumulative Practice

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Designing a CubeSat
A CubeSat is a type of miniature satellite that is used for space research. Each CubeSat has the dimensions shown and a mass of no more than 1.33 kilograms.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 1
Watch the STEAM Video “Designing a CubeSat.” Then answer the following questions.
1. For what fields of study do you think CubeSats can be used?
2. Tony says g-forces are a measure of how heavy you feel.  e table shows the g-forces on a CubeSat at three points in time. Why can g-forces be as high as 6 during a rocket launch and as low as 0 in space?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 2
3. What would happen to a CubeSatthatcannot withstand a g-force of 6? a g-force of 0?

Performance Task

Launching a CubeSat
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given information about three different types of Cubesats that you can purchase.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 3
You will determine which of the three CubeSats is the best option for a mission. Why might g-force, pressure, and temperature be important considerations for making your decision?

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Getting Ready for Chapter

Chapter Exploration
Question 1.
Work with a partner. Plot and connect the points to make a picture.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Exploration-Question-1

Question 2.
Create your own “dot-to-dot” picture. Use at least 20 points.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Exploration-Question-2

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
negative numbers
opposites
inequality
quadrants

Lesson 8.1 Integers

Exploration 1

Reading and Describing Temperatures
Work with a partner. The thermometers show the temperatures in four cities.
Honolulu, Hawaii
Anchorage, Alaska
Death Valley, California
Seattle, Washington
a. Match each temperature with its most appropriate location.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 1
Answer:
Honolulu, Hawaii  – 110 degrees Fahrenheit
Anchorage, Alaska – 0 degrees Fahrenheit
Death Valley, California – 80 degrees Fahrenheit
Seattle, Washington – 40 degrees Fahrenheit

b. What do all of the temperatures have in common?
Answer :
Measuring in degrees fahrenheit and Readings

c. What does it mean for a temperature to be below zero? Provide an example. Can you think of any other situations in which numbers may be less than zero? Maintain OversightHow does this exploration help you represent numbers less than 0?
Answer:
Temperature to be below zero means cold weather starts .
Example:
When used by weather forecasters in the U.S., it means “below 0°F”. ( It essentially means, “It’s gonna be cold; bring your mittens and a warm hat.”

d. The thermometers show temperatures on a vertical number line. How else can you represent numbers less than zero? Provide an example.
Answer:

In general, we can represent a change in temperature with a positive number if it increases and a negative number if it decreases. Then we can find the final temperature by adding the initial temperature and the change.

Positive numbers are greater than 0. They can be written with or without a positive sign (+).
1 5 20 10,000

Negative numbers are less than 0. They are written with a negative sign (−).
-1 -5 -20 -10,000

Two numbers that are the same distance from 0 on a number line, but on opposite sides of 0, are called opposites. The opposite of 0 is 0.

Try It

Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 1.
A hiker climbs 900 feet up a mountain.
Answer:
+900, 900 feet
Explaination :
Positive numbers are greater than 0. They can be written with or without a positive sign (+).

Question 2.
You have a debt of $24.
Answer:
-24
Explaination :
Debt is an amount of money borrowed by one party from another.
Debt of $24 is represented as -24.

Question 3.
A student loses 5 points for not showing work on a quiz.
Answer:
-5
Explaination :
lose is a another meaning of negative.
Student loses 5 points is indicated as -5.

Question 4.
A savings account earns $10.
Answer:
+10
Explaination :
Earns is another vocabulary to positive.
earns $10 is represented as +10 or 10.

Graph the integer and its opposite.
Question 5.
6
Answer:
(6, -6)
Explanation:
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 6.
-4
Answer:
(4, -4)
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 7.
-12
Answer:
(12, -12)
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 8.
1
Answer:
(1, -1)
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

WRITING INTEGERS Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 9.
A baseball is thrown at a speed of 78 miles per hour.
Answer:
+78
Explanation :
A baseball is thrown at a speed of 78 miles per hour. So, thrown indicated +ve
+78 or 78.

Question 10.
A submarine is 3750 feet below sea level.
Answer:
-3750
Explanation :
submarine is 3750 feet below sea level. so, below indicates -ve
-3750

GRAPHING INTEGERS Graph the integer and its opposite.
Question 11.
8
Answer:
(8, -8)
Explaination :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 12.
– 7
Answer:
(7 -7)
Explaination :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 13.
11
Answer:
(11, -11)
Explaination :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 14.
VOCABULARY
Which of the following numbers are integers?
18, 4.1, -9, \(\frac{1}{6}\) , 1.75, 22
Answer:
An integer is defined as a number that can be written without a fractional component.

18, -9, 22

Question 15.
VOCABULARY
List three words or phrases used in real life that indicate negative integers.
Answer:

minus , below , down , debt, low.

Question 16.
WRITING
Describe the opposite of a positive integer, the opposite of a negative integer, and the opposite of zero.
Answer:
Opposite of positive integer is negative integer.
A negative integer is a whole number that has value less than zero. Negative integer are normally whole numbers, for example, -3, -5, -8, -10 etc
Opposite of negative integer is positive integer.
The positive integer are the numbers 1, 2, 3, … , sometimes called the counting numbers or natural numbers, for example , +1, 2 , +3 ……..
Opposite of zero
We do not consider zero to be a positive or negative number. So, zero (0) opposite is zero(0).

Question 17.
The world record for scuba diving is 332 meters below sea level. Write an integer that represents a new world record. Explain.
Answer:
1090 ft is represented as the new world record in scuba diving.
Explanation:
converting m to ft
1 m – 3.2808 ft
332 m – 1090 ft.

Question 18.
The indoor and outdoor temperatures are shown. The freezing point of water is 32°F. Write integers that represent how each temperature must change to reach the freezing point of water. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 4
Answer:
Given:
Freezing point of water = 32°F
From the pic the outdoor temperature = 25°F
To reach the freezing point of water outdoor we need to increase the temperature outdoor temperature.
32°F -25°F = 7°F
Outdoor temperature should be increased by 7°F.
From the pic indoor temperature= 68°F
Similarly, to reach the freezing point of water indoor we need to decrease the indoor temperature.
68°F -32°F = 36°F
Indoor temperature should be reduced by 36°F.

Question 19.
An ion is an atom that has a positive or negative electric charge. When an ion has more protons than electrons, it has a positive charge. When an ion has fewer protons than electrons, it has a negative charge. Explain what it means for an atom to have an electric charge of zero.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 5
Answer:
When an atom has an equal number of electrons and protons, it has an equal number of negative electric charges (the electrons) and positive electric charges (the protons). The total electric charge of the atom is therefore zero and the atom is said to be neutral.

Integers Homework & Practice 8.1

Review & Refresh

Find the volume of the prism.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 6
Answer:
Given:
Length of cuboid : 4/5 mm
Width of the cuboid: 1/2 mm
Height of the cuboid: 3/8 mm
Volume of the cuboid = l*w*h
\(\frac{4}{5}\)*\(\frac{1}{2}\)*\(\frac{3}{8}\)= (4x1x3)/(5x2x8)=3/20
\(\frac{3}{20}\) cubic mm.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 7
Answer:
Given:
Length of cuboid : 4/5 yd
Width of the cuboid: 5/8 yd
Height of the cuboid: 3/4 yd
Volume of the cuboid = l*w*h
\(\frac{4}{5}\)*\(\frac{5}{8}\)*\(\frac{3}{4}\)= (4x5x3)/(5x8x4)=3/8
\(\frac{3}{8}\) cubic yd.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 8
Answer:
Given:
Length of cuboid : 15/4 ft
Width of the cuboid: 4/3 ft
Height of the cuboid: 8/5 ft
Volume of the cuboid = l*w*h
\(\frac{15}{4}\)*\(\frac{4}{3}\)*\(\frac{8}{5}\)= (15x4x8)/(4x3x5)=8
\(\frac{8}{1}\) cubic ft.

Factor the expression using the GCF.
Question 4.
4m + 32
Answer:
When we find all the factors of two or more numbers, and some factors are the same (“common”), then the largest of those common factors is the Greatest Common Factor. Abbreviated “GCF”.
4m + 32
divide the equation by 4
\(\frac{4m}{4}\) + \(\frac{32}{4}\)
\(\frac{4(m + 8)}{1}\)
4 is the greatest common factor.

Question 5.
18z – 22
Answer:
18z – 22
Take 2 common we get,
2 ( 9z – 11)
2 is the greatest common factor.
Explanation:
When we find all the factors of two or more numbers, and some factors are the same (“common”), then the largest of those common factors is the Greatest Common Factor. Abbreviated “GCF”.

Question 6.
38x + 80
Answer:
38x + 80
Take 2 common we get,
2 ( 19z + 40)
no more possible to simplify so
2 is the greatest common factor.
Explanation:
When we find all the factors of two or more numbers, and some factors are the same (“common”), then the largest of those common factors is the Greatest Common Factor. Abbreviated “GCF”.

Question 7.
42n – 27s
Answer:
42n – 27s
Take 3 common we get,
3 (14n – 9s)
no more possible to simplify so
3 is the greatest common factor.
Explanation:
When we find all the factors of two or more numbers, and some factors are the same (“common”), then the largest of those common factors is the Greatest Common Factor. Abbreviated “GCF”.

Question 8.
The height of a statue is 276 inches. What is the height of the statue in meters? Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.
A. 1.09 m
B. 7.01 m
C. 108.66 m
D. 701.04 m
Answer:
1 inch = 0.025 m
Height of a statue = 276 inches
convert it into meters =276 inch x 0.025 = 7.01 m
So,
B is the answer.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

OPEN-ENDED Describe a situation that can be represented by the integer. (See Exploration 1, p. 345.)
Question 9.
– 6
Answer:
The Temperature is decreased by 6 °F

Question 10.
12
Answer:
Earned bonus of 12 points

Question 11.
– 45
Answer:
Had lose of 45 coins .

WRITING INTEGERS Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 12.
A football team loses 3 yards.
Answer:
-3
As loses represents negative

Question 13.
The temperature is 6 degrees below zero.
Answer:
below zero indicates negative
-6 degrees

Question 14.
You earn $15 raking leaves.
Answer:
Earn represents positive
+15$

Question 15.
A person climbs 600 feet up a mountain.
Answer:
+600 feet as its up a mountain.

Question 16.
You withdraw$42 from an account.
Answer:
-42$ withdraw from my account.

Question 17.
An airplane climbs to 37,500 feet.
Answer:
An airplane climbs to +37,500 feet

Question 18.
The temperature rises 17 degrees.
Answer:
Temperature rises indicates increase +17 degrees

Question 19.
You lose 56 points in a video game.
Answer:
I lose -56 points from my video game.

Question 20.
A ball falls 350 centimeters.
Answer:
A ball falls -350 centimeters

Question 21.
You receive 5 bonus points in class.
Answer:
I receive +5 points in class.

Question 22.
MODELING REAL LIFE
On December 17, 1903, the Wright brothers accomplished the first powered flight. The plane traveled a distance of 120 feet. Write this distance as an integer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 9
Answer:
Distance Traveled by the plane = 120 feet.
It means +120 .

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A stock market gains 83 points. The next day, the stock market loses 47 points. Write each amount as an integer.
Answer:
+83 = Stock Market gains 83 points.
– 47 = The next day the stock market loses 47 points.

GRAPHING INTEGERS
Graph the integer and its opposite.
Question 24.
– 5
Answer:
The opposite of -5 = +5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-GRAPHING-INTEGERS-Question-24

Question 25.
– 8
Answer:
The opposite of -8 = +8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-25

Question 26.
14
Answer:
The opposite of 14 = -14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-26

Question 27.
9
Answer:
The opposite of 9 = -9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-27

Question 28.
– 14
Answer:
The opposite of -14 = +14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-28

Question 29.
20
Answer:
The opposite of +20 = -20
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-29

Question 30.
– 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-30

Question 31.
18
Answer:
The opposite of 18 is -18
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-31

Question 32.
30
Answer:
The opposite of 30 is – 30
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-32

Question 33.
– 150
Answer:
The opposite of -150 is 150
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-33
Question 34.
– 32
Answer:
The opposite of – 32 is 32
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-34

Question 35.
400
Answer:
The opposite of 400 is -400
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.1-Graphing-Integers-Question-35

Question 36.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend describes the positive integers. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 10
Answer:
No
Explanation:
The natural numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ……… are called positive integers.
Positive numbers are represented to the right of zero on the number line. Positive numbers are greater than negative numbers as well a zero.
Because zero is neither positive nor negative . Zero is a neutral number.

USING A NUMBER LINE Identify the integer represented by the point on the number line.
Question 37.
A
Answer:
The point A is marked at 5

Question 38.
B
Answer:
The point B is marked at -8

Question 39.
C
Answer:
The point C is marked at -15

Question 40.
D
Answer:
The point D is marked at 18

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 11

Question 41.
DIG DEEPER!
Low tide, represented by the integer −1, is 1 foot below the average water level. High tide is 5 feet higher than low tide.
a. What does 0 represent in this situation?
b. Write an integer that represents the average water level relative to high tide.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 12
Answer a :
The Low Tide = -1
Average water level = 0
Explanation:
As the low tide is just below average water level . When average water level =0
Then low tide can be – 1
Answer b :
High Tide = 4
Explanation:
High tide is 5 feet higher than low tide so we get
High Tide = -1 + 5 = 4
An integer that represents the average water level relative to high tide = 4

Question 42.
REPEATED REASONING
Consider an integer n.
a. Is the opposite of n always less than 0? Explain your reasoning.
b. What can you conclude about the opposite of the opposite of n? Justify your answer.
c. Describe the meaning of −[−(−n)]. What is it equal to?
Answer a:
Only if n is a positive integer
Explanation:
The integer n is a positive integer then  only the negative integer of n is always less than 0 Positive numbers are represented to the right of zero on the number line and Negative numbers are represented to the left of zero on the number line.

Answer b :
n is a integer . opposite of n is -n and opposite of (opposite of n) = opposite of (-n)= +n

Answer c :
– x – = +
– x + = –
−[−(−n)]= means minus of minus of minus n
−[−(−n)]= – (+ n)= -n

Question 43.
In a game of tug-of-war, a team wins by pulling the flag over its goal line. The flag begins at0. During a game, the flag moves 8 feet to the right,12 feet to the left, and 13 feet back to the right.Did a team win? Explain. If not, what does each team need to do in order to win?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.1 13
Answer:
Flag begins at 0
After First pull:
The flag moves 8 feet to the right means = 0 + 8 =8
After Second pull:
The flag is at 8 now then it moves 12 feet to the left .
Now the flag is at = 8 – 12 = -4
After Third pull:
Now the flag is at -4 now then it moves to 13 feet to the right
Then the flag is at = -4 + 13 = 9
Now the flag is at 9 that means to win the flag should cross goal line that means + 10
No team wins
To win the right side team the flag should move 1 or more to the right
To win the left side team the flag should move 11 or more to the left.

Lesson 8.2 Comparing and Ordering Integers

EXPLORATION 1

Seconds to Liftoff
Work with a partner. You are listening to a command center before the liftoff of a rocket. You hear the following:
“T minus 10 seconds . . . go for main engine start . . . T minus 9 . . . 8 . . . 7 . . . 6 . . . 5 . . . 4 . . . 3 . . . 2 . . . 1 . . . we have liftoff.”
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 1
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 2
a. Represent these events on a number line.
Answer:
Rocket clears launchpad tower = +6 = A Event
Launch Verification = -16 = B Event
Main Engine Start = -3 = C Event
Rocket Topping sequence complete = -110 = D Event
Launch control system enabled = -90 = E Event
Boosters ignite = 0 = F Event
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.2-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Exploration-1
b. List the events in the order they occurred. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
1 – Rocket Topping sequence complete = -110 = D Event
2 – Launch control system enabled = -90 = E Event
3 – Launch Verification = -16 = B Event
4 – Main Engine Start = -3 = C Event
5 – Boosters ignite = 0 = F Event
6 – Rocket clears launchpad tower = +16 = A Event
As per the above number line the events which take place are ordered from left side to right side

c. Extend the number line in part(a) to show events in an astronaut’s day. Include at least five events before liftoff and at least five events after liftoff. Use the Internet or another reference source to gather information.
Answer:
1 – Rocket Topping sequence complete = -110 = D Event
2 – Launch control system enabled = -90 = E Event
3 – Launch Verification = -16 = B Event
4 – Main Engine Start = -3 = C Event
5 – Boosters ignite = 0 = F Event
6 – Rocket clears launchpad tower = +6 = A Event
7- Stage 1 Burnout = +16 = G Event
8 – Fairing Jettison = +25 = H Event
9 – Stage 1 Separation = + 30 = I Event
10 – Stage 2 Ignition = +35 = J Event
11 – Transfer to the launch pad = – 120 = K Event
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.2-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Exploration-1-C

Recall that on a horizontal number line, numbers to the left are less than numbers to the right. Numbers to the right are greater than numbers to the left. On a vertical number line, numbers below are less than numbers above. Numbers above are greater than numbers below.

Try It

Copy and Complete the statement using < or >.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 3
Answer:
0 > -4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller. Think what the number represents. Think what the value is.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 4
Answer:
-5 < 5
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 5
Answer:
-8 < -7
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller. Think what the number represents. Think what the value is.

Order the integers from least to greatest.
Question 4.
-2, -3, 3, 1, -1
Answer:
-3, -2, -1, 1, 3

Question 5.
4, -7, -8, 6, 1
Answer:
-8, -7, 1, 4, 6

Question 6.
In Example 3, what is the least possible integer value of the number?
Answer:

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
ORDERING INTEGERS Order the integers from least to greatest.
Question 7.
6, – 4, – 1, 3, 5
Answer:
-4, -1,  3, 5, 6

Question 8.
– 7, – 9, 0, 8, – 2
Answer:
-9, -7, -2, 0, 8

Question 9.
WRITING
Explain how to determine which of two integers is greater.
Answer:

We are used to big positive numbers meaning a big value – the bigger the number, the more, or higher, or longer, or expensive, or whatever the number represents.

With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller. Think what the number represents and what the value is.

Question 10.
REASONING
The positions of four fish are shown.
a. Use red, blue, yellow, and green dots to graph the positions of the fish on a horizontal number line and a vertical number line.
b. Explain how to use the number lines from part(a) to order the positions from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 6.1
Answer a :
The position of red fish = -4
The position of Yellow fish = -6
The position of green fish = 0
The position of Blue fish = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Self-Assessment-for-Concepts-Skills-Question -10-1a
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Self-Assessment-for-Concepts-Skills-Question -10-2a
Answer b:
Least to greatest numbers are
-6, -4, 0, 8
Explanation:
From the above horizontal number line we notice that the numbers from left to right of number line  represent least to greatest numbers.

Question 11.
NUMBER SENSE
a and bare negative integers. Compare a and b. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 6
Answer:

b > a
Explanation:
we notice that the numbers from left to right of number line  represent least to greatest numbers.The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller. Think what the number represents. Think what the value is..

Question 12.
The freezing temperature of nitrogen is −210°C, and the freezing temperature of oxygen is −219°C. A container of nitrogen and a container of oxygen are both cooled to −215°C. Do the contents of each container freeze? Explain.
Answer:
The temperature of liquid nitrogen can readily be reduced to its freezing point 63 K (−210 °C; −346 °F) by placing it in a vacuum chamber pumped by a vacuum pump
The temperature at which a substance freezes is called the freezing point. The freezing point of oxygen is -219°C . This means that they need to be cooled to lower temperatures to make them freeze.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
The diagram shows the daily high temperatures during a school week. Was a positive Celsius temperature recorded on Tuesday? on Friday? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 7
Answer:
No
Explanation:
The natural numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ……… are called positive integers.
Positive numbers are represented to the right of zero on the number line. Positive numbers are greater than negative numbers as well a zero.
Because zero is neither positive nor negative . Zero is a neutral number.
Therefore positive Celsius temperature recorded on Monday and Friday .

Comparing and Ordering Integers Homework & Practice 8.2

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-34-a.2

Review & Refresh

Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 1.
You walk up 83 stairs.
Answer:
up indicates + .so it is + 83

Question 2.
A whale is 17 yards below sea level.
Answer:
Below indicates – . So it is -17

Question 3.
An organization receives a $75 donation.
Answer:
Receives indicates +. So it is +$75

Question 4.
A rock falls 250 feet off a cliff.
Answer:
Falls indicates – . So it is -250

Question 5.
What is the area of the trapezoid?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 8
A. 6.3 ft2
B. 44.1 ft2
C. 50.4 ft2
D. 88.2 ft2
Answer:
Height of Trapezoid = 4.2ft
Base 1 of Trapezoid = 12ft
Base 2 of Trapezoid = 9 ft
Area of Trapezoid = half-height × (base1 + base2) = \(\frac{4.2}{2}\) (12 + 9)
=2.1 × 21 = 44.1 ft2

Divide. Write the answer in simplest form.
Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{5} \div \frac{1}{9}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{5}\)÷latex]\frac{9}{1}[/latex]= 9/5=1.8

Question 7.
\(\frac{2}{5} \div \frac{1}{3}\)
Answer:
(2/5) /(1/3) = (2×3) /5 = 6/5=1.2

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{4}\)× \(\frac{1}{3}\)=\(\frac{1}{12}\) = 0.083

Question 9.
\(\frac{4}{7}\) ÷ 8
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{7}\) × \(\frac{1}{8}\)=\(\frac{1}{14}\) =0.071

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

OPEN-ENDED Name an event that could occur at the given time (in seconds) in Exploration 1. Describe when the event occurs in the order of events from the exploration. (See Exploration 1, p. 351.)

Question 10.
– 300
Answer:

Question 11.
– 150
Answer:

Question 12.
10
Answer:

COMPARING INTEGERS Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 9
Answer:
3 > 0
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 10
Answer:
-2 < 0
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 11
Answer:
6 > -6
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 12
Answer:
3 > -4
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 13
Answer:
-1 < 4
Explanation:
All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 14
Answer:
-7 > -8
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 15
Answer:
-3 < -2
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 16
Answer:
-5 > – 10
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend compares two integers. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 17
Answer:
No My friend is wrong.
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
-1 is nearer to 0 than -3 so -1 is greater
-3 < – 1

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 18
Answer:
Yes it is True .
– 7 < -3

ORDERING INTEGERS Order the integers from least to greatest.
Question 23.
0, – 1, 2, 3, – 3
Answer:
-3, -1, 0, 2, 3
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 24.
– 4, – 2, – 3, 2, 1
Answer:
-4, -3, -2, 1, 2
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 25.
– 2, 3, – 3, – 4, 4
Answer:
-4, -3, -2, 3, 4
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 26.
5, – 11, – 9, 3, – 4
Answer:
-11, -9, -4. 3, 5
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 27.
– 3, 8, 4, 0, – 13
Answer:
-13, -3, 0, 4, 8
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 28.
– 7, 2, 6, – 4, 3
Answer:
-7, -4, 2, 3, 6
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 29.
12, – 8, – 16, 7, 1
Answer:
-16, -8, 1, 7, 12
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 30.
10, – 10, 30, – 30, – 50
Answer:
-50, -30, -10, 10, 30
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 31.
– 5, 15, – 10, – 20, 25
Answer:
-20, -10, -5, 15, 25
Explanation:
With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.All Positive Numbers are greater than the Negative numbers .

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An archaeologist discovers the two artifacts shown.
a. What integer represents ground level?
b. A dinosaur bone is 42 centimeters below ground level. Is it deeper than both of the artifacts? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 19
Answer a :
An integer represents ground level = 0 (as it is neutral)
Answer b :
Dinosaur bone is at = – 42cms
First artifact is at =-38 cms
Second artifact is at = – 44 cms
No it not depper than both the artifacts.
Explanation:
It is in between the artifacts. as -42 lies in between -38 and -44

Question 33.
REASONING
A number is between −2 and −10. What is the least possible integer value of this number? What is the greatest possible integer value of this number?
Answer:
The numbers between -2 and -10 = -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8, -9
Greatest value = -3
Least Value = – 9
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 34.
NUMBER SENSE
Describe the locations of the integers m and n on a number line for each situation.
a. m < n
b. m > n
c. n > m
Answer a :
m < n where m = 1 and n = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-34-a
Answer b :
m > n where n = -1 and m = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-34-b
Answer c :
n > m where n = 5 and m = -5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Comparing-Ordering-Integers-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-34-c

CRITICAL THINKING Tell whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 20
Question 35.
A positive integer is greater than its opposite.
Answer:
YES,
Explanation:
The opposite number of a positive number is negative numbers. Negative are always lesser than positive numbers.

Question 36.
An integer is less than its opposite and greater than 0.
Answer:
No
Explanation:
integer = 5
The opposite of 5 is -5
Here integer is not less than its oppositeand greater than 0 it is -5 < 5 .

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the highest and lowest elevations for five states.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.2 21
a. Order the states by their highest elevations, from least to greatest.
b. Order the states by their lowest elevations, from least to greatest.
c. What does the lowest elevation for Florida represent?
Answer a :
Florida < Louisiana <Arkansas < Tennessee < California
345< 535 < 2753 < 6643 < 14494
Answer b :
California < Louisiana < Florida < Arkansas < Tennessee
-282 < -8 < 0 < 55 < 178

Question 38.
NUMBER SENSE
Point A is on a number line halfway between −17 and 5. Point Bis halfway between Point A and 0. What integer does Point B represent?
Answer:
Point A = half way between -17 and 5 = (- 17 + 5) ÷ 2 = – 12÷2 = -6
Point B = halfway between Point A and 0 = (-6 + 0) ÷ 2= -6 ÷ 2 = – 3
Therefore Point B represent -3 integer

Question 39.
REASONING
Eleven Fahrenheit temperatures are shown on a map during a weather report. When the temperatures are ordered from least to greatest, the middle temperature is below off. Do you know exactly how many of the temperatures are represented by negative numbers? Explain.
Answer:

Question 40.
PUZZLE
Nine students each choose one integer. Here are seven of them:
5, − 8, 10, − 1, − 12, − 20, and 1.
a. When all nine integers are ordered from least to greatest, the middle integer is 1. Describe the integers chosen by the other two students.
b. When all nine integers are ordered from least to greatest, the middle integer is −3. Describe the integers chosen by the other two students.

Answer a :
Order the numbers so that 1 is in the middle:
-20, -12, -8, -1, 1, 5, 10, x, x -> The other 2 numbers must be greater than 1, as the range can be 2 < x, x being the number chosen
Answer b .
Order the numbers so that -3 is in the middle:
x, -20, -12, -8, (-3), -1, 1, 5, 10 -> The other number must be less than -3, as the range is x < – 3, x being the number chosen

Lesson 8.3 Rational Numbers

EXPLORATION 1

Locating Fractions on a Number Line
Work with a partner. Represent the events on a number line using a fraction or a mixed number.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 1
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 2

Integers, fractions, and decimals make up the set of rational numbers. A rational number is a number that can be written as a – b, where a and b are integers and b ≠ 0.

Try It

Graph the number and its opposite.
Question 1.
2\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
2 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 1
The opposite of 1 is -1

Question 2.
–\(\frac{4}{5}\)
Answer:
–\(\frac{4}{5}\)= – ( 4 ÷ 5) = – 0.8
The opposite of – 0.8 is 0.8

Question 3.
– 3.5
Answer:
The opposite of – 3.5 is 3.5

Question 4.
5.25
Answer:
The opposite of 5.25 is -5.25

Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 3
Answer:
–\(\frac{4}{7}\) = -0.57
–\(\frac{1}{7}\)= -0.14
– 0.57   <  -0.14

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 4
Answer:
–\(\frac{5}{3}\) = -1.66
–\(\frac{11}{6}\) = -1.83
-1.66 > – 1.83

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 5
Answer:
– 0.5  <  0.3

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 6
Answer:
-6.5  > – 6.75

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 7
Answer:
–\(\frac{2}{3}\) = -0.66
–\(\frac{5}{9}\) = -0.55
-0.66  < -0.55

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 8
Answer:
–\(\frac{9}{4}\)= – 2.25
–\(\frac{19}{8}\)= -2.375
-2.25  >  -2.375

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 9
Answer:
-1.7   >   -2.4

Question 12.
NUMBER SENSE
Which statement is not true?
A. On a number line, −2\(\frac{1}{6}\) is to the left of −2\(\frac{2}{3}\).
B. −2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) is less than −2\(\frac{1}{6}\).
C. On a number line, −2\(\frac{2}{3}\) is to the left of −2\(\frac{1}{6}\).
Answer A :
−2\(\frac{1}{6}\) = −\(\frac{1}{3}\) = – 0.33
−2\(\frac{2}{3}\) = −\(\frac{4}{3}\) = -1.33
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-12-a
Answer B :
−2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = − \(\frac{4}{3}\) = -1.33
−2\(\frac{1}{6}\) = −\(\frac{1}{3}\) = – 0.33
-1.33  <  – 0.33
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Answer C :
−2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = − \(\frac{4}{3}\) = -1.33
−2\(\frac{1}{6}\) = −\(\frac{1}{3}\) = – 0.33
From the above number line we notice that -1.33 is left of -0.33

Question 13.
WRITING
Explain how to determine whether a number is a rational number.
Answer:
The rational number which is represented in the \(\frac{p}{q}\)form and where q is not equal to zero.
Examples :
\(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{7}{3}\)

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Question 14.
You and your friend rappel down a cliff. Your friend descends 0.11 mile and then waits for you to catch up. You descend and your current change in elevation is −0.12 mile. Have you reached your friend? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 10
Answer:
Distance traveled by my friend = 0.11

Question 15.
The table shows the changes in the value of a stock over a period of three days. On which day does the value of the stock change the most? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 11
Answer:
Change in stock is most in day 3 that is – 0.45
Explanation:
On day 1 the stock change is -0.42
On day 2 there is no stock change that is 0
On day 3 the stock change is -0.45
From 0 to -0.45 change is more

Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 8.3

Review & Refresh

Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 12
Answer:
5 < 8

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 13
Answer:
-4 > -7

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 14
Answer:
2 > -5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 15
Answer:
0 > -3

Question 5.
You pay $48 for 8 pounds of chicken. Which is an equivalent rate?
A. $44 for 4 pounds
B. $28 for 4 pounds
C. $15 for 3 pounds
D. $30 for 5 pounds
Answer:
$30 for 5 pounds
Explanation:
You pay $48 for 8 pounds of chicken.
$48 = 8 Pounds
$__ = 5 Ponds.
Do Cross Multiplication
(48 × 5)÷8 = 6  × 5 = $30

Find the whole.
Question 6.
40% of what number is 24?
Answer:
40 % = 24
100 % = ?
The answer is 60.
Explanation:
Do cross multiplication we get :
100 % × 24 = 40% × ?
2400 ÷ 40 = 60.
Therefore answer is 60.

Question 7.
12% of what number is 9?
Answer:
12 % = 9
100 % = ?
The answer is 75.
Explanation:
Do cross multiplication we get :
100 % × 9 = 12% × ?
900 ÷ 12 = 75.
Therefore answer is 75.
Question 8.
48% of what number is 84?
Answer:
48 % = 84
100 % = ?
The answer is 175.
Explanation:
Do cross multiplication we get :
100 % × 84 = 48% × ?
8400 ÷ 48 = 175.
Therefore answer is 175.

Question 9.
140% of what number is 98?
Answer:
140 % = 98
100 % = ?
The answer is 70.
Explanation:
Do cross multiplication we get :
100 % × 98 = 140% × ?
9800 ÷ 140 = 70.
Therefore answer is 70.

Multiply.
Question 10
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-10

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-11
Question 12.
3.7 × 4.854
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-12

Question 13.
2.9 × 8.8609
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Question-13

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

USING TOOLS Use a fraction or a mixed number to represent the time on a number line. Let 0 represent noon. (See Exploration 1, p. 357.)
Question 14.
8:30 A.M.
Answer:

Question 15.
12:15 P.M.
Answer:

Question 16.
3:12 P.M.
Answer:

GRAPHING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Graph the number and its opposite.
Question 17.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{2}{3}\) = 0.6
The opposite of 0.6 = – 0.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-17
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘0.6’, is ‘-0.6’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 18.
– 4.3
Answer:
The opposite of -4.3 = 4.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-18
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘4.3’, is ‘-4.3’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 19.
2.15
Answer:
The opposite of 2.15 = -2.15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-19
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 20.
– \(\frac{3}{7}\)
Answer:
–\(\frac{3}{7}\) = -0.4
The opposite of -0.4 = 0.4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-20
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘0.4’, is ‘-0.4’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 21.
– 0.4
Answer:
The opposite of -0.4 = 0.4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-20
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 22.
5\(\frac{1}{3}\)
Answer:
5\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{16}{3}\)=5.3
The opposite of 5.3 = -5.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-22
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘5.3’, is ‘-5.3’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 23.
– 2\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
– 2\(\frac{1}{4}\)=- \(\frac{9}{4}\)=-2.25
The opposite of -2.25 = 2.25
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-23
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 24.
-5 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Answer:
-5 \(\frac{3}{10}\) =- \(\frac{3}{2}\) = -1.5
The opposite of -1.5 = 1.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.3-Rational-Numbers-Graphing-Rational-Numbers-Question-24
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 18
Answer:
-3\(\frac{1}{3}\)  >  -3\(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 19
Answer:
–\(\frac{1}{2}\) < –\(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 20
Answer:
–\(\frac{3}{4}\)   < \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 21
Answer:
-2\(\frac{2}{3}\)  <  -2\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 22
Answer:
-1\(\frac{5}{6}\)  <  -1\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 23
Answer:
-4.6  > – 4.8

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 24
Answer:
-0.12  <  -0.05

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 25
Answer:
2.41  >  -3.16

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 26
Answer:
-3.524  >  -3.542

ORDERING RATIONAL NUMBERS Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 34.
1.3, – 2, – 1.8, 0, – 1.75
Answer:
-2, -1.8, -1.75, 0, 1.3
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 35.
– 4, – 4.35, – 4.9, – 5, – 4.3
Answer:
-5, -4.9, -4.35, – 4.3 , -4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 36.
1.6, 1.2, 0, 0.8, – 0.1
Answer:
-0.1, 0, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 37.
\(-\frac{1}{2}, \frac{1}{8}, \frac{3}{4},-1,-\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
-0.5, 0.125, 0.75, -1, -0.25 above fractions in decimals points
-1, -0.5, -0.25, 0.125, 0.75
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 38.
\(-2 \frac{3}{10},-2 \frac{2}{5},-2,-2 \frac{1}{2},-3\)
Answer:
-2.3, -0.8, -2, -2.5, -3
-3, -2.5, -2.3, -2, -0.8
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 39.
\(-\frac{1}{20},-\frac{5}{8}, 0,-1,-\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer:
-0.05, -0.625, 0, -1, -0.75
-0.75, -0.625, -0.05, -1, 0
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 40.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In rough water, a small sand dollar burrows v centimeter into the sand. A larger sand dollar burrows -1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) centimeters into the sand. Which sand dollar burrowed deeper?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 27
Answer:
small sand dollar burrows = – \(\frac{1}{2}\) = -0.5
Larger sand dollar burrows = -1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) =- \(\frac{5}{4}\) = -1.25cms
The Larger sand dollar burrows deeper .
Explanation:
Here don’t consider the negative signs from ground level that is 0 it is Large sand dollar that is burrowed deeper.

Question 41.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Two golfers calculate their average scores relative to par over several rounds of golf. Golfer A has an average score of −1\(\frac{1}{4}\). Golfer B has an average score of −1\(\frac{3}{8}\). Who has the lesser average score?
Answer:
Average score of Golfer A = −1\(\frac{1}{4}\)=−\(\frac{5}{4}\)=−1.25
Average score of Golfer B = −1\(\frac{3}{8}\)= −\(\frac{11}{8}\)=−1.375
The golfer B has lesser average score.
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 42.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The apparent magnitude of a star measures how bright the star appears as seen from Earth. The brighter the star, the lesser the number. Which star is the brightest?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 28
Answer:
The Deneb is the brightest star = 1.25 (positive number greatest number than all others )
Sirius < Canopus < Alpha Centauri  < Antares < Deneb
-1.46 < -0.72 < -0.27 < 0.96 < 1.25
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 43.
REPEATED REASONING
The daily water level relative to the pier is recorded for seven straight days at a tide station on the Big Marco River in Florida. On which days is the water level higher than on the previous day? On which days is it lower? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 29
Answer:
The water level on Sun =−\(\frac{3}{25}\) =−0.12
The water level on Mon=−\(\frac{7}{20}\)= −0.35
The water level on Tue= −\(\frac{27}{50}\) =−0.54
The water level on Wed=−\(\frac{13}{20}\)=−0.65
The water level on Thrus=−\(\frac{16}{25}\)=−0.64
The water level on Fri=−\(\frac{53}{100}\)=−0.53
The water level on Sat =−\(\frac{1}{3}\)=−0.33
Explanation:
On Monday The water level is compared to previous day= – 0.12 – ( – 0.35 ) = 0.23
On Tuesday The water level is compared to previous day=-0.35 – ( -0.54) = 0.19
On Wednesday The water level is compared to previous day= -0.54 – ( – 0.65) =0.11
On Thrusday The water level is compared to previous day= – 0.65 – ( – 0.64)=0.01
On Friday The water level is compared to previous day= – 0.64 – ( – 0.53)=0.11
On Saturday The water level is compared to previous day = – 0.53 – ( -0.33 )=0.20
On Monday the water level is more compared to the previous day .
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 44.
DIG DEEPER!
A guitar tuner allows you to tune a guitar string to its correct pitch. The units on a tuner are measured in cents. The units tell you how far the string tone is above or below the correct pitch.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.3 30
a. What number on the tuner represents a correctly tuned guitar string?
b. Which strings have a pitch below the correct pitch?
c. Which string has a pitch closest to its correct pitch?
d. Which string has a pitch farthest from its correct pitch?
e. The tuner is rated to be accurate to within 0.5 cent of the true pitch. Which string could possibly be correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer a :
The Number on the tuner represents a correctly tuned guitar string = 0
Answer b :
The string below the correct pitch = 6
Explanation:
As The string 6 is only -0.3 distance away from the correctly tuned guitar string other than strings.
Answer c :
A pitch closest to its correct pitch = 6
Explanation:
As The string 6 is only -0.3 distance away from the correctly tuned guitar string other than strings. which is the least distance between them.
Answer d :
String which is pitch farthest from its correct pitch is 1.
Explanation:
As The string 1 is only -3.6 distance away from the correctly tuned guitar string other than strings. which is the Farthest distance between them.
Answer e :
No string tuner is rated to be accurate to within 0.5 cent of the true pitch
Explanation:
Correct tuner is at 0
0.5 cent of the true pitch = 0
Which is not possible

Question 45.
NUMBER SENSE
What integer values of x make the statement − \(\frac{3}{x}\) < − \(\frac{x}{3}\) true?
Answer:
− \(\frac{3}{x}\) < − \(\frac{x}{3}\)
X  should be more than 3 .
if x is in the numerator in the fraction form it resultant will be more when divided by 3
If x is in the denominator in the fraction form it resultant will be less when 3 is divided by x
Explanation:
For example: take x = 4
− \(\frac{3}{4}\) =−0.75
− \(\frac{4}{3}\) = −1.33
−0.75 < −1.33

Lesson 8.4 Absolute Value

EXPLORATION 1
Comparing Positions of Objects
Work with a partner. The diagram shows the positions of several objects.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 1
a. What integer represents sea level? How can you compare the positions of objects relative to sea level?
Answer:
An integer represents sea level = 0
You can compare the positions of objects relative to sea levels by number of meters above and below as given in the above figure.

b. Which pairs of objects are the same distance from sea level? How do you know?
Answer:
Whale and sea plane
Explanation:
Whale and sea plane are at -1000 and 1000 meters below and above respectively from sea level.
Both are at equidistant from the sea level.

c. The vesselsKaiko, Alvin, and Jason Jr.move to be the same distance from sea level as the Boeing 747. About how many meters did each vessel travel?
Answer:
Distance of Boeing 747 from sea level = 5000 metres.
Distance of  Kaiko below sea level = – 7000 metres
Distance of  Alvin below sea level = -4500 metres
Distance of  Janson Jr.below sea level = 4000 metres
Explanation:
To travel same distance as Boeing 747 the Kaiko should travel + 2000 metres towards the sea level so that it comes at 5000 metres below sea level.
To travel same distance as Boeing 747 the Alvin should travel – 500 metres below the sea level so that it comes at 5000 metres below sea level.
To travel same distance as Boeing 747 the Janson Jr should travel -1000 metres below the sea level so that it comes at 5000 metres below sealevel.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 2

Try It

Find the absolute value.
Question 1.
|8|
Answer:
|8| = 8
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 2.
|-6|
Answer:
|-6| = 6
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 3.
|0|
Answer:
|0| = 0
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 4.
\(\left| \frac { 1 }{ 4 } \right| \)
Answer:
\(\left| \frac { 1 }{ 4 } \right| \) = 0.25
|0.25| = 0.25
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 5.
\(\left|-7 \frac{1}{3}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|-7 \frac{1}{3}\right|\) = – 7.33
|-7.33|=7.33
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Question 6.
|- 12.9|
Answer:
|- 12.9| = 12.9
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The absolute value of a number is its real distance from zero on a number line; therefore, we need to calculate how many spaces the number is tot he left of zero on a number line. This number is a distance from zero and will not be negative. All absolute values are positive.

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 3
Answer:
|-4|=4
4 > -2
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 4
Answer:
|5| = 5
-5 < 5
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 5
Answer:
|9|=9
9 < 10
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 6
Answer:
|-3.9| = 3.9
3.9 = 3.9
Explanation:
Both the integers are same so equal.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
COMPARING VALUES Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 7
Answer:
|-6| = 6
6 > 3
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 8
Answer:
|-3.5| = 3.5
3.5 < 4
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 9
Answer:
3\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\)=2.5
-4\(\frac{3}{4}\)=-\(\frac{19}{4}\) = – 4.75
|-4.75|= 4.75
2.5 > 4.75
Explanation:
Convert the fraction form into decimals form . later write absolute values and compare the values. The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 14.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 10
Answer:
What is the absolute value of – 3.
What integer is 3 units to the left of 0
Explanation:
Rest of the two statements describe the distance between -3 to 0.

Question 15.
Describe the position of an object in your classroom using a negative rational number. Then describe the position of a second object using a positive rational number. Which number has a greater absolute value? What does this mean?
Answer:
The position of my pen is -6 cms from my bench.
The position of my books is +3 cms from my bench.
The absolute value of -6 = 6
The absolute value of 3 = 3
6 > 3
Explanation:
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x . All absolute values are positive.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the elevations of several checkpoints along a hiking trail.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 11
a. Which checkpoint is farthest from sea level?
b. Which checkpoint is closest to sea level?
c. Between which checkpoints do you reach sea level? Explain your reasoning.
Answer a :
The Farthest checkpoint from sea level = 5
Explanation:
It is -142 in elevation feet
Answer b :
The closest checkpoint from sea level = 4
Explanation:
It is 12 in elevation feet
Answer c :
No we cant .
Explanation:
Sea level = 0
We need to get 0 between two check points then the check points reach sea level.
Elevation feet between 1 and 2 check points = 110 – 38 = 72
Elevation feet between 2 and 3 check points = 38 – (-24) = 72
Elevation feet between 3 and 4 check points = – 24 -12 = -36
Elevation feet between 4 and 5 check points =12 – (-142) = 154

Absolute Value Homework & Practice 8.4

Review & Refresh

Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 1.
2.4, – 3.2, – 1.8, 0.6, – 1.3
Answer:
-3.2 < -1.8 < -1.3<0.6<2.4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater. With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 2.
– 0.3, 0.7, – 1.5, 0, 2.2
Answer:
-1.5< -0.3<0<0.7<2.2
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 3.
\(\frac{3}{4}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{2}{3}, 2, \frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
0.75, 0.5, 0.6, 2,0.25
All the above fractions are represented in decimals now compare
0.25<0.5<0.6<0.75<2
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{5}, 1 \frac{2}{5},-2 \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{5},-2 \frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
0.2, 1.4, -2.75, 0.8, -2.5
All the above fractions are represented in decimals now compare
-2.75<-2.5<0.2<0.8<1.4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 12
Answer:
Slope = 0
Y-intercept : (0 , 9/5)
Plot each graph on the same coordinate system.
9/5, 18/10 , 27/15.

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Absolute-Value-Homework-Practice-8.4-Question-5
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 13
Answer:
Slope = 0
Y-intercept : (0 , 7/3)
Plot each graph on the same coordinate system.
7/3 , 14/6, 21/9 .

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Absolute-Value-Homework-Practice-8.4-Question-6

Evaluate the expression when a = 2, b = 5, and c = 8.
Question 7.
5 + c
Answer:
5 + c =
Take c = 8
5 + 8 = 13

Question 8.
b – 4
Answer:
take b=5
5 – 4 = 1

Question 9.
\(\frac{c}{a}\)
Answer:
take a =2 and c= 8
\(\frac{8}{2}\) = 4

Question 10.
b * c
Answer:
take b = 5 and c = 8
5 × 8 = 40

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

COMPARING POSITIONS OF OBJECTS Tell which object is farther from sea level. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 363.)

Question 11.
Scuba diver: −15 m
Dolphin: −22 m
Answer:
The Dolphin = – 22m is farther from sea level
Explanation:
Distance cant be negative so just consider the value and compare the distance which is greater.
15 < 22

Question 12.
Seagull: 12 m
School of fish: −4 m
Answer:
Seagull = 12m is farther from sea level
Explanation:
Distance cant be negative so just consider the value and compare the distance which is greater.
12 > 4

Question 13.
Shark:−40 m
Flag on a ship: 32 m
Answer:
Explanation:
Shark = – 40 m
Distance cant be negative so just consider the value and compare the distance which is greater.
40 > 32

FINDING ABSOLUTE VALUE Find the absolute value.
Question 14.
|- 2|
Answer:
|- 2| = 2
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 15.
|23|
Answer:
|23|=23
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 16.
|11|
Answer:
|11|=11
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 17.
|- 68|
Answer:
|-68|=68
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 18.
|- 8.35|
Answer:
|-8.35|=8.35
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 19.
\(\left|\frac{1}{6}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|\frac{1}{6}\right|\) = |0.16|=0.16
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 20.
|14.06|
Answer:
|14.06|=14.06
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 21.
\(\left|-\frac{5}{8}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|-\frac{5}{8}\right|\)= |-0.625| = 0.625
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 22.
\(\left|-3 \frac{2}{5}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|-3 \frac{2}{5}\right|\) = |-3.4|= 3.4
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 23.
|1.026|
Answer:
|1.026|=1.026
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 24.
\(\left|1 \frac{1}{3}\right|\)
Answer:
\(\left|1 \frac{1}{3}\right|\)= \(\left| \frac{4}{3}\right|\) =|1.3| = 1.3
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 25.
|- 6.308|
Answer:
|-6.308|=6.308
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 26.
REASONING
Write two integers that have an absolute value of 10.
Answer:
– 10 and 10
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 27.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the absolute value of 14. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 14
Answer:
Wrong
All absolute values are positive.
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

COMPARING VALUES Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.
Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 15
Answer:
|-8| = 8
6 < 8
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 16
Answer:
|-3|= 3
3 = 3
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 17
Answer:
|-4.3| = 4.3
4.3 > 3.4
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 18
Answer:
–\(\frac{2}{9}\)= -0.22
\(\frac{1}{5}\)= 0.2
|-0.22|=0.22
0.22>0.2
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 19
Answer:
|-0.05|= 0.05
0.05 > 0
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 20
Answer:
|-5.5|= 5.5
|-3.1| = 3.1
5.5 > 3.1
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 21
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = 0.75
–\(\frac{2}{5}\)= – 0.4
|-0.4| = 0.4
0.75 > 0.4
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 22
Answer:
|-6.8|=6.8
|8.25|=8.25
6.8 < 8.25
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 23
Answer:
|12| = 12
– 12 < 12
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the change in the balance of a bank account after each of three transactions. Which transaction has the greatest effect on the balance of the account? Which transaction has the least effect on the balance of the account?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 24
Answer:
Transaction has the greatest effect on the balance of the account = 3
Transaction which has the least effect on the balance of the account = 1

ORDERING VALUES Order the values from least to greatest.
Question 38.
5, 0, |- 1|, |4| , – 2
Answer:
|- 1| = 1
|4| = 4
-2<0<1<4<5
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 39.
|- 3|, |5| , – 3, – 4, |- 4|
Answer:
|- 3| = 3
|5| = 5
|- 4|=4
-4< -3< 3 < 4 < 5
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 40.
10, |- 6|, 9, |3|, -11, 0
Answer:
|- 6| = 6
|3| = 3
-11<0<3<6<9<10
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 41.
– 18, |30|, – 19, |- 22|, – 20, |- 18|
Answer:
|30| = 30
|- 22| = 22
|- 18|=18
-20 < -19< – 18 <18<22<30
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater .Numbers to the right are greater .With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

SIMPLIFYING EXPRESSIONS Simplify the expression.
Question 42.
– |2|
Answer:
– |2| = – 2
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 43.
– |6|
Answer:
-|6| = -6
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive..

Question 44.
– |- 1|
Answer:
|1| = 1
-1
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 45.
REASONING
The coldest possible temperature is called absolute zero. It is represented by 0 K on the Kelvin temperature scale.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.4 25
a. Which temperature is closer to 0 K: 32°F or − 50°C?
Answer:
As per the given we notice is 32°F

b. What do absolute values and temperatures on the Kelvin scale have in common?
Answer:
All the temperatures and absolute values are positive in kelvin scale.

CRITICAL THINKING
Tell whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain.
Question 46.
The absolute value of a number is greater than the number.
Answer:
False
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 47.
The absolute value of a negative number is positive.
Answer:
True
Explanation:
All absolute values are positive.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.

Question 48.
The absolute value of a positive number is its opposite.
Answer:
False
Explanation:
Opposite value of a positive number is negative. but all absolute values are positive so the given statement is wrong .

MATCHING Match the account balance with the debt that it represents. Explain your reasoning.
Question 49.
account balance = −$25
Answer: B. debt = $25

Question 50.
account balance < −$25
Answer: C. debt < $25

Question 51.
account balance > −$25
Answer: A. debt > $25

A. debt > $25
B. debt = $25
C. debt < $25

Question 52.
PATTERNS
A palindrome is a word or sentence that reads the same forward as it does backward.
a. Graph and label the following points on a number line: A =− 2, C =− 1, E = 0, R =− 3. Then, using the same letters as the original points, graph and label the absolute value of each point on the same number line.
b. What word do the letters spell? Is this a palindrome?
c. Assign letters to points on a number line to make up your own palindrome using the process in part(a).
Answer a :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Absolute-Value-Homework-&-Practice-8.4-Question-52-a
Answer b :
Letters spell – RACE and ECAR  Yes, it is a palindrome .

Answer c:
It is shown in the above diagram .

Question 53.
CRITICAL THINKING
Find values of x and y so that |x| < |y| and x > y.
Answer:

Lesson 8.5 The Coordinate Plane

Extending the Coordinate Plane
Work with a partner. Previously, you plotted points with positive coordinates in a coordinate plane like the one shown at the right.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 1
a. You can also plot points in which one or both of the coordinates are negative numbers. Create ordered pairs with different combinations of positive and negative coordinates, as described below. Then plot the ordered pairs and explain how you extended the coordinate plane shown.
(positive, positive) (negative, positive)
(negative, negative) (positive, negative)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1-a
b. How many regions of the coordinate plane are created by the x-axis and y-axis? What do the points in each of these regions have in common?
Answer:
The four regions are covered with one point .
The numbers on a coordinate grid are used to locate points. Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).
c. The photo shows the reflection, or mirror image, of a mountain in a lake. When you fold the photo on its axis, the mountain and its reflection align.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 2
c. Actual A mountainoAxisAMath PracticeReflectionReof mountain Check ProgressHow can you check your progress to make sure you are reflecting your point correctly?
Plot a point and its reflection in one of the axes. Explain your reasoning. What do you notice about the coordinates of the points?
Answer:
As per the above image we notice that the axis is equal to the axis of the graph . the graph is divided into 4 Quadrants as shown in below graph.
A coordinate plane is a two-dimensional plane formed by the intersection of a vertical line called y-axis and a horizontal line called x-axis. These are perpendicular lines that intersect each other at zero, and this point is called the origin.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1-c
As the reflection is formed in fourth quadrant an example of reflection is marked in the above graph .

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 3

Try It

Use the graph in Example 1 to write an ordered pair corresponding to the point.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1-a
As shown in example one the points are mentioned below
Question 1.
Point P
Answer:
(1,2)
The point P is marked in the Quadrant I as shown in the above graph .
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 2.
Point Q
Answer:
(-2,1)
The point Q is marked in the Quadrant II as shown in the above graph .
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question3.
Point R
Answer:
(-2,2)
The point R is marked in the Quadrant III as shown in the above graph .
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 4.
Point S
Answer:
(2,-3)
The point S is marked in the Quadrant IV as shown in the above graph .
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 5.
(3, -1)
Answer:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph. Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-5
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 6.
(-5, 0)
Answer:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is positive as shown in the graph.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-6
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 7.
(- 2.5, -1)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-7
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant III as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 8.
(-1\(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\))
Answer:
-1\(\frac{1}{2}\) = –\(\frac{3}{2}\) = -1.5
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.5
(-1.5, 0.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-8
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Reflect the point in (a) the x-axis and (b) the y-axis.
Question 9.
(3, – 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-9

Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 10.
(4, 0)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-10

Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 11.
(- 5, 1.5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-11

Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Reflect the point in the x-axis followed by the y-axis.
Question 12.
(3, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-12Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 13.
(- 1, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-13
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 14.
(- 4, – 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-14
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant III as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 15.
(5, – 2.5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-15

Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
WRITING ORDERED PAIRS Write an ordered pair corresponding to the point shown in the coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 4
Question 16.
Point A
Answer:
X coordinate is 2
Y coordinate is 1
(2,1)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 17.
Point B
Answer:
X coordinate is 0
Y coordinate is -3
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 18.
Point C
Answer:
X coordinate is 4
Y coordinate is -3
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is positive and Y coordinate is negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

PLOTTING ORDERED PAIRS Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 19.
J(2, 5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-19
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 2 units right and 5 units up. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 20.
K (4, – 6)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-20
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units right and 6 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant IV

Question 21.
L (- 3, – 2\(\frac{1}{2}\))
Answer:
– 2\(\frac{1}{2}\)=- \(\frac{5}{2}\))=-2.5
L (-3, -2.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-21
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 3 units left and 6 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant III

REFLECTING POINTS
Reflect the point in the given axis or axes.
Question 22.
(9, 8); x-axis
Answer:
Plot (9,8) and (9,-8)
Explanation:
To reflect (9,8) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 9,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 8 is -8
So the reflection of (9,8)in the x-axis is (9,-8)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-22

Question 23.
(−7, 3); y-axis
Answer:
Plot (-7,3) and (7,3)
Explanation:
To reflect (-7,3) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -7 is 7
So the reflection of (-7,3)in the x-axis is (7,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-23

Question 24.
(6, −4); x-axis then y-axis
Answer:
Plot (6,-4), (6,4) and (-6,4)
Explanation:
To reflect (6,-4) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 6,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -4 is 4
To reflect (6,4) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 6 is -6
So the reflection of (6,-4)in the x-axis is (6,4)
So then reflection of (6,4)in the y-axis is (-6,4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-24

Question 25.
(2.5, −4); y-axis then x-axis
Answer:
Plot (2.5, -4) , (-2.5,-4)  and (-2.5,4)
Explanation:
To reflect (2.5,-4) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -4,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 2.5 is -2.5
To reflect (-2.5,-4) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -2.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -4 is 4
So the reflection of (2.5,-4)in the y-axis is (-2.5,-4)
So then reflection of (-2.5,-4)in the x-axis is (-2.5,4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-25

Question 26.
DIG DEEPER
At a park, the welcome center is located at (0, 0), the theater is located at(2, 4), and the restrooms are located at(−4.5, 6). The snack bar is exactly halfway between the welcome center and the theater. Graph each location in a coordinate plane.
Answer:
Welcome Centre is located at (0,0)
Theater is located at (2, 4)
Restrooms are located at (−4.5, 6)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-26
Explanation:
Halfway between the welcome center and the theater is known by joining both W and T points. we notice now that (2,2) is exactly half way between them so the Snack bar is at (2,2)

Question 27.
The table shows the elevations of a submarine each hour from noon to 5:00 P.M. Display the data in a line graph. Then describe the change in elevation over time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 5
Answer:
The ordered pairs are (0,-4.5), (1,-3), (2,-2.5), (3,-2), (4,-3.5) and (5,-4)
Plot the ordered pairs and then connect the points with line segments
The elevations of a submarine increases up to 3:00 P.M then later the elevations decreases up to 5:00 P.M
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson 8.5-The-Coordinate-Plane-Question-27

The Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 8.5

Review & Refresh

Find the absolute value.
Question 1.
|35|
Answer:
|35| = 35
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Quest ion 2.
|- 18|
Answer:
|- 18| = 18
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 3.
|4.7|
Answer:
|4.7| = 4.7
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 4.
|- 6\(\frac{7}{12}\)|
Answer:
|- 6\(\frac{7}{12}\)|= |- \(\frac{79}{12}\)|= |-6.58| =6.58
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive.

Question 5.
What is the ratio of ducks to swans?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 6
A. 4 : 9
B. 4 : 5
C. 5 : 4
D. 5 : 9
Answer:
Total Number of Ducks = 5
Total Number of Swans = 4
Ratio = Total Number of Ducks ÷ Total Number of Swans = 5 ÷ 4 =  \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Graph the equation.
Question 6.
y = 8x
Answer:

Use the slope-intercept form to find the slope and y-intercept.
Slope

y-intercept

 

Explanation:
x =
0
y =  0
and
x =
1
y= 8
Any line can be graphed using two points. Select two  values, and plug them into the equation to find the corresponding  values.

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-6

Question 7.
y = 3x + 7
Answer:

Use the slope-intercept form to find the slope and y-intercept.
Slope: 3
y-intercept: ( 0 , 7)
x = -7/3
y =  0
and
x = 0

y= 7
Any line can be graphed using two points. Select two  values, and plug them into the equation to find the corresponding  values.

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-7

Question 8.
y = \(\frac{2}{5}\)x + 2
Answer:
y = \(\frac{2}{5}\)x + 2
y = 0.4x + 2

Use the slope-intercept form to find the slope and y-intercept.
Slope: 0.4
y-intercept: ( 0 , 2)
x = -5
y =  0
and
x = 0

y= 2
Any line can be graphed using two points. Select two  values, and plug them into the equation to find the corresponding  values.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-8

Tell which property the statement illustrates.
Question 9.
(2 . P) . 3 = 2 . (p . 3)
Answer:
The Associative Property of Multiplication states that numbers in a multiplication expression can be regrouped using parentheses
Associative Property of Multiplication
For any real numbers ab, and c, (a • b) • c = a • (b • c).

Question 10.
m + 0 = m
Answer:
The addition property of 0 states that for any number being added to zero, the sum is the same number.Zero is called the additive identity.

Question 11.
w . 1 = w
Answer:
The multiplication property of 1 states that for any number multiplied by one, that answer is that same number and one is called the multiplicative identity.

Question 12.
15 + k = k + 15
Answer:
Commutative property of addition: Changing the order of addends does not change the sum.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

DESCRIBING REFLECTIONS Describe the reflection shown in the image. (See Exploration 1, p. 369.)
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 7
Answer:
The image shows the reflection image or mirror image when folded on its y-axis . both the real image and reflection image gets aligned.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 8
Answer:
The image shows the reflection image or mirror image of a arrow and shoes . when you fold the photo on its y-axis the arrow and shoes its reflection align.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 9
Answer:
The image shows the reflection or mirror image of a den in water. when you fold the photo on its x-axis, the den in the water and its reflection align.

WRITING ORDERED PAIRS Write an ordered pair corresponding to the point.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 10
Question 16.
Point A
Answer:
X coordinate is 3
Y coordinate is 1
(3,1)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 17.
Point B
Answer:
X coordinate is -3
Y coordinate is -2
(-3,-2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant III as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 18.
Point C
Answer:
X coordinate is -2
Y coordinate is 4
(-2,4)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 19.
Point D
Answer:
X coordinate is 1
Y coordinate is 2
(1,2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 20.
Point E
Answer:
X coordinate is 2
Y coordinate is -2
(2,-2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 21.
Point F
Answer:
X coordinate is 0
Y coordinate is -4
(0,-4)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 22.
Point G
Answer:
X coordinate is -4
Y coordinate is 2
(-4,2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 23.
Point H
Answer:
X coordinate is -4
Y coordinate is -4
(-4,-4)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant III as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 24.
Point I
Answer:
X coordinate is 4
Y coordinate is 0
(4,0)
Explanation:
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 25.
Point J
Answer:
X coordinate is 4
Y coordinate is -4
(4,-4)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant IV as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Negative as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

PLOTTING ORDERED PAIRS Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 26.
K (4, 3)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-&-Practice-8.5-Question-26
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units Right and 3 units up. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 27.
L (1, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-&-Practice-8.5-Question-27
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 1 units Right and 2 units up. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 28.
M (0, 6)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-28
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 6 units up. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 29.
N (3, – 7)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-29
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 3 units Right and 7 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant IV

Question 30.
P (- 5, – 9)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-30
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 5 units left and 9 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant III

Question 31.
R (8, 0)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-31
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 8 units Right and y is 0 remains at the same point. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 32.
S (- 1.5, 0)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-32
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 1.5 units left and y is 0 remains at the same point. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant II

Question 33.
T (3.5, 1.5)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-33
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 3.5 units Right and 1.5 units up Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 34.
U (2, – 4)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-34
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 2 units left and 4 units down. Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant IV

Question 35.
V (- 4, 1)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-35
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units left and 1 units up . Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant II

Question 36.
W (2\(\frac{1}{2}\), 0)
Answer:
2\(\frac{1}{2}\)=\(\frac{5}{2}\)=2.5
W(2.5,0)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-37
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 2.5 units Right and y is 0 so it remains on the same point . Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 37.
Z (- 4, – 5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-37
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units left and 5 units down . Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant III

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend describes how to plot the point. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 11
Answer:
No , he is wrong.
Explanation:
Start at the origin move 4 units Right and 5 units up . Then plot the point
The Point is in Quadrant I

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 12
Answer:
Yes he is right
The Point is in Quadrant II

MODELING REAL LIFE InExercises 40 – 44, use the map of the zoo.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 13
Question 40.
Which exhibit is located at (2, 1)?
Answer:
Reptiles

Question 41.
Name an attraction on the positive y-axis.
Answer:
Flamingo cafe

Question 42.
Is parking available in Quadrant II? If not, name a quadrant in which you can park.
Answer:
No, You can Park in Quadrant III and Quadrant IV

Question 43.
Write two different ordered pairs that represent the location of the Rain Forest.
Answer:
(5,-2) and (5,-1)

Question 44.
Which exhibit is closest to (−8, −3)?
Answer:
Safari Africa

REFLECTING POINTS IN ONE AXIS
Reflect the point in (a) the x-axis and (b) the y-axis.
Question 45.
(3, 2)
Answer:
Plot (3, 2) , (3,-2)  and (-3.-2)
Explanation:
To reflect (3,2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 2 is -2
To reflect (3,2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 3 is -3
So then reflection of (3,2)in the x-axis is (3,-2)
So the reflection of (3,2)in the y-axis is (-3,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-45

Question 46.
(- 4, 4)
Answer:
Plot (-4, 4) , (-4,-4)  and (4,4)
Explanation:
To reflect (-4,4) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 4 is -4
To reflect (-4,4) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -4 is 4
So then reflection of (-4,4)in the x-axis is (-4,-4)
So the reflection of (-4,-4)in the y-axis is (4,4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-46

Question 47.
(- 5, – 6)
Answer:
Plot (-5, -6) , (-5,6)  and (5,-6)
Explanation:
To reflect (-5,-6) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -6 is 6
To reflect (-5,-6) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -6,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -5 is 5
So then reflection of (-5,-6)in the x-axis is (-5,6)
So the reflection of (-5,-6)in the y-axis is (5,-6)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-47

Question 48.
(4, – 7)
Answer:
Plot (4, -7) , (4,7)  and (-4,-7)
Explanation:
To reflect (4,-7) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -7 is 7
To reflect (4,-7) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -7,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 4 is -4
So then reflection of (4,-7)in the x-axis is (4,7)
So the reflection of (4,-7)in the y-axis is (-4,-7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-48

Question 49.
(- 9, 3)
Answer:
Plot (-9, 3) , (-9,-3)  and (9,3)
Explanation:
To reflect (-9,3) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -9,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 3 is -3
To reflect (-9,3) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -9 is 9
So then reflection of (-9,3)in the x-axis is (-9,-3)
So the reflection of (-9,3)in the y-axis is (9,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-49

Question 50.
(6, – 2)
Answer:
Plot (6, -2) , (6,2)  and (-6,-2)
Explanation:
To reflect (6, -2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 6,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -2 is 2
To reflect (6, -2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 6 is -6
So then reflection of (6, -2) in the x-axis is (6,2)
So the reflection of (6, -2) in the y-axis is (-6,-2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-50

Question 51.
(0, – 1)
Answer:
Plot (0, – 1) , (0,1)  and (0,-1)
Explanation:
To reflect (0, – 1) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -1 is 1
To reflect (0, – 1) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -1,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -1 is 1
So then reflection of (0, – 1) in the x-axis is (0,1)
So the reflection of ((0, – 1) in the y-axis is (0,-1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-51

Question 52.
(- 8, 0)
Answer:
Plot (-8, 0) , (-8,0)  and (8,0)
Explanation:
To reflect (-8, 0)in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -8,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 0 is 0
To reflect (-8, 0) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -8 is 8
So then reflection of (-8, 0) in the x-axis is (-8,0)
So the reflection of (-8, 0) in the y-axis is (8,0)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-52

Question 53.
(- 3.5, 2)
Answer:
Plot (-3.5, 2) , (-3.5,-2)  and (3.5,2)
Explanation:
To reflect (-3.5, 2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -3.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 2 is -2
To reflect (-3.5, 2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -3.5 is 3.5
So then reflection of (-3.5, 2) in the x-axis is (-3.5,-2)
So the reflection of (-3.5, 2) in the y-axis is (3.5,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-53

Question 54.
(2.5, 4.5)
Answer:
Plot (2.5, 4.5) , (2.5,-4.5)  and (-2.5,4.5)
Explanation:
To reflect (2.5, 4.5) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 2.5 ,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 4.5 is -4.5
To reflect (2.5, 4.5) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 4.5,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 2.5 is -2.5
So then reflection of (2.5, 4.5) in the x-axis is (2.5,-4.5)
So the reflection of (2.5, 4.5) in the y-axis is (-2.5,4.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-54

Question 55.
(-5 \(\frac{1}{2}\), 3)
Answer:
-5 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = – \(\frac{11}{2}\) = -5.5
(-5.5, 3 )
Plot (-5.5, 3 ) , (-5.5,-3)  and (5.5,3)
Explanation:
To reflect (-5.5, 3 ) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -5.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 3 is -3
To reflect (-5.5, 3 ) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -5.5 is 5.5
So then reflection of (-5.5, 3 ) in the x-axis is (-5.5,-3)
So the reflection of (-5.5, 3 ) in the y-axis is (5.5,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-55

Question 56.
(\(\frac{1}{4}\), \(-\frac{7}{8}\))
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 0.25
\(-\frac{7}{8}\) = -0.8
(0.25,-0.8)
Plot (0.25,-0.8) , (0.25,0.8)  and (-0.25,-0.8)
Explanation:
To reflect (0.25,-0.8) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 0.25,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -0.8 is 0.8
To reflect (0.25,-0.8)in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -0.8 ,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 0.25 is -0.25
So then reflection of (0.25,-0.8) in the x-axis is (0.25,0.8)
So the reflection of (0.25,-0.8) in the y-axis is (-0.25,-0.8)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-One-Axis-Question-55

REFLECTING POINTS IN BOTH AXES
Reflect the point in the x-axis followed by the y-axis.
Question 57.
(4, 5)
Answer:
Plot (4, 5) , (4,-5)  and (-4,-5)
Explanation:
To reflect(4, 5)in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 5 is -5
To reflect (4, -5) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 4 is -4
So then reflection of (4, 5) in the x-axis is (4,-5)
So the reflection of (4,-5) in the y-axis is (-4,-5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-57

Question 58.
(- 1, 7)
Answer:
Plot (-1, 7) , (-1,-7)  and (1,-7)
Explanation:
To reflect (-1, 7) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -1,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 7 is -7
To reflect (-1,-7)  in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -7,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -1 is 1
So then reflection of (-1, 7) in the x-axis is (-1,-7)
So the reflection of (-1,-7)  in the y-axis is (1,-7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-58

Question 59.
(- 2, – 2)
Answer:
Plot (- 2, – 2) , (-2,2)  and (2,2)
Explanation:
To reflect(- 2, – 2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -2,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -2 is 2
To reflect (-2,2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -2 is 2
So then reflection of (- 2, – 2) in the x-axis is (-2,2)
So the reflection of (-2,2) in the y-axis is (2,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-59

Question 60.
(6, – 7)
Answer:
Plot (6, – 7) , (6,7)  and (-6,7)
Explanation:
To reflect (6, – 7) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 6,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate  -7 is 7
To reflect (6,7)  in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 7,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 6 is -6
So then reflection of (6, – 7) in the x-axis is (6,7)
So the reflection of (6,7)  in the y-axis is (-6,7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-60

Question 61.
(- 8, – 8)
Answer:
Plot (- 8, – 8) , (-8,8)  and (8,8)
Explanation:
To reflect (- 8, – 8) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -8,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -8 is 8
To reflect (-8,8) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 8,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 8 is -8
So then reflection of (- 8, – 8) in the x-axis is (-8,8)
So the reflection of (-8,8) in the y-axis is (8,8)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-61

Question 62.
(5, 9)
Answer:
Plot (5, 9) , (5,-9)  and (-5,-9)
Explanation:
To reflect (5, 9) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 9 is -9
To reflect (5,-9) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -9,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 5 is -5
So then reflection of (5, 9) in the x-axis is (5,-9)
So the reflection of (5,-9) in the y-axis is (-5,-9)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-62

Question 63.
(0, – 2)
Answer:
Plot (0, – 2) , (0,2)  and (0,2)
Explanation:
To reflect (0, – 2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate  -2 is 2
To reflect (0,2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 2 is -2
So then reflection of (0, – 2)in the x-axis is (0,2)
So the reflection of (0,2) in the y-axis is (0,2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-63

Question 64.
(- 9, 0)
Answer:
Plot (-9, 0) , (-9,0)  and (9,0)
Explanation:
To reflect (-9, 0) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -9,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 0 is 0
To reflect (9,0) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 0,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 9 is -9
So then reflection of (-9, 0)in the x-axis is (-9,0)
So the reflection of (-9,0)  in the y-axis is (9,0)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-64

Question 65.
(6.5, – 10.5)
Answer:
Plot (6.5, -10.5) , (6.5,10.5)  and (-6.5,10.5)
Explanation:
To reflect (6.5, -10.5) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 6.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -10.5 is 10.5
To reflect (6.5,10.5) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate,10.5, the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 6.5 is -6.5
So then reflection of (6.5, -10.5) in the x-axis is (6.5,10.5)
So the reflection of (6.5,10.5) in the y-axis is (-6.5,10.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-65

Question 66.
(- 0.4, 0.7)
Answer:
Plot (- 0.4, 0.7) , (-0.4,-0.7)  and (0.4,-0.7)
Explanation:
To reflect (- 0.4, 0.7) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -0.4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 0.7 is -0.7
To reflect (-0.4,-0.7) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -0.7,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -0.4 is 0.4
So then reflection of(- 0.4, 0.7) in the x-axis is (-0.4,-0.7)
So the reflection of (-0.4,-0.7) in the y-axis is (0.4,-0.7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-66

Question 67.
(\(\frac{1}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{3}\))
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{3}\)=0.3
\(\frac{2}{3}\)=0.6
Plot (0.3,0.6), (0.3,-0.6) and (-0.3,-0.6)
Explanation:
To reflect (0.3,0.6) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 0.3,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 0.6 is -0.6
To reflect (0.3,-0.6) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -0.6,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 0.3 is -0.3
So then reflection of (0.3,0.6) in the x-axis is (0.3,-0.6)
So the reflection of (0.3,-0.6) in the y-axis is (-0.3,-0.6)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-67

Question 68.
(- 1\(\frac{2}{5}\), – 1\(\frac{4}{5}\))
Answer:
– 1\(\frac{2}{5}\) = –\(\frac{7}{5}\) = -1.4
– 1\(\frac{4}{5}\) = –\(\frac{9}{5}\) =-1.8
(-1.4,-1.8)
Plot (-1.4,-1.8) , (-1.4,1.8)  and (1.4,-1.8)
Explanation:
To reflect (-1.4,-1.8) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -1.4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -1.8 is 1.8
To reflect (-1.4,1.8)  in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 1.8,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate  -1.4 is 1.4
So then reflection of (-1.4,-1.8) in the x-axis is (-1.4,1.8)
So the reflection of (-1.4,1.8)  in the y-axis is (1.4,-1.8)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Reflecting-Points-in-both-Axes-Question-68

Question 69.
STRUCTURE
Reflect a point in the x-axis followed by the y-axis. Then reflect the original point in the y-axis followed by the x-axis. Do you get the same results? Explain.
Answer:

REASONING Describe the possible location(s) of the point (x, y).
Question 70.
x > 0, y > 0
Answer:
For point (x,y) if x>0 then you would be going in the positive direction on the x axis. This eliminates quadrants II and III because the x axis is negative there. Now you’re down to either quadrant I or quadrant IV. Given that y>0, the y values on the y axis are more than 0 so they are becoming positive. This means that (x, y) must be in quadrant I.

Question 71.
x < 0, y < 0
Answer:
For Point (x,y) if x < 0 then you would be going in negative direction on the x axis , This elimates quadrants I and IV because the axis is positive there.Now you’re down to either Quadrant II or Quadrant III. Given that  y< 0,the values on the y axis are less than 0 so they are becoming negative. This means that (x,y) must be in Quadrant III.

Question 72. x > 0, y < 0
Answer:
For point (x,y) if x>0 then you would be going in the positive direction on the x axis. This eliminates quadrants II and III because the x axis is negative there. Now you’re down to either quadrant I or quadrant IV. Given that y<0, the y values on the y axis are less than 0 so they are becoming negative. This means that (x, y) must be in quadrant IV

Question 73. x > 0
Answer:
For point (x,y) if x>0 then you would be going in the positive direction on the x axis. This eliminates quadrants II and III because the x axis is negative there. Now you’re down to either quadrant I or quadrant IV.

Question 74.
y < 0
Answer:
Given that y<0, the y values on the y axis are less than 0 so they are becoming negative. It can be in Quadrant III and Quadrant IV.

Question 75.
x = 0, y = 0
Answer:
Either x or y or both are on the x or y axis

CRITICAL THINKING
Tell whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain your reasoning.
Question 76.
The x-coordinate of a point on the x-axis is zero.
Answer:
True
Explanation:
Since every point on the x – axis has no distance (zero distance) from the x – axis, therefore, the y – coordinate of every point lying on the x – axis is always zero. Thus, the coordinates of any point on the x – axis are of the form (x, 0), where x is the distance of the point from the y – axis

Question 77.
The y-coordinates of points in Quadrant III are positive.
Answer:
No. Never True
Explanation:
In the III Quadrant all X- coordinates are negative.
In the III Quadrant all Y- coordinates are negative.

Question 78.
The x-coordinate of a point in Quadrant II has the same sign as the y-coordinate of a point in Quadrant IV.
Answer:
True.
Explanation:
In Quadrant II x-coordinate of a point is negative
In Quadrant IV y-coordinate of a point  is negative.
Both the signs are negative and same.

Question 79.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the number of people who participate in a blood drive each year for 9 years. Display the data in a line graph. Then describe the change in the number of participants over time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 14
Answer:
Write the ordered pair
(1,140)
(2,136)
(3,134)
(4,132)
(5,131)
(6,135)
(7,136)
(8,142)
(9,145)
Plot and label the ordered pairs,then connect the ordered pairs with line segments.
The number of participants are decreased from year 1 to year 5. then later there is a increase in the participants from year 6 to year 9.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-79

Question 80.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the amount of carbon dioxide emissions of a country, relative to an environmental standard, each year for 7 years. Display the data in a line graph. Then describe the change in carbon dioxide emissions over time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 15
Answer:

Question 81.
PATTERNS
The table shows the total miles run through each of 18 weeks for a marathon training program.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 16
a. Create a table for the distance run during each week of training.
b. Display the data from part(a) in a line graph.
c. Explain the pattern shown in the graph. (a, b)
Answer:

Question 82.
LOGIC
Two points are plotted in the coordinate plane. Plot each of the following ordered pairs in the same coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.5 17
a. P (a, – b)
b. Q (- a, b)
c. R (c, – d)
d. S (- c, – d)
e. T (c, – a)
f. U (- d, – b)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-82
Explanation:
From the above Graph we know a , b c and d numbers
a = -3 ; b =2 ; c=-1 and d = -2
then now plot the given points.
a. P (a, – b) = (-3, -2)
b. Q (- a, b) = (3 , 2)
c. R (c, – d) = ( -1, 2)
d. S (- c, – d) = ( 1, 2)
e. T (c, – a) =( -1, 3)
f. U (- d, – b) = (2 , -2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-The-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-82-a

Lesson 8.6 Polygons in the Coordinate Plane

EXPLORATION 1

Drawing Polygons in the Coordinate Plane
Work with a partner.
a. Write three ordered pairs that meet the following requirements. Then plot the ordered pairs in a coordinate plane, like the one shown.
• Two of the ordered pairs have the same x-coordinates.
• Two of the ordered pairs have the same y-coordinates.
• Two of the points are in the same quadrant. The other point is in a different quadrant.
Answer:
The ordered pairs which follow above conditions are these points (1,2)  (1,3)(-1,2)

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 1
b. The points represent the vertices of a polygon. What conclusions can you make about the polygon?
Answer:
The points are joined with line segments. it forms a right angled triangle as shown in above graph.
c. Can you plot another point to form a rectangle? a trapezoid? If so, what measures of the quadrilateral can you calculate?
Answer:
From the below graph by marking point D(-1,3) it forms a Rectangle.
By marking another point you cant make trapezoid it is not possible.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-EXPLORATION-1

You can use ordered pairs to represent vertices of polygons. To draw a polygon in a coordinate plane, plot and connect the vertices.

Try It

Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane.
Question 1.
A (0, 0), B (5, 7), C (4, 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-1

Question 2.
W (4, 4), X (7, 4), Y (2 \(\frac{1}{2}\), – 2), Z (-\(\frac{1}{2}\), – 2)
Answer:
Y (2 \(\frac{1}{2}\), – 2) = Y ( \(\frac{5}{2}\), – 2) = Y(2.5,-2)
Z (-\(\frac{1}{2}\), – 2) = Z (-0.5 , -2)
W (4, 4), X (7, 4), Y(2.5,-2) , Z (-0.5 , -2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-2

Find the distance between the points.
Question 3.
(6, 6.5), (2, 6.5)
Answer:
d=√((x_2-x_1)²+(y_2-y_1)²)
d=√((6-2)²+(6.5-6.5)²)
d=√((4)²+(0)²)
d=√((4)²) = 4

Question 4.
(- 4, 2), (- 4, – 5)
Answer:
d=√((x_2-x_1)²+(y_2-y_1)²)
d=√((-4-(-4))²+(-5-2)²)
d=√((0)²+(-7)²)
d=√((-7)²) = √(49) = 7
Distance cant be negative

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

DRAWING A POLYGON
Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane.
Question 5.
A (- 5, – 7), B (- 2, 4), C (5, -1)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-5

Question 6.
D (-\(\frac{1}{2}\), 6), E (3, 1), F (0, – 4\(\frac{1}{2}\))
Answer:
D (-\(\frac{1}{2}\), 6) = D(-0.5, 6)
F (0, – 4\(\frac{1}{2}\))= F (0, – \(\frac{9}{2}\)) = F( 0 , 4.5)
D(-0.5, 6),E (3, 1), F( 0 , 4.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-6

FINDING DISTANCES Find the distance between the points.
Question 7.
(2, 7), (2, 9)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|9| – |7| = 2
So the distance between the points (2, 7), (2, 9) is 2

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-7

Question 8.
(- 3, – 8), (6, – 8)
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-8
Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-3| + |6| = 9
So the distance between the points (- 3, – 8), (6, – 8) is 9

Question 9.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which pair of points does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 2
Answer:
(6,-3) and (6,3) is different from other 3 points.

Question 10.
A digital map of your hometown is shown in a coordinate plane in which the coordinates are measured in miles. The map shows your house at (−2, −7), your school at(5, −7), and your friend’s house at (−2, 1). How far is your house from your school? How far is your house from your friend’s house?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 3
Answer:
Plot the points (−2, −7), (5, −7) and (−2, 1)
House is located at (-2,-7)
Friends house is located at ( – 2,1)
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|-7| + |1| = 7 + 1 = 8
So the distance between the points (-2,-7) (-2,1) is 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-10

Question 11.
You design a tree house using a coordinate plane in which the coordinates are measured in feet. The vertices of the floor are (−2, −3), (−2, 4), (5, 4), and (5, −3). Find the perimeter (in yards) and the area (in square yards) of the floor.
Answer:
Plots the points (−2, −3), (−2, 4), (5, 4), and (5, −3)
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|4| + |-3| = 4 + 3 = 7
So the distance between the points (−2, −3), (−2, 4), is 7
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|5| + |-2| = 5 + 2 = 7
So the distance between the points (5, 4), and (−2, 4),  is 7
The image formed is a Square as its length and breadth are equal
Area of square = s × s = 7 × 7 = 49
Perimeter of square = 4s = 4 × 7 = 28

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.6-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Question-11

Polygons in the Coordinate Plane Homework & Practice 8.6

Review & Refresh

Write an ordered pair corresponding to the point.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 4
Question 1.
Point A
Answer:
(1,4)
Explanation:
x coordinate is 1
y coordinate is 4
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 2.
Point B
Answer:
X coordinate is -2
Y coordinate is 2
(-2,2)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 3.
Point C
Answer:
X coordinate is -4
Y coordinate is 1
(-4,1)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 4.
Point D
Answer:
X coordinate is 3
Y coordinate is -3
(3,-3)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Write the percent as a decimal.
Question 5.
62%
Answer:
62 ÷ 100 = 0.62

Question 6.
7%
Answer:
7 ÷ 100 = 0.07

Question 7.
133%
Answer:
133 ÷ 100 = 1.33

Question 8.
0.45%
Answer:
0.45 ÷ 100 = 0.0045

Question 9.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of the time you spend online to the time your friend spends online. You are online for 6 hours. How many hours does your friend spend online?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 5
Answer:
Number of hours i was online = 6
Ratio of time spend online by me and my friend = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Time spend by my friend in online = \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{6}{x}\)
6 × 3 = x × 2
x = 18 ÷ 2
x=9
Time spend by my friend in online = 9 Hours.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

STRUCTURE Plot the ordered pairs in a coordinate plane. Then plot another point to form a rectangle. (See Exploration 1, p. 377.)
Question 10.
(3, 2), (3, 6), (- 5, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-10
Plot the points (3, 2), (3, 6), (- 5, 2)
In order to form a rectangle we need to mark (-5,6) as shown in the above graph .

Question 11.
(- 4, 7), (- 1, 7), (- 4, – 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-11
Explanation:
Plot the points (- 4, 7), (- 1, 7), (- 4, – 2)
In order to form a rectangle we need to mark (-1,-2) as shown in the above graph .

DRAWING A POLYGON Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane.
Question 12.
A (4, 7), B (6, 2), C(0, 0)
Answer:
Plot the points A (4, 7), B (6, 2), C(0, 0)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-12

Question 13.
D (\(\frac{1}{2}\), 2), E (- 5, 5), F (- 4, 1)
Answer:
D (\(\frac{1}{2}\), 2) = D (0.5 , 2)
Plot the points D (0.5 , 2), E (- 5, 5), F (- 4, 1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-13

Question 14.
G (1\(\frac{1}{2}\), 4), H(1\(\frac{1}{2}\), – 8), J (5, – 8), K (5, 4)
Answer:
G (1\(\frac{1}{2}\), 4)= G (\(\frac{3}{2}\), 4) = G ( 1.5 , 4)
H(1\(\frac{1}{2}\), -8)= H(\(\frac{3}{2}\), -8) = H ( 1.5 , -8)
Plot the points G ( 1.5 , 4), H ( 1.5 , -8), J (5, – 8), K (5, 4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-14

Question 15.
L (- 3, 2), M (- 3, 5), N (2, 2), P (2, – 1)
Answer:
L (- 3, 2), M (- 3, 5), N (2, 2), P (2, – 1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-15

Question 16.
Q (0, 4), R (- 3, 8), S (- 7, 4), T (- 1, – 2), U (7, – 2)
Answer:
Plot the points Q (0, 4), R (- 3, 8), S (- 7, 4), T (- 1, – 2), U (7, – 2)

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-16

Question 17.
V(- 4, – 2), W(- 3, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)), X (2, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)), Y (4, 0), Z (1, – 4)
Answer:
W(- 3, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\))= W(- 3, \(\frac{7}{2}\)) = W(-3, 3.5)
X (2, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\))= X (2, \(\frac{7}{2}\)) = X(2, 3.5)
Plot the points V(- 4, – 2),W(-3, 3.5), X(2, 3.5), Y (4, 0), Z (1, – 4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-17

Question 18.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend draws a triangle with vertices A(3, −1), B (4, 3), and C (−1, 2). Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 6
Answer:
No
Explanation:
As per the above graph the point A drawn as (3,1) not (3,-1).The Point A is drawn in Quadrant I, Here the x-coordinate is positive and y-coordinate is also positive.
The point (3,-1) will be represented in Quadrant IV, Here the x-coordinate is positive and y-coordinate is also negative.

FINDING DISTANCES Find the distance between the points.
Question 19.
(4, 6), (9, 6)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-19

Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|9| – |4| = 9-4=5
So the distance between the points (4, 6), (9, 6) is 5

Question 20.
(5, 10), (5, 4)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|10| – |4| = 2
So the distance between the points (5, 10), (5, 4) is 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-20

Question 21.
(3, 0), (3, – 2)
Answer:

Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the Sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|0| +  |-2| = 2
So the distance between the points (3, 0), (3, – 2) is 2

Question 22.
(5, – 2), (- 6, – 2)
Answer:

Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|5| + |-6| = 5 + 6=11
So the distance between the points (5, – 2), (- 6, – 2) is 11

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-22

Question 23.
(- 1, 12), (- 1, – 3)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the Sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|12| +  |-3| = 12 + 3 =15
So the distance between the points (- 1, 12), (- 1, – 3) is 15

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-23

Question 24.
(- 7, 8), (7, 8)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-7| + |7| = 7 + 7 = 14
So the distance between the points (- 7, 8), (7, 8) is 14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-24

Question 25.
(- 6, 5), (- 6, – 3.5)
Answer:

Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the Sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|5| +  |-3.5| = 5 + 3.5 = 8.5
So the distance between the points (- 6, 5), (- 6, – 3.5) is 8.5

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-25

Question 26.
(- 2.5, 3), (5, 3)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is sum of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-2.5| + |5| = 2.5 + 5 = 7.5
So the distance between the points (- 2.5, 3), (5, 3) is 7.5

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-26

Question 27.
(4.5, – 1.5), (4.5, 7.25)
Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|-1.5| + |7.25| = 1.5 + 7.25 = 8.75
So the distance between the points (4.5, – 1.5), (4.5, 7.25) is 8.75

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-27

GEOMETRY Find the perimeter and the area of the polygon with the given vertices.
Question 28.
C (1, 1), D (1, 4), E (4, 4), F (4, 1)
Answer:
The polygon formed is square .
The area of the square = s × s = 3 × 3 = 9
The perimeter of the square = 4 s = 4 × 3 = 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-28

Question 29.
J (- 1, – 2), K(- 6, – 2), L (- 6, – 8), M (- 1, – 8)
Answer:
After plotting the points the polygon formed is Rectangle
Area of Rectangle = length × breadth = 6 × 5 = 30
Perimeter of Rectangle = 2 (length + breadth) = 2 ( 6 + 5) = 22
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-29

Question 30.
N (- 4, 2), P (5, 2), Q (5, 5), R (- 4, 5)
Answer:
After plotting the points the polygon formed is Rectangle
Area of Rectangle = length × breadth = 9 × 3 = 27
Perimeter of Rectangle = 2 (length + breadth) = 2 ( 9 + 3) = 24
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-30

Question 31.
S (- 11, – 8), T (- 11, 0), U (0, 0), V (0, – 8)
Answer:
After plotting the points the polygon formed is Rectangle
Area of Rectangle = length × breadth = 11 × 8 = 88
Perimeter of Rectangle = 2 (length + breadth) = 2 ( 11 + 8) = 38
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-31

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The coordinates of several stars drawn in a coordinate plane are (8, 0), (7, −3), (3, −2.5), (3.5, 0.5), (−1, 3), (−3, 5), and (−7, 6). Plot the locations of the stars. Draw a constellation by connecting the points.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 7.1
Answer:
Plot the given points (8, 0), (7, −3), (3, −2.5), (3.5, 0.5), (−1, 3), (−3, 5), and (−7, 6).
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-32

Question 33.
STRUCTURE
The coordinate plane shows three vertices of a parallelogram. Find two possible points that could represent the fourth vertex.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-33
The fourth vertex is Z(-5,-3) as shown in the above graph.

Question 34.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Polygon JKLMNP represents a bus route. Each grid square represents 9 square miles. What is the shortest distance, in miles, from Station P to Station L using the bus route? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.6 8
Answer:
Shortest distance between L to P is from PNML = 9 × 9 = 81 square miles
(Total grids from PNML = 9)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-34

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
In a topographical map of a city, the vertices of the city limits are A(−7, 3), B (1, 3), C (1, −4), D (−3, −1.5), and E (−7, −1.5). The coordinates are measured in miles. What is the area of the city?
Answer:
Plot the given points A(−7, 3), B (1, 3), C (1, −4), D (−3, −1.5), and E (−7, −1.5)
Area of city = area of rectangle ABEF + area of triangle CDF
Area of Rectangle ABEF = length × breadth = 8 × 4.5 = 36
Area of triangle CDF = (Height × base) ÷ 2 =(4 × 2.5) ÷ 2 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-35

Question 36.
DIG DEEPER!
A map shows that the vertices of a backyard are W (−100, −70), X (−100, 0), Y (0, 0), and Z (−60, −70). The coordinates are measured in feet. The line segment XZseparates the backyard into a lawn and a garden. How many times larger is the lawn than the garden?
Answer:
Plot the given points W (−100, −70), X (−100, 0), Y (0, 0), and Z (−60, −70).
From the graph we can say that the 2 times larger the lawn than a garden.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-36

OPEN-ENDED Draw a polygon with the given conditions in a coordinate plane where the vertices are not all in the same quadrant.
Question 37.
a square with a perimeter of 20 units
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-37

Question 38.
a rectangle with a perimeter of 18 units
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-38

Question 39.
a rectangle with an area of 24 units2
Answer:
After plotting the points the polygon formed is Rectangle
Area of Rectangle = length × breadth = 6 × 4 = 24 units2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-39

Question 40.
a triangle with an area of 15 units2
Answer:
After plotting the points in the graph
Area of triangle = (Height × base) ÷ 2 =(6 × 5) ÷ 2 = 15 units2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-40

Question 41.
PRECISION
The vertices of a rectangle are (1, 0), (1, a), (5, a), and (5, 0). The vertices of a parallelogram are (1, 0), (2, b), (6, b), and (5, 0). The values of a and b are both positive and a > b. Which polygon has a greater area? Explain.
Answer:
The vertices of a rectangle are A(1, 0), B(1, a), C(5, a), and D(5, 0).
After plotting the above points in the graph we consider a = 3 to form a rectangle.
The vertices of a parallelogram are A(1, 0), E(2, b), F(6, b), and D(5, 0).
After plotting the above points in the graph we consider b = 2 to form a parallelogram
The area of the rectangle is greater than area of the parallelogram which can be easily noticed from the graph .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Polygons-in-the-Coordinate-Plane-Homework-Practice-8.6-Question-41

Lesson 8.7 Writing and Graphing Inequalities

EXPLORATION 1

Understanding Inequality Statements
Work with a partner. Create a number line on the floor with both positive and negative integers.
a. For each statement, stand at a number on your number line that makes the statement true. On what other numbers can you stand?
•Class starts more than 3 minutes late.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 1
Answer:
c > 3
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Exploration-1
above 3 all points are solutions for above inequality statement.
• You need at least 3 peaches for a recipe.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 2
Answer:
n  ≥ 3.
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Exploration-1-a-2
Here the mark starts at 3 the point is closed circle which means here 3 is also included .
3 and above will be the solutions for the inequality equations.

• The temperature is at most 3 degrees Celsius.
Answer:
t ≤ 3
Explanation:
Here in the number line we observe that a circle is marked at point 3 it means it is not included and less than 3 are the solutions of the inequality equations
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Exploration-1-a-3
• After playing a video game for 5 minutes, you have fewer than 3 points.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 3
Answer:
x+5 < 3
b. How can you represent the solutions of each statement in part(a) on a number line?
Answer:
An Inequality is a mathematical sentence that compares expressions. It contains symbols like < , > ,≤, ≥.
based on the phrases the symbol is used and expressions are written .

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 4

An inequality is a mathematical sentence that compares expressions. It contains the symbols <, >, ≤, or ≥. To write a word sentence as an inequality, look for the following phrases to determine where to place the inequality symbol.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 5

Try It

Write the word sentence as an inequality.
Question 1.
A number n is greater than 1.
Answer:
A number n is greater than 1
n          >           1
An inequality is n>1

Question 2.
Twice a number p is fewer than 7.
Answer:
Twice a number p is fewer than 7.
2p                  <        7
An inequality equation is 2p>7

Question 3.
A number w minus 3 is less than or equal to 10.
Answer:
An inequality equation is w-3 ≤ 10

Question 4.
A number z divided by 2 is at least −6.
Answer:
An inequality equation is z ÷ 2  ≥ -6

Tell whether 3 is a solution of the inequality.
Question 5.
b + 4 < 6
Answer:
b + 4 < 6
b < 6 – 4
b < 2
No as b is less than 2

Question 6.
9 – n ≥ 6
Answer:
9 – n ≥ 6
9 + 6 ≥ n
15 ≥ n

Question 7.
10 ≤ 18 ÷ x
Answer:
10 ≤ 18 ÷ x = x ≤ 18 ÷ 10
x ≤ 1.8

Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 8.
a < 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-8
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 9. f ≤ 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-9
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 10. n > 0
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-10
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 11.
– 3 ≤ p
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-11
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Write “both” inequalities.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 6
Answer:
Statement I – n ≤ 3
Statement II -n ≤ 3
Statement III -n ≤ 3
Statement IV-n ≥ 3 ≤

CHECKING SOLUTIONS Tell whether the given value is a solution of the inequality.
Question 13.
p + 5 ≤ 12; p = 6
Answer:
p + 5 ≤ 12
put p = 6
6 + 5 = 11
11 ≤ 12 is true
so the given value is the solution of the inequality .

Question 14.
w – 12 < 4; w = 16
Answer:
w – 12 < 4
put w = 16
16 – 12 =4
4 < 4 is not true
so the given value is not a solution for the inequality .

GRAPHING AN INEQUALITY Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 15.
n > 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-15
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 16.
q ≤ – 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-16

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 17.
5 < s
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.7-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Question-17
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 18.
To obtain a babysitting license, you still need to train for at least 6 hours and 45 minutes. Describe the amounts of time that you can train and still not obtain a license.
Answer:
Time required to train for babysitting license ≤ 6 hours 45 minutes.

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
The farthest away a drone can fly is 200 meters. A building is 380 meters tall. You control the drone from a floor that is halfway to the top of the building. Can the drone reach the top of the building? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 7
Answer:
Distance a drone can fly = 200 metres
Height of a building = 380 metres tall
floor height = half of the building = 380 ÷ 2 = 190 metres.
Distance a drone can travel from floor = 190 metres + 200 = 390 metres.
390 > Distance of a building .
390 > 380
It means that drone can reach the top of the building .

Question 20.
Each visit to a water park costs $19.95. An annual pass to the park costs $89.95. Write an inequality that represents the numbers of times you would need to visit the park for the pass to be a better deal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 8
Answer:
Cost of water park for 1 visit= $19.95
Cost of Annual pass to water park = $89.95.
Number of visits in Annual pass = $89.95 ÷ $19.95 = 4.5
Number of visits = n
n ≥ 4.5

Writing and Graphing Inequalities Homework & Practice 8.7

Review & Refresh

Find the distance between the points.
Question 1.
(2, 8), (6, 8)
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-1

Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|6| – |2| = 6 – 2 = 4
So the distance between the points (2, 8), (6, 8) is 4

Question 2.
(5, 9), (7, 9)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-2
Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|7| – |5| = 7- 5 = 2
So the distance between the points (5, 9), (7, 9) is 2

Question 3.
(- 3, 6), (- 3, – 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-3

Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same X-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|6| + |-3| = 6 + 3 = 9
So the distance between the points (- 3, 6), (- 3, – 2) is 9

Solve the equation. Check your solution
Question 4.
x + 3 = 12
Answer:
x + 3 = 12
x = 12 – 3
x = 9
solution is 9

Question 5.
x – 6 = 8
Answer:
x – 6 = 8
x = 8 + 6
x = 14
solution is 14

Question 6.
\(\frac{t}{12}\) = 4
Answer:
\(\frac{t}{12}\) = 4
t = 4 × 12
t = 48

Question 7.
8x = 72
Answer:
8x = 72
x = 72 ÷ 8
x = 9

Question 8.
A stack of boards is 24 inches high. e thickness of each board is \(\frac{3}{8}\) inch. How many boards are in the stack?
A. \(\frac{1}{9}\)
B. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
C. 9
D. 64
Answer:
Height of boards = 24 inches
Thickness of each board = \(\frac{3}{8}\) = 0.375 inch
Number of boards in stack = 24  ÷ 0.375 = 64 boards
Option D is the answer.

Find the area of the parallelogram.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 9
Answer:
Height of the Parallelogram = 3 inches
Base of the Parallelogram = 4 inches.
Area of the Parallelogram =  base × height = 3 × 4 =12 inches.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 10
Answer:
Height of the Parallelogram = 5 m
Base of the Parallelogram = 7 m
Area of the Parallelogram =  base × height = 7 × 5 = 35 metres

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 11
Answer:
Height of the Parallelogram = 15 m
Base of the Parallelogram = 8.5 m
Area of the Parallelogram =  base × height = 15 × 8.5 = 127.5 sq metres

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

UNDERSTANDING INEQUALITY STATEMENTS Choose a number that makes the statement true. What other numbers make the statement true? (See Exploration 1, p. 383.)

Question 12.
You are less than 3 miles from home.
Answer:
Y < 3.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-12

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 13.
You need at least $5 for lunch.
Answer:
Y  ≥ 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-13
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 14.
You buy more than 2 movie tickets.
Answer:
Y > 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-14
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 15.
A game lasts no more than 10 minutes.
Answer:
G ≤ 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-15
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

WRITING INEQUALITIES Write the word sentence as an inequality.
Question 16.
A number k is less than 10.
Answer:
k < 10

Question 17.
A number a is more than 6.
Answer:
n > 6

Question 18.
A number z is fewer than \(\frac{3}{4}\).
Answer:
z < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 19.
A number b is at least −3.
Answer:
b ≥ -3

Question 20.
One plus a number y is no more than −13.
Answer:
1 + Y ≤ – 13

Question 21.
A number x divided by 3 is at most 5.
Answer:
x ÷ 3 ≤ 5

CHECKING SOLUTIONS Tell whether the given value is a solution of the inequality.
Question 22.
x – 1 ≤ 7; x = 6
Answer:
x – 1 ≤ 7
put x =6
6 – 1 = 5
5 ≤ 7
above statement is True
Yes, the given value is a solution of the inequality.

Question 23.
y + 5 < 13; y = 17
Answer:
y + 5 < 13
put = 17
17 + 5 = 22
22 < 13
above statement is wrong
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

Question 24. 3z > 6; z = 3
Answer:
3z > 6
put z = 3
3 × 3 = 9
9 > 6
above statement is True
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

Question 25.
6 ≤ \(\frac{b}{2}\); b = 10
Answer:
6 ≤ \(\frac{b}{2}\)
6 ≤ \(\frac{10}{2}\)
6 ≤ 5
The above statement is wrong .
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

Question 26.
c + 2.5 < 4.3; c = 1.8
Answer:
c + 2.5 < 4.3
Put c = 1.8
1.8 + 2.5 = 4.3
4.3 < 4.3
above statement is wrong
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

Question 27.
a ≤ 0; a = -5
Answer:
a ≤ 0
put a = -5
– 5 ≤ 0
above statement is True
So, the given value is not a solution of the inequality.

MATCHING Match the inequality with its graph.
Question 28.
x ≥ – 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-28
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 29.
x < – 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-29
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 30.
x > – 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-30
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 31.
x ≤ – 2
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 12
Option C is correct.
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

GRAPHING AN INEQUALITY Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 32.
a > 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-32
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 33.
n ≥ 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-33
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 34.
3 ≥ x
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-34
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 35.
y < \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
y < \(\frac{1}{2}\) = y < 0.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-35
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 36.
x < \(\frac{2}{9}\)
Answer:
x < \(\frac{2}{9}\)
x < 0.2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-36
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 37. -3 ≥ c
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-37
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 38. m > – 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-38
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 39.
0 ≤ b
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-39
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 40.
1.5 > f
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-40
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 41.
t ≥ – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
t ≥ – \(\frac{1}{2}\) = t ≥ – 0.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-41
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 42.
t ≥ – 1.6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-42
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 43.
\(\frac{7}{3}\) ≥ z
Answer:
\(\frac{7}{3}\) ≥ z
2.3 ≥ z
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-43
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

OPEN-ENDED Write an inequality and a word sentence that represent the graph.
Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 13
Answer:
n < 1
Here in the number line the 1 is not selected and all the numbers are less than 1 so the inequality equation is
n < 1
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 14
Answer:
Here in the number line the 1 is selected and all the numbers are less than 1 so the inequality equation is
n ≤ 1
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 15
Answer:
Here in the number line the 1 is selected and all the numbers are greater than -4 so the inequality equation is
-4 ≤ n
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 47.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 16
Answer:
Here in the number line the 5 is not selected and all the numbers are greater than 0 so the inequality equation is
0 < n
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend graphs the inequality. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 17
Answer:
Yes, my friend is true .
Here in the number line the 1 is not selected and all the numbers are greater than 1 so the inequality equation is
x > 1
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 18
Answer:
Here in the number line the -1 is not selected and all the numbers are less than -1 so the inequality equation is
-1 > x
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

Question 50.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The world record for the farthest flight by hoverboard is 2252.4 meters. Write and graph an inequality that represents the distances that would set a new world record.
Answer:
Distance of the farthest flight by hoverboard = 2252.4
For new record the distance should be more than this distance.
Therefore the inequality of a new world record is w > 2252.4

Question 51.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You are fishing and are allowed to keep at most 3 striped bass. Each striped bass must be no less than 18 inches long.
a. Write and graph an inequality that represents the numbers of striped bass you are allowed to keep.
b. Write and graph an inequality that represents the lengths of striped bass you are allowed to keep.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 19
Answer:
Number of striped bass allowed = n ≤ 3
Length of stripped bass = l ≥ 18
Answer a :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-51-b
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Answer b:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-51-b

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 52.
REASONING
You have $33. You want to buy a necklace and one other item from the list.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 20
a. Write an inequality that represents the situation.
b.Can the other item be a T-shirt? Explain.
c. Can the other item be a book? Explain.
Answer a :
Total Amount  = t ≤ $33

Answer b:
Yes
Explanation:
Total Amount = $33
Amount for necklace = $16
Amount for T-Shirt = $15
Total Amount for necklace and T-Shirt = 16 + 15 = 31.
Therefore the required amount is 31 which is less than 33.
So it is possible to buy both .

Answer c :
No
Total Amount = $33
Amount for necklace = $16
Amount for Book = $20
Total Amount for necklace and Book = 16 + 20 = 36.
Therefore the required amount is 36 which is greater than 33.
So it is not possible to buy both .

Question 53.
LOGIC
For a food to be labeled low sodium, there must be no more than 140 milligrams of sodium per serving.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 21
a. Write and graph an inequality that represents the amount of sodium in a low-sodium serving.
Answer:
Amount of sodium in a low-sodium serving = S ≤ 140
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-53-a
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

b.Write and graph an inequality that represents the amount of sodium in a serving that does not qualify as low sodium.
Answer:
Amount of sodium in a low-sodium serving which doesnot qualify = S > 140
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-53-b
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions

c. Does the food represented by the nutrition facts label qualify as a low-sodium food? Explain.
Answer:
As per the above picture
Total sodium = 300 grams.
Sodium used for nutrition facts label qualify = 13 % of 300 grams = (13 × 300) ÷ 100 = 3 × 13 = 39 grams.
Amount of sodium in a low-sodium serving =140 milligrams = 0.149 grams
So the food represented by the nutrition facts label doesnot qualify as a low-sodium food.

CRITICAL THINKING Determine whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain your reasoning.
Question 54.
A number that is a solution of the inequality x > 5 is also a solution of the inequality x ≥ 5.
Answer:
Sometimes
Explanation:
Only when 5 is not a solution . above 5 all will be the solutions for the equations.

Question 55.
A number that is a solution of the inequality 5 ≤ x is also a solution of the inequality x > 5.
Answer:
Sometimes.
Explanation:
Only when 5 is not a solution . above 5 all will be the solutions for the equations.

5Question 6.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A subway ride costs $1.50. A 30-day subway pass costs $36. Write an inequality that represents the numbers of subway rides you would need to take for the pass to be a better deal.
Answer:
Cost of one ride of subway = $1.50
cost of 30-day subway = $36.
Number of rides in 30-day subway = $36 ÷ $1.50 = 24 rides.
Yes it is a fair deal because you pay only for 24 rides out of 30 rides.
r ≤ 24 .

Question 57.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Fifty people are seated in a movie theater. The maximum capacity of the theater is 425 people. Write an inequality that represents the numbers of additional people who can be seated.
Answer:
Number of people in theater = 50
Maximum Capacity = 425
The Numbers of additional people who can be seated = 50 + x < 425 .

Question 58.
CRITICAL THINKING
The map shows the elevations above sea level for an area of land.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.7 22
a Graph the possible elevations of A. Write the set of elevations as two inequalities.
Answer:
Point A = 0 – 100 ft
possible elevations of A ≤ 100.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Writing-Graphing-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.7-Question-58-a
b. Graph the possible elevations of C. How can you write this set of elevations as a single inequality? Explain.
Answer:
Point C = 400 – 500
possible elevations of  400 < C ≤  500.

c. What is the elevation of B? Explain.
Answer:
Point C = 200 – 300
possible elevations of  200 < B ≤  300.

Lesson 8.8 Solving Inequalities

EXPLORATION 1

Using Tape Diagrams
Work with a partner. In Section 6.2 Exploration 1, the tape diagram below was used to model the equation x + 4 = 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 1
a. Suppose that x +4 is greater than 12. How can you change the equation to represent the new relationship between x + 4 and 12?
Answer:
x + 4 ≥ 12
To Change the equation to represent the new relationship
x + 4 ≥ 12   subtract 4 from both sides of the equation we get ,
x ≥ 8
b. A student finds the possible values of x using the tape diagrams below. What is the solution? How can you find the solution algebraically?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 2.1
Answer:
None of the above diagrams help us to know the solutions.
c. Describe the relationship between 4x and 20 as shown by the tape diagram below. What can you conclude about x?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 2
Answer:
4x + y  = 20
Explanation:
Total 4x is not equal to 20 something if we add to 4x then only the sum becomes 20 .

Try It

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 1.
x – 2 < 3
Answer:
x – 2 < 3
add 2 on both sides
x -2 + 2 < 3 + 2
x < 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-1

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 2.
10 ≥ z – 1
Answer:
10 ≥ z – 1 ( add by 1)
11 ≥ z
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-2

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 3.
y + 2 ≥ 17
Answer:
y + 2 ≥ 17
y ≥ 17 – 2 ( subtract by 2)
y ≥ 15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-3

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 4.
p ÷ 3 ≥ 2
Answer:
p ÷ 3 ≥ 2
p ≥ 2 × 3 ( multiply by 3 )
p ≥ 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-4

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 5.
1 < \(\frac{s}{7}\)
Answer:
1 < \(\frac{s}{7}\)
7 < s (multiply by 7)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-5

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 6. 11k ≤ 33
Answer:
11k ≤ 33
k ≤ 3 (divided by 11 )
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-6

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 7. \(\frac{3}{2}\)m > 1
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{2}\)m > 1
1.5m > 1 divide by 1.5
m > 0.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-7
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{5}\)q ≤ 6
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{5}\)q ≤ 6
0.6q ≤ 6
divide by 0.6
q ≤ (6 ÷ 0.6 )
q ≤ 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-8
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 9.
5 > \(\frac{5t}{6}\)
Answer:
5 > \(\frac{5t}{6}\)
multiply by 6
5 × 6 > 5t
30 > 5t
divide by 5
6 > t
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-9

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

SOLVING INEQUALITIES Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 10.
n + 6 < 10
Answer:
n + 6 < 10
subtract 6 on both sides
n < 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-10

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions.Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 11.
h – 13 ≥ 7
Answer:
h – 13 ≥ 7
add 13 on both sides
h ≥ 20
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-11

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 12.
5g > 45
Answer:
5g > 45
divide by 9 on both sides
g > 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-12

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 13.
\(\frac{3}{4}\)k ≤ 6
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{4}\)k ≤ 6
divide by \(\frac{4}{3}\)
k ≤ 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-13

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

OPEN-ENDED
Write an inequality that the graph represents. Then use the Addition Property of Inequality to write another inequality that the graph represents.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 3
Answer:
x > 2
Then add 2 on both sides
x + 2 > 4.

Question 15.
REASONING
How is the graph of the solution of 2x ≥ 10 different from the graph of the solution of 2x = 10?
Answer:
2x ≥ 10
divide by 2
x ≥ 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Lesson-8.8-Solving-Inequalities-Question-15-a
Here including 5 and above all are the solutions of the given inequality equation .

Question 16
OPEN-ENDED
Write two inequalities that have the same solution set: one that you can solve using division and one that you can solve using subtraction.
Answer:

Question 17.
A small pizza costs $4.50, and a salad costs $3.75. You plan to buy two small pizzas and four salads. Write and solve an inequality to find the additional amounts you can spend to get free delivery.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 4
Answer:
Cost of pizza = $4.50
Cost of Salads = $3.75.
Free delivery on more than or equal to $40
d ≥ 40
Cost of  2 pizza = $4.50 × 2 = $9
Cost of 4 Salads = $3.75. × 4 = $15
Total Amount = $9 +$ 15 = $ 26.
Therefore , It is less than 40$ so free delivery is not possible .

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
Students at a playground are divided into 5 groups with at least 6 students in each group.
a. Find the possible numbers of students at the playground.
b. Suppose the students are divided into 5 equal groups. How does this change your answer in part(a)?
Answer a :
Number of Groups = 5
Number of students in each group = 6
Total students at play ground = 5 × 6 = 30
Answer b :
It doesnot change the answer because earlier there are 5 groups and even now we have 5 groups .

Solving Inequalities Homework & Practice 8.8

Review & Refresh

Tell whether the given value is a solution of the inequality.
Question 1.
n + 4 > 15; n = 9
Answer:
n + 4 > 15;
Put n = 9 in LHS
9 + 4 = 13
13 > 15 The statement is wrong
So it is not a solution for the given inequality .

Question 2.
s – 12 ≤ 8; s = 20
Answer:
s – 12 ≤ 8
Put s = 20 in LHS
20 – 12
8 ≤ 8 The statement is wrong as it is equal to 8 but not greater than 8 .
So it is not a solution for the given inequality .

Question 3.
\(\frac{z}{4}\) ≥ 7; z = 32
Answer:
latex]\frac{z}{4}[/latex] ≥ 7 (mutlipy by 4)
z ≥ 7 × 4
z ≥ 28
Put z = 32
32 ≥ 28 is true
as 32 is greater than 28.
so the given number is the solution for the inequality equation.

Question 4.
6g < 48; g = 8
Answer:
6g < 48
Put g = 8 in LHS
6 × 8 = 48
48 < 48 is wrong as both are equal .
so the given number is not a solution for the inequality equation .

Find the area of the triangle.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 5
Answer:
Height of the triangle = 8mm
Base of the triangle = 14mm
Area of the Triangle = base × height = 14 × 8 =112 sq.mm

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 6
Answer:
Height of the triangle = 6 inches
Base of the triangle = 3.5 inches
Area of the Triangle = base × height = 6 × 3.5 = 21 sq.inches

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 7
Answer:
Height of the triangle = 6 yd
Base of the triangle = 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2.5 yd
Area of the Triangle = base × height = 6 × 2.5 = 15 sq.yds

Write the product as a power.
Question 8.
7 × 7
Answer:
72
As we have 2 7 ‘s  so the power is 2
Explanation:
The exponent is the amount of times the number will be multiplied by itself.

Question 9.
12 × 12 × 12 × 12
Answer:
124
As we have 4,12 ‘s  so the power is 4
Explanation:
The exponent is the amount of times the number will be multiplied by itself.

Question 10.
1.4 × 1.4 × 1.4
Answer:
1.43
As we have 3, 1.4 ‘s  so the power is 3
Explanation:
The exponent is the amount of times the number will be multiplied by itself.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING TOOLS Describe the relationship shown by the tape diagram. What can you conclude about x? (See Exploration 1, p. 391.)
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 8
Answer:
1 + 2x < 9
Explanation:
1 + 2x is some part of 9 but not equal to 9 as 9 is greater than 1 + 2x. so the inequality equation is 1 + 2x < 9

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 9
Answer:
6x > 24
Explanation:
24 is some part of 6x . an 6x is greater than 24. So the inequality equation is 6x > 24

SOLVING INEQUALITIES Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 13.
x – 4 < 5
Answer:
x – 4 < 5 (add 4)
x < 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-13

Question 14. 5 + h > 7
Answer:
14. 5 + h > 7
14.5 move towards RHS we get
h > 7 -14.5
h > – 7.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-14

Question 15.
3 ≥ y – 2
Answer:
3 ≥ y – 2
add 2 on both sides
5 ≥ y
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-15

Question 16.
y – 21 < 85
Answer:
y – 21 < 85
add 21 on both sides
y < 106
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-16

Question 17. 18 > 12 + x
Answer:
18 > 12 + x
subtract 12 on both sides we get ,
6 > x
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-17

Question 18.
\(\frac{m}{8}\) < 4
Answer:
\(\frac{m}{8}\) < 4
Multiply by 8 on both sides we get,
m < 8 × 4
m < 32
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-18

Question 19. n ÷ 6 > 2
Answer:
n ÷ 6 > 2
multiply by 6 on both sides we get,
n > 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-19

Question 20.
12x < 96
Answer:
12x < 96
divide by 12 on both sides we get,
x< 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-20

Question 21.
\(\frac{1}{11}\)c ≥ 9
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{11}\)c ≥ 9
multiply by 11 on both sides we get,
c ≥ 9 × 11
c ≥ 99
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-21

Question 22.
8w ≤ 72
Answer:
8w ≤ 72
divide by 8 on both sides we get,
w ≤ 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-22

Question 23.
7.2 < x + 4.2
Answer:
7.2 < x + 4.2
subtract 4.2 on both sides we get,
3 < x
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-23

Question 24.
12.7 ≥ s – 5.3
Answer:
12.7 ≥ s – 5.3
add 5.3 on both sides we get,
12.7 + 5.3 ≥ s
18 ≥ s
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-24

Question 25.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ≤ \(\frac{1}{2}\) + n
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ≤ \(\frac{1}{2}\) + n
0.75 ≤ 0.5 + n
subtract 0.5 on both sides we get,
0.25 ≤ n

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-25

Question 26.
7.5 p ≤ 45
Answer:
7.5 p ≤ 45
divide by 7.5 we get,
p ≤ 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-26

Question 27.
\(\frac{5}{9}\)v ≤ 45
Answer:
\(\frac{5}{9}\)v ≤ 45
multiply by \(\frac{9}{5}\) on both sides we get,
v ≤ 81
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-27

Question 28.
\(\frac{5x}{8}\) ≥ 30
Answer:
\(\frac{5x}{8}\) ≥ 30
Multiply by \(\frac{8}{5}\) on both sides we get,
x ≥ 48
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-28

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend solves the inequality. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 10
Answer:
No ,
Explanation:
we subtracted 19 on both sides we get
28 – 9 = 19
t – 9 – 9 = t – 18
so the inequality equation after change is
19 ≥ t – 18.

Question 30
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 11
Answer:
Yes it is right.

WRITING INEQUALITIES Write the word sentence as an inequality. Then solve the inequality.
Question 31.
Five more than a number p is less than 17.
Answer:
5 + p < 17

Question 32.
Three less than a number b is more than 15.
Answer:
3 – b > 15

Question 33.
Eight times a number n is less than 72.
Answer:
8n < 72

Question 34.
A number t divided by 32 is at most 4.25.
Answer:
t ÷ 32 ≤ 4.25

Question 35.
225 is no less than \(\frac{3}{4}\) times a number w.
Answer:
225 ≥ \(\frac{3}{4}\)w

Question 36.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your carry-on bag can weigh at most 40 pounds. Write and solve an inequality that represents how much more weight you can add to the bag and still meet the requirement.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 12
Answer:
Weight of a bag ≤ 40
weight of the bag as per above image = 22
how much weight can be added = 40 – 22 = 18
22 + 18 ≤ 40

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
It costs $x for a round-trip bus ticket to the mall. You have $24. Write and solve an inequality that represents how much money you can spend for the bus ticket and still have enough to buy a hat that costs $18.99.
Answer:
Cost of bus ticket = $x
Total Amount with me = $24
Cost of Hat = $18.99
Amount can spend for bus ticket = $24 – $18.99 = $5.01
So Cost of bus ticket can be $5.01 ≥ x

Question 38.
GEOMETRY
The length of a rectangle is 8 feet, and its area is less than 168 square feet. Write and solve an inequality that represents the possible widths of the rectangle.
Answer:
Length of a rectangle = 8 feet.
Area of Rectangle < 168
Width of rectangle < Area ÷ length = 168 ÷ 8 = 21
width of rectangle can be < 21

Question 39.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A ticket to a dinosaur exhibit costs $7.50. A one-year pass to the exhibit costs $30. When is the one-year pass a better deal? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 13
Answer:
Cost of ticket = $7.50
Cost of 1 year pass =$30
Number of times can go in one year = 30 ÷7.50 =4
The deal is fair because you pay only for 4 times to go and rest of the year it will be free.
So the one year pass is more beneficial.

Question 40.
REASONING
A thrill ride at an amusement park holds a maximum of 12 people per ride.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 14
a. Find the possible numbers of rides needed for 15,000 people.
Answer:
Number of people for 1 ride = 12
Number of rides for 15,000 people = 15000 ÷ 12 = 1250 rides.

b. Is it reasonable for 15,000 people to ride the thrill ride in one day? Explain.
Answer:
The park opens from 10:00 a.m to 10:00 p.m
we cannot say the 15,000 people can ride in 1 day or not because we dont know for how much time will one ride takes.

Question 41.
OPEN-ENDED
Give an example of a real-life situation in which you can list all the solutions of an inequality. Give an example of a real-life situation in which you cannot list all the solutions of an inequality.
Answer:
Real-life situation of Inequalities.

Speed limit Legal speed on the highway ≤ 65 miles per hour
Credit card Monthly payment ≥ 10% of your balance in that billing cycle
Text messaging Allowable number of text messages per month ≤ 250
Travel time Time needed to walk from home to school ≥ 18 minutes

real-life situation in which you cannot list all the solutions of an inequality are Money . money should be given exactly not greater or lesser.

Question 42.
LOGIC
Describe the solution of 7x < 7x. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
7x < 7x
No solution.
Explanation:
this equation is wrong as both are equal . no solution can be possible if the inequality equation is wrong.

Question 43.
NUMBER SENSE
The possible values of x are given by x− 3 ≥ 2. What is the least possible value of 5x?
Answer:
x− 3 ≥ 2
add 3 on both sides we get,
x ≥ 5
Multiply by 5 on both sides we get,
5x ≥ 5 × 5
5x ≥ 25

SOLVING INEQUALITIES Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 44.
x + 9 – 3 ≤ 14
Answer:
x + 9 – 3 ≤ 14
x + 6 ≤ 14
subtract 6 on both sides we get ,
x≤ 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-44

Question 45.
44 > 7 + s + 26
Answer:
44 > 7 + s + 26
44 > 33 + s
subtract 33 on both sides we get,
11 > s
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-45

Question 46.
6.1 – 0.3 ≥ c + 1
Answer:
6.1 – 0.3 ≥ c + 1
5.8 ≥ c + 1
Subtract 1 on both sides we get,
4.8 ≥ c
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-46

Question 47.
2n < 4.6 × 12
Answer:
2n < 4.6 × 12
2n < 55.2
Divide by 2 on both sides we get,
n < 27.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-47

Question 48.
32 ≥ 2h + 6h
Answer:
32 ≥ 2h + 6h
32 ≥ 8h
Divide by 8 on both sides we get,
4 ≥ h
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-48

Question 49.
2\(\frac{2}{5}\)b – 1\(\frac{3}{10}\)b ≤ 6\(\frac{3}{5}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{12}{5}\)b – \(\frac{13}{10}\)b ≤ \(\frac{33}{5}\)
2.4b – 1.3b ≤  6.6
1.1b ≤ 6.6
Divide by 1.1 on both sides we get,
b ≤ 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-49

Question 50.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The high score for a video game is 36,480. Your current score is 34,280. Each dragonfly you catch is worth 1 point. You also get a 1000-point bonus for reaching 35,000 points. Find the possible numbers of dragonflies you can catch to earn a new high score.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 15
Answer:
High score of video game = 36,480
Current score =34,280
Score required to get 35,000 points = 35000 – 34280 = 720
You need to catch 720 dragon flies to get 35000 score after that 1000 bonus will be added so pesent score will be
34280 + 720 +1000 =36000
For new record how many dragon flies we should catch = 36480 – 36000 = 480
More than 480 then new record will be formed.
so possible number of dragon flies should we  catch for new record = 720 + 480 = 1200
more than 1200 .

Question 51.
REASONING
A winning football team more than doubled the offensive yards gained by its opponent. The opponent gained 272 offensive yards. The winning team had 80 offensive plays. Find the possible numbers of yards per play for the winning team. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Opponent offensive yards = 272
Winning team offensive yards = double he offensive yards gained by its opponent =20 × 272 = 5440
Winning Team offensive plays = 80
possible numbers of yards per play for the winning team = 5440 yards.

Question 52.
DIG DEEPER!
You complete two events of a triathlon. Your goal is to finish with an overall time of less than 100 minutes.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 16
a. Find the possible numbers of minutes you can take to finish the running event and still meet your goal.
b. The running event is 3.1 miles long. Estimate how many minutes it would take you to run 3.1 miles. Would this time allow you to reach your goal? Explain your reasoning.
Answer a :
Total Time is less than 100 minutes.
Time for swimming = 18.2
Time for Biking = 45..4
Time for Running = 100 – 18.2 – 45.4 =36.4
Time for running should be lesser or equal to 36.4 to reach the goal time.
Answer b:
Time for running should be lesser or equal to 36.4 to reach the goal time.
Goal length =3.1 miles.
To reach goal he should travel 3.1 miles in less than or equal to 36.4 minutes.

SOLVING INEQUALITIES Graph the numbers that are solutions of both inequalities.
Question 53.
x + 7 > 9 and 8x ≤ 64
Answer:
x + 7 > 9
subtract 7 on both sides we get,
x >2

8x ≤ 64
Divide by 8 on both sides we get,
x ≤ 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-53

Question 54.
z – 3 ≤ 8 and 6z < 72
Answer:
z – 3 ≤ 8
add 3 on both sides we get,
z ≤ 11

6z < 72
Divide by 6 on both sides we get,
z < 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-54

Question 55. w + 5 ≥ 8 and 4w > 20
Answer:
w + 5 ≥ 8
subtract 5 on both sides we get,
w ≥ 3

4w > 20
Divide 4 on both sides we get,
w > 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-55

Question 56.
g – 6 ≤ 1 and 3g ≥ 21
Answer:
g – 6 ≤ 1
Add 6 on both sides we get,
g ≤ 7

3g ≥ 21
Divide by 3 on both sides we get,
g ≥ 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-56

Question 57.
2.7 + k ≥ 5.3 and 0.8k ≤ 3.36
Answer:
2.7 + k ≥ 5.3
Subtract 2.7 on both sides we get,
k ≥ 2.6

0.8k ≤ 3.36
Divide by 0.8 on both sides we get,
k ≤ 4.2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-57

Question 58.
p + \(\frac{3}{4}\) < 3 and \(\frac{1}{4}\)p > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Answer:
p + \(\frac{3}{4}\) < 3
p + 0.75 < 3
Subtract 0.75 on both sides we get,
p < 2.25

\(\frac{1}{4}\)p > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
0.25p > 0.375
Divide by 0.25 on both sides we get,
p > 1.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Solving-Inequalities-Homework-Practice-8.8-Question-58

Question 59.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are selling items from a catalog for a school fundraiser. Find the range of sales that will earn you at least $40 and at most $50.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane 8.8 17
Answer:
Earn $5 for every $50 in sales + take one catalog.
$50 > 1 + $5
If you sell at most $50 that is $50 ≤ if it equal to 50 only  you get $5 and 1 catalog.
If you sellat least $40 that is 40 ≥ if it is greater or equal to 40 only you get $5 and 1 catalog .

CRITICAL THINKING Let a > b> 0 and x > y> 0. Tell whether the statement is always true. Explain your reasoning.
Question 60.
a + x > b + y
Answer:
It is true
Explanation:
a > b> 0 and x > y> 0. in this both a and x are greater numbers. and if both numbers are added then the resultant will always be greater.

Question 61.
a – x > b – y
Answer:
Cant say as it depends on the values.
Explanation:
take a example take a=2 b=1 x=3 y= 2
2-3 = -2
1-2 = -1
-2 < -1
It is not true

Question 62.
ax > by
Answer:
It is true
Explanation:
a > b> 0 and x > y> 0. in this both a and x are greater numbers. and if both numbers are multipied then the resultant will always be greater.

Question 63.
\(\frac{a}{x}\) > \(\frac{y}{b}\)
Answer:
Cant say as it depends on the values.

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
You use a coordinate plane to design a kite for a competition. The vertices of the design are A(0, 0), B(13.5, 9), C(27, 0), and D(13.5, −36). The coordinates are measured in inches. Find the least number of square yards of fabric you need to make the kite.

Understand the problem.
You know the vertices of your kite design in a coordinate plane, where the coordinates are measured in inches. You are asked to find the least number of square yards of fabric needed to make the kite.

Make a plan.
First, draw a diagram of the design in a coordinate plane. Then decompose the figure into two triangles to find the area of the kite in square inches. Finally, convert the area from square inches to square yards.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cc 1

Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer:

Question 2.
You have $240 in a savings account. You deposit $60 per month. The tape diagram represents the ratio of money deposited to money withdrawn each month. Find the monthly change in your account balance. How long will it take for the account to have a balance of $0? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cc 2
Answer:

Question 3.
A cord made of synthetic fiber can support 630 pounds, which is at least 450% of the weight that can be supported by a cord made of steel. Graph the possible weights that can be supported by the steel cord.
Answer:
Synthentic fibre = 630 pounds

Performance Task

Launching a CubeSat
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Designing a CubeSat.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cc 3

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cr 1

Graphic Organizers

You can use a Summary Triangle to explain a concept. Here is an example of a Summary Triangle for integers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cr 2

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
1. opposites
2. rational number
3. absolute value
4. coordinate plane
5. inequalities
6. solving inequalities using addition or subtraction
7. solving inequalities using multiplication or division
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cr 3

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 1

8.1 Integers (pp. 345–350)
Learning Target: Understand the concept of negative numbers and that they are used along with positive numbers to describe quantities.

Write a positive or negative integer that represents the situation.
Question 1.
An elevator goes down 8 floors.
Answer:
Down indicates negative number
-8

Question 2.
You earn $12.
Answer:
Earn indicates + number
so , +$12

Graph the integer and its opposite
Question 3.
-16
Answer:
The opposite of -16 is 16

Question 4.
13
Answer:
The opposite of 13 is -13

Question 5.
4
Answer:
The opposite of 4 is -4

Question 6.
– 100
Answer:
The opposite of -100 is 100

Identify the integer represented by the point on the number line.
Question 7.
A
Answer:
The point A represents 1
Explanation:
As it is exactly marked between 0 and 2

Question 8.
B
Answer:
The point B represents 10
Explanation:
It is marked on point 10

Question 9.
C
Answer:
The point C represents 7
Explanation:
As it is marked exactly in between 6 and 8.

Question 10.
D
Answer:
The point D represents -6
Explanation:
It is marked on point -6

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 2

8.2 Comparing and Ordering Integers (pp. 351–356)
Learning Target: Compare and order integers.

Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 11
Answer:
4 > -7
Explanation:
All positive numbers are greater than negative numbers.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 12
Answer:
-1 < 0
Explanation:
All positive numbers are greater than negative numbers.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 13
Answer:
-5 > -8
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Order the integers from least to greatest.
Question 14.
– 5, 4, 2, – 3, – 1
Answer:
-5, -3, -1, 2, 4

Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 15.
5, – 20, – 10, 10, 15
Answer:
-20, -10, 5, 10, 15
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 16.
– 7, – 12, 9, 2, – 8
Answer:
-12, -8, -7, 2, 9
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 17.
Order the temperatures − 3°C, 8°C, − 12°C, − 7°C, and 0°C from coldest to warmest.

Answer: 
− 12°C, − 7°C, − 3°C, 0°C, 8°C
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 18.
Your teacher writes five different integers on a note card that are between −10 and 14. When the integers are ordered from least to greatest, the middle number is 1. How many of the integers are positive? negative? Explain.
Answer:

8.3 Rational Numbers (pp. 357–362)
Learning Target: Compare and order rational numbers.

Graph the number and its opposite.
Question 19.
–\(\frac{2}{5}\)
Answer:
–\(\frac{2}{5}\) = -0.4
The opposite of -0.4 is 0.4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines,-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Review-Question-19
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 20.
1\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer:
1\(\frac{3}{4}\)=\(\frac{7}{4}\) = 1.75
The opposite of 1.75 is -1.75
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines,-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Review-Question-20
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 21.
– 1.2
Answer:
The opposite of -1.2 is 1.2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines,-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Review-Question-21
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Question 22.
2.75
Answer:
The opposite of 2.75 is -2.75
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines,-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Chapter-Review-Question-22
Explanation :
For any given integer ‘a’, the opposite integer is found at the same distance from 0 on the number line, but on the other side.
So, the opposite integer of integer ‘a’, is ‘-a’ on the number line, but on the other side of 0.

Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 23
Answer:
-2\(\frac{1}{6}\) = – = -2.1
-2\(\frac{5}{6}\) = –\(\frac{17}{6}[/late[latex]\frac{13}{6}\)x] =-2.8

-2.1 > -2.8
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 24
Answer:
–\(\frac{1}{3}\)= -0.3
–\(\frac{1}{8}\) = – 0.125
-0.3  <  -0.125
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 25
Answer:
-3.27 < -2.68
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 26.
– 2.04, – 3, – 2.4, – 2.19, – 5.8
Answer:
-5.8 < -3 < 2.4 < -2.19 < -2.04
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 27.
– 3\(\frac{7}{8}\), 4, – 3\(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Answer:
– 3\(\frac{7}{8}\) = – \(\frac{31}{8}\) = -3.8
– 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) = –\(\frac{15}{4}\) = – 3.75
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.5
\(\frac{1}{6}\) = 0.16
-3.8, 4, -3.75, 0.5, 0.16
-3.8<-3.75<0.16<0.5<4
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 28.
Write a number that is greater than −7.81 and less than −7.
Answer:
-7>x>-7.81
it can be -7.1, -7.2 , ……

Question 29.
A dog buries a small bone −1\(\frac{5}{6}\) inches into the dirt. The dog buries a larger bone −1\(\frac{3}{4}\) inches into the dirt. Which bone is buried deeper?
Answer:
Small bone buried at −1\(\frac{5}{6}\) = −\(\frac{11}{6}\) = -1.83
Larger bone buried at −1\(\frac{3}{4}\) = −1\(\frac{7}{4}\) = – 1.75
Distance cant be in negative just compare the values and say which bone is buried deepest.
Small bone is buried deeper .

8.4 Absolute Value (pp. 363–368)
Learning Target: Understand the concept of absolute value.

Find the absolute value.
Question 30.
|- 8|
Answer:
The Absolute value of |- 8| = 8
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 31.
|13|
Answer:
The Absolute value of |13| = 13
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 32.
|3 \(\frac{6}{7}\)|
Answer:
|3 \(\frac{6}{7}\)|=|\(\frac{27}{7}\)|=|3.8|
The Absolute value of |3.8| = 8
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 33.
|- 1.34|
Answer:
The Absolute value of|- 1.34|= 1.34
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Copy and complete the statement using <, > , or =.
Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 34
Answer:
The Absolute value of|-2|= 2
2 = 2

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 35
Answer:
The Absolute value of |4.4|= 4.4
The Absolute value of |- 2.8 |= 2.8

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 36
Answer:
The Absolute value of |\(\frac{1}{6}\)|= \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 0.16
The Absolute value of |-\(\frac{2}{9}\)| = \(\frac{2}{9}\) = 0.22
0.16 < 0.22

Order the values from least to greatest.
Question 37.
– 15, |- 21|, |19|, – 20, 25
Answer:
The Absolute value of |-21|= 21
The Absolute value of |19|= 19
– 15, 21, 19, – 20, 25
-20<-15<19<21<25

Question 38.
0, |- 1|, – 2, |2|, – 3
Answer:
The Absolute value of |-1|= 1
The Absolute value of |2|= 2
0, 1, – 2, 2, – 3
-3< -2 < 0 < 1 < 2

Question 39.
Simplify −|− 35 |.
Answer:
The Absolute value of |-35|= 35
−|− 35 |= -35

Question 40.
The latitude of Erie, Pennsylvania, is 42.129. The latitude of Sydney, Australia, is −33.865. Positive values of latitude are north of the equator, negative values of latitude are south of the equator, and the latitude of the equator is 0. Which city is closest to the equator?
Answer:
latitude of Erie, Pennsylvania = 42.129.
latitude of Sydney, Australia = −33.865.
42.129>0>-33.865
latitude of Sydney, Australia is closest to the Equator

8.5 The Coordinate Plane (pp. 369–376)
Learning Target: Plot and reflect ordered pairs in all four quadrants of a coordinate plane.

Write an ordered pair corresponding to the point.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 41
Question 41.
Point J
Answer:
The Point J is located at (-2,0)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is-2
The y- coordinate is 0

Question 42.
Point K
Answer:
The Point K is located at (-2,-4)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is -2
The y- coordinate is -4

Question 43.
Point L
Answer:
The Point L is located at (5,2)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is 5
The y- coordinate is 2

Question 44.
Point M
Answer:
The Point M is located at (-1,3)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is -1
The y- coordinate is 3

Question 45.
Point N
Answer:
The Point N is located at (3,-4)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is 3
The y- coordinate is -4

Question 46.
Point P
Answer:
The Point J is located at (1,0)
Explanation:
The x- coordinate is 1
The y- coordinate is 0

Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 47.
A (1, 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-47

X coordinate is 1
Y coordinate is 3
(1,3)
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 48.
B (0, 3)
Answer:
X coordinate is 0
Y coordinate is 3
(0,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-48
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 49.
C (4, 2)
Answer:
X coordinate is 4
Y coordinate is 2
C (4, 2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-49
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant I as X coordinate is Positive and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Question 50.
D (- 3, 1)
Answer:
X coordinate is -3
Y coordinate is 1
(-3,1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-50
Explanation:
It is marked in the Quadrant II as X coordinate is Negative and Y coordinate is Positive as shown in the graph.
Each point can be identified by an ordered pair of numbers; that is, a number on the x-axis called an x-coordinate, and a number on the y-axis called a y-coordinate. Ordered pairs are written in parentheses (x-coordinate, y-coordinate).

Reflect the point in (a) the x-axis and (b) the y-axis.
Question 51.
(4, 1)
Answer:
Plot (4,1) , (4,-1) and (-4,1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-51
Explanation:
To reflect (4,1) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 1 is -1
To reflect (4,1) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 1,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 4 is -4
So the reflection of (4,1)in the x-axis is (4,-1)
So the reflection of (4,1)in the y-axis is(-4,1)

Question 52.
(- 2, 3)
Answer:
Plot (- 2, 3) , (-2,-3) and (2,3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-52

Explanation:
To reflect (- 2, 3) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -2,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 3 is -3
To reflect (- 2, 3) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -2 is 2
So the reflection of (- 2, 3) in the x-axis is (-2,-3) 
So the reflection of(- 2, 3) in the y-axis is (2,3)

Question 53.
(2, – 5)
Answer:
Plot (2, – 5) , (2, 5) and (-2,-5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-53
Explanation:
To reflect (2, – 5) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 2,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -5 is 5
To reflect(2, – 5)in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 2 is -2
So the reflection of(2, – 5) in the x-axis is (2, 5)
So the reflection of (2, – 5) in the y-axis is(-2,-5)

Question 54.
(- 3.5, – 2.5)
Answer:
Plot (- 3.5, – 2.5), (- 3.5,  2.5) and (3.5, – 2.5)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-54
Explanation:
To reflect (- 3.5, – 2.5) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -3.5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -2.5 is 2.5
To reflect (- 3.5, – 2.5) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -2.5,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -3.5 is 3.5
So the reflection of (- 3.5, – 2.5) in the x-axis is (- 3.5,  2.5)
So the reflection of (- 3.5, – 2.5) in the y-axis is (3.5,  -2.5)

Reflect the point in the x-axis followed by the y-axis.
Question 55.
(1, 2)
Answer:
Plot (1,2) , (1,-2) and (-1,-2)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-55
Explanation:
To reflect (1,2) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 1,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 2 is -2
To reflect (1,-2) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -2,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 1 is -1
So the reflection of (1,2)  in the x-axis is (1,-2)
So the reflection of (1,-2) in the y-axis is(-1,-2)

Question 56.
(- 4, 6)
Answer:
Plot (- 4, 6) , (-4,-6) and (4, -6)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-56
Explanation:
To reflect (- 4, 6) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -4,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 6 is -6
To reflect (- 4, -6) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -6,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -4 is 4
So the reflection of (- 4, 6) in the x-axis is (-4,-6)
So the reflection of (-4,-6) in the y-axis is (4, -6)

Question 57.
(3, – 4)
Answer:
Plot (3, – 4) , (3,  4) and (-3,  4)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-57
Explanation: 
To reflect (3, – 4)in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -4 is 4
To reflect (3,  4) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 4,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate 3 is -3
So the reflection of (3, – 4) in the x-axis is (3,  4)
So the reflection of (3,  4) in the y-axis is (-3,  4)

Question 58.
(- 3, – 3)
Answer:
Plot (- 3, – 3) , (-3, 3) and (3, 3)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-58
Explanation:
To reflect (- 3, – 3)in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -3,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate -3 is 3
To reflect (-3, 3) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 3,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -3 is 3
So the reflection of (- 3, – 3) in the x-axis is (-3, 3)
So the reflection of(-3, 3) in the y-axis is (3, 3)

Question 59.
Use the map of the town.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 59
a. Which building is located at(−1, 1)?
b. Name a building on the positive x-axis.
c. In which quadrant is the bank located?
d. Write two different ordered pairs that represent the location of the train station.
e. You can find the original location of the movie theater by reflecting its location in the y-axis. What building is now in that location?
Answer a :
The Building which is located at (−1, 1) is Drug store

Answer b :
The building on the positive x-axis. is Hospital.

Answer c :
The bank located is located in Quadrant II.

Answer d :
The two different ordered pairs that represent the location of the train station are (-1,-3), (-2,-3)

Question 60.
Name the ordered pair that is 5 units right and 2 units down from (−3, 4).
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-60
Explanation:
The ordered pair is located at (-3,4) it is then moved to 5 units right and the 2 units down then the new point is located at ( 2, 2)

Question 61.
A point is reflected in the x-axis. The reflected point is (3, −9). What is the original point?
Answer:
The reflected point is (3, −9)
The point is (3 , 9)
Explanation: 
The reflected point in the x axis is (3, -9) It means x-axis reflection means it has same x coordinate and the y coordinate will be the opposite of the y-coordinate. when opposite is -9 then the y coordinate will be 9 .

8.6 Polygons in the Coordinate Plane (pp. 377–382)
Learning Target: Draw polygons in the coordinate plane and find distances between points in the coordinate plane.

Draw the polygon with the given vertices in a coordinate plane.
Question 62.
A (3, 2), B (4, 7), C (6, 0)
Answer:
Plot the given points .
The polygon formed after plotting given points is triangle.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-62

Question 63.
A (1, 2), B (1, – 7), C (5, – 7), D (8, 2)
Answer:
Plot the given points A (1, 2), B (1, – 7), C (5, – 7), D (8, 2)
The polygon formed is Trapezoid
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-question-7

Question 64.
E (−1, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)), F(1, 0), G(-2, 0), H(-4, -3\(\frac{1}{2}\))
Answer:
E (−1, 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)) = E (−1, \(\frac{7}{2}\)) = E ( -1, 3.5)
H(-4, -3\(\frac{1}{2}\)) = H(-4, –\(\frac{7}{2}\)) = H ( -4, – 3.5)
Plot the points E ( -1, 3.5), F(1, 0), G(-2, 0), H ( -4, – 3.5).
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-64

Find the distance between the points.
Question 65.
(4, – 2), (4, – 5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-65

Answer:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same x-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the y coordinate.
|-5| – |-2| = 3
So the distance between the points (4, – 2), (4, – 5) is 3

Question 66.
(7, 2), (- 4, 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-66

Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-4| + |7| = 4 + 7 = 11
So the distance between the points (7, 2), (- 4, 2) is 11

Question 67.
(- 1, 6), (- 1, – 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-67
Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in different Quadrants and have same X-coordinates. The distance between the points is the sum  of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|6| + |-3| = 6 + 3 = 9
So the distance between the points (- 1, 6), (- 1, – 3) is 9

Question 68.
(- 5, – 8) , (- 9, – 8)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-68
Explanation:
Plot the points.
The points are in same Quadrants and have same y-coordinates. The distance between the points is the difference between the points is the difference of the absolute values of the x coordinate.
|-9| – |-5| = 9 – 5 = 4
So the distance between the points (- 5, – 8) , (- 9, – 8) is 4

Find the perimeter and the area of the polygon with the given vertices.
Question 69.
T (2, 7), U (2, 9), V (5, 9), W(5, 7)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-69
Explanation:
Plot the given points
The polygon formed is rectangle.
The length of the rectangle = 3 units
The breadth of the rectangle = 2 units
Area of the Rectangle = length × Breadth = 3 × 2 = 6 sq.units

Question 70.
P (4, – 3), Q (4, 2), R (9, 2), S (9, -3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-70
Explanation:
Plot the given points
The polygon formed is Square.
Side of the square = 5
Area of the Square = side × side = 5 × 5 = 25 sq.units

Question 71.
W (- 12, – 2), X (- 12, 13), Y (5, 13), Z (5, – 2)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-71
Explanation:
Plot the given points
The polygon formed is rectangle.
The length of the rectangle = 17 units
The breadth of the rectangle = 15 units
Area of the Rectangle = length × Breadth = 17 × 15 = 255 sq.units

Question 72.
You design the quilt shown using a coordinate plane in which the coordinates are measured in inches. The vertices of the quilt are (−3, 5), (−3, −7), (9, 5), and (9, −7).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 72
a. Find the perimeter and the area of the quilt.
b. The quilt is made of identical-sized square pieces. What is the area of one of the square pieces?
Answer a :
The polygon formed is Square
Side of the square = 12
Perimeter of the square = 4 × side = 4 × 12 = 48 units
Area of the square = side × side = 12 × 12 = 144 sq units

Answer b :
Here the polygon is square
As per given figure we can see that 12 small squares are formed inside the square.
Total Side of the square = 12
The side is having 4 squares. to find the side of small square we should divide side of big square by 4
Side of small square  = 12 ÷ 4 = 3
Side of small square = 3
Area of small square = side × side = 3 × 3 = 9 sq units

Question 73.
Draw a rectangle with a perimeter of 14 units in a coordinate plane where the vertices are in two quadrants.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-73
The length of the rectangle = 4 units
The breadth of the rectangle = 3 units

Question 74.
Draw a triangle with an area of 21 square units in a coordinate plane where the vertices are not all in the same quadrant.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers,-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-74

8.7 Writing and Graphing Inequalities (pp. 383 – 390)
Learning Target: Write inequalities and represent solutions of inequalities on a number line.

Write the word sentence as an inequality.
Question 75.
A number m is less than 5.
Answer:
m < 5

Question 76.
Three times a number h is at least − 12.
Answer:
3h ≥ – 12

Tell whether x = 8 is a solution of the inequality.
Question 77.
\(\frac{x}{2}\) ≥ 3
Answer:
\(\frac{x}{2}\) ≥ 3
Multiply by 2 on both sides we get,
x ≥ 6
Put x = 8 then
8 ≥ 6 is true.
So the given number is a solution for the inequality equation.

Question 78.
13 – x > 5
Answer:
13 – x > 5
subtract 13 on both sides we get
– x > -8
Mutlipy by – on both sides we get,
x > 8
Put x= 8 we get,
8 > 8 is wrong.
8 cant be the solution for the inequality equation .

Question 79.
19 > 2x
Answer:
19 > 2x
Divide by 2 on both sides we get,
9.5 > x
put x = 8 we get,
9.5 > 8 is true.
So the 8 is the solution for the inequality equation .

Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 80.
x < 0
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-80

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 81.
a ≥ 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-81

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 82.
n ≤ – 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-82
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 83.
The speed limit on a road is 35 miles per hour. Write and graph an inequality that represents the legal speeds on the road.
Answer:
Speed limit = S = 35 miles per hour
S ≤ 35
Speed should be 35 or less but not greater than 35 .
Below graph shows the speed limit
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-83
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 84.
Write an inequality and a word sentence that represent the graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 84
Answer:
x < 3
You lose 3$ in a match .

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

8.8 Solving Inequalities (pp. 391–398)
Learning Target: Write and solve inequalities.

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 85.
x + 1 > 3
Answer:
x + 1 > 3
subtract 1 on both sides we get,
x > 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-85
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 86.
y + 8 ≥ 9
Answer:
y + 8 ≥ 9
subtract 8 on both sides we get,
y ≥ 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-86
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 87.
k – 7 ≤ 0
Answer:
k – 7 ≤ 0
Add 7 on both side we get,
k ≤ 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-87
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 88.
9n ≥ 63
Answer:
9n ≥ 63
Divide 9 on both sides we get,
n ≥ 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-88
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 89.
24 < 11 + x
Answer:
24 < 11 + x
subtract 11 on both sides we get,
13 < x
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-89
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 90.
x ÷ 2 < 4
Answer:
x ÷ 2 < 4
Multiply by 2 on both sides we get,
x < 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-90
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 91. 4 ≤ n – 4
Answer:
4 ≤ n – 4
Add 4 on both sides we get,
8 ≤ n
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-91
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 92.
10p > 40
Answer:
10p > 40
Divide 10 on both sides we get,
p > 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-92
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 93
s – 1.5 < 2.5
Answer:
s – 1.5 < 2.5
Add 1.5 on both sides we get,
s < 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-93
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 94.
\(\frac{5}{3}\)x ≤ 10
Answer:
\(\frac{5}{3}\)x ≤ 10
Multiply by \(\frac{3}{5}\) on both sides we get,
x ≤ 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-94
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 95.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + m ≤ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + m ≤ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
0.25 + m ≤ 0.5
Subtract 0.25 on both sides we get,
m ≤ 0.25
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-95
Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 96.
\(\frac{3}{11}\)k < 15
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{11}\)k < 15
multiply by \(\frac{11}{3}\) on both sides we get,
k < 55
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Connecting-Concepts-Question-96
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 97.
Write two inequalities that have the same solution set and can be solved using different operations.
Answer:
s – 15 < 25
4s  < 160
These are two equations which have same set of solutions that is s < 40.

Question 98.
You have $15 to spend on a ticket to a movie and snacks. Find the possible amounts you can spend on snacks.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane crr 98
Answer:
Total Amount with me = $15
Cost of movie theater = $ 6
Cost of snacks = $15 – $6 =$ 9
Possible amount can spend on snacks can be lesser than or equal to $9.

Question 99.
You want to use a square section of your yard for a chicken pen. You have at most 52 feet of fencing to form the pen. Find the possible lengths of each side of the chicken pen.
Answer:
fencing area of the pen = 52 feet.
Fencing is around the square borders which means it is the perimeter of the square
Perimeter of the square = 4 × side = 52
side = 52 ÷ 4 =13
Possible lengths of each side of the chicken pen = 13 feet.

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Practice Test

Order the values from least to greatest.
Question 1.
0, – 2, 3, 1, – 4
Answer:
0, – 2, 3, 1, – 4
-4<-2<0<1<3
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 2.
– 8, |- 3|, |5|, 4, – 5
Answer:
Absolute values of |- 3| = 3 and  |5|= 5
– 8, 3, 5, 4, – 5
-8<-5<3<4<5
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 3.
– 2.46, – 2.5, – 2, 1, – 2.293
Answer:
– 2.46, – 2.5, – 2, 1, – 2.293
-2.5<-2.46<-2.293<-2.1
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Graph the number and its opposite.
Question 14.
23
Answer:
The opposite of 23 is – 23.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-14

Question 15.
– 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Answer:
– 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\) = – \(\frac{4}{3}\) = – 1.3
The opposite of -1.3 is 1.3.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-15

Find the absolute value.
Question 16.
|7|
Answer:
The absolute value of |7| = 7
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x . All absolute values are positive.

Question 17.
|- 11|
Answer:
The Absolute value of |- 11| = 11
Explanation:
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x . All absolute values are positive.

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.
Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pt 8
Answer:
–\(\frac{2}{3}\) = -0.66
–\(\frac{3}{5}\) = – 0.6
– 0.66 < – 0.6
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pt 9
Answer:
Absolute value of |2.5| is 2.5
2.5 = 2.5

Plot the ordered pair in a coordinate plane. Describe the location of the point.
Question 20.
J (4, 0)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-20

Question 21.
L (1.5, – 3.5)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-21

Question 22.
M (- 2, – 3)
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-22

Question 23.
Reflect (- 5, 1) in (a) the x-axis, (b) the y -axis, and (c) the y -axis followed by the -axis.
Plot the points (- 5, 1) , (-5, -1), (5, 1) and (5, -1)
Answer a :
(- 5, 1)
Explanation:
To reflect(- 5, 1) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 1 is -1
So the reflection of (- 5, 1) in the x-axis is (-5, -1)
Answer b :
Explanation:
To reflect (- 5, 1) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, 1,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -5 is 5
So the reflection of (- 5, 1) in the x-axis is (5, 1)
Answer c :
To reflect(- 5, 1) in the x axis, use the same x-coordinate, -5,the opposite of the y coordinate.The opposite of y coordinate 1 is -1
To reflect (- 5, -1) in the y axis, use the same y-coordinate, -1,the opposite of the x coordinate.The opposite of x coordinate -5 is 5
So the reflection of (- 5, 1) in the x-axis is (-5, -1)
So the reflection of (- 5, -1) in the y-axis is (5, -1)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-23

Graph the inequality on a number line.
Question 24.
x ≥ 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-24

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 25.
m ≤ – 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-25

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 26.
x – 3 < 7
Answer:
x – 3 < 7
Add 3 on both sides we get,
x < 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-26
Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 27.
12 ≥ n + 6
Answer:
12 ≥ n + 6
Subtract 6 on both sides we get,
6 ≥ n
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-27

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 28.
\(\frac{4}{3}\)b ≤ 12
Answer:
\(\frac{4}{3}\)b ≤ 12
Multiply \(\frac{3}{4}\) on both sides we get,
b ≤ 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-28

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 29.
72 < 12p
Answer:
72 < 12p
Divide by 12 on both sides we get,
6 < p
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-29

Explanation:
Use a open circle that is not a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 30.
A hurricane has wind speeds that are greater than or equal to 74 miles per hour. Write an inequality that represents the possible wind speeds during a hurricane.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pt 20
Answer:
Wind speed is greater than or equal to 74 miles per hour .
w ≥ 74

Question 31.
Two vertices of a triangle are F (1, – 4) and G(6, – 4). Find two possible points that represent the third vertex so that the triangle has an area of 20 square units.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-31
Explanation:
The possible two vertices are H(6,0) and D(6,-8).
Area of triangle = 20 ( Base × Height)
When base is 5 units from graph after plotting the given points it will be known
we have to mark H and D so that the height of triangle should have 4 units ( 20 ÷ 5) .

Question 32.
The table shows the melting points (in degrees Celsius) of several elements. Compare the melting point of mercury to the melting point of each of the other elements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane pt 22
Answer:
Mercury > Randon
-38.83 > -71
Mercury < Bromine
-38.38 < -7.2
Mercury < Cesium
-38.38 < 28.5
Mercury <Francium
-38.38 < 27

Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 1
Question 1.
What is the value of the expression when a = 6, b = 5, and c = 4?
8a – 3c + 5b
A. 11
B. 53
C. 61
D. 107
Answer:
8a – 3c + 5b
Take a = 6, b = 5, and c = 4
8×6 -3×4 + 5×5
= 48 – 12 + 25
=48 +13
=61
Option C is correct

Question 2.
Point p is plotted in the coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 2
What are the coordinates of point?
F. (- 5, – 3)
G. (- 5, 3)
H. (- 3, – 5)
I. (3, – 5)
Answer:
P(-5,3)
The x- coordinate is -5
The y coordinate is 3

Question 3.
What is the value of that makes the equation true?
a + 6 = 18
Answer:
a + 6 = 18
a = 18 – 6
a = 12
When a = 12 then the equation becomes true.

Question 4.
Which list of values is in order from least to greatest?
A. 2, |- 3|, |4|, – 6
B. – 6, |4| , 2, |- 3|
C. – 6, |- 3| , 2, |4|
D. – 6, 2, |- 3|, |4|
Answer:
Option D
-6, 2, |- 3|, |4|
Absolute values of |- 3|is 3 and  |4| is 4
so we get the order as.
-6, 2, 3, 4

Question 5.
What is the height of the parallelogram?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 5
F. 6 meters
G. 12 meters
H. 75 meters
I. 1350 meters
Answer:
Area of the parallelogram = 90sq mtrs.
Base of the parallelogram = 15m
Area of the parallelogram = Base × Height
Height of the parallelogram = 90 ÷ 15 = 6 metres.

Question 6.
Which property is illustrated by the statement?
4 + (6 + n) = (4 + 6) + n
A. Associative Property of Addition
B. Commutative Property of Addition
C. Associative Property of Multiplication
D. Distributive Property
Answer:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.

Question 7.
Which number line shows the graph of x ≥ 5?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 7
Answer:
Number line F shows x ≥ 5.

Explanation:
Use a closed circle that is a solution . shade the number line where you found the solutions. Every number on the shaded arrow is solutions of the inequality. so there are infinitely many solutions.

Question 8.
Which number is the greatest?
A. \(\frac{7}{8}\)
B. 0.86
C. \(\frac{22}{25}\)
D. 85%
Answer:
A. \(\frac{7}{8}\) = 0.875
B. 0.86
C. \(\frac{22}{25}\) =0.88
D. 85% = 0.85
Option is the greatest number 0.88

Question 9.
What is the area of the shaded region?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 9
F. 23 units2
G. 40 units2
H. 48 units2
I. 60 units2
Answer:
Area of the Rectangle = Length × Breadth = 7 × 8 =56 units2
Area of the triangle = base × Height = 4 × 4 =16 units2
Area of the shaded region = Area of the rectangle – Area of the Triangle = 56 – 16 = 40 units2

Question 10.
Write 23.5% as a decimal.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 10
Answer:
23.5% when % is removed we should divide the number by 100
23.5 ÷ 100 = 0.235 .
The decimal point is moved two points to the left .

Question 11.
Use grid paper to complete the following.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 11
Part A Draw an x-axis and a y-axis of a coordinate plane. Then plot and label the point (2, 3).
Part B Plot and label four points that are 3 units away from (2, – 3).
Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane- Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Cumulative-Practice-Question-11

Question 12.
What is the perimeter of the rectangle with the vertices shown below?
A (- 4, – 1), B (- 4, 7), C (1, 7), D (1, – 1)
A. 8 units
B. 13 units
C. 26 units
D. 40 units
Answer:
Option C = 26 units
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane- Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Cumulative-Practice-Question-12
Explanation:
From the graph we know
length of the rectangle = 8
Breadth of the rectangle =5
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2 ( length + breadth) = 2 ( 8 + 5) = 2 ( 13) = 26 units

Question 13.
Which net does not form a cube?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 8 Integers, Number Lines, and the Coordinate Plane cp 13
Answer:
2, 3, 5, 10, 11 and 16 cannot make a cube and they are non-nets.
Option G does not form a cube.

Question 14.
Which value of makes the equation true?
\(\frac{3}{4}\)y = 12
A. 9
B. 11\(\frac{1}{4}\)
C. 12\(\frac{3}{4}\)
D. 16
Answer:
Option A is correct
Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\)y = 12
Divide by \(\frac{4}{3}\) on both sides we get,
y = 9